TM 9-2330-381-13

TM 9-2330-381-13
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR
SEMITRAILER, TRANSPORTER, HEAVY EQUIPMENT

70 TON, M1000
NSN 2330-01-303-8832 (EIC: CXU)
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

OCTOBER 2009
TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING SUMMARY
INTRODUCTION
This warning summary contains general safety warnings and hazardous material warnings that must be understood and
applied during operation and maintenance of this equipment. Failure to observe these precautions could result in serious injury
or death to personnel. Also included are explanations of safety and hazardous material icons used within the technical manual.
FIRST AID
First aid can be defined as “urgent and immediate lifesaving and other measures, which can be performed for casualties by
nonmedical personnel when medical personnel are not immediately available.” For first aid, refer to FM 4-25.11, First Aid.
a
TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED
EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS
EAR PROTECTION – Headphones over ears shows that noise level will harm ears.
ELECTRICAL – Electrical wire to arm with electricity symbol running through human
body shows that shock hazard is present.
ELECTRICAL – Electrical wire to hand with electricity symbol running through hand
shows that shock hazard is present.
FALLING PARTS – Arrow bouncing off human shoulder and head shows that falling
parts present a danger to life or limb.
FLYING PARTICLES – Arrows bouncing off face shows that particles flying through
the air will harm face.
FLYING PARTICLES – Arrows bouncing off face with face shield shows that particles
flying through the air will harm face.
HEAVY OBJECT – Human figure stooping over heavy object shows physical injury
potential from improper lifting technique.
HEAVY PARTS – Hand with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush
and harm.
HEAVY PARTS – Foot with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush
and harm.
b
TM 9-2330-381-13
HEAVY PARTS – Heavy object on human figure shows that heavy parts present
a danger to life or limb.
HEAVY PARTS – Heavy object pinning human figure against wall shows that heavy,
moving parts present a danger to life or limb.
HELMET PROTECTION – Arrow bouncing off head with helmet shows that falling
parts present a danger.
HOT AREA – Hand over object radiating heat shows that part is hot and can burn.
LASER LIGHT – Laser light hazard symbol indicates extreme danger for eyes from
laser beams and reflections.
MOVING PARTS – Human figure with an arm caught between gears shows that the
moving parts of the equipment present a danger to life or limb.
MOVING PARTS – Hand with fingers caught between gears shows that the moving
parts of the equipment present a danger to life or limb.
MOVING PARTS – Hand with fingers caught between rollers shows that the moving
parts of the equipment present a danger to life or limb.
SHARP OBJECT – Pointed object in hand shows that a sharp object presents
a danger to limb.
SHARP OBJECT – Pointed object in hand shows that a sharp object presents
a danger to limb.
c
TM 9-2330-381-13
SHARP OBJECT – Pointed object in foot shows that a sharp object presents a
danger to limb.
SLICK FLOOR – Wavy line on floor with legs prone shows that slick floor presents a
danger for falling.
GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION
WARNING
If injury occurs, obtain medical care immediately. Extreme heat, humidity, and
contact with hydraulic fluids can cause infection, even from a light cut or scratch.
For first aid, refer to FM 21-11.
WARNING
DO NOT wear watches, rings, or other jewelry that could cause a short in battery terminal while
servicing battery. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Always disconnect negative (black) cable first, and connect negative (black) cable last.
Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Many of the assemblies and components of the semitrailer are heavy. Always use the required
number of personnel and appropriate lifting supporting devices as specified in the initial
setup. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
When on top of the gooseneck, always hold onto semitrailer with one hand to avoid falling.
d
TM 9-2330-381-13
Two personnel are required for coupling. During hookup, the operator of the tractor must know the
position of the spotter at all times. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
All spotters and ground personnel around the tractor/semitrailer must stand clear of the vehicles
during uncoupling. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Ensure the person who is adjusting the steering wedge adjusting nut is clear when the steering
wedge is cycled back and forth. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Prior to adjusting gooseneck height, pull out both gooseneck isolation and
suspension SHUTOFF valve handles to the ADJUST position. Failure to follow
this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Prior to moving the tractor from under the gooseneck, place the gooseneck isolation
valve handle in the ADJUST position, handle pulled outward. Failure to follow
DO NOT uncouple tractor/semitrailer if tractor has less than normal operating air pressure,
approximately 100 to 120 psi (689.5 to 827 kPa), or the semitrailer will not have sufficient air
pressure to apply or release brakes. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
e
TM 9-2330-381-13
DO NOT uncouple a loaded semitrailer from the tractor for purposes of performing maintenance
tasks on the semitrailer. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
If the semitrailer is uncoupled from the tractor, and the gooseneck needs adjusting,
verify that the front support legs are lowered and supporting the platform. Failure
to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
If the semitrailer is uncoupled from the tractor, and the gooseneck needs adjusting, ensure that
both gooseneck isolation and suspension shutoff valve handles have been pulled outward to
the ADJUST position. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
If the semitrailer is uncoupled from the tractor, ensure both streetside and curbside front bogie
wheels of the semitrailer are chocked. After the parking brakes are released, the semitrailer
may roll uncontrolled. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
If the semitrailer is coupled to a tractor, pull the suspension shutoff and gooseneck
isolation valve handles outward to the ADJUST position and uncouple the semitrailer.
If the semitrailer is coupled to a tractor, the gooseneck isolation valve handle must be in
the RUN position, handle pushed in. If the semitrailer is uncoupled, and the gooseneck
needs adjusting, verify that front support legs are lowered and supporting the platform
and that all personnel are clear of the gooseneck before operating the gooseneck isolation
valve. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
f
TM 9-2330-381-13
Before performing any maintenance on the platform, lower the front and rear support
legs. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
When lowering the support legs, ensure that feet and hands are clear of the support leg feet as
they near the ground. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
When lowering or raising the front support legs, always install the retaining pins. Failure
Unlike conventional semitrailers, this semitrailer tracks the same turning radius as the
M1070 tractor and does not cut the inside turning radius. When making turns, the
operator needs to make tighter turns to keep the semitrailer from hitting the outer curb.
Using the M911 or M1070 tractor, the semitrailer will not back like a normal semitrailer because
of the semitrailer’s steering system. The operator must back tractor/semitrailer by turning
tractor steering wheel in opposite direction of what would be used for backing with a normal
semitrailer. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Because of minor loading ability while driving with a disabled bogie, especially when carrying a
payload, turning speeds must be reduced to 85 percent of the maximum safe turning speeds.
Example: A 15 mph (24 kph) maximum turn speed should be reduced to 13 mph (21 kph)
maximum turn speed. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
When manually steering the semitrailer, make many starts and stops to give spotter
time to adjust steering. The tractor operator should allow even space on both sides of
the tractor so that the spotter steering the semitrailer has room to make adjustments.
Precaution must be exercised during highway travel to ensure that all bridges and underpasses
can be negotiated. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
g
TM 9-2330-381-13
When towing a payload, check security of load and tighten tiedowns at every rest and
maintenance stop. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
DO NOT under any circumstances exceed the following speeds: Highway 45 mph
(72 km/h), Secondary 40 mph (64 km/h), and Off-road 15 mph (24 km/h). Failure to
follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
DO NOT enter water at more than walking speed of 5 mph (8 kph) with an entrance or exit slope
of more than 15 percent. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
DO NOT enter water deeper than 28 in. (71 cm), including wave height. Failure to
DO NOT enter water that has ice or debris on the surface. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injury to personnel.
Always check the stream bottom to determine that it is firm enough to support
the semitrailer and that there are no obstacles under water. Failure to follow
DO NOT enter water that has a current velocity of more than 5 mph (8 kph). This is equivalent to
7 ft per second (2 m/s). Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
When the ramp stow chains are disconnected from the platform, DO NOT stand behind
the ramps or near the path the ramps can travel when being lowered or raised. Failure
The spring-assisted ramps, when raised from the lowered position, are under extreme
tension and raise very quickly. When raising ramps, DO NOT stand on the beavertail
or in the path where any portion of the ramp will travel during upward travel. Failure
h
TM 9-2330-381-13
When ramps are lowered and near the horizontal position, the springs are fully compressed and
under extreme pressure. DO NOT attempt to adjust or remove the spring mechanism unless ramps
are in the raised (stow) position. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
If possible, provide ample clear space behind the disabled payload during loading/
unloading in case the cables break while the payload is being loaded/unloaded.
Ensure all ground personnel stand clear of winch cables except when handling the cables.
Ensure winch cables are not kinked, clevises are secured to winch cables, and
snatch blocks and shackles are in good condition and properly secured. Failure to
Ensure winch cables are inspected in accordance with TB 43-0142. Failure to follow
Exercise extreme caution during any operation on a slope. Failure to follow

A ground spotter must stand curbside of the semitrailer and maintain visual contact with the winch
operator. The spotter must observe cables, snatch blocks, shackles, and payload position during
loading/unloading operations. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
i
TM 9-2330-381-13
During winch-on operations on a downgrade, the payload must be restrained from the
rear with some other vehicle to prevent possible loss of control of the payload. Failure
DO NOT overload tractor winches. Know the rating of the winches being used
and be aware of any protection devices (such as shear pins). Failure to follow
DO NOT stand on the semitrailer platform. At no time during any loading/unloading operations
while the payload is being pulled on and/or off with winches should personnel be on the
semitrailer platform. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Two spotters are required for able payload loading/unloading operations. The
payload operator must know the position of spotters at all times. Failure to follow
DO NOT position a spotter on the gooseneck if the payload is to be backed onto the semitrailer
platform. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Always wear leather gloves when handling cable. Never allow cable to run through hands.
A spotter is required for disabled payload loading/unloading operations. The winch

operator must maintain visual contact with the spotter at all times. Failure to follow
j
TM 9-2330-381-13
Whenever possible, load/unload the semitrailer on level ground. In adverse conditions,

loading/unloading can be done on grades up to 10 percent with a maximum offset angle of 10
degrees between tractor and semitrailer. Avoid exceeding these limitations to prevent payload
from rolling on/off semitrailer. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Due to semitrailers being outfitted with various chain link sizes, 1/2 in. (1.27 cm) and/or
3/4 in. (1.9 cm), all chains must be inventoried in the platform storage compartment prior to
placing chains on the platform. Once chains are inventoried, read and become familiar with
the procedures to determine tiedown needed to properly secure the payload. Failure
Winch operator and spotter must be completely familiar with the sequence of steps prior to
using winches. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Unnecessary personnel must stand well clear of the vehicles, especially behind the payload
(engine/turbine exhaust) during loading/unloading operations. At no time during any
loading/unloading operation while the payload is moving should personnel be on the semitrailer
platform. The payload operator must drive the payload slowly up or down the loading ramps and
onto the platform or ground. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Failure to extend the safety rail while attaching or removing payload winch cable may cause
injury to personnel. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
DO NOT disconnect the winch cable until the platform is level and the payload is chocked.
Use extreme caution when removing winch cables from the payload. Cable may be under
tension or may be twisted. If winch cable has tension when removed, slowly and carefully,
using both hands, rotate cable to relieve tension. DO NOT allow cable to twist or whip
freely. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
k
TM 9-2330-381-13
Ensure the winch cable is disconnected from gooseneck fairlead before moving tractor/semitrailer
combination, or as the combination is moved, the winch cable may stretch and/or break.
Winch operator must try to maintain even tension on both winch cables during entire
off-loading procedure. Payload adjustments and side-to-side turning must be kept to a
minimum. Spotter must notify winch operator of any required payload adjustments while
unloading. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Before performing lubrication procedures on the semitrailer, raise platform to highest

position; lower front and rear support legs; and close all isolation valves. Failure
Drain air system prior to disconnecting pneumatic lines to prevent inadvertent

operation of the semitrailer brake valve during platform adjustments. Failure to
Steering and suspension system hydraulic lines are under pressure even when Auxiliary
Power Unit (APU) is not running. DO NOT attempt to tighten, loosen, adjust, or repair
fitting, line, or hoses until the semitrailer is supported by support legs and all pressure is
relieved. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Use the gooseneck support prior to removing any hydraulic hoses from either of the gooseneck
cylinders, or the gooseneck may fall. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
l
TM 9-2330-381-13
Prior to bleeding steering cylinders, lower all four support legs to support the platform.
The air filter assembly has an internal spring that, when assembled, is under pressure. Use caution
when removing the housing nut. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Ensure all four support legs are lowered and supporting the platform before operating
the gooseneck isolation valve or any suspension isolation valve. Failure to follow
Prior to inspection, if the platform was raised, no one shall go under the semitrailer
unless all suspension isolation valves have been closed. Failure to follow
Personnel used to remove/maneuver the axle or parking brake chamber must not at any time use
the caging bolt as a holding lifting device. The caging bolt is held in place by pressure from a
spring in the brake chamber. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Hearing protection is required within 10 ft (3.1 m) of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) when
the APU is running. Use eye and ear protection and protective gloves when inspecting the
APU while it is running, or injury could result from moving parts, excessive noise level, and
engine heat. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
m
TM 9-2330-381-13
When checking for leaks, never open any type of fluid-holding tanks during operation
or while the APU is under pressure. Give the systems time to cool before attempting
to make any fluid checks or severe burns from the spraying of hot fluids may result.
Remove all jewelry such as rings, dog tags, bracelets, etc., when jump-starting
the APU. Wearing jewelry may result in electrical shock. Failure to follow this
Ensure that vented dummy coupling is installed on the emergency (red) gladhand prior
to releasing brakes with the brake release valve. If a nonvented dummy coupling is
installed, the parking brakes cannot be reapplied and injury to personnel may result.
On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in
front of spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to
step on it or trip over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Always use a snap-on chuck, an extension air hose, 10 ft (3.1 m) minimum, and an in-line
pneumatic tire inflator gauge. Stay out of the sidewall trajectory area when inflating tires that are
mounted on the M1000 semitrailer. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Always follow proper tire insulation procedures and warnings. Failure to follow
Before breaking tire bead, ensure no air pressure remains in tire. Failure to follow
DO NOT use retread tires on the M1000 semitrailer. Only tires listed in TM 9-2330-381-24P,
Repair Parts and Special Tools List (RPSTL), are authorized for use. Failure to follow
this warning may result in tire failure and injury to personnel.
n
TM 9-2330-381-13
Tires may explode. Place wheel and tire in safety cage before inflating. Stay back at least
10 ft (3.1 m) from cage when inflating tire. Always stay out of the trajectory area. Always
use an air hose extension, 10 ft (3.1 m) minimum, a snap-on chuck, and an in-line inflator
gauge. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
When wheel/tire assembly is in safety cage, DO NOT lean against, stand on, or reach over
or in the cage. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Never inflate tire over 40 psi (276 kPa) to seat bead. If beads DO NOT seat, deflate, demount, and
check the tire/wheel match. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow system to cool before
performing maintenance. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
o
TM 9-2330-381-13
EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS
BIOLOGICAL – Abstract symbol bug shows that a material may contain bacteria or
viruses that present a danger to life or health.
CHEMICAL – Drops of liquid on hand shows that the material will cause burns or
irritation to human skin or tissue.
CRYOGENIC – Hand in block of ice shows that the material is extremely cold and
can injure human skin or tissue.
EXPLOSION – Rapidly expanding symbol shows that the material may explode if
subjected to high temperatures, sources of ignition, or high pressure.
EYE PROTECTION – Person with goggles shows that the material will injure the
eyes.
FIRE – Flames shows that a material may ignite and cause burns.
POISON – Skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or is a danger

to life.
RADIATION – Three circular wedges shows that the material emits radioactive
energy and can injure human tissue.
VAPOR – Human figure in a cloud shows that material vapors present a danger to
life or health.
p
TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
The battery contains sulfuric acid, which may cause severe eye injury, skin burns, and damage to clothing.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing and avoid spilling any acid. If contact occurs, flush affected areas
immediately with large quantities of water and seek medical attention. Failure to follow this warning may result
in injury to personnel.
WARNING
The battery gives off hydrogen gas, which is explosive. DO NOT smoke or allow any flames in the vicinity while
checking or filling the battery. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
A frozen or completely discharged battery can explode if power is applied. Before connecting any form of external
power to the battery, ensure frozen battery is warmed, or discharged battery is replaced. Failure to follow this
WARNING
Welding and brazing operations produce heat, toxic fumes, radiation, metal slag, and carbon particles. Welding
and brazing goggles with properly tinted lenses are required. Also required are gloves, apron, and welding boots.
q
TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Always wear safety goggles when using compressed air to prevent dirt and debris from entering your eyes.
Compressed air stream must be less than 30 psi (207 kPa). Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to
personnel.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Wear long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face shield. If hydraulic
fluid gets in eyes, flush eyes immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on skin,
wash thoroughly with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking. Failure to follow this
WARNING
Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly. Failure to follow this warning may result
r
TM 9-2330-381-13

WARNING
SOLVENT CLEANING COMPOUND (DRY CLEANING SOLVENT)
• Solvent cleaning compound MIL-PRF-680 Type ll and Type lll may be irritating to the eyes and skin. Use
protective gloves and goggles. Use in well-ventilated areas. Use respirator as needed. Accidental ingestion may
cause irritation of digestive tract and respiratory tract, may cause lung and central nervous system damage, and
may be fatal if swallowed. Inhalation of high/massive concentrations may cause coma or may be fatal. First aid
for ingestion: do not induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. First aid for skin contact: remove
contaminated clothing. Wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention.
First aid for eye contact: flush with water for 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. If symptoms persist, seek
medical attention. First aid for inhalation: move to fresh air. If not breathing, provide artificial respiration. If
symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Keep away from open flames and other sources of ignition.
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141 to 198°F (61 to 92°C) and for Type lll it is 200
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
• Improper cleaning methods and use of unauthorized cleaning solvents may injure personnel and damage
equipment.
• Fire extinguishers should be placed nearby when using solvent cleaning compound.
• Cloths or rags saturated with solvent cleaning compound must be disposed of in accordance with authorized
facilities’ procedures.
• Eye shields must be worn when cleaning with a wire brush. Flying rust and metal particles may cause injury.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
s
TM 9-2330-381-13

WARNING
If Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) exposure is suspected, all air filter media should be handled by
personnel wearing protective equipment. Consult your unit NBC Officer or NBC NCO for appropriate handling
or disposal instructions. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Compressed air used for cleaning/drying creates airborne particles that may injure the eyes. Always wear eye
protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa). Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to
personnel.
WARNIN
G WARNING
Technical alcohol is used to clean parts and is potentially dangerous to personnel and property. Extinguish all
smoking materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flames near work area. Use skin and eye protection and
work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Cleaning compound solvent is used to clean parts and is potentially dangerous to personnel. Extinguish all smoking
materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flame near the work area. Use skin and eye protection and work in a
well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
t
TM 9-2330-381-13
Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid explosion and
injury to personnel, extinguish all smoking materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flame near the fuel tank
or the fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning
may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Clean up fuel that spilled during fuel line removal. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Fluorescent penetrant may cause injury to personnel. Avoid skin contact. In case of skin contact, wash with warm
water and soap. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Avoid breathing these fumes. Work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this
u/v blank
TM 9-2330-381-13
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES

NOTE: The portion of text affected by the change is indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margins of the page.
Changes to illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the title. Zero in the "Change No."
column indicates an original page or work package.
Date of issue for original manual is:

Original . . . . . . . . . . 30 October 2009
THE TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS AND THE TOTAL NUMBER OF
WORK PACKAGES IN THIS MANUAL IS 170, CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page/ WP Change Page/WP Change
Front Cover .............................................................................0 Blank .......................................................................................0

Blank .......................................................................................0 WP0028 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
Warning Summary (22 pgs) ...................................................0 WP0029 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0
Title block ...............................................................................0 WP0030 (16 pgs) ...................................................................0
Blank .......................................................................................0 WP0031 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
iii-xxxiii (22 pgs) ....................................................................0 WP0032 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
xxiv Blank...............................................................................0 WP0033 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
Chapter 1 title page .................................................................0 Chapter 4 title page .................................................................0
Blank .......................................................................................0 Blank .......................................................................................0
WP0001 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0034 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0002 (12 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0035 (70 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0003 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 Chapter 5 title page .................................................................0
Chapter 2 title page .................................................................0 Blank .......................................................................................0
Blank .......................................................................................0 WP0036 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0004 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0037 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0005 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0038 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0006 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0039 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0007 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0040 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0008 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0041 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0009 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0042 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0010 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0043 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0011 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0044 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0012 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0045 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0013 (16 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0046 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0014 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0047 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0015 (24 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0048 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0016 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0049 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0017 (28 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0050 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0018 (36 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0051 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0019 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0052 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0020 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0053 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0021 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0054 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0022 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0055 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0023 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0056 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0024 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0057 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0025 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0058 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0026 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0059 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0027 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0060 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
Chapter 3 title page .................................................................0 WP0061 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
A
TM 9-2330-381-13
WP0062 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0121 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0

WP0063 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0122 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0064 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0123 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0065 (20 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0124 (24 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0066 (18 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0125 (16 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0067 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0126 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0068 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0127 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0069 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0128 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0070 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0129 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0071 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0130 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0072 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0131 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0073 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0132 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0074 (28 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0133 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0075 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0134 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0076 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0135 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0077 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0136 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0078 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0137 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0079 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0138 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0080 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0139 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0081 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0140 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0082 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0141 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0083 (12 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0142 ( 6 pgs) ....................................................................0
WP0084 (12 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0143 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0085 (16 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0144 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0086 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0145 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0087 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0146 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0088 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0147 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0089 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0148 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0090 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0149 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0091 (18 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0150 (20 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0092 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0151 (12 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0093 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0152 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0094 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0153 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0095 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0154 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0096 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0155 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0097 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0156 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0098 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0157 (18 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0099 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0158 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0100 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0159 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0101 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0160 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0102 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0161 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0103 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0162 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0104 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0163 (18 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0105 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0164 (24 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0106 (20 pgs) ...................................................................0 Chapter 6 title page .................................................................0
WP0107 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 Blank .......................................................................................0
WP0108 (12 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0165 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0109 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0166 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0110 (12 pgs) ...................................................................0 WP0167 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0111 (4 pgs) ......................................................................0 WP0168 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0112 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0169 (14 pgs) ...................................................................0
WP0113 (2 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0170 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0114 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 INDEX-1 – INDEX-6 .............................................................0
WP0115 (10 pgs) ...................................................................0 Foldout pages (14 pgs) ...........................................................0
WP0116 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0 Metric conversion chart ..........................................................0
WP0117 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0 Back cover ..............................................................................0
WP0118 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0119 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0
WP0120 (8 pgs) .....................................................................0
B
TM 9-2330-381-13
HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

WASHINGTON, D.C., 30 OCTOBER 2009
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR
SEMITRAILER, TRANSPORTER, HEAVY EQUIPMENT

70 TON, M1000
NSN 2330-01-303-8832 (EIC: CXU)
CURRENT AS OF 30 October 2009
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to
recommend any improvements to the procedures in this publication, please let us know.
The preferred method is to submit your DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to
Publications and Blank Forms) through the Internet, on the Army Electronic Product
Support (AEPS) website. The Internet address is https://aeps.ria.army.mil. The DA Form
2028 is located under the Public Applications section in the AEPS Public Home Page. Fill
out the form and click on SUBMIT. Using this form on the AEPS will enable us to respond
quicker to your comments and better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You may also
mail, email, or fax your comments or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM Life
Cycle Management Command. The postal mail address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle
Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP / TECH PUBS, 1 Rock Island Arsenal,
Rock Island, IL 61299-7630. The email address is [email protected].
The fax number is DSN 793-0726 or Commercial (309) 782-0726.
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A - Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.
i/ii blank
TM 9-2330-381-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION

GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................................................................................... WP 0001
Table 1. Storage and Shipment Materials............................................................................. WP 0001.2
Table 2. Acronyms and Abbreviations List............................................................................ WP 0001.3
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA .................................................................................. WP 0002
Figure 1. Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities, and Features......................................... WP 0002.1
Table 1. Major Components.................................................................................................. WP 0002.3
Figure 4. Major Components ................................................................................................ WP 0002.3
Table 7. Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer Specifications............................ WP 0002.9
THEORY OF OPERATION ......................................................................................................... WP 0003
Figure 1. M1070 Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer...................................... WP 0003.1/2
CHAPTER 2. OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

Figure 1. APU Control Box Controls ..................................................................................... WP 0004.2
Figure 2. APU Controls. ........................................................................................................ WP 0004.3
Figure 3. Hydraulic Tank Controls ........................................................................................ WP 0004.4
Figure 4. Hydraulic Pressure Gauge Panel Controls............................................................ WP 0004.5
Figure 5. Hydraulic Controls and Isolation Valves ................................................................ WP 0004.6
Figure 8. Bed Height Indicator .............................................................................................. WP 0004.9
Figure 9. Crowbar ................................................................................................................. WP 0004.9
Figure 10. Brake Release Valve. .......................................................................................... WP 0004.10
Figure 11. Air Tank Drain Valve............................................................................................ WP 0004.10
Figure 12. Front Support Leg Handcrank Controls............................................................... WP 0004.11
Figure 13. Rear Support Leg Handcrank Controls. .............................................................. WP 0004.12
Figure 14. Winch Handcrank Controls. ................................................................................. WP 0004.13/14
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) STARTUP AND
SHUTDOWN................................................................................................................................ WP 0005
Figure 1. APU Startup ........................................................................................................... WP 0005.2
iii
TM 9-2330-381-13
TABLE OF CONTENTS – CONTINUED
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 6. APU Shutdown....................................................................................................... WP 0005.8
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) COLD WEATHER
STARTING ..................................................................................................................................... WP 0006
Figure 1. APU Cold Weather Starting ................................................................................... WP 0006.2
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ADJUSTING GOOSENECK ............................... WP 0007
Figure 1. Adjusting Gooseneck............................................................................................. WP 0007.3/4
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ADJUSTING PLATFORM HEIGHT .................... WP 0008
Figure 1. Adjusting Platform Height ...................................................................................... WP 0008.2
Figure 6. Adjusting Platform Height ...................................................................................... WP 0008.7/8
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING LOADING RAMPS......................... WP 0009
Figure 1. Adjusting Loading Ramps...................................................................................... WP 0009.3
Figure 2. Adjusting Loading Ramps...................................................................................... WP 0009.4
Figure 3. Lowering Loading Ramps... ................................................................................... WP 0009.5
Figure 4. Raising Loading Ramp... ....................................................................................... WP 0009.6
Figure 5. Raising Loading Ramp .......................................................................................... WP 0009.7
Figure 6. Raising Loading Ramp .......................................................................................... WP 0009.8
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING MANUAL STEERING .................... WP 0010
Figure 1. Operating Manual Steering.................................................................................... WP 0010.3
Figure 2. Operating Manual Steering.................................................................................... WP 0010.5/6
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING FRONT SUPPORT LEGS ............. WP 0011
Figure 1. Lower Front Support Legs. .................................................................................... WP 0011.3
Figure 2. Raise Front Support Legs...................................................................................... WP 0011.5/6
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING REAR SUPPORT LEGS................ WP 0012
Figure 1. Lower Rear Support Leg........................................................................................ WP 0012.3
Figure 2. Raise Rear Support Leg. ....................................................................................... WP 0012.5/6
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TRACTOR/SEMITRAILER COUPLING AND
UNCOUPLING ................................................................................................................................ WP 0013
Figure 1. Coupling Tractor/Semitrailer................................................................................... WP 0013.3
Figure 4. Coupling Tractor/Semitrailer ................................................................................... WP 0013.9
Figure 6. Uncoupling Tractor/Semitrailer............................................................................... WP 0013.13
Figure 7. Uncoupling Tractor/Semitrailer............................................................................... WP 0013.15/16
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - HIGHWAY DRIVING............................................ WP 0014
Figure 1. Turning................................................................................................................... WP 0014.3
Figure 2. Backing .................................................................................................................. WP 0014.5
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - LOADING ABLE PAYLOADS .............................. WP 0015
Figure 1. Loading Able Payload............................................................................................ WP 0015.1
Figure 10. Loading Able Payload.......................................................................................... WP 0015.10
iv
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 24. Loading Able Payload.......................................................................................... WP 0015.23/24
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UNLOADING ABLE PAYLOADS ..................... WP 0016
Figure 1. Unloading Able Payloads....................................................................................... WP 0016.2
Figure 10. Unloading Able Payloads..................................................................................... WP 0016.12
Figure 11. Unloading Able Payloads..................................................................................... WP 0016.12
Figure 12. Unloading Able Payloads..................................................................................... WP 0016.13/14
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DUAL WINCH LOADING.................................. WP 0017
Figure 1. Dual Winch Loading............................................................................................... WP 0017.1
Figure 10. Dual Winch Loading............................................................................................. WP 0017.9
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS – DUAL WINCH UNLOADING ........................... WP 0018
Figure 1. Dual Winch Unloading ........................................................................................... WP 0018.3
v
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 10. Dual Winch Unloading ......................................................................................... WP 0018.17
Figure 19. Dual Winch Unloading ......................................................................................... WP 0018.35/36
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS – FORDING......................................................... WP 0019
Figure 1. Fording................................................................................................................... WP 0019.3/4
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS – AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP
STARTING ................................................................................................................................... WP 0020
Figure 1. APU Jump Start Cable Stowage Bag .................................................................... WP 0020.1
Figure 2. APU Negative Battery Cable ................................................................................. WP 0020.2
Figure 3. APU Jumper Cables .............................................................................................. WP 0020.3
Figure 4. APU Jump Start ..................................................................................................... WP 0020.5
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS – ARCTIC WEATHER AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU)
STARTING ................................................................................................................................... WP 0021
Figure 1. Arctic Weather APU Starting ................................................................................. WP 0021.3
Figure 2. Arctic Weather APU Starting ................................................................................. WP 0021.5
Figure 3. Arctic Weather APU Starting ................................................................................. WP 0021.7/8
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS – OPERATION ON GRADES............................. WP 0022
Figure 1. Approaching an Uphill Grade................................................................................. WP 0022.1
Figure 2. Cresting an Uphill Grade ....................................................................................... WP 0022.2
Figure 3. Approaching a Downhill Grade .............................................................................. WP 0022.2
Figure 4. Approaching Level Ground from Downhill Grade .................................................. WP 0022.3/4
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS – BRAKE CAGING/UNCAGING.................... WP 0023
Figure 1. Brake Caging/Uncaging......................................................................................... WP 0023.3/4
OPERATION WITH DISABLED BOGIE ...................................................................................... WP 0024
Figure 1. Operation with Disabled Bogie .............................................................................. WP 0024.2
Figure 4. Operation with Disabled Bogie .............................................................................. WP 0024.7/8
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS – PARKING LOADED SEMITRAILER .......... WP 0025
Figure 1. Parking Loaded Semitrailer ................................................................................... WP 0025.2
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS – ISO CONTAINER LOCK BRACKETS........ WP 0026
Figure 1. ISO Container Lock Brackets ................................................................................ WP 0026.3
Figure 2. ISO Container Lock Brackets ................................................................................ WP 0026.5/6
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS – DISABLED LOADING RAMP RECOVERY WP 0027
Figure 1. Disabled Loading Ramp ........................................................................................ WP 0027.3
Figure 4. Disabled Loading Ramp ........................................................................................ WP 0027.7/8
vi
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX .................................................................................................... WP 0028
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ............................... WP 0029
Table 1. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) ..................................................................................... WP 0029.1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES ................................................ WP 0030
Table 1. Hydraulic System .................................................................................................... WP 0030.1
Figure 1. Gooseneck Cylinder Port and Hose ...................................................................... WP 0030.12
Figure 2. Steering Cylinders ................................................................................................. WP 0030.15
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES............................................... WP 0031
Table 1. Electrical System .................................................................................................... WP 0031.1
WHEELS, TIRES, AND HUBS TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES .................................... WP 0032
Table 1. Wheels, Tires, and Hubs......................................................................................... WP 0032.1
BRAKE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................................................... WP 0033
Table 1. Brakes .................................................................................................................... WP 0033.1
CHAPTER 4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION............ WP 0034
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)......................................... WP 0035
Table 1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) for HET ........................... WP 0035.1
Figure 1. Cable Guide ........................................................................................................... WP 0035.1
Figure 2. Davit Assembly ...................................................................................................... WP 0035.2
Figure 3. Spare Wheel Assembly ......................................................................................... WP 0035.3
Figure 4. Coolant Level ......................................................................................................... WP 0035.4
Figure 5. Oil Level. ................................................................................................................ WP 0035.5
Figure 6. Hydraulic Tank ....................................................................................................... WP 0035.6
Figure 7. APU Fuel Tank....................................................................................................... WP 0035.6
Figure 8. APU Fuel Filter Assembly...................................................................................... WP 0035.7
Figure 9. APU Battery ........................................................................................................... WP 0035.8
Figure 10. APU Fan Belt ....................................................................................................... WP 0035.9
Figure 11. APU Engine ......................................................................................................... WP 0035.9
Figure 12. APU Control Box.................................................................................................. WP 0035.10
Figure 13. Steering Console ................................................................................................. WP 0035.12
Figure 14. Intervehicular Connections .................................................................................. WP 0035.13
Figure 15. Pivot Pin............................................................................................................... WP 0035.14
Figure 16. Front Support legs ............................................................................................... WP 0035.14
Figure 17. Gooseneck Pivot Cylinder ................................................................................... WP 0035.15
Figure 18. Vehicle Lights ...................................................................................................... WP 0035.16
Figure 19. Stowage Compartment ........................................................................................ WP 0035.17
Figure 20. Payload/Cargo Tiedown Rings and Lifting Eyes ................................................. WP 0035.18
Figure 21. Brake Release Valve/Drain Cocks ...................................................................... WP 0035.19
Figure 22. Suspension System ............................................................................................. WP 0035.20
Figure 24. Tie and Wheel...................................................................................................... WP 0035.22
Figure 25. Steering Installation ............................................................................................. WP 0035.23
Figure 26. Rear Support Legs............................................................................................... WP 0035.24
Figure 27. Splash Guards ..................................................................................................... WP 0035.25
Figure 29. Detectors.............................................................................................................. WP 0035.26
Figure 30. Data Plates .......................................................................................................... WP 0035.27
Figure 31. Loading Ramps.................................................................................................... WP 0035.27
Figure 32. Snatch Block ........................................................................................................ WP 0035.28
Figure 33. Hydraulic Control Module .................................................................................... WP 0035.29
Figure 34. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges................................................................................. WP 0035.29
Figure 35. Hydraulic Pressure Filter Assembly..................................................................... WP 0035.30
Figure 36. Starter .................................................................................................................. WP 0035.30
vii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 37. Cable Guide ......................................................................................................... WP 0035.31
Figure 38. Davit Assembly .................................................................................................... WP 0035.32
Figure 39. Pivot Pin............................................................................................................... WP 0035.34
Figure 40. Tire/Wheel Assembly........................................................................................... WP 0035.34
Figure 41. Snatch Block ........................................................................................................ WP 0035.35
Figure 43. Steps and Guardrail............................................................................................. WP 0035.37
Figure 44. APU Filter Assembly............................................................................................ WP 0035.37
Figure 45. Steering Wedge ................................................................................................... WP 0035.38
Figure 46. Gooseneck Pivot Cylinder ................................................................................... WP 0035.38
Figure 47. Vehicle Lights....................................................................................................... WP 0035.39
Figure 48. Lanyards .............................................................................................................. WP 0035.40
Figure 51. Tire and Wheel..................................................................................................... WP 0035.43
Figure 52. Steering................................................................................................................ WP 0035.44
Figure 54. Covers.................................................................................................................. WP 0035.45
Figure 55. Detectors.............................................................................................................. WP 0035.46
Figure 56. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils........................................................................ WP 0035.47
Figure 57. Hydraulic Control Module .................................................................................... WP 0035.47
Figure 58. Hydraulic Isolation Valves.................................................................................... WP 0035.48
Figure 60. Tires ..................................................................................................................... WP 0035.49
Figure 61. Axle Assembly ..................................................................................................... WP 0035.50
Figure 63. Gooseneck Pneumatic installation....................................................................... WP 0035.52
Figure 64. Platform Hydraulic Installation ............................................................................. WP 0035.53
Figure 65. Brake Drums and Brake Shoes ........................................................................... WP 0035.54
Figure 66. Suspension Assembly ......................................................................................... WP 0035.55
Figure 67. Wheel Assembly .................................................................................................. WP 0035.57
Figure 68. Lug Nuts and Lug Studs ...................................................................................... WP 0035.57
Figure 69. Suspension Spindle Bearing................................................................................ WP 0035.58
Figure 70. Battery.................................................................................................................. WP 0035.59
Figure 71. Hydraulic Tank ..................................................................................................... WP 0035.62
Figure 72. Air Filter................................................................................................................ WP 0035.63
Figure 73. Oil Filter................................................................................................................ WP 0035.64
Figure 74. Air Filter................................................................................................................ WP 0035.65
Figure 75. Fuel Tank ............................................................................................................. WP 0035.66
Figure 76. Fan Belt................................................................................................................ WP 0035.67
Figure 77. Kingpin ................................................................................................................. WP 0035.69
CHAPTER 5. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL................................................................................ WP 0036
Figure 1. Semitrailer Platform ............................................................................................... WP 0036.2
Figure 2. Rear of Semitrailer ................................................................................................. WP 0036.3
Figure 3. Gooseneck and Steering Cylinders ....................................................................... WP 0036.4
Figure 4. Semitrailer Light ..................................................................................................... WP 0036.6
Figure 5. Beacon Warning Light ........................................................................................... WP 0036.7
Figure 6. Pipe........................................................................................................................ WP 0036.7
Figure 7. Beacon Warning Light ........................................................................................... WP 0036.8
Figure 8. Incandescent Lights ............................................................................................... WP 0036.9
Figure 9. LED Lights ............................................................................................................. WP 0036.9
Figure 10. Incandescent Lights............................................................................................. WP 0036.10
Figure 11. LED Lights ........................................................................................................... WP 0036.11
viii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 12. Inspection/Servicing............................................................................................. WP 0036.12
Figure 13. Inspection/Servicing............................................................................................. WP 0036.13
SERVICE BRAKE ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................................. WP 0037
Figure 1. Slack Adjusters ...................................................................................................... WP 0036.3
Figure 2. Slack Adjusters ...................................................................................................... WP 0037.4
Figure 3. Slack Adjusters ...................................................................................................... WP 0037.5/6
PLATFORM STEERING ALIGNMENT........................................................................................ WP 0038
Figure 1. Steering Cylinders ................................................................................................. WP 0038.2
Figure 2. Longitudinal Struts No. 3 ....................................................................................... WP 0038.3
Figure 5. Connecting Links ................................................................................................... WP 0038.6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CHECK AND FLUID FILL ...................................................................... WP 0039
Figure 1. Fluid Level.............................................................................................................. WP 0039.2
Figure 2. Fluid Drain.............................................................................................................. WP 0039.3
Figure 3. Fluid Fill.................................................................................................................. WP 0039.5/6
HYDRAULIC TANK DRAINING................................................................................................... WP 0040
Figure 1. Breather Cap.......................................................................................................... WP 0040.3
Figure 2. Oil Valve Handle .................................................................................................... WP 0040.4
Figure 3. Drain Valve ............................................................................................................ WP 0040.5
Figure 4. Drain Plug .............................................................................................................. WP 0040.6
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING............................................................................................. WP 0041
Figure 1. Bleed Valves, Curbside ......................................................................................... WP 0041.3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FLUSHING............................................................................................. WP 0042
Figure 1. Preparation ............................................................................................................ WP 0042.3
Figure 2. Hydraulic Tank Flushing ........................................................................................ WP 0042.5
Figure 3. Suspension System Flushing ................................................................................ WP 0042.7
Figure 4. Steering System Flushing...................................................................................... WP 0042.9
Figure 5. Steering Cylinder Flushing..................................................................................... WP 0042.11
Figure 6. Restoration............................................................................................................. WP 0042.12
HYDRAULIC FILTER ELEMENT ................................................................................................ WP 0043
Figure 1. Element Change .................................................................................................... WP 0043.3/4
RADIATOR FLUID FILL .............................................................................................................. WP 0044
Figure 1. Fluid Fill.................................................................................................................. WP 0044.2
GOOSENECK COMPONENT ASSEMBLY ................................................................................ WP 0045
Figure 1. Gooseneck Component Removal.......................................................................... WP 0045.3
Figure 2. Gooseneck Component Repair ............................................................................. WP 0045.5
Figure 3. Gooseneck Component Installation....................................................................... WP 0045.7/8
JUNCTION BOXES ..................................................................................................................... WP 0046
Figure 1. Removal................................................................................................................. WP 0046.3
Figure 2. Installation.............................................................................................................. WP 0046.4
COMPOSITE MARKER LIGHT ................................................................................................... WP 0047
Figure 1. Composite Marker Light Removal ......................................................................... WP 0047.3
Figure 2. Composite Marker Light Repair ............................................................................. WP 0047.5
Figure 3. Composite Marker Light Installation ...................................................................... WP 0047.6
VEHICULAR BAR LAMP............................................................................................................. WP 0048
Figure 1. Light Removal ........................................................................................................ WP 0048.2
Figure 2. Light Installation ..................................................................................................... WP 0048.3/4
STOPLIGHT/TAILLIGHT ............................................................................................................. WP 0049
Figure 1. Stoplight/Taillight Removal .................................................................................... WP 0049.2
Figure 2. Stoplight/Taillight Repair........................................................................................ WP 0049.3
Figure 3. Stoplight/Taillight Installation ................................................................................. WP 0049.4
CLEARANCE LIGHT/BLACKOUT LIGHT................................................................................... WP 0050
Figure 1. Incandescent Light Assembly Removal................................................................. WP 0050.2
Figure 2. LED Light Assembly .............................................................................................. WP 0050.3
Figure 3. Incandescent and LED Light Assembly Installation............................................... WP 0050.5/6
ix
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
STEERING PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT............................................................................. WP 0051
Figure 1. Access Cover Removal ......................................................................................... WP 0051.1
Figure 2. Steering Pressure Indicator Light Removal ........................................................... WP 0051.3
Figure 3. Assembly ............................................................................................................... WP 0051.5
Figure 4. Access Cover Installation ...................................................................................... WP 0051.6
INDICATOR LIGHTS – OIL PRESSURE AND GLOW PLUG..................................................... WP 0052
Figure 1. Lamp-Type and Glow-Type Indicator Removal ..................................................... WP 0052.3
Figure 2. Lamp-Type Glow Plug Indicator Inspection........................................................... WP 0052.5
Figure 3. Lamp-Type and Glow-Type Indicator Installation .................................................. WP 0052.7/8
BATTERY INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... WP 0053
Figure 1. Battery Removal .................................................................................................... WP 0053.3
Figure 2. Battery Installation ................................................................................................. WP 0053.5/6
SOLAR BATTERY CHARGER INSTALLATION (SOME SEMITRAILERS) ............................... WP 0054
Figure 1. Solar Battery Charger Removal............................................................................. WP 0054.3
Figure 2. Solar Battery Charger Installation.......................................................................... WP 0054.5/6
WIRING HARNESS CLAMP AND GROMMET INSTALLATION ................................................ WP 0055
Figure 1. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Removal .................................................... WP 0055.3
Figure 2. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Removal .................................................... WP 0055.5
Figure 3. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Installation ................................................. WP 0055.7
Figure 4. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Installation ................................................. WP 0055.9/10
APU CONTROL BOX JUMPER WIRES AND TIMER HARNESS.............................................. WP 0056
Figure 1. APU Control Box Jumper Wires and Timer Harness Removal ............................. WP 0056.3
Figure 2. APU Control Box Jumper Wires and Timer Harness Installation .......................... WP 0056.5/6
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE JUMPER WIRES ................................................................ WP 0057
Figure 1. Hydraulic Control Module Removal ....................................................................... WP 0057.2
Figure 2. Pressure Switches Removal.................................................................................. WP 0057.3
Figure 3. Pressure Switches Installation............................................................................... WP 0057.5
Figure 4. Hydraulic Control Module Installation .................................................................... WP 0057.5
JUNCTION BOX JUMPER WIRES ............................................................................................. WP 0058
Figure 1. Junction Box TB1 and TB2 Removal..................................................................... WP 0058.1
Figure 2. Junction Box TB1 and TB2 Repair ........................................................................ WP 0058.3
Figure 3. Junction Box TB1 and TB2 Installation.................................................................. WP 0058.4
W1 HARNESS ............................................................................................................................. WP 0059
Figure 1. W1 Junction Boxes Removal................................................................................. WP 0059.2
Figure 2. Terminal Lugs Repair ............................................................................................ WP 0059.3
Figure 3. W1 Harness to Gooseneck and Platform .............................................................. WP 0059.4
W2 HARNESS ............................................................................................................................. WP 0060
Figure 1. Junction Boxes TB1 and TB2 Removal................................................................. WP 0060.2
Figure 3. W2 Harness Installation......................................................................................... WP 0060.4
W3 HARNESS ............................................................................................................................. WP 0061
Figure 1. W3 Harness Removal ............................................................................................ WP 0061.2
Figure 3. Platform junction Boxes Installation....................................................................... WP 0061.4
W4 HARNESS ............................................................................................................................. WP 0062
Figure 2. Wire and Terminal Lugs Repair ............................................................................. WP 0062.3
W5 HARNESS (SOME SEMITRAILERS) ................................................................................... WP 0063
APU WIRING HARNESS ............................................................................................................ WP 0064
Figure 1. APU Wiring Harness Removal............................................................................... WP 0064.1
Figure 2. APU Harness at Control Box Removal .................................................................. WP 0064.2
x
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 3. APU Control Box Wiring Harness Inspection and Repair...................................... WP 0064.3
Figure 4. APU Wiring Harness Installation............................................................................ WP 0064.4
Figure 5. APU Wiring Harness installation............................................................................ WP 0064.5/6
SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY/BOGIE ............................................................................................ WP 0065
Figure 1. Bogie View with Wheel Removed.......................................................................... WP 0065.3
Figure 2. Disconnecting Connecting Link on No. 2, 3, 4, or 5 Bogie .................................... WP 0065.4
Figure 3. Disconnecting Connecting Link on No. 1 Bogie .................................................... WP 0065.5
Figure 4. Block Clamp from Hydraulic Hoses Removal........................................................ WP 0065.7
Figure 5. Attach Suspension Chains for Removal ................................................................ WP 0065.8
Figure 6. Bogie Removal ...................................................................................................... WP 0065.9
Figure 7. Prying Upper Suspension Arm from Spindle ......................................................... WP 0065.10
Figure 8. Bogie Installation ................................................................................................... WP 0065.13
Figure 9. Spanner Nut on Spindle Installation ...................................................................... WP 0065.15
Figure 10. Bogie Installation ................................................................................................. WP 0065.16
Figure 11. Bogie Installation ................................................................................................. WP 0065.17
Figure 12. Pneumatic Hoses to Bulkhead Fittings Installation.............................................. WP 0065.18
Figure 13. Affected Bogie Installation and Adjustment ......................................................... WP 0065.19/20
SUSPENSION CYLINDER.......................................................................................................... WP 0066
Figure 1. Hydraulic Hose Removal ....................................................................................... WP 0066.3
Figure 2. Upper Suspension Arm Removal .......................................................................... WP 0066.4
Figure 3. Electrical Tiedown Strap Locations ....................................................................... WP 0066.5
Figure 4. Upper Pin Removal................................................................................................ WP 0066.6
Figure 5. Removal of Two Retaining Rings .......................................................................... WP 0066.7
Figure 6. Removal of Setscrews and Bushings .................................................................... WP 0066.8
Figure 7. Inspecting Hydraulic Hoses for Defects................................................................. WP 0066.9
Figure 8. Inspecting Air Hoses for Defects ........................................................................... WP 0066.9
Figure 9. Installation of Setscrews and Bushings ................................................................. WP 0066.10
Figure 10. Loom Installation.................................................................................................. WP 0066.11
Figure 11. Before and After Suspension Mandrels and Ring Spacers (Lower) Insertion..... WP 0066.12
Figure 12. Routing Hydraulic Hoses ..................................................................................... WP 0066.13
Figure 13. Suspension Mandrels and Ring Spacers (Upper) Insertion ................................ WP 0066.14
Figure 14. Upper Pin Installation........................................................................................... WP 0066.15
Figure 15. Check Position of Shields on Hoses.................................................................... WP 0066.16
Figure 16. Raise/Lower Lower Suspension Arm .................................................................. WP 0066.17/18
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM....................................................................................................... WP 0067
Figure 1. Removing Hose Shield .......................................................................................... WP 0067.2
Figure 2. Access Covers to Upper and Lower Suspension Arms......................................... WP 0067.3
Figure 3. Lubricating Fitting and Bearing Cone Removal ..................................................... WP 0067.4
Figure 4. Drive Lower Bearing Cup from Upper Suspension Arm ........................................ WP 0067.5
Figure 5. Seating Upper Bearing Cup................................................................................... WP 0067.7
Figure 6. Installing Shoulder Shaft........................................................................................ WP 0067.8
Figure 7. Installation and Alignment of Hoses ...................................................................... WP 0067.9/10
SERVICE BRAKES ..................................................................................................................... WP 0068
Figure 1. Dust Shields Removal ........................................................................................... WP 0068.3
Figure 2. Dust Shields Installation ........................................................................................ WP 0068.5/6
S-CAM ......................................................................................................................................... WP 0069
Figure 1. Mending Plate Removal......................................................................................... WP 0069.2
Figure 2. S-Cam Retaining Rings Removal.......................................................................... WP 0069.3
Figure 3. Retaining Rings Installation ................................................................................... WP 0069.5
Figure 4. Mending Plate Alignment and Installation ............................................................. WP 0069.6
S-CAM RETAINER ASSEMBLY ................................................................................................. WP 0070
Figure 1. Retainer Assembly Removal ................................................................................. WP 0070.1
Figure 2. Retainer Assembly Installation .............................................................................. WP 0070.2
SLACK ADJUSTER..................................................................................................................... WP 0071
Figure 1. Slack Adjuster ........................................................................................................ WP 0071.1/2
AIR CLEARNER ASSEMBLY...................................................................................................... WP 0072
xi
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 1. Air Filter Assembly Removal.................................................................................. WP 0072.2
Figure 2. Air Filter Assembly Removal.................................................................................. WP 0072.3
Figure 3. Assembly of Air Filter Assembly ............................................................................ WP 0072.4
Figure 4. Installation of Air Filter Assembly........................................................................... WP 0072.5/6
GOOSENECK PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION ............................................................................ WP 0073
Figure 1. Hose Removal ....................................................................................................... WP 0073.2
Figure 2. Removing Straight Adapters from Gooseneck ...................................................... WP 0073.3
Figure 3. Assembly of Hose Fittings ..................................................................................... WP 0073.4
Figure 4. Installation of Straight Adapters and Couplings for Gooseneck ............................ WP 0073.5
Figure 5. Installing Hoses...................................................................................................... WP 0073.6
PLATFORM PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION ................................................................................ WP 0074
Figure 1. Bottom of Platform Looking Up, Guide Location for All Graphs ............................ WP 0074.2
Figure 2. Location A, Hose and Tube Adapters.................................................................... WP 0074.3
Figure 3. Location B, Brake Valve from Platform.................................................................. WP 0074.3
Figure 4. Location C, Brake Chamber Assembly, Typical 10 Places ................................... WP 0074.4
Figure 5. (Location D) Pipe-to-Tube Tee, Adapter, and Elbows........................................... WP 0074.5
Figure 6. Location E, Air Pressure Relay Valve.................................................................... WP 0074.5
Figure 7. Location F, Air Pressure Relay Valve, Typical 5 Places........................................ WP 0074.6
Figure 8. Location G, Platform Air Tank................................................................................ WP 0074.6
Figure 9. Location H, Adapters and Elbows from Air Pressure Relay Valve ........................ WP 0074.7
Figure 10. Location J, Adapters from Platform Weldment, Typical 10 Places...................... WP 0074.7
Figure 11. Location K, Air Pressure Relay Valve.................................................................. WP 0074.8
Figure 12. Location L, Air Pressure Relay Valve .................................................................. WP 0074.8
Figure 13. Location M, Elbow Removal ................................................................................ WP 0074.9
Figure 14. Location N, Pipe Plug Removal, Typical 18 Places............................................. WP 0074.9
Figure 15. Location P, Tees, Adapters, and Elbows Removal ............................................. WP 0074.10
Figure 16. Location R, Adapters and Elbows from Air Pressure Relay Valve Removal....... WP 0074.11
Figure 17. Location S, Adapters and Elbows from Air Pressure Relay Valve Removal ....... WP 0074.11
Figure 18. Location T, Elbow from Check Valve and from Weldment Removal................... WP 0074.12
Figure 19. Location U, Elbow from Weldment Removal ....................................................... WP 0074.12
Figure 20. Location V, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal ............................................. WP 0074.13
Figure 21. Location W, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal, Typical 6 Places................ WP 0074.13
Figure 22. Location X, Elbows from Weldment Removal ..................................................... WP 0074.13
Figure 23. Location Y, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal, Typical 4 Places................. WP 0074.14
Figure 24. Location Z, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal, Typical 2 Places ................. WP 0074.14
Figure 25. Adapter Fittings.................................................................................................... WP 0074.15
Figure 26. Location Z, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 2 Places .................. WP 0074.16
Figure 27. Location Y, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 4 Places .................. WP 0074.16
Figure 28 Location X, Sealant to Threads Installation .......................................................... WP 0074.17
Figure 29. Location W, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 6 Places ................. WP 0074.18
Figure 30. Location V, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 2 Places .................. WP 0074.18
Figure 31. Location U, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.18
Figure 32. Location T, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.19
Figure 33. Location S, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.19
Figure 34. Location R, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.20
Figure 35. Location P, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.20
Figure 36. Location N, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation,
Typical 18 Places ............................................................................................... WP 0074.21
Figure 37. Location M, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation..................... WP 0074.21
Figure 38. Location L, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation...................... WP 0074.22
Figure 39. Location K, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.22
Figure 40. Location J, Tube Nipples Installation, 10 Places ................................................. WP 0074.23
Figure 41. Location H, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.23
Figure 42. Location G, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation..................... WP 0074.24
Figure 43. Location F, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.24
Figure 44. Location E, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.25
xii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 45. Location D, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.25
Figure 46. Location C, Brake Chamber Assembly, 10 Places.............................................. WP 0074.26
Figure 47. Location B, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation ..................... WP 0074.27/28
Figure 48. Location A, Elbows to Weldment Installation....................................................... WP 0074.27/28
HUB AND DRUM......................................................................................................................... WP 0075
Figure 1. Cage Brake Check................................................................................................. WP 0075.1
Figure 2. Hub and Drum Assembly Removal ....................................................................... WP 0075.2
Figure 3. Hub and Drum Repair............................................................................................ WP 0075.3
Figure 4. Seal Installation ..................................................................................................... WP 0075.5
Figure 5. Installation of Hub and Drum Assembly ................................................................ WP 0075.7/8
TIRE............................................................................................................................................. WP 0076
Figure 1. Removal of Valve Stem and Tire ........................................................................... WP 0076.2
Figure 2. Installation of Valve Stem and Tire........................................................................ WP 0076.5/6
SPARE TIRE ............................................................................................................................... WP 0077
Figure 1. Removal of Spare Tire........................................................................................... WP 0077.3
Figure 2. Removal of Spare Tire........................................................................................... WP 0077.5
Figure 3. Installation of Spare Tire........................................................................................ WP 0077.7/8
OUTER/OUTER WHEEL............................................................................................................. WP 0078
Figure 1. Wheel Descriptions................................................................................................ WP 0078.2
Figure 2. Loosen Lug Nuts.................................................................................................... WP 0078.3
Figure 3. Securing Bogie....................................................................................................... WP 0078.4
Figure 4. Removal of Tire Assembly..................................................................................... WP 0078.5
Figure 5. Installation and Tightening of Assembly ................................................................ WP 0078.6
Figure 6. Tightening Sequence for Outer Dual Set............................................................... WP 0078.7
Figure 7. Lowering Platform and Removing Suspension Chain ........................................... WP 0078.8
OUTER/INNER WHEEL .............................................................................................................. WP 0079
Figure 1. Tire/Wheel Identity................................................................................................. WP 0079.2
Figure 2. Removal of Lug Studs ........................................................................................... WP 0079.3
Figure 3. Installation of Lug Studs ........................................................................................ WP 0079.4
Figure 4. Tightening Sequence for Inner Dual Set ............................................................... WP 0079.5/6
INNER/OUTER WHEEL .............................................................................................................. WP 0080
Figure 2. Removing Connecting Links .................................................................................. WP 0080.3
Figure 3. Raising Platform .................................................................................................... WP 0080.4
Figure 4. Bogie Linkage Attaching Removal Point ............................................................... WP 0080.5
Figure 5. Removing Lug Nuts ............................................................................................... WP 0080.6
Figure 6. Tire Maintenance ................................................................................................... WP 0080.7
Figure 7. Tightening Sequence for Outer Dual Set............................................................... WP 0080.7
Figure 8. Connecting Linkage Attaching Point...................................................................... WP 0080.8
Figure 9. Installing Connecting Links .................................................................................... WP 0080.9
Figure 10. Suspension Isolation Valve.................................................................................. WP 0080.10
INNER/INNER WHEEL ............................................................................................................... WP 0081
Figure 2. Removal of Inner/Inner Wheel ............................................................................... WP 0081.3
Figure 3. Installation of Inner/Inner Wheel ............................................................................ WP 0081.3
Figure 4. Tightening Sequence for Inner Dual Tire Set ........................................................ WP 0081.4
CONNECTING LINK ................................................................................................................... WP 0082
Figure 1. Typical Non-Steerable Connecting Link ................................................................ WP 0082.2
Figure 2. Typical Steerable Connecting Link ........................................................................ WP 0082.3
Figure 3. Disassembly of Non-Steering Connecting Link ..................................................... WP 0083.4
Figure 4. Disassembly of Steerable Connecting Link ........................................................... WP 0082.5
Figure 5. Assembly of Steerable Connecting Link................................................................ WP 0082.7
Figure 6. Assembly of Non-6teerable Connecting Link......................................................... WP 0082.7
Figure 7. Installation Typical Steerable Connecting Link...................................................... WP 0082.9
Figure 8. Installation of Typical Non-Steerable Connecting Link.......................................... WP 0082.10
Figure 9. Urethane Bushing Removal................................................................................... WP 0082.11
xiii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 10. Urethane Bushing ................................................................................................ WP 0082.13
Figure 11. Urethane Bushing Installation.............................................................................. WP 0082.14
LONGITUDINAL STRUT ............................................................................................................. WP 0083
Figure 1. Typical – All Struts Longitudinal Removal ............................................................. WP 0083.1
Figure 2. Longitudinal Strut from No. 2 or No. 5 Steering Plate Removal ............................ WP 0083.2
Figure 3. Typical at No. 3 and No. 4 Steering Plates............................................................ WP 0083.3
Figure 4. Longitudinal Strut Assembly .................................................................................. WP 0083.5
Figure 5. Installation of Plain Bearing on End of Longitudinal Strut ..................................... WP 0083.7
Figure 6. Grease Application................................................................................................. WP 0083.9
Figure 7. Installation of Longitudinal Strut............................................................................. WP 0083.10
Figure 8. Installation of Longitudinal Strut............................................................................. WP 0083.11/12
PLATFORM STEERING CYLINDER .......................................................................................... WP 0084
Figure 1. Bleeding Steering Cylinder .................................................................................... WP 0084.3
Figure 2. Steering Cylinder Removal .................................................................................... WP 0084.5
Figure 3. Bleed Valves and Pipe Plugs Installation .............................................................. WP 0084.7
Figure 4. Install Spacers and Stop Blocks ............................................................................ WP 0084.9
Figure 5. Hydraulic Lines and Bleed Valves ......................................................................... WP 0084.9
Table 1. Spacer Plate Shim Chart ........................................................................................ WP 0084.10
Figure 6. Installation and Adjustment of Cylinders ............................................................... WP 0084.10
STEERING PLATE ...................................................................................................................... WP 0085
Figure 1. Prying Retainer Plate ............................................................................................. WP 0085.2
Figure 2. Removal of Retainer Plate..................................................................................... WP 0085.3
Figure 3. Chain Under Steering Plate ................................................................................... WP 0085.3
Figure 4. Steering Plate Removal ......................................................................................... WP 0085.4
Figure 5. Positioned Hydraulic Jack Near Curbside of Steering Plate ................................. WP 0085.5
Figure 6. Lifting Steering Plate.............................................................................................. WP 0085.5
Figure 7. Component Parts Removal.................................................................................... WP 0085.7
Figure 8. Damage Inspection ................................................................................................ WP 0085.8
Figure 9. Bearing Assembly .................................................................................................. WP 0085.9
Figure 10. Steering Plate Removal from Hydraulic Jack ...................................................... WP 0085.10
Figure 11. Steering Plate Alignment Over Mainbeam .......................................................... WP 0085.11
Figure 12. Installation of Steering Plate ................................................................................ WP 0085.12
Figure 13. Install Service Covers and Secure in Place......................................................... WP 0085.13
Figure 14. Torque Capscrews............................................................................................... WP 0085.14
GOOSENECK STEERING CYLINDER....................................................................................... WP 0086
Figure 1. Relieve Pressure from Cylinders ........................................................................... WP 0086.3
Figure 2. Lifting Steering Cylinder......................................................................................... WP 0086.5
Figure 3. Alignment and Installation of Suspension Mandrel................................................ WP 0086.7
Figure 4. Maneuvering Steering Cylinder ............................................................................. WP 0086.9
Figure 5. Connecting Steering Cylinder ................................................................................ WP 0086.10
GOOSENECK STEPS................................................................................................................. WP 0087
Figure 1. Gooseneck Steps Removal ................................................................................... WP 0087.3
Figure 2. Gooseneck Steps Installation ................................................................................ WP 0087.4
GOOSENECK GUARDRAILS ..................................................................................................... WP 0088
Figure 1. Gooseneck Guardrails Removal............................................................................ WP 0088.3
Figure 2. Removal and Installation of Safety Rail ................................................................. WP 0088.4
GRAB HANDLE ........................................................................................................................... WP 0089
Figure 1. Grab Handle Removal ........................................................................................... WP 0089.1
Figure 2. Grag Handle Installation ....................................................................................... WP 0089.2
PLATFORM STEPS AND SERVICE COVERS .......................................................................... WP 0090
Figure 1. Service Cover Removal ......................................................................................... WP 0090.2
Figure 3. Platform Step Section Removal............................................................................. WP 0090.4
Figure 6. Platform Step Section Installation.......................................................................... WP 0090.6
xiv
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 7. Service Cover Installation ...................................................................................... WP 0090.7
Figure 8. Service Cover Installation ...................................................................................... WP 0090.8
LOADING RAMPS....................................................................................................................... WP 0091
Figure 1. Loading Ramp Removal ........................................................................................ WP 0091.2
Figure 9. Loading Ramp Repair............................................................................................ WP 0091.8
Figure 10. Loading Ramp Repair.......................................................................................... WP 0091.9
Figure 11. Loading Ramp Installation ................................................................................... WP 0091.11
Figure 16. Loading Ramp Spring Installation........................................................................ WP 0091.15
Figure 17. Loading Ramp Adjustment .................................................................................. WP 0091.17/18
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) FRAME ................................................................................. WP 0092.1
Figure 1. APU Frame Removal............................................................................................. WP 0092.2
Figure 4. APU Frame Installation.......................................................................................... WP 0092.5
Figure 5. APU Frame Installation.......................................................................................... WP 0092.6
Figure 6. APU Frame Installation.......................................................................................... WP 0092.7/8
PIVOT PIN ................................................................................................................................... WP 0093
Figure 1. Pivot Pin Removal ................................................................................................. WP 0093.2
Figure 2. Pivot Pin Inspection ............................................................................................... WP 0093.3
Figure 3. Pivot Pin Installation .............................................................................................. WP 0093.4
SPARE WHEEL CARRIER ......................................................................................................... WP 0094
Figure 1. Spare Wheel Carrier Removal............................................................................... WP 0094.2
Figure 2. Spare Wheel Carrier Removal............................................................................... WP 0094.3
Figure 3. Cleaning and Inspection of Spare Wheel Carrier .................................................. WP 0094.4
Figure 4. Spare Wheel Carrier Installation............................................................................ WP 0094.5
Figure 5. Spare Wheel Carrier Installation............................................................................ WP 0094.6
FRONT SUPPORT LEGS ........................................................................................................... WP 0095
Figure 1. Front Support Leg Removal................................................................................... WP 0095.2
Figure 2. Front Support Leg Removal................................................................................... WP 0095.3
Figure 3. Front Support Leg Disassembly ............................................................................ WP 0095.4
Figure 4. Front Support Legs Cleaning and Inspection ........................................................ WP 0095.5
Figure 5. Front Support Legs Assembly ............................................................................... WP 0095.6
REAR SUPPORT LEGS.............................................................................................................. WP 0096
Figure 1. Rear Support Leg Removal ................................................................................... WP 0096.2
Figure 2. Rear Support Leg Removal ................................................................................... WP 0096.3
Figure 3. Rear Support Leg Inspection ................................................................................. WP 0096.4
Figure 4. Rear Support Leg Repair....................................................................................... WP 0096.5
Figure 5. Rear Support Leg Repair....................................................................................... WP 0096.7/8
SPLASH GUARDS ...................................................................................................................... WP 0097
Figure 1. Splash Guard Removal......................................................................................... WP 0097.1
Figure 2. Splash Guard Installation....................................................................................... WP 0097.2
CONTROL MODULE FRAME ..................................................................................................... WP 0098
Figure 1. Control Module Frame Removal............................................................................ WP 0098.2
xv
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 2. Control Module Frame Installation......................................................................... WP 0098.3/4
DEFLECTORS............................................................................................................................. WP 0099
Figure 1. Deflector Removal ................................................................................................. WP 0099.2
Figure 2. Deflector Installation .............................................................................................. WP 0099.3/4
FRONT CLEARANCE LIGHT BRACKET (SOME SEMITRAILERS).......................................... WP 0100
Figure 1. Front Clearance Light Bracket (Some Semitrailers) Removal............................... WP 0100.1
Figure 2. Front Clearance Light Bracket (Some Semitrailers) Installation............................ WP 0100.2
STOWAGE COMPARTMENT ..................................................................................................... WP 0101
Figure 1. Stowage Compartment Removal........................................................................... WP 0101.2
Figure 2. Stowage Compartment Repair .............................................................................. WP 0101.3
Figure 3. Stowage Compartment Installation........................................................................ WP 0101.4
DAVIT ASSEMBLY...................................................................................................................... WP 0102
Figure 1. Davit Assembly Removal....................................................................................... WP 0102.2
Figure 2. Davit Assembly Repair .......................................................................................... WP 0102.3
Figure 5. Davit Assembly Installation.................................................................................... WP 0102.6
SNATCH BLOCK......................................................................................................................... WP 0103
Figure 1. Snatch Block Removal........................................................................................... WP 0103.2
Figure 2. Snatch Block Repair .............................................................................................. WP 0103.3
Figure 7. Snatch Block Installation........................................................................................ WP 0103.8
CABLE GUIDE............................................................................................................................. WP 0104
Figure 1. Cable Guide Removal............................................................................................ WP 0104.3
Figure 2. Bearing Removal ................................................................................................... WP 0104.4
Figure 3. Bearing Installation ................................................................................................ WP 0104.5
Figure 4. Cable Guide Installation......................................................................................... WP 0104.6
REFLECTORS............................................................................................................................. WP 0105
Figure 1. Reflector Removal ................................................................................................. WP 0105.1
Figure 2. Reflector Installation .............................................................................................. WP 0105.2
DATA PLATES, DECALS, AND STENCILS ............................................................................... WP 0106
Figure 1. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils Removal .......................................................... WP 0106.3
Figure 9. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils Installation ....................................................... WP 0106.12
Figure 10. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils Installation ..................................................... WP 0106.13
Figure 16. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils Installation ..................................................... WP 0106.19/20
HYDRAULIC PUMP..................................................................................................................... WP 0107
Figure 1. Hydraulic Pump Removal ...................................................................................... WP 0107.3
Figure 2. Hydraulic Pump Installation ................................................................................... WP 0107.4
FOUR-WAY DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE BANK.............................................................. WP 0108
Figure 1. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Removal.............................................. WP 0108.3
Figure 2. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Removal.............................................. WP 0108.5
xvi
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 3. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Removal/Repair .................................. WP 0108.6
Figure 7. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Installation........................................... WP 0108.11
Figure 8. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Installation........................................... WP 0108.12
STEERING CONTROL MANIFOLD ............................................................................................ WP 0109
Figure 1. Steering Control Manifold Removal ....................................................................... WP 0109.3
Figure 2. Steering Control Manifold Repair........................................................................... WP 0109.5
Figure 3. Steering Control Manifold Repair........................................................................... WP 0109.7
Figure 4. Steering Control Manifold Installation.................................................................... WP 0109.9
SUSPENSION CONTROL MANIFOLD....................................................................................... WP 0110
Figure 1. Suspension Control Manifold Removal ................................................................. WP 0110.3
Figure 2. Suspension Control Manifold Removal ................................................................. WP 0110.5
Figure 3. Suspension Control Manifold Repair ..................................................................... WP 0110.7
Figure 4. Suspension Control Manifold Repair ..................................................................... WP 0110.9
Figure 5. Suspension Control Manifold Installation .............................................................. WP 0110.11
Figure 6. Suspension Control Manifold Installation .............................................................. WP 0110.12
LINE FRACTURE VALVE ........................................................................................................... WP 0111
Figure 1. Line Fracture Valve Removal ................................................................................ WP 0111.2
Figure 2. Line Fracture Valve Removal ................................................................................ WP 0111.3/4
VALVE HANDLES ....................................................................................................................... WP 0112
Figure 1. Configuration A Valve Handle Removal ................................................................ WP 0112.2
Figure 2. Configuration B Valve Handle Removal ................................................................ WP 0112.3
Figure 3. Configuration A Valve Handle Installation ............................................................. WP 0112.4
Figure 4. Configuration B Valve Handle Installation ............................................................. WP 0112.5/6
SUSPENSION ISOLATION VALVE ASSEMBLY........................................................................ WP 0113
Figure 1. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Removal.................................................... WP 0113.1
Figure 2. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Installation................................................. WP 0113.2
SUSPENSION SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY.......................................................................... WP 0114
Figure 1. Suspension Shutoff Valve Assembly Removal...................................................... WP 0114.2
Figure 4. Suspension Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation................................................... WP 0114.7
Figure 5. Suspension Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation................................................... WP 0114.8
Figure 6. Suspension Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation................................................... WP 0114.9/10
GOOSENECK ISOLATION VALVE ASSEMBLY ........................................................................ WP 0115
Figure 1. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Removal .................................................... WP 0115.1
Figure 5. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Repair........................................................ WP 0115.4
Figure 6. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Repair........................................................ WP 0115.5
Figure 7. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Installation ................................................. WP 0115.6
Figure 10. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Installation ............................................... WP 0115.10
GOOSENECK HYDRAULICS ..................................................................................................... WP 0116
Figure 1. Gooseneck Hydraulics Removal............................................................................ WP 0116.3
Figure 2. Gooseneck Hydraulics Removal............................................................................ WP 0116.5
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) HYDRAULICS....................................................................... WP 0117
Figure 1. APU Hydraulics Removal ...................................................................................... WP 0117.3
Figure 2. Cleaning................................................................................................................. WP 0117.5
Figure 3. APU Hydraulics Installation ................................................................................... WP 0117.7/8
STEP HYDRAULICS ................................................................................................................... WP 0118
Figure 1. Step Hydraulics Removal ...................................................................................... WP 0118.3
xvii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 2. Cleaning................................................................................................................. WP 0118.5
Figure 3. Step Hydraulics Installation ................................................................................... WP 0118.7
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GAUGES........................................................................................... WP 0119
Figure 1. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Removed .................................................................. WP 0119.2
Figure 2. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Removal.................................................................... WP 0119.3
Figure 3. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Installation................................................................. WP 0119.5
Figure 4. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Installation................................................................. WP 0119.6
HYDRAULIC FILTER................................................................................................................... WP 0120
Figure 1. Hydraulic Filter Element Change ........................................................................... WP 0120.3
Figure 2. Hydraulic Filter Removal........................................................................................ WP 0120.4
Figure 3. Hydraulic Filter Installation..................................................................................... WP 0120.6
Figure 4. Hydraulic Filter Installation..................................................................................... WP 0120.7/8
GOOSENECK CYLINDER HYDRAULICS .................................................................................. WP 0121
Figure 1. Streetside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Removal ............................................ WP 0121.3
Figure 2. Curbside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Removal.............................................. WP 0121.3
Figure 3. Streetside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Installation ......................................... WP 0121.5
Figure 4. Curbside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Installation........................................... WP 0121.6
GOOSENECK CYLINDER .......................................................................................................... WP 0122
Figure 1. Lowering Gooseneck onto Supports ..................................................................... WP 0122.3
Figure 2. Gooseneck Cylinder Removal ............................................................................... WP 0122.5
Figure 6. Gooseneck Cylinder Installation ............................................................................ WP 0122.9
HYDRAULIC TANK FILTER........................................................................................................ WP 0123
Figure 1. Hydraulic Tank Filter Removal............................................................................... WP 0123.2
Figure 2. Hydraulic Tank Filter Installation............................................................................ WP 0123.4
PLATFORM SUSPENSION HYDRAULICS ................................................................................ WP 0124
Figure 1. Hydraulic Hose Routing ......................................................................................... WP 0124.2
Figure 2. Block Clamp A Removal ........................................................................................ WP 0124.3
Figure 3. Block Clamp B Removal ........................................................................................ WP 0124.3
Figure 4. Bogies Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 Removal .................................................................. WP 0124.4
Figure 5. Curbside No. 1 Bogie Removal ............................................................................. WP 0124.5
Figure 10. Streetside Bogies 1 thru 5 Removal .................................................................... WP 0124.7
Figure 11. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Removal.................................................. WP 0124.8
Figure 12. Curbside Tubing Removal ................................................................................... WP 0124.9
Figure 13. Streetside Front Tubing Removal ........................................................................ WP 0124.10
Figure 14. Curbside Tubing Removal ................................................................................... WP 0124.11
Figure 15. Curbside Streetside Tubing Removal.................................................................. WP 0124.12
Figure 16. Curbside Tubing Installation ................................................................................ WP 0124.14
Figure 17. Tubing Installation................................................................................................ WP 0124.15
Figure 18. Streetside Tubing Installation .............................................................................. WP 0124.16
Figure 19. Curbside Tubing Installation ................................................................................ WP 0124.17
Figure 20. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly installation............................................... WP 0124.18
Figure 21. Street Bogies 1 thru 5 Installation........................................................................ WP 0124.19
Figure 22. Curbside No. 5 Bogie Installation ........................................................................ WP 0124.19
xviii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 27. Bogies Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 Installation ............................................................. WP 0124.22
Figure 28. Hydraulic Hose Routing ....................................................................................... WP 0124.23
Figure 29. Block Clamp B ..................................................................................................... WP 0124.23
Figure 30. Hydraulic Hose Routing ....................................................................................... WP 0124.24
Figure 31. Block Clamp A ..................................................................................................... WP 0124.24
PLATFORM STEERING HYDRAULICS ..................................................................................... WP 0125
Figure 1. Platform Steering Hydraulics ................................................................................. WP 0125.3
Figure 10. Platform Steering Hydraulics ............................................................................... WP 0125.13
Figure 11. Platform Steering Hydraulics ............................................................................... WP 0125.14
Figure 12. Platform Steering Hydraulics ............................................................................... WP 0125.15/16
HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY................................................................................................. WP 0126
Figure 1. Hydraulic Tank Assembly ...................................................................................... WP 0126.3
GOOSENECK CYLINDER AIR RESERVOIR............................................................................. WP 0127
Figure 1. Gooseneck Cylinder Air Reservoir Removal ......................................................... WP 0127.3
Figure 2. Gooseneck Cylinder Air Reservoir Installation ...................................................... WP 0127.5
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) ............................................................................................... WP 0128
Figure 1. APU........................................................................................................................ WP 0128.3
Figure 2. APU........................................................................................................................ WP 0128.4
GLOW PLUG ............................................................................................................................... WP 0129
Figure 1. Glow Plug Removal ............................................................................................... WP 0129.1
Figure 2. Glow Plug Installation ............................................................................................ WP 0129.2
DRAIN COCK .............................................................................................................................. WP 0130
Figure 1. Drain Cock ............................................................................................................. WP 0130.1
Figure 2. Drain Cock ............................................................................................................. WP 0130.2
COVER TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................... WP 0131
Figure 1. Cover Transmission............................................................................................... WP 0131.2
Figure 2. Cover Transmission............................................................................................... WP 0131.3/4
OIL FILTER AND DIPSTICK ....................................................................................................... WP 0132
Figure 1. Oil Filter and Dipstick............................................................................................. WP 0132.1
Figure 2. Oil Filter and Dipstick............................................................................................. WP 0132.2
OIL SENDING UNIT .................................................................................................................... WP 0133
Figure 1. Oil Sending Unit..................................................................................................... WP 0133.1
Figure 2. Oil Sending Unit..................................................................................................... WP 0133.2
NOZZLE HOLDER ASSEMBLY .................................................................................................. WP 0134
Figure 1. Nozzle Holder Assembly........................................................................................ WP 0134.3
Figure 2. Nozzle Holder Assembly........................................................................................ WP 0134.4
AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY ........................................................................................................ WP 0135
Figure 1. Air Cleaner Assembly ............................................................................................ WP 0135.2
Figure 2. Air Cleaner Assembly ............................................................................................ WP 0135.4
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................ WP 0136
Figure 1. Fuel Tank Removal................................................................................................ WP 0136.3
Figure 2. Fuel Tank Repair ................................................................................................... WP 0136.4
Figure 3. Fuel Tank Installation............................................................................................. WP 0136.5/6
FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................... WP 0137
xix
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 1. Fuel Filter Removal................................................................................................ WP 0137.3
Figure 2. Fuel Filter Repair ................................................................................................... WP 0137.4
Figure 3. Fuel Filter Installation............................................................................................. WP 0137.5/6
ENGINE PRIMING SYSTEM....................................................................................................... WP 0138
Figure 1. Engine Priming System Removal .......................................................................... WP 0138.3
Figure 2. Engine Priming System Installation ....................................................................... WP 0138.4
MECHANICAL THROTTLE CONTROL ...................................................................................... WP 0139
Figure 1. Mechanical Throttle Control Removal ................................................................... WP 0139.1
Figure 2. Mechanical Throttle Control Installation ................................................................ WP 0139.2
APU CONTROL BOX .................................................................................................................. WP 0140
Figure 1. APU Control Box.................................................................................................... WP 0140.1
Figure 9. APU Control Box.................................................................................................... WP 0140.9/10
ENGINE EXHAUST ..................................................................................................................... WP 0141
Figure 1. Engine Exhaust...................................................................................................... WP 0141.3
Figure 2. Engine Exhaust...................................................................................................... WP 0141.4
RADIATOR .................................................................................................................................. WP 0142
Figure 1. Radiator ................................................................................................................. WP 0142.2
Figure 4. Radiator ................................................................................................................. WP 0142.5/6
FAN BELT.................................................................................................................................... WP 0143
Figure 1. Fan Belt.................................................................................................................. WP 0143.1
Figure 2. Fan Belt.................................................................................................................. WP 0143.2
FAN VANAXIAL ........................................................................................................................... WP 0144
Figure 1. Fan Vanaxial .......................................................................................................... WP 0144.1
Figure 2. Fan Vanaxial .......................................................................................................... WP 0144.2
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP START SYSTEM ....................................................... WP 0145
Figure 1. APU Jump Start System ........................................................................................ WP 0145.3
Figure 8. APU Jump Start System ........................................................................................ WP 0145.13/14
STARTER .................................................................................................................................... WP 0146
Figure 1. Starter .................................................................................................................... WP 0146.1
Figure 2. Starter .................................................................................................................... WP 0146.2
WELDING/NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING................................................................................. WP 0147
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM BEARING ..................................................................................... WP 0148
Figure 1. Upper Suspension Arm Bearing Removal............................................................. WP 0148.1
Figure 2. Upper Suspension Arm Bearing Removal............................................................. WP 0148.3
Figure 3. Upper Suspension Arm Bearing Removal............................................................. WP 0148.5/6
DRUM TURNING......................................................................................................................... WP 0149
Figure 1. Drum Turning Inspection ....................................................................................... WP 0149.1
Figure 2. Drum Turning Dimension....................................................................................... WP 0149.2
AXLE ASSEMBLY ....................................................................................................................... WP 0150
Figure 1. Bogie Wheels......................................................................................................... WP 0150.2
Figure 2. Brake Chamber...................................................................................................... WP 0150.3
xx
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 3. Brake Chamber, Removed .................................................................................... WP 0150.5
Figure 4. Upper Tie Bar......................................................................................................... WP 0150.7
Figure 5. Hydraulic Pump and Hydraulic Ram...................................................................... WP 0150.9
Figure 6. Hydraulic Pump and Hydraulic Ram Removed ..................................................... WP 0150.11
Figure 7. Axle Puller.............................................................................................................. WP 0150.12
Figure 8. Bushing, Spindle and Press................................................................................... WP 0150.15
Figure 9. Trunnion and Press ............................................................................................... WP 0150.16
Figure 10. Brake Chamber Removed ................................................................................... WP 0150.17
Figure 11. Brake Chamber Installed ..................................................................................... WP 0150.18
Figure 12. Bogie Wheels....................................................................................................... WP 0150.19/20
ULTRA BUSHING........................................................................................................................ WP 0151
Figure 1. Brake Chamber Pin ............................................................................................... WP 0151.3
Figure 2. Puller...................................................................................................................... WP 0151.4
Figure 3. Ram Installed ......................................................................................................... WP 0151.5
Figure 4. Ultra Bushing Removed......................................................................................... WP 0151.6
Figure 5. Ultra Bushing and Hydraulic Tool .......................................................................... WP 0151.7
Figure 6. Ultra Bushing/Press Installation............................................................................. WP 0151.8
Figure 7. Ultra Bushing/Press Installation............................................................................. WP 0151.9
Figure 8. Ultra Bushing/Press ............................................................................................... WP 0151.10
Figure 9. Ultra Bushing Installation Tool and Housing.......................................................... WP 0151.11
Figure 10. Brake Chamber Bracket ...................................................................................... WP 0151.12
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM CYLINDER PIN ........................................................................... WP 0152
Figure 1. Suspension Arm and 50 Ton Press ....................................................................... WP 0152.3/4
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM...................................................................................................... WP 0153
Figure 1. Lower Suspension Arm Bushing............................................................................ WP 0153.3
Figure 2. Sleeve and Bearings.............................................................................................. WP 0153.4
CONNECTING LINK SLEEVE BEARINGS................................................................................. WP 0154
Figure 1. Sleeve Bearings Disassembly ............................................................................... WP 0154.1
Figure 2. Sleeve Bearings Assembly .................................................................................... WP 0154.2
STEERING CONSOLE AND SLIDE SHAFT ASSEMBLY .......................................................... WP 0155
Figure 1. Gooseneck............................................................................................................. WP 0155.3
Figure 2. Steering Column Housing...................................................................................... WP 0155.5
Figure 3. Suspension Mandrel .............................................................................................. WP 0155.7
Figure 4. Lifting Straps .......................................................................................................... WP 0155.8
Figure 5. Lifting Straps and Davit.......................................................................................... WP 0155.9/10
KINGPIN AND STEERING ARM................................................................................................. WP 0156
Figure 1. Kingpin and Steering Arm Removal ...................................................................... WP 0156.3
Figure 2. Kingpin and Steering Arm Repair .......................................................................... WP 0156.4
Figure 3. Kingpin and Steering Arm Installation ................................................................... WP 0156.6
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE FRAME ............................................................................... WP 0157
Figure 1. Hydraulic Control Module Cover Removal ............................................................ WP 0157.3
Figure 2. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Tube Removal .................................................. WP 0157.5
Figure 3. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Electrical Disconnect ........................................ WP 0157.7
Figure 4. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Removal............................................................ WP 0157.9
Figure 5. Bottom Cover Assembly Removal ......................................................................... WP 0157.10
Figure 6. Bottom Cover Assembly ........................................................................................ WP 0157.12
Figure 7. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Installation......................................................... WP 0157.13
Figure 8. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Electrical Installation ......................................... WP 0157.14
Figure 9. Hydraulic Tube Removal ....................................................................................... WP 0157.15
Figure 10. Electrical Connector and Lead Installation .......................................................... WP 0157.16
Figure 11. Hydraulic Control Module Cover Installation ....................................................... WP 0157.17/18
SNATCH BLOCK SHEAVE BUSHING........................................................................................ WP 0158
Figure 1. Snatch Block .......................................................................................................... WP 0158.1/2
GOOSENECK PIVOT PIN........................................................................................................... WP 0159
xxi
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 1. Gooseneck/Pivot Pin ............................................................................................. WP 0159.3
FLYWHEEL ................................................................................................................................. WP 0160
Figure 1. Flywheel Removal.................................................................................................. WP 0160.3
Figure 2. Flywheel Installation .............................................................................................. WP 0160.4
INJECTION PUMP ...................................................................................................................... WP 0161
Figure 1. Injection Pump ....................................................................................................... WP 0161.2
Figure 2. APU and Handcrank .............................................................................................. WP 0161.3
CARGO TIEDOWN RING REPLACEMENT ............................................................................... WP 0162
Figure 1. D-Ring Pocket........................................................................................................ WP 0162.2
Figure 2. D-Ring Retainer and D-Ring Area to Be Smoothed for Welding........................... WP 0162.3
Figure 3. Welding D-Ring and D-Ring Retainer.................................................................... WP 0162.3
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS AND CHARTS........................................................................ WP 0163
Figure 1. Lubricant – Interval No. 1....................................................................................... WP 0163.4
Table 1. Lubricant Chart No. 1 .............................................................................................. WP 0163.5
Table 3. . Lubricant Chart No. 3............................................................................................ WP 0163.10
ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS .................................................................. WP 0164
Figure F-1. Base Plate .......................................................................................................... WP 0164.2
Figure F-2. Base Tube .......................................................................................................... WP 0164.3
Figure F-3. Battery Terminal Cover (SW34329) ................................................................... WP 0164.4
Figure F-4. Bearing Seating Tool (T4249) ............................................................................ WP 0164.5
Figure F-5. Bushing Puller (SW34348-3).............................................................................. WP 0164.6
Figure F-6. Crowbar (SW32540)........................................................................................... WP 0164.7
Figure F-7. Double Loop Clamp (SW32910) ........................................................................ WP 0164.8
Figure F-8. Flushing Hose Kit (SW34434) ............................................................................ WP 0164.9
Figure F-9. Fuel GDXge Tube (SW34353-2) ......................................................................... WP 0164.10
Figure F-10. Gooseneck Support Stand ............................................................................... WP 0164.11
Figure F-11. Gusset .............................................................................................................. WP 0164.12
Figure F-12. Gusset .............................................................................................................. WP 0164.13
Figure F-13. Handle .............................................................................................................. WP 0164.14
Figure F-14. Hydraulic Control Module Removal/Installation Chain Set (SW34435) ........... WP 0164.15
Figure F-15. Removal Tool (Suspension Cylinder Pin) (SW34436) ..................................... WP 0164.16
Figure F-16. Retainer Pin...................................................................................................... WP 0164.17
Figure F-17. Support Tube.................................................................................................... WP 0164.18
Figure F-18. Thread Rod (SW34348-7) ................................................................................ WP 0164.19
Figure F-19. Urethane Bushing Removal/Installation Tool (SW34348)................................ WP 0164.20
Figure F-20. Washer (SW34348-5)....................................................................................... WP 0164.21
Figure F-21. Wire Assemblies............................................................................................... WP 0164.22
Figure F-22. Hexagon Stock, 1/2 - IN ................................................................................... WP 0164.23/24
TORQUE LIMITS......................................................................................................................... WP 0165
xxii
TM 9-2330-381-13
Page No.
WP Sequence No.
Figure 1. Measuring Screw Diameter and Length ............................................................... WP 0165.1
Figure 2. Dry Torque Limits for Metric Fasteners ................................................................ WP 0165.2
Table 1. Dry Torque Limits for Metric Fasteners ................................................................. WP 0165.2
Figure 3. Dry Torque Limits for SAE Fasteners................................................................... WP 0165.2
Table 2. Dry Torque Limits for SAE Fasteners.................................................................... WP 0165.3/4
CHAPTER 6. SUPPORTING INFORMATION

REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................ WP 0166
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) INTRODUCTION............................................. WP 0167
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART ..................................................................................... WP 0168
Table 1. MAC for Heavy Equipment Transporter Semitrailer (HET)..................................... WP 0168.1
Table 2. Tools and Test Equipment Requirements for Heavy Equipment Transporter
Semitrailer (HET).................................................................................................... WP 0168.6
Table 3. Section IV, Remarks for Heavy Equipment Transporter Semitrailer (HET) ........... WP 0168.7/8
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS ....................... WP 0169
Table 1. BII Item List ............................................................................................................. WP 0169.2
EXPENDABLE / DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST ............................................... WP 0170
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List........................................................................ WP 0170.2
xxiii/xxiv blank
TM 9-2330-381-13

This manual provides general information, operator instructions, and maintenance procedures for the
Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
Before starting any task/procedure, make sure you have read this HOW TO USE section and
the Controls and Indicators in WP 0004.
A Warning Summary appears at the beginning of this manual. The WARNING SUMMARY section provides
safety and first aid information. These warnings are repeated at appropriate points throughout the manual.
Become familiar with these warnings before using or performing maintenance on the HET semitrailer. All
of these warnings cover hazards that could injure or kill personnel.
This manual is divided into chapters representing main categories of information (e.g., General Information,
Equipment Description, and Theory of Operation; Operator Instructions; and Troubleshooting Procedures).
Each chapter is divided into work packages, which are identified by a four-digit number (e.g., 0001,
0002) printed in the upper right corner of each page.
The Table of Contents at the front of the manual lists all chapters and work packages by title. There is also an
alphabetical subject Index at the back of the manual to enable you to quickly locate specific information by topic.
This manual contains standard maintenance procedures as well as Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
(PMCS) and troubleshooting procedures. If the HET semitrailer needs repair, but you are not sure what is
wrong or how to fix it, refer to the Troubleshooting Index in Chapter 3. Identify the malfunction, locate it in the
Troubleshooting Index, and then refer to the troubleshooting procedure indicated for that symptom. Perform the
corresponding corrective actions in the order listed. If the malfunction is not listed in the troubleshooting table or
it is not corrected by the corrective action listed, notify your supervisor.
The Supporting Information chapter includes a list of reference publications, a Maintenance Allocation Chart
(MAC), Basic Issue Items (BII), and an Expendable and Durable Items List work package. These work packages
supplement specific operation and maintenance information contained in this manual.
Take a few minutes to look through this manual. We have designed this manual to make it easier
for you to find and perform the procedures needed.
xxv/xxvi blank
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF

OPERATION
FOR
SEMITRAILER, TRANSPORTER, HEAVY EQUIPMENT 70 TON, M1000

TM 9-2330-381-13 0001
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
SCOPE
This Operator and Field Maintenance Manual, including a Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC), covers the use and
maintenance of the M1000 Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
The purpose of the HET semitrailer is to load or unload and transport a battle-dressed M-1 series Main Battle Tank (MBT),
able or disabled, with or without tracks, during administrative and tactical operations.
MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS

Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by (as applicable)
DA PAM 738-750, The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual, or AR 700-138, Army
Logistics Readiness and Sustainability.
REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR)

You can help improve this publication. If you find any errors, or if you would like to recommend any improvements to the
procedures in this publication, please let us know. The preferred method is to submit your DA Form 2028 (Recommended
Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) through the Internet, on the Army Electronic Product Support (AEPS) website.
The internet address is https://aeps.ria.army.mil. The DA Form 2028 is located under the Public Applications section in
the AEPS Public Home Page. Fill out the form and click on SUBMIT. Using this form on the AEPS will enable us to
respond quicker to your comments and better manage the DA Form 2028 program. You may also mail, e-mail, or fax your
comments or DA Form 2028 directly to the U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command. The postal mail
address is U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command, ATTN: AMSTA-LC-LMPP / TECH PUBS, 1 Rock
Island Arsenal, Rock Island, IL 61299-7630. The e-mail address is [email protected]. The fax number is
DSN 793-0726. The commercial number is (309) 782-0726.
CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)

Corrosion Prevention and Control (CPC) of Army materiel is a continuing concern. It is important that any corrosion
problem with this equipment be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can be made to prevent
the problem in future items. Corrosion specifically occurs with metals. It is an electro-chemical process that causes the
degradation of metals. It is commonly caused by exposure to moisture, acids, bases, or salts. An example is the rusting
of iron. Corrosion damage in metals can be seen, depending on the metal, as tarnishing, pitting, fogging, surface residue,
and/or cracking. Plastics, composites, and rubbers can also degrade. Degradation is caused by thermal (heat), oxidation
(oxygen), solvation (solvents), or photolytic (light, typically UV) processes. The most common exposures are excessive
heat or light. Damage from these processes will appear as cracking, softening, swelling, and/or breaking. SF Form 368,
Product Quality Deficiency Report should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 738-750, The Army Maintenance
Management System (TAMMS) Users Manual.
DESTRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT ENEMY USE

Refer to TM 750-244-6, Procedures for Destruction of Tank Automotive Equipment to Prevent Enemy Use.
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT

Administrative storage procedures shall be in accordance with TM 740-90-1, Administrative Storage of Equipment. The
placement of the test set in administrative storage for short periods of time, up to six months, requires no special care or
maintenance.
These procedures cover the processing of the semitrailer prior to storage or shipment to Level A or Level B as required.
Determination of the level of protection required is made based on the following criteria:
Level A - Processing for domestic or overseas shipments and any storage outside of building in excess of 90 days from
date of processing with periodic care and preservation during storage required.
0001-1
0001 TM 9-2330-381-13
PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT - CONT.

Level B - Limited processing for immediate shipment and use, domestic or overseas, excluding open-deck loading and
for any storage not to exceed 90 days from date of processing.
Table 1. Storage and Shipment Materials.

ITEM SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION
1 MIL-B-117 Bag, Type I, Class B, Style 2
2 MIL-B-121 Barrier material, grease proofed, waterproofed,
flexible
3 PPP-B-636 Box, shipping fiberboard, Type CF, Grade W6C,
Class WR, weather-resistant
4 PPP-P-291 Cushion, cardboard
5 PPP-B-601 Box, wood, nailed, Style 1, Grade B, Type 3, load
size 63-1/2 in. x 24 in. x 13 in. with four lumber
strips across width of box
6 Plywood, Grade CDX, 1/2 in. thick.
7 MIL-L-21260 Preservative oil, Grade PE 10-1
8 MIL-L-21260 Preservative oil, Grade 30
9 MIL-C-16173 Preservative oil, Grade 4
10 QQ-S-781 Strapping, steel and seals, Type I, Class I, Finish A,
1-1/4 in. wide, 0.031 in. thick
11 QQ-S-781 Strapping, steel and seals, Type I, Class I, Finish B,
3/4 in. wide, 0.035 in. thick
12 UU-T-81 Tag, shipping paper, Type B, Size 6
13 PPP-T-60 Tape, packaging waterproof, Type III, Class I
14 MIL-T-22087 Tape, packaging waterproof, Type II
0001-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0001
LIST OF ACRONYMS/ABBREVIATIONS
Following is a list of acronyms and abbreviations contained in this manual.
Table 2. Acronyms and Abbreviations List.

A After
A Annually
AOAP Army Oil Analysis Program
APU Auxiliary Power Unit
B Before
BII Basic Issue Items
cm Centimeter
CPC Corrosion Prevention and Control
CTA Common Table of Allowance
D During
DR Drive
ea Each
EIR Equipment Improvement Recommendation
ft Feet
gal. Gallon
GMAW Gas Metal Arc Welding
GMTK General Mechanic’s Tool Kit
H Hour
HET Heavy Equipment Transporter
hp Horsepower
Hz Hertz
in. Inches
ISO International Standards Organization
kg Kilogram
km Kilometer
kPa Kilopascal
kph Kilometers Per Hour
kW Kilowatts
lb (s) Pound (s)
LK Link
LMTV Light Medium Tactical Vehicle
M Meter
MAC Maintenance Allocation Chart
max. Maximum
MBT Main Battle Tank
mm Millimeter
mph Miles Per Hour
m/s Miles Per Second
MTOE Modified Table of Organization and Equipment
National Item Identification Number (consists of
NIIN last 9 digits of NSN)
O.D. Outside Diameter
OE Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine
OVE On Vehicle Equipment
oz Ounce
PMCS Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
psi Pounds Per Square Inch
PTO Power Take Off
Q Quarterly
Qty Quantity
0001-3
0001 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 2. Acronyms and Abbreviations List - Continued.

rpm Revolutions Per Minute
RPSTL Repair Parts and Special Tools List
S Semiannaully
s Second
SATS Standard Army Tool Set
SMAW Shielded Metal Arc Welding
SMR Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability
TAMMS The Army Maintenance Management System
TMDE Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic Equipment
U/M Unit of Measure
VAC Volts, AC (Alternating Current)
VDC Volts of Continuous Current (Direct Current)
W Weekly
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0001-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0002
FIELD MAINTENANCE
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA
EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICS, CAPABILITIES, and FEATURES

The Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer is a flatbed trailer supported by five rows of axles. Each row consists of
two axle units (bogies) with inner and outer dual tires mounted to each bogie.
The semitrailer’s prime mover is the U.S. Army M1070 tractor. However, the adjustable gooseneck enables the semitrailer to
also operate efficiently with the M911 HET semitrailer.
The tractor/semitrailer combination can operate going up or down a 15 percent grade and has a maximum towing speed of
45 mph (72.4 km/h) on primary roads, 40 mph (64.3 km/h) on secondary roads, and 15 mph (24.1 km/h) off road (Figure 1).
Fully loaded, the tractor/semitrailer combination can operate on a 20 percent side slope with either side facing upslope without
tires coming off the ground or overextending the suspension assemblies (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Equipment Characteristics, Capabilities, and Features.
0002-1
0002 TM 9-2330-381-13
Fully loaded, the tractor/semitrailer can ford water to a maximum depth of 28 in. (71 cm), including wave height, without
using additional water fording equipment (Figure 2).

Towing vehicles (tractors) provide electrical power and air brake (pneumatic) pressure to the semitrailer through standard
inter-vehicular connections for brake lights, turn signals, blackout lights, clearance lights, and also service and emergency
brakes.
The semitrailer is automatically steered in response to the turning of the tractor. When in tow, the semitrailer can negotiate a
90 degree turn in one continuous motion at an intersection from one 30 ft (9 m) wide road to another 30 ft (9 m) wide road
(Figure 3).
The Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) provides power for the entire hydraulic system and is used for independent adjustments
of the suspension, steering, and gooseneck.
The bogies (suspension system, axles, brakes, and wheels) simultaneously move up and down and can be individually isolated,
allowing access for tire changes or trailer movement with a disabled bogie.
0002-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0002
LOCATION and DESCRIPTIONS of MAJOR COMPONENTS
Table 1. Major Components.

ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION
1 CABLE GUIDES
2 CABLE GUIDES
3 GOOSENECK HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
4 CABLE SHEAVE
5 AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU)
6 WHEEL CHOCKS
7 DATA and LUBE PLATES
8 STEERING WEDGE
9 STEERING CONSOLE
10 GRAB HANDLE
11 KING PIN, FIFTH WHEEL
12 INTERVEHICULAR CONNECTORS
13 INTERVEHICULAR CONNECTORS
14 GOOSENECK ASSEMBLY
15 STEERING GEAR ARM
Figure 4. Major Components.
0002-3
0002 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 2. Major Components.

1 STEPS
2 GUARDRAIL
3 DAVIT
4 SPARE TIRES
5 SOLAR BATTERY CHARGER
6 APU CONTROL BOX
7 GOOSENECK SAFETY RAIL
8 WHEEL CHOCKS
9 GOOSENECK HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
10 APU CONTROL BOX
11 CABLE GUIDE
12 GOOSENECK SAFETY RAIL CLAMP
0002-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0002
Table 3.Major Components.

1 SAFETY CIRCUIT MODULE
2 APU AUXILIARY START CABLES
3 STOWAGE BAG
0002-5
0002 TM 9-2330-381-13

1 BRAKE RELEASE VALVE
2 ISO CONTAINER LOCK BRACKETS
3 PAYLOAD TIEDOWN RINGS
4 CARGO TIEDOWN RINGS
5 LIFTING EYES
6 SUSPENSION ISOLATION VALVES
7 TRANSPORT TIEDOWN RINGS
8 STOWAGE COMPARTMENT
9 AIR RESERVOIR
10 SUPPORT LEGS
11 PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
0002-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0002

1 TRACK CURB GUIDES
2 PAYLOAD CHOCKS
3 HYDRAULIC GAUGE PANEL
4 HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE
5 PANEL COVER
6 BOGIE ASSEMBLY
7 HYDRAULIC SUSPENSION CYLINDERS
8 AXLE ASSEMBLY
9 SNATCH BLOCK
10 TIRE ASSEMBLY
0002-7
0002 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 6.
Major Components.
1 LOADING RAMP
2 SAFETY CHAIN
3 TOWING SHACKLE
4 BEACON WARNING LIGHT
5 CROWBAR and ISOLATION VALVE HANDLE EXTENSION
0002-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0002
EQUIPMENT DATA
Table 7. Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer Specifcations.

MEASUREMENTS U.S. METRIC
Trailer:
Length (Loading Ramps Up) 622 in. 1,580 cm
Length (Loading Ramps Down) 709.48 in. 1,802 cm
Width (Overall) 144 in. 366 cm
Ground Clearance (Normal) 15.5 in. 39 cm
Height:
Normal (Loading Ramps Up) 124.8 in. 316.8 cm
Maximum (Loading Ramps Up) 134.8 in. 341.8 cm
Weight (Empty) 50,400 lb 22,882 kg
Weight (Fully Loaded) 190,400 lb 86,442 kg
Maximum Payload 140,000 lb 63,560 kg
Ground Pressure (Maximum 2,200 psi 151 kPa
Payload, Per Bogie Axle)
Maximum Speed (Loaded):
Highway 45 mph 72.4 km/h
Secondary 40 mph 64.3 km/h
Off-Road 15 mph 24.1 km/h
Maximum Grade 15%
Maximum Side Slope 20%
Center of Gravity (Empty) (From 342 in. 868 cm
Kingpin)
Gooseneck:
Overall Length 151 in. 384 cm
Length (Hinge Pin to Kingpin) 129 in. 328 cm
Width 48 in. 122 cm
Height, Normal (When Coupled 63 in. 160 cm
to Tractor)
Kingpin to Ground (Platform
at Normal Running Height):
Maximum 92 in. 233 cm
Minimum 26 in. 66 cm
Steering Angle (No. 5 Bogie):
Maximum Right 45°
Maximum Left 45°
Platform:
Length 416.88 in. 1,058.9 cm
Width 120 in. 305 cm
Height:
Normal 43 in. 134 cm
Maximum 53 in. 134 cm
Minimum 33 in. 84 cm
Loading Ramps:
Width 24 in. 61 cm
Length 93.5 in. 237 cm
Loading Span Width:
Maximum (Outer Edges) 136 in. 345 cm
Minimum (Inner Edges) 49 in. 125 cm
0002-9
0002 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 7. Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer Specifcations - Continued.

APU: (Note: The APU is interchangeable when used with the appropriate
control box [EB300-D used with SW31436;EB300-E used with
SW31466-1]).
Model Kubota EB300D-
S.A.E. or Kubota
EB-300E
Type Water cooled, fuel
injected, 4-cycle,
diesel
Cylinders 1
Horsepower:
Gross 8.4 hp/3,000 rpm 6.3 kW/3,000 rpm
Intermittent 7 hp/3,000 rpm 5.2 kW/3,000 rpm
Continued 6 hp/3,000 rpm 4.5 kW/3,000 rpm
Fuel Capacity 1.27 gal. 4.8 l
Oil Capacity 1.4 qt 1.3 l
Coolant Capacity 1.3 qt 1.2 l
Axles:
Model Rockwell
International
Type TN with Post-121
Quantity 10
Rating 15,000 lb 6,810 kg
Brakes:
Type Cam-Master
Shoe Size 12.25 x 7.5
Lining Type FF Semi-
metallic
Tires:
Type Micheline Tire Corp.
Size 215/75 R17.5
Pressure (Cold) 95 psi 655 kPa
Weight 57 lb 26 kg
Quantity 42
Hydraulic System:
System Pressure 3,900 psi 26,891 kPa
Fluid Capacity:
Reservoir 16.5 gal. 64.5 l
System 27.0 gal. 105.5 l
Hydraulic Pump:
Model JS Barnes Corp.
Type Gear Pump
Electrical System:
12/24 VDC
Authorized Payloads:
M1A1 Main Battle Tank 122,790 lb 55,697 kg
M60 Series Tank 113,900 lb 51,665 kg
M88 Tracked Medium Recovery 112,000 lb 50,803 kg
Vehicle
M48A3 Tracked 90 mm Combat 105,000 lb 47,628 kg
Tank
M621-B Scraper Tractor 65,000 lb 29,510 kg
M110E2 8 in. Howitzer 60,200 lb 27,307 kg
0002-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0002
Table 7. Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer Specifcations - Continued.

M107 175 mm Self-Propelled 59,200 lb 26,853 kg
Gun
M992 Tracked 7 ton 155 Ammo 58,500 lb 26,559 kg
Carrier
M110 8 in. Howitzer 57,630 lb 26,141 kg
M578 Tracked Armor Recovery 54,000 lb 24,516 kg
Vehicle
LVTP Tracked Personnel Landing 52,770 lb 23,958 kg
Vehicle (7A1)
LVTR Tracked Recovery Landing 52,069 lb 23,639 kg
Vehicle (7A1)
M3 Cavalry Fighting Vehicle 48,790 lb 22,131 kg
LVTC Tracked Command 47,517 lb 21,572 kg
Landing Vehicle (7A1)
M2 Infantry Fighting Vehicle 47,000 lb 21,338 kg
M109A1 155 mm Howitzer 46,800 lb 21,280 kg
M109 155 mm Howitzer 44,437 lb 20,157 kg
M108 105 mm Howitzer 40,087 lb 18,183 kg
M9 ACV Armored Combat 36,000 lb 16,344 kg
Earthmover
M981 FISTV Personnel Carrier 26,900 lb 12,213 kg
M113 Tracked Armored 24,986 lb 11,884 kg
Personnel Carrier
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0002-11/12 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0003
FIELD MAINTENANCE
THEORY OF OPERATION
SYSTEM THEORY
The M1000 semitrailer is a fifth-wheel type, low-bed semitrailer that includes five hydraulically steered rows of bogie
axles, 40 wheels and tires, and an operator-adjusted and leveled hydraulic suspension. A liquid-cooled, single-cylinder,
diesel engine-powered Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) is provided to operate the trailer’s hydraulic suspension, gooseneck,
steering, and rear loading ramps. The M1000 is designed and configured to transport a combat-loaded Abrams Main
Battle Tank (MBT) and current tracked and wheeled vehicles of similar dimensions with a gross weight not exceeding
70 tons. The semitrailer is intended to permit operation over OCONUS public highways and secondary roads with a
minimum amount of special permits. In a tactical environment, the design is intended to permit limited operations on
unimproved roads, trails, and cross-country terrain at the tactical support mobility levels (combat weights).
The M1070 HET tractor is the principal prime mover of the M1000 semitrailer. The M1070/M1000 system is designated
the Heavy Equipment Transport System (HETS). The M1070 is an 8 by 8 configuration with a front-powered steering
axle. The M1070 is powered by a 500 hp, two-cycle, diesel engine coupled to a five-speed transmission, transferring
power through a two-speed transfer case. The HET tractor cab seats five personnel and has provisions for sleeping two
personnel. The tractor is equipped with two hydraulic, drum-type winches, rated at 55,078 lb (245 kN) each, and uses
a four preset tire pressure central tire insulation system (CTIS) to maintain tire air pressure. The chassis consists of an
underslung parabolic taper-leaf front suspension and an on/off road, tri-drive, air ride, rear suspension.
Figure 1. M1070 Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0003-1/2 blank
CHAPTER 2
OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS
FOR

TM 9-2330-381-13 0004
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides a general description of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer controls and
indicators.
0004-1
0004 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 1. APU Control Box Controls.
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) CONTROL BOX

The APU START SWITCH (Figure 1, Item 1) is a three-position GLOW/OFF/START switch that is used to provide power
to the APU for electric starting and battery charging. In the GLOW position (momentary), the APU glow plug warms and
prepares the APU for starting. In the OFF position, the APU charging circuit is disabled. This switch will not shut off the
APU. In the START position (momentary), the starter is engaged.
NOTE
On the control box used with APU model EB300E, the glow plug indicator is changed
from a glow-type indicator to a lamp driven by a timer.
The OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR (Figure 1, Item 2) illuminates when the oil in the APU has not reached normal operating
pressure. Once the engine operating oil pressure has been reached, the light will go out. If the oil pressure indicator does not
go out within 5 seconds, a malfunction in the engine is indicated.
The THROTTLE CONTROL (Figure 1, Item 3) is a push/pull cable controller that manually adjusts the speed of the APU. To
increase the APU speed, press the center knob and pull outward on the throttle control. Fine adjustments may be made by
turning the throttle control clockwise (to increase) or counterclockwise (to decrease). To decrease speed, push in the throttle
control. To shut down the APU, push in the throttle control.
The GLOW PLUG INDICATOR (GLOW TYPE) (Figure 1, Item 4) illuminates when the APU START SWITCH is placed
and held in the GLOW position. The indicator element glows red when the glow plug conductor has become warm enough to
assist in starting the APU.
The GLOW PLUG INDICATOR (LAMP) (Figure 1, Item 5) illuminates when the APU START SWITCH is placed and held in
the GLOW position and extinguishes 5 seconds later to indicate that the glow plug is warm enough to assist in starting the APU.
0004-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0004
Figure 2. APU Controls.
APU CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

The FUEL TANK SIGHT INDICATOR (Figure 2, Item 1) is a sight tube that shows how much fuel is in the fuel tank.
The FUEL PETCOCK VALVE (Figure 2, Item 2) is a two-position valve that is used to allow fuel to flow to the engine
when in the OPEN position and to shut off fuel when in the CLOSED position. When CLOSED, air is vented from the
fuel line and filter.
The FUEL FILTER (Figure 2, Item 3) is used to filter fuel coming from the tank. The clear sediment bowl enables the operator
to check the filter for trapped particles and contaminants.
The OIL LEVEL GAUGE (Figure 2, Item 4) uses a dipstick to measure the oil level in the APU crankcase. Two marks
indicate when the oil level is full or when oil needs to be added. When checking oil level, the gooseneck must be positioned at
normal travel height to achieve an accurate reading.
The APU control box THROTTLE CONTROL cable connects to the SPEED CONTROL LEVER (Figure 2, Item 5) and is
used to throttle the speed of the APU. It is also used to shut down the APU by pushing the lever to the farthest right position.
The JET START PLUNGER (Figure 2, Item 6) is a piston-type pump. Pull out and push in the jet start plunger to inject fuel in
the air intake of the APU as a cold weather starting aid.
The JET START COCK (Figure 2, Item 7) is a needle valve that controls the flow of fuel for the jet start plunger. When
turned clockwise (closed), fuel is shut off to the jet start system. When turned counterclockwise (open), fuel flows from
the jet start system.
The DRAIN VALVE (Figure 2, Item 8) is used to drain the coolant from the radiator and engine block. Turn counterclockwise
to drain, and turn clockwise to close. Keep the drain valve closed during APU operation.
The DECOMPRESSION VALVE (Figure 2, Item 9) is used with the APU jump start for arctic weather starting of the APU.
When held open (up), the decompression valve partially opens the exhaust valve of the APU, and compression is reduced
during cranking. Normal position for this valve is spring-loaded closed (handle pointing down).
0004-3
0004 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 3. Hydraulic Tank Controls.
HYDRAULIC TANK CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

The HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL (Figure 3, Item 1) has an indicator and decal that identify the amount of fluid that should
be in the hydraulic tank when the semitrailer is level and at normal road height.
HYDRAULIC OIL VALVE (Figure 3, Item 2) is a ball valve that is used to cut off the supply of hydraulic fluid from
the hydraulic tank to the hydraulic pump. The normal position for this valve is OPEN, with the valve handle in line with the
valve body. To close the hydraulic oil valve, pull the valve handle upright. This valve must be in the OPEN position prior
to running the APU.
0004-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0004
Figure 4. Hydraulic Pressure Gauge Panel Controls.
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GAUGE PANEL CONTROLS

The SYSTEM PRESSURE GAUGE (Figure 4, Item 1) indicates from 0 to 6,000 psi (0 to 41,369 kPa) and measures hydraulic
pressure for the overall system during APU operations. With the APU running and no valves activated, this gauge should read
approximately 0 to 200 psi (0 to 1,379 kPa). When performing hydraulic adjustments, the system pressure may increase to
a maximum reading of 4,100 psi (28,269 kPa), which is system relief pressure.
The FRONT CURBSIDE and STREETSIDE SUSPENSION PRESSURE GAUGES (Figure 4, Item 2) indicate from 0 to
6,000 psi (0 to 41,369 kPa) and measure hydraulic pressure for the front curbside and front streetside suspension circuits
(three front bogies and gooseneck cylinder, each side, when gooseneck isolation valve is in the RUN position). When the
semitrailer is unloaded and valves are not being operated, these gauges normally read 700 to 1,100 psi (4,826 to 7,584 kPa).
When raising either curbside or streetside front suspension, the respective gauge will increase to a maximum of 4,100 psi
(28,269 kPa) when the suspension tops out. When lowering either curbside or streetside front suspension, the pressure will
decrease to 0 psi (0 kPa) when the suspension bottoms or the weight is supported by the front and rear support legs.
The REAR SUSPENSION PRESSURE GAUGE (Figure 4, Item 3) indicates from 0 to 6,000 psi (0 to 41,369 kPa) and
measures hydraulic pressure for the rear suspension circuit (four rear bogies). When the semitrailer is unloaded and the rear
suspension valve is not being operated, this gauge normally reads 700 to 1,100 psi (4,826 to 7,584 kPa). When raising rear
suspension, the pressure will increase to a maximum of 4,100 psi (28,269 kPa) when the suspension tops out. When lowering
rear suspension, the pressure will decrease to 0 psi (0 kPa) when suspension bottoms or weight is supported by support legs.
The HYDRAULIC FILTER GAUGE (Figure 4, Item 4) is a colored gauge that is used to identify blockage or contamination
in the hydraulic filter element. The normal indication while the APU is running should be in the green zone. If the reading is in
the yellow zone, the element is starting to become contaminated and should be replaced no later than the next scheduled
maintenance. If the reading is in the red zone, the filter is contaminated and should be replaced. In cold weather conditions,
the gauge will read out of the green zone until the oil has warmed to normal operating temperature.
The STEERING PRESSURE INDICATOR (Figure 4, Item 5) lights when the hydraulic pressure in the automatic steering
system drops below 68 psi (469 kPa) and the running light circuit is powered. Once pre-charge pressure is restored to the
steering system by running the APU and momentarily operating the steering control valve in both directions, the light
will go out.
0004-5
0004 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 5. Hydraulic Controls and Isolation Valves.
HYDRAULIC CONTROLS AND ISOLATION VALVES

The FRONT STREETSIDE VALVE (Figure 5, Item 1) is a three-position hydraulic valve that is spring-loaded to the center
(neutral) position and used to provide hydraulic pressure for raising and lowering the three front streetside bogies. Pull up to
raise front streetside of the platform, or push down to lower front streetside of the platform. This function will not operate if
the suspension shutoff valve handle is pushed inward to the SHUTOFF position.
The STEERING VALVE (Figure 5, Item 2) is a three-position hydraulic valve that is spring-loaded to the center (neutral)
position and used to provide manual steering to the steerable bogies when coupled to a winch vehicle. When the lever is
pulled up, bogies are realigned for a right-hand turn; when the lever is pushed down, bogies are realigned for a left-hand turn.
The FRONT CURBSIDE VALVE (Figure 5, Item 3) is a three-position hydraulic valve that is spring-loaded to the center
(neutral) position and used to provide hydraulic pressure for raising and lowering the three front curbside bogies. Pull up
to raise the front curbside of the platform, or push down to lower the front curbside of the platform. This function will not
operate if the suspension shutoff valve handle is pushed inward to the SHUTOFF position.
The REAR VALVE (Figure 5, Item 4) is a three-position hydraulic valve spring-loaded to the center (neutral) position and used
to provide hydraulic pressure for either raising or lowering two rear left and right bogies. Pull up to raise the rear bogies,
or push down to lower the rear bogies. This function will not operate if the suspension shutoff valve handle is pushed
inward to the SHUTOFF position.
0004-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0004

The GOOSENECK VALVE (Figure 6, Item 1) is a three-position hydraulic valve that is spring-loaded to the center (neutral)
position and used to provide hydraulic pressure for either raising or lowering the gooseneck. The semitrailer must be
uncoupled, and the gooseneck isolation valve must be in the ADJUST (pulled outboard) position to make adjustments. Pull up
to raise the gooseneck, or push down to lower the gooseneck. This function will not operate correctly if the suspension shutoff
valve handle is pushed inward to the SHUTOFF position.
The SUSPENSION SHUTOFF VALVE (Figure 6, Item 2) is a series of ball valves that are used to shut off hydraulic power to
the semitrailer suspension. There are two positions for this valve handle: pushed inward is SHUTOFF, and pulled outward is
ADJUST. When in the SHUTOFF position, the ball valves are closed and provide protection against unexpected suspension
and/or gooseneck movement. When in the ADJUST position, the ball valves are open and allow normal suspension and
gooseneck adjustments to be made. The valve handle should be placed in the ADJUST position as soon as the APU is started
and prior to making any adjustments to the platform/gooseneck. This valve must be placed in the SHUTOFF position for
driving or parking storage. If the semitrailer is to be parked/stored while uncoupled from a tractor, the gooseneck must be
completely lowered before moving this valve handle from the ADJUST to SHUTOFF position.
The GOOSENECK ISOLATION VALVE (Figure 6, Item 3) is a series of ball valves that are used to isolate the gooseneck
hydraulic cylinders from the suspension equalization system. When the gooseneck needs adjusting, or the semitrailer is being
uncoupled from a tractor, the gooseneck isolation valve handle must be pulled outward (ADJUST) to prevent the gooseneck
from falling and damaging any equipment. When coupled to a tractor, the normal position for this valve handle is the RUN
(inward) position. When uncoupled from a tractor, the normal position for this valve is in the ADJUST (outward) position.
This valve must be operated only when coupling/uncoupling the semitrailer from a tractor or when gooseneck adjustments
are required while uncoupled from a tractor. This valve handle must be placed in the RUN position for driving. If the
semitrailer is to be parked/stored uncoupled from a tractor, the gooseneck must be completely lowered before moving this
valve handle from the ADJUST to RUN position.
0004-7
0004 TM 9-2330-381-13

There are ten SUSPENSION ISOLATION VALVE (Figure 7, Item 1) assemblies on the semitrailer, one for each bogie unit.
The suspension isolation valve is used to isolate a suspension cylinder of an affected bogie from the hydraulic system. The normal
position for this valve is OPEN with the valve handle facing forward toward the front of the semitrailer. The isolation valve
handle extension bar, located at the rear of the semitrailer below the loading ramps, should be used to open or close each
suspension isolation valve. To isolate a bogie, find the appropriate isolation valve, insert the hook end of the isolation valve
handle extension onto the isolation valve handle, and pull the valve handle outward to the CLOSED position. To un-isolate
a bogie, place the hook end of the extension handle behind the CLOSED valve handle and push the valve handle forward,
toward the front of the semitrailer, to the OPEN position.
0004-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0004
Figure 8. Bed Height Indicator.
BED HEIGHT INDICATOR CONTROLS

There are three BED HEIGHT INDICATORS (Figure 8, Item 1), one located on each No. 1 front curbside and streetside bogie
and one on No. 5 rear curbside bogie. The bed height indicators point to each other when the platform height is set at road
height, approximately 43 in. (109 cm) for that hydraulic subsystem.
Figure 9. Crowbar.
CROWBAR
The CROWBAR (Figure 9, Item 1) has three permanently marked lines (WP 0036) to measure platform heights from the
ground to the top of the platform. The bottom mark is for the rear platform loading position, 34 in. (86 cm). The center mark
is for the normal platform height, 43 in. (109 cm). The top mark is for the front platform loading position, 50 in. (127 cm).
When not in use, the crowbar is stowed on the rear of the semitrailer below the loading ramps.
0004-9
0004 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 10. Brake Release Valve.
PNEUMATIC CONTROLS
The BRAKE RELEASE VALVE (Figure 10, Item 1) is a push/pull type valve used to disengage the parking brakes when the
semitrailer is not connected to a tractor. Push in the handle to charge air pressure and release the parking brakes. Pull out the
handle to release air pressure and to engage the parking brakes. This valve can only be cycled a few times before the air
supply in the air tanks must be replenished.
Figure 11. Air Tank Drain Valve.
There are five AIR TANK DRAIN VALVES (Figure 11, Item 1) on this semitrailer. Three are located on the curbside of
the platform, and two are located on the streetside of the platform. These drain valves are used to drain either moisture
or air pressure from air tanks. Pull and hold the lanyard until moisture is no longer being discharged or until all air in
that tank is released.
0004-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0004
Figure 12. Front Support Leg Handcrank Controls.
HANDCRANK CONTROLS
The FRONT SUPPORT LEG HANDCRANK (Figure 12, Item 1) is a single-speed handcrank that operates an internal winch
attached to a lifting strap. The handcrank is used to manually raise and lower the lower shaft and foot of the support legs. A
retaining pin is used to lock the lower shaft in one of four preselected height settings (holes). The bottom hole of the lower
shaft is used to stow the lower leg and foot during transport. The retaining pin is installed from the outboard side of each
support leg. The handcrank for the curbside support leg is located on the inward side of the leg, while the handcrank for the
streetside support leg is located on the outboard side of the leg. The streetside support leg also contains a step that provides
personnel access to the platform. To lower and secure either support leg, rotate the handcrank counterclockwise until the
desired retaining pin hole in the lower leg is aligned with the hole in the upper housing of the support leg. Install the retaining
pin. To raise either leg, rotate the handcrank clockwise sufficiently to relieve tension on the retaining pin. Remove the pin and
continue cranking in a clockwise direction until desired selected height is reached. Insert the retaining pins.
0004-11
0004 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 13. Rear Support Leg Handcrank Controls.
The REAR SUPPORT LEG HANDCRANKS (Figure 13, Item 1) each contain an adjusting nut and require a ratchet and
socket to lower or raise the support leg’s lower tube and foot. To lower the support legs, raise the cover and use the ratchet and
socket to rotate the adjusting nut counterclockwise to the desired position. Clockwise rotation of the adjusting nut raises the
leg. To access the adjusting nut, release the cover latch and raise the metal cover sufficiently to engage the adjusting nut
with the ratchet and socket. Upon completion of the rear support leg adjustment, put the cover back in position and secure it
with the cover latch. To prevent in-transit vibration from rotating the adjusting nut and lowering the rear support leg, install
a socket head screw on the adjusting nut that contacts a bar on the cover, preventing movement. Any time the cover is to
be closed, ensure the socket head screw is positioned outboard prior to closing.
0004-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0004
Figure 14. Winch Handcrank Controls.
WINCH HANDCRANK CONTROLS

The WINCH HANDCRANK (Figure 14, Item 1) is used to extend and retract cable from the winch spool on the davit
assembly. The winch handcrank has an anti-slip device to prevent unintentional pay out of cable. To pay out cable, turn the
winch handcrank counterclockwise while pulling on the winch cable. Turn the crank clockwise to retract the winch cable.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0004-13/14 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0005
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) STARTUP AND SHUTDOWN
INITIAL SETUP:
References Personnel Required:
WP 0035 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer Auxiliary Power Unit
(APU) startup and shutdown.
Before operating the semitrailer, perform the Before (B) Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) (WP 0035) and
perform all of the required preventive maintenance.
• Know the capabilities of the semitrailer and DO NOT exceed them.
• Know the capabilities and limitations of the tractor, when coupled, and DO NOT exceed them.
• Know how to use the gauges, indicators, and control features of the semitrailer in the safest manner.
0005-1
0005 TM 9-2330-381-13
APU STARTUP
NOTE
Ensure that the semitrailer is parked on level ground. If the tractor and semitrailer are
coupled, apply the semitrailer's parking brakes.
1. Remove four wheel chocks (Figure 1, Item 3) from gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Place wheel chocks (Figure 1, Item 3) in front and behind each outer dual tire (Figure 1, Item 2) on both curbside and
streetside No. 1 bogies (Figure 1, Item 4).
Figure 1. APU Startup.
WARNING
On some semitrailers, a solar battery charger is mounted on top of the gooseneck directly in front of the
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on or trip over
it. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
3. At rear of gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 4), gain access to APU (Figure 2, Item 6) by unhooking step retainer (Figure 2,
Item 1) and raising step section (Figure 2, Item 2) up and forward. Secure step section by hooking top step retainer
to strap (Figure 2, Item 3) on step section.
0005-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0005
CAUTION
The hydraulic tank oil valve must be open prior to starting the APU. Failure to follow this
caution may result in serious damage to the hydraulic pump.
NOTE
Hydraulic tank oil valve is shown in the OPEN position.
4. Open hydraulic tank oil valve (Figure 2, Item 7).
NOTE
The fuel petcock is shown in the OPEN position.
5. Check that fuel petcock (Figure 2, Item 5) is in OPEN position.
6. Unhook strap (Figure 2, Item 3) from step (Figure 2, Item 2) and lower step to normal position. Secure step in place by
hooking step retainer (Figure 2, Item 1) to catch on fixed bottom step section.
0005-3
0005 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Hearing protection is required within 10 ft (3 m) of the APU when the APU is running. Failure
7. Open cover (Figure 3, Item 2) to APU control box (Figure 3, Item 3). Pull out throttle control (Figure 3, Item 1) fully.
0005-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0005
CAUTION
Oil pressure light must go out within 15 seconds. If oil pressure light stays lit, shut down
APU immediately or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
On the control box used with APU model EB300-E, the glow plug indicator is changed from a
glow-type indicator to a lamp-type indicator, which is driven by a timer.
8. Turn START switch (Figure 4, Item 1) counterclockwise to GLOW position and hold.
a. In about 15 to 20 seconds, depending upon outside ambient temperature, the glow plug indicator (Figure 4,
Item 2) for the GLOW TYPE indicator will glow brightly.
9. In about 15 to 20 seconds, depending upon outside ambient temperature, the glow plug indicator (Figure 4, Item 2) for the
GLOW TYPE indicator will glow brightly.
10. The glow plug indicator (Figure 4, Item 3) for the LAMP TYPE indicator will light immediately. In 5 seconds the light
will extinguish, indicating that the glow plug is warm enough to assist in starting.
0005-5
0005 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
• Release the switch from the START position to prevent overheating of the starter motor if the
APU fails to start within 15 seconds. Allow the starter motor to cool 1 to 2 minutes before trying
again. If the APU fails to start after four tries, notify field maintenance.
• DO NOT rotate the START switch to the START position while the starter motor is still turning from the
previous try. This could result in serious damage to the starter motor and engine flywheel ring gear.
• Rotate START switch to OFF position after APU has started, or damage to equipment may result.
11. Turn START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) clockwise to START position and hold for 15 seconds or until APU (Figure 5,
Item 4) starts.
12. Once APU (Figure 5, Item 4) starts, immediately rotate START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to OFF position.
13. If APU (Figure 5, Item 4) fires, but does not start, rotate START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to OFF position. Wait for
engine to stop turning and try again.
14. If APU (Figure 5, Item 4) fails to start after four attempts, rotate START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to OFF position and
notify field maintenance.
15. Check oil pressure indicator light (Figure 5, Item 3) once APU (Figure 5, Item 4) starts. If oil pressure indicator light does
not go out once APU starts and has run for 15 seconds, shut down APU by pushing in throttle control (Figure 5, Item 2).
Notify field maintenance. If oil pressure indicator light does go out, proceed with step 16.
CAUTION
DO NOT subject the APU to any load until it has warmed up properly. Premature failure
may occur and the life of the engine may be shortened.
16. Allow APU (Figure 5, Item 4) to run at least 3 to 5 minutes to warm up properly.
17. Reduce engine speed to idle by pushing inward on throttle control (Figure 5, Item 2). APU (Figure 5, Item 4) is ready for
normal operation.
18. Allow APU (Figure 5, Item 4) to run continuously for at least 30 minutes to recharge APU battery whenever operations
permit.
19. Run APU (Figure 5, Item 4) until all PMCS tasks are completed, if it has been started for PMCS. This is especially
important if the semitrailer has been stored and the APU has not been started for several days or if the weather is cold.
0005-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0005

END OF TASK
0005-7
0005 TM 9-2330-381-13
APU SHUTDOWN
1. Push in throttle control (Figure 6, Item 3) completely to stop APU (Figure 6, Item 5).
2. Ensure low oil pressure indicator light (Figure 6, Item 2) and glow plug indicator (Figure 6, Item 1) are not lit.
3. Close cover (Figure 6, Item 4) to APU control box (Figure 6, Item 5).
Figure 6. APU Shutdown.
WARNING
it. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
• Steps 4 through 7 below apply only if the semitrailer is to be placed in extended (short or long term) storage.
• The fuel petcock is shown in the open position.
4. At rear of gooseneck (Figure 7, Item 4), unhook step retainer (Figure 7, Item 1) from step section (Figure 7, Item 2) and
raise step section up and forward.
5. Secure step section (Figure 7, Item 2) by hooking top step retainer (Figure 7, Item 1) to strap (Figure 7, Item 3) on
step section.
0005-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0005
NOTE
The fuel petcock is shown in the open position.
6. Turn fuel petcock (Figure 7, Item 5) counterclockwise to closed position.
7. Unhook strap (Figure 7, Item 3) from retainer (Figure 7, Item 1) and lower step section (Figure 7, Item 2) to normal
position. Secure step section in place by hooking step retainer to catch on fixed bottom step section.
0005-9
0005 TM 9-2330-381-13
8. Remove four wheel chocks (Figure 8, Item 3) from each dual outer tire (Figure 8, Item 2) of No. 1 bogie (Figure 8, Item 4).
9. Stow four wheel chocks (Figure 8, Item 3) in gooseneck (Figure 8, Item 1).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0005-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0006
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) COLD WEATHER STARTING
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
2
References
WP0005
WP0021
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer Auxiliary Power Unit
(APU) cold weather starting.
0006-1
0006 TM 9-2330-381-13
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) COLD WEATHER STARTING
NOTE
The following procedures apply when ambient temperatures range from 40 to -25°F (4 to -31°C). When
the temperature is below -25°F (-31°C), refer to Arctic Weather APU Starting (WP 0021).
1. Perform steps 1 through 6 of Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Startup and Shutdown (WP 0005).
2. Prime jet start (Figure 1, Item 3) by pulling jet start valve knob (Figure 1, Item 1) out with jet start petcock (Figure 1,
Item 2) closed. If jet start valve knob does not remain out, check that jet start petcock is fully closed, and then pull
jet start valve knob again.
3. With aid of an assistant, perform steps 7 through 14 in APU Startup (WP 0005).
4. Turn jet start petcock (Figure 1, Item 2) counterclockwise to open when APU starts to crank over.
5. Pump jet start valve (Figure 1, Item 1) three times to prime APU. A few additional pumps may be necessary before
engine runs smoothly.
6. Turn jet start petcock (Figure 1, Item 2) clockwise to close once engine is running smoothly. Secure step section in its
normal position. Refer to APU Startup (WP 0005), step 6. Continue startup procedure. Refer to APU Startup
(WP 0005), steps 15 through 18.
Figure 1. APU Cold Weather Starting.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0006-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0007
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ADJUSTING GOOSENECK
INITIAL SETUP:
References WP 0011
WP 0005 WP 0013
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for adjusting the gooseneck of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0007-1
0007 TM 9-2330-381-13
ADJUSTING GOOSENECK
WARNING
• Prior to adjusting the gooseneck height, ensure that both the gooseneck isolation and the suspension
SHUTOFF valve handles have been pulled outward to the ADJUST position.
• If the gooseneck needs adjusting, verify that the front support legs are lowered and supporting the platform.
CAUTION
If the semitrailer is coupled to the tractor, DO NOT attempt to adjust the gooseneck
or damage to equipment may result.
1. Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005). Ensure that APU throttle control is pulled out completely and APU is
running at full speed.
2. Uncouple tractor and semitrailer (WP 0013).
3. Check that front support legs are lowered and supporting platform (WP 0011).
4. Ensure gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2) and suspension SHUTOFF valve handle (Figure 1, Item 3) are
pulled outward, as far as they will go, to ADJUST position.
5. Pull up handle of gooseneck valve (Figure 1, Item 4) to raise gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1). Once gooseneck reaches
highest position and stops, release handle of gooseneck valve.
6. Push down handle of gooseneck valve (Figure 1, Item 4) to lower gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1). Once gooseneck reaches
lowest position and stops, release handle of gooseneck valve.
0007-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0007
NOTE
When the gooseneck is raised to an intermediate height, it may travel 1 to 3 in. (2.5 to 7.6 cm) upward
after the handle is released. This is caused by air trapped in the cylinder and may be stopped immediately
by momentarily moving the handle to the down position. If traveling occurs, it may be minimized
by operating the gooseneck from full-up to full-down for two full cycles.
7. Raise or lower gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) to any desired height.
8. If semitrailer is going to be parked, lower gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) by pushing handle of gooseneck valve (Figure 1,
Item 4) until gooseneck reaches lowest position and stops; then, release handle of gooseneck valve.
9. After gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) adjustments are complete, shut down APU (WP 0005).
Figure 1. Adjusting Gooseneck.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0007-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0008
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ADJUSTING PLATFORM HEIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required WP 0007
2 WP 0008
WP 0011
References
WP 0012
WP 0004
WP 0005
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for adjusting the platform height of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
ADJUSTING PLATFORM HEIGHT
CAUTION
If the semitrailer is loaded, DO NOT make any platform adjustments while it is uncoupled
or severe damage to equipment may result.
1. Start and run Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) at full throttle. Refer to APU Startup and Shutdown (WP 0005).
CAUTION
The suspension SHUTOFF valve handle must be pulled outward to the ADJUST position
prior to operating any platform/gooseneck valve handles. The suspension SHUTOFF valve
isolates the suspension and prevents operation. If the valve handle is not properly positioned
for intended operation, severe damage to equipment may result.
2. Pull out handle of suspension SHUTOFF valve (Figure 1, Item 2) to ADJUST position (WP 0004).
WARNING
Ensure both streetside and curbside front bogie wheels are chocked. After the parking
brakes are released, the semitrailer may roll uncontrolled.
Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
The brakes on the semitrailer should be released when making platform adjustments. If the parking brakes
are not released, platform adjustments will be much slower and more difficult to accomplish.
3. If semitrailer is coupled, release semitrailer parking brakes. If semitrailer is uncoupled and semitrailer air tanks contain
sufficient air, push in knob of brake release valve to release brakes (WP 0004).
0008-1
0008 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
If the semitrailer is coupled to a tractor, the gooseneck isolation valve handle must be in the RUN position
(handle pushed inward). If the semitrailer is uncoupled and the gooseneck needs adjusting, verify that the
front support legs are lowered and supporting the platform and that all personnel are clear of the gooseneck
before operating the gooseneck isolation valve.
4. If semitrailer is uncoupled and gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) needs to be raised, ensure that handle of gooseneck isolation
valve (Figure 1, Item 3) is in ADJUST position, handle pulled outward.
5. If semitrailer is coupled, ensure handle of gooseneck isolation valve (Figure 1, Item 3) is in RUN position, handle
pushed inward.
Figure 1. Adjusting Platform Height.
0008-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0008
CAUTION
Wheel chocks must be moved away from tires prior to adjusting platform height or
damage to wheel chocks or tires may result.
6. Move all four wheel chocks (Figure 2, Item 1) approximately 6 in. (15.24 cm) away from tires prior to adjusting platform.
0008-3
0008 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
• DO NOT leave semitrailer unattended with suspension raised to highest position. Outside temperatures
may cause thermal expansion of the hydraulic fluid and create unwanted pressure buildup without means to
relieve pressure. Thermal expansion may cause premature failure or severe damage to equipment.
• DO NOT move semitrailer with suspension raised to its highest position. Individual bogies may sustain
excess load, which may result in premature cylinder failure or severe damage to equipment.
NOTE
If the platform becomes uneven during adjustment, release the valve handle for the platform area
that is leading the adjustment while holding the other two valve handles. Once the platform evens
out, continue to operate all three valve handles to adjust platform.
7. To raise platform (Figure 3, Item 1), simultaneously pull up and hold handles of front curbside (Figure 3, Item 3), front
streetside (Figure 3, Item 2), and rear (Figure 3, Item 4) suspension valves. Once platform reaches highest position, has
stopped, and APU rpm decreases, release all three valve handles.
CAUTION
DO NOT allow suspension to completely bottom out in the lowest position (unless otherwise directed by
specific operation or maintenance procedures) or individual bogies may sustain excess load and result
in premature cylinder failure or severe damage to equipment. To ensure proper suspension pressure
equalization, lower platform until the shortest (compression) suspension cylinder piston still has 1 in.
(2.54 cm) of polished chrome exposed. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to equipment.
8. To lower platform (Figure 3, Item 1), push down and hold rear suspension valve handle (Figure 3, Item 4).
9. Once rear of platform (Figure 3, Item 1) starts to lower, push down and hold front curbside suspension valve handle
(Figure 3, Item 3) and front streetside suspension valve handle (Figure 3, Item 2).
10. Once platform (Figure 3, Item 1) reaches lowest suggested height, release all three suspension valve handles (Figure 3,
Item 2, Item 3, and Item 4).
0008-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0008
NOTE
If the semitrailer is uncoupled, difficulty in lowering the rear of the platform may be experienced due to the
offset weight of the gooseneck. Perform steps 11 through 15 if this problem occurs.
11. Raise platform (Figure 4, Item 1) to normal running height of 43 in. (109.22 cm) (refer to step 6 above), and lower both
front support legs (WP 0011) to support platform at running height.
12. Push down and hold rear valve handle (Figure 4, Item 4). As rear of platform (Figure 4, Item 1) starts to lower, push down
front curbside suspension valve handle (Figure 4, Item 3) and front streetside suspension valve handle (Figure 4, Item 2).
NOTE
As front support legs contact the ground, continue to hold all three valve handles down as rear of platform goes down.
13. Pull up front curbside suspension valve handle (Figure 4, Item 3) and front streetside suspension valve handle (Figure
4, Item 2) to raise front of platform (Figure 4, Item 1).
NOTE
When front of platform is high enough to stow front support legs, release both suspension valve handles.
14. Raise and secure front support legs. Refer to Operating Front Support Legs (WP 0011).
15. Push down and hold all three valve handles for front streetside (Figure 4, Item 2), curbside (Figure 4, Item 3), and rear
valves (Figure 4, Item 4) until platform (Figure 4, Item 1) reaches recommended lowest height.
0008-5
0008 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. After lowering platform is complete, evenly raise platform (step 6 above) and lower platform (steps 7 through 9 above).
17. With aid of an assistant, check bed height indicators on each of three suspension assemblies (WP 0004).
18. With aid of another assistant, make adjustments to the platform as needed. Level the platform to a normal road height of
43 in. (109 cm) (WP 0008).
19. Lower front and rear support legs to support platform (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
20. Lower platform onto support legs. Refer to steps 11 and 12 above.
NOTE
Perform steps 21 through 23 after all platform adjustments are complete.
21. If semitrailer is to be parked uncoupled, lower gooseneck (Figure 5, Item 1) to lowest position (WP 0007).
22. Push in handles of suspension SHUTOFF valve (Figure 5, Item 2) and gooseneck isolation valve (Figure 5, Item 3), as
far as they will go, to SHUTOFF and RUN positions.
23. Shut down APU (WP 0005).
0008-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0008
WARNING
Ensure that vented dummy coupling is installed on the emergency (red) gladhand prior to releasing
brakes with the brake release valve. If a nonvented dummy coupling is installed, the parking
brakes cannot be reapplied and injury to personnel may result.
NOTE
Reapply semitrailer parking brakes using semitrailer brake valve on tractor, if coupled.
24. Apply brakes on semitrailer by pulling knob on brake release valve outward (WP 0004). If no other braking applications
are required, install dummy coupling onto emergency gladhand (WP 0004).
25. Place wheel chocks (Figure 6, Item 2) in front of and behind tires (Figure 6, Item 1).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0008-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0009
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING LOADING RAMPS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for operating the loading ramps of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
0009-1
0009 TM 9-2330-381-13
ADJUSTING LOADING RAMPS
WARNING
When the ramp stow chains are disconnected from the platform, DO NOT stand behind
the ramps or near the path the ramps can travel when being lowered or raised. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury to personnel.
NOTE
• The loading ramps may require span width adjustment to accommodate the intended
payload. If ramps require adjustment, perform steps 1 through 4.
• Adjustments must be accomplished prior to lowering the ramps.
• If the ramps DO NOT require adjustment, proceed to the Lowering Loading Ramps procedure (below).
• Both loading ramps are adjusted the same way. Adjust the ramps one at a time.
1. Release snap (Figure 1, Item 2) and load binder (Figure 1, Item 3). Remove stow chain hook (Figure 1, Item 4)
from slotted hole (Figure 1, Item 10) in platform (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Connect stow chain hook (Figure 1, Item 4) to aft set of International Standards Organization (ISO) container brackets
mounting hole (Figure 1, Item 5). Close load binder (Figure 1, Item 3).
3. Remove hitch pins (Figure 1, Item 9) and crowbar (Figure 1, Item 7) from rear of platform (Figure 1, Item 6).
4. Reinstall hitch pins (Figure 1, Item 9) to retain remaining isolation valve handle extension (Figure 1, Item 8).
0009-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0009
Figure 1. Adjusting Loading Ramps.
0009-3
0009 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Insert small end of crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) in ramp lift lever (Figure 2, Item 5) and bar strip (Figure 2, Item 6).
6. With aid of an assistant, position one person on rear of platform (Figure 2, Item 3) to push ramp (Figure 2, Item 2)
rearward against stow chain (Figure 2, Item 1) until ramp is perpendicular to platform.
7. Second person must push or pull on crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) in direction required to slide ramp (Figure 2,
Item 2) outboard from center.
8. Continue to place crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) in holes along bar strip (Figure 2, Item 6) and move ramp (Figure 2,
Item 2) to furthest outboard position.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 above to adjust remaining ramp (Figure 2, Item 2).
Figure 2. Adjusting Loading Ramps.

END OF TASK
0009-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0009
LOWERING LOADING RAMPS
NOTE
Both loading ramps are lowered the same way. Lower ramps one at a time.
1. Open snap (Figure 3, Item 3) and load binder (Figure 3, Item 5).
2. Remove stow chain hook (Figure 3, Item 6) from platform (Figure 3, Item 7) and attach hook into hole in ramp lever
(Figure 3, Item 4). Close load binder (Figure 3, Item 5).
3. Standing behind platform (Figure 3, Item 7), between both ramps (Figure 3, Item 1), grasp lower handle (Figure 3,
Item 8) on loading ramp and pull downward.
4. As ramp (Figure 3, Item 1) swings downward, grasp upper handle (Figure 3, Item 2) and apply pressure until ramp angle is
below horizontal; then, push down until ramp is on ground.
5. Perform steps 1 through 4 above to lower other ramp (Figure 3, Item 1).
Figure 3. Lowering Loading Ramps.

END OF TASK
0009-5
0009 TM 9-2330-381-13
RAISING LOADING RAMPS
WARNING
The spring-assisted ramps, when raised from the lowered position, are under extreme tension and rise very
quickly. When raising ramps, DO NOT stand on the beavertail or in the path where any portion of the ramp
will travel during upward travel. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
Both loading ramps are raised the same way. Raise loading ramps one at a time.
1. Grasp upper handle (Figure 4, Item 2) on ramp (Figure 4, Item 1) and pull upward.
2. Release upper handle (Figure 4, Item 2) as ramp (Figure 4, Item 1) passes horizontal position and continues to raise
from spring tension.
3. Grasp lower handle (Figure 4, Item 3) and apply pressure until ramp (Figure 4, Item 1) is firmly against beavertail
(Figure 4, Item 4).
4. Open load binder (Figure 4, Item 6) and unhook stow chains (Figure 4, Item 7) from ramp lifting lever (Figure 4, Item 5).
Figure 4. Raising Loading Ramp.
0009-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0009
NOTE
• Ramps must be adjusted to furthest inward position prior to stowing for transport.
• If ramps require adjustment, perform steps 1 through 4 of Adjusting Loading Ramps (above).
If no adjustment is required, proceed to step 5 below.
5. Connect stow chain hook (Figure 5, Item 8) to foremost (large) mounting hole (Figure 5, Item 7).
6. Close load binder (Figure 5, Item 2).
7. Insert small end of crowbar (Figure 5, Item 3) through hole in ramp lift lever (Figure 5, Item 4) in bar strip (Figure 5,
Item 5).
8. With aid of an assistant, position a person on rear of platform (Figure 5, Item 6) to push ramp (Figure 5, Item 1) rearward
until it is perpendicular to platform.
9. Second person must push or pull on crowbar (Figure 5, Item 3) in direction required to slide ramp (Figure 5, Item 1) inward.
10. Continue to place crowbar (Figure 5, Item 3) in holes along bar strip (Figure 5, Item 5) and move ramp (Figure 5, Item 1)
to furthest inward position.
11. Repeat steps 1 through 10 above to raise other ramp (Figure 5, Item 1).
0009-7
0009 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. Open load binder (Figure 6, Item 2), remove stow chain hook (Figure 6, Item 3) from ISO container mounting bracket hole
(Figure 6, Item 4), and connect chain hook at slotted holes (Figure 6, Item 9) in center of platform (Figure 6, Item 10).
NOTE
If chain sags with load binder closed, open load binder, remove quick link at end of chain,
and shorten chain until there is no sag.
13. Close load binders (Figure 6, Item 2) and engage snap (Figure 6, Item 1) to prevent accidental opening.
14. Remove hitch pins (Figure 6, Item 7) from brackets (Figure 6, Item 8) and reinstall crowbar (Figure 6, Item 6) in brackets
on rear of platform (Figure 6, Item 5). Reinstall hitch pins.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0009-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0010
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING MANUAL STEERING
INITIAL SETUP: References

Personnel WP 0004
1 WP 0005
WP 0013
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for operating manual steering for the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0010-1
0010 TM 9-2330-381-13
OPERATING MANUAL STEERING

1. Start and run Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).
CAUTION
• The suspension SHUTOFF valve handle must be pulled outward to the ADJUST
position prior to operating any valve handles.
• If the suspension SHUTOFF valve handle is not properly positioned for intended
operation, severe damage to equipment may result.
2. Remove pins (Figure 1, Item 3) from access cover hasp (Figure 1, Item 2). Rotate access cover hasp and lower access
cover (Figure 1, Item 6).
3. Pull out suspension SHUTOFF valve handle (Figure 1, Item 5) to ADJUST position (WP 0004).
NOTE
• The brakes on the semitrailer should be released when making steering adjustments.
• If the brakes are not released, steering adjustments will be much slower and more difficult to accomplish.
• The parking brake may be released by one of the following methods listed in step 4 and step 5.
4. With tractor/semitrailer coupled, apply tractor parking brake and push in knob of brake release valve (Figure 1, Item 7) to
release semitrailer parking brake.
5. If uncoupled, push in knob of brake release valve (Figure 1, Item 7).
CAUTION
• If the tractor/semitrailer is uncoupled, manual steering may be used ONLY to move the steering
wedge; however, manual steering of the wheels must not be attempted.
• Manual steering without being coupled to a tractor may cause the steering arm to move to an extreme
over-center position, which may be extremely difficult to recover and may cause damage to equipment.
6. Ensure that semitrailer is coupled to tractor and steering wedge is secured/tight in tractor fifth-wheel vee entry (WP 0013).
CAUTION
Wheel chocks must be moved away from tires prior to adjusting steering, or damage
to chocks and tires may result.
7. Move four wheel chocks (Figure 1, Item 1) approximately 6 in. (15 cm) away from tires (Figure 1, Item 8) prior to
adjusting steering.
8. Push down handle of steering valve (Figure 1, Item 4) to turn steerable bogies (Figure 1, Item 9) left. Once bogies turn
completely left and stop, release handle of steering valve.
0010-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0010
Figure 1. Operating Manual Steering.
0010-3
0010 TM 9-2330-381-13
9. Pull up handle of steering valve (Figure 2, Item 4) to turn steerable bogies (Figure 2, Item 9) right. Once bogies turn
completely right and stop, release handle of steering valve.
10. Operate steering valve (Figure 2, Item 4) and return steerable bogies (Figure 2, Item 9) to approximately straight position
(in line with kingpin facing forward).
11. If no other adjustments are required, perform steps 12 through 17 below.
WARNING
Ensure that vented dummy coupling is installed on the emergency (red) gladhand prior to releasing
brakes with the brake release valve. If a nonvented dummy coupling is installed, the parking brakes
cannot be reapplied. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
12. If coupled (tractor parking brakes applied), apply semitrailer parking brakes using semitrailer brake release valve
(Figure 2, Item 7).
NOTE
If uncoupled, ensure that a vented dummy coupling is installed, or remove dummy coupling
from emergency (red) gladhand.
13. Apply brakes on semitrailer by pulling knob on brake release valve (Figure 2, Item 7) outward.
14. Move wheel chocks (Figure 2, Item 1) back in place under tires (Figure 2, Item 8).
15. Push in handles of suspension SHUTOFF valve (Figure 2, Item 5) to SHUTOFF position.
16. Close access cover (Figure 2, Item 6), rotate hasp (Figure 2, Item 2) to secure access cover, and install pins (Figure 2,
Item 3) in hasp.
0010-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0010
Figure 2. Operating Manual Steering.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0010-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0011
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING FRONT SUPPORT LEGS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required References

1 WP 0004
WP 0005
WP 0008
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for operating the front support legs of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
0011-1
0011 TM 9-2330-381-13
OPERATING FRONT SUPPORT LEGS
Lower Front Support Legs
WARNING
• Before performing any maintenance on the platform, lower the front and rear support legs.
• When lowering the support legs, ensure that feet and hands are clear of the
support leg foot as it nears the ground.
• When lowering or raising the support legs, always install the retaining pins.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in serious injury to personnel.
NOTE
• Both front support legs are lowered the same way.
• Both support legs are identical except that the retaining pins for the curbside
leg are installed from the curbside.
• Ensure the ground surface texture is strong/hard enough to support the front support legs without
sinking into the ground when preparing to lower the front support legs.
• Place large pieces of lumber and/or steel plate under the support legs if extra support is required.
• Ensure semitrailer is on level ground, wheels are chocked, and trailer parking brakes are
applied. If semitrailer is coupled to a tractor, apply semitrailer parking brake.

2. Pull out suspension SHUTOFF valve to ADJUST position, ensuring valve handle is pulled outward as far as possible
(WP 0004).
3. Raise platform until top edge of platform is 43 in. (109 cm) or higher (WP 0008).
4. Open and remove linch pins (Figure 1, Item 4) from retaining pins (Figure 1, Item 3).
5. Rotate handcrank (Figure 1, Item 8) clockwise to raise lower support leg (Figure 1, Item 6) sufficiently to relieve tension
and permit removal of retaining pins (Figure 1, Item 3).
6. Rotate and remove retaining pins (Figure 1, Item 3) and rotate handcrank (Figure 1, Item 8) counterclockwise to lower
support leg (Figure 1, Item 6) and foot (Figure 1, Item 5) toward the ground.
7. Stop handcrank (Figure 1, Item 8) rotation when highest (4th) hole (Figure 1, Item 2) in inner support leg (Figure 1, Item
6) aligns with hole (Figure 1, Item 7) in outer leg housing (Figure 1, Item 1).
8. Install and rotate retaining pin (Figure 1, Item 3) to lock retaining pin in place. Install linch pin (Figure 1, Item 4) in
retaining pin.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 of this procedure to lower other front support leg (Figure 1, Item 6).
10. Lower platform firmly onto front support legs to support platform (WP 0008).
11. If no other adjustments are required, push in suspension SHUTOFF valve handle as far as possible to SHUTOFF position
(WP 0004).
0011-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0011
Figure 1. Lower Front Support Legs.

END OF TASK
0011-3
0011 TM 9-2330-381-13
Raise Front Support Leg

2. Pull out suspension SHUTOFF valve to ADJUST position, ensuring valve handle is pulled outward as far as possible
(WP 0004).
3. Raise platform until bottom edge of platform is 43 in. (109 cm) or higher (WP 0008).
4. Rotate handcrank (Figure 2, Item 1) clockwise to raise support leg foot (Figure 2, Item 5) sufficiently to permit removal of
linch pins (Figure 2, Item 4) and retaining pins (Figure 2, Item 3) from support leg (Figure 2, Item 7).
5. Rotate and remove retaining pin (Figure 2, Item 3) from support leg (Figure 2, Item 7), and rotate handcrank (Figure 2,
Item 1) clockwise to raise support leg and foot (Figure 2, Item 5).
6. Once support leg foot (Figure 2, Item 5) is near stow position, with lowest hole (Figure 2, Item 6) in inner leg (Figure 2,
Item 7) near retaining pin hole (Figure 2, Item 2) in outer leg housing (Figure 2, Item 8), align holes (Figure 2, Item 2 and
Item 6) and install retaining pins (Figure 2, Item 3) in holes.
7. Rotate retaining pin (Figure 2, Item 3) to lock retaining pin in place and install linch pin (Figure 2, Item 4) in retaining pin.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 of this procedure to raise other front support leg (Figure 2, Item 7).
9. Lower platform to travel height of approximately 43 in. (109 cm) (WP 0008).
10. If no other adjustments are required, push in suspension SHUTOFF valve handle as far as possible to SHUTOFF position
(WP 0004).
12. If any material was used to provide ground support for front support legs, remove and stow or dispose of material.
Stow wheel chocks.
13. Restow wheel chocks on gooseneck unless needed for additional tasks.
0011-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0011
Figure 2. Raise Front Support Legs.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0011-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0012
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING REAR SUPPORT LEGS
INITIAL SETUP:
References Personnel Required
WP 0004 1
WP 0008
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for operating the rear support legs of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0012-1
0012 TM 9-2330-381-13
OPERATING REAR SUPPORT LEGS
Lowering Rear Support Legs
WARNING
• Before performing any maintenance on the platform, lower the front and rear support legs.
• When lowering the support legs, ensure that feet and hands are clear of the
support leg foot as it nears the ground.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury to personnel.
NOTE
• When preparing to lower the rear support legs, ensure the ground surface texture is strong/hard
enough to support the rear support legs without sinking into the ground.
• If extra support is required, place large pieces of lumber and/or steel plate under the support legs.
• Ensure semitrailer is on level ground, wheels are chocked, and trailer parking brakes are applied.
• Both rear support legs are lowered the same way.
1. Check bed height indicators for proper platform height. Proper height should be approximately 43 in. (109 cm) (WP 0004).
2. Perform adjustments as required to achieve correct height (WP 0008).
3. Release latch (Figure 1, Item 5) from protective cover (Figure 1, Item 1) and raise protective cover to gain access to
adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 3).
4. If necessary, use 3/4 in. ratchet and 1 5/8 in. socket to turn adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 3) counterclockwise until rear
support leg (Figure 1, Item 7) starts to lower.
5. Remove ratchet from socket and install 1/2 in. speed wrench to socket using 1/2 to 3/4 in. adapter. Turn speed wrench
counterclockwise until support leg foot (Figure 1, Item 6) makes contact with ground.
CAUTION
Ensure that socket head screw is positioned outboard and cover closes freely, or
damage to equipment may result.
6. Position adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 3) so socket head screw (Figure 1, Item 4) is outboard and does not interfere
with bar (Figure 1, Item 2) on cover (Figure 1, Item 1).
7. Remove speed wrench, adapter, and socket. Replace cover (Figure 1, Item 1) over adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 3).
Secure cover with latch (Figure 1, Item 5).
8. Repeat steps 1 through 7 of this procedure as required to lower other rear support leg.
0012-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0012
Figure 1. Lower Rear Support Leg.
END OF TASK
0012-3
0012 TM 9-2330-381-13
Raising Rear Support Legs
1. Release latch (Figure 2, Item 5) and raise protective cover (Figure 2, Item 1) to gain access to adjusting nut (Figure 2,
Item 3).
2. Use speed wrench, adapter, and 1 5/8 in. socket to turn adjusting nut (Figure 2, Item 3) clockwise to raise support leg
(Figure 2, Item 8).
CAUTION
Ensure that socket head screw is positioned outboard and cover closes freely, or
3. Raise support leg (Figure 2, Item 8) until foot (Figure 2, Item 6) contacts bottom of tube weldment (Figure 2, Item 7). If
necessary, turn adjusting nut (Figure 2, Item 3) counterclockwise to position socket head screw (Figure 2, Item 4) outboard.
4. Remove tools, replace cover (Figure 2, Item 1) over adjusting nut (Figure 2, Item 3), and secure cover with latch (Figure 2,
Item 5). Ensure that cover closes freely with no interference between bar (Figure 2, Item 2) on cover and socket head
screw (Figure 2, Item 4).
NOTE
• Once support legs are supporting platform, or retracted and stowed for transport, stow
tools back in platform storage compartment.
• If any material was used to provide ground support for rear support legs, remove and stow or dispose of material.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 of this procedure, as required, to raise other rear support leg (Figure 2, Item 8).
0012-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0012
Figure 2. Raise Rear Support Leg.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0012-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TRACTOR/SEMITRAILER COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts WP 0008
Grease, Automotive and Artillery (WP 0170, Item 16) WP 0010
WP 0011
Personnel Required
WP 0012
2
WP 0035
References WP 0170
WP 0005 TM 9-2320-360-10
WP 0007
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for coupling and uncoupling the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
tractor/semitrailer.
0013-1
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
TRACTOR/SEMITRAILER COUPLING AND UNCOUPLING
Tractor/Semitrailer Coupling
1. Apply generous amount of grease (WP 0170) to contact areas of pickup plate (Figure 1, Item 1), kingpin (Figure 1, Item 2),
steering wedge (Figure 1, Item 3), vee entry ramps (Figure 1, Item 4), and fifth-wheel (Figure 1, Item 9).
CAUTION
The tractor fifth-wheel side-to-side oscillation lockouts must be disengaged for all tractor/semitrailer
operations or severe damage to equipment may result.
2. Ensure both fifth-wheel locks (Figure 1, Item 10) are set to accept kingpin (Figure 1, Item 2). If tractor fifth-wheel
(Figure 1, Item 9) is equipped with side-to-side oscillation lockouts (Figure 1, Item 8) (TM 9-2320-360-10), ensure
lockouts are disengaged.
4. Ensure front and rear support legs are lowered and supporting platform (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
WARNING
Prior to adjusting the gooseneck’s height, pull out both the gooseneck isolation valve and the suspension
SHUTOFF valve handles to the ADJUST position to prevent unexpected movement. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
5. Ensure gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 1, Item 7) and suspension SHUTOFF valve handle (Figure 1, Item 6) are
pulled outward to ADJUST positions. Ensure both valve handles are pulled out as far as they will go.
NOTE
The gooseneck kingpin should be approximately the same height as the tractor fifth-wheel.
6. If required, adjust gooseneck height (WP 0007) using gooseneck valve (Figure 1, Item 5) so that kingpin (Figure 1, Item
2) and tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 1, Item 9) are approximately same height.
0013-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
Figure 1. Coupling Tractor/Semitrailer.
0013-3
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• The optimal condition when coupling the tractor/semitrailer is with both vehicles in a straight line.
• Coupling can be accomplished with the tractor and semitrailer at an offset angle (not greater than 45 degrees).
• To prevent the tires from moving while adjusting the steering wedge, DO NOT release the brakes on the semitrailer.
• Perform steps 7 through 12 to adjust the steering wedge.
7. Using steering valve (Figure 2, Item 1), manually adjust steering wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) to align with tractor fifth-wheel
vee entry (Figure 2, Item 6).
NOTE
When the steering wedge is significantly offset from the previous uncoupling (more than 45 degrees), or the
semitrailer is being operated improperly, movement of the steering wedge may not respond to the operation
of the steering valve. If this condition exists, continue with steps 8 and 9 as required.
8. If steering wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) does not respond to operation of steering valve (Figure 2, Item 1), attempt to induce
movement using crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) and spotter to push/pull against steering wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) while
operating steering valve (Figure 2, Item 1).
9. If steering wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) cannot be moved by crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) and steering valve (Figure 2, Item 1),
it may be necessary to apply greater force by gently bumping steering wedge with tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 2, Item 5).
10. While continuing to operate steering valve (Figure 2, Item 1), direct tractor operator to slowly back tractor (Figure 2,
Item 7) toward kingpin (Figure 2, Item 2) until one side of fifth-wheel vee entry (Figure 2, Item 6) contacts steering
wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) and pushes it toward center.
11. Once steering wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) has started to move, stop tractor (Figure 2, Item 7) and apply tractor brakes
(TM 9-2320-360-10).
12. Use steering valve (Figure 2, Item 1) to manually align steering wedge (Figure 2, Item 3) with kingpin (Figure 2, Item 2)
for entry in tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 2, Item 5).
0013-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
0013-5
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• The adjusting nut needs to be backed off a minimum of only one full turn when connecting the semitrailer
from one tractor to another of the same type (example: M911 to M911).
• The adjusting nut needs to be backed off a minimum of three full turns when connecting the semitrailer
from one type of tractor to another (example: M911 to M1070).
13. Use 3/4 in. (0.75 cm) ratchet, 3/4 in. (0.75 cm) extension, and 1 7/8 in. (2.76 cm) socket to turn adjusting nut (Figure 3,
Item 9) appropriate number of full turns counterclockwise. This will ensure steering wedge (Figure 3, Item 8) is properly
fitted and can be tightened after kingpin (Figure 3, Item 7) is locked in tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 3, Item 3).
WARNING
Two personnel are required for coupling the tractor/semitrailer during hookup. The operator
of the tractor must know the position of the spotter at all times. Failure to follow this warning
NOTE
With the aid of an assistant positioned on the streetside of the semitrailer and using hand
signals, align the tractor with the semitrailer.
14. Spotter must visually check tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 3, Item 3), vee entry ramps (Figure 3, Item 4), semitrailer kingpin
(Figure 3, Item 7), and steering wedge (Figure 3, Item 8) for alignment.
15. Have operator continue backing tractor so that fifth-wheel (Figure 3, Item 3) is approximately 2 in. (5.0 cm) from front of
gooseneck pickup plate (Figure 3, Item 6) and then stop.
16. Adjust gooseneck height so that gooseneck pickup plate (Figure 3, Item 6) is approximately 1 to 2 in. (2.5 to 5.0 cm) lower
than tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 3, Item 3) (WP 0007).
CAUTION
DO NOT allow the kingpin to miss and/or overrun the fifth-wheel or severe damage to
the tractor and the semitrailer may result.
17. With spotter positioned at semitrailer hydraulic control panel (Figure 3, Item 1), have spotter make final adjustments to
steering wedge alignment by operating steering valve (Figure 3, Item 2).
18. Have tractor operator back up until kingpin (Figure 3, Item 7) is firmly in place in fifth-wheel (Figure 3, Item 3). Have
spotter confirm that semitrailer kingpin is seated and both fifth-wheel locks (Figure 3, Item 5) are properly engaged.
0013-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
0013-7
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
If the tractor has been coupled to an offset angle, manually steer the wheels to the appropriate
direction or damage to the equipment may result.
NOTE
• Ensure the kingpin is locked into the tractor fifth-wheel.
• Ensure the wheel chocks for the tractor and semitrailer are in place and properly secured.
19. Set parking brake on tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
20. Disconnect both air lines from tractor dummy coupling. Remove dummy coupling from semitrailer air
connectors (TM 9-2320-360-10).
21. Apply a small amount of grease (WP 0170) on all rubber grommets.
22. Connect air brake system from tractor to semitrailer by mating service (blue) air connectors (Figure 4, Item 4) and
emergency (red) air connectors (Figure 4, Item 2).
23. Disconnect electrical connector from tractor’s electrical dummy coupling (TM 9-2320-360-10).
24. Raise cover of 12-pin electrical connector (Figure 4, Item 3) and connect tractor electrical cable (Figure 4, Item 5) to
electrical connector.
25. Have spotter check steering wedge (Figure 4, Item 6) alignment in tractor fifth-wheel (Figure 4, Item 7). If necessary,
signal spotter to reposition steering wedge.
WARNING
Ensure the person who is adjusting the steering wedge adjusting nut is clear when the
steering wedge is cycled back and forth. Failure to follow this warning may result
26. Turn adjusting nut (Figure 4, Item 8) clockwise until steering wedge (Figure 4, Item 6) tightens securely into fifth-wheel
(Figure 4, Item 7). Have spotter continually operate steering valve (Figure 4, Item 1) slightly left and right and tighten
adjusting nut to remove all play.
NOTE
• Push in the trailer’s air supply control in the tractor to provide air to the semitrailer’s air brake system.
• Allow ample time for the air tanks to charge and then apply the brakes to ensure the brakes are working properly.
27. Apply tractor parking brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
28. Raise front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
29. Remove and stow tractor and semitrailer wheel chocks (TM 9-2320-360-10).
0013-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
0013-9
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
If the gooseneck isolation valve is hard to move, equalize the gooseneck’s hydraulic pressure by raising the gooseneck
isolation valve handle until the system’s pressure reads 1,500 psi (10,343 kPa), and then lowering gooseneck
isolation valve handle until the system’s pressure readings equal the two front suspension gauge pressure readings.
30. Push in gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 5, Item 2) to RUN position. Ensure handle is pushed inward as far
as possible.
31. If necessary, perform minor deck height adjustments in front and then rear (WP 0008), which may be required due to
platform suspension relaxing when gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 5, Item 2) is pushed inward to RUN position.
32. Push in suspension SHUTOFF valve handle (Figure 5, Item 3) to SHUTOFF position. Ensure handle is pushed inward
as far as possible.
NOTE
• Have the tractor operator attempt to pull forward with semitrailer brakes set to ensure the steering
wedge is set in the tractor fifth-wheel and the adjusting nut is secure.
• Drive the tractor/semitrailer ahead in a straight line approximately 60 ft (18 m) to check the semitrailer’s tracking.
• Perform step 33, if required, until semitrailer properly tracks the tractor.
33. If semitrailer does not properly track, use manual steering valve (Figure 5, Item 1) to realign steering (WP 0010).
0013-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013

END OF TASK
0013-11
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
Tractor/Semitrailer Uncoupling
WARNING
• DO NOT uncouple tractor/semitrailer if the tractor has less than normal operating air
pressure, approximately 100 to 120 psi (689 to 827 kPa), or the semitrailer will not
have sufficient air pressure to apply or release the brakes.
• DO NOT uncouple a loaded semitrailer from the tractor for purposes of performing
maintenance tasks on the semitrailer.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
CAUTION
Ensure the trailer handbrake control (Johnny Bar) in the tractor cab is completely released prior
to applying the tractor parking brakes or loss of the semitrailer’s reserve air supply may occur.
NOTE
• Using one spotter, maneuver tractor/semitrailer in an area for semitrailer parking. Once
positioned for parking, apply tractor parking brakes.
• Remove four wheel chocks from gooseneck.
1. Position wheel chocks (Figure 6, Item 2) in front and behind each outer set of dual tires (Figure 6, Item 1) for right and
left front bogies (Figure 6, Item 8).
2. Disconnect 12-pin electrical connector (Figure 6, Item 7). Connect electrical connector to dummy connector on tractor.
Ensure electrical connector cover on semitrailer is closed.
3. Disconnect emergency (red) air connector (Figure 6, Item 6) and service (blue) air connector (Figure 6, Item 4) from
semitrailer. Connect both air connectors on dummy connectors on tractor.
WARNING
Ensure that vented dummy coupling is installed on the emergency (red) gladhand prior to releasing brakes with
the brake release valve. If a nonvented dummy coupling is installed, the parking brakes cannot be reapplied.
4. Install dummy connectors (Figure 6, Item 5) to semitrailer emergency and service air connectors (Figure 6, Item 6
and Item 4).
5. Start and run APU (WP 0005).
6. Pull out handle of suspension SHUTOFF valve (Figure 6, Item 3) as far as possible to ADJUST position.
0013-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
WARNING
The front support legs must be lowered to support the platform before operating the gooseneck isolation valve.
Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel from unwanted gooseneck/
suspension movement and damage to equipment.
7. Lower both front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012) to support platform.
Figure 6. Uncoupling Tractor/Semitrailer.
0013-13
0013 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Prior to moving the tractor from under the gooseneck, place the gooseneck isolation valve
handle in the ADJUST position, handle pulled outward. Failure to follow this warning may result
in injury to personnel and damage to equipment from unwanted gooseneck/suspension movement.
8. Pull out handle of gooseneck isolation valve (Figure 7, Item 4) as far as possible to ADJUST position.
9. Loosen steering wedge adjusting nut (Figure 7, Item 2) one full turn until lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 10) behind nut
is no longer compressed.
NOTE
If tractor fifth-wheel lock handles cannot be moved to the release position, set semitrailer parking brakes and
move the tractor rearward against the semitrailer to release pressure on fifth-wheel locking mechanism.
10. If necessary, have tractor operator back tractor against semitrailer and have a spotter unlock both tractor fifth-wheel
locks (Figure 7, Item 9).
WARNING
All spotters and ground personnel around the tractor/semitrailer must stand clear
of the vehicles during uncoupling. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury
to personnel from unwanted gooseneck/suspension movement and damage to equipment.
11. Signal operator to release tractor parking brakes and slowly drive forward approximately 1 ft (0.3 m) until kingpin (Figure 7,
Item 1) is in vee entry (Figure 7, Item 6) of tractor’s fifth-wheel (Figure 7, Item 8).
12. Raise gooseneck (WP 0007) until it is approximately 3 in. (7.6 cm) above fifth-wheel (Figure 7, Item 8).
13. Have operator drive tractor (Figure 7, Item 7) out from under semitrailer gooseneck (Figure 7, Item 5).
14. Lower gooseneck (Figure 7, Item 5) to lowest position (WP 0007).
15. Push in gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 7, Item 4) to RUN position. Ensure isolation valve handle is pushed in
as far as possible.
16. Push in suspension SHUTOFF valve handle (Figure 7, Item 3) to SHUTOFF position. Ensure suspension SHUTOFF
valve handle is pushed in as far as possible.
0013-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0013
Figure 7. Uncoupling Tractor/Semitrailer.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0013-15/16 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0014
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - HIGHWAY DRIVING
INITIAL SETUP:
2 WP 0025
TM 9-2320-360-10
References
WP 0005
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains highway driving instructions for the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0014-1
0014 TM 9-2330-381-13
HIGHWAY DRIVING
Driving
WARNING
• Precautions must be exercised during highway travel to ensure that all bridges
and underpasses can be negotiated.
• When towing a payload, check security of load and tighten tiedowns at
every rest and maintenance stop.
• Ensure position of assistant is known at all times.
• All safety requirements, such as hazard flags, road permits, flashing warning lights,
escort vehicles, and wide-load signs must be met.
WARNING
Under no circumstances shall speeds exceed the following:
• Highway ......................... 45 mph (72 km/h)
• Secondary ...................... 40 mph (64 km/h)
• Off-road ......................... 15 mph (24 km/h)
1. Consider overall length of tractor and semitrailer when towing semitrailer and passing other vehicles. During trailering
operations, acceleration rate is reduced and stopping distance is increased.
END OF TASK
0014-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0014
Turning With M911 or M1070 Tractor
WARNING
• The HET tractor and semitrailer combination does not track in the same way as standard
or conventional tractor-trailer combinations. Operators must know and understand this
point prior to operating the HET on public access roads. Wide, conventional tractor-trailer
turns may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
• When making sharp turns, the semitrailer may swing beyond normal turning radius.
1. Turning the tractor also causes the semitrailer wheels to turn with the M911 or M1070 tractor and M1000 semitrailer
combination. Semitrailer may swing out into the lane of oncoming traffic. Operator must ensure lane is clear prior to
making turn. Left and right turns should be made tighter than conventional tractor-trailer turns.
Figure 1. Turning.
END OF TASK
0014-3
0014 TM 9-2330-381-13
Backing With M911 or M1070 Tractor
WARNING
• Using the M911 or M1070 tractor, the semitrailer will not back like a normal
semitrailer because of the semitrailer's steering system.
• The operator must back the tractor/semitrailer by turning the tractor’s steering wheel in the
opposite direction than would be used for backing with a normal semitrailer.
CAUTION
• When backing, excessively sharp, over steering turns will cause damage to equipment. If the angle
between the tractor chassis and gooseneck exceeds 60 degrees, damage to tires may occur.
• If the angle exceeds 90 degrees, severe damage to semitrailer steering components
and tractor fifth-wheel will occur.
• Extreme caution must be exercised when maneuvering the tractor/semitrailer in confined
spaces (i.e., motor pools, parking lots, filling stations) where over-steer angles may easily
be achieved through normal driving capability of the tractor.
Failure to follow these cautions will result in severe damage to equipment.
NOTE
• When backing, always use a spotter for guidance.
• Always use mirrors when backing, and keep spotter in sight at all times.
• When backing, the rear of the semitrailer will move in the same direction as the front tractor wheels.
1. If tractor wheels are turned right, semitrailer wheels will steer left and cause semitrailer to back to the right with tractor.
2. If tractor wheels are turned left, semitrailer wheels will steer right and cause semitrailer to back to the left with tractor.
0014-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0014
Figure 2. Backing.
END OF TASK
0014-5
0014 TM 9-2330-381-13
Manually Steering Semitrailer
WARNING
• The tractor operator must drive slowly and maintain constant visual contact with the spotter.
• When manually steering the semitrailer, the tractor operator should make many starts and stops to
give the spotter time to adjust steering.
• The tractor operator should allow even space on both sides of the tractor so that the spotter
who is steering the semitrailer has room to make adjustments.
1. Manually steer semitrailer to allow clear passage if tractor/semitrailer is in an area with limited turning ability.
2. Steer semitrailer (WP 0010) left or right to make room for tractor/semitrailer to pass through a tight area by having spotter
located at semitrailer hydraulic control panel.
END OF TASK
Stopping
1. Apply brakes on tractor and semitrailer at the same time during normal operation when driver steps on tractor brake pedal.
2. Apply brake pressure gradually and smoothly.
3. Use good judgment and observe road conditions while stopping. Use caution on steep downgrades and slippery surfaces.
END OF TASK
Parking
CAUTION
Ensure that the trailer hand brake control (Johnny Bar) in the tractor cab is completely released prior to
applying the tractor's parking brakes or loss of the semitrailer’s reserve air supply may result.
NOTE
If a hissing sound is heard from the tractor's parking brake control valve after setting the parking brakes, the brake
pedal must be released, and the trailer air supply control in the tractor must be pushed in and then pulled out.
1. Ensure trailer hand brake control (Johnny Bar) located on steering column in tractor cab is completely released when
tractor/semitrailer combination is to be parked and left unattended. Set parking brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
2. Ensure tractor engine (TM 9-2320-360-10) and semitrailer Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) are shut down (WP 0005). If
hissing sound is heard from tractor's parking brake control valve after setting parking brakes, release tractor brake pedal;
push in and then pull out trailer air supply control in tractor.
3. Chock wheels on tractor and semitrailer (WP 0035).
4. Refer to Parking Loaded Semitrailer (WP 0025) for specific details on parking.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0014-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - LOADING ABLE PAYLOADS
INITIAL SETUP:
3 WP 0009
WP 0012
References
WP 0013
WP 0002
WP 0035
WP 0004
TM 9-2320-360-10
WP 0005
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for loading able payloads onto the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
LOADING ABLE PAYLOADS
NOTE
• The following procedures provide instructions for loading and unloading an able payload (M1 Series Main
Battle Tank) on the M1000 semitrailer coupled to a U.S. Army M1070 or M911 tractor.
• The M1070 tractor is illustrated as the prime mover throughout these instructions.
• Operations unique to the M911 tractor will be identified and/or referenced to the applicable
Operating Instructions (TM 9-2320-360-10).
1. Start tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
2. On M1070 tractor, set central tire insulation system (CTIS) switch (Figure 1, Item 1) to setting for expected road/terrain
conditions and allow tractor to sit until selected CTIS indicator (Figure 1, Item 2) remains lit for that CTIS setting.
Figure 1. Loading Able Payload.

0015-1
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Couple tractor to semitrailer (WP 0013).

4. Align back of tractor/semitrailer combination as close as possible to payload, approximately 15 ft (4.6 m), on ground,
as level as possible.
WARNING
Whenever possible, load the semitrailer on level ground. In adverse conditions, loading can be done on
grades up to 10 percent with a maximum offset angle of 10 degrees between the tractor and the semitrailer.
Avoid exceeding these limitations to prevent the payload from rolling on the semitrailer. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
5. Visually check tractor/semitrailer offset angle by having spotter check relationship between steering wedge bolt and weld
circle at bottom rear of pickup plate. If inside edge of bolt aligns with outside edge of weld circle, offset angle is 10
degrees (Figure 2). Make any required adjustments to tractor.
0015-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
6. Apply tractor parking brakes by pulling out parking brake valve (Figure 3, Item 1).
7. Remove four wheel chocks (Figure 3, Item 2) from stowage on tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10) chock wheels on both
sides of tractor.

8. Remove ten capscrews (Figure 4, Item 3), washers (Figure 4, Item 4), and four sheets (Figure 4, Item 5) from two rear
payload chocks (Figure 4, Item 1).
9. Remove two rear payload chocks (Figure 4, Item 1) from platform (Figure 4, Item 2).
0015-3
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Prior to loading, the front payload chocks must be adjusted to accommodate the offset of road-wheels
on the M1 tank, which will release the tank’s braking system.
10. Position streetside front payload chock (Figure 5, Item 2) approximately 10 in. (25 cm) from forward edge of platform
(Figure 5, Item 6).
11. Position curbside front payload chock (Figure 5, Item 1) approximately 14 in. (35 cm) from forward edge of platform
(Figure 5, Item 6).
12. Align forward mounting holes (Figure 5, Item 7) of streetside and curbside payload chocks (Figure 5, Item 1 and Item 2)
with fourth hole (Figure 5, Item 8) from front of outboard payload chock mounting brackets (Figure 5, Item 5) on
platform (Figure 5, Item 6).
13. Secure each payload chock (Figure 5, Item 1 and Item 2) with two capscrews (Figure 5, Item 3) and washers (Figure 5,
Item 4).
0015-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
14. Install two sheets (Figure 6, Item 5) on outboard side of each of two rear payload chocks (Figure 6, Item 1) using four
capscrews (Figure 6, Item 6) and washers (Figure 6, Item 2).
15. Position curbside rear payload chock (Figure 6, Item 1) on streetside of platform (Figure 6, Item 3) over first bogie (Figure
6, Item 4). Place streetside rear payload chock (Figure 6, Item 1) on the ground at streetside of semitrailer.
0015-5
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Remove two capscrews (Figure 7, Item 1) and curb guide stowage brackets (Figure 7, Item 2) from forward recessed
area on platform (Figure 7, Item 6).
17. Remove capscrew (Figure 7, Item 4) and curb guide stowage bracket (Figure 7, Item 4) from aft recessed area on platform
(Figure 7, Item 6).
18. Remove all 12 curb guides (Figure 7, Item 3) from stowage points on platform (Figure 7, Item 6).
19. Install curb guide stowage bracket (Figure 7, Item 2) and capscrew (Figure 7, Item 1) in forward recessed area on platform
(Figure 7, Item 6).
0015-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
NOTE
Two curb guides will be installed on the beavertail after the loading ramps are lowered.
20. Install ten curb guides (Figure 8, Item 1) (five on each side) in second hole (Figure 8, Item 2) inward from platform edge
(Figure 8, Item 3) (pin side facing outboard from center of platform). Set two remaining curb guides (Figure 8, Item 1)
aside until ramps (Figure 8, Item 4) are lowered.
0015-7
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Due to semitrailers being outfitted with various chains (1/2 in. (1.3 cm) and/or 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) link sizes),
all chains must be inventoried in the platform storage compartment prior to placing the chains on the platform.
• Once the chains are inventoried, read and familiarize yourself with the information in steps 21
through 41 to determine tiedown needed to properly secure the payload.
CAUTION
• Ensure chains and load binders are positioned inward of both curbside and streetside curb guides.
Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to equipment when payload is loaded.
• Chains must be the same length and must be properly laid out, or loaded payload will
contact gooseneck and damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
• Determine the size of all tiedown chains.
• Follow steps 21 through 41 to determine tiedown requirements and arrange payload tiedown chains.
• With chains crossed, the pear-shaped end link should be approximately in front of the
inboard payload chock stowage bracket.
21. Loop two 11 ft (3.4 m) front tiedown chains (Figure 9, Item 1) (either 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) or 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) link size) through two
front tiedown rings (Figure 9, Item 3) recessed in platform (Figure 9, Item 4).
22. Hook chains (Figure 9, Item 1) back to themselves so that each pear-shaped end link (Figure 9, Item 2) is approximately in
front of inboard payload chock stowage bracket (Figure 9, Item 5). Ensure chains (Figure 9, Item 1) are same length.
23. Lay both chains (Figure 9, Item 1) so that they cross near front of platform (Figure 9, Item 4).
0015-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
0015-9
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
24. Extend four load binders (Figure 10, Item 6 ) to show approximately 6.5 in. (16.5 cm) of thread on
both ends.
25. Remove two shackles (Figure 10, Item 7) from platform stowage compartment and position shackles near rear payload
tiedown ring (Figure 10, Item 1), which is recessed in platform (Figure 10, Item 3).
NOTE
When laying out load binders, ensure parallel load binder is on outboard side of shackle and angled load binder
is on inboard side of shackle to prevent load binders from interfering with each other.
26. Using two shackles (Figure 10, Item 7), secure two load binders (Figure 10, Item 6), small end of pear link (Figure 10,
Item 5) toward load binder, to each rear payload tiedown ring (Figure 10, Item 1).
27. For each pair of load binders (Figure 10, Item 6), place one load binder parallel to edge of platform (Figure 10, Item 3)
pointed toward front, and other load binder angled toward center of platform. Position handles (Figure 10, Item 8) inboard.
NOTE
Perform steps 28 through 31 to lay out streetside parallel tiedown chains.
28. If using 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) link chains, hook two 11 ft (3.4 m) chains (Figure 10, Item 4) together.
29. If using 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) link chains, select one 19 ft chain (5.8 m) (Figure 10, Item 4).
30. Route chains (Figure 10, Item 4) forward from streetside parallel load binder (Figure 10, Item 6), parallel with edge of
platform (Figure 10, Item 3), through large shackle (Figure 10, Item 2) (from platform stowage compartment) in streetside
center tiedown ring (Figure 10, Item 1).
31. Pass chains (Figure 10, Item 4) back toward rear of platform (Figure 10, Item 3). If using 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) chains (Figure 10, Item
4), ensure junction of the two 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) chains is aft of large shackle (Figure 10, Item 2). DO NOT connect chains to
load binder (Figure 10, Item 6).
0015-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
NOTE
Perform steps 32 through 35 to lay out curbside parallel tiedown chains.
32. If using 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) link chains, hook one 11 ft (3.4 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 2) and one 4 ft (1.2 m) chain (Figure 11,
Item 4) together. Lay 4 ft (1.2 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 4) alongside the curbside parallel load binder (Figure 11, Item 6).
33. Route 11 ft (3.4 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 2) forward, parallel with curbside edge of platform (Figure 11, Item 3), and
inward through large shackle (Figure 11, Item 1) (from platform stowage compartment), and install shackle in curbside
center tiedown ring (Figure 11, Item 8).
34. If using 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) link chain, select one 19 ft (5.8 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 2). Route chain forward from curbside
parallel load binder (Figure 11, Item 6), parallel with edge of platform (Figure 11, Item 3), through large shackle (Figure 11,
Item 1) (from platform stowage compartment), and install shackle in curbside center tiedown ring (Figure 11, Item 8).
35. Pass chains (Figure 11, Item 2) back toward rear of platform (Figure 11, Item 3). DO NOT connect chains to load
binder (Figure 11, Item 6).
NOTE
Perform steps 36 through 38 to lay out curbside angle rear payload tiedown chains.
36. If using 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) link chain, place 4 ft (1.2 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 5) from curbside angled load binder (Figure
11, Item 6) forward, toward center of platform (Figure 11, Item 3).
37. If using 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) link chain, place 7 ft (2.1 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 5) from curbside angled load binder (Figure
38. DO NOT connect angle rear tiedown chains (Figure 11, Item 5) to load binder (Figure 11, Item 6).
NOTE
Perform steps 39 through 41 to lay out streetside angle rear payload tiedown chains.
39. If using 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) link chain, place 11 ft (3.4 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 7) from streetside angled load binder
(Figure 11, Item 6) forward, toward center of platform (Figure 11, Item 3).
40. If using 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) link chain, place 7 ft (2.1 m) chain (Figure 11, Item 7) from streetside angled load binder (Figure
41. DO NOT connect angle rear tiedown chain (Figure 11, Item 7) to load binder (Figure 11, Item 6).
0015-11
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
42. Remove hitch pins (Figure 12, Item 1) and crowbar (Figure 12, Item 3) from rear of semitrailer (Figure 12, Item 4) below
loading ramps (Figure 12, Item 2). Reinstall hitch pins to rear of semitrailer.

43. Raise ramps perpendicular to platform and adjust ramp span width to match payload (WP 0009).
44. Start and run APU (WP 0005).
45. Release semitrailer parking brakes by pushing inward on knob of brake release valve (Figure 13, Item 1).
0015-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
46. Raise front of semitrailer to 50 in. (127 cm) to top mark on crowbar (WP 0008).
47. Lower rear of semitrailer to approximately 34 in. (86 cm) to bottom mark on crowbar (Figure 14).
CAUTION
Failure to lower rear support legs while loading and unloading payloads may result in severe
equipment damage (i.e., upper suspension casting cracks, blown tires).
48. Lower rear support legs until feet are in firm contact with ground (WP 0012). Turn adjusting nut as necessary to position
socket head screw outboard and close cover.
49. Unhook loading ramp stow chains and lower loading ramps to ground (WP 0009).

50. Apply semitrailer parking brakes by pulling outward on knob of brake release valve (Figure 15, Item 1).
0015-13
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
51. Align and install two curb guides (Figure 16, Item 1) in second hole inward from platform edge at beavertail (Figure 16,
Item 2), just in front of each loading ramp (Figure 16, Item 3). Ensure pin side of each curb guide faces outward from
center of platform (Figure 16, Item 4).
WARNING
• Two spotters are required for loading and unloading operations. The payload operator must know the
position of spotters at all times.
• If payload is to be backed onto semitrailer platform, DO NOT position a spotter on gooseneck.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on
the solar battery charger or trip over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or
damage to equipment.
NOTE
Follow steps 52 through 54 to position spotters.
52. Position one spotter on gooseneck (Figure 17, Item 1) to ensure constant visual contact with payload operator.
53. If backing payload (Figure 17, Item 3) onto semitrailer platform (Figure 17, Item 2), position spotter behind payload facing
forward. Spotter must be in constant view of payload operator.
0015-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
54. Position one spotter on curbside of payload (Figure 17, Item 3) to maintain visual contact with spotter located either on
gooseneck (Figure 17, Item 1) or at back of payload facing payload operator.
CAUTION
Ensure all chains and load binder handles are inward of the curb guides and are clear of
the payload tracks, or damage to equipment may occur.
55. Start and warm payload (Figure 17, Item 3). Align payload to semitrailer (Figure 17, Item 2) prior to loading (center of
payload to center of semitrailer).
WARNING
• Unnecessary personnel must stand well clear of the vehicles, especially behind the payload
(engine/turbine exhaust) during loading operations.
• At no time during any loading operation while the payload is moving should personnel
be on the semitrailer platform.
• The payload operator must drive the payload slowly up the loading ramps and onto the platform.
• Payload adjustments, side to side (turning), must be kept to a minimum.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
56. Using hand signals, gooseneck/aft spotter must signal payload operator to drive payload (Figure 17, Item 3) slowly up onto
platform (Figure 17, Item 2). Curbside spotter must notify gooseneck/aft spotter of any required payload adjustments
while loading.
57. Have payload operator drive payload (Figure 17, Item 3) onto ramps (Figure 17, Item 4) and platform (Figure 17, Item 2).
0015-15
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
58. Have gooseneck/aft spotter guide payload operator until firm contact has been made with payload chock (Figure 18,
Item 2) on streetside.
WARNING
Failure to set the payload parking brake could allow the payload to roll backward. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
59. Have payload operator apply payload (Figure 18, Item 1) parking brakes.
0015-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
60. Chock streetside rear of payload (Figure 19, Item 1) with rear streetside payload chock (Figure 19, Item 4) with two
sheets (Figure 19, Item 3) attached. Ensure sheets are positioned flush against side of platform (Figure 19, Item 2) to
prevent inward shifting of chocks.
NOTE
Perform steps 61 through 64 to adjust platform to normal running height.
61. Release semitrailer parking brakes by pushing inward on knob of brake release valve (Figure 19, Item 5).
62. Adjust platform height to normal running height of 43 in. (109 cm) (WP 0008).
63. Using bed height indicators, check each corner of platform for a height of 43 in. (109 cm) (WP 0004).
64. Apply semitrailer parking brakes by pulling outward on knob of brake release valve (Figure 19, Item 5).
0015-17
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
65. Lift two front tiedown chains (Figure 20, Item 3) and attach chains to two front towing lugs (Figure 20, Item 1) using two
shackles (Figure 20, Item 2) from platform stowage compartment (Figure 20, Item 6).
NOTE
It may be necessary to release the payload parking brake, move the rear streetside payload chock back approximately
12 in. (30 cm), and move the payload back slightly to remove the front streetside payload chock.
66. Remove streetside payload chock (Figure 20, Item 5) from front streetside of payload (Figure 20, Item 4).
0015-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
67. With aid of an assistant, signal payload operator to drive payload (Figure 21, Item 1) slowly forward until front tiedown
chains (Figure 21, Item 2) are tight and payload tracks (front road wheels)(Figure 21, Item 7) are firmly on front payload
chocks (Figure 21, Item 6). Apply payload parking brakes (Figure 21, Item 5).
NOTE
Install the payload rear chocks with the sheets positioned flush against the side of the platform to prevent
inward shifting of the chocks.
68. Place rear payload chocks (Figure 21, Item 4), with sheets (Figure 21, Item 3) attached, rear curbside and streetside of
payload (Figure 21, Item 1).
0015-19
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• The streetside parallel chain consists of either two 11 ft (3.3 m) chains with 3/4 in. (1.9 cm)
links, or a 19 ft (5.8 m) chain with the 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) links.
• The curbside angle rear payload tiedown chain consists of either a 4 ft (1.2 m) chain with 3/4 in.
(1.9 cm) links, or the 7 ft (2.1 m) chain with the 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) links.
• Perform steps 69 through 79 to shut down payload and secure payload to semitrailer platform.
• Remove two shackles from platform stowage compartment.
69. Attach streetside parallel chain (Figure 22, Item 9) and curbside angle rear payload tiedown chain (Figure 22, Item 3) to
streetside rear towing lug (Figure 22, Item 1) using shackle (Figure 22, Item 2).
NOTE
• The curbside parallel chain consists of either the 11 ft (3.4 m) and 4 ft (1.2 m) chain combination with the 3/4 in.
• The streetside angle rear payload tiedown chain consists of either the 11 ft (3.4 m) chain with the 3/4 in.
70. Attach curbside parallel tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 5 or Figure 22, Item 5 and Item 6) and streetside angle rear payload
tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 4) to curbside rear towing lug (Figure 22, Item 1) using shackle (Figure 22, Item 2).
NOTE
When attaching the load binders to the tiedown chains, remove as much slack as possible. The remaining
slack can be removed when the load binders are operated.
71. Attach both parallel chains (Figure 22, Item 9 and Item 5, or Figure 22, Item 9, Item 5, and Item 6) to four parallel
positioned load binders (Figure 22, Item 8).
72. Operate four load binders (Figure 22, Item 8) to tighten two parallel tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 9 and Item 5
or Figure 22, Item 9, Item 5, and Item 6).
0015-20
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
NOTE
• When attaching the load binders to the tiedown chains, remove as much slack as possible. The remaining
slack can be removed when the load binders are operated.
• Both the curbside and streetside angle rear payload tiedown chains are attached to the angled load
binders the same way. Curbside chains are shown.
73. Attach free end of curbside angle rear payload tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 3) to curbside angled load binder (Figure
22, Item 8).
CAUTION
The streetside angle rear payload tiedown chains must cross over the top of the curbside rear payload
tiedown chains or the chains will interfere with each other, resulting in damage to equipment.
74. Attach free end of streetside angle rear payload tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 4), passing chains over top of curbside
angle rear payload tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 3), to streetside angled load binder (Figure 22, Item 8).
75. Operate both load binders (Figure 22, Item 8) to tighten both angle rear payload tiedown chains (Figure 22, Item 3 and
Item 4). Ensure payload (Figure 22, Item 10) is secure against two rear payload chocks (Figure 22, Item 7).
0015-21
0015 TM 9-2330-381-13
76. Attach two 11 ft (3.3 m) utility chains (Figure 23, Item 3) through tiedown ring (Figure 23, Item 1) on each side of platform
(Figure 23, Item 6) just forward of each payload chock (Figure 23, Item 4). Connect hook (Figure 23, Item 2) to each chain.
77. Pass free end of utility chains (Figure 23, Item 3) through both handles (Figure 23, Item 5) of both rear payload chocks
(Figure 23, Item 4). Place free ends of both utility chains at center of platform (Figure 23, Item 6).
78. Attach load binder (Figure 23, Item 7) to both utility chains (Figure 23, Item 3), removing as much slack as possible.
79. Operate load binder (Figure 23, Item 7) to tighten both utility chains (Figure 23, Item 3).
0015-22
TM 9-2330-381-13 0015
NOTE
Store the curb guides in the foremost three positions on each side in the recessed areas of the platform.
80. Remove six curb guides (Figure 24, Item 4) from rear of platform (Figure 24, Item 3).
81. Install six curb guides (Figure 24, Item 4) with two curb guide stowage brackets (Figure 24, Item 2) and capscrews
(Figure 24, Item 1).
82. Raise ramps and adjust ramp span width to furthest inward position and stow loading ramps for transport (WP 0009).
84. Raise rear support legs (WP 0009).
85. Stow crowbar at back of platform and secure in place with hitch pins (WP 0002).
86. Stow all tools used during loading procedure in platform stowage compartment (WP 0002).
87. Remove four wheel chocks from tractor tires and restow wheel chocks onto tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
88. If applicable, also remove four semitrailer chocks and restow on semitrailer gooseneck (WP 0035).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0015-23/24 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UNLOADING ABLE PAYLOADS
INITIAL SETUP:
2 WP 0015
WP 0016
References
WP 0025
WP 0005
TM 9-2320-360-10
WP 0009
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for unloading able payloads from the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0016-1
0016 TM 9-2330-381-13
UNLOADING ABLE PAYLOADS
WARNING
• Unload the semitrailer on level ground whenever possible. In adverse conditions,

unloading can be done on grades up to 10 percent with a maximum offset angle
of 10 degrees between the tractor and semitrailer.
• Avoid exceeding this limitation to prevent the payload from rolling off of the semitrailer.
NOTE
If the tractor and semitrailer are already coupled, proceed to step 2.
1. If tractor and semitrailer are uncoupled, perform steps 1 through 3 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015).
2. Align back of tractor/semitrailer combination with area to be unloaded (WP 0025). Ensure ample amount of space is
provided for ramps to be lowered and payload to be off-loaded past end of ramps on ground as level as possible.
3. Visually check tractor/semitrailer offset angle by having spotter check relationship between steering wedge bolt and weld
circle at bottom rear of pickup plate. If inside edge of bolt aligns with outside edge of weld circle, offset angle is 10
degrees. Make any required adjustments to tractor (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Unloading Able Payloads.
0016-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
4. Apply tractor parking brakes by pulling out parking brake valve (Figure 2, Item 1). Remove four wheel chocks (Figure 2,
Item 2) from stowage on tractor and chock wheels on tractor.

5. Remove hitch pins (Figure 3, Item 1) and crowbar (Figure 3, Item 4) from rear of semitrailer (Figure 3, Item 3) below
loading ramps (Figure 3, Item 2). Reinstall hitch pins.
0016-3
0016 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Adjust ramp span width to match payload track width as required (WP 0009).
7. Remove six curb guides (Figure 4, Item 2) from rear recessed area of platform (Figure 4, Item 5) by removing two
capscrews (Figure 4, Item 3) and curb guide stowage brackets (Figure 4, Item 4).
NOTE
Two curb guides will be installed on beavertail after the loading ramps are lowered.
8. Place four curb guides (Figure 4, Item 2) (two on each side) on platform (Figure 4, Item 5) in second hole inward from
platform edge (pinside facing outboard from center of platform). Set two remaining curb guides aside until ramps (Figure
4, Item 1) are lowered.
0016-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
NOTE
Perform steps 9 through 20 to remove payload tiedowns and payload chock tiedowns from payload.
9. Open load binder (Figure 5, Item 4) and remove two utility chains (Figure 5, Item 2) from two tiedown rings (Figure 5,
Item 1). Remove utility chains from two rear payload chocks (Figure 5, Item 3).
0016-5
0016 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. Operate two angled load binders (Figure 6, Item 9) to loosen two angle rear payload tiedown chains (Figure 6, Item 3
and Item 4).
11. Disconnect both angle chains (Figure 6, Item 3 and Item 4) from angled load binders (Figure 6, Item 9).
12. Have payload operator release payload brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
13. Operate two parallel load binders (Figure 6, Item 9) to tighten both curbside and streetside tiedown chains (Figure 6,
Item 11 and Item 5 or Figure 6, Item 11, Item 5, and Item 6).
14. Continue to tighten each load binder (Figure 6, Item 9) as tightly as possible to move payload (Figure 6, Item 12) slightly
off of two rear payload chocks (Figure 6, Item 7) or at least reduce pressure applied on rear payload chocks by payload.
15. Have payload operator apply payload brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
NOTE
If necessary, use the crowbar to help move two rear payload chocks from under the payload tracks.
16. Move rear payload chocks (Figure 6, Item 7) back approximately 6 in. (15 cm) along both sides of platform (Figure 6,
Item 8).
17. Operate two parallel load binders (Figure 6, Item 9) to loosen both curbside and streetside parallel tiedown chains (Figure
6, Item 11 and Item 5, or Figure 6, Item 11, Item 5, and Item 6). Disconnect parallel chains (Figure 6, Item 11 and Item 5, or
Figure 6, Item 11, Item 5, and Item 6) from parallel load binders (Figure 6, Item 9).
0016-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
18. Remove four load binders (Figure 6, Item 9) and two shackles (Figure 6, Item 10) from platform (Figure 6, Item 8).
19. Disconnect two chains (Figure 6, Item 11 and Item 3) from streetside shackle (Figure 6, Item 2) on towing lug (Figure 6,
Item 1) at rear of payload (Figure 6, Item 8).
20. Disconnect chains (Figure 6, Item 4 and Item 6, or Figure 6, Item 4, Item 6, and Item 5) from curbside shackle (Figure 6,
Item 2) on towing lug (Figure 6, Item 1) at rear of payload (Figure 6, Item 8).
0016-7
0016 TM 9-2330-381-13
21. Lay chains (Figure 7, Item 4) and load binders (Figure 7, Item 2) toward center of platform (Figure 7, Item 3), between and
clear of payload tracks (Figure 7, Item 7), until payload (Figure 7, Item 1) is unloaded.
22. Have payload operator start and warm payload (TM 9-2320-360-10).
23. Move streetside rear payload chock (Figure 7, Item 5) along streetside platform (Figure 7, Item 3) over No. 4 bogie (Figure
7, Item 6). Place curbside rear payload chock (Figure 7, Item 8) near front streetside of platform.
0016-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
WARNING
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck
directly in front of the spare tires.
• Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on
the solar battery charger or trip over it.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
24. With assistance of gooseneck/aft spotter, signal payload operator to release payload brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10) and
start slowly backing payload (Figure 8, Item 4) until payload contacts rear streetside payload chock (Figure 8, Item 3).
25. Stop payload (Figure 8, Item 4) and apply payload brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
26. Place rear curbside payload chock (Figure 8, Item 5) in front of payload (Figure 8, Item 4) on streetside.
27. Remove two tiedown chains (Figure 8, Item 6) from shackles (Figure 8, Item 1) on front of payload (Figure 8, Item 4).
Reinstall shackles. Lay two tiedown chains forward toward center of platform (Figure 8, Item 2).
28. With assistance of gooseneck/aft spotter, signal payload operator to start moving payload (Figure 8, Item 4) forward just
until rear streetside payload chock (Figure 8, Item 3) can be removed. Apply payload brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
29. Perform steps 43 through 49 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015) to adjust platform height to platform loading/unloading
position, lower ramps, and install two remaining curb guides.
0016-9
0016 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Unnecessary personnel must stand clear of the vehicles, especially behind the payload (engine/turbine
exhaust), during unloading operations. At no time during any unloading operations, while the
payload is moving, should personnel be on the semitrailer platform.
• The payload operator must drive the payload slowly down the loading ramps and onto the ground.
• Any payload adjustments, side-to-side (turning), must be kept to a minimum.
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly
in front of the spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME
care not to step on the solar battery charger or trip over it.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
30. With aid of gooseneck/aft spotter, signal payload operator to slowly drive payload (Figure 9, Item 2) off platform (Figure
9, Item 1). Curbside spotter must notify gooseneck/aft spotter of any required payload adjustments while unloading.
31. Have payload operator drive payload (Figure 9, Item 2) back an extra 5 ft (1.5 m) to allow extra clearance for raising
and stowing load ramps (Figure 9, Item 3).
WARNING
Failure to set the payload parking brake could allow the payload to roll backward. Failure to follow
this warning may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
32. Once payload (Figure 9, Item 2) is on the ground and clear of semitrailer (Figure 9, Item 4), apply payload parking brake
(TM 9-2320-360-10). Shut down payload (TM 9-2320-360-10).
0016-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
0016-11
0016 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Remove all the payload and payload chock tiedown chains from the platform and restow all the chains,
load binders, and shackles in the platform stowage compartment.
33. Remove capscrew (Figure 10, Item 3) and curb guide stowage bracket (Figure 10, Item 4) from forward recessed area
on platform (Figure 10, Item 1).
34. Remove all 12 curb guides (Figure 10, Item 2) from loading positions on platform (Figure 10, Item 1) and place in center
of platform for storage (ten curb guides located forward, two curb guides located aft).
35. Secure ten curb guides (Figure 10, Item 2), located forward, by installing two curb guide stowage brackets (Figure 10,
Item 4) and capscrews (Figure 10, Item 3).
36. Remove curb guide stowage bracket (Figure 10, Item 6) and capscrew (Figure 10, Item 5) from platform storage
compartment (Figure 10, Item 7).
37. Secure two curb guides (Figure 10, Item 2), located aft, by installing curb guide stowage bracket (Figure 10, Item 6)
and capscrew (Figure 10, Item 5).

38. Remove two capscrews (Figure 11, Item 3), washers (Figure 11, Item 2), and two sheets (Figure 11, Item 4) from each of
two rear payload chocks (Figure 11, Item 1).
0016-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0016
39. Position two rear payload chocks (Figure 12, Item 6) on top of two front payload chocks (Figure 12, Item 3 and Item 2).
Install four sheets (Figure 12, Item 7), ten capscrews (Figure 12, Item 4), and washers (Figure 12, Item 5).
40. Perform steps 61 through 64 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015) and adjust platform to normal running height.
41. Move suspension shutoff lever (Figure 12, Item 1) to RUN position.
42. Raise rear support legs (WP 0012).
43. Adjust ramp span width inward (furthest inward position) and stow loading ramps for transport as required (WP 0009).
44. Shut down Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).
NOTE
Stow the crowbar at the back of the platform and secure the crowbar in place with a hitch pin. Restow all
the tools and equipment used during this procedure in the platform stowage compartment.
45. If tractor/semitrailer is not going to remain parked at this time, restow tractor wheel chocks (TM 9-2320-360-10).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0016-13/14 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DUAL WINCH LOADING
INITIAL SETUP:
2 WP 0169
TB 43-0142
References
TM 9-2320-270-10
WP 0009
TM 9-2320-360-10
WP 0013
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for loading a disabled payload (M1 Series Main Battle Tank) onto the Heavy
Equipment Transporter (HET) M1000 semitrailer coupled to a U.S. Army M1070 or M911 tractor.
DUAL WINCH LOADING
NOTE
• The M1070 tractor is illustrated as the prime mover throughout these instructions; however, unique instructions for
either the M1070 or the M911 tractor will be identified where applicable.
• The prime difference between the M1070 and M911 tractor is that the M1070 tractor has an auxiliary winch system
that is used to pull the main cables to the rear of the semitrailer for attachment to the payload. The operation of the
M1070 winch controls is described herein.
• Refer to the M911 Operating Instructions (TM 9-2320-270-10) for location, description, and operation of winch
controls.
1. Start tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
2. On M1070 tractor, set central tire insulation system (CTIS) switch (Figure 1, Item 1) to setting for expected road or terrain
conditions and allow tractor to sit until selected CTIS indicator (Figure 1, Item 2) remains lit for that CTIS setting.
Figure 1. Dual Winch Loading.
0017-1
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. If not already coupled, couple tractor to semitrailer (WP 0013).

4. Align back of tractor/semitrailer combination as close as possible to payload, approximately 15 ft (4.6 m) on the ground
as level as possible.
WARNING
Whenever possible, load semitrailer on level ground. In adverse conditions, loading can be done on grades up
to 10 percent. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
Due to the possibility of winch cables piling up against the end flanges of the cable drums, the following offset
limits between the tractor and semitrailer (Figure 2) must be adhered to:
• M1070 tractor: 10 degrees left and 4 degrees right.
• M911 tractor: 4 degrees left and 10 degrees right.
5. Visually check tractor/semitrailer offset angle. Make any required adjustments to tractor by having spotter check
relationship between steering wedge bolt and weld circle at bottom rear of pickup plate. If inside edge of bolt aligns with
outside edge of weld circle, offset angle is 10 degrees. Make any required adjustments to tractor.
0017-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
6. Apply tractor parking brakes by pulling out parking brake valve (Figure 3, Item 1). Remove four wheel chocks (Figure 3,
Item 2) from stowage compartment on tractor (Figure 3, Item 3) and chock wheels on both sides of tractor.
NOTE
A manila rope will be used to pull the tractor winch cable through the snatch block for use during unloading
procedures.
7. Remove manila rope (Figure 4, Item 1) from platform stowage compartment (Figure 4, Item 4). Starting from front
streetside corner of platform (Figure 4, Item 2), pull one end of manila rope back and through snatch block (Figure 4,
Item 3) and forward to front curbside corner of platform.
8. Tie both ends of manila rope (Figure 4, Item 1) to front lifting eyes (Figure 4, Item 5) on platform (Figure 4,
Item 2) (just inward of each front support leg).
9. Position payload chocks, curb guides, and tiedown chains. Adjust platform to loading position. Lower ramps by
performing steps 8 through 51 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015).
0017-3
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• If possible, provide ample clear space behind the disabled payload during loading to protect personnel and
prevent damage to equipment should cables break while payload is being loaded.
• Ensure winch cables are not kinked, clevises are secure to winch cables, and snatch blocks and shackles are
in good condition and properly secured.
• Ensure winch cables are inspected in accordance with TB 43-0142.
• Use extreme caution during any operation on a slope.
• Have a ground spotter stand off curbside of semitrailer and maintain visual contact with the winch operator.
The spotter must observe cables, snatch blocks, shackles, and payload position during loading.
• DO NOT overload tractor winches. Know the rating of the winches being used and any protection devices
(such as shear pins) or injury to personnel may result.
WARNING
• All ground personnel must stand clear of winch cables except when handling.
• During winch-on operations on a downgrade, the payload must be restrained from the rear with some other
vehicle to prevent possible loss of control of the payload.
• At no time during loading operations, while the payload is being pulled on with winches, should personnel
be on the semitrailer platform.
• Always wear leather gloves when handling cable. Never allow cable to run through hands.
NOTE
• The M1070 tractor has an auxiliary winch system that is used to pay out the main winch cables to the payload.
• When using the M911 tractor, the main winch cables must be payed out manually.
10. When using an M911 tractor, proceed to step 58.
NOTE
• Ensure that M1070 tractor parking brake is applied. PTO will not engage unless tractor parking brake is set.
• Perform steps 11 through 52 to use the auxiliary winch to pay out main cables for the M1070 tractor.
11. Turn beacon light switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to ON position. With engine idling, set PTO switch (Figure 5, Item 2) to ON.
0017-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
WARNING
Hearing protection must be worn when near winching station or when operating winches. Failure to follow
12. Raise guard (Figure 6, Item 1). Lock guard in upright position and release AUXILIARY WINCH KICKOUT by lifting
and rotating lever (Figure 6, Item 2) counterclockwise.
0017-5
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
13. Remove two large shackles (Figure 7, Item 4) from rear payload tiedown ring (Figure 7, Item 3) and four load binders
(Figure 7, Item 2). Leave load binders and chains (Figure 7, Item 5) in place on platform (Figure 7, Item 1).

14. Remove two smaller shackles (Figure 8, Item 1) from Basic Issue Items (BII) (WP 0169). Unhook auxiliary winch cable
(Figure 8, Item 6) from stow hook (Figure 8, Item 8).
NOTE
Pull auxiliary winch cable along streetside of gooseneck and over platform to front of payload.
15. Install two large shackles (Figure 8, Item 4) (from platform) and two smaller shackles (Figure 8, Item 1) (from BII,
WP 0169) on upper left recovery eye (Figure 8, Item 3) and upper right recovery eye (Figure 8, Item 2).
16. Remove auxiliary snatch block (Figure 8, Item 9) from stowage on M1070 tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10). Attach auxiliary
snatch block to smaller shackle (Figure 8, Item 1) on upper left recovery eye (Figure 8, Item 3) of payload.
17. Unscrew retainer bolt (Figure 8, Item 5), rotate side housing (Figure 8, Item 7) to open auxiliary snatch block (Figure 8,
Item 9), pass auxiliary winch cable (Figure 8, Item 6) through auxiliary snatch block, and rotate side housing to close.
Tighten retainer bolt to secure side housing in closed position.
0017-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
0017-7
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Ensure auxiliary winch cable is pulled forward over platform and along curbside of gooseneck toward passenger
side of winching station on tractor.
18. Engage both DRIVER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT (Figure 9, Item 12) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT
(Figure 9, Item 2) switches by pushing on each switch.
19. Push CABLE HOLD-DOWN lever (Figure 9, Item 13) to ON position.
20. Pull PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 9, Item 1) upward momentarily until there is enough slack in passenger
side winch cable (Figure 9, Item 3) to be removed from stow hook (Figure 9, Item 5). Move winch cable clevis (Figure 9,
Item 4) off of stow hook to unstow winch cable. Continue paying out winch cable until spotter on the ground can reach
winch cable clevis. Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
21. Remove and retain cotter pin (Figure 9, Item 10) and shouldered pin (Figure 9, Item 6) from passenger side winch cable
clevis (Figure 9, Item 4).
22. Remove cotter pin (Figure 9, Item 9) and shouldered pin (Figure 9, Item 7) from auxiliary winch cable clevis
(Figure 9, Item 8). Install auxiliary winch cable clevis over one ear of passenger side winch cable clevis (Figure 9, Item 4)
and install shouldered pin and cotter pin.
23. Engage AUXILIARY WINCH KICKOUT lever (Figure 9, Item 11) by lifting and rotating lever clockwise. Disengage
PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT (Figure 9, Item 2) switch by pulling switch.
0017-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
WARNING
DO NOT allow auxiliary winch cable to cross itself or knot up on winch. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
With the aid of an assistant, use one person to operate winch controls and a second person to ensure that winch cable
clevises DO NOT hang up on the platform.
24. Push down on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 10, Item 1) to pull passenger side winch cable (Figure 10, Item 3)
toward auxiliary snatch block (Figure 10, Item 2).
0017-9
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
25. If auxiliary winch cable (Figure 11, Item 6) does not pull passenger side winch cable (Figure 11, Item 4), push engine
SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 11, Item 1) to HIGH engine IDLE.
26. Momentarily push engine SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 11, Item 2) to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately
1,500 rpm), and then release switch.
27. When passenger side winch cable (Figure 11, Item 4) reaches front of platform, release AUXILIARY WINCH lever
28. Route passenger side winch cable (Figure 11, Item 4) through gooseneck cable guide (Figure 11, Item 3).
29. Push down on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 7) and continue to pull passenger winch cable
(Figure 11, Item 4) to auxiliary snatch block (Figure 11, Item 5).
30. Release AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 7) when passenger side winch cable (Figure 11, Item 4) is
approximately 12 in. (29 cm) from auxiliary snatch block (Figure 11, Item 5). Spotter must continue to pull passenger
side winch cable until winch cable has enough slack that it touches the ground.
0017-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
32. Separate auxiliary winch cable (Figure 12, Item 4) from passenger side winch cable (Figure 12, Item 1).
33. Lay passenger side winch cable (Figure 12, Item 1) on the ground in front of payload (Figure 12, Item 5).
0017-11
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
34. Release AUXILIARY WINCH KICKOUT by lifting and rotating lever (Figure 13, Item 7) counterclockwise.
35. Pull auxiliary winch cable (Figure 13, Item 5) forward over platform and along streetside of gooseneck (Figure 13,
Item 6) toward driver side of winching station on tractor.
36. Pull DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 13, Item 1) upward momentarily until there is enough slack in driver side winch
cable (Figure 13, Item 4) to be removed from stow hook (Figure 13, Item 3).
37. Move driver’s side winch cable clevis (Figure 13, Item 2) off of stow hook (Figure 13, Item 3) to unstow winch cable
38. Continue paying out cable (Figure 13, Item 4) until spotter on the ground can reach clevis (Figure 13, Item 2). Release
lever (Figure 13, Item 1).
0017-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
0017-13
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
39. Remove and retain cotter pin (Figure 14, Item 7) and shouldered pin (Figure 14, Item 10) from driver side winch cable
40. Install auxiliary winch cable clevis (Figure 14, Item 13) over one ear of clevis (Figure 14, Item 9) of driver side winch
cable (Figure 14, Item 8) and install shouldered pin (Figure 14, Item 11) and cotter pin (Figure 14, Item 14).
41. Engage AUXILIARY WINCH KICKOUT by lifting and rotating lever (Figure 14, Item 6) clockwise. Disengage DRIVER
SIDE WINCH KICKOUT switch (Figure 14, Item 3) by pulling switch.
WARNING
NOTE
With the aid of an assistant, use one person to operate the winch controls and a second person to ensure that
winch cable clevises DO NOT hang up on platform.
42. Push down on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 14, Item 12) to pull driver side winch cable (Figure 14, Item 8) to
auxiliary snatch block (Figure 14, Item 4).
43. If auxiliary winch cable (Figure 14, Item 5) does not pull driver side winch cable (Figure 14, Item 8), push engine SPEED
CONTROL switch (Figure 14, Item 1) to HIGH engine IDLE. Momentarily push engine SPEED CONTROL switch
(Figure 14, Item 2) to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then release switch.
0017-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
0017-15
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
44. When driver side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 3) reaches front of platform, release AUXILIARY WINCH lever
45. Route driver side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 3) through gooseneck cable guide (Figure 15, Item 2).
46. Push down on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 15, Item 1) and continue to pull driver side winch cable
(Figure 15, Item 3) to auxiliary snatch block (Figure 15, Item 4).
47. Release AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 15, Item 1) when driver side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 3) is approximately
12 in. (30 cm) from auxiliary snatch block (Figure 15, Item 4).
48. Spotter must continue to pull driver side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 3) until winch cable has enough slack that it
touches the ground.
50. Separate auxiliary winch cable (Figure 15, Item 9) from driver side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 3).
51. Lay driver side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 3) on the ground in front of payload (Figure 15, Item 8).
52. Install shouldered pin (Figure 15, Item 7) and cotter pin (Figure 15, Item 5) in auxiliary winch cable clevis
0017-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
NOTE
Perform steps 53 through 57 to stow snatch block and auxiliary winch cable.
53. Unscrew retainer bolt (Figure 16, Item 7) and rotate side housing (Figure 16, Item 2) on auxiliary snatch block
(Figure 16, Item 6) to open snatch block.
54. Remove auxiliary winch cable (Figure 16, Item 1) from auxiliary snatch block (Figure 16, Item 6), rotate side housing
(Figure 16, Item 2) to close, and tighten retainer bolt (Figure 16, Item 7) to secure side housing in closed position.
55. Remove auxiliary snatch block (Figure 16, Item 6) from shackle (Figure 16, Item 8) and place back in storage on
M1070 tractor.
56. Remove two small shackles (Figure 16, Item 8) from larger shackles (Figure 16, Item 9) in upper left and right recovery
eyes (Figure 16, Item 3). Return two small shackles to BII (WP 0169).
57. Using one person to push downward on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 16, Item 5) and one person to maintain tension
on auxiliary winch cable (Figure 16, Item 1), retract winch cable and restow cable on stow hook (Figure 16, Item 4).
0017-17
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• When using M1070 tractor, proceed to step 60 below.
• When using M911 tractor, perform steps 58 through 59 to pay out main winch cables to payload.
58. Unhook passenger side winch cable clevis (Figure 17, Item 8) and driver side winch cable clevis (Figure 17, Item 6) from
stowage points on tractor. Ensure clevises are secure on cables (Figure 17, Item 9 and Item 10).
NOTE
Winch operator must pay out one cable at a time while spotter supports cable end and guides cable toward back of
semitrailer until each cable is at least 4 ft (1.2 m) past front of payload.
59. Route both driver and passenger side winch cables (Figure 17, Item 9 and Item 10) through gooseneck cable guides
NOTE
• When winching payloads onto the semitrailer, a straight winch cable pull is the preferred method.
• Crossed winch cable pulls may be used if significant directional control problems are expected.
60. With aid of an assistant, connect passenger side winch cable clevis (Figure 17, Item 8) to shackle (Figure 17, Item 4) on
upper right recovery eye (Figure 17, Item 2) on payload (Figure 17, Item 11) and secure in place by installing shouldered
pin (Figure 17, Item 1) and cotter pin (Figure 17, Item 5).
0017-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
61. With aid of assistant, connect driver side winch cable clevis (Figure 17, Item 6) to shackle (Figure 17, Item 4) on upper
left recovery eye (Figure 17, Item 3) on payload (Figure 17, Item 11) and secure in place by installing shouldered pin
(Figure 17, Item 1) and cotter pin (Figure 17, Item 5).
0017-19
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
• The payload brake system must be released prior to winching payload onto semitrailer, or damage to
equipment may result.
• WINCH SPEED CONTROL must be placed in LOW for MAX PULL when loading payloads, or damage to
NOTE
Ensure payload brakes are released. Station ground spotter on curbside of payload to provide direction to winch
operator during winching operation.
62. Pull WINCH SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 18, Item 4) to LOW. Push engine SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 18,
Item 2) to HIGH engine IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 18, Item 3) to lock engine
speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then release ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch.
63. Engage both DRIVER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT switch (Figure 18, Item 5) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT
switch (Figure 18, Item 1) by pushing on each switch. Push CABLE HOLD-DOWN lever (Figure 18, Item 11) to ON.
64. Winch operator must take up all slack in both driver and passenger side winch cables (Figure 18, Item 9 and Item 10) by
pushing down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 18, Item 6) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 18,
Item 12). Release both levers when both winch cables are tight.
NOTE
• Prior to pulling the payload onto the ramps, the spotter must check the alignment of the payload tracks (inward
edge) to the curb guides.
• Perform steps 65 and 66 if adjustment is required to align the payload with the platform.
• If the payload is angled toward curbside of the semitrailer, perform step 65.
• Prior to making adjustments, the spotter must place scrap blocks of wood under streetside of the payload, just
in front of the first roadwheel.
65. Winch operator must push down on PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 18, Item 12) and pull payload (Figure 18,
Item 7) in alignment with ramps (Figure 18, Item 8) and then release lever (Figure 18, Item 12).
NOTE
• If the payload is angled toward street of the semitrailer, perform step 66.
• Prior to making adjustments, the spotter must place scrap blocks of wood under curbside of the payload, just
in front of the f rst roadwheel.
66. Winch operator must push down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 18, Item 6) and pull payload (Figure 18, Item 7)
in alignment with ramps (Figure 18, Item 8), and then release lever (Figure 18, Item 6).
0017-20
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
0017-21
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
Winch operator must maintain even tension on both winch cables to keep payload centered with semitrailer
as payload is loaded, or damage to equipment may result.
67. Winch operator must push down both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 19, Item 1) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
lever (Figure 19, Item 2) to pull payload (Figure 19, Item 3) slowly up ramps (Figure 19, Item 4) onto platform (Figure 19,
Item 8), adjusting pull on either cable (Figure 19, Item 10 or Item 11) as required to maintain alignment of payload tracks
(Figure 19, Item 6) to curb guides (Figure 19, Item 9).
68. When track on streetside of payload (Figure 19, Item 6) makes contact with curbside rear payload chock (Figure 19,
Item 7), winch operator must release both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 19, Item 1) and PASSENGER SIDE
WINCH lever (Figure 19, Item 2) to stop payload (Figure 19, Item 3).
69. Chock streetside rear of payload (Figure 19, Item 3) using streetside rear payload chocks (Figure 19, Item 5).
70. Perform steps 61 through 64 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015) to adjust platform to normal running height.
0017-22
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
71. Lift two front tiedown chains (Figure 20, Item 4) and attach to two front towing lugs (Figure 20, Item 1) using two shackles
(Figure 20, Item 2) from platform stowage compartment.
72. Remove curbside rear payload chock (Figure 20, Item 3) from front streetside of payload (Figure 20, Item 5).
0017-23
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
73. Winch operator must push down on both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 21, Item 12) and PASSENGER SIDE
WINCH lever (Figure 21, Item 13) until front tiedown chains (Figure 21, Item 6) are tight and payload tracks (front
roadwheels) (Figure 21, Item 15) are firmly on front payload chocks (Figure 21, Item 4).
74. Place two rear payload chocks (Figure 21, Item 16) to rear curbside and streetside of payload (Figure 21, Item 5).
WARNING
Prior to removing winch cable from payload, winch operator must ensure each cable sags to top of tractor
tires to relieve cable twist. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
75. Winch operator must pull up both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever ( Figure 21, Item 12) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
lever (Figure 21, Item 13) until each winch cable (Figure 21, Item 2 and Item 1) sags to top of tractor tires
WARNING
• Failure to extend safety rail while attaching or removing payload winch cable may cause injury to personnel.
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in front of the
the solar battery charger.
76. Unlatch and extend gooseneck safety rail (Figure 21, Item 3).
77. Check for twist in both winch cables (Figure 21, Item 2 and Item 1).
78. Remove cotter pins (Figure 21, Item 9) and shouldered pins (Figure 21, Item 11) from two clevises (Figure 21, Item 10) on
both driver and passenger side winch cables (Figure 21, Item 2 and Item 1).
79. Remove cables (Figure 21, Item 2 and Item 1) from shackles (Figure 21, Item 9) on two upper recovery eyes
(Figure 21, Item 7) on payload (Figure 21, Item 5).
80. Remove two large shackles (Figure 21, Item 8) from upper recovery eyes (Figure 21, Item 7) of payload (Figure 21, Item 5).
0017-24
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
WARNING
• Failure to extend safety rail while attaching or removing the payload winch cable may cause injury to personnel.
the solar battery charger.
81. Retract and latch gooseneck safety rail (Figure 21, Item 3).
0017-25
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
82. Install two large shackles (Figure 22, Item 2) and four load binders (Figure 22, Item 1) on rear payload tiedown ring
83. Perform steps 69 through 79 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015) to secure payload to semitrailer platform.
84. Install two shouldered pins (Figure 23, Item 1) and cotter pins (Figure 23, Item 9) on winch cable clevises
(Figure 23, Item 10 and Item 12).
85. Remove both winch cables (Figure 23, Item 11 and Item 13) from gooseneck cable guides (Figure 23, Item 14).
WARNING
DO NOT allow hands to get between clevis and winch. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injury to personel.
86. Using one person to push down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 23, Item 4) and one person to maintain tension
on DRIVER SIDE WINCH cable (Figure 23, Item 11), retract and stow DRIVER SIDE WINCH cable clevis (Figure 23,
Item 8) onto stow hook (Figure 23, Item 7). Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever.
87. Using one person to push down on PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 23, Item 2) and one person to maintain
tension on PASSENGER SIDE WINCH cable (Figure 23, Item 13), retract and stow PASSENGER SIDE WINCH cable
clevis (Figure 23, Item 6) onto stow hook (Figure 23, Item 7). Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
88. Pull ENGINE SPEED CONTROL (Figure 23, Item 3) switch to LOW ENGINE IDLE. Lower guard (Figure 23, Item 5)
and lock guard in place.
89. Raise and secure ramps, and restow curb guides, crowbar, and all tools used during this procedure (WP 0009).
0017-26
TM 9-2330-381-13 0017
0017-27
0017 TM 9-2330-381-13
90. In M1070 tractor cab, set PTO switch (Figure 24, Item 2) and beacon light switch (Figure 24, Item 1) to OFF position.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0017-28
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DUAL WINCH UNLOADING
INITIAL SETUP:
2 WP 0015
WP 0016
References
TB 43-0142
WP 0008
WP 0009
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for unloading a disabled payload (M1 Series Main Battle Tank) on the Heavy
Equipment Transporter (HET) M1000 semitrailer coupled to a U.S. Army M1070 or M911 tractor.
Included are procedures for payloads that DO NOT roll freely and procedures for payloads that are free-rolling.
0018-1
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
DUAL WINCH UNLOADING FOR NON-FREE ROLLING PAYLOAD
1. Perform steps 1 through 8 of Unloading Able Payloads (WP 0016) to position tractor/semitrailer, adjust ramp span
width, and position curb guides.
WARNING
• Provide ample clear space behind the disabled payload during unloading, if possible, to protect personnel
and prevent damage to equipment should cables break while payload is being unloaded.
• Ensure all ground personnel stand clear of winch cables except when handling cables.
in good condition and properly secured.
• Ensure winch cables are inspected in accordance with TB 43-0142.
• Ensure a ground spotter stands off curbside of semitrailer and maintains visual contact with the winch
operator. The spotter must observe cables, snatch blocks, shackles, and payload position during unloading.
(such as shear pins).
• DO NOT at any time during unloading operations, while the payload is being pulled off with winches,
allow personnel to be on the semitrailer platform.
NOTE
Ensure that the M1070 tractor parking brake is applied. The Power Take Off (PTO) will not engage unless the
tractor parking brake is set.
0018-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
Figure 1. Dual Winch Unloading.
0018-3
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Loosen handle (Figure 2, Item 3) of snatch block stow clamp (Figure 2, Item 2) and remove snatch block (Figure 2, Item 4)
from stowed position off platform stow pins (Figure 2, Item 5).
WARNING
Hearing protection must be worn when near winching station or operating winches. Failure to follow this
4. Raise guard (Figure 2, Item 1) and lock in upright position. Release AUXILIARY WINCH KICKOUT by lifting and
rotating lever (Figure 2, Item 6) counterclockwise.

5. Untie manila rope (Figure 3, Item 2) from curbside front lifting eye (Figure 3, Item 3) on platform (Figure 3, Item 4) and
move end of rope to streetside front lifting eye (Figure 3, Item 1).
6. Unhook auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 6) from stow hook (Figure 3, Item 7). Pull auxiliary winch cable to free end
of manila rope (Figure 3, Item 2) and tie rope to auxiliary winch cable clevis (Figure 3, Item 5).
0018-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018

7. Untie manila rope (Figure 4, Item 10) from streetside front lifting eye (Figure 4, Item 8) on platform (Figure 4, Item 9)
and use manila rope to pull auxiliary winch cable (Figure 4, Item 3) rearward under payload (Figure 4, Item 1) to snatch
block (Figure 4, Item 6).
8. Remove linch pin (Figure 4, Item 4) and keeper pin (Figure 4, Item 5) to open snatch block (Figure 4, Item 6). Pass
auxiliary winch cable (Figure 4, Item 3), curbside to streetside, through snatch block.
9. Close snatch block (Figure 4, Item 6) and reinstall keeper pin (Figure 4, Item 5). Secure keeper pin with linch pin
(Figure 4, Item 4).
10. Continue pulling manila rope (Figure 4, Item 10) forward until auxiliary cable winch clevis (Figure 4, Item 7) reaches
driver side winch cable clevis (Figure 4, Item 2). Untie manila rope from auxiliary winch cable clevis.
0018-5
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
11. Ensure both DRIVER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT (Figure 5, Item 2) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT
(Figure 5, Item 1) switches are ENGAGED (pushed away from operator).
12. Ensure CABLE HOLD-DOWN lever (Figure 5, Item 14) is ON (pushed away from operator).
13. Pull DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 5, Item 3) upward momentarily until there is enough slack in driver side winch
cable (Figure 5, Item 4) to be removed from stow hook (Figure 5, Item 7). Move winch cable clevis (Figure 5, Item 5) off
of stow hook to unstow winch cable. Continue paying out winch cable until spotter on ground can reach winch cable
clevis. Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever.
14. Remove and retain cotter pin (Figure 5, Item 13) and shouldered pin (Figure 5, Item 8) from clevis (Figure 5, Item 5) on
driver side winch cable (Figure 5, Item 4).
16. Install auxiliary winch cable clevis (Figure 5, Item 10) over one ear (Figure 5, Item 12) on driver side winch cable
17. Install shouldered pin (Figure 5, Item 9) and cotter pin (Figure 5, Item 11) on clevis (Figure 5, Item 10).
18. Engage AUXILIARY WINCH KICKOUT by lifting and rotating lever (Figure 5, Item 6) clockwise. Disengage DRIVER
SIDE WINCH KICKOUT (Figure 5, Item 2) switch by pulling switch.
0018-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
0018-7
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
19. With aid of an assistant, use one person to operate winch controls (Figure 6, Item 1, Item 2, Item 13, and Item 16) and
a second person to ensure winch cable clevises (Figure 6, Item 7 and Item 10) DO NOT hang up on platform
(Figure 6, Item 14). Push down on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 6, Item 13) to pull driver side winch cable (Figure 6,
Item 15) to snatch block (Figure 6, Item 6).
20. If auxiliary winch cable (Figure 6, Item 9) does not pull driver side winch cable (Figure 6, Item 15), push ENGINE SPEED
CONTROL switch (Figure 6, Item 1) to HIGH ENGINE IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE SPEED LOCK switch
(Figure 6, Item 2) to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm) and then release ENGINE SPEED LOCK switch.
NOTE
To keep winch cable clevis from becoming stuck on platform, spotter should watch clevis as it passes under
the payload.
21. Winch operator must release lever (Figure 6, Item 13) when driver side winch cable (Figure 6, Item 15) reaches snatch
block (Figure 6, Item 6).
22. Spotter must pull on driver side winch cable (Figure 6, Item 15) to get enough slack so that cable can be passed through
snatch block (Figure 6, Item 6). Unfasten linch pin (Figure 6, Item 4) from keeper pin (Figure 6, Item 5). Remove keeper
pin from snatch block, and lift and open snatch block. Pass driver side winch cable through snatch block.
23. Once driver side winch cable (Figure 6, Item 15) is past pulley (Figure 6, Item 3) on snatch block (Figure 6, Item 6), close
snatch block and reinstall keeper pin (Figure 6, Item 5). Secure keeper pin to snatch block with linch pin (Figure 6, Item 4).
24. Winch operator must push down and hold AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 6, Item 13) to pull driver side winch
cable (Figure 6, Item 15) to front streetside of payload.
25. Winch operator must release lever (Figure 6, Item 13) when winch cable (Figure 6, Item 15) is approximately 12 in.
(30 cm) past streetside front of platform (Figure 6, Item 14).
WARNING
Prior to disconnecting any winch cables, be sure each cable is not twisted. A twisted winch cable, when
operated, may develop extreme tension. Failure to follow this warning may cause injury to personnel when
cable clevis is removed.
26. Remove cotter pin (Figure 6, Item 11) and shouldered pin (Figure 6, Item 8) from auxiliary cable clevis (Figure 6,
Item 10). Remove auxiliary cable clevis from driver side winch cable clevis (Figure 6, Item 7).
27. With aid of an assistant, use one person to push downward on AUXILIARY WINCH lever (Figure 6, Item 13) and one
person to maintain tension on auxiliary winch cable (Figure 6, Item 9). Retract auxiliary winch cable and restow cable
on stow hook (Figure 6, Item 12).
28. Move CABLE HOLD-DOWN lever (Figure 6, Item 16) to OFF.
0018-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018

29. Pull driver side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 14) to curbside front of payload (Figure 7, Item 12) and route over both front
tiedown chains (Figure 7, Item 13).
30. Attach driver side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 14) to pear ring (Figure 7, Item 15) on front curbside tiedown chain
(Figure 7, Item 13) next to shackle (Figure 7, Item 16) on curbside front towing lug (Figure 7, Item 17). Secure winch
cable by installing shouldered pin (Figure 7, Item 5) and cotter pin (Figure 7, Item 8).
31. Route driver side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 14) through streetside gooseneck cable guide (Figure 7, Item 25) and
around pivot pin sheave (Figure 7, Item 23).
side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) to be removed from stow hook (Figure 7, Item 3). Move winch cable clevis (Figure 7,
Item 2) from stow hook to unstow passenger side winch cable. Continue paying out passenger side winch cable until
spotter on the ground can reach clevis. Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
0018-9
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
33. Disengage PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT switch (Figure 7, Item 21) by pulling on PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
KICKOUT switch.
34. Remove cotter pin (Figure 7, Item 8) and shouldered pin (Figure 7, Item 5) from clevis (Figure 7, Item 4) on passenger
side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1).
35. Winch operator must pull WINCH SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 7, Item 18) to LOW. Push ENGINE SPEED
CONTROL switch (Figure 7, Item 20) to HIGH ENGINE IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE SPEED LOCK switch
(Figure 7, Item 19) to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then release ENGINE SPEED
LOCK switch.
36. Remove two large shackles (Figure 7, Item 7) from four load binders (Figure 7, Item 9) and rear payload tiedown ring
WARNING
• Failure to extend safety rail while attaching or removing payload winch cable may cause injury to personnel.
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on or trip over it.
38. Install large shackle (Figure 7, Item 7) to upper right recovery eye (Figure 7, Item 6) and upper left recovery eye
39. Pull out passenger side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) and attach clevis (Figure 7, Item 2) to shackle (Figure 7, Item 7)
on payload upper right recovery eye (Figure 7, Item 6). Secure passenger side winch cable by installing shouldered
WARNING
• Failure to retract and latch gooseneck safety rail before operating tractor/trailer will result in damage to
equipment.
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on or trip over it.
41. Route passenger side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1) through gooseneck cable guide (Figure 7, Item 25).
42. Winch operator must engage PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT switch (Figure 7, Item 21) by pushing in on
PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT switch. Momentarily push down and release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever
(Figure 7, Item 22) to remove slack in passenger side winch cable (Figure 7, Item 1).
0018-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
0018-11
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
43. Spotter must move streetside rear payload chock (Figure 8, Item 8) back over No. 4 bogie (Figure 8, Item 7). Spotter must
place curbside rear payload chock (Figure 8, Item 9) on the ground on streetside of platform (Figure 8, Item 6).
WARNING
The driver side winch cable will be used to pull back the payload. The passenger side winch cable will be
used to restrain the payload. DO NOT allow the driver side winch cable to pull against the passenger side
winch cable or the chain will part. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury to personnel.
44. Winch operator must engage DRIVER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT switch (Figure 8, Item 2) by pushing DRIVER SIDE
WINCH KICKOUT switch. Push down DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 8, Item 3) to move payload (Figure 8,
Item 4) back to streetside rear payload chock (Figure 8, Item 8). Pull up PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 8,
Item 1) just enough to remove slack from passenger side winch cable (Figure 8, Item 16).
45. Winch operator must release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 8, Item 3) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever
(Figure 8, Item 1) when payload (Figure 8, Item 4) makes f rm contact with streetside rear payload chock (Figure 8,
Item 8). Spotter must place curbside rear payload chock (Figure 8, Item 9) firmly against streetside front of payload
to chock payload.
WARNING
Prior to removing the winch cable from the payload, winch operator must ensure each cable sags and touches
the platform to relieve cable torque. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury to personnel.
46. Winch operator must pull up DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 8, Item 3) to give slack in driver side winch cable
(Figure 8, Item 10). Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever when driver side winch cable is laying on platform (Figure 8,
Item 6) between front tiedown chains (Figure 8, Item 14) and snatch block (Figure 8, Item 5).
WARNING
Extreme caution must be used when removing winch cables. Cable may be under tension or may be twisted.
If winch cable has tension when removed, slowly and carefully rotate cable to relieve tension. DO NOT allow
cable to twist or whip freely. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
47. Check for twist in driver side winch cable (Figure 8, Item 10). Remove and retain cotter pin (Figure 8, Item 13) and
shouldered pin (Figure 8, Item 11) from driver side winch cable clevis (Figure 8, Item 12).
48. Remove driver side winch cable (Figure 8, Item 10) from pear ring (Figure 8, Item 15) on curbside front payload tiedown
chain (Figure 8, Item 14). Disconnect one payload tiedown chain from payload (Figure 8, Item 4) and platform
(Figure 8, Item 6), and lay chain on platform in front of payload. Disconnect other payload tiedown chain from platform
only. Leave chain connected to payload.
0018-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
0018-13
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Shackles used to tie down payload may be removed as required and used for the following steps.
49. Attach shackle (Figure 9, Item 17) and one front payload tiedown chain (Figure 9, Item 15) to payload lower tiedown lugs
(Figure 9, Item 14). Allow as much slack as possible in tiedown chain. This forms the Y-chain (Figure 9, Item 12) to be
used to winch payload (Figure 9, Item 11) off of platform (Figure 9, Item 16).
CAUTION
Always connect the winch cable to the center-most point on the continuous portion of the Y-chain, not on
the wraparound portion that has a hook on the end, or the hook may disconnect under load and cause
50. Attach driver side winch cable clevis (Figure 9, Item 8) to center of Y-chain (Figure 9, Item 12) using a shackle
(Figure 9, Item 13). (If using 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) chains, use two shackles.) Install shouldered pin (Figure 9, Item 9) and cotter pin
(Figure 9, Item 10) on clevis. Winch operator must push down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 9, Item 5) and take
up slack in driver side winch cable (Figure 9, Item 7).
51. Lower both rear support legs until slightly below mud flaps (WP 0012).
WARNING
A spotter is required for unloading operations. The winch operator must maintain visual contact with the
spotter at all times. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
52. Position spotter on curbside of payload to maintain visual contact with winch operator.
WARNING
• Winch operator and spotter must read steps 63 through 67 and be completely familiar with the sequence of
steps prior to using winches.
• Personnel must not be on the platform during the winching operation. The winch operator must off oad
the payload slowly.
• During winching operation, ensure that one cable is always under tension and the other cable has some
slack so that the two winches are NEVER pulling against each other.
• Payload adjustments, side-to-side (turning), must be kept to a minimum. Spotter must notify winch
operator of any required payload adjustments while unloading.
53. Pull WINCH SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 9, Item 4) to LOW. Push ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch
(Figure 9, Item 2) to HIGH ENGINE IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE SPEED LOCK CONTROL switch (Figure 9,
Item 3) tolock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then release ENGINE SPEED LOCK CONTROL
switch.
54. Winch operator must push down PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 9, Item 1) to pull payload (Figure 9, Item 11)
slightly forward, off of rear payload chocks (Figure 9, Item 6). Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
0018-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
55. Pull WINCH SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 9, Item 4) to LOW. Push ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure
9, Item 2) to HIGH ENGINE IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE SPEED LOCK CONTROL switch (Figure 9, Item 3)
to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then release ENGINE SPEED LOCK CONTROL
switch (Figure 9, Item 3).
56. Winch operator must push down PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 9, Item 1) to pull payload (Figure 9, Item 11)
slightly forward, off of rear payload chocks (Figure 9, Item 6). Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
NOTE
Move both rear payload chocks to rear of platform, just in front of beavertail and approximately in line with
snatch block.
57. Winch operator must pull up PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 9, Item 1) in order to pay out passenger side
winch cable (Figure 9, Item 18), which will restrain payload (Figure 9, Item 11). Push down DRIVER SIDE WINCH
lever (Figure 9, Item 5) to take up driver side winch cable (Figure 9, Item 7).
NOTE
As long as driver side cable is pulling payload, winch operator must keep a slight sag in passenger side cable.
58. If payload (Figure 9, Item 11) rolls on its own, winch operator must allow slack in driver side winch cable (Figure 9, Item 7)
and keep tension on passenger side winch cable (Figure 9, Item 18) to control speed of roll.
59. Continue winching until payload (Figure 9, Item 11) reaches rear payload chocks (Figure 9, Item 6). Release levers

0018-15
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Extreme caution must be used when removing winch cables from payload. Cable may be under tension or
may be twisted. If winch cable has tension when removed, slowly and carefully, using both hands, rotate
cable to relieve tension. DO NOT allow cable to twist or whip freely. Failure to follow this warning may
60. Winch operator must pull up on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 10, Item 1) to pay out driver side winch cable
(Figure 10, Item 7) until there is enough slack to relieve tension in cable. Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever. Check
for twist in driver side winch cable.
61. With aid of an assistant, remove cotter pin (Figure 10, Item 11) and shouldered pin (Figure 10, Item 12), driver side winch
clevis (Figure 10, Item 10), and shackle (Figure 10, Item 13) from Y-chain (Figure 10, Item 14).
62. Remove Y-chain (Figure 10, Item 14) from payload (Figure 10, Item 3).
63. Remove linch pin (Figure 10, Item 4) and keeper pin (Figure 10, Item 5) from snatch block (Figure 10, Item 6).
Remove driver side winch cable (Figure 10, Item 7), close snatch block, reinstall keeper pin, and secure with linch pin.
64. Place snatch block (Figure 10, Item 6) in stowage position. Install stow clamp (Figure 10, Item 8) and secure by tightening
clamp handle (Figure 10, Item 9).
0018-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
65. Attach driver side winch clevis (Figure 10, Item 10) to upper left recovery eye (Figure 10, Item 2).
0018-17
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
66. Remove driver side winch cable (Figure 11, Item 8) from gooseneck pivot pin sheave (Figure 11, Item 7).
67. Winch operator must push down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 2) to remove slack in cable
68. Lower both loading ramps (Figure 11, Item 5) (WP 0009).
NOTE
• Platform angle will be slightly greater than that normally used for load/off oad.
• With Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) running, release semitrailer parking brakes and adjust platform height.
69. Raise front of semitrailer to 50 in. (127 cm) (top mark on crowbar) measured at No. 1 bogey position (WP 0008).
70. Lower rear of semitrailer until rear support legs are f rmly in contact with ground. There must be at least 1 in. (2.54 cm) of
polished (shiny) surface showing on rear suspension cylinders. Reapply semitrailer parking brakes (WP 0008).
71. Winch operator must pull up on both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 2) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
lever (Figure 11, Item 1) to pull payload (Figure 11, Item 3) slightly forward off of rear payload chocks (Figure 11,
Item 4). Remove both rear payload chocks.
NOTE
Before the payload will roll back on its own, it may be necessary to pull the first set of road wheels onto the
front payload chocks.
72. Winch operator must push down on both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 2) and PASSENGER SIDE
WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 1) and allow payload (Figure 11, Item 3) to roll off of platform (Figure 11, Item 6). Cables
(Figure 11, Item 8 and Item 9) may be paid out unevenly to maintain directional control.
73. Once payload (Figure 11, Item 3) clears curb guides (Figure 11, Item 10), ensure that it rolls straight down ramps
0018-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
WARNING
Prior to removing winch cable from the payload, winch operator must ensure the winch cables have enough
slack to relieve tension in the cable. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
74. Winch operator must continue to pay out both winch cables (Figure 11, Item 8 and Item 9) until both are touching
platform (Figure 11, Item 6). Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 11, Item 1 ) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
0018-19
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Extreme caution must be used when removing the winch cables from payload. Cable may be under tension or
may be twisted. If the winch cable has tension when removed, slowly and carefully, using both hands, rotate
cable to relieve tension. DO NOT allow cable to twist or whip freely. Failure to follow this warning may
75. Check for twist in passenger side winch cable (Figure 12, Item 4). Spotter must remove passenger side winch cable from
upper recovery eye (Figure 12, Item 5) and lay passenger side winch cable on platform (Figure 12, Item 11).
76. Check for twists in driver side winch cable (Figure 12, Item 9). Spotter must remove driver side winch cable from upper
recovery eye (Figure 12, Item 6) and lay driver side winch cable on platform (Figure 12, Item 11).
77. Remove Y-chain (Figure 12, Item 10) and two shackles (Figure 12, Item 8) from payload lower towing lugs
0018-20
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
78. Push ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 12, Item 1) to HIGH ENGINE IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE
SPEED LOCK CONTROL switch (Figure 12, Item 2) to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then
release ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch. Push WINCH SPEED CONTROL SWITCH (Figure 12, Item 3) to HIGH.
0018-21
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
79. Remove driver side winch cable (Figure 13, Item 9) from gooseneck cable guide (Figure 13, Item 11). Leave driver side
winch cable on platform (Figure 13, Item 8).
80. Remove passenger side winch cable (Figure 13, Item 10) from gooseneck cable guide (Figure 13, Item 11). Leave
passenger side winch cable on platform (Figure 13, Item 8).
WARNING
DO NOT allow hands to get between clevis and winch. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to
personnel.
81. With aid of an assistant, use one person to push down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 13, Item 3) and one person
to maintain tension on driver side winch cable (Figure 13, Item 9). Retract and stow winch cable clevis (Figure 13, Item 7)
onto stow hook (Figure 13, Item 6). Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever.
82. Using an assistant to push down on PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 13, Item 1) and an assistant to maintain
tension on passenger side winch cable (Figure 13, Item 10), retract and stow winch cable clevis (Figure 13, Item 5) onto
stow hook (Figure 13, Item 6). Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
83. Pull ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 13, Item 2) to LOW ENGINE IDLE. Lower guard (Figure 13, Item 4)
and lock in place.
NOTE
Remove all chains and load binders from platform and restow in platform storage compartment.
84. Perform steps 33 through 45 of Unloading Able Payloads (WP 0016) to stow equipment used during this procedure and
prepare tractor and semitrailer for transport.
0018-22
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018

END OF TASK
0018-23
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
DUAL WINCH UNLOADING FOR FREE-ROLLING PAYLOAD
NOTE
To unload a disabled payload that rolls freely, proceed as follows.
1. Perform steps 1 through 8 of Unloading Able Payloads (WP 0016) to position tractor/semitrailer, adjust ramp span
width, and position curb guides.
WARNING
• Provide ample clear space behind the disabled payload during unloading, if possible, to protect personnel
and prevent damage to equipment if cables should break while payload is being unloaded.
• Ensure all ground personnel stand clear of winch cables except when handling or injury to personnel
may result.
in good condition and properly secured or injury to personnel may result.
• Ensure winch cables are inspected in accordance with TB 43-0142 or injury to personnel may result.
WARNING
• Ensure ground spotter stands off curbside of semitrailer and maintains visual contact with the winch
operator. The spotter must observe cables, snatch blocks, shackles, and payload position during unloading or
injury to personnel may result.
(such as shear pins) or injury to personnel may result.
• DO NOT at any time during unloading operations, while the payload is being pulled off with winches, allow
personnel be on the semitrailer platform or injury to personnel may result.
NOTE
Ensure the M1070 tractor parking brake is applied. The Power Take Off (PTO) will not engage unless the tractor
parking brake is set.
0018-24
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
3. Perform steps 9 through 21 of Unloading Able Payloads (WP 0016) to disconnect all rear tiedown chains from payload.
0018-25
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Hearing protection must be worn when near winching station or operating winches. Failure to follow this
NOTE
The guard is shown in the upright position.
4. Raise guard (Figure 15, Item 3) and lock in upright position.
5. Ensure both DRIVER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT (Figure 15, Item 11) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH KICKOUT
(Figure 15, Item 10) switches are ENGAGED (pushed away from operator).
6. Ensure CABLE HOLD-DOWN lever (Figure 15, Item 9) is ON (pushed away from operator).
7. Pull DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 15, Item 7) upward momentarily until there is enough slack in driver side
winch cable (Figure 15, Item 1) to be removed from stow hook (Figure 15, Item 5). Remove driver side winch cable clevis
(Figure 15, Item 6) from stow hook to unstow driver side winch cable. Continue paying out driver side winch cable until
spotter on the ground can reach driver side clevis. Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever.
side winch cable (Figure 15, Item 2) to be removed from stow hook (Figure 15, Item 5). Remove passenger side winch
cable clevis (Figure 15, Item 4) from stow hook to unstow passenger side winch cable. Continue paying out passenger side
winch cable until spotter on the ground can reach clevis. Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
0018-26
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
0018-27
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
9. Remove cotter pin (Figure 16, Item 6) and shouldered pin (Figure 16, Item 9) from clevis (Figure 16, Item 8) on driver side
winch cable (Figure 16, Item 7).
10. Remove cotter pin (Figure 16, Item 6) and shouldered pin (Figure 16, Item 9) from clevis (Figure 16, Item 13) on
passenger side winch cable (Figure 16, Item 10).
11. Remove two large shackles (Figure 16, Item 1) from four load binders (Figure 16, Item 3) and rear payload tiedown
ring (Figure 16, Item 4).
WARNING
Extend gooseneck safety rail while attaching or removing payload winch cable. Failure to extend safety rail
while attaching or removing payload winch cable may cause injury to personnel.
13. Install one large shackle (Figure 16, Item 1) to upper right recovery eye (Figure 16, Item 5) and upper left recovery
eye (Figure 16, Item 2).
14. Pull out passenger side winch cable (Figure 16, Item 10) and attach clevis (Figure 16, Item 13) to shackle (Figure 16,
Item 1) on payload upper left recovery eye (Figure 16, Item 2). Secure winch cable clevis by installing shouldered pin
(Figure 16, Item 9) and cotter pin (Figure 16, Item 6).
15. Pull out driver side winch cable (Figure 16, Item 7) and attach clevis (Figure 16, Item 8) to shackle (Figure 16, Item 1) on
payload upper right recovery eye (Figure 16, Item 2). Secure winch cable clevis by installing shouldered pin (Figure 16,
Item 9) and cotter pin (Figure 16, Item 6).
16. Route both cables (Figure 16, Item 7 and Item 10) through gooseneck cable guides (Figure 16, Item 12). Remove slack
from cables.
0018-28
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
0018-29
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
Failure to retract and latch gooseneck safety rail before operating tractor/trailer will result in damage to
equipment.
18. Perform steps 43 through 51 of Loading Able Payloads (WP 0015) to adjust platform height, adjust and lower ramps, and
position remaining curb guides.
NOTE
With winches in low speed, winch operator must push down on both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever and
PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever to move payload slightly forward and reduce pressure on rear payload chocks.
19. Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 17, Item 1) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever ( Figure 17, Item 2).
Using crowbar, if necessary, remove both rear payload chocks (Figure 17, Item 9) and position just in front of No. 4
bogie (Figure 17, Item 6).
20. Winch operator must pull up on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 17, Item 1) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever
(Figure 17, Item 2) to allow payload (Figure 17, Item 8) to roll back until firmly in contact with rear payload chocks
(Figure 17, Item 7). Release both DRIVER SIDE and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH levers.
21. Disconnect front tiedown chains (Figure 17, Item 10) from payload (Figure 17, Item 8).
22. Winch operator must push down both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 17, Item 2) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
lever (Figure 17, Item 1) to pull payload (Figure 17, Item 8) slightly forward off of rear payload chocks (Figure 17,
Item 7). Remove rear payload chocks.
23. Winch operator must pull up on both DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 17, Item 2) and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH
lever (Figure 17, Item 1) to evenly pay out cables (Figure 17, Item 12 and Item 11) and allow payload (Figure 17, Item 8)
to roll off of semitrailer (Figure 17, Item 4).
24. Once payload (Figure 17, Item 8) clears curb guides (Figure 17, Item 5), ensure that it rolls straight down ramps
(Figure 17, Item 3). Pay out cables (Figure 17, Item 12 and Item 11) unevenly, if necessary, for directional control.
0018-30
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
WARNING
Prior to removing winch cable from payload, winch operator must ensure the winch cables have enough slack
to relieve tension in the cable. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
25. Winch operator must continue to pay out both driver side winch cable (Figure 17, Item 12) and passenger side winch
cable (Figure 17, Item 11) until cables are touching platform (Figure 17, Item 4). Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH
lever and PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
0018-31
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Extreme caution must be used when removing winch cables from payload. Cable may be under tension or
may be twisted.
• If winch cable has tension when removed, slowly and carefully, using both hands, rotate cable to relieve
tension. DO NOT allow cable to twist or whip freely.
NOTE
Check for twist in both winch cables.
26. Remove cotter pins (Figure 18, Item 5) and shouldered pins (Figure 18, Item 1) from both driver side winch cable clevis
(Figure 18, Item 6) and passenger side winch cable clevis (Figure 18, Item 8). Remove cable clevises from shackles
(Figure 18, Item 7) on both upper recovery eyes (Figure 18, Item 2 and Item 4) on payload (Figure 18, Item 3).
0018-32
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
0018-33
0018 TM 9-2330-381-13
27. Push ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 19, Item 1) to HIGH ENGINE IDLE. Momentarily push ENGINE
SPEED LOCK switch (Figure 19, Item 2) to lock engine speed at high idle (approximately 1,500 rpm), and then release
ENGINE SPEED LOCK switch. Push WINCH SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 19, Item 3) to HIGH.
28. Remove driver side winch cable (Figure 19, Item 11) from gooseneck cable guide (Figure 19, Item 12). Leave cable
29. Remove passenger side winch cable (Figure 19, Item 10) from gooseneck cable guide (Figure 19, Item 12). Leave cable
WARNING
DO NOT allow hands to get between clevis and winch or injury to personnel may result. Failure to follow
30. With aid of an assistant, use one person to push down on DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 19, Item 4) and one person
to maintain tension on driver side winch cable (Figure 19, Item 11). Retract and stow winch cable clevis (Figure 19,
Item 8) onto stow hook (Figure 19, Item 7). Release DRIVER SIDE WINCH lever.
31. With aid of an assistant, use one person to push down on PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever (Figure 19, Item 13) and
one person to maintain tension on passenger side winch cable (Figure 19, Item 10). Retract and stow winch cable clevis
(Figure 19, Item 6) onto stow hook (Figure 19, Item 7). Release PASSENGER SIDE WINCH lever.
NOTE
The guard is shown in the raised position.
32. Pull ENGINE SPEED CONTROL switch (Figure 19, Item 1) to LOW ENGINE IDLE. Lower guard (Figure 19, Item 5)
and lock guard in place.
NOTE
Remove all chains and load binders from platform and restow in platform storage compartment.
33. Perform steps 33 through 45 of Unloading Able Payloads (WP 0016) to stow equipment used during this procedure and
prepare tractor and semitrailer for transport.
0018-34
TM 9-2330-381-13 0018
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0018-35/36 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0019
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - FORDING
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for fording the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0019-1
0019 TM 9-2330-381-13
FORDING
WARNING
• DO NOT enter water at more than walking speed of 5 mph (8 kph) with an entrance
or exit slope of more than 15 percent.
• DO NOT enter water deeper than 28 in. (71 cm) including wave height.
• DO NOT enter water that has ice or debris on surface.
• Always check the stream bottom to determine that it is firm enough to support the
semitrailer and that there are no obstacles under water.
• DO NOT enter water that has a current velocity of more than 5 mph (8 kph). This is equivalent to 7 ft/s (2 m/s).
• The M1000 is not Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) survivable because of the large number
of components and materials that are either non-decontaminable or lack sufficient hardness to
survive conventional decontamination procedures. Such materials include rubber tires, hoses, mud
flaps, and latches; polyester and urethane foams used for insulation; uncovered auxiliary power
unit; hydraulic system components; electrical wiring harness; and lubricants. These materials will
absorb and desorb agents that present a contact and vapor hazard. The integrity of these materials
will also be reduced when exposed to certain agents and decontaminates.
CAUTION
If tractor/semitrailer combination becomes mired (stuck) in mud or soft sand, recovery must be
achieved by pulling forward. If the combination is pulled rearward, from the rear of the semitrailer,
the bogies will tend to dig in deeper, and severe damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
• If tractor becomes mired (stuck) while the semitrailer is still on solid surface, recovery may be achieved
by pulling rearward, from the rear of the semitrailer, using a recovery vehicle.
• No special preparation of semitrailer is required prior to fording.
1. Check both entry and exit slopes for maximum angles of 15 percent. Check both slopes for excessive or high break-overs.
2. Check bottom of stream to be sure that it is firm enough to support semitrailer and is free of underwater obstacles.
3. Enter water as perpendicular to stream as possible.
4. Keep tractor/semitrailer combination in as straight a line as possible.
5. Maintain even speed.
6. Exit stream as perpendicular to stream as possible.
NOTE
No special maintenance of semitrailer is required after fording; however, suspension and steering
components should be scheduled for lubrication as soon as practical.
7. When clear of stream and on level terrain, make several gradual stops to clear water from brakes and to ensure brakes
work properly.
0019-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0019
Figure 1. Fording.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0019-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0020
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP START
INITIAL SETUP:
WP 0005 1
TM 9-2320-360-10
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for jump starting the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) of the Heavy Equipment
Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP START

1. When the APU battery has been discharged to a point where it cannot start the APU, perform steps 1 through 5 of APU
Startup and Shutdown (WP 0005) to ensure that APU is ready to be started.
2. If tractor is coupled to semitrailer, start tractor engine and open battery box (TM 9-2320-360-10).
3. If tractor and semitrailer are not coupled, position tractor near gooseneck so that tractor batteries are approximately 15 to
20 ft (4.5 to 6.0 m) from APU jump start cable stowage bag (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. APU Jump Start Cable Stowage Bag.
0020-1
0020 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Remove all jewelry such as rings, dog tags, bracelets, etc., when jump starting the APU. Wearing
jewelry may result in an electrical shock and/or serious injury or death to personnel.
• The stowage batteries give off a hydrogen gas, which is extremely explosive. Keep all open flames, sparks,
and smoking materials away from the batteries while connecting the cables for the jump start.
4. Keep tractor engine running and open tractor battery box (TM 9-2320-360-10).
CAUTION
Some semitrailers have solar battery charger leads connected to the negative and positive terminals. Ensure
these leads are not damaged when disconnecting the terminals from the battery posts.
5. Disconnect negative (-) cable (Figure 2, Item 1) from negative pole of APU battery (Figure 2, Item 2).
Figure 2. APU Negative Battery Cable.
0020-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0020
6. Loosen drawstring (Figure 3, Item 6) of cable stowage bag (Figure 3, Item 5) and pull out two jumper cables (Figure 3,
Item 4 and Item 2).
7. The negative (-) cable (Figure 3, Item 2) is approximately 9 ft (2.75 m) in length and has a black clamp (Figure 3,
Item 1) on its end.
8. The positive (+) cable (Figure 3, Item 4) is approximately 28 ft (8.5 m) in length and has a red clamp (Figure 3,
Item 3) on its end.
Figure 3. APU Jumper Cables.
0020-3
0020 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
The tractor operates on 12-VDC and 24-VDC systems. Two of the tractor batteries are connected in
a series for the 24-VDC requirements, and two of the tractor batteries are connected in parallel for
the 12-VDC requirements. The APU electrical system requires only 12-VDC. The jump start system
electrical box will not permit more than 12-VDC to be applied to the APU. The positive (red) clamp
of the APU jumper cable must only be connected to a 12-VDC output.
9. Connect positive (red) clamp (Figure 4, Item 8) of cable (Figure 4, Item 6) to positive (+) terminal (Figure 4, Item 9) on
either of tractor batteries (Figure 4, Item 7) that have their positive terminal (+) connected together (parallel connections).
10. Connect negative (black) clamp (Figure 4, Item 12) of cable (Figure 4, Item 5) to tractor frame (Figure 4, Item 11) and
ensure connection is good.
NOTE
If the system is installed incorrectly or the jumper cables receive improper voltage, the solenoid
will not engage, and the APU starter will not function.
11. Press switch (Figure 4, Item 4) on electrical box (Figure 4, Item 3) and listen for an audible click, which will be heard as
solenoid is engaged.
12. Open cover (Figure 4, Item 10) on APU control box (Figure 4, Item 1).
13. Press and pull throttle control knob (Figure 4, Item 2) full outboard.
0020-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0020
Figure 4. APU Jump Start.
0020-5
0020 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Hearing protection is required within 10 ft (3 m) of the APU when the APU is running. Failure
14. Turn APU control box START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) clockwise momentarily to see if starter will crank.
15. If starter cranks, immediately rotate START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to OFF position and perform steps 8 through 15
of APU Startup and Shutdown (WP 0005).
16. If starter does not crank, rotate START switch (Figure 5, Item 1) to OFF position and check jumper cables (Figure 5,
Item 2 and Item 3) for proper connection.
17. After checking connections, repeat steps 11 through 16 above.
18. After APU starts, disconnect negative (black) clamp (Figure 5, Item 7) on cable (Figure 5, Item 2) from tractor frame
(Figure 5, Item 6), and disconnect positive (red) clamp (Figure 5, Item 5) on cable (Figure 5, Item 3) from tractor batteries
(Figure 5, Item 4).
0020-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0020
0020-7
0020 TM 9-2330-381-13
19. Reconnect negative cable (Figure 6, Item 1) to negative (-) pole of APU battery (Figure 6, Item 2).

20. Close battery box on tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
21. Coil cables (Figure 7, Item 1 and Item 2) and stow in stowage bag (Figure 7, Item 3).
22. Tighten drawstring (Figure 7, Item 4) on stowage bag (Figure 7, Item 3).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0020-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0021
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - ARCTIC WEATHER AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU)
STARTING
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
2
References
WP 0020
WP 0035
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for starting the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) of the Heavy Equipment Transporter
(HET) semitrailer in arctic weather conditions.
0021-1
0021 TM 9-2330-381-13
ARCTIC WEATHER AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) STARTING
NOTE
• The following procedure is a timed sequence of events necessary to start the Auxiliary Power Unit
(APU) in arctic weather conditions. Read this procedure and strictly adhere to the steps, or starting may
be more difficult due to loss of time and exposure to cold temperatures.
• APU arctic starting is accomplished in two methods. The first method of starting without using swing-fire heater
can be accomplished from 0 to -25°F (-18 to -31°C). The second method of starting can be accomplished from
-25 to -50°F (-31 to -46°C). The use of the swing-fire heater, if available, is addressed in this procedure.
1. Perform steps 2 through 11 of APU Jump Start (WP 0020) to connect APU jump start system.
CAUTION
The hydraulic tank oil valve must be open prior to starting the APU or severe damage
to the hydraulic pump may result.
NOTE
• Gain access to the APU (WP 0035) from the rear of the gooseneck.
• The hydraulic tank oil valve handle is shown in the closed position.
• Prepare the APU for arctic starting as follows.
2. Open hydraulic tank oil valve handle (Figure 1, Item 1).
NOTE
The fuel tank petcock is shown in the OPEN position.
3. Check that fuel petcock (Figure 1, Item 2) is in OPEN position.
NOTE
• If it is determined that the swing-fire heater is going to be used, the gooseneck step section should
be lowered to help contain heat applied by the swing-fire heater. If the swing-fire heater is not
going to be used, skip steps 4, 5, and 6 and proceed to step 14.
• The step section is shown in the raised position.
4. If swing-fire heater is going to be used, lower and secure gooseneck step section (WP 0035).
0021-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0021
CAUTION
• The swing-fire heater must be moved (played) back and forth in a constant motion, and it
must be kept within 7 to 10 in. (17 to 25 cm) from the bottom of the APU crankcase while
using the swing-fire heater, or damage to equipment may result.
• DO NOT allow the swing-fire heater to sit in one spot. Heat any hydraulic line or diesel fuel line, or heat
electrical wiring that may be in the general area of the APU. Use caution when operating the swing-fire
heater so that only the APU crankcase is directly heated or severe damage to equipment may result.
5. Preheat APU crankcase by keeping nozzle of swing-fire heater approximately 7 to 10 in. (17 to 25 cm) away from bottom
of crankcase and continually moving nozzle back and forth for a minimum of 15 minutes. Proceed with step 6 below.
6. If heating was performed using swing-fire heater, gain access to APU by raising step section (WP 0035).
Figure 1. Arctic Weather APU Starting.
0021-3
0021 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• If outside temperatures are above -25°F (-32°C), proceed to step 14 below.
• If outside temperatures are between -25 to -50°F (-31 to -46°C), proceed as follows.
• The decompression valve is shown in the OPEN position.
7. Open decompression valve (Figure 2, Item 7) by pulling up and holding decompression valve handle (Figure 2, Item 6).
8. With aid of an assistant, open APU control box cover (Figure 2, Item 5), turn APU START switch (Figure 2, Item 2)
to START position, and hold switch for approximately two minutes or until APU is cranking at normal cranking speed.
Release APU START switch.
9. With jet start petcock (Figure 2, Item 8) closed, prime jet start valve (Figure 2, Item 9) by pulling valve full out. Ensure
that valve stays out.
NOTE
On the control box used with APU model number EB300-E, the glow plug indicator is changed
10. With aid of an assistant, turn knob of APU throttle control (Figure 2, Item 4) counterclockwise until fully outward. With
aid of an assistant, turn APU START switch (Figure 2, Item 2) to GLOW position and hold until glow plug indicator (glow
type) (Figure 2, Item 3) illuminates brightly (15 to 20 sec) or until glow plug indicator (lamp) extinguishes (5 sec).
11. While holding decompression valve handle (Figure 2, Item 6), open (up), and with aid of an assistant, turn APU START
switch (Figure 2, Item 2) to START position and hold. As APU cranks over, slowly lower decompression valve handle.
12. Once APU is at normal cranking speed, release decompression valve handle (Figure 2, Item 6). Turn jet start petcock
(Figure 2, Item 8) counterclockwise to open. Pump jet start valve (Figure 2, Item 9) three times to prime APU. A few
additional pumps may be necessary for the APU to run smoothly. With aid of an assistant, hold APU start switch (Figure 2,
Item 2) to START position until engine is running smoothly, and then return APU start switch to OFF.
0021-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0021
13. If APU starts, proceed to step 25 below. If APU does not start, repeat steps 1 through 11 above. If APU fails to start
after three attempts, notify field maintenance.
14. With jet start petcock (Figure 2, Item 8) closed, prime jet start valve (Figure 2, Item 9) by pulling valve full out. Ensure
that valve stays out.
15. With aid of an assistant, on curbside of gooseneck, open cover (Figure 2, Item 5) on APU control box (Figure 2, Item 1).
16. With aid of an assistant, pull knob of APU throttle control (Figure 2, Item 4) fully outward.
0021-5
0021 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
On the control box with APU model number EB300-E, the glow plug indicator is changed
17. With aid of an assistant, turn APU START switch (Figure 3, Item 1) to GLOW position and hold until glow plug indicator
(glow-type) (Figure 3, Item 2) illuminates brightly (15 to 20 sec) or until glow plug indicator (lamp) extinguishes (5 sec).
CAUTION
DO NOT exceed 30 seconds of continuous cranking with decompression valve closed or damage
to the starter may result. Allow the starter to cool down for at least 2 minutes between each
30-second cranking or damage to the starter may result.
18. With aid of an assistant, turn start switch (Figure 3, Item 1) to START position and hold for approximately 30 seconds.
19. Once APU engine starts to turn over, pump jet start valve (Figure 3, Item 7) three times to prime APU.
20. When APU engine is running smoothly, turn jet start petcock (Figure 3, Item 6) clockwise to close. Lower and secure
step section (WP 0035).
NOTE
If the APU starts and/or fails to start, proceed as follows.
21. If APU starts, proceed to step 25 of this procedure.
22. If APU does not start, repeat steps 14 and 20 two more times (maximum).
23. If APU still does not start, lower and secure step section (WP 0035) and repeat steps 5 through 20 above as required for
proper temperature range to which tractor/semitrailer is exposed.
24. If APU fails to start after three attempts, notify field maintenance.
NOTE
Once the APU starts, perform steps 25 and 26 to check the oil pressure indicator light.
25. If oil pressure indicator light (Figure 3, Item 3) does not come on, proceed to step 27 below.
26. If oil pressure indicator light (Figure 3, Item 3) does not go out when APU starts and runs for approximately 30 to
45 seconds, shut down APU by pushing throttle control (Figure 3, Item 4) all the way in. Close APU control box cover
(Figure 3, Item 5) and notify field maintenance.
0021-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0021
CAUTION
• Cold weather, especially arctic conditions, adversely affects the semitrailer’s hydraulics in the areas of the
gauge readings and the hydraulic filter indicator. During initial startup, the gauges will maintain higher
than normal pressure readings and the filter indicator will read in the red. Ample time must be given for
the APU and hydraulic fluid to warm up before operating the hydraulic system, or damage to equipment
may result.
• During initial starting, the hydraulic filter indicator will read in the red zone. The red zone
means the filter is clogged and filter bypass is occurring. Filter clogging at this point is because the
hydraulic fluid viscosity is extremely high due to the cold temperatures and will decrease as the APU
warms and the hydraulics begin to operate. DO NOT operate any of the hydraulic controls until
the APU has had time to warm up, or damage to equipment may result.
• During initial starting, the hydraulic system pressure gauge can read as high as 2,200 psi (15,169 kPa).
As the APU runs/warms up, the pressure ranges will start and continue to decrease. DO NOT operate the
hydraulic controls until the APU has had time to warm up, or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
Allow the APU to run for 20 minutes. If outside temperatures range from -25 to -50°F (-31 to -46°C),
the filter indicator and hydraulic pressure gauges will not approach normal operating parameters until
the semitrailer has been pulled/towed for a couple of hours. Periodically check that the pressure gauge
and filter indicators are approaching normal conditions. If the indicators gradually decrease/return to
normal operating ranges, the APU is ready for normal operation.
27. Perform steps 18 through 21 of APU Jump Start (WP 0020) to disconnect and stow APU jump start cables.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0021-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0022
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATION ON GRADES
INITIAL SETUP:
WP 0008 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for operating the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer on grades.
OPERATION ON GRADES
Approaching an Uphill Grade
CAUTION
• Because of the length of the tractor/semitrailer combination, one or more of the bogies will be lifted off of the
ground when approaching or cresting a grade that is more than 15 percent. The semitrailer’s suspension must
be adjusted during these operations to ensure that all of the bogies maintain contact with the ground. This
provides better stability when the semitrailer is loaded and reduces strain on the platform and suspension.
• The maximum grade for a fully loaded semitrailer is 20 percent. Grades up to 30 percent may be
negotiated, provided the payload does not exceed 50,000 lb (22,700 kg). DO NOT exceed a 30 percent
grade. Exceeding these limitations may cause serious damage to the semitrailer.
1. Stop tractor/semitrailer combination before reaching grade.
2. Lower platform (WP 0008) to minimum suggested height (1 in. of suspension cylinder plunger/piston exposed).
3. Pull onto grade (Figure 1).
4. If grade crest will be reached, proceed to the Cresting an Uphill Grade procedure below.
5. If grade crest will not be reached, stop and raise platform (WP 0008) to normal height of 43 in. (109 cm).
Figure 1. Approaching an Uphill Grade.

END OF TASK
0022-1
0022 TM 9-2330-381-13
Cresting an Uphill Grade

1. Stop tractor/semitrailer combination before cresting grade.
2. Raise platform (WP 0008) to maximum suggested height of 50 in. (127 cm).
3. Proceed over crest of grade (Figure 2).
4. When semitrailer has crested grade, stop and lower platform (WP 0008) to normal height of 43 in. (109 cm).
Figure 2. Cresting an Uphill Grade.

END OF TASK
Approaching a Downhill Grade

1. Stop tractor/semitrailer combination before reaching grade.
2. Raise platform (WP 0008) to maximum suggested height of 50 in. (127 cm).
3. Proceed down grade (Figure 3).
4. If tractor/semitrailer combination will approach level ground, proceed to Approaching Level Ground from Downhill
Grade procedure below.
5. If tractor/semitrailer will not approach level ground, stop and lower platform (WP 0008) to normal height of 43 in.
(109 cm).
Figure 3. Approaching a Downhill Grade.

END OF TASK
Approaching Level Ground from Downhill Grade

1. Stop tractor/semitrailer combination before reaching level ground.
2. Lower platform (WP 0008) to minimum suggested height, 1 in. (2.54 cm) of suspension cylinder plunger/piston exposed.
3. Pull onto level ground (Figure 4).
0022-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0022
4. When semitrailer is fully on level ground, stop and raise platform (WP 0008) to normal height of 43 in. (109 cm).
Figure 4. Approaching Level Ground from Downhill Grade.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0022-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0023
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - BRAKE CAGING/UNCAGING
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for caging and uncaging the brakes of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
0023-1
0023 TM 9-2330-381-13
BRAKE CAGING/UNCAGING
NOTE
• This procedure releases the brakes in the event of a system failure, tire changing, or operation
with a disabled bogie due to air brake problems.
• Ensure the semitrailer is parked on level ground and the front bogie wheels are chocked. If the semitrailer
is coupled to a towing vehicle, apply the towing vehicle’s parking brakes.
1. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3), washer (Figure 1, Item 2), and caging bolt (Figure 1, Item 4) from brake chamber
(Figure 1, Item 5).
2. Lift dust plug (Figure 1, Item 1) from brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5) and move dust plug aside. Check for caked
mud and clean brake chamber if necessary.
NOTE
If air pressure is available, release the semitrailer’s brakes to compress the spring brake. This will
reduce the effort required to cage the brakes.
3. Insert key end of caging bolt (Figure 1, Item 4) as far as possible in brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5). Once bottomed out,
rotate caging bolt clockwise until it stops and locks in place.
4. While pulling slightly on caging bolt (Figure 1, Item 4), install washer (Figure 1, Item 2) and nut (Figure 1, Item 3).
Hand-tighten nut until it makes contact with brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5).
5. Use 10 in. (25.4 cm) adjustable wrench (WP 0169) to tighten nut (Figure 1, Item 3). As nut is tightened, caging bolt
(Figure 1, Item 4) will draw on parking brake spring assembly and cage (release) the brakes.
NOTE
Visually check the brake shoes for contact with the brake drum (WP 0068). If there is no apparent
contact, the brakes are caged. If there is still contact, continue turning nut clockwise until the
brake shoe’s contact with the brake drum is broken.
6. While trying to remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3) from caging bolt (Figure 1, Item 4), caging bolt may become unseated
from brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5) and pull out. If caging bolt comes out, remove nut and washer (Figure 1, Item 2)
from caging bolt by hand.
NOTE
If air pressure is available, release the semitrailer’s brakes to compress the spring brake. This will
reduce the effort required to uncage the brakes.
7. To uncage brakes, turn nut (Figure 1, Item 3) counterclockwise, and remove nut and washer (Figure 1, Item 2) from caging
bolt (Figure 1, Item 4). This will release brakes from caged position to full operating position/condition. Rotate caging bolt
counterclockwise and remove from brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5).
8. Reinstall dust plug (Figure 1, Item 1) in opening in top of brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5). Ensure dust plug is properly
seated in brake chamber.
NOTE
Ensure the caging bolt is returned to its stowed position on the brake chamber with the key end properly positioned.
9. Insert caging bolt (Figure 1, Item 4) back into stowed position on brake chamber (Figure 1, Item 5) and secure caging
bolt in place by installing washer (Figure 1, Item 2) and nut (Figure 1, Item 3).
0023-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0023
Figure 1. Brake Caging/Uncaging.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0023-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0024
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION WITH DISABLED BOGIE
INITIAL SETUP:
WP 0004 1
WP 0008
WP 0011
WP 0012
WP 0013
WP 0023
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for operating the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer with a disabled
bogie.
0024-1
0024 TM 9-2330-381-13
OPERATION WITH DISABLED BOGIE
CAUTION
The tractor/semitrailer combination, either loaded or unloaded, is limited to operating with only one
disabled bogie. The following procedure specifically identifies how to prepare the semitrailer for transport.
If this procedure is not strictly followed, severe damage to equipment may result.
1. Cage brakes at affected suspension (bogie) assembly (Figure 1, Item 3) (WP 0023).
2. Lower platform (WP 0008) until suspension (bogie) assembly (Figure 1, Item 3) is completely compressed.
3. Loosen and turn adjustment nuts (Figure 1, Item 2) on eyebolts (Figure 1, Item 1) until adjustment nuts are threaded
completely down threaded portion of eyebolts.
Figure 1. Operation With Disabled Bogie.
0024-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0024
CAUTION
When installing the axle isolation chain assembly on the bogie, ensure that the chains DO NOT contact
any hydraulic line or air brake hoses. Any contact of chains on the line and hoses may cause chafing or
parting of lines/hoses, loss of air brake pressure, loss of hydraulic fluid, and damage to equipment.
4. Route hook (Figure 2, Item 4) of streetside chain (Figure 2, Item 3) along streetside of bogie assembly (Figure 2, Item
13) between both hydraulic (Figure 2, Item 15) and air brake line (Figure 2, Item 10) and upper suspension arm (Figure
2, Item 1) into opening in upper suspension arm casting (Figure 2, Item 14).
5. Position chain assembly bracket (Figure 2, Item 11) underneath square opening of axle casting (Figure 2, Item 12). Ensure
that streetside chain (Figure 2, Item 3) is on streetside of parking brake chamber (Figure 2, Item 9).
6. Route hook (Figure 2, Item 4) of curbside chain (Figure 2, Item 2) along curbside of bogie assembly (Figure 2, Item 13)
between both hydraulic (Figure 2, Item 15) and air brake line (Figure 2, Item 10) and upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item
1) into opening in upper suspension arm casting (Figure 2, Item 14).
7. Position chain assembly bracket (Figure 2, Item 11) so that bottom rear edge of square axle casting (Figure 2, Item 12) sits
between blocks (Figure 2, Item 5) and pins (Figure 2, Item 8) of chain assembly bracket.
8. Remove slack in chains (Figure 2, Item 2 and Item 3) by tightening adjustment nuts (Figure 2, Item 7) on eyebolts
(Figure 2, Item 6).
0024-3
0024 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Ensure the suspension isolation valve at the affected bogie is closed (handle facing outward) prior
to adjusting the platform height or the suspension chains may break. Failure to follow this warning
may cause serious injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment.
NOTE
The suspension isolation valve handle is shown in the CLOSED position.
9. Pull suspension isolation valve handle (Figure 3, Item 1) outboard to CLOSED position to isolate affected bogie (Figure 3,
Item 5).
10. Except at affected bogie (Figure 3, Item 5), ensure that all remaining suspension isolation valves (Figure 3, Item 2)
(WP 0004) are in OPEN position (handles inward).
11. Raise platform (WP 0008) to normal running height of 43 in. (109 cm).
0024-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0024
CAUTION
The brakes on the disabled bogie must be released without contacting the brake drum
12. Rotate dual tire assembly (Figure 3, Item 6) in both directions and check for brake drag or contact with brake drum
(Figure 3, Item 4). If necessary, turn nut (Figure 3, Item 3) clockwise until dual tire assembly spins freely without brake
drag or contact with brake drum.
0024-5
0024 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Because of minor load instability while driving with a disabled bogie, especially when carrying a
payload, turning speeds must be reduced to 85 percent of the maximum safe turning speeds. Example:
At 15 mph (24 kph), maximum turn speed should be reduced to 13 mph (21 kph) maximum turn
speed. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
The tractor/semitrailer combination with a disabled bogie, while loaded or unloaded, must be driven at reduced speeds.
13. DO NOT exceed maximum speed of 30 mph (48 kph) with semitrailer tire pressure at 95 psi (655 kPa) for all tires
(Figure 4, Item 3), excluding tires on affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 2).
NOTE
• Semitrailer tires within the same suspension group as the affected bogie may be inflated to 100 psi
(689 kPa) to allow for a slight increase in driving ability.
• Suspension groups are determined using the suspension controls on the hydraulic control panel
(WP 0004) consisting of curbside front, streetside front, and rear.
• If the tractor is outfitted with an external air connector to run the pneumatic tools/components, follow steps 14 and 15.
14. Inflate remaining tires (Figure 4, Item 3) in affected suspension group, excluding tires on affected bogie (Figure 4,
Item 2), to 100 psi (689 kPa).
15. DO NOT exceed maximum speed of 40 mph (64 kph) with tire pressure at 100 psi (689 kPa) for tires (Figure 4, Item 3)
within a suspension group, excluding tires on affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 2).
NOTE
Once the semitrailer has reached a maintenance facility, perform steps 16 through 24 to remove the isolation chains.
16. Park semitrailer, apply parking brakes, and chock wheels (WP 0013).
17. Lower platform (WP 0008) until suspension (bogie) (Figure 4, Item 2) is completely compressed.
18. Loosen and turn four adjustment nuts (Figure 4, Item 8) on eyebolts (Figure 4, Item 7) until nuts are threaded completely
down threaded portion of eyebolts.
19. Unhook two hooks (Figure 4, Item 5) from opening in upper suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 11). Move hooks out from
under hydraulic hose (Figure 4, Item 10) and pneumatic hose (Figure 4, Item 9) on upper suspension arm.
NOTE
The suspension isolation valve handle is shown in the CLOSED position.
20. Open suspension isolation valve handle (Figure 4, Item 1) (WP 0004).
21. Raise platform (WP 0008) to normal running height of 43 in. (109 cm).
22. Lower both front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
23. Uncage brakes at affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 2) (WP 0023).
24. Remove axle isolation chains (Figure 4, Item 4 and Item 6) from bogie (Figure 4, Item 2). Restow axle isolation chains.
0024-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0024

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0024-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0025
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - PARKING LOADED SEMITRAILER
INITIAL SETUP:
References WP 0012
WP 0007 WP 0013
WP 0011 TM 9-2320-360-10
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for parking a loaded Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0025-1
0025 TM 9-2330-381-13
PARKING LOADED SEMITRAILER
WARNING
• For parking a loaded semitrailer while COUPLED to a tractor, perform steps 1 through 3.
• For parking a loaded semitrailer and UNCOUPLING from a tractor, perform steps 1 through 4.
Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel and damage to equipment.
1. Apply tractor and semitrailer parking brakes (TM 9-2320-360-10).
2. Place chocks (Figure 1, Item 2) in front of semitrailer front bogie (Figure 1, Item 4) and in front of and behind each outer
set of dual tires (Figure 1, Item 3).
3. Lower both front and rear support legs (Figure 1, Item 5) (WP 0011 and WP 0012) to support platform (Figure 1, Item 6).
4. Uncouple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013) and lower gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) (WP 0007) to lowest position.
Figure 1. Parking Loaded Semitrailer.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0025-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0026
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - ISO CONTAINER LOCK BRACKETS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the operation of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer’s
International Standards Organization (ISO) container lock brackets.
0026-1
0026 TM 9-2330-381-13
ISO CONTAINER LOCK BRACKETS
NOTE
• Depending upon the type and quantity of containers being transported, not every ISO container lock
bracket needs to be used. Study the illustration below to determine the positions and quantities of
lock brackets needed to secure the type and quantity of ISO containers to be transported.
• The ISO lock brackets marked "curb" and "street" have only one lug and one F-pin attached.
These should always be mounted in the most forward and rearward corner positions on the
platform with the lugs toward the rear. The ISO container brackets with two F-pins attached
should always be used in the four center platform positions.
• The semitrailer is capable of carrying the following types and quantities of ISO containers.
1. For either a single 10 ft (3 m) (Figure 1, Item 1) or 20 ft (6 m) ISO container (Figure 1, Item 2), four ISO lock brackets
are required.
2. For up to three 10 ft (3 m) ISO containers (Figure 1, Item 3), eight ISO lock brackets are required.
3. For a combination of one 20 ft (6 m) and one 10 ft (3 m) ISO container (Figure 1, Item 4), six ISO lock brackets are required.
0026-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0026
Figure 1. ISO Container Lock Brackets.
0026-3
0026 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
There is a total of eight ISO lock brackets stored on the platform. After the position of ISO containers has been
determined for transport, locate the respective ISO lock brackets needed for proper mounting.
4. To remove an ISO lock bracket (Figure 2, Item 1) from platform (Figure 2, Item 6), remove bolt (Figure 2, Item 2) and lift
ISO lock bracket from stowed position on platform. Remove as many ISO lock brackets as required.
5. Place ISO lock bracket (Figure 2, Item 1) at respective points on platform (Figure 2, Item 6) as required. Secure ISO lock
bracket with bolt (Figure 2, Item 2).
6. Align and install ISO containers (Figure 2, Item 5) over ISO lock bracket lugs (Figure 2, Item 4).
NOTE
• Check that the holes in ISO lock bracket lugs are aligned with the holes in the ISO container.
• Perform steps 7 through 9 to secure the ISO container onto the platform.
7. Insert F-pin (Figure 2, Item 3), small end first, through hole in ISO container (Figure 2, Item 5) and ISO lock bracket lug
(Figure 2, Item 4).
8. Rotate F-pin (Figure 2, Item 3) clockwise to secure ISO container (Figure 2, Item 5).
9. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each ISO lock bracket lug (Figure 2, Item 4) installed until all ISO lock brackets (Figure 2,
Item 1) are secured.
NOTE
After the ISO containers have been transported, perform steps 10 through 12 to unstow the ISO container.
10. Rotate F-pin (Figure 2, Item 3) counterclockwise. Pull F-pin out of ISO container (Figure 2, Item 5) and ISO lock bracket
lug (Figure 2, Item 4). Repeat this step as required until all F-pins are removed.
11. Remove ISO containers (Figure 2, Item 5 ) from platform (Figure 2, Item 6).
12. Remove bolt (Figure 2, Item 2) and ISO lock bracket (Figure 2, Item 1) from platform (Figure 2, Item 6). Restow
ISO lock bracket in center of platform and secure ISO lock bracket with bolt. Repeat this step as required until all
ISO lock brackets are restowed.
0026-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0026
Figure 2. ISO Container Lock Brackets.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0026-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0027
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - DISABLED LOADING RAMP RECOVERY
INITIAL SETUP:
References3HUVRQQHO5HTXLUHG
WP 0009 1
WP 0013
TM 9-2320-360-10
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the recovery of a disabled loading ramp on the Heavy Equipment Transporter
(HET) semitrailer.
0027-1
0027 TM 9-2330-381-13
DISABLED LOADING RAMP RECOVERY
WARNING
DO NOT attempt to perform this procedure if the semitrailer is loaded or going to be loaded.
NOTE
This procedure can be accomplished using the M1070 tractor.
1. Start and warm M1070 tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
2. Couple M1070 tractor and semitrailer (WP 0013).
3. Apply parking brakes on both tractor and semitrailer by operating brake controls inside M1070 tractor (TM 9-2320-360-10).
4. Remove auxiliary snatch block (Figure 1, Item 1) from storage on M1070 tractor and place auxiliary snatch block on
platform (Figure 1, Item 9) near disabled ramp (Figure 1, Item 2).
5. Remove pin (Figure 1, Item 5) and shackle (Figure 1, Item 4) from rear recovery eye (Figure 1, Item 3) at back of platform
(Figure 1, Item 9). Place shackle with pin on platform near disabled ramp (Figure 1, Item 2).
6. Remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 6) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 7) from payload chock (Figure 1, Item 8).
Remove payload chock and place payload chock on platform (Figure 1, Item 9) near disabled ramp (Figure 1, Item 2).
0027-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0027
Figure 1. Disabled Loading Ramp.
0027-3
0027 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. Attach auxiliary snatch block (Figure 2, Item 2) to second from top rung (Figure 2, Item 9) on loading ramp (Figure 2,
Item 4) with pin (Figure 2, Item 8) and shackle (Figure 2, Item 3).
8. Unscrew retainer bolt (Figure 2, Item 7) and rotate top side plate (Figure 2, Item 1) of auxiliary snatch block (Figure 2,
Item 2).
9. Winch operator must pay out auxiliary winch cable (Figure 2, Item 6) so that clevis (Figure 2, Item 5) on winch cable is
approximately 4 ft (1.2 m) past auxiliary snatch block (Figure 2, Item 2). Pass auxiliary winch cable through opened
snatch block and pull cable back toward gooseneck.
10. Rotate top plate (Figure 2, Item 1) on auxiliary snatch block (Figure 2, Item 2) back to normal position and secure
top plate by tightening retainer bolt (Figure 2, Item 7).
0027-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0027
NOTE
If the curbside loading ramp is disabled, attach the auxiliary winch cable clevis to the platform D-ring
over the curbside No. 4 bogie. If the streetside loading ramp is disabled, attach the auxiliary winch
cable clevis to the platform D-ring over the streetside No. 4 bogie.
11. Winch operator must pay out auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5) until winch cable reaches D-ring (Figure 3,
Item 16) located over either curbside or streetside No. 4 bogie (Figure 3, Item 15).
12. Remove hitch pin (Figure 3, Item 14) and shouldered pin (Figure 3, Item 19) from clevis (Figure 3, Item 13) of auxiliary
winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5).
13. Attach clevis (Figure 3, Item 13) to D-ring (Figure 3, Item 16) over No. 4 bogie (Figure 3, Item 15) on same side affected
ramp (Figure 3, Item 4) is located.
14. Secure clevis (Figure 3, Item 13) of auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5) to D-ring (Figure 3, Item 16) by installing
shouldered pin (Figure 3, Item 19) and hitch pin (Figure 3, Item 14).
NOTE
• The winch operator must continue to pay out the auxiliary winch cable so that there is
enough slack in the cable to reach the streetside gooseneck cable guide. Pass the auxiliary
winch cable through the streetside gooseneck cable guide.
• When placing the payload chock in place, ensure to center the chock directly in front of the loading
ramp so that both parts of the auxiliary winch cable run over the top of the chock.
15. Place payload chock (Figure 3, Item 8) on down-sloping portion of beavertail (Figure 3, Item 7), directly in front of
disabled ramp (Figure 3, Item 4).
16. Winch operator must remove slack in auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5) and retract winch cable until disabled ramp
(Figure 3, Item 4) starts to rise.
NOTE
As the ramp starts to rise, it may be necessary to have a person pull upward on the ramp handle
to help the ramp break over the horizontal position.
17. Winch operator must continue to retract auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5), and if necessary, a second person must
pull up on handle (Figure 3, Item 6) on inward edge of ramp (Figure 3, Item 4) until ramp raises to stowed position.
18. Winch operator must keep tension on auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5). Secure ramp (Figure 3, Item 4) in stowed
position by attaching stow chain (Figure 3, Item 9) to stow point on platform (Figure 3, Item 12).
19. Once ramp (Figure 3, Item 4) is stowed and secured in place with stow chain (Figure 3, Item 9), winch operator must
pay out slack in auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5).
0027-5
0027 TM 9-2330-381-13
20. Unscrew retainer bolt (Figure 3, Item 18) and rotate top side plate (Figure 3, Item 1) of auxiliary snatch block
21. Remove auxiliary winch cable (Figure 3, Item 5) from opened snatch block (Figure 3, Item 17). Rotate top plate (Figure 3,
Item 1) on auxiliary snatch block back to normal position and secure by tightening retaining bolt (Figure 3, Item 18).
22. Remove shackle (Figure 3, Item 2) and auxiliary snatch block (Figure 3, Item 17) from rung (Figure 3, Item 3) on
ramp (Figure 3, Item 4). Stow shackle with pin (Figure 3, Item 11) on rear recovery eye (Figure 3, Item 10) at back
of platform (Figure 3, Item 12).
23. Remove hitch pin (Figure 3, Item 14) and shouldered pin (Figure 3, Item 19) from clevis (Figure 3, Item 13) of winch cable
(Figure 3, Item 5). Remove clevis of winch cable from D-ring (Figure 3, Item 16) over No. 4 bogie (Figure 3, Item 12).
0027-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0027
NOTE
Remove the auxiliary winch cable from the streetside gooseneck cable guide and restow the
auxiliary winch cable on the M1070 tractor.
24. Place payload chock (Figure 4, Item 1) back in stowed position and secure payload chock in place with two lockwashers
(Figure 4, Item 2) and capscrew (Figure 4, Item 3).
25. If ramp span width adjustment must be made, adjust ramp span width to inward/stowed position (WP 0009).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0027-7/8 blank
CHAPTER 3
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
FOR

TM 9-2330-381-13 0028
FIELD MAINTENANCE
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package lists the common malfunctions that may be found during the operation or maintenance of the Heavy
Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer and its components. Perform the tests, inspections, and corrective actions in the
order listed.
This manual cannot list all malfunctions that may occur, nor all tests, inspections, and corrective actions. If a malfunction is
not listed or is not corrected by the listed corrective actions, notify your supervisor.
Before trying to troubleshoot the semitrailer, be sure you understand the basic operating instructions outlined in Chapter 2.
Before performing field level maintenance, verify that the operator/crew troubleshooting has been completed and a
failed condition does exist. Further verify that all other indications are normal except for suspected fail condition. Once
fault has been isolated, repair or replace failed component.
The troubleshooting procedures are grouped by major categories. Become familiar with these major equipment categories.
Use the symptom index to easily locate the fault in question.
Malfunction/Symptom Troubleshooting Procedure

AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU)
1. Engine does not crank over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
2. Engine cranks but does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
3. Engine runs rough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
4. Insufficient engine output or "low power". . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
5. White or blue exhaust smoke is observed after warmup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
6. Black or dark gray exhaust smoke is observed after warmup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
7. Low oil pressure indicator light is lit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
8. Oil pressure is low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
9. Oil consumption is excessive (over 1 pint (0.5 L) per 250 hours of operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
10. Fuel is mixed into lubricant oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
11. Engine coolant is mixed in lubricant oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
12. Engine is overheating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
13. Battery has low charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
14. Battery will not hold charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
15. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) charging circuit fails to keep battery charged . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
16. Glow plug heats slowly or fails to heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
17. APU jump start system is inoperable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
18. General hydraulic failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
19. External leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
20. System will not maintain normal or adequate operating pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
0028-1
0028 TM 9-2330-381-13
21. Pump is making excessive noise or pump has failed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030

22. Platform suspension will not adjust or adjustments are sluggish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
23. Platform suspension drifts down or drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
24. Suspension rides stiff and does not adjust for bumps/road hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
25. Suspension tire change chain is over stressed and/or breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
26. Gooseneck will not adjust or adjustments are sluggish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
27. Gooseneck drifts down, drops, or will not support itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
28. Oil or air is being relieved from gooseneck cylinder air reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
29. Steering will not adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
30. Steering pressure indicator light comes on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
31. Semitrailer steering does not track properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
32. Steering pressure indicator does not light when pressure is low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0031
33. None of the lamps light
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0031
34. One or more (but not all) lights will not light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0031
35. Lights are dim or flickering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0031
WHEELS, TIRES, AND HUBS
36. Wheel wobbles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0032
37. Tire wear is excessive or uneven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0032
38. In tow, semitrailer wanders or pulls to one side (on level ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0032
BRAKES
39. Brakes are weak or no brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0033
40. Brake has slow application or slow release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0033
41. Brakes are grabbing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0033
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0028-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0029
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required References
2 WP 0020
WP 0168
Electrical Schematic FO-7
INTRODUCTION
This work package covers Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Troubleshooting.
Table 1. Auxiliary Power Unit (APU).
SYMPTOM MALFUNCTION CORRECTIVE ACTION

Engine does not crank over. Starter or battery 1. Check battery for loose connections. Tighten as
connections are loose necessary.
or corroded.
2. Check battery for corroded connections. If
connections are corroded, notify field maintenance.
3. Check battery fluid level. If fluid level is low, notify
field maintenance.
4. Check battery cables for defects.
5. Check battery cables for corrosion.
6. Check electrolyte level and specif c gravity. Refill
and recharge battery as required.
7. If battery is defective, replace battery.
8. Check for loose starter connections. Tighten as
necessary.
9. Check starter for corroded connections. If
connections are corroded, notify field maintenance.
10. Turn starter switch to START and listen for starter to
engage.
11. Check APU wiring harness at starter for loose wires.
Tighten connections.
12. Check APU wiring harness at starter for corroded
connections or broken wires. Replace harness.
13. If starter does not engage, refer to APU electrical
schematic (Figure FO-7) and, using multimeter
(WP 0169), check continuety of starter solenoid,
starter switch, and starter switch wiring.
14. If starter engauges but does not turn over, remove
and replace starter.
15. If engine does not turn over, or if flywheel is
suspected to be binding, or if above steps DO NOT
correct malfunction, notify field maintenance.
0029-1
0029 TM 9-2330-381-13

Engine cranks but does not start. Fuel level in fuel tank 1. Add proper grade of fuel to fuel tank.
is low.
Fuel is in fuel filter. 1. Turn fuel petcock to open position.
Jet start cock on air 1. Tighten thumbscrew on jet start cock.
intake manifold is
loose.
Fuel filter is 1. Disassemble fuel filter and f ilter block and check for
contaminated or filter blockage.
block is clogged.
2. Clear passages, replace fuel filter, and reinstall fuel
filter and filter block.
Air cleaner is clogged 1. If air cleaner is clogged, clean air cleaner.
or dirty.
2. If air cleaner is dirty, replace air cleaner.
Nozzle holder is loose 1. If nozzle holder is loose, tighten nozzle holder.
or blocked.
2. If nozzle holder is blocked, clear any blocked
passages and reinstall or replace nozzle holder.
Fuel line has a 1. Remove fuel line and check for blockage.
blockage.
2. Clear blockage or replace fuel line.
Injection pump is 1. If injection pump is leaking or loose, notify field
loose or leaking. maintenance.
Air intake manifold 1. Disassemble air intake manifold.
has blockage or holes.
2. Inspect and clear blocked passages.
3. Replace intake manifold as required.
Fuel in fuel system is 1. Drain and flush tank.
contaminated.
2. Change fuel filter.
3. Refill tank with proper grade of fuel.
Compression is low. 1. Listen for compression leaks.
4. Check glow plug for looseness. Tighten or replace
glow plug as necessary.
5. Visually check for cracks and listen for leaks around
cylinder head. Notify field maintenance if a leak is
found.
engine block.
7. If any defects are found, or if above steps DO NOT
0029-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0029

Engine runs rough. Fuel level in fuel tank 1. Add proper grade of fuel to fuel tank.
is low.
Fuel is in fuel filter. 1. Turn fuel petcock to OPEN position.
Jet start cock on air 1. Tighten thumbscrew on jet start cock.
intake manifold is
loose.
Decompression valve 1. Turn decompression valve handle downward to
handle is downward closed position.
in closed position.
Fuel filter is 1. Disassemble fuel filter and filter block and check for
block is clogged.
2. If blocked, clear passages and reinstall fuel filter and
filter block.
3. If contaminated, replace fuel filter and reinstall filter
block.
Air cleaner is clogged 1. If air cleaner is clogged or dirty, clean or replace air
or dirty. cleaner.
Fuel lines are blocked. 1. Remove fuel line and check for blockage.
2. Clear blockage.
3. Replace fuel line as required.
Air intake manifold 1. Disassemble air intake manifold.
has blockage or holes.
2. Inspect and clear blocked passages.
3. Replace air intake manifold as required.
Nozzle holder is loose 1. If nozzle holder is loose, tighten nozzle holder.
or blocked.
2. If nozzle holder is blocked, clear any blocked
passages and reinstall or replace nozzle holder.
found.
engine block.
0029-3
0029 TM 9-2330-381-13

Engine has insufficient output or Fuel filter is 1. Disassemble fuel filter and filter block and check for
"low power." contaminated or filter blockage.
block is clogged.
filter block.
block.
Fuel is contaminated 1. Drain and flush tank.
or discolored.
Injector pump is loose 1. If injector pump is loose or leaking or if above
or leaking. steps DO NOT correct malfunction, notify field
maintenance.
White or blue exhaust smoke is Excessive engine oil 1. Drain oil to correct level.
observed after warmup. in crankcase.
2. Check oil for odor of fuel.
3. If fuel odor is found, notify field maintenance.
found.
engine block.
Black or dark gray exhaust smoke Fuel is contaminated 1. Drain and flush tank.
is observed after warmup. or discolored.
2. Replace fuel filter and refill fuel tank with proper
grade of fuel.
Fuel lines are blocked. 1. Remove fuel lines and check for blockage.
2. Clear blockage.
3. Replace fuel lines as required.
Fuel filter is 1. Disassemble fuel filter and filter block and check for
block is clogged.
filter block.
block.
0029-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0029

Low oil pressure indicator light is Oil level is low in 1. Replenish crankcase with proper grade of oil. The
lit. crankcase. level should be between bottom and top marks on
oil level gauge (dipstick).
2. If oil was added and oil pressure indicator light is lit,
notify field maintenance to check for low oil pressure.
Oil pressure is low. Oil level is low. 1. Pull out engine oil dipstick and check oil level.
2. Add or change engine oil with proper grade oil.
Oil filter is clogged. 1. Remove oil filter and check for clogs and debris.
2. If clogged, clean or replace oil filter.
Oil leaks. 1. Visually check for oil leaks at head, oil pump, gear
covers, and access plate gaskets.
2. If any leaks are found, replace APU.
Compression is low. 1. Check for low compression and listen for
compression leaks.
3. Check nozzle holder for looseness. Tighten or
replace as necessary.
4. Visually check for cracks in cylinder head and in
engine block.
5. If any cracks are found, replace APU.
Oil consumption is excessive. Excessive oil 1. Visually check for oil leaks at head, gear covers, and
consumption over access plate gaskets.
1 pint (0.5 l) per 250
2. If any leaks are found, replace APU.
hours of operation.
Fuel is mixed in with the lubricant Engine oil smells like 1. Notify field maintenance.
oil. diesel fuel.
Engine coolant is mixed in Engine oil is 1. Drain and remove radiator.
lubricant oil. contaminated by
2. Visually check for defective head gasket and cracks
coolant.
in cylinder block and cylinder head.
3. If engine oil is contaminated by coolant, replace
APU.
Engine is overheating. Engine coolant level 1. Add coolant as required.
is low.
Oil level in crankcase 1. Replenish crankcase with proper grade of oil. The
is low. level should be between bottom and top marks on
oil level gauge (dipstick).
2. If oil was added and oil pressure indicator light is lit,
notify field maintenance to check for low oil pressure.
Engine coolant has 1. Add coolant as required.
improper mixture.
Radiator or fan 1. Clean and/or replace radiator and fan dynamo.
dynamo contains
dirt and debris.
0029-5
0029 TM 9-2330-381-13

Radiator cap is 1. Visually check radiator cap for leakage and worn
defective. cap or gasket.
2. If any defects are found, replace radiator cap.
Radiator is 1. Check inside of radiator and inspect coolant solution
malfunctioning. for corrosion, rust, or discoloration.
2. If any defects are found, replace radiator cap.
3. Drain fluid from radiator.
4. Flush radiator and check for internal corrosion and
deterioration.
5. If radiator is damaged, replace radiator.
6. Refill radiator with proper coolant mixture.
Fan belt is loose or 1. Adjust or replace fan belt.
broken.
Fuel or oil is mixed in 1. Check for odor of fuel or oil mixed in engine coolant.
engine coolant.
2. Drain engine coolant.
3. Inspect for fuel and oil contamination in engine
coolant.
4. If contaminates are found, replace APU.
Engine water jacket is 1. Remove radiator and check engine water jacket for
corroded. corrosion.
2. Flush and clean engine water jacket.
3. If above steps DO NOT correct malfunction, replace
APU.
Battery has low charge. Battery connections 1. Check battery connections for looseness or corrosion.
are loose.
2. Tighten connections.
Battery will not hold charge. Fluid level in battery 1. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity in each
is low. cell.
2. Replenish battery cells to proper level with distilled
water and recharge as required.
3. Check battery electrolyte for improper specific
gravity with hydrometer.
4. Charge or replace battery.
Fan belt is faulty. 1. Check for fan belt slippage, excessive wear, or noisy
operation.
2. Adjust fan belt tension.
3. Replace fan belt.
Fan dynamo is faulty. 1. Check for noisy or vibrating fan dynamo.
2. Remove and replace fan dynamo.
APU harness is faulty. 1. Check APU harness for breaks, corrosion, and burns
on harness.
2. Remove and repair or replace APU wiring harness.
0029-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0029

3. If solar battery charger is installed, ensure that leads
are securely attached to battery terminal.
Current limiter leads 1. Using an electrical tester (multimeter)on appropriate
in APU control box setting to read 1 to 1.4k resistance, check current
are faulty. limiter for conductivity by tagging, disconnecting,
and probing three current limiter leads in APU
control box.
2. If results are different than specified in Table 1,
remove and replace current limiter.
Table 1. APU Control Box Current Limiter Leads.

Negative Lead Positive Lead Results (ohms)
Red/white Red Nonconductive
Blue 1k - 1.4k
Case Nonconductive
Red Blue Nonconductive
Case Nonconductive
Blue Case Nonconductive
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) Battery will not hold 1. Check that battery will hold a charge.
charging circuit fails to keep a charge.
battery charged. Battery voltage. 1. Start and run APU.
2. Run APU for several minutes in order for charging
circuit to stabilize; otherwise, indications measured
may not be accurate.
3. Using an electrical tester (multimeter) (WP 0168) on
a 20 VDC setting or greater, measure battery voltage
by placing negative (-) probe on battery ground post
(-) and placing positive (+) probe on battery positive
(+) post.
4. Check that battery voltage with APU running
measures 13 VDC ±2 VDC.
5. If battery voltage measures less than 11 VDC, check
fan dynamo AC output by disconnecting leads
from dynamo and measuring minimum of 13 VDC
between each of two yellow leads and red lead.
6. If voltages are not present, shut down APU and
remove and replace fan dynamo.
7. If voltages are present, check bridge rectifier.
8. If solar battery charger is installed, ensure that leads
are securely attached to battery terminal.
0029-7
0029 TM 9-2330-381-13

Bridge rectifier leads 1. With APU control box cover removed, tag and
in APU control box disconnect four leads (red, red, white, and blue) from
are faulty. bridge rectif er.
2. Check conductivity across diodes within rectifier
with an electrical tester (multimeter) set on lowest
resistance setting. Probe four bridge rectifier leads.
3. If actual readings are different than readings specified
in Table 2, remove and replace bridge rectifier.
Table 2. APU Control Box Bridge Rectifier Leads.

Negative Lead Positive Lead Results (ohms)
Red (both White Nonconductive
leads)
White Red (both Conductive
leads)
Blue Red (both Nonconductive
leads)
Red (both Blue Conductive
leads)
Glow plug heats slowly or fails to Battery connections 1. Tighten connections.

heat. are loose.
Battery connections 1. If battery connections are corroded, notify field
are corroded. maintenance.
Fluid level in battery 1. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity in each
is low. cell.
2. Replenish battery cells to proper level with distilled
water and recharge as required.
3. Check battery electrolyte for improper specific
gravity with hydrometer.
4. Charge or replace battery.
Battery is discharged 1. Charge or replace battery.
or defective.
GLOW indicator lamp NOTE
does not light within 5
to 20 seconds. On the APU, with the APU engine serial number 504697
and subsequent numbers, the glow plug indicator is
changed from GLOW type indicator to LAMP type,
driven by a timer.
1. For glow-type glow plug indicator, hold starter
switch in GLOW position and observe glow plug
indicator element.
2. If glow plug indicator element fails to glow within
20 seconds (will take noticeably longer in very cold
weather), remove wire from glow plug and hold wire
terminal to APU frame to ground that wire.
0029-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0029

3. If element fails to glow, replace APU control box
glow plug indicator.
4. If element glows, replace glow plug.
5. For lamp-type glow plug indicator, hold starter
switch in GLOW position for more than 5 seconds.
Glow plug indicator will light, remain lit for about 5
seconds, and then extinguish.
6. If glow plug does not heat up, use multimeter to
check for +12 VDC at glow plug terminal with
respect to engine or frame. If voltage is present,
replace glow plug. If voltage is not present, check for
defective APU wiring harness.
7. If glow plug indicator does not light, check bulb,
electrical connections, and timer.
8. If glow plug indicator lights and does not extinguish
in approximately 5 seconds, replace timer.
Defective APU wiring 1. Check APU wiring harness for broken, corroded, and
harness. burned wiring and loose electrical connections.
2. Repair or replace APU wiring harness.
APU starter switch is 1. Replace starter switch.
defective.
APU jump start system is Auxiliary start system 1. Press test switch button on safety circuit module. If
inoperable. safety circuit module an audible "click" is not heard, proceed to Proper
is inoperable. Battery Installation below.
2. If an audible "click" is heard and APU does not crank
over, notify fild maintenance.
Battery is not properly 1. Check for proper 12 VDC connection at tractor 12/24
connected with the VDC series parallel battery installation (WP 0020).
tractor.
2. Check clamp connections to tractor batteries. Ensure
red positive (+) clamp is making good connection to
battery terminal and that black negative clamp (-) is
making good connection to tractor frame.
Jumper cables are 1. Check jumper cables for loose clamps and connectors,
defective. fraying and corrosion, kinks, and damage.
2. Remove and repair or replace defective cables.
3. Check APU jump start electrical cables connected to
APU (grounding and battery (positive terminal) for
corrosion, loose clamps and connectors, and fraying.
4. Clean off corrosion and tighten any loose connections,
and/or remove and replace defective electrical cables.
APU jump start 1. Check that APU jump start electrical box and internal
electrical box components are working properly by pressing test
malfunction. switch button on electrical box.
2. If an audible clicking sound is not heard and all
of above checks/inspections have not corrected
0029-9
0029 TM 9-2330-381-13
the problem, remove and replace APU jump start

electrical box.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0029-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
2 WP 0013
WP 0014
References WP 0043
WP 0004 WP 0169
WP 0007 WP 0170
WP 0008 Electrical Schematic FO-5 and FO-6
WP 0010
WP 0011
INTRODUCTION
This work package covers hydraulic system troubleshooting.
Table 1. Hydraulic System.

General hydraulic failures. Auxiliary Power Unit CAUTION
(APU) is not running
properly. If APU has run longer than 30 seconds with the
hydraulic tank shutoff valve closed, the pump may be
damaged and the hydraulic system, including filters,
may be contaminated with metal particles.
1. Check that APU is running.
2. Start and run APU.
3. Check that hydraulic tank SHUTOFF valve is open.
4. Check fluid level in hydraulic tank.
5. Check and/or fill hydraulic tank as required.
6. Check hydraulic filter indicator.
7. Indicator should read in green; if it does not, remove
and replace filter.
8. Check for external leaks at hydraulic fitting/joints.
9. Check hydraulic tank breather cap for restrictions.
Replace cap if necessary.
Hydraulic hose has 1. Using hydraulic schematic (Figure FO-5 and FO-6) as
defects. a guide, operate all semitrailer hydraulics and check
hydraulic hoses for internal collapse or obstructions.
2. Remove, repair, or replace hoses as necessary.
System pressure 1. Check that system pressure gauge (WP 0004) does
gauge has faulty not read higher than 200 psi (1379 kPa) without
reading. hydraulic controls being operated.
2. If system pressure is higher than 200 psi (1379 kPa),
continue checking pressure.
0030-1
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

3. Check that system pressure gauge does not read less
than 100 psi (690 kPa) without hydraulic controls
being operated.
4. Check hydraulic tank filter for obstructions or
contamination. Clean or replace hydraulic tank filter
(WP 0043).
Hydraulic pump 1. Check hydraulic pump’s ability to develop
malfunctions. pressure by operating front curbside suspension
handle downward.
2. Monitor system pressure gauge. Hydraulic pressure
should quickly reach from 3,800 to 4,500 psi (26,201
to 31,027 kPa).
3. If pressure rises quickly but fails to reach 3,800 to
4,500 psi (26,201 to 31,027 kPa), check to see if
system will maintain normal or adequate operating
pressure.
4. If pressure rises quickly, check non-operating
function by using Symptom Index (WP 0028) to
continue troubleshooting.
External leaks. Hydraulic fitting/joint WARNING
leaks.
Steering and suspension system hydraulic lines are

under pressure even when APU is not running. DO
NOT attempt to tighten, loosen, adjust, or repair
fitting, line, or hoses until semitrailer is supported by
support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012) and all pressure
is relieved. Failure to follow this warning may result
CAUTION
While performing hydraulic maintenance, it is
important to accurately tag both ends of a hose or tube
and associated fitting. When removing or installing
any hydraulic hoses or tubes, use two wrenches, one
to hold the fitting and one to turn the hose or tube, or
1. Check tightness of fitting and tighten as necessary.
2. Disassemble and inspect for any fitting’s
metal-to-metal seal problems, defects in surface
texture of flares, and pitting or breaks.
3. Reassemble joints using pipe sealant (WP 0170) as
required for pipe threaded fitting.
0030-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030

4. If joint still leaks, replace parts as necessary.
Hoses are damaged. 1. Inspect for split or ruptured hydraulic hoses and lines.
2. If a hose needs to be repaired or replaced, remove
defective hose and notify field maintenance.
External cylinder 1. Check for external cylinder leaks.
leaks.
2. If fluid is leaking out around cylinder rod, wipe down
cylinder rod with rag and exercise affected cylinder
full travel in each direction for three cycles.
3. If leakage slows/stops, monitor. If leakage continues,
System will not maintain normal
or adequate operating pressure. General hydraulic 1. Refer to previous symptom, General Hydraulic
failures. Failures, for checking hydraulic failures.
Hydraulic fittings/ 1. Refer to previous symptom, External Leaks, for
joints have external checking external leaks.
leaks.
System pressure 1. After initial startup, check that system pressure gauge
gauge reading is reads up to 500 psi (3,448 kPa) without hydraulic
abnormal. controls operated.
2. Check if outside ambient temperature is below 30°F
(-1°C).
3. Hydraulic pressure will normally be higher
until hydraulic fluid warms to normal operating
temperature. A gradual decrease in pressure should
occur as hydraulic systems are operated.
Isolation valves are 1. Check that all isolation valves are in normal operating
inoperable. position.
2. Ensure valve handle operates all associated valve
stems.
3. If a valve stem is rounded off or the valve is defective,
replace valve as required.
4. Check that gooseneck isolation valve is in proper
position for load conditions.
5. If semitrailer was moved or loaded while in ADJUST
mode, suspension circuits may be overloaded.
Lower all four support legs and relieve pressure
from suspension circuits by lowering platform onto
support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
6. If in ADJUST mode, check that front support legs
are lowered to the ground and supporting most of the
load.
Platform, with or 1. Lower front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and
without payload, is WP 0012).
not level.
2. Readjust platform height to have weight supported
by support legs and to ensure platform is as level as
possible.
0030-3
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

Control valve handles 1. Check for partially shifted or stuck control valve
are inoperable. handles on steering gooseneck and suspension
control (WP 0004).
2. Operate hydraulic control valves and check for ability
of valves to return to center (neutral position). Be
sure valve handles move freely and DO NOT bind.
3. Operate suspected control valve slowly and monitor
gauge for pressure changes.
4. If pressure changes occur, valve body may be
contaminated, defective, or leaking internally.
Perform general system flushing to try and remove
any contaminants further in system.
5. If symptom still exists, remove and repair or replace
handles as required.
Hydraulic controls are 1. Operate all hydraulic controls and adjust gooseneck
inoperable. (WP 0007).
2. Adjust platform (WP 0008).
3. Manually adjust steering (WP 0010).
4. Identify which hydraulic control is unable to achieve
normal hydraulic pressure during operation, and use
Symptom Index (WP 0028) for quick reference to
continue troubleshooting
Pump is making excessive noise Hydraulic pump fails. CAUTION
or pump has failed.
If APU has run longer than 30 seconds, with the
hydraulic tank SHUTOFF valve closed, pump may be
damaged and the hydraulic system, including filters,
may be contaminated with metal particles.
1. Check that hydraulic tank SHUTOFF valve is open
(WP 0004).
2. If hydraulic tank SHUTOFF valve was closed with
APU running, check hydraulic filter indicator to
determine how much contamination has moved away
from hydraulic pump (WP 0107). If filter is not
clogged, contamination has not reached filter.
3. Remove filter supply line, filter assembly, and supply
hoses from pump, gooseneck, and step assembly.
Remove and replace pump.
4. Clean all fittings, hoses, and filter parts. Replace all
parts as required.
5. If contamination has clogged filter, some
contamination may have passed filter and moved
in hydraulic system. Refer to hydraulic flushing
procedure and flush hydraulic system.
6. Check that hydraulic system will maintain proper
operating pressure.
0030-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030
Platform suspension will not 7. Check for external leaks at hydraulic fittings/joints.
adjust or adjustments are sluggish. General hydraulic 1. Refer to General Hydraulic Failures.
failures.
Suspension isolation 1. Check that all suspension isolation valves are in
valves are improperly OPEN position.
positioned.
2. Position isolation valves in open position, handles
pushed inward and facing toward front of semitrailer.
Suspension 1. Check that suspension SHUTOFF and gooseneck
SHUTOFF and isolation valves are in correct position (WP 0004).
gooseneck isolation
2. If coupled to a tractor, set suspension SHUTOFF and
valves are improperly
gooseneck isolation valve handles in RUN position,
positioned.
both handles pushed inward.
3. Pull out suspension SHUTOFF valve to make
platform adjustments.
4. If uncoupled from a tractor, suspension SHUTOFF
valve handle and gooseneck isolation valve handle
should be in ADJUST position, both handles pulled
outward.
External leaks 1. Refer External Leaks to continue checking for
at hydraulic external leaks.
fittings/joints.
Insufficient 1. Check suspension pressure while trying to adjust
suspension pressure. platform.
2. If all three suspension gauges fail to reach pressures
above 3,800 psi (26,201 kPa), or if system pressure
gauge reads lower than suspension gauges or lower
than normal pressure for current payload condition
while trying to adjust platform, check system supply.
3. If only one suspension circuit fails to reach 3,800 psi
(26,201 kPa), and the other two suspension circuits
operate normally, check for signs of external leakage
or ruptured hoses.
4. Identify failed hydraulic circuit and use Symptom
Index (WP 0028) to continue troubleshooting.
0030-5
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

Linkage at gooseneck WARNING
isolation valve is
loose.
Ensure all four support legs are lowered and

supporting the platform prior to checking the
gooseneck isolation valve handles for proper operation
or injury to personnel may result (WP 0011 and
:30012).
1. Linkage should be tight and adjusted so that all valve
handles move the same distance and open each valve
equally. Adjust valve linkage as required.
2. Check each valve handle to be sure both valves are
being operated.
3. Tighten or remove and replace defective parts.
Suspension 1. Check to see if counterbalance valves are dirty,
adjustments are leaking, or defective.
sluggish or slow
2. Remove counterbalance valves CB1 (front suspension
within suspension
curbside), CB2 (front suspension streetside), or CB3
circuit.
(rear suspension) from suspension control manifold.
Clean and/or replace items removed.
3. Check to see if flow control valves are dirty or
defective.
4. Remove flow control valves FC1 (front suspension
curbside), FC2 (front suspension streetside), or FC3
(rear suspension) from suspension control manifold.
5. Clean and/or replace items removed.
Leaking or damaged 1. If cylinder is damaged, remove and replace
hydraulic cylinder. suspension hydraulic cylinder.
2. If cylinder is leaking, notify field maintenance.
Platform suspension drifts down General hydraulic 1. Refer to General Hydraulic Failures.
or drops. failures.
External leaks 1. Refer to checking external leaks.
at hydraulic
fittings/joints.
Suspension cylinder, 1. Check for evidence of leakage at suspension
line fracture valves, cylinder, line fracture valves, suspension isolation
suspension isolation valves, suspension valves, gooseneck cylinders, and
valves, suspension hydraulic gauges.
valves, gooseneck
2. If components are damaged, remove and replace
cylinders, and/or
components as required.
hydraulic gauges are
leaking. 3. If cylinders are leaking, notify field maintenance.
0030-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030

Gooseneck isolation 1. Check drift between gooseneck cylinders and front
valve is leaking suspension cylinders while gooseneck isolation valve
internally. is in ADJUST mode only.
2. If gooseneck cylinders extend about 0.25 to 0.5 in.
(0.6 to 1.2 cm) at the same rate as suspension
cylinders retract, gooseneck isolation valve may be
leaking internally. Remove gooseneck isolation valve
and check and replace parts found defective.
Pilot check valves 1. Check platform drift in front suspension while
in suspension gooseneck isolation valve is in RUN mode by
control manifold uncoupling tractor and semitrailer while in ADJUST
are contaminated or mode with front support legs 3 in. (7.6 cm) off the
leaking. ground. Pilot check valves in suspension control
manifold may be contaminated or leaking.
2. Clear contamination by raising platform to near full
height and lowering platform to near fully lowered
for three or more full cycles of operation.
3. While raising and lowering platform, abruptly release
and reverse handles several times each cycle.
4. If platform drifts downward at a steady or even rate,
counterbalance valves CB1 (curbside) and CB2
(streetside) may be leaking internally or around
valves. Remove and clean valves.
5. Reinstall valves and recheck operation.
6. Remove suspension control manifold.
7. Clean and repair or replace parts as necessary.
Suspension rides stiff and does not Improper platform 1. Check platform height. Height should be 43 in.
adjust for bumps/road hazards. height over (109 cm).
rough/rugged terrain.
2. Make required adjustments to platform (WP 0008).
Suspension isolation 1. Check that axle suspension isolation valve is open.
valve is positioned
2. Open isolation valve, handles facing forward toward
improperly.
front of semitrailer.
3. Check that suspension isolation valve handle operates
both valves equally and is secure. Tighten or remove
and replace defective parts.
0030-7
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

Gooseneck isolation WARNING
valve is positioned
improperly.
Ensure all four support legs are lowered and

supporting the platform prior to checking the
gooseneck isolation valve handles for proper
operation. Failure to follow this warning may
UHVXOWin injury to personnel.
1. For highway driving or when semitrailer and tractor
are coupled, check that gooseneck isolation valve is
pushed inward to RUN position.
3. Check each valve handle to be sure both valves
are being operated. Tighten or remove and replace
defective parts.
Damage or 1. Inspect areas of damage; try to determine probable
mechanical binding at cause; and repair and/or replace parts as necessary.
is found at suspension
arms and suspension
cylinders and at
gooseneck pivot
pin and gooseneck
cylinders.
Suspension tire change chain is Suspension isolation WARNING
overstressed and/or breaks. valve is positioned
improperly.
Ensure all four support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012)

are lowered and supporting the platform prior to
checking the suspension isolation valves for leaks.
Failure to follow this warning may result in injury
to personnel.
1. Check that affected suspension isolation valve is
closed.
2. Operate affected suspension isolation valve and
check that valve handle operates both valves equally
and is secure.
4. Check for possible leakage at suspension isolation
valve.
0030-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030

Leakage is found at WARNING
suspension isolation
valve.
Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin.

Wear long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face
shield. If hydraulic fluid gets in the eyes, flush them
immediately with water and seek medical attention.
If hydraulic fluid gets on skin, thoroughly wash with
soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to
eating or smoking. Failure to follow this warning may
1. Check for external leaks at suspension isolation valve
fitting, stem area, or hoses. If leaking, notify field
maintenance.
2. Disassemble hose/tube from fitting and reassemble
hose/tube using pipe sealant (WP 0170). If joint still
leaks, replace parts as necessary.
Gooseneck will not adjust or General hydraulic 1. Refer to General Hydraulic Failures.
adjustments are sluggish. failures.
Semitrailer kingpins CAUTION
are not completely
uncoupled. DO NOT attempt to adjust gooseneck while it is
coupled to a tractor. The gooseneck may lift the
tractor/front of platform and may cause damage to
equipment.
1. Check that semitrailer kingpins are completely
uncoupled and are clear of tractor fifth-wheel.
2. If kingpins are hitting fifth-wheel, pull tractor ahead
slightly to allow kingpin to clear fifth-wheel and
vee-entry ramps without binding.
Suspension 1. Check that suspension SHUTOFF and gooseneck
SHUTOFF and isolation valves are in the correct position.
gooseneck isolation
2. Suspension SHUTOFF valve handle and gooseneck
valves are positioned
isolation valve handle should be in ADJUST position,
incorrectly.
both handles pulled outboard.
0030-9
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

isolation valve is
incorrect.
Ensure all four support legs (WP 0011and WP 0012)

checking the gooseneck isolation valve handles for
proper operation. Failure to follow this warning may
1. Check linkage at gooseneck isolation valve for
binding, missing parts, loose connections, and
improper linkage travel.
defective parts.
Gooseneck/ CAUTION
suspension system
has external leakage. External leakage in the gooseneck/suspension system
may have caused one or more line fracture valves to
close. Further operation without resetting the line
fracture valve may cause component overload and
premature failure.
1. Check for possible closed line fracture valve on
a suspected gooseneck cylinder by checking both
hoses for equal pressure (stiffness) by bending and
observing suspected hoses.
2. If unequal pressure is found in one of the hoses, one
side of line fracture valve may have closed. Check
for external leaks in gooseneck cylinder and reset
line fracture valve by lowering gooseneck to lowest
position and holding in downward position for a
minimum of 15 seconds (WP 0007).
3. If line fracture valve cannot be reset, remove and
replace line fracture valve.
System pressure is 1. Check that system pressure gauge reads less
inadequate. than 1,000 psi (6,895 kPa) while trying to lower
gooseneck.
2. Check gooseneck control valve section of four-way
directional control valve for internal leaks or
contamination.
3. Remove, clean, and repair or replace parts as
necessary.
0030-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030

4. Check that system pressure does not exceed 1,500 psi
(10,342 kPa) while trying to raise the gooseneck.
5. Check for mechanical obstructions or damage to
gooseneck cylinders or gooseneck pivot. If defective,
Gooseneck drifts down, drops, or Gooseneck isolation 1. If uncoupled from a tractor, gooseneck isolation
will not support itself. valve is incorrectly valve handle should be in ADJUST position.
positioned.
Evidence of leakage 1. Check for evidence of leakage at gooseneck cylinder
is found. rod seals, line fracture valves, gooseneck control
valve, and gooseneck isolation valves.
2. Repair or replace parts found defective as required.
3. If gooseneck cylinder is leaking, notify field
maintenance.
isolation valve is
incorrect.
Ensure all four support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012)

checking the gooseneck isolation valve handles for
proper operation. Failure to follow this warning may
1. Check linkage at gooseneck isolation valve for
binding, missing parts, loose connections, and
improper linkage travel.
defective parts as required.
Gooseneck drifts. 1. Check gooseneck drift while in the ADJUST mode
by observing front suspension.
2. Lower front suspension.
3. If front suspension, streetside, and/or curbside is two
or three times slower than normal cylinder speed,
remove and inspect each respective side of gooseneck
isolation valve and replace parts as necessary.
4. If gooseneck drifts and front suspension does not,
check gooseneck cylinder for internal leakage as
follows:
a. Couple tractor/semitrailer.
0030-11
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

b. Operate gooseneck isolation valve handle to
RUN position.
c. Close hydraulic tank SHUTOFF valve, remove
lower hose (Figure 1, Item 2) from each
gooseneck cylinder, and cap line to prevent fluid
loss.
d. Check cylinder port (Figure 1, Item 1) for fluid
loss while watching for platform drift down.
Remove cap from line reconnect hoses to cylinder
and open hydraulic tank SHUTOFF valve.
5. If platform drifted and fluid loss from cylinder port
was approximately the same rate, cylinder(s) is
leaking internally. Notify field maintenance to repair
or replace gooseneck cylinder(s).
Figure 1. Gooseneck Cylinder Port and Hose.

Oil or air is being relieved from Gooseneck cylinder NOTE
gooseneck cylinder air reservoir. air reservoir is
damaged. The air reservoir contains a small amount of oil to
minimize corrosion. Some of the oil may escape through
the relief valve or air breather valve during operation.
Therefore, occasional dripping is not considered a
malfunction.
Oil is dripping
or running from 1. Check for dents, cracks, and damage to reservoir.
relief valve or air 2. If damaged, remove and replace air reservoir.
breather/check valve 1. Check reservoir for leaks.
2. If fittings are leaking remove and reinstall using pipe
sealant.
0030-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030

at gooseneck cylinder
3. If joint still leaks, replace parts as required.
air reservoir.
4. If excessive oil relieves from air reservoir, it is
possible that streetside gooseneck cylinder may be
leaking internally. Refer to Gooseneck Drifts
Down and Will Not Support Self and check
streetside gooseneck cylinder for internal leaks.
Steering will not adjust. Brakes are released 1. Release semitrailer brakes by operating brake release
and steerable axles are valve.
blocked or obstructed.
2. Move wheel chocks away from tires, or remove any
debris or materials that may block the steerable axles
from turning.
Steering wedge 1. Recouple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013).
is improperly
seated with tractor
fifth-wheel when
coupled.
Steering wedge is 1. Adjust steering wedge (WP 0010).
offset to extreme
limits of travel when
uncoupled.
Steering pressure is NOTE
abnormal.
Normal pressures should read 1,000 to 2,500 psi (6,895
to 17,238 kPa) when steering wedge is approximately
straight ahead. Pressure should rise up to 3,000 to
3,900 psi (20,685 to 26,891 kPa) when positioned for
an extreme turn.
1. Check for normal steering pressure at systems
pressure gauge for adjusting steering.
2. If system pressure gauge reads higher than normal,
check for mechanical binding, damage, hydraulic
leaks, or misalignments of platform and gooseneck
steering components.
3. If defects are found, adjust, repair, or replace parts
as required.
4. If system pressure gauge reads normal but will not
adjust when steering valve handle is operated, refer
to Steering Will Not Maintain Normal or Adequate
Operating Pressure and check system ability
to maintain proper operating pressure.
5. If system pressure is low and steering will not adjust
but semitrailer tracks tractor steering check each
steering cylinder for internal leakage.
0030-13
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13
System pressure is WARNING

low. Steering will not
adjust but semitrailer
tracks tractor steering.
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the

skin. Wear long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face
shield. If hydraulic fluid gets in the eyes, flush them
immediately with water and seek medical attention.
If hydraulic fluid gets on skin, thoroughly wash with
soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to
eating or smoking.
• When checking for leaks, keep hands and face away
from cylinder opening while under pressure.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injury
to personnel.
1. Check each steering cylinder for internal leakage.
2. Manually steer semitrailer in a full right turn
(WP 0014).
3. Disconnect and plug aft port on streetside gooseneck
cylinder hydraulic hose (Figure 2, Item 2) and
curbside platform cylinder hose (Figure 2, Item 4).
4. Disconnect and plug forward port on curbside
gooseneck cylinder hydraulic hose (Figure 2, Item 3)
and streetside platform cylinder hose (Figure 2,
Item 1).
5. Continue to steer a right turn until system pressure
gauge reads between 3,800 to 4,500 psi (26,201 to
31,027 kPa).
6. Check open ports for excess fluid leakage. If excess
fluid loss is detected, remove leaking cylinder and
7. Remove plugs and reconnect hoses to cylinders.
0030-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0030
Figure 2. Steering Cylinders.

Steering system steers 1. Steering manifold pilot check valves PO1 through
in one direction but PO4 may be leaking, may be defective, or may be
system pressure gauge failing to pilot. Remove pilot check valves. Clean,
reads over 3,800 psi repair, or replace parts as required.
(26,201 kPa) and still
2. Steering manifold resistance valve RV1 through
does not adjust in the
RV8 may be stuck closed and/or open, and may be
other direction.
dirty or defective. Remove resistance valves. Clean,
repair, or replace parts as required.
Steering pressure indicator light Indicator light comes 1. Start APU and recharge steering hydraulic circuit.
comes on. on. Semitrailer also
2. Operate steering control valve in both directions for
has other malfunction
approximately 10 seconds.
symptoms, such as
poor tracking behind 3. Check for general hydraulic failures that would limit
tractor or steering will fluid flow to hydraulic controls. Refer to General
not adjust. Hydraulic Failures.
Hydraulic fittings/ 1. Refer to General Hydraulic Failures for checking
joints have external external leaks.
leaks.
Indicator light 1. Bleed and recharge hydraulic system to remove
remains lit after possible air trapped in hydraulic system.
numerous general
2. If relief valve R1 is not leaking or defective; or
hydraulic checks.
steering pressure indicator stays lit while adjusting
steering with steering control valve; or steering
pressure indicator comes on immediately when
handle is released; use multimeter (WP 0169) to
check which pressure switch closes first.
3. If pressure switch PS5 closes first, check valve PO1
may be defective or leaking. If pressure switch PS6
closes first, check valve PO2 may be defective or
leaking.
4. If pressure switch PS7 closes first, check valve PO3
may be defective or leaking. If pressure switch PS8
closes first, check valve PO4 may be defective or
leaking.
0030-15
0030 TM 9-2330-381-13

5. Repair or replace parts as required.
Semitrailer steering does not track Steering wedge is not 1. Uncouple tractor/semitrailer and then recouple
properly. properly fitted and (WP 0013).
secure in the tractor
fifth-wheel.
Steering cylinder, 1. Refer to General Hydraulic Failures and
fitting, joint, and check for external leaks.
hoses have hydraulic
leaks.
Steering pressure 1. Recharge hydraulic pressure to steering circuit by
indicator light is lit. starting APU.
2. Operate steering control valve in both directions.
Steering pressure 1. Check indicator light for proper operation.
indicator is not on.
2. Refer to Electrical System/Steering
Pressure Indicator Does Not Light to check steering
indicator.
Hydraulic system has 1. Bleed steering system.
excessive air.
2. Test steering system for proper tracking.
Steering pressure 1. Refer to Steering Will Not Adjust and troubleshoot
indicator light still indicator light and pressure switches.
comes on.
Steering pressure 1. Check platform steering installation for loose,
indicator stays off and misaligned, or broken parts.
semitrailer still does
2. Perform platform steering alignment as required.
not track the tractor
properly.
Steering cylinders 1. Refer to Steering Will Not Adjust and
leak. check steering hydraulic cylinders for leaks.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0030-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0031
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
1 WP 0047
WP 0052
References WP 0168
WP 0013 Electrical Schematic FO-1 and FO-2
WP 0035
WP 0045
INTRODUCTION
This work package covers the electrical system troubleshooting.
Table 1. Electrical System.

Steering pressure indicator does Power is not supplied 1. Couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013).
not light when pressure is low. from tractor to
2. Turn on semitrailer running lights. If lights DO
running lights.
NOT come on, check electrical connector for bent or
missing pins and check electrical cable for pinched
or broken lines or other damage.
3. Repair or replace parts as required.
4. If steering pressure indicator fails to light, refer to
the symptom “None of the Lamps Light” below and
check tractor/semitrailer electrical.
Steering pressure 1. Using a 12 VDC battery and jumper leads, connect
indicator light bulb is leads to poles of bulb.
not working.
2. If bulb is defective, replace bulb.
Wiring to pressure 1. Check jumper wires to four pressure switches.
switches is damaged.
2. Check wiring harness W3 for breaks and for pinched
or missing wires.
3. Repair or replace wiring.
NOTE
• Ensure the tractor/semitrailer is coupled and running
lights are turned on.
• If checking more than one pressure switch, recharge
the steering circuit between each check by running the
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) and operating the steering
valve for 10 seconds in both directions until indicator
light goes out.
Pressure switch on 1. Using an electrical tester (multimeter) (WP 0168),
suspension manifold check for defective pressure switch PS5 on
is defective. suspension manifold.
0031-1
0031 TM 9-2330-381-13

a. Using an ohm meter, connect leads to poles of
pressure switch PS5. Reading on meter should
be infinity (open).
b. Check operation of pressure switch PS5 by
slightly opening aft bleed valve on curbside
platform cylinder.
c. Allow only residual pressure to be bled from
cylinder. Once pressure is relieved from cylinder,
close bleed valve and check indicator light.
Indicator light should be lit and ohm reading
should be zero (closed).
d. If indicator light is not lit, or ohm reading is not
zero, replace pressure switch PS5.
2. Using an electrical tester (multimeter) (WP
0168), check for defective pressure switch PS6 on
suspension manifold.
be infinity (open).
slightly opening forward bleed valve on curbside
platform cylinder.
d. If indicator light is not lit or ohm reading is not
3. Using an electrical tester (multimeter) (WP 0168),
check for defective pressure switch PS7 on
be infinity (open).
slightly opening forward bleed valve on streetside
platform cylinder.
4. Using an electrical tester (multimeter) (WP 0168),
check for defective pressure switch PS8 on
0031-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0031

be inf nity (open).
slightly opening aft bleed valve on streetside
platform cylinder.
None of the lamps light. Lights are defective. 1. Check lights on tractor, including turn signals and
stop lights.
2. If towing vehicle lights DO NOT light, notify field
maintenance.
Inter-vehicular 1. Check that inter-vehicular cable is properly
cable not properly connected.
connected.
2. If cable is not properly connected, reconnect cable.
Inter-vehicular 1. Check connectors for dirty, corroded, or damaged
cables/connectors pins (WP 0035).
are corroded and
2. Using a multimeter (WP 0168) and semitrailer
defective.
electrical schematic (Figure FO-1 and FO-2) as
a guide, check for corroded inter-vehicle cable
hookups.
3. If cables are corroded, clean cables and reconnect
as required.
4. If cables are defective, replace cables as required.
Wiring has a ground 1. Using a multimeter (WP 0168) and semitrailer
or open circuit. electrical schematic (Figure FO-1 and FO-2) as a
guide, check for ground or open circuit in wiring.
2. If wiring has a ground or open circuit, repair or
replace wiring as required.
One or more (but not all) lights Lamps are burned out 1. Check for burned out or defective lamps (WP 0035).
will not light. or defective.
2. If lamps are burned out or defective, notify field
maintenance.
Lead wires are broken 1. If connections are loose, tighten connections
and connections are (WP 0035).
corroded and loose.
2. If connections are corroded, clean connectors as
required.
3. If lead wires are broken, repair lead wires as required.
0031-3
0031 TM 9-2330-381-13

Light assembly is 1. Repair or replace defective light assemblies
defective. (WP 0046 through WP 0052).
Semitrailer 1. Using an electrical tester (multimeter) and semitrailer
connectors J1 and electrical schematic (Figure FO-1 and FO-2 ) as a
J2 at gooseneck guide, remove tractor inter-vehicle connectors and
component assembly check semitrailer connectors J1 and J2 at gooseneck
are faulty. component assembly (WP 0045).
2. At connector J1, using a multimeter on lowest
ohm setting, connect common lead to ground. At
connector, probe pins A, B, C, E, F, and H. Results
should reflect greater than 3 ohms.
3. Probe pins K, L, M, and N. Results should reflect
open circuit. Probe pin D. Results should reflect
ground.
4. At connector J2, using a multimeter on lowest
ohm setting. connect common lead to ground. At
connector, probe pins 2 through 6. Results should
reflect 1 ohm or greater.
5. Probe pin 1. Results should reflect ground.
6. Probe pin 7. Results should reflect open circuit.
Wiring or terminal 1. Using semitrailer electrical schematic (Figure FO-1
board has open circuit. and FO-2), check for open circuit in wiring or
terminal board.
2. If wiring or terminal board has a ground or open
circuit, repair or replace as required.
Resistors and diodes 1. At gooseneck component assembly, using an
have an open circuit. electrical tester (multimeter) (WP 0168), check
resistors and diodes for open circuit.
2. Remove six bolts and carefully remove gooseneck
component assembly from gooseneck. Turn
component assembly upside down for accessibility.
3. Probe pins J1-B to J2-3; results should reflect 7
ohms. Probe pins J1-J to J2-5; results should reflect
7 ohms. Probe pins J1-E to TB2-1; results should
reflect 2 ohms.
a. For LED lights, this step is not applicable.
4. Probe terminal boards TB2-1 to TB2-2; results should
ref ect continuity in one direction. Reverse leads and
results should reflect resistance in other direction.
5. Remove jumper wire from terminal board TB2-3 and
probe pins TB2-1 to TB2-3. Results should reflect
continuity in one direction. Reverse leads. Results
should reflect resistance in other direction. Reinstall
jumper wire to pin 3.
a. For LED lights, probe terminal TB2-10 to TB2-2
for current f ow. In the 10-2 direction, current
should flow unresisted. In the 2-10 direction, less
0031-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0031

than 12 volts should give an open circuit and
greater than 12 volts should give a closed circuit.
6. Remove and replace resistors and/or diodes
(WP 0045).
7. For LED lights, remove and replace diodes and/or
zener lead assembly.
Lights are dim or flickering. Electrical connections 1. If connections are loose, tighten connections
have loose, dirty, or (WP 0035).
corroded pins.
2. If connector pins are dirty or corroded, notify field
maintenance.
Lamp is defective. 1. Check for defective lamp (WP 0035).
2. If lamp is defective, notify field maintenance.
Towing vehicle lights 1. If tractor has dim or flickering lights, notify field
are inoperable. maintenance.
Output from tractor is 1. Repair or replace any defects found as required.
improper.
Light assemblies have 1. Repair or replace defective light assemblies
corrosion, missing (WP 0047 and WP 0052).
parts, and burned
bulbs.
Ground or open circuit 1. Using semitrailer electrical schematic (Figure FO-1
is intermittent. and FO-2) and multimeter, check for intermittent
ground or open circuit.
2. If wiring is defective, repair or replace as required.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0031-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0032
FIELD MAINTENANCE
WHEELS, TIRES, AND HUBS TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:
1 WP 0076
WP 0077
References
WP 0081
WP 0035
TM 9-2330-381-24P
WP 0038
INTRODUCTION
This work package covers wheels, tires, and hubs troubleshooting.
Table 1. Wheels, Tires, and Hubs.

Wheel is wobbling. Lug nuts are loose 1. If lug nuts are loose or missing, replace and tighten.
and missing. Lugs are Torque as required (WP 0075).
missing and broken.
2. If lug studs are broken or stripped, replace defective
parts (WP 0075).
Wheel is bent. 1. If wheel is bent, remove tire and wheel and install
spare in place (WP 0077 through WP 0081).
2. Remove tire from bent wheel and replace wheel
(WP 0076).
Improper tire size and NOTE
type.
Only tires listed in TM 9-2330-381-24P, Repair Parts and
Special Tools List (RPSTL), are authorized for use.
1. If tire is not 215/75 R17.5, remove tire.
2. Check spare for correct size and type. Install spare in
place of improper tire (WP 0077 through WP 0081).
Steering linkages 1. Adjust and tighten steering linkages (WP 0038).
are loose and have
improper adjustments.
Tire wear is excessive or uneven. Tire size and type are NOTE
improper.
Only tires listed in TM 9-2330-381-24P, Repair Parts and
Special Tools List (RPSTL), are authorized for use.
1. If tire is not 215/75 R17.5, remove tire.
2. Check spare for correct size and type. Install spare in
place of improper tire (WP 0077 through WP 0081).
3. Check tire air pressure (WP 0035).
Lug nuts are loose 1. If lug nuts are loose or missing, replace and tighten.
and missing. Lugs are Torque as required (WP 0075).
missing and broken.
2. If lug studs are broken or stripped, replace defective
parts (WP 0075).
0032-1
0032 TM 9-2330-381-13

Wheel is bent. 1. If wheel is bent, remove tire and wheel and install
spare in place (WP 0077 through WP 0081).
2. Remove tire from bent wheel and replace wheel
(WP 0076).
Steering linkages 1. Adjust and tighten steering linkages (WP 0038).
are loose and have
improper adjustments.
Tire air pressure is WARNING
inadequate.
Always follow proper tire insulation procedures and

warning. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death to personnel.
1. Check tire air pressure (WP 0035).
2. If pressure is low, inflate tires to correct pressure of
95 psi (655 kPa).
Wheel is loose. 1. If lug nuts are loose, tighten and torque as required
(WP 0035).
In tow, semitrailer wanders or Steering linkages are 1. Adjust and/or tighten steering linkages (WP 0038).
pulls to one side (on level ground). loose and need proper
adjustment.
After platform 1. Troubleshoot semitrailer for improper tracking.
steering alignment is
complete, semitrailer
still wanders or pulls
to one side (on level
ground).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0032-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0033
FIELD MAINTENANCE
BRAKE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
INITIAL SETUP:

2 WP 0072
WP 0073
References WP 0074
WP 0013 WP 0075
WP 0037
INTRODUCTION
This work package covers brake troubleshooting.
Table 1. Brakes.

Brakes are weak or no brakes. Tractor air pressure is 1. If tractor air pressure is low, notify field maintenance.
low.
Filter is clogged or 1. Check air cleaner for clogged or dirty filter.
dirty.
2. Remove and replace air cleaner (WP 0072).
Gladhands are not 1. Reconnect service to service and emergency to
properly connected. emergency (WP 0013).
2. Ensure connections are tight (WP 0013). If symptom
still exists, notify field maintenance.
Air lines/connectors, 1. If air lines/connectors are leaking, tighten, repair, or
brake chamber, and replace as required (WP 0073 and WP 0074).
valves have leaks and
2. If a multifunction valve is leaking, replace
defects.
multifunction valve (WP 0074).
3. If a relay valve is leaking, replace relay valve
(WP 0074).
4. If an air brake chamber is defective or is leaking,
remove and replace air brake chamber (WP 0074).
Brakes are improperly 1. Perform service brake adjustment (WP 0037).
adjusted.
Grease is on brake 1. Replace inner bearing oil seal and replace brake
linings. shoes as required (WP 0068).
Brake linings are 1. Replace brake shoes as required (WP 0068).
worn.
Faulty relay valve 1. If left and right bogie’s (No. 1) air brake chambers
operation. DO NOT operate, replace relay valve No. 1
(WP 0074).
2. If left and right bogie’s (No. 2) air brake chambers
DO NOT operate, replace relay valve No. 2
(WP 0074).
0033-1
0033 TM 9-2330-381-13

(WP 0074).
(WP 0074).
(WP 0074).
6. If a single air brake chamber does not operate
properly, remove and replace defective chamber
(WP 0074).
Brake has slow application or slow Air pressure is low. 1. Check for low air pressure, leakage at connections,
release. air line, or valves.
2. If air line/connections are leaking, repair or replace
as needed (WP 0073 and WP 0074).
3. If a valve is leaking, remove and replace valve
(WP 0074).
Air line and hoses 1. Clean or replace lines and hoses (WP 0073 and
have restrictions. WP 0074).
Air brake chamber 1. If a single air brake chamber does not operate
does not operate properly, remove and replace defective chamber
properly. (WP 0074).
2. If a set of air brake chambers does not operate
properly, remove and replace a relay valve
(WP 0074).
Brakes are grabbing. Brake adjustment is 1. If brakes are out of adjustment, adjust brakes
uneven. (WP 0037).
Grease is on brake 1. Replace brake shoes (WP 0068).
linings.
2. Replace inner bearing oil seal (WP 0075).
Brake linings are 1. If brake linings are worn or loose, replace brake
worn or loose. shoes (WP 0068).
Brake drum 1. If brake drum is defective, or if above steps DO NOT
is excessively correct malfunction, notify field maintenance.
scored, cracked, or
out-of-round.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0033-2
CHAPTER 4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)
FOR

TM 9-2330-381-13 0034
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION
GENERAL
The Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) (WP 0035) must be performed by the operator to ensure that the
equipment is in good operating condition and ready for its primary mission.
To ensure maximum operational readiness, it is necessary that the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer be
inspected at regular intervals so that any defects can be discovered and corrected before any serious damage or failure occurs.
Any maintenance problems that are beyond your authorization will be referred to Sustainment for correction.
Always perform the PMCS in the same order, so that it becomes a habit. Once you have had some practice, you will quickly
spot anything that is wrong. Perform the PMCS as follows:
1. BEFORE PMCS. Just before you operate the HET. Pay attention to all WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES.
2. DURING PMCS. While you operate the HET. During operation means to monitor the HET and its related components
while it is actually being operated. Pay attention to all WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES.
3. AFTER PMCS. Right after operating the HET.
4. WEEKLY PMCS. Once a week or if you are operating the semitrailer for the first time. Pay attention to all
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES.
5. MONTHLY. Once a month.
6. QUARTERLY. Once every 3 months.
7. SEMIANNUALLY. Once every 6 months.
Always observe the WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, and NOTES before and during operation. A WARNING means someone
could be injured or killed. A CAUTION means the equipment could be damaged. If the equipment fails to operate, perform
the troubleshooting procedures found in WP 0030, WP 0031, WP 0031, and WP 0033. Report any deficiencies by using the
proper forms. See DA PAM 738-750.
NOTE
• There is a 5-year service requirement for the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) M1000 semitrailer. This is a
very labor-intensive service requirement and requires advance planning and budgeting. TACOM recommends that
you begin advance planning and budgeting at least 24 months prior to the 5-year service due date.
• In addition, proper and timely performance of all services and lubrications will help reduce the maintenance
burden and parts consumption associated with performing the 5-year service.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMN ENTRIES

The PMCS table in work package WP 0035 lists the inspections and care required to keep the Heavy Equipment Transporter
(HET) M1000 semitrailer in good operating condition. It is set up so you can perform BEFORE operation checks as you walk
around the HET. The PMCS table includes the following columns:
1. The ITEM NO. column indicates the number assigned to each PMCS procedure. The procedures are numbered in
logical sequence of performance.
2. The INTERVAL column indicates when to perform a certain check or service.
3. The MANHOUR column indicates how long it should take to perform a check or service procedure.
4. The PROCEDURE column states how to do the required checks and services. Carefully follow these instructions. If
you do not have tools or if the procedure tells you to, notify your supervisor.
5. The EQUIPMENT NOT READY/AVAILABLE IF column indicates when the HET is non-mission capable and why
the equipment cannot be used. The terms ready/available and mission capable refer to the same status: equipment is on
hand and is able to perform combat missions. (See AR 700-138.)
0034-1
0034 TM 9-2330-381-13
If the HET does not perform as required, refer to Chapter 3, Troubleshooting. If anything looks wrong and you cannot fix it,
complete a DA Form 2404. IMMEDIATELY report the problem to your supervisor.
COMMON PMCS PRACTICES

1. Keep it clean: Dirt, grease, oil, and debris only get in the way and may cover up a serious problem. While doing your
PMCS, clean as you work and as you go. Use dry cleaning solvent (WP 0170) on all metal surfaces. Use soap
and water when you clean rubber and plastic material.
2. Bolts, nuts, and screws: Check them for obvious looseness and missing, bent, defective, or broken condition. Don’t try
them all with a tool, but you can look for chipped paint, bare metal, or rust around bolt heads. If you find one that you
think is loose, tighten and report it to field maintenance.
3. Welds: Look for loose or chipped paint, rust, or gaps where parts are welded together. If you find a bad weld, report it
to field maintenance.
4. Electrical wiring and connections: Look for cracked or broken insulation, bare wires, and loose or broken connections.
Tighten loose connectors and ensure the wires are in good shape.
5. Hoses and fluid lines: While doing your PMCS, look and listen for wear, damage, and leaks in all hoses and fluid lines.
Ensure clamps and fittings are tight. Wet spots mean leaks. A stain around a fitting or connector can mean a leak. Look
for these signs. If a leak comes from a loose fitting or connector that can be easily fixed, tighten it using the two wrench
method. If you can’t fix it easily or if a hose or line appears broken or worn, report it to field maintenance.
6. Mounted accessories: Check that mounted accessories are secure and in place before you begin to operate your
semitrailer.
NOTE
Keep all of the general checks in mind every time you do your PMCS. This will help you spot
trouble before it starts. It will also help you and your unit’s maintenance to keep your semitrailer
operational. In time, spotting possible trouble will become automatic.
7. When you check for GOOD CONDITION: Look at the item to see if it is safe and serviceable.
8. When you check for CORRECT ASSEMBLY OR STOWAGE: Look at the item to see if it is there, installed
correctly, and properly secured.
9. The PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE table starts on page 0035-1. It is set up so that you can make your Before
operation checks as you walk around the semitrailer.
10. When you do your PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, look for items that appear in the blocks, "Equipment is not
ready." If any of these faults are noted, do not operate your semitrailer until the repairs are made.
0034-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0034
FLUID LEAKAGE
It is necessary for you to know how fluid leakage affects the status of the HET. Following are types/classes of leakages you
need to know in able to determine the status of the HET. Learn these leakage definitions and remember, when in doubt,
notify your supervisor. Equipment operation is allowed with minor leakage (Class I or II). Consideration must be given to
fluid capacity in the item/system being checked/inspected.
When in doubt, notify your supervisor. When operating with Class I or II leaks, continue to check fluid levels as required in
the PMCS. Class III leaks should be reported immediately to your supervisor.
1. Class I
Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great enough to form drops.
2. Class II
Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops, but not enough to cause drops to drip from item being checked/inspected.
3. Class III
Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from item being checked/inspected.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0034-3/4 blank

K

+ G
M
References Equipment Condition
WP 0004 Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
set up (WP 0004)
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) for HET

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE .1#(5"815 NOT READY/
ITEM
57 INTERVAL
$ CHECKED PROCEDURES 5
AVAILABLE
NO.
$# OR SERVICES >
IF:
' G Q [
q
Y

' Q [
2-@82
' R

++++
% Q=
K
K

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) - CONTINUED
EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE NOT READY/
ITEM INTERVAL CHECKED PROCEDURES AVAILABLE
NO. OR SERVICES IF:
% G ] "#
#

.

5I1575

% ]
2-@82
' +R

% ++Q=

_ ++?
#+++?

++++++
K

K
EQUIPMENT
NO. OR SERVICES IF:
_ G L J "#

#

m

.

5I1575

_ L J
2-@82
' +?
+
+++++ Q= +

+
+++++ +R
+++++++Q=+++++++ $
K
K

EQUIPMENT
NO. OR SERVICES IF:
# G UK Q "#
`
Q RRR
+=
J 8

t %.8

J

a
t %.8
6

a

+
+• If the gooseneck is lowered to the lowest position, the
++oil level in the APU will appear low on +dipstick. If the
+ oil is visible on the dipstick, the APU may be started to
+ adjust the gooseneck to normal running height.
+• Prior to checking the fluid levels on the semitrailer,
++both the gooseneck and the platform must be placed at
++ normal running height for accurate readings.

# Q `
2-@82
' Q= UK
KN

K
EQUIPMENT
NO. OR SERVICES IF:
4 Continued APU Coolant +R +
Level +++++
Q=
=
Q= UK
& G UK H ` Q RRR
=

& H+`
2-@82
' Y

@=A =
++++ UK
% R UK =
_
+++++ " ]]+
++++++++ K`` =
++++ ]H ZH
KK
K

EQUIPMENT
NO. OR SERVICES IF:
/ G UK > Q RRR
= =

/ > =
2-@82
' R = =
+++++

+++++ Q=
% ?
j G AUK = Q RRR
=

j UK =
2-@82
' Q= UK =
+++++ R

+
++++++++ = + =
+
+ + R for
++++
++++++++++i = +++
KJ

K
EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
8 Before APU Fuel Filter Any Class III
Assembly leaks exist.
Figure 8. APU Fuel Filter Assembly.

2-@82
' { =
+++++a .++++
% R
+++++
K
K


EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
w G UK G "# G

=
^

^+
$
"# $#
=

"# $#
!
'

w UK G
K

K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
2-@82
' ? UK
++++++? $ =
++++++++
++++ { =
++++++++ =

=
+++++++++
%++R

++++ +
'V G UK G ++++

=

'V UK Belt.
2-@82
' Q=
++++ R =
++++++++= +

'' G UK ?

'' UK ?

2-@82
' Q= UK

++++AUK
K
K


EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
'% G UK Q G Q

UK

H

'&

'% UK Q G UK
2-@82
' R UK

+++++c
+++++ ? UK LY witch
++++++++ o
=

% ? LY H
++++ [`HJ+ LY
_ ?
+++++LY H
# L UK.
K

K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
ITEM INTERVAL NOT READY/
CHECKED PROCEDURES
NO. AVAILABLE
OR SERVICES
IF:
'_ G U Q RRR
"# =
K @UKA
+?
+
+
J 8

A.8
i
!

J

2-@82
' Q= d

+++++= =++ UK UK
+

++++ Q= UK
+++++++++ =
++++ ? UK
++++++++
% ` UK

K
K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
'# G L
Q =
The hydraulic component/system inspection is a multiple Q RRR

point inspection that must be performed each time a =
hydraulic component/item is encountered.

'_ L
Q
2-@82
' R

+++++k

+++ +s
+ +
% Q= = =
++++++
_ R
++++

++++
K

K
EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
'& G R Q

• The electrical/air system component and system =

inspections on the semitrailer are multiple inspections
that must be performed each time an electrical/air
system component is encountered. [
=
• It is possible to have what sounds like an air leak
coming from air frame weldments that are not part of

the air system and is not a deadline. =

=

t
++++++++++++++
'# R Q
2-@82
' R
++++

% R
++++= `=

++++
_ R

++++

=

# Q
K

K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
>
'/ G U U

q
U =

<

'& U U
2-@82
' ? =
+

+++++
% Q=
=
+++++

'j G L
`

'/ L `

2-@82
' R

+++++
<

% Y

_ H =
+++++

K
N

K
EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
'; G [ = U Q RRR
Cylinder =
]

'j [ = U Q
2-@82
' R
=

++++
= +
++++ +
K
K
K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
'w G { `

=

( L

=
++ @`?]A

( =
=

++

++++++++
'; { `

2-@82
' `=

+++++

+

+++++ =

+++++ `=

+++++ H

+

++++++++++ =
+++++
+++++ ?
=

++++++++++ = =

K
J

K
EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
%V Before L

Q
GRR

'w L
Q
2-@82
' +R

+++++

++++++ R GRR @JU+V'/wA
++++++ Y GRR

++++++++++
K

K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
%' G U <Q

Y

`
?
q

<

=

q

=

RLH

=q
=

%V U <Q
Y

a `
? <
2-@82
'++R _#
<

++++

+++++ R

++++++++++

+++++ R
RLH =
+++++++++

K

K

EQUIPMENT
ITEM TO BE
NOT READY/
G=

NO. OR SERVICES
IF:
%% G G= Y
{<]
Q=

%' G= Y {<]
Q=
2-@82
' Q= = =

+++++ Q= =
++++++++++

% ?

++++
_ U =
+++++ ++=
+++++ U
++++++++++=

K

K

ITEM TO BE EQUIPMENT
CHECKED NOT READY/
ITEM INTERVAL PROCEDURES
OR SERVICES AVAILABLE
NO.
IF:
%_ G L

L
J

Q RRR
=
J

The suspension system consists of ten assemblies that
require multiple-point inspections each time a
component/item is encountered.

%% L L
2-@82
' R
++++d +
++++d = + +<=
++++= ++= +

+++ ++++
K

K
CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
%# G L

R {

Q RRR
=

%_ L L
2-@82
' R
++++
=
+++++

++++ ?
+++++++++ @
++++++++++A
K
K

CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
%& G J

H

%# a J
2-@82
' R =

+++++ +f
+
++++++( ++
A
+++++ ?

+++++ R =
+++++ R +
+++++++++c
+++++ R

+++++ L=
++++++++++o $
K

K
CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
%/ G L
"# =
=

+ Q RRR
=
.

The steering installation consists of four steering
plates and interconnecting linkages that
require multiple-point inspections each time
a component/item is encountered.

%& L
R
K
K

CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
2-@82
' Q=

= =
=

+++++ Q=

+
+++++++++ = +
++
+++++++++
Y L Y

%j G

`

`

%/ Y L `

2-@82
' R

++++
<

% H =

++++

_ ?
# Q=

++++
++++
& ? = o
++++
KN

K
CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
%; G L [

%j L [
2-@82
' Q=

%w G Q

%; L [
2-@82
' R = =
++++

KK
K

CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
_V G ]

%w ]
2-@82
' R = =
+++++

KJ

K
NOT READY/
ITEM INTERVAL CHECKED PROCEDURES
NO.
IF:
_' G ] U
]
L

_V ] U
2-@82
'+R
++++

++++ ?

++++ R +
++++++++
_% G `
Y Y@A

Y

_' `
Y
K
K

CHECKED NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
2-@82
' R <

+

++++ `

++++ ?
+
+++++++ < + s

+++++++
_3 G L G=

q
L =
=

_% L G=
2-@82
' R =

++++

++++ +? =
+ @ A +
++++++++ + + =
++++ Q= =
++++++++ + + ir +
++++++++ ++
K

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
_4 G > Q RRR
Q " =
]

?

__ > Q "
2-@82
' R r l=
+++++d

% ?
+++++
=

_ H JU+VVV#
#++Q= =
+++++c

++++
_5 G > Q RRR
U [
=
H

_# > U [

2-@82
' R

+++++=

K
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
% =
=
++++

+++++ R

+
++++++++

_+ R
++++
= RKZ
++++ + L>KH
+++ @ + A
+++
_6 G > Q RRR
U =

_& > U

2-@82
' R i
+++++a =
_7 G L

_/ L
2-@82
' +R
+++++ R =
++++++++
K

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
_8 G U 2-@82
K L
' +R
L
+++++ R =
+++++ R

++++++++++b
39 ]
Q [
q

+

_j Q [
2-@82
' R

++++
% Q=
K
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
#0 ]
] "#
#

.

5I1575

_; ]
2-@82
'++R

% +Q=

_ +?
#++?

+++++
K

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
#1 ]
"# Q RRR
U =
K @UKA ?

J 8

%.8
m
p !

J

l

l

2-@82
' Q=
+++++e = lu = f+ UK
++++ UK

% Q= UK
+++++ =
_ ? UK
# ` UK

#2 ]
R
Q =
J The electrical/air
system component and system
inspections on the semitrailer are multiple inspections
that must be performed each time an electrical/air
system component is encountered.
• It is possible to have what sounds like an air leak
coming from air frame weldments that are not part
of the air system and is not a dead+line.
2-@82
' Q .
% ` =
K
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
#3 ]
U U U =
U

_w U U
2-@82
' Q=
=
++++

#4 ]
Suspension 2-@82 "
LSystem
' Q=

++++ = $
$
++++ Y JU VV%#
+++++++++
#5 ]
J "
<

#V <J
2-@82
' Q=
++++
+
++++
+ H +
++++ + +
++++ +++
+++++
KN

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
Y
< +
+
+Y
++++++@JU VVjj
JU VV;'A +
+ @JU VV%#A
#6 ]
L G=

q
L =
=

#' L G=
2-@82
' R =
++++

++++ ? =
+ @ A
++++++++ +
+++++++++=
++++ C= =
++++++++
+++++++++ +
KK
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
#7 ]
> R
U

#% > U

2-@82
' Q=

+
+++++ R
+
++ +
KJ

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
#8 L a
[

#_ L+ [
2-@82
' R

++++

++++
49 U Q RRR
K @UKA =

## UK
2-@82
' { =
+++++ il
+++++
+++++ R
++++++++++
K
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&0 L
J

`=

#& L
J

2-@82
' K @JU+VV'_A
% Q=

+=
++++ Y = = +

&1 [ = Q RRR

U =
Q

#/ [ = U Q
2-@82
' R
=
++++

=
++++
++++
K

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&2 { `

#j { `

2-@82
' `=

++++

++++ + =

++++ `=

+++++++++
K
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&3 = ]
Q= `

#; Lanyards
2-@82
' U iv =
++++=

++++

KN

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&4 L

L
Q RRR
J
=

J
c
a

The suspension system consists of ten assemblies that
require multiple-point inspections each time a
component/item is encountered.

#w L L
2-@82
' R
++++
++++ + =
++++ + +<=
=
++++++= +

++++ ++++
KN
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&5 L

R {

Q RRR
=

&V L L
2-@82
' R
++++ it
=
++++

++++ ?
+++++++++ @
++++++++++A
KN

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&6 a J

H

&' + J
2-@82
' R =

+
@ ++
A
+++++ ?

+++++ R =
+++++ R
++++++++++
+++++ R

+++++ L=
++++++++++ $
KN
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&7 L
"# Q RRR
=
.

The steering installation consists of four
steering plates and interconnecting linkages
that require multiple-point inspections
each time a component/item is encountered.

&% L

2-@82
' Q=

++++ =
mountings.
KNN

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
&8 L [

&_ L [
2-@82
' Q=

59 Q

&# Q
2-@82
' R = =
+++++

KNK
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
/0 ]

&& ]
2-@82
' R = =
++++

KNJ

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
/1 ] U
]
L

&/ ] U ] L
2-@82
' R

++++ ?

++++ R +

/2 > Q RRR

Q " =
]

&j > Q "
2-@82
' R
+++++=

+++++
% ?
++++
=

KN
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
/3 >
R {

&; > R {
2-@82
' R
++++
=
++++ + YKZ
+++++ L>KH
++++@ + A
/4 > Q RRR
U =

&w > U

2-@82
' R
+++++ =
KN

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
/5 J= "#
% :

!
+?* )? / :

7?***

Always check the air pressure before moving the
M1000 semitrailer and when the tires are cold. During
use, tires generate heat, which increases pressure
and will provide an inaccurate reading.

/V
2-@82
' Q= @
A
+++++

% R w& &
@/&& =U _# =UA +

l

'V++
KN
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
/6 | L

/'
2-@82
' " = c

G + +
% U = @JU VV_jA
%+ + @&' A
KK

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
/7 | L

/% L
2-@82
' R
++++ R =
++++++++
KK
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
68 "#
[ =
U
R
$'( !

( $'( #
$'( $(#

/_ [ = U
R
2-@82
' Q=
++++
= =+@JU+VVj_A
++++ Y

% Y ilter
+++++=
@JU VVj%A
KK

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
69 nnual U

> R +
R
++++++++
/# U > R
2-@82
' Q= + =
+fing, = @JU+V'%#+ < JUV'%&A
+++++
% Y

_ Y ilter
=+@JU+VV#_A
+++ @JU+V'/_A
# +Q=
+++++ i
= +

+++++ fing =
+++++ Y
@JU+V'%#A
+++++++++
KK
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
j0 G= ]
G= L

/& G= ] G= L
2-@82
' Q= = =
<
T =
@JU VVj&A + R]
'%_j& @_'#__+A = @JU VV/;A
++++++
+++++ ++V#/ @''j A =
% R lu

=
=
Y + =
++++ +@JU VV/;A
KKN

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
j1 L

L

" f

//++L + +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
1. Check the ultra bushing for signs of deterioration and

fraying of the urethane part of the bushing on all ten
suspension assemblies.
2. Straighten two corners of each lock plate if the
urethane portions of the ultra bushing are frayed.
3. Remove four capscrews, two lock plates, and the
trunnion cap from the ultra bushing.
4. Use a knife to trim all the frayed strands off of the ultra
bushing.
a. If a gap of 0.125 in. (0.32 cm) or more exists
between the urethane and either metal shell at the top
of the ultra bushing, notify sustainment
maintenance.
5. After the trimming is complete, install a trunnion cap
and secure with two lock plates and four capscrews.
KKK
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
++++ K @JU V'/wA+ +
++++++++ %_V %&V $ @_'%++__w+ZA
/ G =

+++++ l
++++
j% J + "#
SOLVENT CLEANING COMPOUND

(DRY CLEANING SOLVENT)
solvent cleaning compound.
KKJ
Driver
1. Disassemble the wheel assemblies (WP 0075).
0035-56

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:

/j++J+
+
+ 2. Clean the bearings, hubs, and spindles with dry cleaning
solvent (WP 0170).
3. Inspect any parts that were removed for wear, scoring

and discoloration, scratches, and burrs.
4. Repack the bearings with grease (WP 0170).
73 Annually Lug Nuts and

Lug Studs

/;++`
+Z+ +`
+Ls.
1. Check all lug nuts and lug studs for proper torque of
450 to 500 lb-ft (610 to 678 Nm).
a. Use a torque wrench (WP 0169) to torque all lug

nuts and lug studs as required if loose
(WP 0078, WP 0079, WP 0080, or WP 0081).
0035-57
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
j4 L
L G

'VV +@#&#+=
A

/w L L G

2-@82
' R =

@JU VV;VA
%

s
'VV
@#&# =
A +
_ R 'VV @#&# =
A
= +

++++++ + <
+ ++
=
++++ Y

wV

# R V%& @V/ A
++++
++++=++ @JU VV/&A
j5 Platform 2-@82

Weldment ' Q= =
++++=
++++
++++
++++ Y @JU 0147)
++++ Y
++++++++

KK
K

0035
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
j6 G "#
( "

" s la
' !
'

J #

.

5I1575

jV G
KK
0035

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
2-@82
' ] @JU VV&_A
%++Q=
+++++ Y +f
+ +@JU V'jVA
_ @JU V'jVA
# +Y @JU VV&_A
& +R

+
/ { =
+++++ R
+ +
+ ++
j Q=
i
+ @JU+VV/wA++Y " w$/'#V$%VV$'#
77 Annually Gooseneck '++Q=++

=+ + + + +
+
Hydraulics + + = + + +
++
++=
%++Y+ + ++

++@JU V''/A
KJ

0035

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
78 > = "#

'+Y+ =++@JU V'%_A
KJ
0035

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:

j' > raulic Tank.
1+Remove tank filter (WP 0123).

++
%+Q +++
+ +
+
++@JU V'jVA+++ ++
++
_++Y++++
++
+@JU+VV#_A+
#++Q=++ +
+++
+ +++
+@JU+V'jVA
+++++
KJ

0035
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
79 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++"#
$'( !

( $'( #
$'( $(#

j%
2-@82
' Y
o

++++ J +
@JU V'jVA
KJ
K

K
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
;0 H

j_ H
2-@82
'+Q
@JU V'_%A
+++++Y
+@JU+V'_%A
KJN

0035
ITEM INTERVAL CHECKED PROCEDURES NOT READY/
NO. OR SERVICES AVAILABLE
IF:
;' "#
$'( !

( $'( #
$'( $(#

j4
2-@82
' Y
o

++++ J +
@JU V'jVA
KJK
K

NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
+;2 F = "#
Fuel is flammable. To avoid serious injury, keep all

smoking materials, sparks, or open flames away from
the fuel tank and fuel system.

j& =
2-@82
' Q @JU V'jVA
Y +++
+@JU+V'_jA
%+ Q= =
+ @JU+V'_jA
++++++ @JU+V'jVA
KJJ

0035
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
;3 G

j/ G
2-@82
'+Q= @JU V'#_A
+++++++Q=
+++++++ ++ (WP 0143).
KJ
K

0035
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
;4 ~
"#

1. Clean the kingpin wear surfaces using rags and dry

cleaning solvent (WP 0170).
0035-68

0035
NOT READY/
NO.
IF:
Figure 77. Kingpin.
2. Inspect the condition of the kingpin.
3. Notify sustainment maintenance that the kingpin must

be replaced if any of the following conditions exist:
a. Uneven wear on one or more sides of the kingpin

wear surface resulting in wear of 1/8 in. (0.32 cm)
over 1/4 of circumference of the kingpin.
b. Even wear over the kingpin surface causing the

diameter to be reduced by 1/8 in. (0.32 cm).
c. A crack of any size is noted anywhere on the kingpin.
d. A nick, chip, or gouge deeper than 1/4 in. (0.64 cm)

is found anywhere on the kingpin wear surface.
KJ
0035

NOT READY/
PROCEDURE
NO.
IF:
;5 L++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++

j; L
2-@82
' R
+++++ R =
++++++++++
;6 +U+ 2-@82
K
' R
+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
L L ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
+++++ R =
++++++++++
+++++ R
++++++++++ +

"+ +#
K
CHAPTER 5
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FOR

TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL
INITIAL SETUP: References
Tools and Special Tools WP0006

General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (GMTK) (WP 0168, Item 11) WP0007
Strobe Light Assembly (WP 0169, Item 37) WP 0008
Warning Light Kit (WP 0169, Item 38) WP 0009
WP 0010
Materials/Parts WP 0011
Antifreeze (WP 0170, Item 2) WP 0012
Strap, Tiedown, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 33) WP 0013
Rag, Wiping, Cotton (WP 0170, Item 23) WP 0035
Tape, Insulation, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 35) WP 0053
WP 0087
1 WP 0137
WP 0142
WP 0163
DD Form 6
DA PAM 738-750
TM 9-2330-381-24P
WP 00169
GENERAL
This work package contains instructions for unpacking, inspection/servicing, and operational checks of the Heavy Equipment
Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0036-1
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
UNPACKING
NOTE
Check the information on all of the storage and shipment labels on the semitrailer,
and then remove the labels.
1. Remove documents from platform stowage compartment (Figure 1, Item 6).
2. Cut and remove steel strapping (Figure 1, Item 1) from two spare tires (Figure 1, Item 7), four wheel chocks (Figure 1,
Item 2) (two mounted on each side of gooseneck), and Basic Issue Items/On Vehicle Equipment (BII/OVE) shipping box
(Figure 1, Item 3).
3. Ensure safety chains (Figure 1, Item 5) of loading ramps (Figure 1, Item 4) are properly connected to platform (WP 0009).
4. Cut and remove steel strapping (Figure 1, Item 1) from each loading ramp (Figure 1, Item 4).
5. Open wooden BII/OVE shipping box (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove, unwrap, and inspect each item as it is unpacked.
Remove preservative materials from items using wiping rag (WP 0170).
6. Inspect items for rust, corrosion, or damage. Discard individual wrappings and cushioning materials. Retain shipping box
(Figure 1, Item 3) for future use.
7. Refer to BII (WP 0169) and OVE listings to inventory all items removed from shipping box (Figure 1, Item 3) and/or
items shipped mounted on semitrailer. Report missing items in accordance with DA PAM 738-750. Report damaged
items on DD Form 6, Packaging Improvement Report.
Figure 1. Semitrailer Platform.
0036-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
8. Install two shackles (Figure 2, Item 9) on recovery eyes (Figure 2, Item 2) at rear of semitrailer platform (Figure 2, Item 8).
9. Alter crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) using pedestal grinder (GMTK) to scribe three platform height markings as follows:
a. Make first mark at 34 in. (86 cm) from knife edge of crowbar.
b. Make second mark at 43 in. (109 cm) from knife edge of crowbar.
c. Make third mark at 50 in. (127 cm) from knife edge of crowbar.
d. Repaint grinded areas as required.
10. Unfasten linch pin (Figure 2, Item 5) and remove hitch pin (Figure 2, Item 7) from mounting bracket (Figure 2, Item 6) at
rear of platform (Figure 2, Item 8) beneath loading ramps (Figure 2, Item 1).
11. Install crowbar (Figure 2, Item 4) and isolation valve handle extension (Figure 2, Item 3) in mounting brackets (Figure 2,
Item 6).
12. Reinstall hitch pin (Figure 2, Item 7) and secure with linch pin (Figure 2, Item 5).
Figure 2. Rear of Semitrailer.
0036-3
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
13. Remove preservative material from pistons of two gooseneck pivot cylinders (Figure 3, Item 5), two gooseneck-mounted
steering cylinders (Figure 3, Item 6), and two platform-mounted steering cylinders (Figure 3, Item 3) with wiping rag
(WP 0170).
14. Lower both front support legs (Figure 3, Item 4) and rear support legs (Figure 3, Item 2). Refer to WP 0011 and WP 0012.
15. Remove preservative material from support leg extensions using a wiping rag (WP 0170).
16. Return both front support legs (Figure 3, Item 4) and rear support legs (Figure 3, Item 2) to stowed position (WP 0011
and WP 0012).
17. Remove tape from around dummy couplings (Figure 3, Item 1) and gladhand connections (Figure 3, Item 7). Discard tape.
Figure 3. Gooseneck and Steering Cylinders.
0036-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
18. Secure following components from the Warning Light Kit (WP 0169):
• Lockwasher (2)
• Clamp
• Pole Mount Bracket
• L-Bracket
• Triangle Plate
• Adapter (2)
• Ground Cable Assembly
• Pipe
• Bolt (3)
• Bolt (2)
• Bolt (2)
• Lead (2)
• Cable Assembly
19. Secure following components from the Strobe Light Assembly (WP 0169):
• Strobe Light Assembly
• Screw (3)
• Gasket
• Locknut (3)
0036-5
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
20. Disconnect intervehicular cable from semitrailer (WP 0013).

21. Assemble clamp (Figure 4, Item 3), L-bracket (Figure 4, Item 4), and pole mount bracket (Figure 4, Item 5) with two bolts
(Figure 4, Item 7) and lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 6).
CAUTION
Ensure the clamp does not contact the lens on the vehicular bar lamp or damage to the lens may result.
22. Install three bolts (Figure 4, Item 2) on clamp (Figure 4, Item 3).
23. Install entire clamp assembly (Figure 4, Item 3) (single mounting bolt side up) onto lower edge of vehicular bar lamp mount
(Figure 4, Item 8) between streetside and center lamps (Figure 4, Item 1). Tighten three bolts (Figure 4, Item 2) evenly.
Figure 4. Semitrailer Light.
0036-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
CAUTION
Ensure the leads are not crimped in between the light and gasket or damage to leads may result.
24. Install beacon warning light (Figure 5, Item 1) and gasket (Figure 5, Item 4) onto triangle plate (Figure 5, Item 3).
25. Secure beacon warning light (Figure 5, Item 1) with three screws (Figure 5, Item 5) and locknuts (Figure 5, Item 2).
Figure 5. Beacon Warning Light.

26. Use hacksaw (WP 0168) to cut pipe (Figure 6, Item 1) to length of 2.5 in. (6.4 cm) including threads.
Figure 6. Pipe.
0036-7
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
27. Thread pipe (Figure 7, Item 5) into bottom of triangle plate (Figure 7, Item 6). Tighten pipe.
28. Insert pipe (Figure 7, Item 5) into pole mount bracket (Figure 7, Item 4).
29. With wires (Figure 7, Item 2) facing toward front of semitrailer, tighten two screws (Figure 7, Item 3) to secure beacon
warning light (Figure 7, Item 1).
Figure 7. Beacon Warning Light.
0036-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
NOTE
Ensure the intervehicular cable (electrical cable) is not connected to the semitrailer.
30. Remove four capscrews (Figure 8, Item 2), lockwashers (Figure 8, Item 3), and access cover (Figure 8, Item 8) from
streetside deflector (Figure 8, Item 1).
NOTE
Ensure the side clearance light wire is disconnected from the harness. Move the access cover,
with the clearance light installed, out of the way.
31. For incandescent lights, remove locknut (Figure 8, Item 7), lockwasher (Figure 8, Item 6), and clamp loop (Figure 8,
Item 5) securing harness (Figure 8, Item 4) to deflector (Figure 8, Item 1). Discard locknut and lockwasher.
32. Reinstall clamp loop (Figure 8, Item 5) without harness (Figure 8, Item 4).
Figure 8. Incandescent Lights.

33. For light emitting diode (LED) lights, remove center connector (Figure 9, Item 2) from connector clip (Figure 9, Item 1).
Figure 9. LED Lights.
0036-9
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
34. Disconnect clearance light wire No. 489 (Figure 10, Item 6) from harness wire No. 21-489 (Figure 10, Item 12).
35. Install jumper lead (Figure 10, Item 10) and adapter (Figure 10, Item 11) on harness wire No. 21-489 (Figure 10, Item 12).
NOTE
Perform steps 36 through 39 to install the ground lead on an incandescent light.
36. Remove two screws (Figure 10, Item 5) and lens cover (Figure 10, Item 4) from rear clearance light (Figure 10, Item 2).
37. Remove screw (Figure 10, Item 3), locknut (Figure 10, Item 9), and lockwasher (Figure 10, Item 8) from rear clearance
light (Figure 10, Item 2) and streetside deflector (Figure 10, Item 1). Discard lockwasher and locknut.
NOTE
Ensure the ground lead is in contact with bare metal and is positioned not to interfere
with the installation of the access cover.
38. Install screw (Figure 10, Item 3), ground lead (Figure 10, Item 7), lockwasher (Figure 10, Item 8), and locknut (Figure 10,
Item 9) on streetside deflector (Figure 10, Item 1) and rear clearance light (Figure 10, Item 2).
39. Install lens cover (Figure 10, Item 4) on rear clearance light (Figure 10, Item 2) with two screws (Figure 10, Item 5).
Figure 10. Incandescent Lights.
0036-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
NOTE
Perform steps 40 through 44 to install the ground lead on a LED light.
40. Remove locknut (Figure 11, Item 2) and screw (Figure 11, Item 8) from bottom mount hole of connector clip (Figure 11,
Item 6). Discard locknut.
NOTE
Ensure the ground lead is in contact with bare metal and is positioned not to interfere
with the installation of the access cover.
41. Install screw (Figure 11, Item 8), ground lead (Figure 11, Item 3), and locknut (Figure 11, Item 2) to bottom mount
hole of connector clip (Figure 11, Item 6).
42. Insert adapter (Figure 11, Item 4) into center of connector clip (Figure 11, Item 5).
43. Install access cover (Figure 11, Item 1) on streetside deflector (Figure 11, Item 7) with four lockwashers (Figure 11,
44. Return remaining items removed from shipping box to unit supply.
Figure 11. LED Lights.

END OF TASK
0036-11
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION/SERVICING
CHECKING UNPACKED EQUIPMENT
1. Gain access to Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) on gooseneck (WP 0035).

2. Check tag on APU crankcase dipstick to determine if oil requires changing. If required, change oil and filter (WP 0163).
3. Remove tag from radiator neck (Figure 12, Item 2).
4. Check coolant level (WP 0142) and replenish, if required, with equal parts of water and antifreeze (WP 0170).
WARNING
If Nuclear, Biological, or Chemical (NBC) exposure is suspected, all air filter media should be handled by
personnel wearing protective equipment. Consult your unit NBC Officer or NBC NCO for appropriate
handling or disposal instructions. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
5. Remove wingnut (Figure 12, Item 1), grommet (Figure 12, Item 8), air cleaner cover (Figure 12, Item 7), and air filter
(Figure 12, Item 6) from air inlet (Figure 12, Item 5). Remove tape and paper from opening of air inlet.
6. Remove tape from exhaust pipe opening under rain cap (Figure 12, Item 4).
7. Remove tag from fuel filter petcock (Figure 12, Item 3).
8. Remove fuel filter element and drain preservative oil into drain pan. Install new filter element. Refer to WP 0137.
Figure 12. Inspection/Servicing.

9. Drain fuel tank (WP 0136).
10. Refill APU fuel tank with proper grade of fuel (WP 0163).
0036-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0036
WARNING
DO NOT wear watches, rings, or other jewelry that could short out the battery terminals while servicing
the battery. DO NOT smoke or use open flames around the battery. The battery may explode from a
spark. Battery acid is harmful to skin and eyes. Wear protective goggles to prevent injury to personnel
when working with battery. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
11. Remove forward step assembly (Figure 13, Item 5) from gooseneck (Figure 13, Item 6) to gain access to battery
(Figure 13, Item 2). Refer to WP 0087.
12. Cut and remove steel strapping (Figure 13, Item 3) from battery (Figure 13, Item 2).
13. Remove battery filler caps (Figure 13, Item 4) and barrier material.
14. Check level of electrolyte with hydrometer (GMTK). Top off fluid level with distilled water.
15. Charge battery, if required, using battery charger (GMTK).
16. Replace filler caps (Figure 13, Item 4).
17. Inspect and clean battery terminals and cables (Figure 13, Item 1). Reconnect battery cables. Refer to WP 0053.
18. Perform monthly (M) lubrication (WP 0163).
19. Perform semiannual (S) and annual (A) Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services (PMCS) (WP 0035).
Figure 13. Inspection/Servicing.

END OF TASK
0036-13
0036 TM 9-2330-381-13
OPERATIONAL CHECKS
PRELIMINARY CHECKS and ADJUSTMENT of EQUIPMENT
NOTE
Perform the following checks and observe for binding, jerky movement, and unusual noises. If any
malfunction occurs, stop the operation and investigate the cause. If after all checks have been completed
the semitrailer does not malfunction, the semitrailer is ready for full operation
.
1. Perform operator/crew before (B) PMCS (WP 0035).
2. Start and run APU to remove preservative oil. Run APU at half throttle until remaining preservative oil has run through
fuel system. When engine operation (running) smooths out and excessive smoking stops, proceed with remaining checks
(WP 0005 or WP 0006).
3. Adjust gooseneck (WP 0007).
4. Adjust platform height (WP 0008).
5. Operate spring ramps (WP 0009).
6. Couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013).
7. Operate manual steering (WP 0010).
8. Tow semitrailer and adjust tracking (WP 0010).
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0036-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0037
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SERVICE BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools 5HIHUHQFHV
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (GMTK) (WP 0168, Item 11) WP0004
WP 0014
Materials/Parts
WP 0035
Locknut (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
TM 9-2320-360-10

3HUVRQQHO5HTXLUHG Equipment Conditions
2 Platform set at road height (WP 0008)
Semitrailer parked on level ground and coupled to tractor
(WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the service brake adjustment of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
0037-1
0037 TM 9-2330-381-13
SERVICE BRAKE ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
When the semitrailer has performed heavy braking, the brake drums may be hot to the touch. Use caution
and DO NOT come into contact with the brake drum when checking for heat. Allow the brake drum to cool
before performing maintenance. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
Brake adjustments are mandatory after installing new brakes or performing maintenance on the brakes.
Brake adjustments must also be accomplished if any of the following conditions exist:
• The slack adjusters are not level with each other when the brakes are applied.
• The brake chamber clevis moves more than 2 in. (5.1 cm) from fully released condition
to fully engaged condition (WP 0035).
NOTE
• Regardless of the position of the tractor’s TRAILER AIR SUPPLY valve knob, the tractor will NOT be able to
supply air to the semitrailer’s air tanks if the tractor’s PARKING BRAKE knob is pulled out (parking brakes set).
• Brake adjustments must be done after the suspension assembly has been completely reassembled and
air pressure has been restored to the system or an improper adjustment may be made.
1. Chock wheels on both tractor and semitrailer. Inside cab of tractor, push in black knob for PARKING BRAKE and red
knob for TRAILER AIR SUPPLY (TM 9-2320-360-10).
CAUTION
Brake adjustments require that the semitrailer air tanks be fully charged to ensure that each
brake chamber push rod is fully retracted. With less than a fully charged system, the brakes
may release, but not fully retract, giving a false indication of the caged position. If the brakes
are not fully retracted, proper brake adjustment cannot be completed.
2. Allow tractor air system pressure gauge to reach 100 psi (689.5 kPa) (TM 9-2320-360-10). Wait an additional 10 minutes
to ensure semitrailer air system is fully charged and all brake chamber push rods are fully retracted.
3. Locate left-hand slack adjuster (Figure 1, Item 3), right-hand slack adjuster (Figure 1, Item 4), and parking/service brake
chamber (Figure 1, Item 2) on affected suspension assembly (Figure 1, Item 1).
0037-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0037
CAUTION
Ensure each locking ring moves freely in and out prior to adjusting the slack adjuster
4. Press in on locking ring (Figure 1, Item 6) on left-hand slack adjuster (Figure 1, Item 3). Using moderate force, turn
adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 5) counterclockwise as far as possible.
5. Press in on locking ring (Figure 1, Item 6) on right-hand slack adjuster (Figure 1, Item 4). Using moderate force, turn
adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 5) counterclockwise as far as possible.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until adjusting nuts (Figure 1, Item 5) on both left-hand and right-hand slack adjusters (Figure 1,
Item 3 and Item 4) cannot be turned counterclockwise any further. This ensures that both sets of brake shoes are firmly
in contact with each brake drum.
Figure 1. Slack Adjusters.
0037-3
0037 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. Ensure left-hand and right-hand slack adjusters (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 2) are approximately parallel to each other,
and mending plate (Figure 2, Item 5) is approximately parallel to the ground.
8. If slack adjusters (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 2) are parallel to each other, and mending plate (Figure 2, Item 5) is parallel
to the ground, proceed to step 9. If slack adjusters are not parallel to each other or mending plate is not parallel to
the ground, proceed as follows:
a. On highest slack adjuster (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 2), press in on locking ring (Figure 2, Item 3) and turn adjusting
nut (Figure 2, Item 4) clockwise until highest slack adjuster is only slightly higher than other slack adjuster.
b. On lowest slack adjuster (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 2), press in on locking ring (Figure 2, Item 3) and turn adjusting
nut (Figure 2, Item 4) counterclockwise until brake shoes are firmly against brake drum.
c. On highest slack adjuster (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 2), press in on locking ring (Figure 2, Item 3) and turn adjusting
nut (Figure 2, Item 4) counterclockwise until brake shoes are firmly against brake drum.
d. Repeat steps a, b, and c until both sets of brake shoes are firmly against brake drums, and mending plate (Figure 2,
Item 5) is approximately parallel to the ground.

9. Press in on locking ring (Figure 3, Item 4) and turn adjusting nut (Figure 3, Item 3) on both slack adjusters (Figure 3,
Item 1 and Item 2) one quarter turn clockwise. Brake shoes are now just clear of brake drums.
10. Measure distance from bottom of brake chamber bracket (Figure 3, Item 7) to top of straight headless pin (Figure 3,
Item 5) on clevis (Figure 3, Item 6) (Dimension A). Document measurement.
11. Apply semitrailer parking brakes by pulling out on knob of brake release valve (WP 0004).
12. Measure distance from bottom of brake chamber bracket (Figure 3, Item 7) to top of straight headless pin (Figure 3,
Item 5) on clevis (Figure 3, Item 6) (Dimension B). Document measurement.
13. If difference between two measurements taken is less than 1 in. (2.5 cm) and both slack adjusters (Figure 3, Item 1
and Item 2) are still approximately parallel to each other and the ground, brake adjustment is complete. If not, repeat
steps 4 through 12, as required.
14. After all adjustments have been completed, verify that locking ring (Figure 3, Item 4) on each slack adjuster (Figure 3,
Item 1 and Item 2) is popped outward to lock adjusting nut (Figure 3, Item 3). Rotate adjusting nut on either slack adjuster
counterclockwise until each locking ring has positively locked each adjusting nut, as required.
0037-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0037

END OF TASK
FOLLOW-ON MAINTENANCE
Operate and/or drive tractor/semitrailer to check for proper brake operation (WP 0014).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0037-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0038
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PLATFORM STEERING ALIGNMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (GMKT) (WP 0168, Item 11) WP 0014
Standard Army Tool Kit (SATS)
(WP 0168, Item 28) Equipment Conditions
Tractor/semitrailer coupled and tractor parking brakes
Personnel Required applied (WP 0013)
2 Platform adjusted to 43 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Front support legs lowered supporting platform (WP 0011)
References
Rear support legs lowered supporting platform (WP 0012)
WP 0004
WP 0010
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains platform steering alignment instructions for the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) semitrailer.
0038-1
0038 TM 9-2330-381-13
PLATFORM STEERING ALIGNMENT

1. Release semitrailer parking brakes by pushing inward on knob of parking brake valve (WP 0004).
NOTE
Steering stop blocks and associated hardware are not used on vehicles with manufacturer’s serial numbers 526 and
subsequent numbers. The manufacturer’s serial number is stamped in front of the platform’s main beam under the
gooseneck.
2. Document measurements of dimensions (Figure 1, Item 1) at both steering plate cylinder mounts (Figure 1, Item 3) to both
steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 2) stops or to ends of cylinders. Compare measurements.
3. If necessary, manually steer semitrailer (WP 0010) and recheck measurement. Steer bogies, as required, until both
measurements are the same, within 0.125 in. (0.3 cm).
Figure 1. Steering Cylinders.
0038-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0038
4. Document measurements of dimensions (Figure 2, Item 1) of both streetside and curbside longitudinal struts No. 3
(Figure 2, Item 3).
CAUTION
Before adjusting any of the longitudinal struts, the slack must be removed first. While adjusting the
longitudinal struts, the tension must be maintained or a proper alignment will not be achieved.
5. Using adjustable automotive wrench, loosen two locknuts (Figure 2, Item 2) and adjust both longitudinal struts No. 3
(Figure 2, Item 3) until struts are same length, within 0.125 in. (0.3 cm). Retighten locknuts.
Figure 2. Longitudinal Struts No. 3.
0038-3
0038 TM 9-2330-381-13
(Figure 3, Item 3).
0038-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0038
(Figure 4, Item 3).
0038-5
0038 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Both nonsteering bogies must be aligned prior to aligning the remaining steerable bogies. The measurement
must be taken from the rim of each nonsteering bogie’s inner/outer wheel to the longitudinal beam.
10. Document measurements of dimensions (Figure 5, Item 1, Item 3, Item 7, and Item 8) from foremost and rearmost points
on each inner/outer rim for both No. 1 (nonsteering) bogies (Figure 5, Item 4) to longitudinal beam (Figure 5, Item 2).
11. If necessary, loosen two bolts (Figure 5, Item 5) on each fixed connecting link (Figure 5, Item 6). Using an adjustable
automotive wrench, adjust connecting link so that streetside dimensions (Figure 5, Item 1 and Item 8) are equal and
curbside dimensions (Figure 5, Item 3 and Item 7) are equal.
12. Recheck measurements and document results. Once measurement is even for each rim, retighten two bolts
(Figure 5, Item 5) on each connecting link (Figure 5, Item 6).
13. Repeat steps 10 through 12 for both curbside and streetside bogies No. 2 through No. 5.
14. Apply semitrailer parking brakes by pulling out knob of parking brake valve (WP 0004).
Figure 5. Connecting Links.

END OF TASK
Drive tractor/semitrailer and check semitrailer tracking (WP 0014).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0038-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0039
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CHECK AND FLUID FILL
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools WP 0008
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) WP 0013
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) WP 0014
WP 0030
Materials/Parts
WP 0041
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4)
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 17) Equipment Conditions
Tractor coupled to semitrailer or gooseneck supported
Personnel Required
(WP 0013)
2
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) running (WP 0005)
References
WP 0005
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides instructions for the system check and the fluid fill of the Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
0039-1
0039 TM 9-2330-381-13
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CHECK AND FLUID FILL

System Check
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if the system has been in operation. Allow the system
to cool before performing maintenance.
• Hydraulic fluid may be under pressure. Use caution when disconnecting the hydraulic components.
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Wear long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face shield. If
hydraulic fluid gets into the eyes, flush them immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic
fluid gets on skin, thoroughly wash with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking.
NOTE
Perform steps 1 through 4 to check the hydraulic fluid level.
1. Park tractor/semitrailer on level ground with no side slopes (WP 0013).
2. Check platform height (WP 0008). Platform should be at normal road height of 43 in. (109 cm), and gooseneck should be
approximately 63 in. (160 cm).
NOTE
Fluid levels measure differently at different times due to hydraulic fluid temperature,
air in the system, or unlevel ground surface.
4. Check fluid level in hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 1). Fluid in indicator tube (Figure 1, Item 2) should measure within
FULL mark range on hydraulic tank decal (Figure 1, Item 3). If fluid level is above top line of FULL mark, system
is overfilled.
5. First check for proper gooseneck and platform heights (WP 0008). Readjust height if semitrailer is not properly adjusted.
Figure 1. Fluid Level.

0039-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0039
NOTE
If the fluid level is more than 1 in. (2.54 cm) over the top line of the FULL mark, perform steps 6 through 7.
6. Operate semitrailer (WP 0014) and check for sluggish or slow operation that may be caused by air trapped in hydraulic
system.
7. Bleed hydraulic system (WP 0041) if improper operations are found.
8. If all operations are normal and hydraulic fluid level is still high, proceed to step 9.
WARNING
On some semitrailers, a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in front of the
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on or trip
over the solar battery charger. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
One person should monitor the fluid level indicator while on top of the gooseneck while the other
person drains the fluid from the rear of the hydraulic control panel.
9. With aid of an assistant, drain fluid from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) by loosening hose fitting (Figure 2, Item 3)
at rear of hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 2).
10. Allow fluid to drain from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) into drain pan until fluid level is approximately in middle of
FULL mark.
11. Tighten hose fitting (Figure 2, Item 3).
12. If too much hydraulic fluid was drained, refill tank to proper level per FLUID FILL procedure on following page.
Figure 2. Fluid Drain.

END OF TASK
0039-3
0039 TM 9-2330-381-13
Fluid Fill
1. Park tractor/semitrailer on level ground with no side slopes (WP 0013).
2. Check platform height (WP 0008). Platform should be at normal road height of 43 in. (109 cm), and gooseneck should be
approximately 63 in. (160 cm).
WARNING
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on or trip
over the solar battery charger. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
If the fluid level is more than 1 in. (2.54 cm) below the bottom of the FULL mark, then fluid must
be added before operating the APU or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
If more than 1 in. (2.54 cm) of fluid must be added, check the entire hydraulic system
for leaks, and service the system as required.
4. Unhook latch (Figure 3, Item 1) and raise top step (Figure 3, Item 2) to gain access to hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 3).
5. Remove dirt from hydraulic tank breather cap (Figure 3, Item 4) and from top of hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 3).
NOTE
DO NOT let foreign material enter the hydraulic tank or touch the bottom of the breather cap.
6. Remove breather cap (Figure 3, Item 4). Minimize time breather cap is off of hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 3) and
replace cap immediately after filling is complete.
NOTE
Monitor the fluid level while filling the tank to prevent overfilling.
7. Use new/clean hydraulic fluid to fill tank until fluid in sight indicator (Figure 3, Item 5) reaches approximately center of
FULL mark.
8. Install breather cap (Figure 3, Item 4) to hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 3).
9. Lower step (Figure 3, Item 2) and secure by hooking latch (Figure 3, Item 1) to step.
0039-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0039
CAUTION
If fluid was added due to damage or repair, the hydraulic system must be bled. Recheck the fluid level
prior to operating any hydraulic controls or damage to equipment may result.
10. If loss of hydraulic fluid was caused by damage or a repair, air may have entered hydraulic system. Refer to WP 0041 and
bleed the affected hydraulic system.
11. If no repairs were made and more than 3 in. (7.6 cm) of fluid was added, or if fluid has been added daily, refer to
Troubleshooting (WP 0030) to determine the source of the leak.
Figure 3. Fluid Fill.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0039-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0040
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC TANK DRAINING
INITIAL SETUP:
References
Tools and Special Tools WP 0039
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (GMTK) WP 0041
(WP 0168, Item 11)
Equipment Conditions
Materials/Parts Gooseneck set at coupling height, 64 in. (163 cm)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) (WP 0007)
Pipe sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Front support legs lowered supporting platform (WP 0011)
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 17) Rear support legs lowered supporting platform (WP 0012)
Identification Tags (WP 0170, Item xx) Platform lowered onto, and firmly supported by, support
Personnel Required legs (WP 0008)
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for draining the hydraulic tank of the heavy Equipment Transporter (HET)
semitrailer.
0040-1
0040 TM 9-2330-381-13
HYDRAULIC TANK DRAINING
WARNING
the solar battery charger. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
WARNING
• The hydraulic fluid may be hot if the system has been in operation. Allow the system to cool before
performing maintenance.
• The hydraulic fluid may be under pressure. Use caution when disconnecting the hydraulic components.
CAUTION
Throughout this procedure, all fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening
to prevent dirt, moisture, or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system, or damage to equipment
may result.
NOTE
The hydraulic tank has a capacity of 16.5 gal. (62.5 l). With the platform at road height and the gooseneck at
coupling height, the hydraulic tank should contain approximately 8 gal. (30 l) of hydraulic fluid.
1. At rear of gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1), access top of hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 3) by unhooking step retainer
(Figure 1, Item 2) and raising top step (Figure 1, Item 4) toward streetside of gooseneck.
0040-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0040
2. While holding top step (Figure 1, Item 4) upright, unscrew and remove breather cap (Figure 1, Item 5) from hydraulic tank
(Figure 1, Item 3). Lower top step onto gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Breather Cap.

3. Unhook step retainer (Figure 2, Item 3) and pull upward on step section (Figure 2, Item 5). Continue to push step section
until step section contacts top step (Figure 2, Item 2).
4. Secure step section (Figure 2, Item 1) in upright position by attaching step retainer (Figure 2, Item 1) to metal strap
(Figure 2, Item 1) on step section.
0040-3
0040 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
The oil valve handle is shown in the OPEN position.
5. Pull handle of oil valve (Figure 2, Item 8) on hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) to close valve. Valve handle should appear
vertical to valve body of oil valve when in CLOSED position.
NOTE
The General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (GMTK) rolling tool cabinet should be placed directly beneath the hydraulic tank
oil valve under the gooseneck. This provides bench space on which to place the drain pan during this task.
6. Roll GMTK tool cabinet under gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 6) below oil valve (Figure 2, Item 8). Place drain pan with
opening in pan under oil valve.
Figure 2. Oil Valve Handle.

7. With assistant under gooseneck and using two wrenches, tag and disconnect hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 3) from straight
adapter (Figure 3, Item 4). Allow all fluid in hose to drain into drain pan. Install caps/plugs into all openings.
0040-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0040
WARNING
the solar battery charger. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
The steps 8 through 14 require two people to drain hydraulic fluid from the hydraulic tank. One person positioned on
the gooseneck at the hydraulic tank oil valve and the second person positioned under the gooseneck at the drain pan.
8. Remove cap/plug from hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 3) and insert end of hose into opening in drain pan.
9. Signal person on gooseneck to OPEN oil valve (Figure 3, Item 2) moving valve handle in line with valve body and
allow fluid to drain from hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 1).
10. Continually monitor fluid level in drain pan and, when drain pan is approximately full, signal person on gooseneck to
CLOSE oil valve (Figure 3, Item 2). Install caps/plugs into hose.
11. Dispose of hydraulic fluid in accordance with standard shop practices.
12. Position drain pan on tool cabinet with opening in drain pan under oil valve (Figure 3, Item 2).
13. Repeat steps 8 through 12 as required until all fluid that can be drained from this hose has been drained.
14. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 3) to straight adapter (Figure 3, Item 4).
Figure 3. Drain Valve.
0040-5
0040 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• The hydraulic tank has been sufficiently drained for maintenance to be performed on the system. If fluid change is
required due to contamination, proceed with step 15.
• Steps 15 through 21 require an assistant to empty the hydraulic tank.
15. Position rolling tool cabinet under semitrailer gooseneck so that cabinet is under Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) hydraulic
pump.
16. Position opening in drain pan centered under drain plug (Figure 4, Item 2) on bottom of hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 1),
located just aft of APU pump.
17. Move all hydraulic lines and electrical ground straps clear of fluid drain path.
18. With one person standing under gooseneck, remove drain plug (Figure 4, Item 2) from bottom of hydraulic tank
(Figure 4, Item 1).
19. Allow all fluid in hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 1), approximately 0.5 to 1.0 gl (1.9 to 3.8 l) of fluid, to drain into drain pan.
20. Inspect drain plug (Figure 4, Item 2) for contaminates, metal particles, and corrosion. Clean drain plug with clean
hydraulic fluid.
21. Apply pipe sealant to male threads of drain plug (Figure 4, Item 2) and install drain plug on hydraulic tank (Figure 4,
Item 1).
Figure 4. Drain Plug.

END OF TASK
Refill hydraulic tank as required (WP 0039).
Bleed hydraulic system as required (WP 0041).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0040-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0041
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Personnel Required
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) 3
Materials/Parts Equipment Conditions
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Tractor/semitrailer coupled and parked on level ground
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) (WP 0013)
Hose, Clear, 36 in. (91 cm) (2) Platform set at road height (WP 0008)
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) shut down (WP 0005)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for steering circuit bleeding, suspension circuit bleeding, and gooseneck circuit
bleeding.
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow system to cool before performing maintenance.
• Hydraulic fluid may be under pressure. Use caution when disconnecting hydraulic components.
CAUTION
• Throughout this procedure, all fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening
to prevent dirt and moisture or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system or damage to equipment
may result.
• To avoid premature failure of hydraulic components or system failure, bleeding of the hydraulic system must be
performed if one of the following conditions exists:
- A system leak, failure, maintenance, or repair that has drained fluid from the system or allowed air to
enter the system.
- Any symptom occurs that would be caused by air in the system such as steering off tracking, suspension, or
gooseneck drop.
NOTE
This bleed procedure can be done completely in the order listed. If a specific symptom or failure is
isolated to one area, then this procedure can be done in parts. Complete the parts necessary to bleed the
hydraulic system and remove all air.
0041-1
0041 TM 9-2330-381-13
STEERING CIRCUIT BLEEDING
WARNING
Prior to bleeding steering cylinders, all four support legs must be lowered and support the platform. Failure
1. Lower both front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
2. Release brakes on semitrailer by pushing inward on brake release valve (WP 0004).
3. Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).
4. Operate semitrailer steering (WP 0010) full left, full right, and back to center.
5. Place drain pan (Figure 1, Item 3) under curbside gooseneck on steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 2).
6. Attach a 36 in. (91 cm) tube (Figure 1, Item 4) to each bleed valve (Figure 1, Item 1). Point both tubes into drain pan
(Figure 1, Item 3).
7. Slowly open both bleed valves (Figure 1, Item 1) on curbside gooseneck steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 2).
WARNING
• To avoid injury to personnel when bleeding gooseneck steering cylinders, use two personnel to perform these
steps.
• One person is required to operate steering valve and a second person is required to check fluid/air flow out
of the bleed tubes.
NOTE
Apply only enough pressure on cylinders to force fluid/air out of cylinders. Do not allow steerable axles to move or
too much pressure has been applied.
8. Slowly operate steering valve for a right turn. Use caution not to turn any of the steerable axles. Observe fluid/air flow out
of one tube (Figure 1, Item 4). Continue to hold pressure on steering valve (WP 0004) until a steady stream of hydraulic
fluid flows out of tube for approximately 10 seconds; then, close that bleed valve (Figure 1, Item 1). Release steering valve.
9. Slowly operate steering valve for a left turn. Use caution not to turn any of the steerable axles. Observe fluid/air flow out of
other tube (Figure 1, Item 4). Continue to hold pressure on steering valve (WP 0004) until a steady stream of hydraulic fluid
flows out of other tube for approximately 10 seconds; then, close that bleed valve (Figure 1, Item 1). Release steering valve.
10. Remove both tubes (Figure 1, Item 4) from bleed valves (Figure 1, Item 1).
11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 for bleeding streetside gooseneck steering cylinder.
0041-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0041
WARNING
To avoid injury to personnel when bleeding platform steering cylinders, use three people to perform the
following steps. One person is required to operate the steering valve, a second person is required to check
fluid/air flow out of the bleed tubes, and a third person is required to relay signals between the other two.
12. Repeat steps 5 through 10 for bleeding curbside platform steering cylinder.
13. Repeat steps 5 through 10 for bleeding streetside platform steering cylinder.
14. Shut down APU (WP 0005) and check fluid level in hydraulic tank (WP 0041). Refill tank as necessary.
15. Release semitrailer brakes. Start APU (WP 0005). Turn on tractor clearance lights and manually steer full left and full
right several times and return steering to center. Steering pressure indicator light should not be lit.
16. If steering pressure indicator light is lit, re-bleed steering hydraulic system.
Figure 1. Bleed Valves, Curbside.
END OF TASK
0041-3
0041 TM 9-2330-381-13
SUSPENSION CIRCUIT BLEEDING

1. Start APU (WP 0005).
CAUTION
When lowering platform, do not allow suspension cylinders to be completely compressed or bottomed
out. Allow a minimum of 1 in. (2.5 cm) of cylinder plunger/piston rod to remain exposed or damage to
2. Operate all three suspension controls (WP 0008) and lower suspension to approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from being fully
lowered. Deck height should be approximately 34 in. (86 cm).
3. Raise platform (WP 0008) to approximately 52 in. (132 cm). This is approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) less than its maximum
height.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until platform operates smoothly (approximately 30 cycles).
NOTE
If tactical situations permit, allow semitrailer to sit undisturbed for 8 hours or overnight as outlined in step 5. If
not, skip step 5 and continue with step 7.
5. If semitrailer is allowed to sit undisturbed for 8 hours, continue as follows:
a. Evenly raise platform to a height of 52 in. (132 cm).
b. Shut down APU (WP 0005).
c. Allow trailer to sit for 8 hours or overnight.
d. If semitrailer has not settled, proceed to step 6. If semitrailer has settled, proceed to step e.
e. Start APU (WP 0005).
f. Repeat steps 2 and 3 approximately 15 cycles.
g. Repeat step 5.
6. Lower platform to normal road height (WP 0008) and shut down APU (WP 0005).
7. Perform gooseneck circuit bleeding.
8. Check hydraulic tank fluid level (WP 0039). Refill tank if necessary.
END OF TASK
0041-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0041
GOOSENECK CIRCUIT BLEEDING

1. Uncouple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013) and pull tractor out and away from gooseneck. Keep APU running after
uncoupling. Leave gooseneck isolation valve pulled out in ADJUST position.
2. Lower front support legs to the ground (WP 0011) to support platform.
3. Operate gooseneck valve and lower gooseneck to lowest position (WP 0007).
4. Operate gooseneck valve and raise gooseneck to highest position (WP 0007).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until gooseneck works smoothly (approximately 15 cycles).
6. Lower gooseneck to approximately 63 in. (160 cm) and couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013).
7. Raise front support legs (WP 0011).
8. Adjust platform to normal road height (WP 0008).
9. Shut down APU (WP 0005) and check fluid level in hydraulic tank (WP 0039). Refill tank, if necessary, to complete
bleeding procedure.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0041-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0042
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FLUSHING
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Equipment Conditions
Flushing Hose Kit (WP 0164, Fig. F-8) Front support legs lowered to first opening past stow
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) position (WP 0011)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Front of platform lowered onto front support legs; rear
Waste Oil Receptacle of platform lowered as far as possible (WP 0008);
rear support legs lowered (WP 0012)
Materials/Parts
Gooseneck raised to highest position and supported
(WP 0007)
Hydraulic Fluid, 10 gal. (WP 0170, Item 17)
Top step and first upper stair section (for accessing
Rag, Wiping, Lint Free (WP 0170, Item 23)
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) area) removed from
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32)
gooseneck (WP 0086)
Strap, Tiedown, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 33)
Semitrailer parking brakes set (brake release valve pulled
Gasket (1)
out) (WP 0004)
Personnel Required Flushing Hose Kit obtained from field maintenance
2 (WP 0164)
Hydraulic system filter (WP 0120)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for preparation, hydraulic tank flushing, suspension system flushing, steering system
flushing, gooseneck cylinder flushing, steering cylinder flushing, and restoration for the hydraulic system.
0042-1
0042 TM 9-2330-381-13
PREPARATION
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be under pressure. Use caution when disconnecting hydraulic components.
CAUTION
• Throughout the entire flushing procedure, continually check filter indicator on system filter. If an indicator
shows that the filter is contaminated, stop the procedure and replace filter element; then, continue with flushing
procedure or damage to equipment may result.
• Check fluid level in hydraulic tank. DO NOT allow fluid level to drop more than 2 in. (5 cm) below bottom line
of FULL mark or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
This preparation procedure requires the use of a Y-hose and flushing filter element
from the Flushing Hose Kit (WP 0164).
1. Close oil valve (Figure 1, Item 4) on hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove filter element from system filter and replace with element (WP 0120) from Flushing Hose Kit (WP 0164).
3. Open oil valve (Figure 1, Item 4) on hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
4. Close all suspension isolation valves, handles facing outboard (WP 0004). Pull handle of gooseneck isolation valve and
suspension shutoff valve to ADJUST position (WP 0004).
5. Remove hydraulic tank cap (Figure 1, Item 2) from filler neck on hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
6. Insert open end of 75 ft. (22.9 m) return hose assembly (Figure 1, Item 3) of Y-hose assembly (Figure 1, Item 5) into filler
neck of hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
7. Use electrical tiedown straps to secure end of return hose assembly (Figure 1, Item 3) into top of hydraulic tank (Figure 1,
Item 1) to support weight of hose and to prevent hose from being dropped or pulled away from hydraulic tank.
0042-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0042
Figure 1. Preparation.
END OF TASK
HYDRAULIC TANK FLUSHING

0042-3
0042 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
To avoid damage to equipment, do not attempt to make any adjustments to the platform, steering, or gooseneck until
all hydraulic systems are bled and air is removed from the system. If adjustments are attempted, air pockets may
move through the system and may cause unexpected movements or premature component failure.
2. Refer to WP 0040, steps 6 through 11, and drain hydraulic tank with gooseneck and platform set at their existing positions.
3. Cut and remove electrical tiedown straps used to secure Y-hose return line to hydraulic tank. Remove return hose from
hydraulic tank filler neck and set aside, clear of work area.
CAUTION
DO NOT allow dust, dirt, or other contaminants to enter the open hydraulic tank or hydraulic fluid may be
recontaminated and damage to equipment may result.
4. Access hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) for flushing as follows:
a. Remove six screws (Figure 2, Item 2) and filler neck assembly (Figure 2, Item 4) from access cover (Figure 2, Item 7).
b. Remove six nuts (Figure 2, Item 5), washers (Figure 2, Item 6), access cover (Figure 2, Item 7), and gasket (Figure 2,
Item 8) from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard gasket.
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
0042-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0042
CAUTION
Lint-free wiping rags used for cleaning should be rotated or turned to prevent contaminants from being
re-exposed to clean surfaces.
5. Clean inside of hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) using lint-free wiping rags. Clean all parts removed using lint-free
wiping rags.
6. Use an adjustable automotive wrench to unscrew and remove hydraulic tank filter (Figure 2, Item 9).
7. Clean hydraulic tank filter (Figure 2, Item 9) using dry cleaning solvent. Reinstall hydraulic tank filter back into
hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1).
8. Reassemble hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) as follows:
a. Install gasket (Figure 2, Item 8) and access cover (Figure 2, Item 7) to hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) and secure with
six washers (Figure 2, Item 6) and nuts (Figure 2, Item 5).
b. Install filler neck assembly (Figure 2, Item 4) to access cover (Figure 2, Item 7) and secure with six screws (Figure 2,
Item 2).
9. Fill hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 1) with new hydraulic fluid. Install hydraulic tank cap (Figure 2, Item 3) onto filler
neck assembly (Figure 2, Item 4).
Figure 2. Hydraulic Tank Flushing.
END OF TASK
0042-5
0042 TM 9-2330-381-13
SUSPENSION SYSTEM FLUSHING
NOTE
• This procedure requires the use of a Y-hose.
• A drain pan must be placed under hose assemblies to catch excess fluid drainage. Fluid collected
into drain pan should be drained into waste oil receptacle as often as needed.
1. Place drain pan (Figure 3, Item 5) under No. 1 streetside suspension isolation valve (Figure 3, Item 1).
2. At No. 1 streetside suspension assembly, remove two suspension hoses (Figure 3, Item 3) from tube nipples (Figure 3,
Item 2). Install caps/plugs into hoses.
3. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect free ends of Y-hose assembly (Figure 3, Item 7) to tube nipples (Figure 3,
Item 2) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 3, Item 1).
4. Open suspension isolation valve (Figure 3, Item 1) at affected suspension assembly, handle facing forward toward
front of semitrailer.
5. Pull up and hold front suspension streetside valve handle (WP 0004). Have a person check hydraulic tank (Figure 3,
Item 4) for fluid flowing back through return hose (Figure 3, Item 6).
6. Hold valve handle for 15 minutes after fluid starts flowing back into hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 4), and then release
valve handle. Monitor filter indicator.
7. Close affected suspension isolation valve (Figure 3, Item 1), handle facing outboard.
8. At No. 1 forward streetside suspension assembly, remove Y-hose assembly (Figure 3, Item 7) from tube nipples (Figure 3,
Item 2). Install caps/plugs into hoses.
9. Remove caps/plugs installed into suspension hose assemblies (Figure 3, Item 3) and reconnect suspension hose assemblies
to tube nipples (Figure 3, Item 2).
10. Repeat steps 1 through 9 of this procedure for each suspension assembly until all ten suspension assemblies have been
flushed. Operate appropriate valve handles for each suspension assembly as required (WP 0004). Monitor filter indicator.
11. After all ten suspension hose assemblies and isolation valves are flushed, install caps/plugs onto Y-hose assembly
(Figure 3, Item 7). Leave return hose assembly (Figure 3, Item 6) secured to hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 4).
0042-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0042
Figure 3. Suspension System Flushing.
END OF TASK
0042-7
0042 TM 9-2330-381-13
STEERING SYSTEM FLUSHING
NOTE
• This procedure requires use of a Y-hose and two 5/8 to 3/4 in. (12.7 to 7.62 cm) straight adapters.
• A drain pan must be placed under the hose assemblies to collect excess fluid drainage. Fluid collected
into drain pan should be drained into waste oil receptacle as often as needed.
1. Place drain pan (Figure 4, Item 6) under hose assemblies (Figure 4, Item 8) at aft elbow fittings (Figure 4, Item 2)
on both platform steering cylinders (Figure 4, Item 1).
2. Tag and disconnect two hose assemblies (Figure 4, Item 8) from aft elbow fittings (Figure 4, Item 2) on both platform
steering cylinders (Figure 4, Item 1). Install caps onto each elbow fitting.
3. Connect a 5/8 to 3/4 in. (12.7 to 7.62 cm) straight adapter (Figure 4, Item 7) to each hose assembly (Figure 4, Item 8).
Remove caps/plugs installed and connect free ends of Y-hose (Figure 4, Item 3) to straight adapters.
4. Pull up and hold handle of steering control valve (WP 0004). Have a second person check return hose (Figure 4, Item 4) at
hydraulic tank filler neck to ensure hydraulic fluid is flowing back into hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 5).
5. Continue to hold handle of steering control valve for a minimum of 10 minutes; then, release valve handle. Monitor
filter indicator.
6. Push down and hold handle of steering control valve. Have a second person check return hose (Figure 4, Item 4) at
hydraulic tank filler neck to ensure hydraulic fluid is flowing back into hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 5).
7. Continue to hold handle of steering control valve (WP 0004) for a minimum of 10 minutes; then, release valve handle.
Monitor filter indicator.
8. Remove ends of Y-hose (Figure 4, Item 3) from two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 7) and install caps/plugs into
end of Y-hose.
9. Remove two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 7) from two hose assemblies (Figure 4, Item 8). Install caps/plugs onto
straight adapters.
10. Remove caps/plugs installed on elbow fittings (Figure 4, Item 2) on aft port of steering cylinders (Figure 4, Item 1).
Connect two hose assemblies (Figure 4, Item 8) back onto elbow fittings.
11. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for front hoses/fittings on both platform steering cylinders. Monitor filter indicator.
12. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for rear hoses/fittings on both gooseneck steering cylinders. Monitor filter indicator.
13. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for front hoses/fittings on both gooseneck steering cylinders. Monitor filter indicator.
14. Leave return hose assembly secured to hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 5).
0042-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0042
Figure 4. Steering System Flushing.
END OF TASK
0042-9
0042 TM 9-2330-381-13
GOOSENECK CYLINDER FLUSHING
NOTE
This procedure does not require use of the Y-hose.
1. Pull up and hold handle of gooseneck control valve (WP 0004) and raise gooseneck as high as it will go. Release handle.
2. Move gooseneck support out from under gooseneck.
3. Push down and hold handle of gooseneck control valve (WP 0004) and lower gooseneck as low as it will go. Release
handle.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 3 five times to flush gooseneck cylinders. Monitor filter indicator.
5. Raise gooseneck to normal running height (WP 0011). Place gooseneck support under gooseneck and lower gooseneck
onto support.
END OF TASK
STEERING CYLINDER FLUSHING
NOTE
A drain pan must be placed to collect excess fluid drainage. Fluid collected into drain pan should be drained into
waste oil receptacle as often as needed.
1. Place drain pan (Figure 5, Item 3) on the ground under streetside platform steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1) and partially
under main beam to help collect fluid that will drain onto main beam and out of cylinder.
2. At bottom of streetside platform steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1), slowly loosen and then remove two pipe plugs
(Figure 5, Item 2).
3. Allow fluid to drain from steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1) onto main beam and into drain pan (Figure 5, Item 3) until
most of fluid stops draining from cylinder.
WARNING
• Person operating steering valve at the hydraulic control module must operate steering valve so that enough
pressure is applied to the cylinder to force fluid out of the cylinder. DO NOT allow steerable axles to move or too
much pressure will be applied.
• Person watching fluid drain from cylinder must stand back away from platform, keeping the cylinder in full
sight, to avoid fluid from being sprayed onto them.
NOTE
In order to adequately perform the following steps, one person must operate the steering valve while another person
checks fluid draining out of the cylinder.
4. Using one person stationed at hydraulic control module, slowly operate steering valve for a left turn (WP 0004). Use
caution not to turn any of the steerable axles. If axles start to move, release steering valve handle; then, operate handle
again until axles do not move. Observe fluid draining out of steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1).
0042-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0042
5. Continue to hold pressure on steering valve (WP 0004) until a steady stream of hydraulic fluid flows out of steering
cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1) for approximately 10 seconds. Then, release steering valve handle. Monitor hydraulic tank
fluid indicator.
6. Slowly operate steering valve for a right turn (WP 0004), being careful not to turn any of the steerable axles. If axles start
to move, release steering valve handle. Then, operate handle again until axles do not move. Second person must observe
fluid draining out of steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1).
7. Continue to hold handle for steering valve (WP 0004) until a steady stream of hydraulic fluid flows out of steering
cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1) for approximately 10 seconds. Then, release handle of steering valve. Monitor hydraulic
tank fluid indicator.
8. Allow all fluid inside steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1) to drain into drain pan (Figure 5, Item 3) until fluid stops.
9. Install two pipe plugs (Figure 5, Item 2) into bottom of steering hydraulic cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1).
Figure 5. Steering Cylinder Flushing.

10. Check fluid level in hydraulic tank and refill with new hydraulic fluid as necessary (WP 0041).
11. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for curbside platform steering cylinder. Monitor hydraulic tank fluid indicator.
12. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for curbside gooseneck steering cylinder. Monitor hydraulic tank fluid indicator.
13. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for streetside gooseneck steering cylinder. Monitor hydraulic tank fluid and filter indicators.
END OF TASK
0042-11
0042 TM 9-2330-381-13
RESTORATION
1. Perform hydraulic tank flushing to remove any remaining contaminates in hydraulic tank. If required, shut down APU
(WP 0005).
2. Close oil valve (Figure 6, Item 4) on hydraulic tank (Figure 6, Item 1).
3. Remove flushing filter from system and install new system filter (WP 0118).
4. Open oil valve (Figure 6, Item 4) on hydraulic tank (Figure 6, Item 1).
5. Remove return hose (Figure 6, Item 3) and Y-hose assembly (Figure 6, Item 5) from hydraulic tank (Figure 6, Item 1).
Remove all Flushing Hose Kit parts. Clean Flushing Hose Kit parts as required and ensure all openings have caps/plugs
installed.
6. Replace hydraulic tank cap (Figure 6, Item 2).
Figure 6. Restoration.
7. Open all ten suspension isolation valves (WP 0004).
9. Adjust platform height (WP 0008) to remove trapped air.
10. Operate gooseneck system (WP 0011) to remove trapped air.
11. Adjust platform (WP 0008) to normal road height of 43 in. (109 cm).
END OF TASK
Bleed hydraulic system as required (WP 0041).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0042-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0043
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC FILTER ELEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Lockwasher (6)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Personnel Required
2
Materials/Parts
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Hydraulic oil valve at reservoir closed (handle upright)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) (WP 0004)
Preformed Packing (1) One suspension valve (hydraulic control console) secured
Filter Element (1) in full position (WP 0004)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for disassembly, inspection, and assembly of the hydraulic filter element.
GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Avoid prolonged exposure to skin and wear long sleeves,
gloves, and goggles or face shield. If hydraulic fluid gets into the eyes, flush them immediately with water and
seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Wash hands
thoroughly prior to eating or smoking.
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time for system to cool before performing
maintenance.
• Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines; open fittings slowly.
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent dirt, moisture,
or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system or damage to equipment may result.
0043-1
0043 TM 9-2330-381-13
ELEMENT CHANGE
1. Ensure hydraulic control module door panel is lowered (WP 0004).
2. Use two people to remove six capscrews (Figure 1, Item 3), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and lower panel (Figure 1,
Item 4) from hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 1). Carefully remove lower panel, with panel door attached, out
from under semitrailer and place on platform. Discard six lockwashers.
3. Place drain pan under hydraulic control module.
4. Unscrew and remove filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 5) from filter block (Figure 1, Item 8).
5. Remove filter element (Figure 1, Item 6) and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 7). Discard filter element and preformed
packing. Pour fluid inside of filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 5) into drain pan.
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
0043-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0043
6. Clean filter housing (Figure 1, Item 5) with wiping rags. Clean all other components with dry cleaning solvent.
7. Inspect filter assembly for cracked or broken sight gauge, stripped threads, deformed preformed packing grooves, nicks,
cracks, dents, or evidence of leakage. Replace defective components as required.
8. Install new filter element (Figure 1, Item 6) into filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 5). Apply a thin coat of petroleum
jelly onto preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 7). Install new preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 7) onto filter block
(Figure 1, Item 8).
9. Install filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 5), with filter element and preformed packing attached, to filter block
(Figure 1, Item 8). Use 1 1/4 in. (2.54 cm) wrench to tighten filter element housing onto filter block.
10. Use two people to align and install lower panel (Figure 1, Item 4), with door panel attached, onto hydraulic control
module (Figure 1, Item 1). Secure lower panel in place by installing six new lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2) and
capscrews (Figure 1, Item 3). Close door panel.
11. Refill hydraulic tank as required (WP 0039).
12. Perform hydraulic system bleeding as required (WP 0041).
Figure 1. Element Change.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0043-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0044
FIELD MAINTENANCE
RADIATOR FLUID FILL
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) 1
Materials/Parts
Antifreeze (WP 0170, Item 2)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the radiator fluid fill.
0044-1
0044 TM 9-2330-381-13
FLUID FILL
WARNING
• When hot, radiator temperature may exceed 210°F (100°C) and maintain pressure up to 16 psi (108 kPa). DO
NOT open radiator while hot or injury to personnel may result.
• Ethylene glycol is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Avoid skin and eye contact. Good general ventilation
is normally adequate.
1. Remove radiator cap (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Fill radiator (Figure 1, Item 1) with 1.3 qt (1.2 L) of 70/30 mixture (70 percent antifreeze and 30 percent water).
3. Install radiator cap (Figure 1, Item 2).
Figure 1. Fluid Fill.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0044-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0045
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK COMPONENT ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Locknut (4)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Locknut (6)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Locknut (8)
Materials/Parts Personnel Required
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) 1
Solder (WP 0170, Item 30)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Equipment Conditions
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) Intervehicular cables disconnected (WP 0011)
Locknut (4)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the gooseneck component assembly.
0045-1
0045 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
For semitrailers with LED lights, disregard steps 1 thru 5 below.
1. Remove four locknuts (Figure 1, Item 19) and screws (Figure 1, Item 14) and lift fixed resistor R2 (Figure 1, Item 20)
off of gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1, Item 12). Discard locknuts.
2. Tag and disconnect wires (Figure 1, Item 21) from both sides of fixed resistor R2 (Figure 1, Item 20) and remove resistor
R2 from gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1, Item 12).
3. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 5) and screws (Figure 1, Item 13) and lift fixed resistor R1 (Figure 1, Item 7) off of
gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1, Item 12). Discard locknuts.
4. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 5) and screws (Figure 1, Item 13) and lift fixed resistor R3 (Figure 1, Item 6) off of
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Work in well-ventilated area to avoid breathing these fumes. Failure to follow
CAUTION
Rosin core solder contains flux, which is corrosive. All soldered connections must be cleaned of all flux
residue or damage to equipment may result.
5. Cut and remove tiedown straps (Figure 1, Item 23) securing electrical wires (Figure 1, Item 21). Discard tiedown straps.
Use soldering gun to tag and unsolder electrical wires from both fixed resistors R1 (Figure 1, Item 7) and R3 (Figure 1,
Item 6). Remove both fixed resistors R1 and R3 from gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1, Item 12).
6. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights. Tag and
disconnect electrical leads for connectors J1 (Figure 1, Item 15) and J2 (Figure 1, Item 1) from terminal boards TB1
(Figure 1, Item 9) and TB2 (Figure 1, Item 4).
7. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights. Tag and disconnect five point-to-point
jumper wires (Figure 1, Item 21) and two diodes (Figure 1, Item 3) from terminal board TB2 (Figure 1, Item 4).
8. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights. Tag and disconnect point-to-point jumper wire
(Figure 1, Item 24) and two diodes (Figure 1, Item 3) from terminal board TB2 (Figure 1, Item 4). Leave Zener lead
assembly (Figure 1, Item 2) at this time. Proceed to steps 9 thru 12.
9. Remove six locknuts (Figure 1, Item 18), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 17), and receptacle cover (Figure 1, Item 16) from
10. Remove connectors J1 (Figure 1, Item 15) and J2 (Figure 1, Item 1) from gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1,
Item 12).
11. Remove four locknuts (Figure 1, Item 8), screws (Figure 1, Item 11), terminal board TB1 (Figure 1, Item 9), and terminal
marker strip (Figure 1, Item 10) from gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1, Item 12). Discard locknuts.
12. Remove four locknuts (Figure 1, Item 8), screws (Figure 1, Item 11), terminal board TB2 (Figure 1, Item 4), and terminal
marker strip (Figure 1, Item 22) from gooseneck component assembly (Figure 1, Item 12). Discard locknuts.
0045-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0045
Figure 1. Gooseneck Component Removal.
END OF TASK
0045-3
0045 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Inspect connectors J1 (Figure 2, Item 10) and J2 (Figure 2, Item 1) for frayed or broken wires and defective or loose
terminal lugs. If defects exist, replace connectors as required.
2. Inspect for missing or unreadable wire markers and terminal marker strips (Figure 2, Item 8 and Item 14). If defective,
restamp or replace wire markers and terminal marker strips. Use semitrailer electrical schematic rear foldout Figure
FO-1 as a guide for proper wire markings.
3. Inspect jumper wires (Figure 2, Item 13) for frayed or broken wires and loose terminal lugs. If defective, use electrical
repair kit and repair or replace point-to-point wire(s) (WP 0164).
4. Inspect for missing, cracked, or non-sealing receptacle cover (Figure 2, Item 11). If defective or missing, replace cover.
5. Use digital multimeter to check resistance of diodes (Figure 2, Item 3) in both directions and inspect diodes for defects.
Refer to WP 0031. If diodes fail resistance check or are defective, replace diodes.
6. For incandescent lights, use digital multimeter to check resistance of all three fixed resistors. Readings for fixed resistors
R1 (Figure 1, Item 6) and R3 (Figure 2, Item 5) should be 7.0 ohms ±1.0 percent. Reading for fixed resistor R2 (Figure 2,
Item 12) should be 2.0 ohms ±1.0 percent. If a reading is not correct for a fixed resistor, replace as required.
7. For LED lights, use digital multimeter to probe Zener lead assembly (Figure 2, Item 2) for current flow. Locate ends
that attach to terminals TB2-10 and TB2-2 and probe in both directions. In the 10-2 direction, current should flow
unrestricted. In the 2-10 direction, 12 volts or less should flow unrestricted, and greater than 12 volts should be clipped
to approximately 12 volts.
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
0045-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0045
8. Inspect terminal boards TB1 (Figure 2, Item 7) and TB2 (Figure 2, Item 4) for missing screws, breaks, cracks, and
excessive corrosion. If corroded, clean using dry cleaning solvent as required. If defective, replace as required.
9. Inspect all components for corrosion. If corrosion is found, clean using dry cleaning solvent as required.
10. Refer to WP 0164 and use electrical repair kit and measuring tape to fabricate new point-to-point wires for gooseneck
component assembly (Figure 2, Item 9) as required.
11. Use wire stripper to strip fabricated jumper wires (Figure 2, Item 13) to designated length and allow for terminals to be
installed or wires to be soldered.
12. Use electrical repair kit to crimp new terminal lugs onto point-to-point wires as required.
Figure 2. Gooseneck Component Repair.
END OF TASK
0045-5
0045 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights and reconnect five point-to-point jumper wires
(Figure 3, Item 21) and two diodes (Figure 3, Item 3) to terminal board TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4). Proceed to steps 3 thru 14.
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and reconnect one point-to-point jumper wire
(Figure 3, Item 24), one Zener lead assembly (Figure 3, Item 2), and two diodes (Figure 3, Item 3) to terminal board TB2
(Figure 3, Item 4). Proceed to steps 3 thru 8.
3. Align terminal board TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4) and terminal marker strip (Figure 3, Item 22) and install onto gooseneck
component assembly (Figure 3, Item 12). Secure with four screws (Figure 3, Item 11) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 8).
4. Align terminal board TB1 (Figure 3, Item 9) and terminal marker strip (Figure 3, Item 10) and install onto gooseneck
component assembly (Figure 3, Item 12). Secure with four screws (Figure 3, Item 11) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 8).
5. Install electrical leads for connectors J1 (Figure 3, Item 15) and J2 (Figure 3, Item 1) through gooseneck component
assembly (Figure 3, Item 12).
6. Align receptacle cover (Figure 3, Item 16) to connector J1 (Figure 3, Item 15) and gooseneck component assembly
(Figure 3, Item 12). Secure with four capscrews (Figure 3, Item 17) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 18).
7. Align connector J2 (Figure 3, Item 1) to gooseneck component assembly (Figure 3, Item 12). Secure with two capscrews
(Figure 3, Item 17) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 18).
8. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and connect
electrical leads from connectors J1 (Figure 3, Item 15) and J2 (Figure 3, Item 1) to terminal boards TB1 (Figure 3,
Item 9) and TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4).
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Work in well-ventilated area to avoid breathing these fumes. Failure to follow this
CAUTION
NOTE
For some semitrailers with LED lights, disregard steps 9 thru 14.
9. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and use soldering gun to solder two wires from connector J1
(Figure 3, Item 15) to fixed resistors R1 (Figure 3, Item 7) and R3 (Figure 3, Item 6). Clean all flux residue from
solder joint.
10. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and use soldering gun to solder two point-to-point jumper wires
from terminal board TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4) to fixed resistors R1 (Figure 3, Item 7) and R3 (Figure 3, Item 6). Clean all
flux residue from solder joint. Secure electrical wires with tiedown straps (Figure 3, Item 23) as required.
11. Align and install fixed resistor R1 (Figure 3, Item 7) to gooseneck component assembly (Figure 3, Item 12) and secure
with two screws (Figure 3, Item 13) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 5).
with two screws (Figure 3, Item 13) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 5).
13. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and connect a point-to-point jumper wire from terminal board TB2
(Figure 3, Item 4) to fixed resistor R2 (Figure 3, Item 20).
with four screws (Figure 3, Item 14) and new locknuts (Figure 3, Item 19).
0045-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0045
Figure 3. Gooseneck Component Installation.
END OF TASK
Install gooseneck component assembly (WP 0045).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0045-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0046
FIELD MAINTENANCE
JUNCTION BOXES
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28)
Materials/Parts Platform at road height (WP 0008)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Tape, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 35) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Lockwasher (2) Intervehicular cables disconnected (WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation for junction boxes.
0046-1
0046 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either platform junction box TB1 or TB2. To repair or replace either
platform junction box TB1 or TB2, repeat this procedure as necessary.
1. Remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 4) and junction box cover (Figure 1, Item 5) from junction box (Figure 1, Item 1).
disconnect W1, W2, W3, and W4 harnesses and jumper wires from junction box (Figure 1, Item 1).
3. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 3), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and junction box (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform.
Discard lockwashers.
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
0046-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0046
4. Inspect junction boxes (Figure 1, Item 1) for corrosion, breaks, cracked or missing grommets, or defective cover. If
corroded, clean using dry cleaning solvent as required. If defects exist, replace junction box.
5. Inspect jumper wires and wiring harness terminal lugs for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and looseness. If defective,
use electrical repair kit and replace defective terminal lugs, jumper wires, and/or wiring harnesses.
6. Inspect jumper wires for missing or unreadable wire markers. If defect exists, replace or re-stamp wire marker. Use
electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights for proper wire
markings.
7. Inspect loom surrounding wire bundle for fraying, cuts, and damage. If defective, use electrical tape over affected
area as required to keep water from settling into harness.
Figure 1. Removal.
END OF TASK
0046-3
0046 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Align and install junction box (Figure 2, Item 1) to platform and secure with two new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 2) and
nuts (Figure 2, Item 3).
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldouts Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights. Connect
jumper wires and W1, W2, W3, and W4 harnesses to junction box (Figure 2, Item 1).
3. Install cover (Figure 2, Item 5) onto junction box (Figure 2, Item 1) and secure with two screws (Figure 2, Item 4).
Figure 2. Installation.
END OF TASK
Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable and check all lights, including steering pressure indicator light, for proper operation
(WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0046-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0047
FIELD MAINTENANCE
COMPOSITE MARKER LIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
1
Materials/Parts
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Equipment Conditions
Gasket (1) Semitrailer parked on level ground, parking brakes
Lockwasher (2) applied, and intervehicular cables disconnected (WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the composite marker light.
0047-1
0047 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
CAUTION
Some semitrailers are equipped with one-piece LED composite marker lights. No repair is authorized on
these lights and they are not interchangeable with reparable lights.
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either the curbside or streetside composite marker light. To repair or
replace both lights, repeat this procedure as necessary.
1. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights. Tag and disconnect four electrical
connectors (Figure 1, Item 5) from W2 harness. Proceed to steps 2 and 3.
2. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 1), screws (Figure 1, Item 2), and composite marker light (Figure 1, Item 9) with
attached mounting bracket (Figure 1, Item 8) from platform. Discard locknuts.
3. Remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 6), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 7), and mounting bracket (Figure 1, Item 8) from
composite marker light (Figure 1, Item 9). Discard lockwashers.
4. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights. Tag and disconnect four connectors (Figure 1,
Item 5) from W2 harness and one connector from ground lead. Proceed to step 5.
5. Remove four screws (Figure 1, Item 4), locknuts (Figure 1, Item 11), and light (Figure 1, Item 3) from mounting bracket
(Figure 1, Item 10) on platform. Discard locknuts and light.
0047-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0047
Figure 1. Composite Marker Light Removal.
END OF TASK
0047-3
0047 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
NOTE
There is no disassembly of one-piece LED composite marker lights.
1. Loosen six captive screws (Figure 2, Item 4) and remove light lens (Figure 2, Item 7) and gasket (Figure 2, Item 10) from
incandescent composite marker light (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard gasket.
NOTE
Some semitrailers have bulbs in the two lower positions (blackout lights) on the composite marker light. These
bulbs should be replaced with LED.
2. Remove bulb (Figure 2, Item 2); bulb (Figure 2, Item 3); LED (Figure 2, Item 8); and LED (Figure 2, Item 9) from
incandescent composite marker light (Figure 2, Item 1).
3. For incandescent lights, inspect wires (Figure 2, Item 5) and socket connectors for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and
looseness. If socket connectors are defective, use electrical repair kit and replace as required. If wires are frayed or broken,
replace composite marker light (Figure 2, Item 1). Proceed to steps 4 through 6.
4. Inspect bulb socket for corrosion and defects. If corroded, clean bulb socket by wiping with a wiping rag. If socket cannot
be cleaned or if socket is defective, replace composite marker light (Figure 2, Item 1).
5. Inspect for missing or cracked light lens (Figure 2, Item 7 or Item 6). If defective, replace light lens.
6. Inspect light bulbs and LED for defects. If defective, replace light bulbs.
7. For LED lights, inspect wires (Figure 2, Item 5) and socket connectors for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and looseness.
Inspect light for crack sand/or defective LED. If wires or light is defective or more than 25 percent of LED does not emit
light, replace light.
NOTE
There is no assembly of one-piece LED composite marker lights.
8. Install LED (Figure 2, Item 8); LED (Figure 2, Item 9); bulb (Figure 2, Item 3); and bulb (Figure 2, Item 2) into
incandescent composite marker light (Figure 2, Item 1).
9. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 10) and light lens (Figure 2, Item 7) onto incandescent composite marker light (Figure 2,
Item 1). Secure by tightening six captive screws (Figure 2, Item 4). Torque six screws to 20 to 25 in-lb (2.2 to 2.7 Nm).
0047-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0047
Figure 2. Composite Marker Light Repair.
END OF TASK
0047-5
0047 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. For one-piece LED composite marker light (Figure 3, Item 9), align light (Figure 3, Item 3) to mounting bracket (Figure 3,
Item 10) on platform and secure with four screws (Figure 3, Item 4) and locknuts (Figure 3, Item 11). Proceed to step 2.
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and reconnect four connectors to W2 harness
and one connector to ground lead.
3. For incandescent composite marker light, align light (Figure 3, Item 9) to mounting bracket (Figure 3, Item 8) and secure
with two screws (Figure 3, Item 6) and new lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 7). Proceed to steps 4 and 5.
4. Align and install composite marker light (Figure 3, Item 9) to platform and secure with two screws (Figure 3, Item 2)
and locknuts (Figure 3, Item 1).
5. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights and reconnect four electrical connectors
(Figure 3, Item 5) to W2 harness.
Figure 3. Composite Marker Light Installation.
END OF TASK
Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable, turn on tractor/semitrailer lights, and check composite marker light for proper
operation (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0047-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0048
FIELD MAINTENANCE
VEHICULAR BAR LAMP
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Semitrailer parked on level ground, parking brakes
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) applied, and intervehicular cables disconnected (WP 0013)
Lockwasher (4)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the vehicular bar lamp.
0048-1
0048 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
CAUTION
Some semitrailers are equipped with LED vehicular bar lamps. These lamps are very similar in appearance
to incandescent vehicular bar lamps but the marker clearance lights are not interchangeable. Substitution
will cause damage to equipment.
1. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights, and tag and disconnect socket connector
(Figure 1, Item 3) from W2 harness. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights. Tag and
disconnect socket connector from W2 harness.
2. Locate mounting screw (Figure 1, Item 5) with terminal lug of white wire (Figure 1, Item 2) (ground) under head.
Remove that screw and lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 6) from platform and tag white wire.
3. Remove remaining three screws (Figure 1, Item 5) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6), and remove vehicular bar lamp
(Figure 1, Item 1) from platform. Discard lockwashers.
4. Remove three marker clearance lights (Figure 1, Item 4) from bar lamp (Figure 1, Item 1) by turning and/or twisting
marker clearance lights.
5. Inspect wires, terminal lug, and socket connectors for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and looseness. If socket
connectors or terminal lugs are defective, use electrical repair kit and replace as required. If wires are frayed or broken,
replace vehicular bar lamp.
6. Inspect marker clearance light sockets for corrosion and defects. If corroded, clean sockets by wiping with a wiping rag. If
sockets cannot be cleaned or if sockets are defective, replace vehicular bar lamp.
7. Inspect for burned out, missing, cracked, or nonsealing marker clearance lights. If defective, replace marker clearance
lights.
Figure 1. Light Removal.
END OF TASK
0048-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0048
INSTALLATION
NOTE
If installing new vehicular bar lamp, the four mounting holes must be drilled out to 0.200 to 0.211 in. (0.508
to 0.535 cm) diameter.
1. Align and install, by turning and/or twisting, marker clearance lights (Figure 2, Item 4) onto vehicular bar lamp (Figure 2,
Item 1).
2. Align and install vehicular bar lamp (Figure 2, Item 1) to platform. Secure bar lamp using three lockwashers (Figure 2,
Item 6) and mounting screws (Figure 2, Item 5).
3. Reconnect terminal lug (Figure 2, Item 2) on white wire (ground) to platform using fourth lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 6)
and mounting screw (Figure 2, Item 5). Before installing screw, ensure contact area is free of paint and/or corrosion.
4. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights, and reconnect socket connector (Figure 2,
Item 3) to W2 harness. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights, and connect socket
connector to W2 harness.
Figure 2. Light Installation.
END OF TASK
Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable (WP 0013), turn on tractor/semitrailer lights, and check vehicular bar lamp for
proper operation.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0048-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0049
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STOPLIGHT/TAILLIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
1
Materials/Parts
Sleeving, Electrical Insulation (WP 0170, Item 27) Semitrailer parked on level ground, parking brakes
Sleeving, Electrical Insulation (WP 0170, Item 28) applied, and intervehicular cables disconnected (WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the stoplight/taillight.
0049-1
0049 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
• Use the following procedure for either the curbside or streetside stoplight/taillight. To repair or replace both
lights, repeat this procedure as necessary.
• Some semitrailers are equipped with one-piece LED stoplights/taillights. These lights have a removable three-lead
electrical harness. The power lead is fitted with a plug connector, the ground lead is fittted with a lug terminal, and the
third lead is capped (not used). These lights are not interchangeable with bulb-type stoplights.
disconnect stoplight/taillight socket connector (Figure 1, Item 7) from W2 harness.
2. For LED light, also disconnect ground lead (Figure 1, Item 4) from connector clip mount stud (Figure 1, Item 5). The two
connector clips replace one large loop clamp on rear of platform, one on each side.
3. Remove three locknuts (Figure 1, Item 3), clamp (Figure 1, Item 6), and three screws (Figure 1, Item 1), and remove
stoplight/taillight (Figure 1, Item 2) from platform. Discard locknuts.
4. For LED light, remove three-lead harness from socket on back of light. No other disassembly is authorized.
Figure 1. Stoplight/Taillight Removal.
END OF TASK
0049-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0049
REPAIR
1. Remove retaining ring (Figure 2, Item 7) and light lens (Figure 2, Item 6) from stoplight/taillight (Figure 2, Item 2).
2. Remove bulb (Figure 2, Item 1) from stoplight/taillight (Figure 2, Item 2).
3. Inspect wire and socket connector (Figure 2, Item 5) for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and looseness. If
socket connector is defective, use electrical repair kit and replace as required. If wire is frayed or broken, replace
stoplight/taillight. Use two layers of shrinkable sleeve insulation to form a seal between connector shell and stoplight lead.
4. For LED light, if wires (Figure 2, Item 3) are frayed, replace three-lead harness. Check connector clip mount stud
(Figure 2, Item 4) for corrosion, and clean, repair, or replace as needed.
5. Inspect bulb socket for corrosion and defects. If corroded, clean bulb socket by wiping with a wiping rag. If socket cannot
be cleaned or if socket is defective, replace stoplight/taillight.
6. For LED light, inspect for cracks and/or defective LED. If light is defective, or more than 25 percent of LEDs do not emit
light, replace one-piece stoplight/taillight.
7. Inspect for burned out bulb (Figure 2, Item 1). If defective, replace bulb.
8. Inspect for missing, cracked, or non-sealing light lens (Figure 2, Item 6). If light lens is defective, replace lens. If retainer
ring (Figure 2, Item 7) is defective, replace stoplight/taillight.
Figure 2. Stoplight/Taillight Repair.
END OF TASK
0049-3
0049 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
NOTE
Some semitrailers are equipped with one-piece LED stoplights/taillights. These lights have a removable three-lead
electrical harness. The power lead is fitted with a plug connector, the ground lead is fitted with a lug terminal, and
the third lead is capped (not used). These lights are not interchangeable with bulb-type stoplights.
1. Install bulb (Figure 3, Item 1) into stoplight/taillight (Figure 3, Item 3).
2. For LED light, install three-lead harness to socket on back of light. No other assembly is authorized.
3. Install light lens (Figure 3, Item 9) and retaining ring (Figure 3, Item 10) into stoplight/taillight (Figure 3, Item 3).
4. Align and install stoplight/taillight (Figure 3, Item 3) to platform. Secure in place with three screws (Figure 3, Item 2),
clamp (Figure 3, Item 7), and three locknuts (Figure 3, Item 4).
5. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights. Reconnect wire with connector to W2 harness, and
connect ground lead (Figure 3, Item 5) to connector clip mount stud (Figure 3, Item 6). If necessary, secure capped wire with
wire tie. The two connector clips replace one large loop clamp on rear of platform, one on each side.
6. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or for LED lights Figure FO-1.1, and
reconnect stoplight/taillight socket connector (Figure 3, Item 8) to W2 harness.
Figure 3. Stoplight/Taillight Installation.
END OF TASK
Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable and check stoplight/taillight for proper operation (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0049-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0050
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CLEARANCE LIGHT/BLACKOUT LIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
Preformed Felt (1) Semitrailer parked on level ground, parking brakes
Locknut (4) applied, and intervehicular cables disconnected (WP 0013)
Lockwasher (1)
Lockwasher (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for disassembly, inspection, and assembly of the clearance light/blackout light.
0050-1
0050 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
Incandescent Light Assembly
NOTE
• Use the following procedure for all clearance lights located on either the curbside or streetside of the platform.
To repair or replace all clearance lights, repeat this procedure as necessary.
• If semitrailer is equipped with LED clearance lights, there are differences between clearance lights and blackout
lights. Both are addressed in this procedure.
1. Refer to electrical schematic Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights. Tag and disconnect clearance light socket connector
(Figure 1, Item 1) from platform wiring harness. Proceed to steps 2 through 5.
2. Remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 7) and retainer lens (Figure 1, Item 3 or Item 6) from lamp holder mounting plate
3. Remove three locknuts (Figure 1, Item 2) and three screws (Figure 1, Item 4) from lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 1,
Item 12). Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 15), external tooth lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 14), screw (Figure 1, Item 10),
lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 11), preformed felt (Figure 1, Item 13), and lamp holder mounting plate from platform.
Discard locknuts, lockwashers, and preformed felt.
4. Remove two push-on nuts (Figure 1, Item 9) and separate light lens (Figure 1, Item 3 or Item 6) from lens retainer bracket
(Figure 1, Item 8).
5. Remove bulb (Figure 1, Item 5) from lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 1, Item 12). Loosen screw on lamp holder
mounting plate and allow to hang loose.
Figure 1. Incandescent Light Assembly Removal.
0050-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0050
LED Light Assembly

1. For LED blackout light, remove two screws (Figure 2, Item 12), lens (Figure 2, Item 16) and lens retainer bracket (Figure 2,
Item 15). For LED clearance light, remove two screws and lens retainer bracket (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. For LED clearance light, remove LED element (Figure 2, Item 2) by turning clockwise and pulling out; then, disconnect
LED lead (Figure 2, Item 5) from base of LED element and connector (Figure 2, Item 7). For LED blackout light,
remove LED element (Figure 2, Item 17) from lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 2, Item 11).
3. Remove three locknuts (Figure 2, Item 8), screws (Figure 2, Item 3), locknut (Figure 2, Item 9), external tooth lockwasher
(Figure 2, Item 10), screw (Figure 2, Item 13), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 14), preformed felt (Figure 2, Item 6), and lamp
holder mounting plate (Figure 2, Item 4 or Item 11) from platform. Discard locknuts, lockwashers, and preformed felt.
Figure 2. LED Light Assembly.
END OF TASK
0050-3
0050 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Inspect wire and socket connector for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and looseness. If defects exist, replace clearance
light assembly.
2. Inspect for missing, cracked, or non-sealing lens retainer, mounting plate, or lens. If defective, replace clearance light
assembly.
3. Inspect bulb socket (element socket for LED blackout light) for corrosion and defects. If socket cannot be cleaned
or socket is defective, replace clearance light assembly.
4. For LED clearance light, inspect connector for corrosion and defects.
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
NOTE
For LED clearance light, disregard steps 1, 2, 4, and 7.
1. Install bulb (Figure 3, Item 17) to lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5). Install screw (Figure 3, Item 4) on lamp
holder mounting plate.
2. For LED blackout light, install LED element (Figure 3, Item 13) to lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5).
3. For LED clearance light, connect LED lead (Figure 3, Item 15) to LED element (Figure 3, Item 14). Install LED element
into lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5) and turn counterclockwise.
4. Align light lens (Figure 3, Item 3) to lens retainer bracket (Figure 3, Item 2) and secure with two push-on nuts (Figure 3,
Item 16).
5. Align and install lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5) and preformed felt (Figure 3, Item 6) to platform. Secure
with three screws (Figure 3, Item 4), three locknuts (Figure 3, Item 7), screw (Figure 3, Item 12), lockwasher (Figure 3,
Item 11), external tooth lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 10), and locknut (Figure 3, Item 9).
6. For LED clearance light, ensure that ground lead terminal lug (Figure 3, Item 19) is under head of screw (Figure 3, Item 18)
with lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 10).
7. Install lens retainer bracket (Figure 3, Item 2) to lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5) and secure with two
screws (Figure 3, Item 1).
8. For LED clearance light, install lens retainer bracket (Figure 3, Item 2) to lamp holder mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 5)
and secure with two screws (Figure 3, Item 1).
9. Reconnect clearance light socket connector (Figure 3, Item 8) to platform wiring harness.
0050-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0050
Figure 3. Incandescent and LED Light Assembly Installation.
END OF TASK
Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable (WP 0013) and check clearance and blackout lights for proper operation.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0050-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0051
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEERING PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Semitrailer parked on level ground, wheels chocked,
Sleeving, Electrical Insulation (WP 0170, Item 26) parking brakes applied, and intervehicular cables
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) disconnected (WP 0013)
Preformed Packing (1)
Lockwasher (6)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the steering pressure indicator light.
REMOVAL
1. Ensure hydraulic control module access cover (Figure 1, Item 6) is lowered (WP 0004).
Item 5) from hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 2). Carefully remove lower panel, with access cover (Figure 1,
Item 6) attached, out from under semitrailer and place on platform (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwashers.
Figure 1. Access Cover Removal.
0051-1
0051 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
When cutting tiedown straps and sliding steering pressure indicator light out to expose solder connections,
use caution so that wires do not get cut, caught, or pulled on the frame or damage to equipment may result.
3. Remove nut (Figure 2, Item 4) and lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 5) from heat shrink tube (Figure 2, Item 3). Carefully cut
and remove tiedown straps (Figure 2, Item 1) as required and slide steering pressure indicator light (Figure 2, Item 10)
out and away from hydraulic control module gauge panel (Figure 2, Item 2). Move steering pressure indicator light only
enough to expose soldered contact points. Discard tiedown straps.
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Avoid breathing these fumes. Work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to
CAUTION
4. Cut and remove heat shrink tubing (Figure 2, Item 3) on wire leads to steering pressure indicator light (Figure 2, Item 10).
Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights. Tag and unsolder jumper wires from steering
pressure indicator light (Figure 2, Item 10).
5. Remove lens (Figure 2, Item 9). Remove incandescent lamp (Figure 2, Item 8) and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 7)
from indicator base (Figure 2, Item 6). Discard preformed packing.
WARNING
CAUTION
6. Inspect bulb socket for bad solder connections, corrosion, and defects. If corroded, clean bulb socket by wiping with
a wiping rag. If a bad solder exists, resolder. If bulb socket cannot be cleaned or socket is defective, replace steering
pressure indicator light assembly.
0051-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0051
7. Inspect steering indicator light wires and terminals for corrosion, looseness, and frayed or broken wires. If wires or
terminals are defective or loose, refer to step 4 of this procedure.
8. Inspect for burned out incandescent bulbs. If bulbs are burned out, replace as necessary.
9. Inspect for defective bulb sockets or lens. If found defective, replace steering pressure indicator light assembly.
Figure 2. Steering Pressure Indicator Light Removal.
END OF TASK
0051-3
0051 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install new preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 7), incandescent lamp (Figure 3, Item 8), and lens (Figure 3, Item 9) to
indicator base (Figure 3, Item 6).
2. Pass jumper wires through nut (Figure 3, Item 4), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 5), and opening in hydraulic control module
gauge panel (Figure 3, Item 2). Install heat shrink electrical insulation (Figure 3, Item 3) onto jumper wires.
WARNING
CAUTION
3. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights. Align jumper wires with steering pressure
indicator light (Figure 3, Item 10) and, using soldering gun, solder two leads to steering pressure indicator light. Using
soldering torch kit, shrink heat shrink electrical insulation (Figure 3, Item 3) over soldered joint.
4. Insert steering pressure indicator light (Figure 3, Item 10) into hydraulic control module gauge panel (Figure 3, Item 2).
Secure panel in place by installing and tightening nut (Figure 3, Item 4).
5. Install new tiedown straps (Figure 3, Item 1) as required.
0051-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0051
Figure 3. Assembly.
0051-5
0051 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Use two people to carefully position lower panel (Figure 4, Item 5), with access cover attached (Figure 4, Item 6), over
hydraulic control module (Figure 4, Item 2) on underside of semitrailer (Figure 4, Item 1). Secure lower panel with six
lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 4) and six capscrews (Figure 4, Item 3).
Figure 4. Follow-On Maintenance.
END OF TASK
Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).

Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable (WP 0013) and check steering pressure indicator light while manually adjusting
steering (WP 0010).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0051-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0052
FIELD MAINTENANCE
INDICATOR LIGHTS - OIL PRESSURE AND GLOW PLUG
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Semitrailer parked on level ground, wheels chocked,
Sleeving, Electrical Insulation (WP 0170, Item 26) parking brakes applied, and intervehicular cables
Solder (WP 0170, Item 30) disconnected (WP 0013)
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) Negative lead from battery disconnected (WP 0051)
Lockwasher (4)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, inspection, and installation of the indicator lights - oil pressure
and glow plug.
0052-1
0052 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
On Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) with APU engine serial number 504697 and subsequent numbers, the glow plug
indicator is changed from a glow-type indicator to a lamp driven by a timer.
1. Open cover to APU control box by lifting up retainer (Figure 1, Item 1) and lowering cover weldment (Figure 1, Item 17).
2. Remove four screws (Figure 1, Item 3), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and access plate (Figure 1, Item 18) from APU
control box. Discard lockwashers.
3. Refer to APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4 and proceed as follows:
a. For lamp-type indicator:
(1) Tag and disconnect APU wiring harness leads from two quick-disconnect terminals (Figure 1, Item 7) on indicator
light (Figure 1, Item 4).
(2) Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 5), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 6), and indicator light (Figure 1, Item 4) from access
plate (Figure 1, Item 18). Discard lockwasher.
(3) Remove lens (Figure 1, Item 11). Remove incandescent lamp (Figure 1, Item 10) and preformed packing (Figure 1,
Item 9) from indicator base (Figure 1, Item 8). Discard preformed packing.
b. For glow-type glow plug indicators:
(1) Tag and disconnect jumper wire (Figure 1, Item 12) and APU cable assembly (Figure 1, Item 13) from back of
glow plug indicator (Figure 1, Item 14).
(2) Unscrew and remove retainer ring (Figure 1, Item 16), two washers (Figure 1, Item 15), and glow plug indicator
(Figure 1, Item 14) from access plate (Figure 1, Item 18).
0052-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0052
Figure 1. Lamp-Type and Glow-Type Indicator Removal.
END OF TASK
0052-3
0052 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Avoid breathing these fumes. Work in a well-ventilated area or injury to personnel
may result.
CAUTION
Rosin core solder contains flux, which is corrosive. All soldered connections must be cleaned of all flux residue
NOTE
This inspection procedure is valid only for lamp-type glow plug indicators.
1. Inspect indicator (bulb) socket (Figure 2, Item 3) for bad solder connections, corrosion, and defects. If corroded, clean
indicator (bulb) socket by wiping with a wiping rag. If a bad solder exists, resolder. If bulb socket cannot be cleaned or
socket is defective, replace indicator light assembly.
2. Inspect indicator light wires (Figure 2, Item 1) and quick-disconnect terminals (Figure 1, Item 2) for corrosion, looseness,
and frayed or broken wires. If wires or terminals are defective or loose, refer to steps 5 thru 9 of this procedure.
3. Inspect for burned out incandescent bulbs (Figure 2, Item 4). If bulbs are burned out, replace as necessary.
4. Inspect for defective indicator (bulb) sockets (Figure 2, Item 3) or lens (Figure 2, Item 5). If found defective, replace
indicator light assembly.
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Avoid breathing these fumes. Work in a well-ventilated area or injury to personnel
may result.
CAUTION
Rosin core solder contains flux, which is corrosive. All soldered connections must be cleaned of all flux residue
NOTE
This inspection procedure is valid only for lamp-type glow plug indicators.
5. Use soldering gun to unsolder and remove two wires (Figure 2, Item 1) from indicator (bulb) base (Figure 2, Item 3).
6. Refer to WP 0164. Use electrical repair kit and measuring tape to fabricate new wire(s) (Figure 2, Item 1) as required.
7. Use wire stripper to strip fabricated wires (Figure 2, Item 1) to designated length and allow for terminals (Figure 2, Item 2)
to be installed or wires to be soldered.
8. Use electrical repair kit to crimp two quick-disconnect terminals (Figure 2, Item 2) onto wires (Figure 2, Item 1). Install
heat shrink tubing onto two wires.
0052-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0052
9. Use soldering gun to solder wires to indicator (bulb) base (Figure 2, Item 3). Clean all flux residue from solder joint.
Use soldering torch kit to shrink heat shrink tubing over soldered joint.
Figure 2. Lamp-Type Glow Plug Indicator Inspection.
END OF TASK
0052-5
0052 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
NOTE
On APU with APU engine serial number 504697 and subsequent numbers, the glow plug indicator is changed
1. For lamp-type indicators:
a. Install preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 9), incandescent lamp (Figure 3, Item 10), and lens (Figure 3, Item 11) to
indicator base (Figure 3, Item 8).
b. Pass two wires through access plate (Figure 3, Item 18) and install indicator light (Figure 3, Item 4) onto access
plate (Figure 3, Item 18).
c. Pass two wires through lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 6) and nut (Figure 3, Item 5). Secure indicator light (Figure 3,
Item 4) to access plate (Figure 3, Item 18) by tightening nut (Figure 3, Item 5).
d. Refer to APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4. Reconnect APU wiring harness to two quick-disconnect
terminals (Figure 3, Item 7) on indicator light (Figure 3, Item 4).
2. For glow-type indicators:
a. Install glow-plug indicator (Figure 3, Item 14) and two washers (Figure 3, Item 15) onto access plate (Figure 3,
Item 18) and secure with retaining ring (Figure 3, Item 16).
b. Refer to APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4. Reconnect APU cable assembly (Figure 3, Item 13) and
jumper wire (Figure 3, Item 12) to back of glow plug indicator (Figure 3, Item 14).
3. Align and install access plate (Figure 3, Item 18) to APU control box and secure with four screws (Figure 3, Item 3) and
lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 2).
4. Raise cover weldment (Figure 3, Item 17) and secure to APU control box by rehooking retainer (Figure 3, Item 1) to cover.
0052-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0052
Figure 3. Lamp-Type and Glow-Type Indicator Installation.
END OF TASK
Start APU (WP 0005) and check indicator lights.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0052-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0053
FIELD MAINTENANCE
BATTERY INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
References
Materials/Parts TM 9-6140-200-14
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21)
Sodium Bicarbonate (WP 0170, Item 29) Equipment Conditions
Water, Battery (WP 0170, Item 38) Gooseneck adjusted to approximately 64 in. (l62.5 cm)
Locknut (2) height (WP 0011) or coupled to tractor (WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, inspection, and installation of the battery.
0053-1
0053 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Storage batteries contain sulfuric acid, which will cause severe eye injury, skin burns, and damage to clothing.
Wear eye protection and protective clothing and avoid spilling any acid. If contact occurs, flush affected areas
immediately with large quantities of water and seek medical attention.
• Storage batteries give off hydrogen gas, which is extremely explosive. Keep all open flames, sparks, and smoking
materials away from batteries or serious personal injury may result.
• Always disconnect negative (-) cable first and connect negative (-) cable last or serious injury may result.
• A frozen or completely discharged battery can explode if power is applied. Before connecting any form
of external power to battery, ensure frozen battery is warmed or discharged battery is replaced or injury
to personnel may result.
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to top of gooseneck directly in front of spare tires.
Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on it or trip over it. Injury to
personnel or damage to equipment may result.
1. Unhook two fasteners (Figure 1, Item 14) and raise and remove stair (Figure 1, Item 1) to gain access to battery (Figure 1,
Item 9).
CAUTION
Some semitrailers have solar battery charger leads connected to negative and positive battery terminals. Ensure
these leads are not damaged when disconnecting terminals from battery posts.
2. Disconnect negative (-) terminal (Figure 1, Item 3) from negative (-) post (Figure 1, Item 2) on battery (Figure 1, Item
9). Disconnect positive (+) terminal (Figure 1, Item 7) from positive (+) post (Figure 1, Item 8) on battery. If equipped,
DO NOT damage solar leads (Figure 1, Item 13) from W5 harness (Figure 1, Item 12) to battery terminals when
disconnecting/connecting from battery posts.
3. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 4), washers (Figure 1, Item 5), and hold-down bracket (Figure 1, Item 6) from
battery (Figure 1, Item 9). Discard locknuts.
4. Use battery carrier, if necessary, to lift battery (Figure 1, Item 9) from frame (Figure 1, Item 11) and remove two bolts
0053-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0053
Figure 1. Battery Removal.
END OF TASK
0053-3
0053 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION
1. Use battery terminal cleaner, followed by sodium bicarbonate and water, to clean corrosion from both battery terminals
and battery posts.
2. After cleaning, apply coat of petroleum jelly to both battery terminals and battery posts.
3. Perform all inspections and authorized repairs in accordance with TM 9-6140-200-14.
4. Remove battery cell caps from battery.
5. Inspect electrolyte level in each cell. If low, add distilled water using battery filler.
6. Use battery tester to take reading of electrolyte in each cell. If reading is low, charge battery. If level does not reach
adequate reading, replace battery.
7. Attach battery charger to battery. Follow instructions on battery charger.
8. After charging battery, install battery cell caps onto battery.
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
1. Install two bolts (Figure 2, Item 10), and use battery carrier, if necessary, to place battery (Figure 2, Item 9) on frame
2. Install hold-down bracket (Figure 2, Item 6) over battery (Figure 2, Item 9) and secure with two washers (Figure 2,
Item 5) and new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 4).
CAUTION
Some semitrailers have solar battery charger leads connected to negative and positive battery terminals. Ensure
these leads are not damaged when disconnecting terminals from battery posts.
3. Connect positive (+) terminal (Figure 2, Item 7) to positive (+) post (Figure 2, Item 8) on battery (Figure 2, Item 9),
and connect negative (-) terminal (Figure 2, Item 3) to negative (-) post (Figure 2, Item 2) on battery. If equipped,
DO NOT damage solar leads (Figure 2, Item 13) from W5 harness (Figure 2, Item 12) to battery terminals when
disconnecting/connecting from battery posts.
0053-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0053
4. Position stair (Figure 2, Item 1) on frame and hook two fasteners (Figure 2, Item 14).
Figure 2. Battery Installation.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0053-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0054
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SOLAR BATTERY CHARGER INSTALLATION (SOME SEMITRAILERS)
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Gooseneck adjusted fully down (WP 0007) or coupled
to tractor (WP 0013)
Materials/Parts
Lockwasher (4)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instruction for the removal and installation of the solar battery charger (some semitrailers).
0054-1
0054 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to top of gooseneck directly in front of spare
tires. Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on it or trip over it.
1. Disconnect solar panel leads (Figure 1, Item 3) from W5 harness (Figure 1, Item 4).
2. Loosen four bolts (Figure 1, Item 10) and turn four toe clamps (Figure 1, Item 7) 90 degrees from clamping position.
3. Lift mounting plate (Figure 1, Item 11), with solar panel (Figure 1, Item 2) attached, and remove from gooseneck
(Figure 1, Item 5).
NOTE
Lockwashers may not be present. They are not used on initial assembly but are needed for reassembly.
4. Remove four capscrews (Figure 1, Item 1), washers (Figure 1, Item 12), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 13), if present, and
solar panel (Figure 1, Item 2) from mounting plate (Figure 1, Item 11). Discard lockwashers.
5. Remove four cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 6) from four bolts (Figure 1, Item 10) and unscrew four toe clamps (Figure 1,
Item 7) from bolts. Remove three spring washers (Figure 1, Item 8) and washer (Figure 1, Item 9) from each bolt.
0054-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0054
Figure 1. Solar Battery Charger Removal.
END OF TASK
0054-3
0054 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
2QVRPHVHPLWUDLOHUVDVRODUEDWWHU\FKDUJHULVPRXQWHGWRWRSRIJRRVHQHFNGLUHFWO\LQIURQWRIVSDUH
WLUHV3HUVRQVZRUNLQJRQWRSRIJRRVHQHFNPXVWWDNH(;75(0(FDUHQRWWRVWHSRQLWRUWULSRYHULW
)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVZDUQLQJPD\UHVXOWLQLQMXU\WRSHUVRQQHORUGDPDJHWRHTXLSPHQW
1. Align solar panel (Figure 2, Item 2) to mounting plate (Figure 2, Item 12) so that bolt holes align with threaded inserts in
mounting plate, and solar panel leads (Figure 2, Item 3) are to left side when viewed from long end of mounting plate.
Secure solar panel to mounting plate with four capscrews (Figure 2, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 14), and
washers (Figure 2, Item 13).
2. Install four washers (Figure 2, Item 10) onto four bolts (Figure 2, Item 11). Insert bolts into mounting plate (Figure 2,
Item 12) with bolt heads on solar panel side. Install three spring washers (Figure 2, Item 8) to each bolt, positioned
opposite each other for greatest extension. Screw four toe clamps (Figure 2, Item 7) onto four bolts and install four cotter
pins (Figure 2, Item 6) into four bolts.
3. Lift mounting plate (Figure 2, Item 12), with solar panel (Figure 2, Item 2) attached, onto gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 5)
and position onto steering retainer assembly (Figure 2, Item 9) with short end forward and solar panel leads (Figure 2,
Item 3) to streetside of semitrailer.
4. Turn four toe clamps (Figure 2, Item 7) to clamping position (aligned fore and aft) and tighten four bolts (Figure 2,
Item 11) until toe clamps firmly engage steering retainer assembly (Figure 2, Item 9).
5. Connect solar panel leads (Figure 2, Item 3) to W5 harness (Figure 2, Item 4).
0054-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0054
Figure 2. Solar Battery Charger Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0054-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0055
FIELD MAINTENANCE
WIRING HARNESS CLAMP AND GROMMET INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Nonmetallic Grommet (2)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Nonmetallic Grommet (1)
Locknut, Semitrailer With Incandescent Lights (6) 1
Locknut, Semitrailer With Led Lights (8)
Locknut (4) Equipment Conditions
Lockwasher, Semitrailer With Incandescent Lights (54) Gooseneck pneumatic lines removed from gladhands
Lockwasher, Semitrailer With Led Lights Nonmetallic (WP 0071)
Grommet (50) Clearance light access cover removed from deflector
Nonmetallic Grommet (2) (streetside or curbside, as applicable (WP 0097)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the wiring harness clamp and grommet.
0055-1
0055 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
The following procedures identify typical clamp and grommet installations for each lettered area identifed
on the locator illustration. At various locations, the clamps may also secure pneumatic lines or hydraulic
lines with the wiring harness bundle. Perform the following procedures, or any portion of the procedures,
as required to complete the necessary repair.
1. Location A: Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 3) and loop clamp (Figure 1, Item 2) from weld stud (Figure 1, Item 1).
Discard locknut.
2. Location AA: Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 12), loop clamp (Figure 1, Item 13), and screw (Figure 1, Item 15) from
top of gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 14). Discard locknut.
3. Location B: Remove screw (Figure 1, Item 4), nut (Figure 1, Item 8), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 7), and loop clamp
(Figure 1, Item 6) from platform (Figure 1, Item 5). Discard lockwasher.
4. Location C: Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 11), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 10), and loop clamp (Figure 1, Item 9) from weld
stud (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwasher.
5. Location D: Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 19), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 20), and loop clamp (Figure 1, Item 21) from
weld stud (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwasher.
6. Location E: Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 16), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 17), and loop clamp (Figure 1, Item 18) from
0055-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0055
Figure 1. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Removal.
0055-3
0055 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
On some semitrailers, three loop clamps are replaced by three connector clips.
7. Location F: Remove three loop clamps (Figure 2, Item 4), loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 3), and grommet (Figure 2, Item 6)
as follows:
a. Disconnect W2 harness leads from clearance and marker lights.
b. Remove nut (Figure 2, Item 1), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 2), and loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 4) from weld stud
(Figure 2, Item 11). Discard lockwasher. Some semitrailers: remove four locknuts (Figure 2, Item 9) and two connector
clips (Figure 2, Item 8) from weld studs. Discard locknuts.
c. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 10), nut (Figure 2, Item 1), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 2), and loop clamp (Figure 2,
Item 4) from deflector (Figure 2, Item 5). Discard lockwasher.
d. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 7), nut (Figure 2, Item 1), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 2), loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 3),
nut, lockwasher, and loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 4) from deflector (Figure 2, Item 5). Discard lockwashers. Some
semitrailers: remove two screws, locknuts (Figure 2, Item 9), and connector clip (Figure 2, Item 8) from deflector.
e. Pull W2 harness leads through loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 3) and remove grommet (Figure 2, Item 6) and deflector
(Figure 2, Item 5). Discard grommet.
8. Location G: Remove locknut (Figure 2, Item 25), screw (Figure 2, Item 22), and loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 24) from
beavertail (Figure 2, Item 23). Discard locknut.
9. Location H: Remove nut (Figure 2, Item 27), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 28), and loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 26) from
10. Location J: Remove locknut (Figure 2, Item 13) and loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 12) from weld stud (Figure 2, Item 11).
Discard locknut.
CAUTION
During mounting plate removal, the air lines and W1 harness must be allowed to slide in the grommets or
11. Location K: Remove mounting plate and grommets as follows:
a. Remove four locknuts (Figure 2, Item 21) and mounting plate (Figure 2, Item 18) from weld studs (Figure 2, Item 17).
Discard locknuts.
b. Loosen and slide two grommets (Figure 2, Item 19) and grommet (Figure 2, Item 20) forward along two air lines and
W1 harness.
c. Pull two grommets (Figure 2, Item 19 and Item 20) from two air lines and W1 harness. Discard grommets.
12. Location L: Remove locknut (Figure 2, Item 14) and loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 15) from gooseneck component assembly
13. Inspect loop clamps and connector clips (some semitrailers) for excessive wear, cracks, or other apparent damage. If
any defects are found, replace parts as necessary.
14. Inspect all harnesses for chafing, cuts, breaks, or signs of excessive wear. If defects are found, refer to applicable
paragraph and replace harness as required.
0055-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0055
Figure 2. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Removal.
END OF TASK
0055-5
0055 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Location L: Install loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 15) to gooseneck component assembly (Figure 3, Item 16) and secure
with locknut (Figure 3, Item 14).
2. Location K: Install mounting plate and grommets as follows:
a. Slide two grommets (Figure 3, Item 19 and Item 20) over two air lines and W1 harness.
b. Slide grommets (Figure 3, Item 19) up to mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 18). Install grommets in mounting plate,
ensuring each grommet is secure to mounting plate.
c. Install mounting plate (Figure 3, Item 18) onto weld studs (Figure 3, Item 17) and secure with four locknuts (Figure 3,
Item 21).
3. Location J: Install loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 12) to weld stud (Figure 3, Item 11) and secure with locknut (Figure 3,
Item 13).
4. Location H: Install loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 26) to weld stud (Figure 3, Item 11) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 3,
Item 28) and nut (Figure 3, Item 27).
5. Location G: Install loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 24) onto beavertail (Figure 3, Item 23) and secure with screw (Figure 3,
Item 22) and locknut (Figure 3, Item 25).
6. Location F: Install three loop clamps (Figure 3, Item 4), loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 3), and grommet (Figure 3, Item 6)
as follows:
a. Install grommet (Figure 3, Item 6) in deflector (Figure 3, Item 5) and pull W2 harness leads through grommet.
b. Position loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 4) at proper mounting hole on deflector (Figure 3, Item 5) and secure with screw
(Figure 3, Item 7), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 2), nut (Figure 3, Item 1), loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 3), lockwasher,
and nut. Some semitrailers: position connector clip (Figure 3, Item 8) at proper mounting holes on deflector and
secure with two screws and locknuts (Figure 3, Item 9).
c. Position loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 4) at proper mounting hole on deflector (Figure 3, Item 5) and secure with screw
(Figure 3, Item 10), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 2), and nut (Figure 3, Item 1).
d. Install loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 4) on weld stud (Figure 3, Item 11) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 2)
and nut (Figure 3, Item 1). Some semitrailers: install two connector clips (Figure 3, Item 8) to four weld studs and
secure with four locknuts (Figure 3, Item 9).
e. Reconnect W2 harness leads to clearance and marker lights.
f. Install clearance light access cover to deflector (Figure 3, Item 5) per (WP 0099).
0055-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0055
Figure 3. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Installation.
0055-7
0055 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. Location E: Install loop clamp (Figure 4, Item 18) on weld stud (Figure 4, Item 1) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 4,
8. Location D: Install loop clamp (Figure 4, Item 21) on weld stud (Figure 4, Item 1) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 4,
9. Location C: Install loop clamp (Figure 4, Item 9) on weld stud (Figure 4, Item 1) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 4,
10. Location B: Position loop clamp (Figure 4, Item 6) on platform (Figure 4, Item 5) and secure with screw (Figure 4, Item 4),
lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 7), and nut (Figure 4, Item 8).
11. Location A: Install loop clamp (Figure 4, Item 2) on weld stud (Figure 4, Item 1) and secure with locknut (Figure 4, Item 3).
12. Location AA: Install loop clamp (Figure 4, Item 13) on top of gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 14) and secure with screw
(Figure 4, Item 15) and locknut (Figure 4, Item 12).
0055-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0055
Figure 4. Wiring Harness Clamp and Grommet Installation.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0055-9/10 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0056
FIELD MAINTENANCE
APU CONTROL BOX JUMPER WIRES AND TIMER HARNESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Negative lead from battery disconnected (WP 0051)
Sleeving, Electrical Insulation (WP 0170, Item 26)
Lockwasher (4)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) control
box jumper wires and timer harness.
0056-1
0056 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
On Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) with APU engine serial number 504697 and subsequent numbers, the glow plug
indicator is changed from a glow-type indicator to a lamp driven by a timer.
1. Open cover to APU control box (Figure 1, Item 21) by lifting up retainer (Figure 1, Item 1) and lowering cover weldment
2. Remove four screws (Figure 1, Item 16), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 17), and access plate (Figure 1, Item 18) from APU
control box. Discard lockwashers.
3. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4 as a guide to tag and disconnect jumper wire (Figure 1, Item 11)
from starter switch (Figure 1, Item 10) terminal B.
4. Cut existing heat shrink tubing (Figure 1, Item 8) and disconnect diode (Figure 1, Item 9) from jumper wire (Figure 1,
Item 11) and APU wiring harness (Figure 1, Item 7).
5. On glow-type glow plug indicator only, tag and disconnect jumper wire (Figure 1, Item 15) from starter switch (Figure 1,
Item 10) terminal GL and glow plug indicator (Figure 1, Item 14).
6. On lamp-type glow plug indicator, unplug timer harness connector (Figure 1, Item 12) from timer (Figure 1, Item 2).
Unplug timer harness wires (Figure 1, Item 12) from glow plug indicator (Figure 1, Item 13).
7. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4 as a guide to tag and disconnect timer harness wires (Figure 1,
Item 12) from starter switch (Figure 1, Item 10) terminals GL and ST.
8. Remove capscrew (Figure 1, Item 20), nut (Figure 1, Item 6), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 5), washer (Figure 1, Item 4), and
timer harness (Figure 1, Item 3) from timer (Figure 1, Item 2) and APU control box (Figure 1, Item 21).
0056-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0056
Figure 1. APU Control Box Jumper Wires and Timer Harness Removal.
END OF TASK
0056-3
0056 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Inspect APU control box jumper wires for missing or unreadable wire markers. If defective, apply new markings or replace
wire markers. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4 as a guide for proper wire markings.
2. Inspect APU control box jumper wires and timer harness for frayed or broken wires and loose terminal lugs. If defects
exist, use electrical repair kit and replace defective terminal lugs, jumper wire assembly, or timer harness.
3. Use an ohmmeter to check resistance of diode in both directions. If diode fails resistance check, replace diode.
4. Refer to WP 0146. Use electrical repair kit and measuring tape to fabricate new APU control box jumper wires
as required.
5. Use wire stripper to strip wires to designated length to allow for terminals to be installed.
6. Use electrical repair kit to crimp terminal lugs onto fabricated jumper wires as required.
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
NOTE
On APU with APU engine serial number 504697 and subsequent numbers, the glow plug indicator is changed
1. On lamp-type glow plug indicator, install ground wire on timer harness (Figure 2, Item 3) and secure to APU control box
(Figure 2, Item 21) using screw (Figure 2, Item 20), timer (Figure 2, Item 2), washer (Figure 2, Item 4), lockwasher
(Figure 2, Item 5), and nut (Figure 2, Item 6).
2. Plug timer harness connectors (Figure 2, Item 12) into timer (Figure 2, Item 2).
3. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4 as a guide to connect tagged timer harness wires (Figure 2, Item 3)
to starter switch (Figure 2, Item 10) terminals GL and ST.
4. Plug timer harness wires (Figure 2, Item 3) to glow plug indicator (Figure 2, Item 13) wires.
5. Slide a 3 in. (7.6 cm) piece of heat shrink tubing (Figure 2, Item 8) over quick-disconnect plug on APU wiring harness
(Figure 2, Item 7).
6. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-4 as a guide to reconnect diode (Figure 2, Item 9) to jumper wire
(Figure 2, Item 11). Reconnect jumper wire to starter switch (Figure 2, Item 10) terminal B.
7. Reconnect open end of diode (Figure 2, Item 9) to existing APU harness wire (Figure 2, Item 7).
8. Slide heat shrink tubing (Figure 2, Item 8) over both quick-disconnect plugs and diode (Figure 2, Item 9). Using soldering
torch kit, shrink heat shrink tubing over quick-disconnect plugs and diode.
9. On glow-plug type indicator, refer to APU electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect jumper wire
(Figure 2, Item 15) to glow plug indicator (Figure 2, Item 14) and starter switch (Figure 2, Item 10) terminal GL.
10. Align and install access plate (Figure 2, Item 18) to APU control box and secure with four screws (Figure 2, Item 16) and
lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 17).
11. Raise cover weldment (Figure 2, Item 19) and secure to APU control box (Figure 2, Item 21) by rehooking retainer
(Figure 2, Item 1).
0056-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0056
Figure 2. APU Control Box Jumper Wires and Timer Harness Installation.
END OF TASK
Perform APU starting and check glow plug indicator for proper operation (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0056-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0057
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE JUMPER WIRES
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Intervehicular cables disconnected, wheels chocked
Sleeving, Electrical Insulation (WP 0170, Item 26) (WP 0013)
Solder (WP 0170, Item 30) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Lockwasher (4) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Lockwasher (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the hydraulic control module jumper wires.
0057-1
0057 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
Item 5) from hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 2). Carefully remove lower panel, with panel door (Figure 1,
Item 6) attached, out from under semitrailer and place on platform (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwashers.
Figure 1. Hydraulic Control Module Removal.
0057-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0057
3. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and tag and disconnect jumper wires (Figure 2, Item 8 and Item 10)
from four pressure switches (Figure 2, Item 11).
4. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 1), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 9), and wire (Figure 2, Item 8) from steering control
manifold (Figure 2, Item 7). Discard lockwasher.
5. Remove nut (Figure 2, Item 2) and tag and disconnect wire (Figure 2, Item 3) from pressure switch (Figure 2, Item 11).
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Avoid breathing these fumes. Work in a well-ventilated area or injury to
personnel may result.
CAUTION
6. Use soldering gun to remove heat shrink tubing (Figure 2, Item 13) and unsolder wires (Figure 2, Item 3 and Item 4)
from steering pressure indicator light (Figure 2, Item 12).
7. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and tag and disconnect socket connector (Figure 2, Item 6) from
W3 harness (Figure 2, Item 5).
Figure 2. Pressure Switches Removal.
END OF TASK
0057-3
0057 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Inspect hydraulic control module jumper wires for missing or unreadable wire markers. If defective, apply new markings
or replace wire markers. Use electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for proper wire markings.
2. Inspect hydraulic control module jumper wires for frayed or broken wires and loose terminal lugs. If defects exist, use
electrical repair kit and replace defective terminal lugs or entire jumper wire assembly.
3. Refer to WP 0146. Use electrical repair kit and measuring tape to fabricate new hydraulic control module jumper
wires as required.
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
1. Align ground lead of jumper wire (Figure 3, Item 8) with steering control manifold (Figure 3, Item 7) and secure in place
by loosely installing lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 9) and screw (Figure 3, Item 1).
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect wire (Figure 3, Item 3) to pressure switch
(Figure 3, Item 11) and secure with nut (Figure 3, Item 2).
WARNING
Soldering fumes are toxic. Avoid breathing these fumes. Work in a well-ventilated area or injury to
personnel may result.
CAUTION
3. Install heat shrink insulation over wires (Figure 3, Item 3 and Item 4). Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure
FO-1, and use soldering gun to solder wires (Figure 3, Item 3 and Item 4) to steering pressure indicator light
(Figure 3, Item 12). Use soldering torch kit to shrink heat shrink tubing (Figure 3, Item 13) onto soldered joints.
4. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and connect socket connector (Figure 3, Item 6) to W3 harness
(Figure 3, Item 5).
5. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect both jumper wires (Figure 3, Item 8 and Item 10)
to four pressure switches (Figure 3, Item 11). Tighten screw (Figure 3, Item 1).
0057-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0057
Figure 3. Pressure Switches Installation.

6. Use two people to carefully position lower panel (Figure 4, Item 5), with panel door (Figure 4, Item 6) attached, over
hydraulic control module (Figure 4, Item 2) on underside of semitrailer (Figure 4, Item 1). Secure with six lockwashers
(Figure 4, Item 4) and capscrews (Figure 4, Item 3).
Figure 4. Hydraulic Control Module Installation.
END OF TASK
0057-5
0057 TM 9-2330-381-13
Connect intervehicular cables, turn on semitrailer running lights, and check steering pressure indicator light for proper
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0057-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0058
FIELD MAINTENANCE
JUNCTION BOX JUMPER WIRES
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Intervehicular cables disconnected and wheels
Materials/Parts
chocked (WP 0013)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation for junction box jumper wires.
REMOVAL
1. Unscrew two captive screws (Figure 1, Item 2) and access cover (Figure 1, Item 1) from junction box TB1 (Figure 1,
Item 7).
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and tag and disconnect jumper wire (Figure 1, Item 8) from junction
box TB1 (Figure 1, Item 7) terminals TB1-YEL and TB1-BLK.
3. Unscrew two captive screws (Figure 1, Item 5) and remove access cover (Figure 1, Item 4) from junction box TB2
(Figure 1, Item 3).
4. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and tag and disconnect jumper wire (Figure 1, Item 6) from junction
box TB2 (Figure 1, Item 3) terminals TB2-BLU and TB2-BLK.
Figure 1. Junction Box TB1 and TB2 Removal.
END OF TASK
0058-1
0058 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Inspect junction box jumper wires for missing or unreadable wire markers. If defective, apply new markings or replace
wire markers. Use semitrailer electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 as a guide for proper wire markings.
2. Inspect junction box jumper wires for frayed or broken wires and loose terminal lugs. If defects exist, use electrical repair
kit and replace defective terminal lugs or entire jumper wire assembly.
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
3. Inspect terminal boards TB1 (Figure 2, Item 1) and TB2 (Figure 2, Item 2) for missing screws, breaks, cracks, and
excessive corrosion. If corroded, clean using dry cleaning solvent as required. If defective, replace as required.
4. Refer to WP 0164. Use electrical repair kit and measuring tape to fabricate new junction box jumper wires as required.
0058-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0058
Figure 2. Junction Box TB1 and TB2 Repair.
END OF TASK
0058-3
0058 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect jumper wire (Figure 3, Item 6) to junction box TB2
(Figure 3, Item 3) terminals TB2-BLU and TB2-BLK.
2. Install access cover (Figure 3, Item 4) to junction box TB2 (Figure 3, Item 3) and secure with two captive screws
(Figure 3, Item 5).
3. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect jumper wire (Figure 3, Item 8) to junction box TB1
(Figure 3, Item 7) terminals TB1-YEL and TB1-BLK.
4. Install access cover (Figure 3, Item 1) to junction box TB1 (Figure 3, Item 7) and secure with two captive screws
(Figure 3, Item 2).
Figure 3. Junction Box TB1 and TB2 Installation.
END OF TASK
Connect intervehicular cables, turn on semitrailer running lights, and check semitrailer running lights and blackout lights
for proper operation (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0058-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0059
FIELD MAINTENANCE
W1 HARNESS
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Gooseneck component assembly removed and W1 harness
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) disconnected from gooseneck component assembly
terminal boards TB1 and TB2 (WP 0043)
Materials/Parts
Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23)
Suspension isolation valves located at four corners of
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33)
platform isolated (closed) (WP 0004)
Tape, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 35)
Lockwasher (1)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the W1 harness.
0059-1
0059 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Unscrew four captive screws (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove two covers (Figure 1, Item 4) from junction boxes TB1
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and tag and disconnect W1 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform
junction box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 1, Item 2) and TB2 (Figure 1, Item 10).
3. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 7) and lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 8) from junction box TB2 (Figure 1, Item 10) mounting
stud and remove white ground lead (Figure 1, Item 9) of W1 harness (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwasher.
4. Remove screw (Figure 1, Item 6) securing white/blue ground lead (Figure 1, Item 5) of W1 harness (Figure 1, Item 1).
5. Cut and remove tiedown straps (Figure 1, Item 11) from W1 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) as required. Discard tiedown straps.
6. Remove all loop clamps from W1 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) (WP 0053).
7. Remove W1 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from semitrailer.
Figure 1. W1 Junction Boxes Removal.
END OF TASK
0059-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0059
REPAIR
1. Inspect twenty-one terminal lugs (Figure 2, Item 1) and one terminal lug (Figure 2, Item 5) for looseness. Clean as required
by wiping with a wiping rag. If loose, use electrical repair kit and remove and replace terminal lugs as required.
2. Inspect loom (Figure 2, Item 4) for breaks, cracks, and damage. If defective, replace loom portions as required. Use
electrical tape at split end of loom as required.
3. Inspect for missing or unreadable harness (Figure 2, Item 3) and twenty-two wire markers (Figure 2, Item 2). If defective,
apply new markings or replace markers. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for proper wire markings.
Figure 2. Terminal Lugs Repair.
END OF TASK
0059-3
0059 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
NOTE
• Pull W1 harness out approximately 12 in. (30 cm) past front of gooseneck prior to securing the cable clamps.
• Place tiedown straps (Figure 3, Item 11) approximately as shown to secure wiring harness to air lines near the air
filter. Additional tiedown straps may be installed as required.
1. Install W1 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) onto gooseneck and platform.
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect W1 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to platform junction
box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 3, Item 2) and TB2 (Figure 3, Item 10).
3. Attach white/blue ground lead (Figure 3, Item 5) of W1 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to junction box TB2 (Figure 3, Item 10)
using screw (Figure 3, Item 6).
4. Attach white ground lead (Figure 3, Item 9) of W1 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to junction box TB2 (Figure 3, Item 10)
mounting stud with lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 8) and nut (Figure 3, Item 7).
5. Reinstall new tiedown straps (Figure 3, Item 11) as required.
6. Secure harness in place by installing harness back into loop clamps (WP 0053).
7. Install two covers (Figure 3, Item 4) and secure with four captive screws (Figure 3, Item 3).
Figure 3. W1 Harness to Gooseneck and Platform.
END OF TASK
Connect intervehicular cables and check all lights on semitrailer for proper operation (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0059-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0060
FIELD MAINTENANCE
W2 HARNESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Intervehicular cable disconnected (WP 0013)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) Suspension isolation valves located at four corners of
Tape, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 35) platform isolated (closed) (WP 0004)
GENERAL INFORMATION
0060-1
0060 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
2. Refer to electrical schematic Figure FO-1 and tag and disconnect W2 harness (Figure 1, Item 3) from platform junction
3. Cut and remove tiedown straps from W2 harness (Figure 1, Item 3) as required. Discard tiedown straps.
Figure 1. Junction Boxes TB1 and TB2 Removal.
END OF TASK
0060-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0060
REPAIR
1. Inspect terminal lugs (Figure 2, Item 4) and electrical plug connectors (Figure 2, Item 3) for looseness. Clean as required
by wiping with a wiping rag. If loose or defective, apply new markings and use electrical repair kit to replace terminal
lugs and/or electrical plug connectors.
2. Inspect loom for breaks, cracks, and damage. If defective, replace loom portions as required. Use electrical tape at split
ends of loom as required.
3. Inspect for missing or unreadable harness in ten places (Figure 2, Item 2) and wire markers in seventeen places (Figure 2,
Item 1). If defective, apply new markings or replace markers. Use semitrailer electrical schematic rear foldout Figure
FO-1 as a guide for proper wire markings.
END OF TASK
0060-3
0060 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install W2 harness (Figure 3, Item 3) onto platform.
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect socket connectors for W2 harness (Figure 3, Item 3)
to platform lights.
3. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 and reconnect W2 harness (Figure 3, Item 3) to platform junction
4. Reinstall new tiedown straps as required.
6. Install two covers (Figure 3, Item 2) on junction boxes (Figure 3, Item 5 and Item 4), and then secure with four captive
Figure 3. W2 Harness Installation.
END OF TASK
Connect intervehicular cables and check all lights on semitrailer for proper operation (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0060-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0061
FIELD MAINTENANCE
W3 HARNESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Suspension isolation valves located at four corners of
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) platform isolated (closed) (WP 0004)
GENERAL INFORMATION
0061-1
0061 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and tag and
disconnect W3 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform junction box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 1, Item 5) and TB2
(Figure 1, Item 4).
3. Tag and disconnect socket connectors for W3 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform lighting.
5. Cut and remove tiedown straps from W3 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) as required. Discard tiedown straps.
Figure 1. W3 Harness Removal.
END OF TASK
0061-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0061
REPAIR
1. Inspect terminal lugs (Figure 2, Item 4) and electrical plug connectors (Figure 2, Item 3) for frayed or broken wires and
looseness. Clean as required by wiping with a wiping rag. If defective, use electrical repair kit and replace as required.
2. Inspect loom for breaks, cracks, and damage. If defective, repair defective loom as required. Use electrical tape at split
3. Inspect for missing or unreadable harness and wire markers (Figure 2, Item 2 and Item 1). If defective, apply new markings
or replace markers. Use electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED
lights for proper wire markings.
END OF TASK
0061-3
0061 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and
reconnect socket connectors for W3 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to platform lighting.
3. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and reconnect
W3 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to platform junction box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 3, Item 5) and TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4).
NOTE
Tiedown straps should be placed in a logical position to secure wiring harness.
6. Install two covers (Figure 3, Item 3) on junction boxes TB1 (Figure 3, Item 5) and TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4) and secure
with four captive screws (Figure 3, Item 2).
Figure 3. Platform Junction Boxes Installation.
END OF TASK
Couple semitrailer and towing vehicle (WP 0013) and check lights for proper operation.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0061-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 00062
FIELD MAINTENANCE
W4 HARNESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Rag,Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) Suspension isolation valves located at four corners of
Tape, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 35) platform isolated (closed) (WP 0004)
GENERAL INFORMATION
0062-1
00062 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and tag
and disconnect W4 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform junction box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 1, Item 5).
and TB2 (Figure 1, Item 4).
3. Tag and disconnect socket connectors for W4 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform lighting.
5. Cut and remove all tiedown straps from W4 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) as required. Discard tiedown straps.
6. Remove W4 harness (Figure 1, Item 1) from semitrailer platform.
END OF TASK
0062-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 00062
REPAIR
1. Inspect terminal lugs (Figure 2, Item 3) and electrical plug connectors (Figure 2, Item 4) for frayed or broken wires
and looseness. Clean lugs as required by wiping with a wiping rag. If lugs are defective, use electrical repair kit to
replace lugs as required.
3. Inspect for missing or unreadable harness and wire markers (Figure 2, Item 2 and Item 1). If defective, apply new markings
or replace markers. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for
LED lights for proper wire markings.
Figure 2. Wire and Terminal Lugs Repair.
END OF TASK
0062-3
00062 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and
reconnect socket connectors for W4 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to platform lighting.
3. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout Figure FO-1 for incandescent lights or Figure FO-1.1 for LED lights and reconnect
W4 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to platform junction box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 3, Item 5) and TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4).
NOTE
Place tiedown straps in a logical position to secure wiring harness.
6. Install two covers for incandescent lights or for LED lights and reconnect W4 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) to platform
junction box terminal boards TB1 (Figure 3, Item 5) and TB2 (Figure 3, Item 4) and secure covers (Figure 3, Item 3) with
four captive screws (Figure 3, Item 2).
END OF TASK
Couple semitrailer and towing vehicle (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0062-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0063
FIELD MAINTENANCE
W5 HARNESS (SOME SEMITRAILERS)
INITIAL SETUP:
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Gooseneck adjusted fully down or coupled to tractor
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) (WP 0007 and WP 0013)
Locknuts (2)
GENERAL
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the W5 harness (some semitrailers).
0063-1
0063 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck
directly in front of spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take
EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip over it. Failure to follow this warning
may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
1. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout FO-1 and disconnect solar panel leads (Figure 1, Item 1) from W5 harness
(Figure 1, Item 7). At battery, disconnect W5 harness leads (Figure 1, Item 4) from battery terminals (Figure 1, Item 3).
2. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, item 6), screws (Figure 1, Item 2), and clamps (Figure 1, Item 5) from gooseneck
(Figure 1, Item 8). Discard locknuts.
0063-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0063
3. Cut tiedown straps securing W5 harness (Figure 2 item 1) to W1 harness (Figure 2 item 2). Remove W5 harness from
gooseneck (Figure 2 item 3).

END OF TASK
REPAIR
1. Inspect terminal lugs and electrical plug connectors for frayed or broken wires and looseness. Clean lugs by wiping with a
rag. If lugs are defective, use electrical repair kit to replace lugs as required.
3. Inspect for missing or unreadable harness and wire markers. If defective, apply new markers or replace markers. Use
electrical schematic rear foldout FO-1.1 for proper wire markings.
END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
1. Position W5 harness (Figure 3, Item 1) in gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 3) and loosely fasten W5 harness to W1 harness
(Figure 3, Item 2) with tiedown straps.

0063-3
0063 TM 9-2330-381-13
2. Refer to electrical schematic rear foldout FO-1.1 and connect solar panel leads (Figure 4, Item 1) to W5 harness
(Figure 4, Item 7). At battery, connect W5 harness leads (Figure 4, Item 4) to battery terminals (Figure 4, Item 3).
3. Install two clamps (Figure 4, Item 5) to W5 harness (Figure 4, Item 7) and secure clamps using two screws (Figure 4,
4. Secure W5 harness (Figure 4, Item 7) and W1 harness to gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 8) (electrical schematic rear foldout
FO-1) using tiedown straps as required.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0063-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0064
FIELD MAINTENANCE
APU WIRING HARNESS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Battery ground wire removed from APU pump flange
Rag,Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) (WP 0053)
Sealant, Adhesive (WP 0170, Item 24) Jumper wires removed from APU control box (WP 0058)
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) wiring harness.
REMOVAL
1. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout FO-4 as a guide to tag and disconnect APU wiring harness (Figure 1, Item 1)
from APU starter (WP 0146), vanaxial fan (WP 0144), glow plug (WP 0129), and oil pressure sending unit (WP 0133).
Figure 1. APU Wiring Harness Removal.
0064-1
0064 TM 9-2330-381-13
2. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout FO-4 as a guide to tag and disconnect APU wiring harness (Figure 2, Item 1)
from APU control box starter switch, glow plug indicator, low oil pressure indicator, current limiter, and current
rectifier if applicable.
3. Refer to WP 0140 and remove all loop clamps from APU wiring harness.
4. Remove APU wiring harnesses (Figure 2, Item 1) from semitrailer gooseneck.
Figure 2. APU Harness at Control Box Removal.

END OF TASK
0064-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0064
REPAIR
1. Inspect APU control box wiring harness (Figure 3, Item 2), terminal lugs (Figure 3, Item 10), connectors (Figure 3, Item 4),
two-position connector (Figure 3, Item 5), terminal lug (Figure 3, Item 3), and APU wiring harness (Figure 3, Item 1) for
frayed or broken wires and looseness. Clean parts as required by wiping with a wiping rag. If parts are defective, use
electrical repair kit to replace terminal lugs, electrical plug connectors, and two-position connector as required.
2. When repairing connector (Figure 3, Item 4), apply sealant (Figure 3, Item 7) around perimeter of terminal (Figure 3, Item 8)
and sleeve (Figure 3, Item 9) as shown, and then slide shell (Figure 3, Item 6) into position and allow sealant to dry.
3. Inspect both male and female harness connectors of APU control box harness (Figure 3, Item 2) and APU wiring harness
(Figure 3, Item 1) for frayed or broken wires and looseness. Clean connectors as required by wiping with a wiping rag. If
connectors are defective, replace the applicable APU wiring harness (Figure 3, Item 2 and Item 1) as required.
Figure 3. APU Control Box Wiring Harness Inspection and Repair.

END OF TASK
0064-3
0064 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install both APU wiring harnesses (Figure 4, Item 1) onto gooseneck.
2. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout FO-4 as a guide to reconnect APU wiring harness (Figure 4, Item 1) to APU
control box starter switch, glow plug indicator, oil pressure indicator, current limiter, and current rectifier, if applicable.
Figure 4. APU Wiring Harness Installation.
0064-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0064
3. Use APU electrical schematic rear foldout FO-4 as a guide to reconnect APU wiring harness (Figure 5, Item 1) to APU
starter (WP 0146), vanaxial fan (WP 0144), glow plug (WP 0129), and oil pressure sending unit (WP 0133).
Figure 5. APU Wiring Harness Installation.
NOTE
Tiedown straps should be placed in a logical position to secure wiring harness.
5. Secure both harnesses in place by installing each harness into loop clamps (WP 0140).
END OF TASK
Reinstall jumper wires to APU control box (WP 0058).
Reconnect battery ground wire to APU pump flange (WP 0053).
Start and run APU and check for proper operation (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0064-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY/BOGIE
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Setscrew (1)
Handle, Ext SPNSN ISOL Valve (WP 0168, Item 1) Oil Seal (1)
Socket, Suspension Brg Nut (WP 0168, Item 3) Preformed Packing (1)
Lifting Strap (2) (WP 0168, Item 25) Personnel Required
Truck, Wrecker M984 (WP 0168, Item 26) 3
Chain Assembly, 1/2 in. 11 ft L (WP 0168, Item 30)
Gooseneck isolation valve handle pulled out to ADJUST
Materials/Parts position (WP 0004)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Suspension shutoff valve handle pulled out to ADJUST
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) position (WP 0004)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Tape, Masking (WP 0170, Item 36) (WP 0007)
Locknut (1) Brakes caged for affected suspension assembly (WP 0023)
Semitrailer parking brakes applied (WP 0004)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the suspension assembly/bogie.
0065-1
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if the system has been in operation. Allow the system time to cool before performing
maintenance, or severe injury or burns to personnel may result.
• Hydraulic fluid may be under pressure. Use caution when disconnecting hydraulic lines or components. Face
shields or goggles must be worn or serious injury to personnel may result.
• Hydraulic fluid can be absorbed through the skin. Wear long sleeves, gloves, goggles, or face shield. If hydraulic
fluid gets into eyes, flush them immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on
skin, thoroughly wash with soap and water. Wash hands prior to eating or smoking.
• The suspension assembly, herein after referred to as bogie, weighs approximately 2,500 lb (1135 kg). Extreme
caution must be used during removal and installation of the bogie or serious injury to personnel or damage to
• The bogie must be supported with an overhead lifting device during removal and installation procedure or
serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result.
• Suspension isolation valves must be closed at four corners of the platform (no. 1 and no. 5 curbside and no. 1
and no. 5 streetside bogies). If the affected bogie is one of the four corner bogies, close the valve at the next
adjacent bogie. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
Use this task for access only for five-year service procedure.
1. Use isolation valve handle extension to isolate bogies at four corners by closing suspension isolation valves (Figure 1,
Item 1); ensure handles face outboard from center of platform.
2. Loosen and remove setscrew (Figure 1, Item 4) from spanner nut (Figure 1, Item 3). Discard setscrew.
0065-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
WARNING
While installing spanner socket on spanner nut, use one person to hold spanner socket in place or the spanner
socket may fall. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
3. Install spanner socket (Figure 1, Item 5) onto spanner nut (Figure 1, Item 3). Use one person to hold spanner socket in place
and one person to install torque multiplier and torque wrench.
CAUTION
Threads on the platform spindle must be protected prior to removal of the lower suspension
bearing or damage to the spindle may result.
4. Loosen spanner nut (Figure 1, Item 3) until spanner socket (Figure 1, Item 5) can be turned by hand. Remove torque wrench
and torque multiplier from spanner socket, and then loosen spanner nut using a ratchet only.
5. Remove ratchet, spanner socket (Figure 1, Item 5), spanner nut (Figure 1, Item 3), and spacer (Figure 1, Item 2) from
platform spindle (Figure 1, Item 6).
CAUTION
Remove setscrew from spanner nut or damage to equipment may result.
6. Apply masking tape to the threads of the platform spindle (Figure 1, Item 6) to protect the threads from accidental damage.
Figure 1. Bogie View with Wheel Removed.

0065-3
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. For removal of no. 2, 3, 4, or 5 bogie connecting link, remove special pin (Figure 2, Item 4), nut (Figure 2, Item 5), and
capscrew (Figure 2, Item 2) from connecting link (Figure 2, Item 1).
CAUTION
Push steering or non-steering connecting link forward, toward the front of the semitrailer, to
allow the bogie to rotate, or damage to equipment may result.
8. Use pry bar to pry up and move connecting link (Figure 2, Item 1) off affected bogie (Figure 2, Item 3). Push connecting
link forward, away from bogie, and align and install capscrew (Figure 2, Item 2), nut (Figure 2, Item 5), and special pin
(Figure 2, Item 4) back onto connecting link for temporary storage.
Figure 2. Disconnecting Connecting Link on No. 2, 3, 4, or 5 Bogie.
0065-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
9. For removal of no. 1 bogie connecting link, remove special pin (Figure 3, Item 5), nut (Figure 3, Item 6), and capscrew
(Figure 3, Item 2) from connecting link (Figure 3, Item 1).
CAUTION
Push steering or non-steering connecting link forward, toward the front of the semitrailer, to
allow the bogie to rotate, or damage to equipment may result.
10. Use pry bar to pry up and move connecting link (Figure 3, Item 1) off affected bogie (Figure 3, Item 3). Push connecting
link forward, away from bogie, and align and install capscrew (Figure 3, Item 2), nut (Figure 3, Item 6), and special pin
(Figure 3, Item 5) back onto connecting link for temporary storage.
11. If no. 1 bogie connecting link (Figure 3, Item 1) was disconnected, remove preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 4) from
link. Discard preformed packing.
Figure 3. Disconnecting Connecting Link on No. 1 Bogie.
0065-5
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. Remove block clamp sections (Figure 4, Item 4) from two hydraulic hoses (Figure 4, Item 2) per steps a and b.
a. For bogies no. 1, 2, 3, or 5, remove capscrew (Figure 4, Item 3) and block clamp sections (Figure 4, Item 4) from bogie.
b. For bogie no. 4, remove locknut (Figure 4, Item 5), capscrew (Figure 4, Item 6), and block clamp sections (Figure 4,
Item 4) from bogie. Discard locknut.
13. Use isolation valve handle extension to open isolation valves (Figure 4, Item 1) at all four corners of platform (WP 0004).
14. Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005). Use measuring tape to lower platform height to approximately 41 in.
(108 cm) (WP 0008).
WARNING
Air system must be drained prior to pneumatic lines being disconnected or inadvertent operation of the
semitrailer brake valve during platform adjustments may result in injury to personnel.
15. Operate brake valve (WP 0004) several times until all reserve air is drained from air tanks.
16. At affected bogie, use isolation valve handle extension to close suspension isolation valve (Figure 4, Item 1); ensure
handle faces outboard from center of platform.
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent dirt, moisture, or
foreign material from entering the hydraulic or pneumatic systems, or damage to equipment may result.
17. Place drain pan (Figure 4, Item 10) under suspension isolation valve (Figure 4, Item 1). Tag and disconnect two hydraulic
hoses (Figure 4, Item 2) from suspension isolation valve at affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 9). Install caps/plugs into openings
on isolation valve. Place ends of hose into opening in drain pan and secure hose in place using masking tape.
18. Tag and disconnect two pneumatic hoses (Figure 4, Item 8) from two bulkhead fittings (Figure 4, Item 7). Install caps/plugs
into all openings.
0065-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
Figure 4. Block Clamp from Hydraulic Hoses Removal.
0065-7
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
When securing hook to upper suspension arm, ensure suspension chain does not contact any
hydraulic or pneumatic hoses. If contact is made, chafing or parting of a line/hose, loss of air brake
pressure, loss of hydraulic fluid, or damage to equipment may result.
19. Attach suspension chain (Figure 5, Item 4) to affected bogie (Figure 5, Item 9) as follows:
a. Attach top hook (Figure 5, Item 2) of suspension chain (Figure 5, Item 4), located along outboard side of bogie
(Figure 5, Item 9), beneath both hydraulic and pneumatic hoses (Figure 5, Item 3 and Item 6) into opening on top of
upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 1).
b. Attach bottom hook (Figure 5, Item 8) of suspension chain (Figure 5, Item 4) onto back end of square under axle
(Figure 5, Item 7), outboard of parking brake chamber (Figure 5, Item 5).
20. Raise platform (WP 0008) until bogie can be turned.
21. Start to turn bogie (Figure 5, Item 9) outboard, away from center of platform.
22. Continue to rotate bogie (Figure 5, Item 9) until axle is approximately parallel with side edge of platform.
Figure 5. Attach Suspension Chains for Removal.
0065-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
23. Position overhead lifting device (Figure 6, Item 1) over outboard edge of platform directly above upper suspension arm
(Figure 6, Item 3) of bogie (Figure 6, Item 4).
24. Use two lifting straps to pass one end of each lifting strap (Figure 6, Item 2) between upper suspension arm (Figure 6,
Item 3) and suspension cylinder (Figure 6, Item 5).
25. Continue to wrap lifting straps (Figure 6, Item 2) under all hoses a minimum of two times around upper suspension
arm (Figure 6, Item 3). Connect both ends of each lifting strap to overhead lifting device (Figure 6, Item 1). Take
up slack in lifting straps.
Figure 6. Bogie Removal.
0065-9
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
It may be necessary to use a crowbar to unseat lower bearing on bogie as overhead lifting device is lowered.
26. Use one person stationed at hydraulic control module to start to raise platform slowly (WP 0008). Second person must
insert crowbar (Figure 7, Item 6) above upper suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 2) to pry upper suspension arm downward,
away from spindle (Figure 7, Item 1). Use third person to lower overhead lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) slightly to
prevent upper suspension arm from rising with platform.
CAUTION
Extreme caution must be used to ensure that the upper suspension arm does not make contact
with the platform spindle or damage to equipment may result.
27. Continue to pry upward on crowbar (Figure 7, Item 6) and raise platform until upper suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 2)
is separated and clear of platform spindle (Figure 7, Item 1). Use isolation valve handle extension to close suspension
isolation valves at four corners of platform (WP 0004).
28. Remove two hydraulic hoses (Figure 7, Item 5) from drain pan and wrap hydraulic hoses and two pneumatic hoses
(Figure 7, Item 3) around upper suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 2).
WARNING
Personnel moving the bogie out from under the platform must not, at any time, use the caging bolt as a
holding device. The caging bolt is held in place by pressure from a spring in the brake chamber. If the caging
bolt becomes unseated from inside the brake chamber, serious injury or death to personnel may result.
29. With two people positioned at each set of dual tires on bogie (Figure 7, Item 7), and a third person guiding/operating
overhead lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4), slowly roll bogie out from under platform.
CAUTION
Alternate driving points on inner race of lower suspension bearing cone or damage to equipment may result.
30. Use hammer and brass drift to drive lower bearing cone (Figure 7, Item 10) and oil seal (Figure 7, Item 9) from upper
suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 2). Discard oil seal.
31. Remove suspension chain (Figure 7, Item 8) from bogie.
Figure 7. Prying Upper Suspension Arm from Spindle.

0065-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injury or death to personnel.
33. Use wiping rags to clean all grease from inside of upper suspension arm cavity, platform spindle, and associated parts.
Clean all parts using degreaser tank with cleaning solvent. Inspect upper suspension arm, platform spindle, upper and
lower bearing cups, lower bearing cone, spacer, and attaching hardware for cracks, scoring, gouges, bends, and corrosion.
Replace all defective parts.
34. Inspect suspension arm upper bearing cone, still on platform spindle, for defects. If defective, notify field maintenance.
35. Inspect threads on spindle for roughness and deformation. Use a thread file to dress threads as necessary to ensure
smooth reinstallation of spanner nut.
END OF TASK
0065-11
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use grease to lubricate handgun, and use lubricant-bearing packer to pack upper suspension bearing cone per lubrication
instructions (WP 0163).
2. Follow steps 3 through 5 if lifting straps (Figure 8, Item 5) were removed from bogie (Figure 8, Item 7).
3. Position overhead lifting device (Figure 8, Item 4) above upper suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 3) of bogie (Figure 8, Item 7).
4. Pass one end of each lifting strap (Figure 8, Item 5) between upper suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 3) and suspension
cylinder (Figure 8, Item 8).
5. Continue to wrap lifting straps (Figure 8, Item 5) a minimum of two times around suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 3) and
connect both ends of each lifting strap to overhead lifting device (Figure 8, Item 4). Take up slack in lifting strap until
upper cavity is level.
6. Remove masking tape from platform spindle (Figure 8, Item 1) and install spanner nut (Figure 8, Item 9) partially onto
spindle to protect threads. Continue to thread spanner nut onto platform spindle until nut is flush with bottom of spindle.
Discard masking tape.
WARNING
Personnel moving the bogie out from under the platform must not, at any time, use the caging
bolt as a holding device. The caging bolt is held in place by pressure from a spring in the brake
chamber. If the caging bolt becomes unseated from inside the brake chamber, injury to personnel
and damage to equipment may result.
7. With two people positioned at bogie (Figure 8, Item 7), and a third person to guide overhead lifting device (Figure 8, Item 4),
two people with bogie slowly roll bogie under platform and into alignment under platform spindle (Figure 8, Item 1).
8. Use crowbar (Figure 8, Item 2) to center bearing cavity in upper suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 3) within platform spindle
(Figure 8, Item 1).
9. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic hoses (Figure 8, Item 6) to allow suspension cylinder (Figure 8, Item 8) to
draw in air as suspension cylinder expands.
NOTE
• It may be necessary to use the crowbar to help start to raise the upper suspension arm as the overhead lifting device is
raised.
• Use the crowbar to pry the upper suspension arm upward, and use one of the dual sets of tires on the bogie to pry against.
• A floor jack placed under the bogie may be used to assist in aligning upper suspension arm with spindle.
10. Place crowbar (Figure 8, Item 2) just behind suspension cylinder (Figure 8, Item 8) and on top of one set of dual tires on
CAUTION
When raising upper suspension arm, ensure the upper suspension arm does not contact the
platform spindle or damage to equipment may result.
0065-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
NOTE
The following task requires three people: one person to operate the overhead lifting device; one person
to adjust the position of the upper suspension arm with a crowbar; and one person to check and assist
in alignment of the bogie’s upper suspension arm with the platform spindle.
11. Using one person to carefully push down on crowbar (Figure 8, Item 2) and one person operating overhead lifting device
(Figure 8, Item 4), start raising upper suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 3) onto platform spindle (Figure 8, Item 1).
CAUTION
The upper suspension arm must be raised slowly. Adjust the position of the arm as necessary to center
the upper suspension arm bearing cavity under the platform spindle to ensure the platform spindle
does not make contact with bearing cups, or damage to equipment may result.
12. Have two people continue to check and adjust position of upper suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 3) with crowbar (Figure 8,
Item 2), while third person continues to slowly raise overhead lifting device (Figure 8, Item 4) until upper suspension arm
raises onto platform spindle (Figure 8, Item 1).
Figure 8. Bogie Installation.
0065-13
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
If the platform must be lowered onto the bogie to seat the upper suspension arm bearing, use caution
not to apply too much force against the lifting straps and overhead lifting device. Excess force against
the lifting devices used to pull/hold the upper suspension arm upward can break the straps or strain
the lifting device, and injury to personnel and damage to equipment may result.
13. If necessary, carefully lower platform (WP 0008), as required, to facilitate final seating of upper bearing within upper
suspension arm. Once seated, shut down APU (WP 0005).
14. Remove spanner nut (Figure 9, Item 5) from spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
15. Align and install lower bearing cone (Figure 9, Item 8) on spindle (Figure 9, Item 9) by hand. Push up lower bearing cone
as far as possible.
16. Use ratchet and spanner socket (Figure 9, Item 4) to install spanner nut (Figure 9, Item 5) onto spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
Tighten spanner nut to seat upper suspension arm (Figure 9, Item 1) onto spindle.
17. Hold lower bearing cone (Figure 9, Item 8) by hand and remove ratchet, spanner socket (Figure 9, Item 4), and spanner nut
(Figure 9, Item 5).
CAUTION
Spacer must be centered; it must not be hung up on the lip of the spindle, or damage to equipment may result.
18. While holding lower bearing cone (Figure 9, Item 8) in place inside upper suspension arm (Figure 9, Item 1), install
spacer (Figure 9, Item 6) and spanner nut (Figure 9, Item 5).
19. Attach ratchet and spanner socket (Figure 9, Item 4) to spanner nut (Figure 9, Item 5) and tighten spanner nut to seat lower
suspension bearing cone (Figure 9, Item 8) into upper suspension arm (Figure 9, Item 1).
20. Use two people to continue to tighten spanner nut (Figure 9, Item 5) as much as possible. Remove spanner socket (Figure 9,
Item 4) and ratchet.
21. Use hammer to drive oil seal (Figure 9, Item 7) into upper suspension arm (Figure 9, Item 1).
22. Lower lifting device (Figure 9, Item 2) and remove lifting straps (Figure 9, Item 3) from upper suspension arm (Figure 9,
Item 1).
0065-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
Figure 9. Spanner Nut on Spindle Installation.
0065-15
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
23. Use two people to rotate bogie (Figure 10, Item 5) inboard to its original forward position, facing toward front of semitrailer.
24. Use two people, ratchet, torque wrench, torque multiplier, and spanner socket (Figure 10, Item 4) to torque spanner nut
(Figure 10, Item 2) to 850 lb-ft ±50 lb-ft (1153 Nm ±67 Nm) into upper suspension arm (Figure 10, Item 1).
25. Remove torque wrench, torque multiplier, and spanner socket (Figure 10, Item 4) from spanner nut (Figure 10, Item 2).
26. Install setscrew (Figure 10, Item 3) into spanner nut (Figure 10, Item 2).
0065-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
27. Ensure bogie (Figure 11, Item 3) is positioned in original forward position, facing toward front of semitrailer.
28. For no. 1 bogie (Figure 11, Item 3) only, align and install preformed packing (Figure 11, Item 6) onto bogie.
29. Remove special pin (Figure 11, Item 5), nut (Figure 11, Item 4), and capscrew (Figure 11, Item 2) from connecting link
(Figure 11, Item 1). Align and install connecting link onto linkage attaching point on bogie (Figure 11, Item 3). Secure in
place by installing capscrew and nut.
30. Use torque wrench to torque nut (Figure 11, Item 4) to 205 lb-ft (278 Nm). Continue to tighten nut until first available slot is
aligned with hole and special pin (Figure 11, Item 5) can be installed.
0065-17
0065 TM 9-2330-381-13
31. Reconnect two hydraulic hoses (Figure 12, Item 2) to suspension isolation valve (Figure 12, Item 1).
32. Secure two hydraulic hoses (Figure 12, Item 2) with block clamps (Figure 12, Item 4) as follows:
a. For bogies (Figure 12, Item 9) no. 1, 2, 3, and 5, install sections of block clamp (Figure 12, Item 4) over both hydraulic
hoses (Figure 12, Item 2) and secure block clamp with capscrew (Figure 12, Item 3) and locknut (Figure 12, Item 5).
Torque capscrew to 70 to 80 in.-lb. (7.9 to 9.0 Nm).
b. For bogie no. 4, install sections of block clamps (Figure 12, Item 4) over both hydraulic hoses (Figure 12, Item 2) and
secure block clamps with capscrew (Figure 12, Item 6) and locknut (Figure 12, Item 5). Torque capscrew to 70 to 80
in.-lb. (7.9 to 9.0 Nm).
33. Remove caps/plugs and oil drain pan (Figure 12, Item 10), and reconnect two pneumatic hoses (Figure 12, Item 8) to two
bulkhead fittings (Figure 12, Item 7).
Figure 12. Pneumatic Hoses to Bulkhead Fittings Installation.
0065-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0065
34. Couple tractor and semitrailer to recharge semitrailer air brake system (WP 0013). Start APU (WP 0005).
35. Use isolation valve handle extension to open suspension isolation valves (Figure 13, Item 1) at four corners of platform
(WP 0004); ensure handles are pushed inward facing toward front of semitrailer.
36. Open suspension isolation valve (Figure 13, Item 1) at affected bogie (Figure 13, Item 2); ensure handle is pushed inward
facing front of semitrailer (WP 0004).
Figure 13. Affected Bogie Installation and Adjustment.

37. Continue to lower platform (WP 0008) to lowest suggested height, and then raise and lower platform several times to
bleed any air trapped in suspension cylinder.
38. Adjust platform (WP 0008) to normal running height of 43 in. (109 cm).
END OF TASK
Perform required lubrication to the bogie (WP 0163).
Bleed suspension hydraulic circuit as required (WP 0041).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0065-19/20 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SUSPENSION CYLINDER
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31)
Removal Tool (WP 0164, Item F-15) Strap, Tiedown, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 33)
Handle, Ext, SPNSN ISOL Valve (WP 0168, Item 1) Ring Spacer Assembly (4)
Mandrel, Suspension (WP 0168, Item 5) Lockwasher (6)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Locknut (1)
Chain Assembly, 1/2 in. 11 ft L (WP 0168, Item 30) Locknut (1)
Locknut (1)
Materials/Parts
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Personnel Required
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) 2
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16)
Sealing Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) Outer/inner wheel removed (WP 0079)
Inner/inner wheel removed (WP 0081)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the suspension cylinder.
0066-1
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance, or injury to personnel may result.
• Hydraulic fluid may be under pressure. Two wrenches must be used when disconnecting hydraulic lines or
components, or injury to personnel and damage to equipment may result.
hydraulic fluid gets into eyes, flush immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on
skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking.
1. Raise platform height to 50 in. (127 cm) (WP 0008). Shut down Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).
2. Use isolation valve handle extension to close all suspension isolation valves (WP 0004).
3. Place hydraulic floor jack (Figure 1, Item 4) under lower suspension arm (Figure 1. Item 6) and operate floor jack until it
makes firm contact with lower suspension arm.
WARNING
The hydraulic lines and cylinder may be under pressure. Use caution when loosening hydraulic lines to avoid
any spraying of hydraulic fluid. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
0066-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
CAUTION
When disconnecting hydraulic lines and fittings, it is important to use two wrenches, one to hold
the fitting and one to turn the hose, or damage to equipment may result.
4. Place drain pan (Figure 1, Item 7) under straight adapter fittings (Figure 1, Item 1) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 1,
Item 8) and proceed as follows:
a. Use two wrenches to slowly loosen two hydraulic hoses (Figure 1, Item 2) enough so that pressure will bleed from
suspension cylinder (Figure 1, Item 5) and hydraulic hoses.
b. Hold hoses in place once fluid starts to bleed and allow all pressure to vent before removing hydraulic hoses (Figure 1,
Item 2) from straight adapter fittings (Figure 1, Item 1).
5. Operate hydraulic floor jack (Figure 1, Item 4) and raise lower suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 6) enough to allow
suspension chain (Figure 1, Item 3) to be removed.
CAUTION
or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system, or damage to equipment may result.
6. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic hoses (Figure 1, Item 2) from straight adapter fittings (Figure 1, Item 1) on suspension
isolation valve (Figure 1, Item 8). Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 1. Hydraulic Hose Removal.
0066-3
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 13), block clamp (Figure 2, Item 14), and, if necessary, self-locking nut (Figure 2, Item 1)
(no. 4 bogie only) from bogie. If removed, discard self-locking nut.
8. Tag and disconnect two air hoses (Figure 2, Item 5) from fittings (Figure 2, Item 4) at bulkhead. Install caps/plugs into
opening/fittings.
9. Remove six capscrews (Figure 2, Item 7), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 6), hose shield (Figure 2, Item 8), and hose shield
(Figure 2, Item 18) from upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 9). Discard lockwashers.
10. Mark location of both hose clamps (Figure 2, Item 16) and hose clamps (Figure 2, Item 3) on hydraulic hoses (Figure 2,
Item 5).
11. Remove two locknuts (Figure 2, Item 11), washers (Figure 2, Item 12), capscrews (Figure 2, Item 15), and hose clamps
(Figure 2, Item 16) from upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 9). Discard locknuts.
12. Remove two hose clamps (Figure 2, Item 3) and protective molding (Figure 2, Item 2) from two hydraulic hoses (Figure 2,
Item 17) and air hoses (Figure 2, Item 5).
13. Lay both sets of hydraulic hoses (Figure 2, Item 17) and air hoses (Figure 2, Item 5) in a straight line forward of lower
suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 10).
Figure 2. Upper Suspension Arm Removal.
0066-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
14. Mark locations of all electrical tiedown straps (Figure 3, Item 4), and mark starting and ending points for each protective
loom (Figure 3, Item 6 and Item 3) on each hose with chalk. Cut and remove all accessible electrical tiedown straps.
15. Remove locknut (Figure 3, Item 1) and loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 7) from skid assembly (Figure 3, Item 2). Remove
two hydraulic hoses (Figure 3, Item 5) from skid assembly. Discard locknut.
Figure 3. Electrical Tiedown Strap Locations.
0066-5
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Use external retaining ring pliers to remove two retaining rings (Figure 4, Item 2) from upper pin (Figure 4, Item 3).
Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 4, Item 1) from upper pin.
17. Use sledge hammer and removal tool to drive upper pin (Figure 4, Item 3) out of upper suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 12)
and suspension cylinder (Figure 4, Item 6).
NOTE
As the suspension cylinder is lowered out of the upper suspension arm, ring spacer assemblies
will probably fall to the ground.
18. Once upper pin (Figure 4, Item 3) has been removed with removal tool (Figure 4, Item 4), lower hydraulic floor jack
(Figure 4, Item 11), compress suspension cylinder (Figure 4, Item 6) fully, and then pull on suspension cylinder so that
cylinder rests back against axle (Figure 4, Item 13).
19. If the two ring spacer assemblies (Figure 4, Item 5) fall when moving suspension cylinder (Figure 4, Item 6), pick up
and discard ring spacer assemblies.
20. Cut and remove electrical tiedown straps (Figure 4, Item 8) from loom (Figure 4, Item 9). Remove skid assembly (Figure 4,
Item 14) from loom.
CAUTION
The ends of each hydraulic hose connected to the suspension cylinder line fracture valve do not
have swivel fittings. During removal, each entire hose must be turned counterclockwise at the
same rate as the end fitting is turned or damage to equipment may result.
21. Use one person to loosen each hose and one person to turn each hose (Figure 4, Item 7) counterclockwise. Tag and
disconnect two hydraulic hoses from line fracture valve (Figure 4, Item 10).
22. Remove two hydraulic hoses (Figure 4, Item 7) from bogie. Measure and document hole in loom (Figure 4, Item 9) for
skid assembly. Remove loom from both hydraulic hoses.
Figure 4. Upper Pin Removal.
0066-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
23. Use external retaining ring pliers to remove two retaining rings (Figure 5, Item 11) from lower pin (Figure 5, Item 9).
Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 5, Item 10) from lower pin.
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when attempting to remove lower pin or damage to equipment may result.
If lower pin cannot be removed after several attempts, notify field maintenance.
24. Use sledge hammer and removal tool (Figure 5, Item 5), using moderate driving force, to drive lower pin (Figure 5, Item 9)
out of lower suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 12) and suspension cylinder (Figure 5, Item 4). If lower pin cannot be removed
after several attempts, perform procedures in WP 0150 to remove pin.
WARNING
The suspension cylinder weighs approximately 85 lb (39 kg) empty. Two people are required to lift
suspension cylinder out of the lower suspension arm, or injury to personnel may result.
25. If necessary, lower hydraulic floor jack (Figure 5, Item 8), and using two people, remove suspension cylinder (Figure 5,
Item 4) from lower suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 12).
26. Remove and discard two ring spacer assemblies (Figure 5, Item 3) from suspension cylinder (Figure 5, Item 4) or lower
suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 12).
27. Mark location of hose clamp (Figure 5, Item 16) on two air hoses (Figure 5, Item 1). Remove locknut (Figure 5, Item 14),
washer (Figure 5, Item 15), and hose clamp from axle (Figure 5, Item 17). Discard locknut.
28. Tag and disconnect two air hoses (Figure 5, Item 1) from elbow fittings (Figure 5, Item 7) on brake chamber (Figure 5, Item 6).
29. Remove two air hoses (Figure 5, Item 1) from lower suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 12). Install caps/plugs into
openings/fittings. Cut and remove electrical tiedown straps (Figure 5, Item 2) from loom (Figure 5, Item 13), if necessary,
and remove loom from each air hose.
Figure 5. Removal of Two Retaining Rings.
0066-7
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
30. Remove two setscrews (Figure 6, Item 2) and bushings (Figure 6, Item 1) from suspension cylinder (Figure 6, Item 3).
Figure 6. Removal of Setscrews and Bushings.

END OF TASK
REPAIR
WARNING
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141 to 198°F (61 to 92°C) and for Type lll it is 200 to
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
0066-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
1. Use degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent to clean suspension cylinder, upper and lower suspension arms, upper
and lower pins, and attaching hardware. Crocus cloth may be used to remove any excess buildup on upper or lower pins.
2. Use a 1/8 in. (0.3 cm) wire to work dirt out of lubrication fitting and grease holes in center and at end of lower pin.
3. Clean bore of bearings in cylinder with a crocus cloth and solvent. Use welding tip cleaner set to clean out two grease
holes and grease groove in bore of bearing.
4. After bearings and pin have been cleaned, install lubrication fitting into lower pin and install lower pin into lower cylinder
bearing. Use lubricating handgun to apply grease to lubrication fitting. If grease does not come out between spherical
bearing and outer shell of bearing, more cleaning is necessary.
5. Inspect hoses (Figure 7 and Figure 8 ) for defects, kinks, chafing, and deterioration. If one or more hydraulic and/or air
hoses need to be replaced, proceed with next four steps.
6. Place defective hose(s) on a workbench so that each hose is flat and straight.
7. Obtain replacement hydraulic hose(s) or fabricate replacement air hose(s) (WP 0074 or WP 0124).
8. Lay replacement hose(s) next to defective hose(s).
9. Transfer all chalk marks made on defective hose(s) to same locations on replacement hose(s) or mark new hoses as
indicated on illustration.
Figure 7. Inspecting Hydraulic Hoses for Defects.
Figure 8. Inspecting Air Hoses for Defects.
0066-9
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Adhesives, solvents, and sealing compounds may burn easily, may give off harmful vapors, and are harmful
to skin and clothing. Keep away from open flames and use in well-ventilated area. If adhesive, solvent,
or sealing compound gets on skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap and water.
• On direct contact, uncured silicone sealant irritates eyes. In case of contact, flush eyes with water and
seek medical attention. In case of skin contact, wipe off and flush with water.
10. Apply locking compound to two setscrews (Figure 9, Item 2) and two bushings (Figure 9, Item 1). Install setscrews
and bushings in suspension cylinder (Figure 9, Item 3).
Figure 9. Installation of Setscrews and Bushings.

END OF TASK
0066-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
INSTALLATION
1. Install two looms (Figure 10, Item 3) on air hoses (Figure 10, Item 1) at positions previously marked.
2. Secure each loom (Figure 10, Item 3) in place on each air hose (Figure 10, Item 1) by installing one electrical tiedown strap
(Figure 10, Item 2) onto each end of loom approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm) from each end of loom.
3. Route air hoses (Figure 10, Item 1) through knee joint for lower suspension arm (Figure 10, Item 16) and under inner
casting mounts for lower cylinder pin (Figure 10, Item 15).
4. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect two air hoses (Figure 10, Item 1) to elbow fittings (Figure 10, Item 14) on
brake chamber (Figure 10, Item 13).
5. Install hose clamp (Figure 10, Item 6) over both air hoses (Figure 10, Item 1) at position previously marked. Secure clamp in
place with washer (Figure 10, Item 4) and locknut (Figure 10, Item 5).
CAUTION
The ends of each hydraulic hose connected to the suspension cylinder line fracture valve do not
have swivel fittings. During installation, each hose must be turned clockwise at the same rate
as the end fitting is turned or damage to equipment may result.
6. Position suspension hydraulic cylinder (Figure 10, Item 10) on ground near lower suspension arm (Figure 10, Item 16).
7. Remove caps/plugs installed and use one person to tighten each hydraulic hose (Figure 10, Item 11) using two wrenches,
and one person to turn each hose clockwise to connect two hydraulic hoses (Figure 10, Item 11) to fittings on suspension
cylinder line fracture valve (Figure 10, Item 9).
8. Install loom (Figure 10, Item 3) on both hydraulic hoses (Figure 10, Item 11) at position previously marked. Secure
loom in place by installing one electrical tiedown strap (Figure 10, Item 2) onto each end of loom approximately 1 in.
(2.5 cm) from each end of loom.
9. Install skid assembly (Figure 10, Item 12) at position previously identified and secure with loop clamp (Figure 10, Item 7)
and locknut (Figure 10, Item 8).
Figure 10. Loom Installation.
0066-11
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
Each ring spacer is made up of two pieces. Ensure both pieces remain together or equipment damage may
result. Use suspension mandrel to hold ring spacer assemblies in place. Ensure ring spacer assemblies
are tightly compressed on tool or there will not be enough clearance for installation.
10. Insert suspension mandrel (Figure 11, Item 3) through lower bushing sleeve (Figure 11, Item 4) on suspension cylinder
(Figure 11, Item 2). Install two ring spacer assemblies (Figure 11, Item 1) onto lower bushing sleeve of cylinder.
CAUTION
When compressing ring spacer assemblies onto spherical bearings, ensure the tapered part
of the seal fits the spherical bearing and the ring spacer is compressed against the bearing,
or damage to the ring spacer assemblies may result.
NOTE
Two people are required for this step.
11. Using two people, one person must carefully compress two ring spacer assemblies (Figure 11, Item 1) onto lower bushing
sleeve (Figure 11, Item 4) of suspension cylinder (Figure 11, Item 2) while a second person tightens suspension mandrel
(Figure 11. Item 3) to hold both spacers in place on lower bearing.
Figure 11. Before and After Suspension Mandrels and Ring Spacers (Lower) Insertion.
0066-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
CAUTION
• When installing suspension cylinder into lower suspension arm casting, ensure ring spacer assemblies do
not work loose or become misaligned. If spacers are misaligned or work loose, stop installation and remove
cylinder, or damage to ring spacer assemblies may result. It may take a few attempts to accomplish proper
ring spacer installation.
• When installing suspension cylinder into lower suspension arm, ensure the cylinder does not contact, pinch, or
chafe any hydraulic or pneumatic hoses, or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
• During installation of the cylinder, one person should observe the position of the cylinder by looking through the hole
in the sides of the lower suspension arm for the lower pin.
• During installation, the suspension cylinder can rest against the lower suspension arm to help support the cylinder.
12. Use two people with hydraulic jack (Figure 12, Item 7) to maneuver suspension cylinder (Figure 12, Item 3) into alignment
with lower suspension arm (Figure 12, Item 11). Carefully lower cylinder into lower suspension arm. Check condition of
ring spacer assemblies (Figure 12, Item 6) during entire installation.
13. While checking position of ring spacer assemblies (Figure 12, Item 6) and suspension cylinder (Figure 12, Item 3), make
any required adjustments to align first ring spacer assembly with hole in lower suspension arm (Figure 12, Item 11).
Loosen suspension mandrel (Figure 12, Item 5).
14. Apply grease to lower pin (Figure 12, Item 10).
15. With ring spacer assemblies (Figure 12, Item 6) aligned, install lower pin (Figure 12, Item 10) into lower suspension arm
(Figure 12, Item 11). Use soft-faced hammer to slowly drive lower pin through lower suspension arm and suspension
cylinder (Figure 12, Item 3), driving suspension mandrel (Figure 12, Item 5) out of cylinder.
16. Continue to drive lower pin (Figure 12, Item 10) through suspension cylinder (Figure 12, Item 3) and lower suspension arm
(Figure 12, Item 11). Stop driving lower pin when lower pin is properly positioned (centered in lower suspension arm).
17. Use external retaining ring pliers to install two retaining rings (Figure 12, Item 4 and Item 9) onto lower pin (Figure 12,
Item 10).
18. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 12, Item 8) onto lower pin (Figure 12, Item 10).
19. Route two hydraulic hoses (Figure 12, Item 2) through knee joint of upper and lower suspension arms (Figure 12, Item 1
and Item 11).
Figure 12. Routing Hydraulic Hoses.

0066-13
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
Each ring spacer is made up of two pieces. Ensure both pieces remain together or damage to equipment
may result. Use suspension mandrel to hold ring spacer assemblies in place. Ensure ring spacers are
tightly compressed on tool or there will not be enough clearance for installation.
20. Insert suspension mandrel (Figure13, Item 3) through upper bushing sleeve (Figure 13, Item 2) on suspension cylinder
(Figure 13, Item 4). Install two ring spacer assemblies (Figure 13, Item 1) onto upper bearing on suspension cylinder.
CAUTION
When compressing ring spacer assemblies onto bushing sleeves, ensure the tapered part of the
seal properly fits the bushing sleeve and the ring spacer is compressed against the bushing,
or damage to the ring spacer assemblies may result.
21. Using two people, one person must carefully compress two ring spacer assemblies (Figure 13, Item 1) onto upper bushing
sleeve (Figure 13, Item 2) while a second person tightens suspension mandrel (Figure 13, Item 3) to hold both ring spacer
assemblies in place on upper bushing.
Figure 13. Suspension Mandrels and Ring Spacers (Upper) Insertion.
0066-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
CAUTION
When installing suspension cylinder into upper suspension arm casting, ensure ring spacer assemblies
do not work loose or become misaligned. If spacers are misaligned or work loose, stop installation
and lower cylinder out of upper suspension arm, or damage to ring spacer assemblies may result.
It may take a few attempts to accomplish proper ring spacer installation.
NOTE
During installation of the cylinder, one person should observe the position of the cylinder by looking
through the hole in the sides of the upper suspension arm for the upper pin.
22. Use two people to maneuver suspension cylinder (Figure 14, Item 7) into alignment with upper and lower suspension
arms (Figure 14, Item 6 and Item 8).
23. Use hydraulic floor jack (Figure 14, Item 5) to carefully raise cylinder (Figure 14, Item 7) into upper suspension arm
(Figure 14, Item 8). Check condition of ring spacer assemblies (Figure 14, Item 9) during entire installation.
24. While checking position of ring spacer assemblies (Figure 14, Item 9) and suspension cylinder (Figure 14, Item 7), make
any required adjustments to align first ring spacer assembly with hole in upper suspension arm (Figure 14, Item 8).
Loosen suspension mandrel (Figure 14, Item 4).
25. Apply grease to upper pin (Figure 14, Iitem 3).
26. With ring spacer assemblies (Figure 14, Item 9) aligned, install upper pin (Figure 14, Item 3) into upper suspension arm
27. Use soft-faced hammer to slowly drive upper pin (Figure 14, Item 3) through upper suspension arm (Figure 14, Item 8) and
suspension cylinder (Figure 14, Item 7), driving suspension mandrel (Figure 14, Item 4) out of cylinder.
28. Continue to drive upper pin (Figure 14, Item 3) through suspension cylinder (Figure 14, Item 7) and upper suspension arm
29. Stop driving upper pin (Figure 14, Item 3) when upper pin is properly positioned (centered in upper suspension arm).
30. Use external retaining ring pliers to install two retaining rings (Figure 14, Item 2) onto upper pin (Figure 14, Item 3).
31. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 14, Item 1) onto upper pin (Figure 14, Item 3).
Figure 14. Upper Pin Installation.
0066-15
0066 TM 9-2330-381-13
32. Install block clamp (Figure 15, Item 15) on affected bogie and secure with screw (Figure 15, Item 14) and, if necessary,
self-locking nut (Figure 15, Item 1) (no. 4 bogie only).
33. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect two air hoses (Figure 15, Item 6) to fittings (Figure 15, Item 5).
34. Use one person to hold both hydraulic hoses (Figure 15, Item 18) in place and one person to install two hose clamps
(Figure 15, Item 17) on hydraulic hoses at positions previously marked. Secure hose clamps in place by installing two
capscrews (Figure 15, Item 16), washers (Figure 15, Item 13), and locknuts (Figure 15, Item 12).
35. Route both hydraulic hoses (Figure 15, Item 18) and air hoses (Figure 15, Item 6) along each respective side of upper and
lower suspension arms (Figure 15, Item 10 and Item 11) and place each set of hoses into hose shields (Figure 15, Item 19
and Item 9).
36. Check position of shields (Figure 15, Item 19 and Item 9) on each set of hoses. Move each hose (Figure 15, Item 18) and/or
(Figure 15, Item 6) as required so that marks previously applied are aligned with edges of both shields.
37. Install two shields (Figure 15, Item 19 and Item 9), with hoses attached, to upper suspension arm (Figure 15, Item 10).
Secure each shield with three lockwashers (Figure 15, Item 7) and capscrews (Figure 15, Item 8).
38. Install electrical tiedown straps (Figure 15, Item 4) on hydraulic hoses (Figure15, Item 18) and air hoses (Figure 15, Item 6)
at all remaining positions previously marked as required.
39. Install protective moldings (Figure 15, Item 2) and hose clamps (Figure 15, Item 3) onto hydraulic hoses and air hoses
(Figure 15, Item 18 and Item 6) at positions previously marked.
Figure 15. Check Position of Shields on Hoses.
0066-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0066
40. Position hydraulic floor jack (Figure 16, Item 12) at suspension cylinder (Figure 16, Item 13). Use hydraulic floor jack to
raise or lower the lower suspension arm (Figure 16, Item 14) to height needed to install suspension chain (Figure 16, Item 7).
41. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect two hydraulic hoses (Figure 16, Item 2) to straight adapter fittings (Figure 16,
Item 1) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 16, Item 16). Remove drain pan (Figure 16, Item 15) and discard fluids per
regulations.
CAUTION
When securing hook to axle, ensure the suspension chain does not contact any hydraulic hoses
or air hoses. If contact is made, chafing or parting of the hoses, loss of air brake pressure,
loss of hydraulic fluid, or damage to equipment may result.
42. Install suspension chain (Figure 16, Item 7) as follows:
a. Attach end (top) hook (Figure 16, Item 4) of suspension chain (Figure 16, Item 7) along outboard side of bogie
(Figure 16, Item 3) between both hydraulic hoses (Figure 16, Item 2) and air brake hoses (Figure 16, Item 5) and upper
suspension arm (Figure 16, Item 6) into opening in upper suspension arm.
b. Attach bottom hook (Figure 16, Item 11) of suspension chain (Figure 16, Item 7) onto back end of square casting
(Figure 16, Item 10) under axle outboard (Figure 16, Item 9) of parking brake chamber (Figure 16, Item 8) on axle.
43. Lower floor jack (Figure 16, Item 12) and move floor jack clear of work area.
Figure 16. Raise/Lower Lower Suspension Arm.

END OF TASK
Align and install inner/outer wheel (WP 0080).
Align and install outer/outer wheel (WP 0078).
Perform required lubrication (WP 0163).
Perform suspension circuit bleeding (WP 0041).
Adjust platform height and check for proper operation (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE

0066-17/18 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0067
FIELD MAINTENANCE
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Lockwasher (8)
Lifting Strap (2) (WP 0168, Item 25) Locknut (4)
Truck, Wrecker M984 (WP 0168, Item 26) Locknut (1)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Nonmetallic Seal (1)
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) (3)
Suspension assembly removed from semitrailer (WP 0065)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the upper suspension arm.
0067-1
0067 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Remove six capscrews (Figure 1, Item 7), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 8), and hose shield (Figure 1, Item 9 and Item 12)
from upper suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard lockwashers.
2. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 4), washers (Figure 1, Item 3), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 1), and hose clamps (Figure 1,
Item 2) from hose clamp bar (Figure 1, Item 15). Discard locknuts.
3. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 13), flatwashers (Figure 1, Item 14), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 5), and hose clamp bar
(Figure 1, Item 15) from upper suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard locknuts.
4. Move two air lines (Figure 1, Item 11) and two hydraulic hoses (Figure 1, Item 10) down and away from upper suspension
arm (Figure 1, Item 6).
Figure 1. Removing Hose Shield.
NOTE
Wrap lifting strap(s) through the upper suspension arm casting to ensure the upper suspension
arm will not accidentally slip or become misaligned.
5. Attach lifting strap(s) (Figure 2, Item 2) to upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1). Attach lifting strap(s) to overhead
lifting device.
0067-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0067
NOTE
It may be necessary to use the crowbar to help raise the upper suspension arm. Once upper
movement has started, the crowbar should no longer be necessary.
6. Operate overhead lifting device and start to raise upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1) from lower suspension arm
(Figure 2, Item 3). If necessary, use crowbar to help upper suspension arm to start moving.
7. Raise upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1) enough so that top of arm is approximately parallel to the ground.
8. Disconnect upper pin and spacer assemblies on suspension cylinder from upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1)
(WP 0066).
9. Use 1-1/2 in. socket, 3/4 in. drive ratchet, 1 1/2 in. combination wrench, and two people to remove locknut (Figure 2,
Item 4), capscrew (Figure 2, Item 7), and two access covers (Figure 2, Item 5) from upper and lower suspension arms
(Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 3). Discard locknuts.
NOTE
When in their normally installed position, the suspension arms mount together with the smaller end of the
shoulder shaft toward the right-hand side of the suspension assembly. Thus, the shoulder shaft must be driven
out starting from the right-hand side, driving toward the left-hand side of the suspension assembly.
10. Use hammer and brass drift to drive shoulder shaft (Figure 2, Item 6) from left-hand side of lower suspension arm
(Figure 2, Item 3) and remove shoulder shaft from upper and lower suspension arms (Figure 2, Item 1).
NOTE
This step requires three people.
11. Use two people to maneuver overhead lifting device and upper suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1) and one person to
hold/support lower suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 3). Separate lower suspension arm from upper suspension arm by
pulling overhead lifting device away from lower suspension arm.
Figure 2. Access Covers to Upper and Lower Suspension Arms.

END OF TASK
0067-3
0067 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 2) from upper suspension arm (Figure 3, Item 1).
2. Use hammer and brass drift to drive lower bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 3) and nonmetallic seal (Figure 3, Item 4) out of
bottom side of upper suspension arm (Figure 3, Item 1). Discard seal.
Figure 3. Lubricating Fitting and Bearing Cone Removal.
0067-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0067
CAUTION
• Alternate driving points on inner race of lower bearing cone when driving out lower bearing cone and
nonmetallic seal, or damage to equipment may result.
• Alternate driving points on bearing cups during removal, or damage to equipment may result.
3. If necessary, use hammer and brass drift to drive lower bearing cup (Figure 4, Item 3) from upper suspension arm
(Figure 4, Item 2).
4. If necessary, use hammer and brass drift to drive upper bearing cup (Figure 4, Item 1) from upper suspension arm
(Figure 4, Item 2).
Figure 4. Drive Lower Bearing Cup from Upper Suspension Arm.
0067-5
0067 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
5. Use wiping rags to clean all grease from inside of upper suspension arm cavity and all associated parts. Clean all parts
removed using degreaser tank with cleaning solvent. Inspect upper and lower suspension arm castings; upper and lower
bearing cups; lower bearing cone; and attaching hardware for cracks, gouges in castings, and corrosion. Replace
defective parts.
6. Use an abrasive crocus cloth to remove nicks and to polish scored surfaces. If casting has defects, replace casting.
7. Inspect upper suspension bearing cone and platform spindle for cracks, gouges, scoring, excessive wear, and bent or loose
bearing cage. If defects exist, notify field maintenance.
8. Use grease, bearing lubricant packer, and lubricating handgun to pressure-pack lower suspension bearing cone per
lubrication chart (WP 0163).
CAUTION
Use upper bearing cup removed during disassembly to help seat new bearing cup, or
damage to new bearing cup may result.
9. Align upper bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 2) with upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3), and use a soft-face hammer to
start seating upper bearing cup.
CAUTION
Alternate driving points on upper bearing cup, or damage to equipment may result.
0067-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0067
10. Align existing bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 1) over new upper bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 2), and use a hammer to start
driving new bearing cup into upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3).
11. Continue to drive upper bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 2) into upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3) until firmly seated into
casting of upper suspension arm.
CAUTION
Use lower bearing cup removed during repair to help seat new bearing, or damage to new
bearing cup may result.
12. Align lower bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 5) with upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3), and use a hammer with existing
bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 1) to start seating lower bearing cup.
CAUTION
Alternate driving points on lower bearing cup during installation, or damage to equipment may result.
13. Align existing bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 1) over new lower bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 5), and use a hammer to start
driving bearing cup into upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3).
14. Continue to drive lower bearing cup (Figure 5, Item 5) into upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3) until firmly seated into
casting of upper suspension arm.
NOTE
Lower bearing cone and nonmetallic seal will not be reassembled in this procedure. The suspension
assembly must be reinstalled onto the semitrailer platform. Installation of the above stated parts will be
installed during the Suspension Assembly/Bogie procedure (WP 0065).
15. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 5, Item 4) to upper suspension arm (Figure 5, Item 3).
Figure 5. Seating Upper Bearing Cup.

END OF TASK
0067-7
0067 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
NOTE
This step requires three people.
1. Use two people to maneuver overhead lifting device and upper suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 1) and one person to
hold/support lower suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 3) and to align upper suspension arm with lower suspension arm.
2. Apply grease to inside bore of assembly joint for both upper and lower suspension arms (Figure 6, Item 1 and Item 3) and
to exterior of shoulder shaft (Figure 6, Item 6).
NOTE
The shoulder shaft is 0.063 in. (1.6 mm) larger at one end. It may be necessary to measure both
ends with accurate scale to determine which is the smaller end.
3. Insert smaller end of shoulder shaft (Figure 6, Item 6) through larger bore in upper suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 1) and into
bore in lower suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 3) until shaft movement is stopped by lip at bearing oil seal (Figure 6, Item 9).
4. Use a 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) blade (Figure 6, Item 7) on 20-blade feeler gauge set inserted (Figure 6, Item 8) into smaller
bore of upper suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 1) to carefully adjust position of lip of bearing oil seal (Figure 6, Item 9) up
onto small end of shoulder shaft (Figure 6, Item 6).
CAUTION
If shoulder shaft is driven with excessive force, damage to the seals may result.
5. Drive shoulder shaft (Figure 6, Item 6) until smaller end extends through bearing oil seal (Figure 6, Item 9) and upper
suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 1) bore.
6. Use 1-1/2 in. socket, 3/4 in. drive ratchet, 1-1/2 in. combination wrench, and two people to install two access covers
(Figure 6, Item 5), capscrew (Figure 6, Item 10), and new locknut (Figure 6, Item 4) to upper and lower suspension arms
7. Align and install suspension cylinder into upper suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 1) and secure with upper pin and spacer
assemblies (WP 0066).
8. Remove lifting strap(s) (Figure 6, Item 2) and overhead lifting device from upper suspension arm (Figure 6, Item 1).
Figure 6. Installing Shoulder Shaft.
0067-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0067
9. Align two hydraulic hoses (Figure 7, Item 10) and air brake hoses (Figure 7, Item 11) into place on upper suspension
arm (Figure 7, Item 6). Use one person to hold hoses until hose shields (Figure 7, Item 9 and Item 12) are installed and
secured in place.
10. Align and install two hose shields (Figure 7, Item 9 and Item 12) onto upper suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 6), securing
both air lines (Figure 7, Item 11) and hydraulic hoses (Figure 7, Item 10) in place. Secure hose shields in place by installing
and loosely hand-tightening six capscrews (Figure 7, Item 7) and new lockwashers (Figure 7, Item 8).
11. Align hose clamp bar (Figure 7, Item 15) over upper suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 6) and secure in place with two
capscrews (Figure 7, Item 5), flatwashers (Figure 7, Item 14), and new locknuts (Figure 7, Item 13).
12. Install two hose clamps (Figure 7, Item 2) onto two hydraulic lines (Figure 7, Item 10) and secure in place by installing two
capscrews (Figure 7, Item 1), washers (Figure 7, Item 3), and new locknuts (Figure 7, Item 4).
13. Pull on both air lines (Figure 7, Item 11) and hydraulic hoses (Figure 7, Item 10) to remove excess slack in lines.
14. Tighten six capscrews (Figure 7, Item 7) to secure hose shields (Figure 7, Item 9 and Item 12).
Figure 7. Installation and Alignment of Hoses.

END OF TASK
Install suspension assembly onto platform (WP 0065).
Perform required lubrication to suspension assembly (WP 0163).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0067-9/10 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0068
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SERVICE BRAKES
INITIAL SETUP:
1
Materials/Parts
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) Equipment Conditions
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Hub and drum removed (WP 0075)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, inspection, and installation of the service brakes.
0068-1
0068 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
When trailer has performed heavy braking, the brake drums should be HOT to the touch.
Use caution and do not come in contact with the brake drum to check for heat. Allow brake
drum to cool before performing maintenance, or injury to personnel may result.
CAUTION
Brake adjustments (WP 0037) are mandatory after installing new brakes or performing maintenance on brakes.
Brake adjustments also must be performed if any of the following conditions exist or damage to equipment may result:
• Slack adjusters are not level with each other when brakes are applied.
• Brake chamber clevis moves more than 2 in. (5.1 cm) from fully released condition to fully engaged condition.
• Brake drum temperature is cool to the touch after heavy braking operations have been performed.
1. Remove four capscrews (Figure 1, Item 3), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4), upper dust shield (Figure 1, Item 2), and lower
dust shield (Figure 1, Item 15) from axle assembly (Figure 1, Item 14). Discard lockwashers.
2. Lift or lower each brake shoe (Figure 1, Item 7) from headless shoulder pins (Figure 1, Item 12) mounted on axle assembly
(Figure 1, Item 14) and drive out two headless shoulder pins.
3. Use brake repair pliers to remove two helical extension springs (Figure 1, Item 13) from brake shoes (Figure 1, Item 7).
4. Pull and remove two brake shoes (Figure 1, Item 7) from axle assembly (Figure 1, Item 14). Remove helical extension
spring (Figure 1, Item 10) from brake shoes and separate brake shoes.
5. Remove two return spring pins (Figure 1, Item 11) from brake shoes (Figure 1, Item 7).
6. Use retaining ring pliers to remove four retaining rings (Figure 1, Item 6), two headless grooved pins (Figure 1, Item 8), and
rollers (Figure 1, Item 9) from brake shoes (Figure 1, Item 7).
7. Inspect anchor pin bushings (Figure 1, Item 5) for gouges, scoring, and defects. If required, drive two anchor pin bushings
from axle assembly (Figure 1, Item 14).
8. If necessary, remove three plugs (Figure 1, Item 1) from dust shields (Figure 1, Item 2 and Item 15).
0068-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0068
Figure 1. Dust Shields Removal.

END OF TASK
0068-3
0068 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
1. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent. Remove any burrs and scoring from polished
surfaces using crocus cloth. Inspect brake shoe linings for uneven wear, improper lining grind, bent shoes, scratches, breaks,
or cracks. If any defects exist, replace brake shoe assembly.
2. Inspect dust shields for cracks, deformation, missing hardware, and damaged or missing plugs. Replace defective dust
shields.
3. Measure overall shoe lining thickness. If shoe linings are less than 0.46 in. (0.76 cm) thick, replace brake shoe assembly.
END OF TASK
0068-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0068
INSTALLATION
1. If removed, install three dust plugs (Figure 2, Item 1) into dust shields (Figure 2, Item 2, and Item 15).
2. If removed, install two anchor pin bushings (Figure 2, Item 5) into axle assembly (Figure 2, Item 13).
3. Install two rollers (Figure 2, Item 9) onto brake shoes (Figure 2, Item 7) and insert two headless grooved pins (Figure 2,
Item 8) through two rollers to hold brake shoes in place.
4. Use retaining ring pliers to install four retaining rings (Figure 2, Item 6) onto two headless grooved pins (Figure 2, Item 8)
to secure rollers (Figure 2, Item 9) in place.
5. Align and install two return spring pins (Figure 2, Item 11) into brake shoes (Figure 2, Item 7).
6. Install helical extension spring (Figure 2, Item 10) between both brake shoes (Figure 2, Item 7) onto return spring pins
7. Align and install two brake shoes (Figure 2, Item 7) so that each roller (Figure 2, Item 9) seats on S-cam on axle assembly
8. Use brake repair pliers to install helical extension springs (Figure 2, Item 14) on brake shoes (Figure 2, Item 7).
9. Lift or lower each brake shoe (Figure 2, Item 7) until headless shoulder pins (Figure 2, Item 12) can be installed, and install
two headless shoulder pins into anchor pin bushings (Figure 2, Item 5).
10. Align and install both upper and lower dust shields (Figure 2, Item 2 and Item 15) onto axle assembly (Figure 2, Item 13)
and secure with four new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 4) and capscrews (Figure 2, Item 3).
Figure 2. Dust Shields Installation.

END OF TASK
Reinstall hub and drum (WP 0075).
Perform service brake adjustment (WP 0037).
If brakes were adjusted, operate tractor/semitrailer and check for proper operation (WP 0014).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0068-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0069
FIELD MAINTENANCE
S-CAM
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Cotter Pin (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Nonmetallic Seal (2)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Preformed Packing (2)
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0168, Item 6) 1
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Hub and drum removed (WP 0075)
Brake assembly removed (WP 0068)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, inspection, and installation of the S-cam.
0069-1
0069 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either the left-hand or right-hand S-cam. Repeat
this procedure as required to complete the necessary repairs.
1. Remove cotter pin (Figure 1, Item 1), two flat washers (Figure 1, Item 2), and headed shoulder pin (Figure 1. Item 5) from
mending plate (Figure 1, Item 6), rod end clevis (Figure 1, Item 3), and slack adjuster (Figure 1, Item 4). Discard cotter pin.
Figure 1. Mending Plate Removal.
0069-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0069
CAUTION
The S-cam has parts that are removed as the S-cam is removed. During removal, ensure that none of the
washers become lost or lodged in the retaining ring groove or damage to the equipment may result.
2. Remove retainer rings (Figure 2, Item 5 and Item 6) from brake actuating S-cam (Figure 2, Item 11). Using a soft plastic
head hammer, drive S-cam from axle (Figure 2, Item 12).
3. Remove flat washer (Figure 2, Item 2), slack adjuster (Figure 2, Item 3), spacer (Figure 2, Item 4), flat washer (Figure 2,
Item 7), flat washer (Figure 2, Item 10), and preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 1) from S-cam (Figure 2, Item 11) as it is
being removed. Discard preformed packings.
4. Remove two nonmetallic seals (Figure 2, Item 8) from axle (Figure 2, Item 12). Discard seals.
5. Remove bushing (Figure 2, Item 9) from axle (Figure 2, Item 12).
Figure 2. S-cam Retaining Rings Removal.

END OF TASK
0069-3
0069 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
• Cloths or rags saturated with solvent cleaning compound must be disposed of in accordance with (IAW)
authorized facilities’ procedures.
1. Inspect bushings, spacers, and washers for wear, out-of-round, corrosion, nicks, and burrs. Clean all parts removed in
degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent. Remove burrs, nicks, and scoring on polished surfaces using crocus
cloth. Replace all defective parts.
2. Inspect brake operating S-cam camshaft and related parts for wear, worn gear, broken cam, scoring, out-of-round,
corrosion, nicks, and burrs. Clean all corroded parts in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent. Remove burrs,
nicks, and scoring on polished surfaces using crocus cloth. Replace all defective parts.
END OF TASK
0069-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0069
INSTALLATION
1. Install bushing (Figure 3, Item 9) into axle (Figure 3, Item 12).
2. Apply a light coating of grease to two nonmetallic seals (Figure 3, Item 8) and install two nonmetallic seals onto axle
3. Install preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 1) and flat washer (Figure 3, Item 2) onto S-cam (Figure 3, Item 11).
4. Align and install S-cam (Figure 3, Item 11) into axle (Figure 3, Item 12). Once S-cam passes through nonmetallic seals
(Figure 3, Item 8), install flat washers (Figure 3, Item 10 and Item 7) and spacer (Figure 3, Item 4).
5. Place slack adjuster (Figure 3, Item 3) near axle (Figure 3, Item 12) and align with S-cam (Figure 3, Item 11). Push S-cam
through slack adjuster and install flat washer (Figure 3, Item 2) onto S-cam as it clears slack adjuster.
6. Continue pushing S-cam (Figure 3, Item 11) until S-cam and flat washer (Figure 3, Item 2) are flush against S-cam assembly
on axle (Figure 3, Item 12).
7. Install retainer rings (Figure 3, Item 6 and Item 5) onto S-cam (Figure 3, Item 11).
Figure 3. Retaining Rings Installation.
0069-5
0069 TM 9-2330-381-13
8. Align mending plate (Figure 4, Item 6) with rod end clevis (Figure 4, Item 3) and slack adjuster (Figure 4, Item 4).
Secure rod end clevis and slack adjuster with headed shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 5), two flat washers (Figure 4, Item 2),
and cotter pin (Figure 4, Item 1).
Figure 4. Mending Plate Alignment and Installation.

END OF TASK
Lubricate axle as required (WP 0163).
Operate tractor/semitrailer and check for proper brake operation (WP 0014).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0069-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0070
FIELD MAINTENANCE
S-CAM RETAINER ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Preformed Packing (2)
General Mechanic's Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11)
1
Materials/Parts
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Equipment Conditions
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Left-hand and right-hand S-cam (WP 0069) and slack
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) adjusters (WP 0071) removed
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the S-cam retainer assembly.
REMOVAL
1. Remove four nuts (Figure 1, item 5), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 9), and eight flatwashers (Figure 1, Item 4) from S-cam
retainer assembly (Figure 1, Item 3) and axle (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove S-cam retainer assembly (Figure 1, Item 3) from axle (Figure 1, Item 1).
3. Separate two halves of S-cam retainer assembly (Figure 1, Item 3). Remove two preformed packings (Figure 1, Item 6),
sleeve bushing (Figure 1, Item 8), and camshaft bushing (Figure 1, Item 7) from S-cam retainer assembly. Discard
preformed packings.
4. Remove lubricating fitting (Figure 1, Item 2) from S-cam retainer assembly (Figure 1, Item 3).
Figure 1. Retainer Assembly Removal.

END OF TASK
0070-1
0070 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 2, Item 2) on S-cam retainer assembly (Figure 2, Item 3).
2. Install camshaft bushing (Figure 2, Item 7), sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 8), and two new preformed packings (Figure 2,
Item 6) on S-cam retainer assembly (Figure 2, Item 3). Assemble two halves of the S-cam retainer assembly.
3. Install S-cam retainer assembly (Figure 2, Item 3) with four capscrews (Figure 2, Item 4), eight flatwashers (Figure 2,
Item 9), and four nuts (Figure 2, Item 5) onto axle (Figure 2, Item 1). Use a torque wrench to torque nuts to 30 to 40 lb-ft
(41 to 54 Nm).
Figure 2. Retainer Assembly Installation.

END OF TASK
Install left-hand and right-hand S-cam and slack adjusters (WP 0069 and WP 0071).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0070-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0071
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SLACK ADJUSTER
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required Equipment Conditions
1 S-cam for defective slack adjuster removed (WP 0069)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for inspection of the slack adjuster.
INSPECTION
1. Inspect slack adjuster (Figure 1, Item 1) for wear, worn or broken gear teeth, broken/cracked housing, scoring, out-of-round
condition, corrosion, burrs, broken or bent locking tabs, rounded off or stripped adjusting nuts, or broken/missing
lubrication fLWtings.
2. Replace defective parts (WP 0069) with new slack adjuster during installation of S-cam.
Figure 1. Slack Adjuster.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0071-1/2 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0072
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Filter Element (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, assembly, and installation of the air cleaner assembly.
0072-1
0072 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
If Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) exposure is suspected, all air filter media should be
handled by personnel wearing protective equipment. Consult your unit NBC Officer or NBC
Noncommissioned Officer (NCO) for appropriate handling or disposal instructions.
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent dirt,
moisture, or foreign material from entering the air brake system or damage to equipment may result.
1. Tag and disconnect two nonmetallic hoses (Figure 1, Item 1 and Item 4) from straight adapters (Figure 1, Item 2) on air filter
assembly (Figure 1, Item 5). Install caps/plugs into hose openings.
2. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 6) from U-bolt (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove U-bolt and air filter assembly (Figure 1,
Item 5) from gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 7).
3. Remove two straight adapters (Figure 1, Item 2) from air filter assembly (Figure 1, Item 5). Install caps/plugs into all
remaining openings.
Figure 1. Air Filter Assembly Removal.
0072-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0072
WARNING
The air filter assembly has an internal spring that, when assembled, is under pressure. Use caution
when removing the housing nut or injury to personnel may result.
4. Remove assembly nut (Figure 2, Item 6), preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 5), spring (Figure 2, Item 4), and washer
(Figure 2, Item 3) from air filter assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard preformed packing.
5. Pull air filter element (Figure 2, Item 2) out of air filter assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard air filter element.
6. Inspect air filter assembly (Figure 2, Item 1) for broken or cracked housing, cracked or stripped threads, and corrosion. If
corroded, clean as required. If defective, replace as required.
7. Inspect internal components of air filter assembly (Figure 2, Item 1) for defects. Replace all parts found defective.
Figure 2. Air Filter Assembly Removal.

END OF TASK
0072-3
0072 TM 9-2330-381-13
ASSEMBLY
1. Install new air filter element (Figure 3, Item 2) into air filter assembly (Figure 3, Item 1).
2. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 5). Install new preformed packing onto assembly nut
(Figure 3, Item 6).
3. Install washer (Figure 3, Item 3) and spring (Figure 3, Item 4) into air filter assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) and secure in place
with assembly nut (Figure 3, Item 6). Use torque wrench to torque assembly nut to 10 to 50 lb-ft (13.5 to 67.7 Nm).
Figure 3. Assembly of Air Filter Assembly.

END OF TASK
0072-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0072
INSTALLATION
WARNING
• Adhesives, solvents, and sealing compounds may burn easily, may give off harmful vapors, and are harmful to
skin and clothing. Keep away from open flames and use in well-ventilated area. If adhesive, solvent, or sealing
compound gets on skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap and water.
• On direct contact, uncured silicone sealant irritates eyes. In case of contact, flush eyes with water and seek
medical attention. In case of skin contact, wipe off and flush with water.
1. Apply pipe sealant to threads of two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 2). Align and install two straight adapters into air
filter assembly (Figure 4, Item 5).
2. Align air filter assembly (Figure 4, Item 5) with mounting bracket on gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 7) and install U-bolt
(Figure 4, Item 3) with two nuts (Figure 4, Item 6).
3. Align and install two nonmetallic hoses (Figure 4, Item 1 and Item 4) onto two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 2).
Figure 4. Installation of Air Filter Assembly.

END OF TASK
Couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013).
Drive tractor/semitrailer (WP 0014) and check for proper brake operation and air leaks.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0072-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0073
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic's Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) 1
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Air cleaner assembly removed (WP 0072)
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Gooseneck component assembly pulled out of gooseneck,
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) not removed (WP 0045)
Locknut (5)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the gooseneck pneumatic installation.
0073-1
0073 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to
prevent dirt, moisture, or foreign material from entering the pneumatic system,
NOTE
• Perform this procedure, or any portion of this procedure, as required, to complete the necessary repair.
• Nonmetallic hoses are all manufactured items and are addressed in WP 0164. The following procedures identify the
removal/installation of associated pneumatic fittings only.
1. Tag and disconnect three nonmetallic hoses (Figure 1, Item 3, Item 5, and Item 6) from gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 4)
(WP 0044). Install caps/plugs into all openings.
2. Remove five locknuts (Figure 1, Item 1) and clamp loops (Figure 1, Item 2) from gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 4). Discard
locknuts.
3. Remove three nonmetallic hoses (Figure 1, Item 3, Item 2, and Item 6) from gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 4).
Figure 1. Hose Removal.
0073-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0073
4. Remove two dummy couplings (Figure 2, Item 5) with chains (Figure 2, Item 6) from quick-disconnect couplings (Figure 2,
Item 2) located on front of gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 1).
5. Remove two quick-disconnect couplings (Figure 2, Item 2) and dummy couplings (Figure 2, Item 5) from straight adapters
(Figure 2, Item 3).
6. Remove two preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 7) from two quick-disconnect couplings (Figure 2, Item 2). Discard
preformed packings.
7. Remove nuts (Figure 2, Item 4) from two straight adapters (Figure 2, Item 3) and remove two straight adapters from
gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 1). Reinstall nuts to straight adapters.
Figure 2. Removing Straight Adapters from Gooseneck.

END OF TASK
0073-3
0073 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Inspect nonmetallic hoses (Figure 3, Item 4) removed for kinks, splits, deterioration, chaffing, cuts, and loose fittings.
Repair defective hoses and fittings.
2. Inspect fittings, dummy couplings, and quick-disconnect couplings for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped or cracked threads,
broken castings, and pitting. Replace defective parts, as required.
3. Obtain new fittings and bulk nonmetallic hose.
4. Refer to WP 0164 and cut new nonmetallic hose (Figure 3, Item 4) to specified length.
5. Install fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 3), small opening first, onto nonmetallic hose (Figure 3, Item 4). Install sleeve fitting
(Figure 3, Item 2) onto end of nonmetallic hose.
6. Push adapter fitting (Figure 3, Item 1) over sleeve fitting (Figure 3, Item 2) and nonmetallic hose (Figure 3, Item 4) as far as
possible by hand, and tighten fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 3) to adapter fitting.
7. Install caps and plugs into openings in manufactured hose until ready for installation.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to install new fittings onto other end of nonmetallic hose (Figure 3, Item 4).
Figure 3. Assembly of Hose Fittings.

END OF TASK
0073-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0073
INSTALLATION
WARNING
1. Remove nuts (Figure 4, Item 4) on two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 3) and align and install two straight adapters onto
gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 1). Reinstall nuts onto adapters.
2. Apply pipe sealant to both ends of two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 3). On front of gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 1) align
and install two quick-dicsonnect couplings (Figure 4, Item 2) and secure chain (Figure 4, Item 6) onto two dummy
couplings (Figure 4, Item 5) and two straight adapters.
3. Apply petroleum jelly to two new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 7) and install two preformed packings onto two
quick-disconnect couplings (Figure 4, Item 2).
Figure 4. Installation of Straight Adapters and Couplings for Gooseneck.
0073-5
0073 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. Install three nonmetallic hoses (Figure 5, Item 3, Item 5, and Item 6) onto gooseneck (Figure 5, Item 4).
NOTE
Insert nearby nonmetallic hoses into clamp loops as the clamp loops are installed/secured to the gooseneck.
5. Align and install five clamp loops (Figure 5, Item 2) onto gooseneck (Figure 5, Item 4) and secure in place with new
locknuts (Figure 5, Item 1).
6. Apply pipe sealant to threads of three nonmetallic hoses (Figure 5, Item 3, Item 5, and Item 6) and align and install
three nonmetallic hoses.
Figure 5. Installing Hoses.

END OF TASK
Drive tractor/semitrailer (WP 0014) and check for proper brake operation and air leaks.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0073-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PLATFORM PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Suspension isolation valves closed at four corner bogies
Strap, Tiedown, Electrical (as required) (WP 0170, Brake chambers caged (WP 0023)
Item 33) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Lockwasher (4) (WP 0007)
Locknut (12) All five air tanks drained by pulling on air tank lanyards
Lockwasher (18) Platform steps and service covers removed (WP 0090)
Cotter Pin (10)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the platform pneumatic installation
and urethane bushing repair.
0074-1
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent
dirt, moisture, or foreign material from entering the platform pneumatic system or damage
to equipment may result.
NOTE
• This procedure is for removal/installation of all platform pneumatic components. Perform this procedure or any portion
of this procedure, as required, to complete the necessary repair.
• Nonmetallic hoses are all manufactured items and are addressed in WP 0164. The following procedure calls out
removal/installation of associated pneumatic fittings only. Use the pneumatic schematic rear foldout Figure FO-2 as a
general guide for hose routing.
• Figure 1 will be use as a guide for all procedures steps in this work package. Figure titles will have a location named
in them for ease of finding components on underside of trailer.
Figure 1. Bottom of Platform Looking Up, Guide Location for All Graphs.
0074-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
1. Tag and disconnect four straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 1) and straight pipe-to-hose adapters (Figure 2,
Item 2) from two tube elbows (Figure 2, Item 4). Install caps/plugs into openings.
2. Remove two tube locknuts (Figure 2, Item 3) and tube elbows (Figure 2, Item 4) from platform weldment (Figure 2,
Item 5). Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 2. Location A, Hose and Tube Adapters.

3. Remove knob (Figure 3, Item 5) from brake valve (Figure 3, Item 2). Remove nut (Figure 3, Item 4) and washer
(Figure 3, Item 3) securing brake valve and remove brake valve from platform.
4. Remove two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 3, Item 1) and straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 6) from brake
valve (Figure 3, Item 2). Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 3. Location B, Brake Valve from Platform.
0074-3
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Use 15/16 in. deepwell socket to remove two nuts (Figure 4, Item 7) and washers (Figure 4, Item 8) from brake chamber
6. Remove cotter pin (Figure 4, Item 10), two flat washers (Figure 4, Item 9), and headless pin (Figure 4, Item 11) from
rod end clevis (Figure 4, Item 12). Discard cotter pin.
7. Remove two nonmetallic channels (Figure 4, Item 3) and hose clamps (Figure 4, Item 4) from nonmetallic hoses (Figure 4,
Item 5). Tag and disconnect two nonmetallic hoses from elbow fittings (Figure 4, Item 6). Install caps/plugs into openings.
8. Remove two elbow fittings (Figure 4, Item 6) from brake chamber assembly (Figure 4, Item 14). Install caps/plugs
into openings.
9. Remove brake chamber assembly (Figure 4, Item 14) from axle. Remove screw (Figure 4, Item 2) and seal plug (Figure 4,
Item 1) from brake chamber assembly.
10. Count and record number of turns to remove rod end clevis (Figure 4, Item 12). Unscrew and remove rod end clevis and
nut (Figure 4, Item 13) from brake chamber assembly (Figure 4, Item 14).
Figure 4. Location C, Brake Chamber Assembly, Typical 10 Places.
0074-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
11. Remove pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 5, Item 8), two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 4), three pipe-to-tube
elbows (Figure 5, Item 6 and Item 7), and two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 5, Item 5) from air pressure relay
(multifunction) valve (Figure 5, Item 3). Install caps/plugs into openings.
12. Remove two screws (Figure 5, Item 2), lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 1), and air pressure relay (multifunction) valve
(Figure 5, Item 3) from platform weldment. Discard lockwashers.
Figure 5. (Location D) Pipe-to-Tube Tee, Adapter, and Elbows.

13. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 6, Item 4) and two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 6, Item 3 and Item 5)
from air pressure relay valve (Figure 6, Item 6). Install caps/plugs into openings.
14. Remove two locknuts (Figure 6, Item 1) and screws (Figure 6, Item 2) from air pressure relay valve (Figure 6, Item 6)
and remove from platform weldment. Discard two locknuts.
Figure 6. Location E, Air Pressure Relay Valve.
0074-5
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
15. Remove nut (Figure 7, Item 4), lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 3), and loop clamp (Figure 7, Item 2) from weld stud.
Discard lockwasher.
16. Open loop clamp (Figure 7, Item 2) and remove lanyard (Figure 7, Item 5). Unscrew and remove drain cock (Figure 7,
Item 1) and lanyard from platform (air tank) weldment. Install plug into opening.
Figure 7. Location F, Air Pressure Relay Valve, Typical 5 Places.

17. Remove three pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 8, Item 3 and Item 2) and straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 8, Item 1) from
platform (air tank) weldment. Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 8. Location G, Platform Air Tank.
0074-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
18. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 9, Item 5) and two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 9, Item 6 and Item 3)
from air pressure relay valve (Figure 9, Item 7). Remove tube tee (Figure 9, Item 4) from platform weldment. Install
caps/plugs into openings.
and remove from platform weldment. Discard two locknuts.
Figure 9. Location H, Adapters and Elbows from Air Pressure Relay Valve.
20. Remove straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 10, Item 1 and Item 8) and two straight pipe-to-hose adapters (Figure 10,
Item 2 and Item 7) from tube nipples (Figure 10, Item 3 and Item 6). Remove two tube locknuts (Figure 10, Item 4 and
Item 5) and two tube nipples from platform weldment. Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 10. Location J, Adapters from Platform Weldment, Typical 10 Places.
0074-7
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
21. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 11, Item 3) and two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 11, Item 6 and
Item 4) from air pressure relay valve (Figure 11, Item 7). Remove pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 11, Item 5) from platform
weldment. Install caps/plugs into openings.
and remove air pressure relay valve from platform weldment. Discard two locknuts.
Figure 11. Location K, Air Pressure Relay Valve.

23. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 12, Item 3) and two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 12, Item 6 and
Item 4) from air pressure relay valve (Figure 12, Item 7). Remove pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 12, Item 5) from platform
weldment. Install caps/plugs into openings
Figure 12. Location L, Air Pressure Relay Valve.
0074-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
25. Remove two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 13, Item 1 and Item 2) from platform (air tank) weldment. Install caps/plugs
into openings.
Figure 13. Location M, Elbow Removal.

26. Remove pipe plug (Figure 14, Item 1) from platform weldment. Install plugs.
Figure 14. Location N, Pipe Plug Removal, Typical 18 Places.
0074-9
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
27. Remove three pipe-to-tube tees (Figure 15, Item 10 and Item 8), two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 15, Item 4
and Item 6), and three pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 15, Item 7 and Item 9) from air pressure relay (multifunction)
valve (Figure 15, Item 3). Remove pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 15, Item 5) from air pressure relay (multifunction) valve.
Install caps/plugs into openings.
28. Remove two screws (Figure 15, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 15, Item 2), and air pressure relay (multifunction) valve
(Figure 15, Item 3) from platform weldment. Discard lockwashers.
Figure 15. Location P, Tees, Adapters, and Elbows Removal.
0074-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
29. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 16, Item 3) and pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 16, Item 4 and Item 6)
from air pressure relay valve (Figure 16, Item 7). Remove pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 16, Item 5) from pipe-to-tube elbow.
Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 16. Location R, Adapters and Elbows from Air Pressure Relay Valve Removal.
31. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 17, Item 4) and pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 17, Item 3 and Item 5)
from air pressure relay valve (Figure 17, Item 6). Install caps/plugs into openings.
Figure 17. Location S, Adapters and Elbows from Air Pressure Relay Valve Removal.
0074-11
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
33. Remove pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 18, Item 3) from check valve (Figure 18, Item 4). Remove check valve, pipe
elbow (Figure 18, Item 1), and pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 18, Item 2) from platform (air tank) weldment. Install
Figure 18. Location T, Elbow from Check Valve and from Weldment Removal.
into openings.
Figure 19. Location U, Elbow from Weldment Removal.
NOTE
There may be one or more loop clamps stacked onto one weld stud. Note the orientation of the clamps prior to
removal so that all clamps can be properly reinstalled.
0074-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
35. Remove nut (Figure 20, Item 1), lockwasher (Figure 20, Item 2), and loop clamp (Figure 20, Item 3) from weld stud.
Discard lockwasher.
Figure 20. Location V, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal.

36. Remove six nuts (Figure 21, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 21, Item 2), and loop clamps (Figure 21, Item 3) from
weld studs. Discard lockwashers.
Figure 21. Location W, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal, Typical 6 Places.
into openings.
Figure 22. Location X, Elbows from Weldment Removal.
0074-13
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
38. Remove four nuts (Figure 23, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 23, Item 2), and loop clamps (Figure 23, Item 3) from
Figure 23. Location Y, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal, Typical 4 Places.
39. Remove two nuts (Figure 24, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 24, Item 2), and loop clamps (Figure 24, Item 3) from
Figure 24. Location Z, Loop Clamp from Weld Stud Removal, Typical 2 Places.
END OF TASK
0074-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
REPAIR
1. Inspect nonmetallic hoses removed for kinks, splits, deterioration, chafing, cuts, and loose fittings. If any nonmetallic
hoses are defective, repair hoses and replace fittings as required.
2. Inspect air pressure relay valves, air pressure relay (multifunction) valves, drain cocks, and air brake valves for air leaks,
broken housings, cracked or stripped threads, and corrosion. Clean corroded parts as required. Replace defective parts
as required.
3. Obtain new fittings and bulk nonmetallic hose.
4. Refer to WP 0164 and cut new nonmetallic hose (Figure 25, Item 4) to specifed length.
5. Install fitting nut (Figure 25, Item 3), small opening first, onto nonmetallic hose (Figure 25, Item 4). Install sleeve
fitting (Figure 25, Item 2) onto end of nonmetallic hose.
6. Push adapter fitting (Figure 25, Item 1) over sleeve fitting (Figure 25, Item 2) and nonmetallic hose (Figure 25, Item 4) as
far as possible by hand and tighten fitting nut (Figure 25, Item 3) to adapter fitting.
7. Install caps and plugs on manufactured hose until ready for installation.
8. Repeat steps 5 through 7 to install fitting onto other end of nonmetallic hose (Figure 25, Item 4).
Figure 25. Adapter Fittings.
END OF TASK
0074-15
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Align and install two loop clamps (Figure 26, Item 3) onto weld studs and secure with two lockwashers (Figure 26, Item 2)
and nuts (Figure 26, Item 1).
Figure 26. Location Z, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 2 Places.
2. Align and install four loop clamps (Figure 27, Item 3) onto weld studs and secure with four lockwashers (Figure 27,
Item 2) and nuts (Figure 27, Item 1).
Figure 27. Location Y, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 4 Places.
0074-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
WARNING
to skin and clothing. Keep away from open flames and use in well-ventilated area. If adhesive, solvent, or
sealing compound gets on skin or clothing, wash immediately with soap and water.
CAUTION
• Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threads of pneumatic fittings, using only enough compound to
coat the threads. DO NOT allow compound to enter a component/fitting or the compound may restrict/block air
passages and damage to equipment or equipment failure may result.
• Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the tightened fittings
positioned as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings do not interfere with one another or damage to
3. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs and install two pipe-to-tube elbows
(Figure 28, Item 2 and Item 1) to platform (air tank) weldment.
Figure 28. Location X, Sealant to Threads Installation.
0074-17
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. Align and install two loop clamps (Figure 29, Item 3) onto weld studs and secure with two lockwashers (Figure 29, Item 2)
and nuts (Figure 29 , Item 1).
Figure 29. Location W, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 6 Places.
5. Align and install two loop clamps (Figure 30, Item 3) onto weld studs and secure with two lockwashers (Figure 30,
Figure 30. Location V, Loop Clamp to Weld Stud Installation, Typical 2 Places.
6. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 31,
Item 2 and Item 1) and install two pipe-to-tube elbows to platform (air tank) weldment.
Figure 31. Location U, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
7. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 32, Item 2),
pipe elbow (Figure 32, Item 1), check valve (Figure 32, Item 4), and pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 32, Item 3) and install
pipe-to-tube elbow, pipe elbow, check valve, and pipe-to-tube elbow to platform (air tank) weldment.
Figure 32. Location T, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.

Item 5 and Item 3) and two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 33, Item 4) and install two pipe-to-tube elbows and two
straight pipe-to tube elbows to air pressure relay valve (Figure 33, Item 6).
9. Install air pressure relay valve (Figure 33, Item 6) to platform weldment and secure with two screws (Figure 33, Item 2)
Figure 33. Location S, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-19
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
Item 6 and Item 4) and two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 34, Item 3), and install two pipe-to-tube elbows and
two straight pipe-to-tube adapters to air pressure relay valve (Figure 34, Item 7).
12. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs and install tube tee (Figure 34, Item 5).
Figure 34. Location R, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.

13. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs and install three pipe-to-tube elbows
(Figure 35, Item 9 and Item 7), two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 35, Item 6 and Item 4), and three pipe-to-tube
tees (Figure 35, Item 8 and Item 10) to air pressure (multifunction) relay valve (Figure 35, Item 3).
14. Install air pressure (multifunction) relay valve (Figure 35, Item 3) to platform weldment and secure with two lockwashers
(Figure 35, Item 2) and screws (Figure 35, Item 1). Use a torque wrench to torque screws to 50 to 70 in.-lb (5.5 to 8.0 Nm).
15. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs and install tube tee (Figure 35, Item 5)
to straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 35, Item 4).
Figure 35. Location P, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-20
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
16. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of pipe plug. Remove plugs from pipe plug (Figure 36, Item 1) and install
pipe plug to platform weldment.
Figure 36. Location N, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation, Typical 18 Places.
Item 2 and Item 1) and install pipe-to-tube elbows to platform (air tank) weldment.
Figure 37. Location M, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-21
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
20. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 38, Item 5) and
install pipe-to-tube tee to pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 38, Item 4).
Figure 38. Location L, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.

23. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 39, Item 5)
and install to pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 39, Item 4).
Figure 39. Location K, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-22
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
24. Install two tube nipples (Figure 40, Item 6 and Item 3) to platform weldment and secure with two tube locknuts (Figure 40,
Item 4 and Item 5).
25. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings and install two straight pipe-to-hose adapters (Figure 40, Item 7
and Item 2) and straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 40, Item 8 and Item 1) to two tube nipples (Figure 40, Item 6
and Item 3).
Figure 40. Location J, Tube Nipples Installation, 10 Places.

28. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from tube tee (Figure 41, Item 5) and install
to pipe-to-tube elbow (Figure 41, Item 4).
Figure 41. Location H, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-23
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
29. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Install straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 42, Item 1) and three
pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 42, Item 2 and Item 3) to platform (air tank) weldment.
Figure 42. Location G, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.

30. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of drain cock and install drain cock (Figure 43, Item 1) to platform (air
tank) weldment. Open loop clamp (Figure 43, Item 2) and place loop end of lanyard (Figure 43, Item 5) for drain
cock into loop clamp.
31. Align and install loop clamp (Figure 43, Item 2) to weld stud and secure with lockwasher (Figure 43, Item 3) and
nut (Figure 43, Item 4).
Figure 43. Location F, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation, Typical 5 Places.
0074-24
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
Item 5 and Item 3) and two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 44, Item 4), and install elbows and adapters to
air pressure relay valve (Figure 44, Item 6).
Figure 44. Location E, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.

Item 5), three pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 45, Item 7 and Item 6), two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 45, Item 4),
and pipe-to-tube tee (Figure 45, Item 8). Install elbows, adapters, and tee to air pressure (multifunction) relay valve
35. Install air pressure (multifunction) relay valve (Figure 45, Item 3) to platform weldment and secure with two screws
(Figure 45, Item 2) and lockwashers (Figure 45, Item 1). Use torque wrench to torque screws to 50 to 75 in.-lb (5.5
to 8.0 Nm).
Figure 45. Location D, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.
0074-25
0074 TM 9-2330-381-13
36. Align and install nut (Figure 46, Item 13) and rod end clevis (Figure 46, Item 12) onto brake chamber assembly (Figure 46,
Item 14). Install nut and clevis using the same number of turns recorded during removal.
37. Install seal plug (Figure 46, Item 1) and screw (Figure 46, Item 2) to brake chamber assembly (Figure 46, Item 14)
and align and install brake chamber assembly onto axle.
38. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from two elbow fittings (Figure 46, Item 6)
and install elbow fittings to brake chamber assembly (Figure 46, Item 14). Connect two nonmetallic hoses (Figure 46,
Item 5) to elbow fittings.
39. Install two hose clamps (Figure 46, Item 4) and nonmetallic channels (Figure 46, Item 3) onto two nonmetallic hoses
40. Use 15/16 in. deepwell socket to secure brake chamber assembly (Figure 46, Item 14) to axle by installing two lockwashers
(Figure 46, Item 8) and nuts (Figure 46, Item 7). Use a torque wrench to torque nuts to 80 to 125 lb-ft (108.5 to 169.5 Nm).
41. Align and install headless pin (Figure 46, Item 11), two flat washers (Figure 46, Item 9), and cotter pin (Figure 46, Item 10)
to rod end clevis (Figure 46, Item 12).
Figure 46. Location C, Brake Chamber Assembly, 10 Places.
0074-26
TM 9-2330-381-13 0074
42. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 47,
Item 6) and two pipe-to-tube elbows (Figure 47, Item 1), and install adapter and elbows to brake valve (Figure 47, Item 2).
43. Align and install brake valve (Figure 47, Item 2) to platform weldment and secure with washer (Figure 47, Item 3) and
retainer nut (Figure 47, Item 4). Install knob (Figure 47, Item 5) onto brake valve.
Figure 47. Location B, Pipe Sealant Compound to Male Threads Installation.

44. Remove caps/plugs from two tube elbows (Figure 48, Item 4) and install elbows to platform weldment (Figure 48,
Item 5). Secure tube elbows in place using fitting nuts (Figure 48, Item 3).
45. Apply pipe sealant compound to male threads of fittings. Remove caps/plugs from four straight pipe-to-hose adapters
(Figure 48, Item 2) and straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 48, Item 1), and install adapters onto two tube elbows
Figure 48. Location A, Elbows to Weldment Installation.

END OF TASK
Couple tractor/semitrailer, charge air system, and check for leaks (WP 0013).
Perform highway driving and check brake operations (WP 0014).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0074-27/28 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0075
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HUB AND DRUM
INITIAL SETUP:
2
Materials/Parts
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Wheels removed from affected bogie (WP 0078 and
Rear Hub Oil Seal (1) WP 0079) or (WP 0080 and WP 0081)
Gasket (1) Brakes caged (WP 0023)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the hub and drum.
REMOVAL
WARNING
When trailer has performed heavy braking, the brake drums should be HOT to the touch. Use
caution and do not come in contact with the brake drum to check for heat. Allow brake drum to cool
before performing maintenance. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
1. Rotate hub and drum assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) in both directions to ensure brakes are properly caged. If hub and
drum assembly spins freely, brakes are properly caged.
2. If hub and drum assembly drags on brake shoes, turn nut (Figure 1, Item 2) clockwise until hub and drum assembly
(Figure 1, Item 1) spins freely.
Figure 1. Cage Brake Check.
0075-1
0075 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Remove six capscrews (Figure 2, Item 10), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 9), wheel hub cap (Figure 2, Item 8), and gasket
(Figure 2, Item 7) from hub and drum assembly (Figure 2, Item 2). Discard lockwashers and gasket.
4. Remove setscrew (Figure 2, Item 11) from lockwasher assembly (Figure 2, Item 5). Use 3/4 in. drive ratchet and 3-1/4 in.
and 3-7/8 in. wheel bearing sockets to loosen and remove wheel bearing jamnut (Figure 2, Item 6), lockwasher assembly,
and wheel bearing adjusting nut (Figure 2, Item 4) from axle (Figure 2, Item 1).
WARNING
When removing hub and drum assembly from the axle, two personnel are required. One
person removes parts, and one person supports hub and drum assembly in place on the axle.
5. Use two personnel to remove outer tapered roller bearing (Figure 2, Item 3) and hub and drum assembly (Figure 2, Item 2)
from axle (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Hub and Drum Assembly Removal.

END OF TASK
0075-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0075
REPAIR
1. Remove plain encased seal (Figure 3, Item 1) and inner tapered roller bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 2) from hub and drum
assembly (Figure 3, Item 4). Discard seal.
2. Drive out outer tapered roller bearing cup (Figure 3, Item 8) from inner axle side of hub and drum assembly (Figure 3,
Item 4).
3. Drive out inner tapered roller bearing cup (Figure 3, Item 3) from wheel hub cap side of hub and drum assembly (Figure 3,
Item 4).
CAUTION
Note thread type of the studs removed; studs are either right-hand or left-hand - inner or outer. The same
type of studs must be reinstalled when replacing studs, or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
If the drum must be turned/repaired, the wheel hub assembly and brake drum must be separated.
4. Drive ten studs (Figure 3, Item 5) from hub and drum assembly (Figure 3, Item 4).
5. Separate brake drum (Figure 3, Item 6) and wheel hub (Figure 3, Item 7).
Figure 3. Hub and Drum Repair.
0075-3
0075 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
NOTE
To ensure enough bearing grease has been packed into the bearing cones, examine small side of
the cone to see if grease has passed through and correctly filled the bearing cavities.
6. Clean all grease from parts removed in degreasing tank using cleaning solvent compound. Using grease, a lubrication
gun, and a bearing packer, pack inner and outer wheel bearing cones, forcing grease into wheel bearing cavities between
rollers from large end of cones.
7. Liberally hand-apply grease to axle.
0075-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0075
8. Align wheel hub (Figure 4, Item 7) and brake drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 6), and drive ten studs (Figure 4, Item 5)
through brake drum and into wheel hub.
CAUTION
When installing inner and outer bearing cups, apply driving force to outer edges of cup. Rotate driving
points to ensure bearing cups are being installed evenly and correctly, or damage to cups may result.
9. Place hub and drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 4) on flat surface and install inner tapered roller bearing cup (Figure 4, Item 3).
10. Install outer tapered roller bearing cup (Figure 4, Item 8) into hub and drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 4).
NOTE
When installing a plain encased seal, apply driving force to outer edges of seal. Rotate driving points to
ensure the seal is being installed evenly and correctly or damage to the seal may result.
11. Install inner tapered roller bearing cone (Figure 4, Item 2) into hub and drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 4) and, using a
soft-faced hammer, install plain encased seal (Figure 4, Item 1).
Figure 4. Seal Installation.

END OF TASK
0075-5
0075 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
To avoid serious injury to personnel when removing hub and drum assembly from
the axle, two persons are required. One person removes parts, and one person
supports hub and drum assembly in place on the axle.
1. Use two personnel to align and install hub and drum assembly (Figure 5, Item 2) onto axle (Figure 5 Item 1).
2. Install outer tapered roller bearing cone (Figure 5, Item 3) onto axle (Figure 5, Item 1). Install wheel bearing adjusting nut
(Figure 5, Item 4) onto axle.
3. Use 0 to 600 lb-ft (813 Nm) torque wrench and 3-7/8 in. wheel bearing socket to torque wheel bearing adjusting nut
(Figure 5, Item 4) to 100 lb-ft (135 Nm) while rotating hub and drum assembly (Figure 5, Item 2) in both directions to
ensure all bearing surfaces come in full contact and that seal seats completely.
4. Loosen wheel bearing adjusting nut (Figure 5, Item 4) completely and re-torque to 50 lb-ft (68 Nm).
CAUTION
Failure to back off wheel bearing adjusting nut as specified will result in premature
failure of the wheel bearing and damage to equipment.
5. Loosen wheel bearing adjusting nut (Figure 5, Item 4) 1/6 to 1/4 turn so that dowel on wheel bearing adjusting nut aligns
with one of several large unthreaded holes in lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 5).
6. Install new lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 5). Ensure dowel on wheel bearing adjusting nut (Figure 5, Item 4) fully engages
an unthreaded hole in lockwasher.
7. Install wheel bearing jamnut (Figure 5, Item 6) onto axle (Figure 5, Item 1). Use 0 to 600 lb-ft (813 Nm) torque wrench
and 3-1/4 in. wheel bearing socket to torque wheel bearing jam nut to 250 to 300 lb-ft (339 to 407 Nm).
8. Install setscrew (Figure 5, Item 11) into one of four small threaded holes in lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 5) and tighten until
setscrew firmly bottoms out against adjusting nut (Figure 5, Item 4). Approximately 1/8 in. of set screw will protrude out
over flat of jamnut.
9. Install new gasket (Figure 5, Item 7) and hub cap (Figure 5, Item 8) onto hub and drum assembly (Figure 5, Item 2). Install
six new lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 9) and capscrews (Figure 5 item 10). Use 1/2 in. drive torque wrench to torque six
capscrews to 15 to 20 lb-ft (20 to 27 Nm).
0075-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0075
Figure 5. Installation of Hub and Drum Assembly.

END OF TASK
Install wheels (WP 0078, WP 0079, WP 0080, and WP 0081) on affected bogie.
Uncage brakes (WP 0023).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0075-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0076
FIELD MAINTENANCE
TIRE
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools References
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) TM 9-2610-200-14
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) TM 9-2330-381-24P
Tire Balancer Operators Manual TM 9-4910-743-14&P
Materials/Parts
Lubricant Tire and Rim, Quart Can (WP 0170, Item 19) Equipment Conditions
Wheel and tire removed from semitrailer (WP 0078,
Personnel Required
WP 0079, WP 0080, or WP 0081)
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the tire.
0076-1
0076 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Remove valve cap from valve stem (Figure 1, Item 3).
2. Use pneumatic tire valve repair tool and remove valve from valve stem (Figure 1, Item 3). Run a piece of wire through
valve stem to ensure that it is not plugged. Allow all air from inside of tire to escape.
WARNING
Before breaking tire bead, ensure no air pressure remains in tire. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
• Use tire and rim lubricant as necessary to avoid damaging tire beads when disassembling tire from wheel.
• Never use petroleum-based products such as oil or grease when disassembling tires from wheels.
Petroleum-based products may damage tires. Use only approved tire and rim lubricant.
3. Use two personnel, bead breaker tire iron, and double-ended tire iron to break bead on tire and remove tire (Figure 1, Item 1)
from wheel (Figure 1, Item 2).
4. Remove valve stem (Figure1, Item 3) from wheel (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Removal of Valve Stem and Tire.
0076-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0076
5. Inspect wheel for damage, cracks, corrosion, dents, and warping. Check for elongated mounting holes in wheel. If
defective, replace wheel. Remove rust, oil, and lubricant residue from wheel.
6. Inspect valve stem for leaky valve, corrosion, cuts or nicks, blockage, dents, or non-sealing surface. If defects exist,
replace valve stem.
7. Inspect tire beads, sidewalls, treads, and shoulders in accordance with TM 9-2610-200-14. If defects are found, repair
tire in accordance with TM 9-2610-200-14.
8. Inspect complete inside surface of tire/inner liner for imperfections, discoloration, holes, or irregular surface areas.
Remove any foreign material such as paper, stones, dirt, water, etc.
END OF TASK
0076-3
0076 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use valve stem fishing tool and install valve stem (Figure 2, Item 3) onto wheel (Figure 2, Item 2). Ensure valve has been
removed from inside valve stem (Figure 2, Item 3).
WARNING
DO NOT use retreads on the M1000 semitrailer. Only tires listed in TM 9-2330-381-24P, Repair Parts
and Special Tools List (RPSTL), are authorized for use. Failure to follow this warning may result in tire
failure and may cause equipment damage and serious injury or death to personnel.
2. Use two personnel, bead breaker tire iron, and double-ended tire iron to install tire (Figure 2, Item 1) onto wheel (Figure 2,
Item 2).
WARNING
• Tire may explode. Place wheel and tire in safety cage before inflating. Stay back at least 10 feet (3.1 m) from
cage when inflating tire. Always stay out of the trajectory area. Always use an air hose extension (10-ft. [3.1 m]
minimum), a snap-on chuck, and an in-line inflator gauge.
• When wheel/tire assembly is in safety cage, DO NOT lean against, stand on, or reach over into the cage.
• Never inflate tire over 40 psi (276 kPa) to seat bead. If beads do not seat, deflate, demount, and check the
tire/wheel match.
• When using compressed air, always wear safety goggles to prevent dirt and debris from entering your eyes.
Compressed air stream must be less than 30 psi (207 kPa).
3. Use air compressor and inflator gauge to inflate tire to reseal tire bead. Once tire bead is established, use pneumatic valve
repair tool and insert valve into valve stem (Figure 2, Item 3).
4. Inflate tire to 95 psi ±5 psi (655 kPa ±34 kPa).
5. Pour water onto valve stem (Figure 2, Item 3) and inner and outer beads of tire to check for leaks.
0076-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0076
Figure 2. Installation of Valve Stem and Tire.

6. Balance wheel using vehicle wheel balancer as required in accordance with TM 9-4910-743-14&P.
END OF TASK
Install wheel onto semitrailer (WP 0078, WP 0079, WP 0080, or WP 0081).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0076-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0077
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SPARE TIRE
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic's Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Platform set at normal road height (WP 0008)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Davit (WP 0168, Item 29) (WP 0007)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the spare tire.
0077-1
0077 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• The spare tire is heavy. Use the davit, as described below, to raise or lower spare tire to/from the gooseneck.
When on top of the gooseneck and removing or installing spare tire, always hold onto handrail or davit with
one hand to avoid falling.
Personnel working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck solar
battery charger or trip over it.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in serious injury or death to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
The following procedures apply to either the curbside or streetside spare
tires as mounted on the gooseneck.
1. Use ratchet, extension, and lug socket to remove right-hand threaded lug nut (Figure 1, Item 10) from spare tire (Figure 1,
Item 6).
2. Use ratchet, extension, and 1 1/8 in. socket to remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 11), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 12),
and washers (Figure 1, Item 13) that secure spare tire (Figure 1, Item 6) to spare tire bracket (Figure 1, Item 14).
WARNING
Always use leather gloves when handling cable. Cable can become frayed during use.
0077-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0077
3. Unhook davit winch cable (Figure 1, Item 7) from stow point on davit (Figure 1, Item 1) base.
4. Remove linch pin (Figure 1, Item 4) from hitch pin (Figure 1, Item 5) on winch cable pulley clamp (Figure 1, Item 3)
and reposition pulley clamp on davit arm (Figure 1, Item 1) near davit winch (Figure 1 item 2). Insert hitch pin and
linch pin to secure pulley clamp.
5. From gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 15) remove linch pin (Figure 1, Item 8) from hitch pin (Figure 1, Item 9) at base of davit
and swing davit arm (Figure 1, Item 1) and winch (Figure 1, Item 2) over spare tire (Figure 1, Item 6).
Figure 1. Removal of Spare Tire.
0077-3
0077 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Attach winch cable (Figure 2, Item 6) to spare tire (Figure 2, Item 3) by passing hook end of cable through center of tire rim
and hooking back onto cable atop spare tire.
WARNING
On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to top of gooseneck directly in front
of spare tires. Personnel working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to
step on the gooseneck solar battery charger or trip over it. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
7. Operate davit winch (Figure 2, Item 2) to lift spare tire (Figure 2, Item 3) off of bracket (Figure 2, Item 5). Swing davit
arm (Figure 2, Item 1) and spare tire out over curbside of gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 4) and operate winch to lower spare
tire to ground.
8. Spotter must remove winch cable (Figure 2, Item 6) from spare tire (Figure 2, Item 3) once tire is on the ground.
0077-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0077
Figure 2. Removal of Spare Tire.

END OF TASK
0077-5
0077 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
• Always use leather gloves when handling cable. Cable can become frayed during use. Failure to follow this
Personnel working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck solar
battery charger or trip over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury to personnel or
1. On curbside of gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 15), on ground, attach winch cable (Figure 3, Item 7) from davit arm (Figure 3,
Item 1) to spare tire (Figure 3, Item 6) by passing hook end of cable through center of tire rim and hooking back on
cable atop spare tire.
WARNING
The spare tire is heavy. Use the davit, as described below, to raise or lower spare tire to/from the
gooseneck. When on top of the gooseneck and removing or installing spare tire, always hold onto
handrail or davit with one hand to avoid falling and causing injury to personnel.
2. Use davit winch (Figure 3, Item 2) to raise up spare tire (Figure 3, Item 6) onto gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 15).
3. Swing davit arm (Figure 3, Item 1) and winch cable (Figure 3, Item 7) with spare tire (Figure 3, Item 6) over into position
on spare tire bracket (Figure 3, Item 14).
4. Align spare tire (Figure 3, Item 6) onto studs on spare tire bracket (Figure 3, Item 14).
5. Install right-hand lug nut (Figure 3, Item 10), two capscrews (Figure 3, Item 11), lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 12), and
washers (Figure 3, Item 13) onto spare tire bracket (Figure 3, Item 14).
6. Remove winch cable (Figure 3, Item 7) from spare tire.
7. Remove hitch pin (Figure 3, Item 5) from winch cable pulley clamp (Figure 3, Item 3) and move pulley clamp to stow
position at end of davit arm (Figure 3, Item 1). Install hitch pin and secure with linch pin (Figure 3, Item 4).
8. Reposition davit arm (Figure 3, Item 1) to stow position, install hitch pin (Figure 3, Item 9), and secure with linch pin
(Figure 3, Item 8).
9. Attach winch cable (Figure 3, Item 7) hook at base of davit arm (Figure 3, Item 1) and take up slack in cable.
0077-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0077
NOTE
Restow all tools and equipment used during this procedure.
Figure 3. Installation of Spare Tire.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0077-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0078
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OUTER/OUTER WHEEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 11) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Chain Assembly, 1/2 in., 11 in. L (WP 0168, Item 30) (WP 0007)
Metallic Tube, 36 in. L (WP 0168, Item 31) If necessary, spare tire removed (WP 0077)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the outer/outer wheel.
0078-1
0078 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
Wheel removal/installation is divided into four separate procedures. Refer to the diagram
in Figure 1 for location, wheel designation, and thread types. Within each procedure, notes
will identify wheels and right-hand/left-hand lug nuts or lug studs.
Figure 1. Wheel Descriptions.
0078-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0078

2. Adjust platform (WP 0008) to normal road height. Leave APU running to recharge battery.
CAUTION
Use Figure 1 for identification purposes. Wheel A has left-hand threaded lug nuts. Wheel
H has right-hand threaded lug nuts. During removal, use correct rotation for each type of
thread or damage to lug nuts and lug studs may result.
3. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, metallic tube, and lug socket to loosen ten lug nuts (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Loosen Lug Nuts.
0078-3
0078 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. Attach suspension chain (Figure 3, Item 3) to bogie (Figure 3, Item 7) per steps 5 and 6.
CAUTION
When securing hook to axle, ensure the suspension chain does not cross over any hydraulic
lines or air brake hoses. If chain crosses over lines, chafing of a line/hose, loss of air brake
pressure, loss of hydraulic fluid, or damage to equipment may result.
5. Attach end (top) hook (Figure 3, Item 2) of suspension chain (Figure 3, Item 3) along outboard side of bogie (Figure 3,
Item 7), beneath both hydraulic and air brake lines, into opening in upper suspension arm casting of bogie (Figure 3, Item 1).
6. Attach bottom hook (Figure 3, Item 6) of suspension chain (Figure 3, Item 3) onto back end of square casting under axle
(Figure 3, Item 5), outboard of parking brake chamber (Figure 3, Item 4).
Figure 3. Securing Bogie.
0078-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0078
WARNING
Ensure suspension isolation valve at the affected bogie is closed (handle facing outward)
prior to adjusting platform height or the suspension chain may break and cause serious
injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment.
7. At affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 1), close valve handle (Figure 4, Item 3) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 4, Item 2),
with handle facing outboard from center of platform.
8. Raise platform (WP 0008) until all tires for affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 1) are off ground.
9. Remove lug nuts (Figure 4, Item 4) and outer/outer wheel (Figure 4, Item 5) from lug studs (Figure 4, Item 6) on affected
10. If other tire maintenance procedures are to be performed, let APU run to charge battery.
Figure 4. Removal of Tire Assembly.

END OF TASK
0078-5
0078 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005) if not running.
2. Inspect wheels for damage. Inspect stud holes for debris and clean if necessary.
3. Clean all threads on studs and nuts.
4. Align outer/outer wheel (Figure 5, Item 3) on lug studs (Figure 5, Item 4) so that valve stem is 180 degrees opposite
valve stem on inner wheel of bogie (Figure 5, Item 1).
5. Install top and bottom lug nuts (Figure 5, Item 2) finger-tight to seat wheel (Figure 5, Item 3) properly.
6. Install and hand-tighten eight remaining lug nuts (Figure 5, Item 2).
7. Hand-tighten all ten lug nuts in sequence shown in Figure 6.
Figure 5. Installation and Tightening of Assembly.
0078-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0078
8. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie contact ground.
9. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, and lug socket to continue to tighten lug nuts in sequence shown in Figure 6.
10. Notify unit maintenance that lug nuts need to be torqued to 450 to 501 lb-ft (610 to 680 Nm). Torque in sequence
shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6. Tightening Sequence for Outer Dual Set.
0078-7
0078 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. Open valve handle (Figure 7, Item 2) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 7, Item 3 and WP 0004) at affected bogie
(Figure 7, Item 4) with handle facing inboard toward front of semitrailer.
11. Continue to lower platform (WP 0008) until there is enough clearance for chain (Figure 7, Item 1) to be removed from
affected bogie (Figure 7, Item 4).
12. If other tire maintenance procedures are to be performed, let APU run to charge battery.
13. Remove suspension chain (Figure 7, Item 1) from affected bogie (Figure 7, Item 4).
Figure 7. Lowering Platform and Removing Suspension Chain.
NOTE
Restow all tools and equipment used during this procedure.
END OF TASK
Notify unit maintenance that wheel on affected bogie requires torquing.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0078-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0079
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OUTER/INNER WHEEL
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Outer/outer wheel removed (WP 0078)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) If necessary, spare tire removed (WP 0077)
Chain Assembly, 1/2 in., 11 in. L (WP 0168, Item 30)
Metallic Tube, 36 in. L (WP 0168, Item 31)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the outer/inner wheel.
0079-1
0079 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
Figure 1. Tire/Wheel Identity.
0079-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0079
1. Start and run Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005) if not running.
2. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie are on ground.
CAUTION
Use Figure 1 for identification purposes. Wheel B has left-hand threaded lug studs. Wheel
G has right-hand threaded lug studs. During removal, use correct rotation for each type of
3. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, metallic tube, and lug socket to remove ten lug studs (Figure 2, Item 3).
4. Raise platform (WP 0008) until all tires for affected bogie are off ground.
5. Remove ten lug studs (Figure 2, Item 3) and outer/inner wheel (Figure 2, Item 2) from hub studs (Figure 2, Item 1) on
affected bogie. Clean lug studs and hub studs.
NOTE
If other tire maintenance is to be performed, let APU run to charge battery.
Figure 2. Removal of Lug Studs.

END OF TASK
0079-3
0079 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Align and install outer/inner wheel (Figure 3, Item 2) onto hub studs (Figure 3, Item 1) at affected bogie.
CAUTION
Use Figure 1 for identification purposes. Wheel B has left-hand threaded lug studs.
Wheel G has right-hand threaded lug studs. Use correct rotation for each type of thread
or damage to lug studs and hub studs may result.
2. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, and lug socket to install ten lug studs (Figure 3, Item 3) onto hub studs (Figure 3, Item 1)
in sequence shown in Figure 4.
Figure 3. Installation of Lug Studs.
0079-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0079
3. Start APU if not already running (WP 0005).

4. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie contact ground.
5. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, and lug socket to continue to tighten lug studs in sequence shown in Figure 4.
6. Notify unit maintenance that lug studs need to be torqued to 450 to 501 lb-ft (610 to 680 Nm). Torque in sequence
shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Tightening Sequence for Inner Dual Set.

END OF TASK
Install outer/outer wheel (WP 0078).
Notify unit maintenance that wheel on affected bogie requires torquing.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0079-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0080
FIELD MAINTENANCE
INNER/OUTER WHEEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Platform set at normal road height (WP 0008)
Chain Assembly, 1/2 in., 11 in. L (WP 0168, Item 30) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Metallic Tube, 36 in. L (WP 0168, Item 31) (WP 0007)
If necessary, spare tire removed (WP 0077)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the inner/outer wheel.
0080-1
0080 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
0080-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0080
CAUTION
Push steering or non-steering connecting link forward, toward front of semitrailer, to allow clearance
for suspension assembly to be rotated or damage to equipment may result.
1. Use 1 1/8 in. socket, ratchet, and adjustable wrench to loosen and remove safety pin (Figure 2, Item 6) and nut (Figure 2,
Item 7) from capscrew (Figure 2, Item 2). Leave capscrew inside of connecting link (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Use suitable prying device (Figure 2, Item 4) to lift up or press down and remove connecting link (Figure 2, Item 1) from
affected bogie (Figure 2, Item 3). Once connecting link is pushed out of way, align and install nut (Figure 2, Item 7) and
safety pin (Figure 2, Item 6) back onto capscrew (Figure 2, Item 2) for temporary storage.
3. If no. 1 bogie connecting link (Figure 2, Item 1) was disconnected, remove preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 5).
Figure 2. Removing Connecting Links.
0080-3
0080 TM 9-2330-381-13

5. Lower platform (WP 0008) to normal road height. Leave APU running to recharge battery.
CAUTION
When securing hook to axle, ensure the suspension chain does not contact any hydraulic lines
or air brake hoses. If contact is made, chafing of a line/hose, loss of air brake pressure, loss
of hydraulic fluid, or damage to equipment may result.
6. Attach suspension chain (Figure 3, Item 7) to bogie (Figure 3, Item 1) as per steps 7 and 8.
7. Attach top end hook (Figure 3, Item 2) of suspension chain (Figure 3, Item 7) along outboard side of bogie (Figure 3,
Item 1), beneath both hydraulic and air brake lines (Figure 3, Item 5 and Item 6), into opening in upper suspension arm
casting of bogie.
8. Attach bottom end hook (Figure 3, Item 10) of suspension chain (Figure 3, Item 7) onto back end of square casting under
axle (Figure 3, Item 9), outboard of parking brake chamber (Figure 3, Item 8).
WARNING
Ensure suspension isolation valve at the affected bogie is closed (handle facing outward)
prior to adjusting platform height or the suspension chain may break and cause serious
injury or death to personnel and damage to equipment.
9. At affected bogie (Figure 3, Item 1), close valve handle (Figure 3, Item 4) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 3,
Item 3), with handle facing outboard from center of platform.
Figure 3. Raising Platform.
0080-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0080
CAUTION
The bogie must be rotated outward from its normal position so that the linkage attaching point is
outboard of the platform edge or damage to the hydraulic and/or pneumatic lines may result.
11. Start to turn bogie (Figure 4, Item 1) outboard, away from center of platform. Ensure no sharp bends, kinks, or excess strain
exists on two hydraulic lines and air brake lines (Figure 4, Item 3 and Item 4) routed to affected bogie.
CAUTION
DO NOT turn bogie more than 90 degrees outboard from center of platform or damage
to hydraulic and/or pneumatic lines may result.
12. Continue to turn bogie (Figure 4, Item 1) until bogie linkage attaching point (Figure 4, Item 2) is outboard of platform
edge, and bogie axle (Figure 4, Item 5) is parallel with that side of platform, not to exceed 90 degrees from original
forward position.
13. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie (Figure 4, Item 1) contact ground.
CAUTION
Use Figure 1 for identification purposes. Wheel E has left-hand threaded lug nuts. Wheel
D has right-hand threaded lug nuts. During removal, use correct rotation for each type of
Figure 4. Bogie Linkage Attaching Removal Point.
0080-5
0080 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Remove lug nuts (Figure 5, Item 4) and inner/outer wheel (Figure 5, Item 3) from lug studs (Figure 5, Item 1) on affected
17. Leave APU running to charge battery if other tire maintenance procedures are to be performed.
Figure 5. Removing Lug Nuts.

END OF TASK
0080-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0080
INSTALLATION
1. Start APU (WP 0005) if not running.
2. Inspect wheels for damage. Inspect stud holes for debris and clean if necessary.
3. Clean all threads on studs and nuts.
4. Align inner/outer wheel (Figure 6, Item 3) onto lug studs (Figure 6, Item 1) so that valve stem is 180 degrees opposite
valve stem on inner wheel.
5. Install top and bottom lug nuts (Figure 6, Item 4) fingertight to seat wheel properly.
6. Install and hand-tighten eight remaining lug nuts (Figure 6, Item 4) and hand-tighten all ten lug nuts in sequence shown
in Figure 7.
7. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie (Figure 6, Item 2) come in contact with the ground.
Figure 6. Tire Maintenance.

8. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, and lug socket to continue to tighten lug nuts in sequence shown in Figure 7. Notify unit
maintenance that lug nuts need to be torqued to 450 to 501 lb-ft (610 to 680 Nm). Torque in sequence shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7. Tightening Sequence for Outer Dual Set.
0080-7
0080 TM 9-2330-381-13
9. Raise platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie (Figure 8, Item 1) are off ground.
10. Rotate bogie (Figure 8, Item 1) with suspension chain (Figure 8, Item 2) still attached and pull toward semitrailer gooseneck
so that linkage attaching point (Figure 8, Item 5) faces forward.
CAUTION
Ensure that hydraulic and air brake lines are securely mounted on bogie or damage to equipment may result.
11. Check that two hydraulic lines (Figure 8, Item 4) and air brake lines (Figure 8, Item 3) are not chafed, broken, or missing any
electrical tie-wraps at affected bogie (Figure 8, Item 1). If any defects exist or items are missing, notify unit maintenance.
Figure 8. Connecting Linkage Attaching Point.
0080-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0080
12. Continue to move bogie (Figure 9, Item 3) as required until linkage attaching point on bogie is approximately aligned with
connecting link (Figure 9, Item 1). Prying device (Figure 9, Item 4) may be used to help with alignment.
13. For no. 1 bogie only, align and install preformed packing (Figure 9, Item 5) onto bogie (Figure 9, Item 3).
14. Remove safety pin (Figure 9, Item 6) and nut (Figure 9, Item 7) from capscrew (Figure 9, Item 2). Align and install
connecting link (Figure 9, Item 1) onto linkage attaching point on bogie (Figure 9, Item 3). Secure connecting link in
place by installing capscrew and nut.
15. Use adjustable wrench, ratchet, and 1 1/8 in. socket to continue to tighten nut (Figure 9, Item 7) until hole in capscrew
(Figure 9, Item 2) is aligned with slot in nut. Install safety pin (Figure 9, Item 6). Notify unit maintenance that nut needs to
be torqued to a minimum of 205 lb-ft (278 Nm). Then, continue to tighten nut until first available slot is aligned with
hole and safety pin can be installed.
Figure 9. Installing Connecting Links.
0080-9
0080 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie touch ground.
17. Open valve handle (Figure 10, Item 2) on suspension isolation valve (Figure 10, Item 3) with handle facing inboard toward
front of semitrailer at affected bogie (Figure 10, Item 1).
18. Continue to lower platform (WP 0008) until there is enough clearance to remove suspension chain (Figure 10, Item 4)
from affected bogie (Figure 10, Item 1).
Figure 10. Suspension Isolation Valve.

19. Readjust platform height (WP 0008) to 43 in. (109 cm).
21. Restow all tools and equipment used during this procedure.
END OF TASK
Notify unit maintenance that wheel nuts and nut on outboard end of connecting link of affected bogie require torquing.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0080-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0081
FIELD MAINTENANCE
INNER/INNER WHEEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Inner/outer wheel removed (WP 0080)
Chain Assembly, 1/2 in., 11 in. L (WP 0168, Item 30) Spare tire removed (WP 0077), if necessary
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the inner/inner wheel.
0081-1
0081 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE

1. Start and run Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005) if not running.
2. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie are on ground.
CAUTION
Use Figure 1 for identification purposes. Wheel F has left-hand threaded lug studs. Wheel
C has right-hand threaded lug studs. During removal, use correct rotation for each type of
thread or damage to lug studs and hub studs may result.
4. Raise platform (WP 0008) until all tires for affected bogie (Figure 2, Item 2) are off ground.
5. Remove ten lug nuts (Figure 2, Item 4) and inner/inner wheel (Figure 2, Item 3) from studs (Figure 2, Item 1) on affected
bogie (Figure 2, Item 2). Clean lug studs and studs.
6. Let APU run to charge battery if other tire maintenance is to be performed.
0081-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0081
Figure 2. Removal of Inner/Inner Wheel.

END OF TASK
INSTALLATION
1. Align and install inner/inner wheel (Figure 3, Item 4) onto hub studs (Figure 3, Item 1) at affected bogie (Figure 3, Item 2).
CAUTION
Use Figure 1 for identification purposes. Wheel B has left-hand threaded lug studs. Wheel G has right-hand
threaded lug studs. Use correct rotation for each type thread or damage to lug studs and hub studs may result.
2. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, and lug socket to install ten lug studs (Figure 3, Item 3) onto hub studs (Figure 3, Item 1)
in sequence shown in Figure 4.
Figure 3. Installation of Inner/Inner Wheel.
0081-3
0081 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Start and run APU (WP 0005) if not running.

4. Lower platform (WP 0008) until all tires on affected bogie come in contact with the ground.
5. Use ratchet, 8 in. extension, and lug socket to continue to tighten lug studs in sequence shown in Figure 4. Notify unit
maintenance that lug studs need to be torqued to 450 to 500 lb-ft (610 to 680 Nm). Torque in sequence shown in Figure 4.
Figure 4. Tightening Sequence for Inner Dual Tire Set.

6. Raise platform (WP 0008) until all tires for affected bogie are off the ground.
END OF TASK
Install inner/outer wheel (WP 0080).
Notify unit maintenance that wheels on affected bogie require torquing.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0081-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CONNECTING LINK
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Nonmetallic Seal (2)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Wood Block, 12 in. x 12 in. (4)
Kit, Ultra Bushing Rem/Instl (WP 0168, Item 19)
1
Materials/Parts
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Front and rear support legs lowered onto wood blocks
Locknut (8) supporting platform (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Preformed Packing (5) For connecting links attached to no. 5 steering plate only,
Cotter Pin (2) manually adjust steering for a one-half left turn (WP 0010)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, installation, and urethane bushing repair for the connecting link.
0082-1
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
There are ten connecting links. The two non-steerable connecting links connect the no. 1 bogies to
a rigid platform mount. The remaining eight connecting links connect steerable bogies no. 2 thru
no. 5 to their respective steering plates. To remove a non-steerable connecting link, perform steps
1 thru 6 below. To remove a steerable connecting link, perform steps 7 thru 11 below.
1. Remove special pin (Figure 1, Item 14) from slotted nut (Figure 1, Item 13). Use 3/4 in. ratchet, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8
in. combination wrench to remove slotted nut and capscrew (Figure 1, Item 7) from upper suspension arm (Figure 1,
Item 12) and connecting link (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Use pry bar to pry end of connecting link (Figure 1, Item 1) up and out of linkage attaching point on upper suspension
arm (Figure 1, Item 12). Remove preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 11) from linkage attaching point. Discard preformed
packing.
3. Remove sleeve bushing (Figure 1, Item 8), ring spacer (Figure 1, Item 9), and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 10) from
connecting link (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard preformed packing.
4. Remove cotter pin (Figure 1, Item 3) from slotted nut (Figure 1, Item 2). Use 3/4 in. ratchet, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8 in.
combination wrench to remove slotted nut and capscrew (Figure 1, Item 15) from connecting link (Figure 1, Item 1) and
rigid platform mount (Figure 1, Item 16). Discard cotter pin.
5. Use pry bar to pry end of connecting link (Figure 1, Item 1) up and out of linkage attaching point on rigid platform mount
(Figure 1, Item 16). Remove preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 17) from linkage attaching point. Discard preformed
packing.
6. Remove sleeve bushing (Figure 1, Item 4), ring spacer (Figure 1, Item 5), and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 6) from
connecting link (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard preformed packing.
Figure 1. Typical Non-Steerable Connecting Link.
0082-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
NOTE
Removal procedures for the eight steerable bogie connecting links are the same except for no. 5 bogie. Ensure
the steering plate is set for a one-half left turn or there will not be enough room between the no. 5 steering
plate and platform steering cylinders to remove the steering plate connecting link bolt.
7. Remove special pin (Figure 2, Item 7) from slotted nut (Figure 2, Item 6). Use 3/4 in. ratchet, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8
in. combination wrench to remove slotted nut and capscrew (Figure 2, Item 4) from upper suspension arm (Figure 2,
Item 5) and steerable connecting link (Figure 2, Item 3).
8. Use pry bar to pry end of connecting link (Figure 2, Item 3) up and out of linkage attaching point on upper suspension arm
(Figure 2, Item 5).
9. Remove cotter pin (Figure 2, Item 2) from slotted nut (Figure 2, Item 1). Use 3/4 in. ratchet, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8
in. combination wrench to remove slotted nut and capscrew (Figure 2, Item 8) from connecting link (Figure 2, Item 3)
and steering plate (Figure 2, Item 9). Discard cotter pin.
10. Use pry bar to pry end of connecting link (Figure 2, Item 3) up and out of linkage attaching point on steering plate (Figure 2,
Item 9). Remove preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 10) from steering plate. Discard preformed packing.
11. Remove sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 12) and ring spacer (Figure 2, Item 11) from connecting link (Figure 2, Item 3).
Figure 2. Typical Steerable Connecting Link.

END OF TASK
0082-3
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
NOTE
Perform only the steps necessary to disassemble a connecting link to the point required for
repair. To disassemble a non-steerable connecting link, perform steps 1 and 2. To disassemble
a steerable connecting link, perform steps 3 thru 5.
1. Remove two locknuts (Figure 3, Item 1), four washers (Figure 3, Item 2), and two capscrews (Figure 3, Item 6) from each
rod end (Figure 3, Item 3 and Item 5). Discard locknuts.
NOTE
When removing the rod ends from the connecting link rod, count and document the number of turns required to
unscrew each rod. This recorded information will be required during assembly of the connecting link assembly.
2. Place rigid link (Figure 3, Item 4) in machinist’s vise and, using adjustable automotive wrench while counting turns,
unscrew and remove rod ends (Figure 3, Item 3 and Item 5) from rigid link. Remove rigid link from vise.
Figure 3. Disassembly of Non-Steerable Connecting Link.
0082-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
NOTE
To disassemble any of the eight steerable connecting link assemblies, perform steps 3 thru 5.
3. Remove screw (Figure 4, Item 5), retaining ring (Figure 4, Item 6), two nonmetallic seals (Figure 4, Item 7), and shouldered
pin (Figure 4, Item 8) from rod ends (Figure 4, Item 3 and Item 9). Discard nonmetallic seals.
4. Remove two locknuts (Figure 4, Item 1), four washers (Figure 4, Item 2), and two capscrews (Figure 4, Item 10) from
rod ends (Figure 4, Item 3 and Item 9). Discard locknuts.
NOTE
When removing the rod ends from the connecting link rod, count and document the number of turns required to
unscrew each rod. This recorded information will be required during assembly of the connecting link assembly.
5. Secure rigid link (Figure 4, Item 4) in machinist’s vise and, using adjustable automotive wrench while coounting turns,
unscrew and remove rod ends (Figure 4, Item 9 and Item 3) from rigid link. Remove rigid link from vise.
Figure 4. Disassembly of Steerable Connecting Link.
0082-5
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
62/9(17&/($1,1*&203281''5<&/($1,1*62/9(17
• Solvent cleaning compound MIL-PRF-680 Type ll and Type lll may beirritating to the eyes and skin. Use
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
6. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent and wire brush as necessary. Remove any
nicks, burrs, or corrosion from polished surfaces using crocus cloth.
7. Inspect all parts removed for broken welds, nicks, burrs, pitting, and scoring. Clean parts as required and replace any
parts found defective.
8. Inspect sleeve bushing in both ends of connecting link for worn/distorted urethane. If urethane is worn/distorted, replace
sleeve bushing.
WARNING
0082-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
NOTE
To assemble steerable connecting link, perform steps 9 thru 11. To assemble a non-steerable
connecting link, perform steps 12 and 13.
9. Apply thin coat of grease to threaded ends of rigid link (Figure 5, Item 4). Secure rigid link in machinist’s vise and, using
adjustable automotive wrench, align and install rod ends (Figure 5, Item 3 and Item 9) onto rigid link, threading each rod
end the number of turns recorded during disassembly.
10. Secure each rod end (Figure 5, Item 3 and Item 9) in place by installing two capscrews (Figure 5, Item 10), four washers
(Figure 5, Item 2), and two locknuts (Figure 5, Item 1). Remove rigid link from machinist’s vise.
11. Apply thin coat of grease to two nonmetallic seals (Figure 5, Item 7) and apply thin coat of grease to wear surfaces of
shoulder pin (Figure 5, Item 8). Install shoulder pin, two nonmetallic seals (Figure 5, Item 7), retaining ring (Figure 5,
Item 6), and screw (Figure 5, Item 5) onto rod end (Figure 5, Item 9).
Figure 5. Assembly of Steerable Connecting Link.
NOTE
To assemble non-steerable connecting link, perform steps 12 and 13.
12. Apply thin coat of grease to threaded ends of rigid link (Figure 6, Item 4). Secure rigid link in machinist’s vise and, using
adjustable automotive wrench, align and install rod ends (Figure 6, Item 5 and Item 3) onto rigid link, threading each
rod end the number of turns recorded during disassembly.
13. Secure each rod end (Figure 6, Item 5 and Item 3) in place by installing two capscrews (Figure 6, Item 6), four washers
(Figure 6, Item 2), and two locknuts (Figure 6, Item 1). Remove rigid link (Figure 6, Item 4) from machinist’s vise.
Figure 6. Assembly of Non-steerable Connecting Link.

END OF TASK
0082-7
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
NOTE
Installation procedures for the eight steerable bogie connecting links are the same except for no. 5 bogie.
Ensure the no. 5 steering plate is set for a one-half left turn or there will not be enough room to install the
connecting link bolt between the steering cylinder and steering plate. To install a steerable connecting link,
perform steps 1 thru 6. To install a non-steerable connecting link, perform steps 7 thru 14.
1. Lubricate preformed packing (Figure 7, Item 10) with grease and install preformed packing under connecting link (Figure 7,
Item 3) rod end at linkage attaching point on steering plate (Figure 7, Item 9).
2. Apply thin coat of grease to wear surfaces of sleeve bushing (Figure 7, Item 12). Install ring spacer (Figure 7, Item 11) and
sleeve bushing onto connecting link (Figure 7, Item 3). Install capscrew (Figure 7, Item 8) from underside, through
connecting link rod end and steering plate (Figure 7, Item 9).
NOTE
Torque wrench and socket should be used to hold capscrew. Combination wrench should be used to hold
slotted nut when applying final torque to connecting link attaching hardware.
3. Install slotted nut (Figure 7, Item 1) onto capscrew (Figure 7, Item 8). Use torque wrench, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8 in.
combination wrench to torque slotted nut to 205 lb-ft (278 Nm). Tighten slotted nut additionally, as required, to align first
available slot with hole in shank of capscrew and install cotter pin (Figure 7, Item 2).
4. Position connecting link (Figure 7, Item 3) rod end at linkage attaching point on upper suspension arm (Figure 7, Item 5).
5. Install capscrew (Figure 7, Item 4) from topside through rod end of link assembly (Figure 7, Item 3) and upper suspension
NOTE
available slot with hole in shank of capscrew and install special pin (Figure 7, Item 7).
0082-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
Figure 7. Installation Typical Steerable Connecting Link.
0082-9
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
To install a non-steerable connecting link, perform steps 7 thru 14.
Item 1) rod end at linkage attaching point on fixed platform mount (Figure 8, Item 16).
8. Lubricate preformed packing (Figure 8, Item 6) with grease and apply thin coat of grease to wear surfaces of sleeve
bushing (Figure 8, Item 4). Install preformed packing with ring spacer (Figure 8, Item 5) and sleeve bushing.
9. Install capscrew (Figure 8, Item 15) from underside through connecting link (Figure 8, Item 1) rod end and rigid platform
mount (Figure 8, Item 16).
NOTE
available slot with hole in shank of capscrew and install cotter pin (Figure 8, Item 3).
Item 1) rod end at linkage attaching point on upper suspension arm (Figure 8, Item 12).
12. Lubricate preformed packing (Figure 8, Item 10) with grease and apply thin coat of grease to wear surfaces of sleeve
bushing (Figure 8, Item 8). Install preformed packing with ring spacer (Figure 8, Item 9) and sleeve bushing.
13. Install capscrew (Figure 8, Item 7) from topside through rod end of link assembly (Figure 8, Item 1) and upper suspension
14. Install slotted nut (Figure 8, Item 13) onto capscrew (Figure 8, Item 7). Use torque wrench, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8 in
available slot with hole in shank of capscrew and install special pin (Figure 8, Item 14).
Figure 8. Installation of Typical Non-Steerable Connecting Link.

END OF TASK
0082-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
URETHANE BUSHING REPAIR
NOTE
This task is for the removal of the outboard urethane bushing on outboard end of connecting
links for bogies no. 2, no. 3, no. 4, and no. 5.
1. If connecting link is already removed, proceed to step 6. If connecting link is connected to bogie, proceed with steps
2 through 5.
2. Adjust platform (WP 0008) to 50 in. height (127 cm).
3. Close suspension isolation valves (WP 0004) at four corners of platform, handles facing outward.
4. Remove special pin (Figure 9, Item 7), slotted nut (Figure 9, Item 8), and capscrew (Figure 9, Item 2) from connecting link
(Figure 9, Item 1).
5. Pry up and move connecting link (Figure 9, Item 1) from upper suspension arm (Figure 9, Item 9) on bogie.
6. Remove screw (Figure 9, Item 3), retaining ring (Figure 9, Item 4), two nonmetallic seals (Figure 9, Item 5), and shouldered
pin (Figure 9, Item 6) from connecting link (Figure 9, Item 1). Discard nonmetallic seals.
Figure 9. Urethane Bushing Removal.
0082-11
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. Center bushing cap (Figure 10, Item 3) and washer (Figure 10, Item 2) over urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) on
connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5).
8. Install threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7) up through bottom of urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) and through bushing
cap (Figure 10, Item 3) and washer (Figure 10, Item 2).
9. Install nut (Figure 10, Item 1) onto top of threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7). Thread nut until approximately three threads of
threaded rod protrude past end of nut.
10. Install spacer (Figure 10, Item 6), with recessed side facing upward, onto threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7) from under
side of connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5).
11. Install nut (Figure 10, Item 8) onto threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7). Tighten nut against spacer (Figure 10, Item 6).
12. Center bushing cap (Figure 10, Item 3) and spacer (Figure 10, Item 6) over urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) on
connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5).
13. Use 3/4 in. ratchet, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8 in. combination wrench to tighten nuts (Figure 10, Item 1 and Item 8).
Continue to tighten nuts until urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) is removed from connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5).
14. Remove tool from connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5). Remove nut (Figure 10, Item 8), spacer (Figure 10, Item 6), and
urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) from threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7). Discard urethane bushing.
CAUTION
Urethane bushing is not symmetrical. One side has more urethane material protruding beyond the outer
steel sleeve. Ensure that the side with the most material is pointing downward.
15. Insert new urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) into opening on top of connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5). Install spacer
(Figure 10, Item 6) over urethane bushing. Ensure spacer is properly seated onto urethane bushing.
16. Turn threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7) over so that bushing cap (Figure 10, Item 3) and washer (Figure 10, Item 2) are held in
place by nut (Figure 10, Item 1).
17. Install threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7) up through connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5), urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4),
and spacer (Figure 10, Item 6). Install nut (Figure 10, Item 8) onto threaded rod so that approximately three threads of
threaded rod protrude past end of nut.
18. Center bushing tool onto urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) and opening of connecting link (Figure 10, Item 5). Tighten
nut (Figure 10, Item 1).
0082-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0082
19. Use 3/4 in. ratchet, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8 in. combination wrench to tighten nuts (Figure 10, Item 1 and Item 8).
Continue to tighten nuts until urethane bushing (Figure 10, Item 4) is centered in top and bottom of connecting link
20. Remove nuts (Figure 10, Item 1 and Item 8) from threaded rod (Figure 10, Item 7) and remove pieces of bushing tool.
Figure 10. Urethane Bushing.
0082-13
0082 TM 9-2330-381-13
21. Install shouldered pin (Figure 11, Item 6), two nonmetallic seals (Figure 11, Item 5), and retaining ring (Figure 11, Item 4)
onto connecting link (Figure 11, Item 1), and secure with screw (Figure 11, Item 3).
22. If connecting link (Figure 11, Item 1) was removed, refer to installation procedure and install connecting link. If connecting
link was disconnected from bogie, proceed with steps 23 through 25.
23. Position connecting link (Figure 11, Item 1) onto upper suspension arm (Figure 11, Item 9).
24. Install capscrew (Figure 11, Item 2) through connecting link (Figure 11, Item 1) and upper suspension arm (Figure 11,
Item 9). Install slotted nut (Figure 11, Item 8) onto capscrew.
25. Use torque wrench, 1 1/8 in. socket, and 1 1/8 in. combination wrench to torque slotted nut (Figure 11, Item 8) to 205 to
225 lb-ft (278 to 305 Nm). Tighten nut additionally, as required, to align nut with hole in shank of capscrew (Figure 11,
Item 2). Install special pin (Figure 11, Item 7) into capscrew.
Figure 11. Urethane Bushing Installation.

END OF TASK
Perform platform steering alignment (WP 0038).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0082-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0083
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LONGITUDINAL STRUT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Wood Block, 12 in. x 12 in. (4)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Special Bolt, Self-Locking (2)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6)
Sealing Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) Semitrailer parked on level ground (WP 0014)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Lockwasher (1) Parking brakes applied and wheels chocked (WP 0013)
Packing Retainer (6) Front and rear support legs lowered onto wood blocks
supporting platform (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, and installation of the longitudinal strut.
REMOVAL
NOTE
Loosening the adjusting nut on the longitudinal strut relieves tension on both end
pin assemblies and allows for easier removal.
1. Use adjustable automotive wrench at center of longitudinal strut (Figure 1, Item 1), and loosen nut (Figure 1, Item 3) two
full turns. Then, loosen adjusting nut (Figure 1, Item 2) one and one-half turns counterclockwise.
Figure 1. Typical - All Struts Longitudinal Removal.
0083-1
0083 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Four ends of the six longitudinal struts that attach to steering plates no. 2 and no. 5 are identical. Perform
steps 2 thru 5 to remove one end of a longitudinal strut from no. 2 or no. 5 steering plate.
2. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 2, Item 7) and special bolt (Figure 2, Item 6) from sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 5).
Discard special bolt.
3. Remove sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 5) from steering plate (Figure 2, Item 4). Remove packing retainer (Figure 2,
Item 2) from sleeve bushing. Discard packing retainer.
4. Remove pin assembly (Figure 2, Item 1) from steering plate (Figure 2, Item 4) and longitudinal strut (Figure 2, Item 3).
5. Remove packing retainer (Figure 2, Item 2) from pin assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard packing retainer.
Figure 2. Longitudinal Strut from No. 2 or No. 5 Steering Plate Removal.
0083-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0083
NOTE
Eight ends of the six longitudinal struts that attach to steering plates on bogies no. 3 and no. 4 are identical.
Perform steps 6 thru 11 to remove one end of a longitudinal strut from no. 3 or no. 4 steering plate.
6. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 1) and special bolt (Figure 3, Item 8) from sleeve bushing (Figure 3, Item 7).
Discard special bolt.
7. Remove sleeve bushing (Figure 3, Item 7) from steering plate (Figure 3, Item 9). Remove packing retainer (Figure 3,
Item 3) from sleeve bushing. Discard packing retainer.
8. Remove pin assembly (Figure 3, Item 2) from steering plate (Figure 3, Item 9) and longitudinal strut (Figure 3, Item 4).
9. Remove packing retainer (Figure 3, Item 3) and lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 1) from pin assembly (Figure 3, Item 2).
Discard packing retainer.
10. Use two people to pull ends of both longitudinal struts (Figure 3, Item 4) out and away from steering plate (Figure 3, Item 9).
11. Separate two longitudinal struts (Figure 3, Item 4) and remove spacer sleeve (Figure 3, Item 6) and two packing retainers
(Figure 3, Item 5) from between longitudinal struts. Discard two packing retainers.
Figure 3. Typical at No. 3 and No. 4 Steering Plates.

END OF TASK
0083-3
0083 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. If applicable, remove setscrew (Figure 4, Item 1) from each end of longitudinal strut (Figure 4, Item 7).
2. Use hammer and brass drift to drive two plain bearings (Figure 4, Item 2) from longitudinal strut (Figure 4, Item 7).
3. Use adjustable automotive wrench to unscrew, count, and document number of turns required, and to separate two
machined sockets (Figure 4, Item 6 and Item 3).
4. Remove lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 5) and nut (Figure 4, Item 4) from machined socket (Figure 4, Item 3). Discard
lockwasher.
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
nicks, burrs, or corrosion from polished surfaces using crocus cloth.
6. Inspect all parts removed for broken welds, nicks, burrs, pitting, and scoring. Clean parts as required and replace any
parts found defective.
0083-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0083
7. Thread nut (Figure 4, Item 4) onto machined socket (Figure 4, Item 3) and install lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 5).
NOTE
When assembling sockets together, hold the machined socket with jam nut and lockwasher stationary,
and thread other machined socket clockwise until properly positioned.
8. Assemble two machined sockets (Figure 4, Item 3 and Item 6), threading machined socket the same number of turns
recorded during disassembly.
9. Once both machined sockets (Figure 4, Item 3 and Item 6) are assembled, tighten nut (Figure 4, Item 4).
Figure 4. Longitudinal Strut Assembly.
0083-5
0083 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Longitudinal struts may be either weldments without setscrews, weldments with setscrews on the end
(centerlines) (Figure 5), forgings w ithout setscrews, or forgings with setscrews offset
30 degrees from the centerline (Figure 5). The end of the weldment is slightly thicker
than the outer race of the bearing. The end of the forging is approximately the same thickness as the
outer race. Bearing installation will vary slightly between configurations.
10. Remove corrosion preventive coating from outer diameter of new bearings before installation.
NOTE
Do not orient fracture in bearing outer ring in line with setscrew hole.
11. Install plain bearing (Figure 5, Item 3) into each end of longitudinal strut (Figure 5, Item 4). If strut is weldment, ensure
outer race (Figure 5, Item 2) of plain bearing is centered within strut socket within 0.30 in. If strut is forging with
setscrews, ensure outer race is flush with side of strut that has punched countersink or X reference mark. Forgings
without setscrews (Figure 5, Item 1) do not have reference marks. Ensure that outer race is centered in strut and does not
protrude from either side.
WARNING
12. Apply thread locking compound to two setscrews (Figure 5, Item 1), if applicable, and install setscrews into longitudinal
strut (Figure 5, Item 4) to secure plain bearings (Figure 5, Item 3). If strut is forging, torque setscrews to 50 to 70 in.-lb (4.2
to 5.8 Nm).
CAUTION
When staking plain bearings, use fixtures as necessary to support strut rod ends and bearings, or the
bearing may be forced out of centered position in rod end, causing damage to bearings.
0083-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0083
13. If desired, use a center punch to stake each plain bearing (Figure 5, Item 3) in three places, 120 degrees apart on each side
of longitudinal strut (Figure 5, Item 4). Peen material from strut rod end over edge of outer race (Figure 5, Item 2).
Figure 5. Installation of Plain Bearing on End of Longitudinal Strut.

END OF TASK
0083-7
0083 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
NOTE
Eight ends of the six longitudinal struts that attach to steering plates on bogies no. 3 and no. 4 are
identical. Perform steps 1 thru 7 to install one end of longitudinal strut to no. 3 or no. 4 steering plate.
1. Apply grease to two retainer packings (Figure 6, Item 5) and apply grease to spacer sleeve (Figure 6, Item 6). Assemble
two retainer packings onto spacer sleeve.
CAUTION
Ensure longitudinal struts running from steering plates no. 2 and no. 5 are above longitudinal struts
running between steering plates no. 3 and no. 4 or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
Arrange longitudinal struts onto semitrailer so that the jam nut is facing toward the rear of the semitrailer.
2. Use two people to align and install spacer sleeve (Figure 6, Item 6) between two longitudinal struts (Figure 6, Item 4) and
set in place on steering plate (Figure 6, Item 9). Ensure jam nut end of longitudinal strut faces toward rear of semitrailer.
3. Apply grease to retainer packing (Figure 6, Item 3). Apply grease to pin assembly (Figure 6 item 2). Install retainer
packing to pin assembly.
4. Install pin assembly (Figure 6, Item 2) into steering plate (Figure 6, Item 9) through two longitudinal struts (Figure 6,
Item 4). Check that flat on pin assembly is aligned with stop tab on top of steering plate and continue to drive pin assembly
until flush with steering plate. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 6, Item 1) into pin assembly.
5. Apply grease to retainer packing (Figure 6, Item 3). Apply grease to sleeve bushing (Figure 6, Item 7). Assemble retainer
packing onto sleeve bushing.
0083-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0083
6. Install sleeve bushing (Figure 6, Item 7) onto steering plate (Figure 6, Item 9). Install new self-locking special bolt
(Figure 6, Item 8) to secure sleeve bushing.
7. Use torque wrench to torque special bolt (Figure 6, Item 8) to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136 to 149 Nm). Install lubrication fitting
(Figure 6, Item 1) into special bolt.
Figure 6. Grease Application.
0083-9
0083 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Four ends of the six longitudinal struts that attach to steering plates no. 2 and no. 5 are identical. Perform
steps 8 thru 13 to install one end of longitudinal strut to no. 2 or no. 5 steering plate.
8. Apply grease to retainer packing (Figure 7, Item 2). Apply grease to pin assembly (Figure 7, Item 1). Install retainer
packing on pin assembly.
NOTE
When installing a pin assembly into a steering plate, it may be necessary to use a pry bar to ease the
installation. Use the pry bar to pry the pin assembly downward into the steering plate.
9. Place longitudinal strut (Figure 7, Item 3) in place on steering plate (Figure 7, Item 4). Use hammer and pry bar, if necessary,
to install pin assembly (Figure 7, Item 1) into steering plate through longitudinal strut. Ensure flat on pin assembly is
aligned with stop tab on top of steering plate and continue to drive pin assembly until flush with steering plate.
CAUTION
DO NOT apply grease to inner wear surface of sleeve bushing. It may get onto bolt threads, minimizing
the effect of the self-locking feature and causing damage to equipment.
10. Apply grease to retainer packing (Figure 7, Item 2). Apply grease to outside wear surface of sleeve bushing (Figure 7,
Item 5). Assemble retainer packing onto sleeve bushing.
11. Use hammer to install sleeve bushing (Figure 7, Item 5) onto steering plate (Figure 7, Item 4). Install new self-locking
special bolt (Figure 7, Item 6) and secure sleeve bushing.
12. Use torque wrench to torque special bolt (Figure 7, Item 6) to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136 to 149 Nm). Install lubrication fitting
Figure 7. Installation of Longitudinal Strut.
0083-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0083
13. Tighten adjusting nut (Figure 8, Item 2) one and one-half turns. Tighten jam nut (Figure 8, Item 3) to secure the longitudinal
strut (Figure 8, Item 1).
Figure 8. Installation of Longitudinal Strut.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0083-11/12 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0084
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PLATFORM STEERING CYLINDER
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Seal (4)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Hose, Clear, 36 in. Long (2)
Bolt, Self-Locking (2)
Materials/Parts
Special Bolt, Self-Locking (2)
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Personnel Required
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) 2
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31)
Sealant Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) Equipment Conditions
Lockwasher (2) Manual steering set straight (WP 0010)
Longitudinal struts removed (WP 0083)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, installation, and cylinder stop adjustment of the platform steering
cylinder.
0084-1
0084 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance.
shields or goggles must be worn.
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Avoid prolonged exposure to skin, wear long sleeves,
• A steering hydraulic cylinder weighs (empty) 110 lb (50 kg). Two personnel must support and lift cylinders from
attaching points on platform cylinder mount and steering plate no. 5.
NOTE
The following procedure is to be used for either the streetside or curbside platform steering
cylinder. Repeat this procedure as necessary for other cylinder repairs.
0084-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0084
1. Use two 36 in. (91 cm) clear hoses (Figure 1, Item 3) and drain pan (Figure 1, Item 4) to bleed steering cylinder (Figure 1,
Item 1) at bleed valves (Figure 1, Item 2) to relieve hydraulic pressure (WP 0041). Once pressure is bled, remove two 36 in.
(91 cm) clear hoses.
CAUTION
2. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic lines (Figure 1, Item 5) from steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 1). Allow fluid to drain
from lines into drain pan (Figure 1, Item 4) and install caps/plugs into all openings.
Figure 1. Bleeding Steering Cylinder.
0084-3
0084 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Remove grease fitting (Figure 2, Item 15) and special bolt (Figure 2, Item 14) from shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 13).
Discard special bolt. Discard lockwasher if present.
4. Remove capscrew (Figure 2, Item 9) from sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 10). Discard capscrew. Discard lockwasher if
present.
5. Use pry bar to pry up sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 10) and remove sleeve bushing with seals (Figure 2, Item 11) from
steering plate no. 5 (Figure 2, Item 12). Remove seals from sleeve bushing. Discard seals.
6. Use pry bar to pry down on shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 13) and remove pin with seals (Figure 2, Item 11) from steering
plate no. 5 (Figure 2, Item 12). Remove seals from shoulder pin. Discard seals.
7. Remove capscrew (Figure 2, Item 20) from sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 21). Discard capscrew. Discard lockwasher if
present.
CAUTION
A steering hydraulic cylinder weighs (empty) 110 lb (50 kg). Two personnel must support
and lift cylinders from attaching points on platform cylinder mount and steering plate
no. 5 or serious injury to personnel may result.
8. Use pry bar to pry down on sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 21) and remove sleeve bushing from platform cylinder mount
(Figure 2, Item 23). Remove seals (Figure 2, Item 22) from sleeve bushing. Discard seals.
9. Remove grease fitting (Figure 2, Item 1) and special bolt (Figure 2, Item 2) from shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 3). Discard
special bolt. Discard lockwasher if present.
10. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 4), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 5), and clamp (Figure 2, Item 6) from platform cylinder
mount (Figure 2, Item 23). Discard lockwasher.
11. Use pry bar to pry up on shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 3) and remove pin from platform cylinder mount (Figure 2, Item 23).
Remove seal (Figure 2, Item 22) from shoulder pin. Discard seal.
12. Use two personnel to lift steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 19) off platform cylinder mount (Figure 2, Item 23) and steering
plate no. 5 (Figure 2, Item 12) and move cylinder out from under platform. Place steering cylinder onto platform.
0084-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0084
NOTE
Steering stop blocks and associated hardware are not used on vehicles with manufacturer’s serial
numbers 526 and subsequent numbers. Manufacturer’s serial number is stamped in front of platform
mainbeam under the gooseneck.
13. Remove two nuts (Figure 2, Item 18), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 17), capscrews (Figure 2, Item 7), two steering stop blocks
(Figure 2, Item 8), and spacer plate (Figure 2, Item 16) from steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 19). Discard lockwashers.
Figure 2. Steering Cylinder Removal.
0084-5
0084 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
cause irritation of digestive tract and respiratory tract, may cause lung and central nervous system damage,
and may be fatal if swallowed. Inhalation of high/massive concentrations may cause coma or may be fatal. First
aid for ingestion: do not induce vomiting. Seek immediate medical attention. First aid for skin contact: remove
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
• Cloths or rags saturated with solvent cleaning compound must be disposed of in accordance with
14. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank using cleaning compound solvent. Use a crocus cloth to remove any nicks,
scoring, or burrs from polished or machined surfaces.
15. Inspect steering cylinder and related parts for gouges, cracks, bends, and defects. Replace related parts if found defective.
If steering cylinder is defective, replace as required.
END OF TASK
0084-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0084
INSTALLATION
NOTE
A new steering cylinder has four bleed valves installed. Two of the bleed valves must be removed and
replaced with two pipe plugs. The location of pipe plugs is determined by location of the steering cylinder.
Refer to the procedure below to check for proper bleed valve and pipe plug orientation.
1. Check steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 1), bleed valve (Figure 3, Item 2), and pipe plug (Figure 3, Item 3) orientation per
steps 2 through 4.
2. If steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 1) is to be installed on curbside of steering plate no. 5 (Figure 3, Item 4), hydraulic lines
(Figure 5), should face curbside (outboard of no. 5 plate) with pipe plugs (Figure 3, Item 3) located on bottom of
cylinder, and bleed valves (Figure 3, Item 2) located on top of cylinder.
3. If steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 1) is to be installed on streetside of steering plate no. 5 (Figure 3, Item 4), hydraulic
lines (Figure 5), should face streetside (outboard of no. 5 plate) with pipe plugs (Figure 3, Item 3) located on bottom of
cylinder, and bleed valves (Figure 3, Item 2) located on top of cylinder.
4. After determining where on steering plate no. 5 (Figure 3, Item 4) steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 1) is to be installed (see
steps 2 and 3 above), remove two bleed valves (Figure 3, Item 2) from bottom of steering cylinder. Apply pipe sealant to
male threads of two pipe plugs (Figure 3, Item 3). Install two pipe plugs into bottom of steering cylinder.
Figure 3. Bleed Valves and Pipe Plugs Installation.
0084-7
0084 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
• The nuts securing the cylinder stop blocks are to be hand-tightened only. Following installation of the cylinder, stop
block adjustment (shimming) is required.
• Steering stop blocks and associated hardware are not used on vehicles with manufacturer’s serial numbers 526 and
subsequent numbers. Manufacturer’s serial number is stamped in front of platform main beam under the gooseneck.
5. Install spacer plate (Figure 4, Item 16) and steering stop blocks (Figure 4, Item 8) onto steering cylinder (Figure 4,
Item 19). Secure spacer plate in place with two capscrews (Figure 4, Item 7), lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 17), and nuts
CAUTION
DO NOT apply grease to inner wear surface of sleeve bushing. It may get onto bolt threads,
minimizing the effect of self-locking feature and causing damage to equipment.
6. Apply grease to inner bore of bearings on steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 19), outside wear surfaces of two shoulder pin
assemblies (Figure 4, Item 13 and Item 3), and outside wear surfaces of sleeve bushings (Figure 4, Item 10 and Item 21).
Apply grease to four seals (Figure 4, Item 11 and Item 22).
7. Use two personnel to lift hydraulic cylinder (Figure 4, Item 19) into alignment with platform cylinder mount (Figure 4,
Item 23) and no. 5 steering plate (Figure 4, Item 12).
8. Install seal (Figure 4, Item 22) on sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 21). Install seal on shoulder in (Figure 4, Item 3).
9. Use soft-faced hammer to drive shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 3) through platform cylinder mount (Figure 4, Item 23)
and hydraulic cylinder (Figure 4, Item 19). Check alignment of flat on shoulder pin and readjust position, as required,
until flat is aligned with mounting hole for clamp (Figure 4, Item 6). Continue to drive shoulder pin until flush on
platform cylinder mount.
10. Use pry bar to install and pry up on sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 21) through platform cylinder mount (Figure 4, Item 23)
and onto shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 3). Continue to pry up on sleeve bushing until flush on platform cylinder mount.
11. Secure shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 3) to platform cylinder mount (Figure 4, Item 23) by installing clamp (Figure 4,
Item 6), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 5), and screw (Figure 4, Item 4).
12. Secure sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 21) to shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 3) by installing self-locking capscrew (Figure 4,
Item 20). Use torque wrench to torque capscrew to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136 to 149 Nm).
13. Install self-locking special bolt (Figure 4, Item 2) onto shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 3). Install lubrication fitting (Figure 4,
Item 1) into special bolt.
14. Install seals (Figure 4, Item 11) on sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 10). Install seal on shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 13).
15. Use pry bar to install and pry up on shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 13) through steering plate no. 5 (Figure 4, Item 12) and
hydraulic cylinder (Figure 4, Item 19). Check alignment of flat on shouldered pin and readjust position, as required, until
flat is aligned with stop tab on bottom of steering plate no. 5. Continue to pry up on shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 3)
until pin is flush on platform cylinder steering plate no. 5.
16. Install sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 10) over shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 13) on steering plate no. 5 (Figure 4, Item 12).
Use pry bar to pry down on sleeve bushing to install bushing through steering plate no. 5 and onto shoulder pin.
Continue to pry down on sleeve bushing until bushing is flush on steering plate no. 5..
17. Secure sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 10) to shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 13) by installing self-locking capscrew (Figure 4,
Item 9). Use torque wrench and a 15/16 in. crow’s foot adapter to torque capscrew to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136 to 149 Nm).
18. Install self-locking special bolt (Figure 4, Item 14) onto shoulder pin (Figure 4, Item 13). Install lubrication fitting
0084-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0084
Figure 4. Install Spacers and Stop Blocks.

19. Remove drain pan (Figure 5, Item 4) and caps/plugs installed. Reconnect two hydraulic lines (Figure 5, Item 5) to steering
hydraulic cylinder (Figure 5, Item 1). Close bleed valves (Figure 5, Item 2) and remove clear hoses (Figure 5, Item 3).
20. Perform cylinder stop adjustment, if necessary.
Figure 5. Hydraulic Lines and Bleed Valves.

END OF TASK
0084-9
0084 TM 9-2330-381-13
CYLINDER STOP ADJUSTMENT
NOTE
Steering stop blocks and associated hardware are not used on vehicles with manufacturer’s serial
numbers 526 and subsequent numbers. Manufacturer’s serial number is stamped in front of platform
main beam under the gooseneck. On units without cylinder stops, this procedure is unnecessary.
1. Measure distance dimension on both cylinders (Figure 6, Item 1) between cylinder piston attaching point (Figure 6,
Item 3) on no. 5 steering plate (Figure 6, Item 4) and piston end (Figure 6, Item 2) of cylinder body. If dimension distance
between cylinder piston attaching point and piston end of cylinder body is same for both cylinders, go to step 3. If
dimension distance is not same, go to step 2.
2. Perform manual steering (WP 0010) to move steering plate no. 5 (Figure 6, Item 4) until both dimensions are same
and then go to step 3.
3. Compare distance dimension between piston end of cylinder body (Figure 6, Item 2) and cylinder piston attaching point
(Figure 6, Item 3) with "shim" chart (Table 1) and determine quantity of spacer plates (Figure 6, Item 7)
required for each cylinder.
Table 1. Spacer Plate Shim Chart.

Distance Dimension between Figure 6, Item 2 and Item 3 QUANTITY (Figure 6, Item 7)
9.18 to 9.30 in. (23.32 to 23.62 cm) 1 Required
4. Loosen nuts (Figure 6, Item 9) sufficiently to move stop blocks (Figure 6, Item 5) off of cylinders and insert required
number of spacer plates (Figure 6, Item 7) into stop blocks.
5. Install stop blocks (Figure 6, Item 5) on each cylinder (Figure 6, Item 1) and secure stop blocks on cylinders with capscrews
(Figure 6, Item 6), lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 8), and nuts (Figure 6, Item 9).
Figure 6. Installation and Adjustment of Cylinders.

END OF TASK
0084-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0084
Install longitudinal strut (WP 0083).
Perform hydraulic system bleeding to remove air from hydraulic steering system (WP 0041).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0084-11/12 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEERING PLATE
INITIAL SETUP:
Chain Assy, 5/16 in. LK, 11 ft L (2) (WP 0168, Item 8) 3
Spanner, Adjustable Hook (WP 0168, Item 22)
Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Truck, Wrecker M984 (WP 0168, Item 26)
(WP 0007)
Materials/Parts Connecting links removed at affected bogies (WP 0080)
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Inner/inner wheels (streetside and curbside) removed from
Sealant Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) affected bogie (WP 0078 and WP 0079)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (143 cm) height (WP 0008)
Wood Pieces, Scrap, 3/4 in. to 1 in. Thick (1) Suspension isolation valves closed at four corner bogies
Steel Bar, Stock 1 in. Diameter 24 in. L (1) (WP 0004)
Wood Block, 12 in. x 12 in. x 24 in. (4) Longitudinal struts removed at affected bogies (WP 0083)
Lockwasher (6) Platform steering cylinders removed or disconnected from
steering plate (WP 0085) (no. 5 bogie only)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair, inspection, assembly, and installation of the steering plate.
0085-1
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Steering plates weigh in excess of 250 lb (223 kg) and must be supported the entire time
work is performed on the steering plate or injury to personnel may result.
NOTE
All four steering plates are similar and are removed and installed in the same manner.
1. Clean all dirt from steering plate spacer (Figure 1, Item 3) and retainer plate (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove four capscrews (Figure 1, Item 6) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 7) from retainer plate (Figure 1, Item 1).
3. Check position of two straight pins (Figure 1, Item 5) and retainer plate (Figure 1, Item 1). If pins are near bottom of retainer
plate, drive pins upward approximately 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) into mainbeam (Figure 1, Item 2) weldment (Figure 1, Item 4).
NOTE
It is necessary to evenly pry down on both the front and back of the retainer plate, to pry down on the
steering plate spacer, so that the retainer plate can be lowered clear of the pins.
4. Use two personnel and crowbar or low-profile hydraulic jack, if available, to pry down on retainer plate (Figure 1, Item 1)
until retainer plate moves down on steering plate spacer (Figure 1, Item 3) and is clear of two straight pins (Figure 1, Item 5).
5. Rotate retainer plate (Figure 1, Item 1) 90 degrees clockwise facing streetside and then pry up and remove retainer plate
from steering plate spacer (Figure 1, Item 3).
Figure 1. Prying Retainer Plate.
0085-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
6. Loosen two bolts (Figure 2, Item 2) on service covers (Figure 2, Item 3) and slide retainers (Figure 2, Item 1) inboard to
release and remove service covers (Figure 2, Item 3) from platform (Figure 2, Item 8).
7. Remove six capscrews (Figure 2, Item 7) and lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 6) from steering plate (Figure 2, Item 5) and
mainbeam (Figure 2, Item 4). Discard six lockwashers.
Figure 2. Removal of Retainer Plate.

8. Place chain (Figure 3, Item 1) under rear portion of top of steering plate (Figure 3, Item 3). Bring chain forward and up on
both sides and hook chain back to itself above top of steering plate just forward of spindle (Figure 3, Item 2).
Figure 3. Chain Under Steering Plate.
0085-3
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
When using a lifting device to lift the steering plate, all personnel under the platform
must keep hands clear of the steering plate and support equipment. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
• When lifting the steering plate off the mainbeam, lift the steering plate upward as straight as possible and have
one person use a crowbar to keep forward part of steering plate level or damage to the straight pins may result.
• As the steering plate is moved, it must be guided away from the air relay valve in the same window. Otherwise,
• Be sure chains do not contact hydraulic or pneumatic lines along the mainbeam or damage to equipment
may result.
9. Position suitable lifting device (Figure 4, Item 1) where service covers were removed above platform (Figure 4, Item 3).
10. Route chain (Figure 4, Item 2) up through platform (Figure 4, Item 3) and mainbeam (Figure 4, Item 5) and attach to
lifting device (Figure 4, Item 1). Apply just enough lifting force to bring base of steering plate (Figure 4, Item 4) up off
straight pins (Figure 4, Item 7) that position it.
11. Guide steering plate (Figure 4, Item 4) carefully as it rises to avoid contact with air relay valve (WP 0074) in that window.
Use crowbar (Figure 4, Item 6) to keep forward part of steering plate level.
Figure 4. Steering Plate Removal.

12. From curbside of trailer, position hydraulic jack (Figure 5, Item 5) near curbside of steering plate (Figure 5, Item 3). Raise
hydraulic jack so that pallet (Figure 5, Item 4) is even with bottom of steering plate.
13. Use suitable lifting device (Figure 5, Item 1) and chain (Figure 5, Item 2) to raise steering plate (Figure 5, Item 3) and
maneuver steering plate over onto hydraulic jack (Figure 5, Item 5).
0085-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
Figure 5. Positioned Hydraulic Jack Near Curbside of Steering Plate.

14. Lower steering plate (Figure 6, Item 4) with lifting device (Figure 6, Item 1) so that it rests on pallet (Figure 6, Item 5) of
hydraulic jack (Figure 6, Item 6). Remove chain (Figure 6, Item 2) from steering plate.
15. Use one person to keep steering plate (Figure 6, Item 4) from turning. Lower hydraulic jack (Figure 6, Item 6) and move it
out and away from platform (Figure 6, Item 3).
16. Use three personnel to lift steering plate (Figure 6, Item 4) off hydraulic jack (Figure 6, Item 6) and to place steering
plate on ground.
Figure 6. Lifting Steering Plate.

END OF TASK
0085-5
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Straighten bent tab on key washer (Figure 7, Item 2) and use spanner socket to remove nut (Figure 7, Item 1) and key
washer from top of spindle (Figure 7, Item 9).
2. Remove ring spacer (Figure 7, Item 3), upper metal seal (Figure 7, Item 4), and upper roller bearing cone (Figure 7, Item 5)
from spindle. Discard upper seal.
WARNING
Use two personnel to lift steering plate off of spindle or serious injury to personnel may result.
3. Use two people to remove steering plate (Figure 7, Item 11) from spindle (Figure 7, Item 9).
4. Remove lower bearing cone (Figure 7, Item 7) from spindle (Figure 7, Item 9).
5. Remove lower metal seal (Figure 7, Item 8) from spindle (Figure 7, Item 9). Discard lower seal.
6. Use hammer and steel drift to drive two bearing cups (Figure 7, Item 6) from steering plate (Figure 7, Item 11).
7. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 7, Item 10) from steering plate (Figure 7, Item 11).
WARNING
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141 to 198°F (61 to 92°C) and
for Type lll it is 200 to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
0085-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
8. Clean all components with dry cleaning solvent and rags.

9. Clean corrosion with crocus cloth.
Figure 7. Component Parts Removal.

END OF TASK
0085-7
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION
1. Inspect casting on steering plate for broken welds, cracks, bends, and corrosion. Replace defective parts.
2. Inspect for cracked, bent, or missing straight pins (Figure 8, item 1). If pins are damaged, remove and replace two
straight pins.
Figure 8. Damage Inspection.

END OF TASK
0085-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
ASSEMBLY
1. Pack bearings according to lubrication instructions (WP 0163).
2. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 9, Item 10) on steering plate (Figure 9, Item 11).
3. Drive two bearing cups (Figure 9, Item 6) into steering plate (Figure 9, Item 11).
4. Install lower metal seal (Figure 9, Item 8) onto spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
CAUTION
Use caution when installing lower bearing cone onto spindle or damage to cone or spindle may
result. Apply all force to inner race of bearing cone during installation.
5. Install lower bearing cone (Figure 9, Item 7) onto spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
6. Install steering plate (Figure 9, Item 11) onto spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
7. Install upper bearing cone (Figure 9, Item 5), upper metal seal (Figure 9, Item 4), and ring spacer (Figure 9, Item 3) with
shoulder facing down toward steering plate (Figure 9, Item 11).
8. Install key washer (Figure 9, Item 2) and nut (Figure 9, Item 1) onto spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
9. Slowly tighten nut (Figure 9, Item 1) until all side play between steering plate (Figure 9, Item 11) and spindle (Figure 9,
Item 9) is eliminated.
10. Bend one tab of key washer (Figure 9, Item 2) to secure nut (Figure 9, Item 1).
Figure 9. Bearing Assembly.

END OF TASK
0085-9
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use three personnel to lift steering plate (Figure 10, Item 4) off ground and place steering plate on pallet (Figure 10,
Item 5) of hydraulic jack (Figure 10, Item 6).
2. Use one person to keep steering plate (Figure 10, Item 4) from turning while maneuvering hydraulic jack (Figure 10,
Item 6) under platform (Figure 10, Item 3) for installation.
3. Raise hydraulic jack (Figure 10, Item 6) so that pallet (Figure 10, Item 5) is even with mainbeam (Figure 10, Item 8).
4. Position suitable lifting device (Figure 10, Item 1) where streetside service cover (Figure 10, Item 2) above platform
(Figure 10, Item 3) was removed.
5. Lower chain (Figure 10, Item 9) through streetside opening in platform (Figure 10, Item 3).
6. Place chain (Figure 10, Item 9) under rear portion of top of steering plate (Figure 10, Item 4). Bring chain forward and up on
both sides and hook chain back to itself above top plate just forward of spindle (Figure 10, Item 7).
WARNING
When using a lifting device to lift the steering plate, all personnel under the platform must keep hands
clear of the steering plate and support equipment or injury to personnel may result.
7. Use one person to support front part of steering plate (Figure 10, Item 4) and use lifting device (Figure 10, Item 1) to
carefully lift steering plate off hydraulic jack (Figure 10, Item 6). Move hydraulic jack out of way.
Figure 10. Steering Plate Removal from Hydraulic Jack.
0085-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
CAUTION
Be sure chains do not contact hydraulic or pneumatic lines along the mainbeam or
8. Maneuver steering plate (Figure 11, Item 4) over mainbeam (Figure 11, Item 5) and into alignment over two straight pins
CAUTION
When lowering steering plate onto straight pins, ensure steering plate is as level as possible, and allow
straight pins to guide steering plate into place or damage to equipment may result.
9. Above the platform (Figure 11, Item 3), use lifting device (Figure 11, Item 1) with chain (Figure 11, Item 2) to carefully
lower steering plate (Figure 11, Item 4) onto mainbeam (Figure 11, Item 5) and two straight pins (Figure 11, Item 7). Use
crowbar (Figure 11, Item 6) to help keep forward part of steering plate level.
Figure 11. Steering Plate Alignment Over Mainbeam.
0085-11
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Steering plate must be turned sufficiently to permit removal of capscrews installed at center sides of mounting plate.
10. While keeping tension on chain (Figure 12, Item 2) and using crowbar (Figure 12, Item 4) for support, rotate steering plate
(Figure 12, Item 3) as required. Loosely install capscrew (Figure 12, Item 7) and lockwasher (Figure 12, Item 6) in center
hole on each side of steering plate onto mainbeam (Figure 12, Item 5).
11. Lower lifting device (Figure 12, Item 1) to allow slack in chain (Figure 12, Item 2) and remove chain from steering
12. Remove and restow chain (Figure 12, Item 2) and lifting device (Figure 12, Item 1).
Figure 12. Installation of Steering Plate.
0085-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
13. Rotate steering plate (Figure 13, Item 5) to center position and loosely install four remaining capscrews (Figure 13, Item 7)
and lockwashers (Figure 13, Item 6) onto mainbeam (Figure 13, Item 4).
14. Torque all six capscrews (Figure 13, Item 7) to 150 to 160 lb-ft (151 to 217 Nm).
15. Install two service covers (Figure 13, Item 3) to platform (Figure 13, Item 8) and secure in place by sliding retainers
(Figure 13, Item 1) in outboard direction and tightening bolts (Figure 13, Item 2).
Figure 13. Install Service Covers and Secure in Place.
0085-13
0085 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. If either straight pin (Figure 14, Item 5) has been driven out, install pin into mainbeam.
WARNING
17. Apply grease to inside of large opening in retainer plate (Figure 14, item 1) and to exterior of steering plate spacer
18. Position retainer plate (Figure 14, Item 1) facing streetside. Align and install retainer plate over steering plate spacer
19. Rotate retainer plate (Figure 14, Item 1) 90 degrees counterclockwise until aligned with two straight pins (Figure 14, Item 5)
in mainbeam (Figure 14, Item 2) weldment (Figure 14, Item 4).
20. Use two personnel and crowbar to pry up and drive retainer plate (Figure 14, Item 1) onto straight pins (Figure 14, Item 5).
21. Apply locking compound to threads on four capscrews (Figure 14, Item 6). Install four capscrews and lockwashers
(Figure 14, Item 7) on retainer plate (Figure 14, Item 1). Torque four capscrews to 150 to 160 lb-ft (203 to 217 Nm).
Figure 14. Torque Capscrews.

END OF TASK
0085-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0085
If not already coupled, couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0085-15/16 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0086
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK STEERING CYLINDER
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Ring Spacer (2)
Mandrel, Suspension (WP 0168, Item 5) Nonmetallic Seal (2)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Special Bolt, Self-Locking (1)
Lifting Strap (WP 0168, Item 25)
Davit (WP 0168, Item 29) 2
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Spare tires removed from gooseneck (WP 0077)
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Manual steering straight (WP 0010)
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Semitrailer uncoupled from tractor (WP 0013)
Front of platform lowered to 36 in. (91.4 cm) (WP 0008)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, inspection, and installation of the gooseneck steering cylinder.
0086-1
0086 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance.
shields or goggles must be worn.
• A steering hydraulic cylinder weighs (empty) 110 lb (50 kg). Two personnel must support and lift cylinders from
attaching points on gooseneck cylinder mount and spare wheel carrier.
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in front of spare
tires. Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip
over it.
• Use caution during cylinder removal to avoid hands becoming pinched.
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped and plugged immediately after opening
to prevent dirt, moisture, or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either curbside or streetside gooseneck steering cylinder.
Repeat this procedure as necessary for other cylinder repairs.
0086-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0086
1. Place drain pan (Figure 1, Item 7) under gooseneck steering cylinders (Figure 1, Item 8). Loosen two bleed valves
(Figure1, Item 5) on steering cylinder to relieve pressure from cylinder.
2. Position drain pan (Figure 1, Item 7) under gooseneck steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 8). Tag, disconnect, and drain two
nonmetallic hoses (Figure 1, Item 6). Install caps/plugs into all openings.
3. Remove hitch pin (Figure 1, Item 4) from winch cable pulley clamp (Figure 1, Item 2) and reposition pulley clamp on davit
arm (Figure 1, Item 1) near davit winch (Figure 1, Item 3). Insert hitch pin to secure pulley clamp.
4. Wrap lifting strap (Figure 1, Item 9) around steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 8) between bleed valves (Figure 1, Item 5).
Attach lifting strap to hook from davit arm (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Relieve Pressure from Cylinders.
0086-3
0086 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 2, Item 8), special bolt (Figure 2, Item 7), and sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 6) from
spare wheel carrier (Figure 2, Item 5). Discard special bolt. Remove and discard lockwasher if present.
6. Remove nonmetallic seals (Figure 2, Item 4) from sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 6). Discard nonmetallic seals.
7. Remove button-head screw (Figure 2, Item 2) from pin assembly (Figure 2, Item 3). Drive pin assembly out of spare
wheel carrier (Figure 2, Item 5).
8. Remove nonmetallic seals (Figure 2, Item 4) from pin assembly (Figure 2, Item 3). Discard nonmetallic seals.
9. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 19), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 18), and rod end connector (Figure 2, Item 17) from straight
shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 16). Discard lockwasher.
10. Remove self-locking nut (Figure 2, Item 13), pin support (Figure 2, Item 12), top clamp (Figure 2, Item 21), and bolt
(Figure 2, Item 20) from steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 15).
11. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 2, Item 14) from straight shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 16).
12. Drive straight shoulder pin (Figure 2, Item 16) from steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 9) and steering column housing
NOTE
The steering cylinder may need to be compressed slightly to allow for removal.
13. If necessary, remove caps from both ports on steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 9). Allow fluid to drain from cylinder into
drain pan and, using crowbar, compress steering cylinder. Reinstall caps onto ports on steering cylinder.
NOTE
The two ring spacers may fall to the ground while steering cylinder is being removed.
14. Use two personnel and davit arm (Figure 2, Item 1) to maneuver steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 9) down and away from
steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 15) and spare wheel carrier (Figure 2, Item 5).
15. Pick up or remove two ring spacers (Figure 2, Item 11) from steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 9). Discard ring spacers.
0086-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0086
16. Continue lowering steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 9) down to the ground and remove strap (Figure 2, Item 10).
Figure 2. Lifting Steering Cylinder.

END OF TASK
0086-5
0086 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSPECTION
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
1. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank using cleaning compound solvent. Use crocus cloth to remove any nicks,
scoring, or burrs from polished or machined surfaces.
2. Inspect steering cylinder and related parts for gouges, cracks, bends, and defects. Replace related parts if found defective.
If steering cylinder is defective, replace as required.
END OF TASK
0086-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0086
INSTALLATION
1. Wrap lifting strap (Figure 3, Item 4) around steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 5) and attach both ends of strap to hook
on davit arm (Figure 3, Item 3).
2. Align and install suspension mandrel (Figure 3, Item 2) into piston side of steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 5).
CAUTION
Both ring spacers must be completely compressed and must uniformly cover/expand over bearing
of steering cylinder prior to tightening suspension mandrel, or there will not be enough clearance
available for installation, and damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
Each ring spacer is actually made of two pieces that can become separated if not handled carefully.
3. Align two ring spacers (Figure 3, Item 1) over each end of suspension mandrel (Figure 3, Item 2). Compress each ring
spacer flush onto bearing of steering cylinder (Figure 3, Item 5) and tighten adjusting bolt on suspension mandrel to
secure spacers in place.
Figure 3. Alignment and Installation of Suspension Mandrel.
0086-7
0086 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in front of spare
tires. Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip
over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
4. Use two personnel, davit arm (Figure 4, Item 1), and straps (Figure 4, Item 10) to maneuver steering cylinder (Figure 4,
Item 9) to a height even with cylinder mounts on both steering column housing (Figure 4, Item 15) and spare wheel carrier
(Figure 4, Item 5).
CAUTION
When installing the steering cylinder to the steering column housing, ensure ring spacers do
not work loose or become misaligned. If spacers are misaligned or become loose, stop the
installation and remove the steering cylinder or damage to the spacers may result. It may
take a few attempts to accomplish proper spacer installation.
5. Carefully maneuver piston end of steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 9) into steering column housing (Figure 4, Item 15).
Check condition of both ring spacers during entire installation.
NOTE
During installation of piston end of steering cylinder, one person can observe the position of the
cylinder by looking through the hole in the steering column housing.
6. Once steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 9) is in place, loosen adjusting bolt on suspension mandrel (Figure 4, Item 11).
WARNING
Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
NOTE
After the suspension mandrel is loosened, the mandrel will be driven out of the steering
cylinder while installing the straight shouldered pin.
7. Apply grease to straight shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 16). Align and install rod end connector (Figure 4, Item 17)
into straight shouldered pin. Position pin so that hole for rod end connector is aligned. Install straight shouldered
pin through inboard hole in top of steering column housing (Figure 4, Item 15) and steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 9).
Remove suspension mandrel (Figure 4, Item 11).
0086-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0086
8. Secure rod end connector (Figure 4, Item 17) with screw (Figure 4, Item 19) and lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 18).
9. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 4, Item 14) into straight shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 16).
10. Install top clamp (Figure 4, Item 21), bolt (Figure 4, Item 20), pin support (Figure 4, Item 12), and self-locking nut
11. Remove caps from both ports on steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 9) and, using a crowbar and two personnel, extend steering
cylinder so that bearing in steering cylinder is approximately aligned with holes in spare wheel carrier (Figure 4, Item 5).
12. Install caps onto ports of steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 9).
13. Use two personnel to maneuver steering cylinder (Figure 4, Item 9) into spare wheel carrier (Figure 4, Item 5).
CAUTION
DO NOT apply grease to inner wear surface of sleeve bushing. It may get onto bolt threads,
reversing the effect of thread locking compound and causing damage to equipment.
14. Install button-head screw (Figure 4, Item 2) into pin assembly (Figure 4, Item 3). Apply grease to two nonmetallic seals
(Figure 4, Item 4) and apply grease to exterior of pin assembly and exterior of sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 6).
15. Install nonmetallic seals (Figure 4, Item 4) onto pin assembly (Figure 4, Item 3) and sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 6).
16. Align and install pin assembly (Figure 4, Item 3) through spare wheel carrier (Figure 4, Item 5) and steering cylinder
(Figure 4, Item 9).
17. Install sleeve bushing (Figure 4, Item 6) onto pin assembly (Figure 4, Item 3). Secure sleeve bushing by installing
new self-locking special bolt (Figure 4, Item 7). Use torque wrench to torque new special bolt to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136
to 149 Nm).
18. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 4, Item 8) into new special bolt (Figure 4, Item 7).
Figure 4. Maneuvering Steering Cylinder.
0086-9
0086 TM 9-2330-381-13
19. Remove hook from strap (Figure 5, Item 9) on steering cylinder (Figure 5, Item 8) and on davit arm (Figure 5, Item 1).
20. Remove hitch pin (Figure 5, Item 4) from winch cable pulley clamp (Figure 5, Item 2) and move pulley clamp to davit
winch (Figure 5, Item 3) to stow position at end of davit (Figure 5, Item 1). Install and secure hitch pin.
21. Remove caps/plugs and drain pan (Figure 5, Item 7) and reconnect two nonmetallic hoses (Figure 5, Item 6) to steering
cylinder (Figure 5, Item 8). Close bleed valves (Figure 5, Item 5).
Figure 5. Connecting Steering Cylinder.

END OF TASK
Bleed air from hydraulic system (WP 0041).
Operate steering and check for improper operation (WP 0010).
Install spare tires (WP 0077).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0086-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0087
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK STEPS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 1
Cotter Pin (1)
Cotter Pin (2) Equipment Conditions
Locknut (2) Gooseneck adjusted to 64 in. (162.5 cm) height (WP 0007)
Locknut (6) or coupled to tractor (WP 0013)
Locknut (2)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the gooseneck steps.
0087-1
0087 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• When on top of the gooseneck and removing or installing gooseneck steps, always hold onto the
semitrailer with one hand or injury to personnel may result.
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in front of spare tires.
Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip over it.
1. Unhook two latches (Figure 1, Item 2) from step assembly (Figure 1, Item 21). Lift forward edge of step assembly up and
pull forward to disengage step from pins (Figure 1, Item 22).
2. Unhook latch (Figure 1, Item 2). Remove cotter pin (Figure 1, Item 6), pin (Figure 1, Item 5), and step assembly (Figure 1,
Item 7). Discard cotter pin.
3. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 19), bolts (Figure 1, Item 1), and step support (Figure 1, Item 20) from gooseneck
weldment. Discard locknuts.
4. Remove two cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 3) and washers (Figure 1, Item 4) from upper step section (Figure 1, Item 8). Unhook
latch (Figure 1, Item 2) and remove upper step section. Discard cotter pins.
5. Remove three nuts (Figure 1, Item 18), spacers (Figure 1, Item 16), spacers (Figure 1, Item 15), washers (Figure 1, Item 14),
screws (Figure 1, Item 13), and lower step section (Figure 1, Item 10).
6. Remove six locknuts (Figure 1, Item 9), screws (Figure 1, Item 12), two latches (Figure 1, Item 2), and latch attached
to gooseneck weldments. Discard locknuts.
7. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 23), screws (Figure 1, Item 17), and latch (Figure 1, Item 2) from upper step section
8. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 9), screws (Figure 1, Item 12), and plate (Figure 1, Item 11) from lower step section
9. Position plate (Figure 1, Item 11) on lower step section (Figure 1, Item 10) and secure with two screws (Figure 1, Item 12)
and new locknuts (Figure 1, Item 9).
10. Position latch (Figure 1, Item 2) on upper step section (Figure 1, Item 8) and secure with two screws (Figure 1, Item 17) and
new locknuts (Figure 1, Item 23).
11. Position two latches (Figure 1, Item 2) on gooseneck weldment bracket and secure each latch with two screws (Figure 1,
12. Position latch (Figure 1, Item 2) on gooseneck step weldment and secure with two screws (Figure 1, Item 12) and new
0087-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0087
Figure 1. Gooseneck Steps Removal.

END OF TASK
0087-3
0087 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install lower step section (Figure 2, Item 9) and secure with three screws (Figure 2, Item 11), washers (Figure 2, Item 12),
spacers (Figure 2, Item 13), spacers (Figure 2, Item 14), and new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 15).
NOTE
On newer upper step sections, the mounting rod may have two holes in each end. In this case,
install two washers and two cotter pins at streetside only.
2. Install upper step section (Figure 2, Item 8) and secure with two washers (Figure 2, Item 4) and new cotter pins (Figure 2,
Item 3). Hook latch (Figure 2, Item 2) onto plate (Figure 2, Item 10).
3. Position step support (Figure 2, Item 17) on gooseneck step weldment and secure with two bolts (Figure 2, Item 1) and
4. Install step (Figure 2, Item 7) and secure with pin (Figure 2, Item 5) and new cotter pin (Figure 2, Item 6). Hook latch
(Figure 2, Item 2) onto step.
5. Install step (Figure 2, Item 18) by inserting rear lip under pins (Figure 2, Item 19) and rotating step downward. Secure step
by hooking two latches (Figure 2, Item 2).
Figure 2. Gooseneck Steps Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0087-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0088
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK GUARDRAILS
INITIAL SETUP:
Lockwashers (2) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Self-Locking Nut (2) (WP 0007)
Self-Locking Nut (2)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the gooseneck guardrails.
0088-1
0088 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• When on top of the gooseneck and removing or installing guardrails, always hold onto the semitrailer with one
hand or injury to personnel may result.
tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or
trip over it.
.
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either the streetside or curbside guardrail. Repeat this
procedure as required to complete the necessary repairs.
1. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 9), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 8), and capscrew (Figure 1, Item 13) from gooseneck. Discard
lockwasher.
2. Loosen jam nut (Figure 1, Item 11) and remove capscrew (Figure 1, Item 10) with jam nut from gooseneck.
3. Lift guardrail (Figure 1, Item 1) straight up out of gooseneck support weldments (Figure 1, Item 12) on gooseneck.
4. Remove self-locking nut (Figure 1, Item 2) and bolt (Figure 1, Item 14). Remove gooseneck safety rail (Figure 1, Item 3)
from weldment. Discard self-locking nut.
0088-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0088
5. Remove self-locking nut (Figure 1, Item 4), bolt (Figure 1, Item 7), two self-locking nuts (Figure 1, Item 6), and latch
(Figure 1, Item 5). Discard self-locking nuts.
Figure 1. Gooseneck Guardrails Removal.

END OF TASK
0088-3
0088 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Insert legs of guardrail (Figure 2, Item 1) in gooseneck support weldments (Figure 2, Item 12) on gooseneck.
2. Place jam nut (Figure 2, Item 11) on capscrew (Figure 2, Item 10) and install capscrew on gooseneck.
3. Install capscrew (Figure 2, Item 13), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 8), and nut (Figure 2, Item 9) on gooseneck.
4. Install latch (Figure 2, Item 5), two self-locking nuts (Figure 2, Item 6), bolt (Figure 2, Item 7), and self-locking nut
(Figure 2, Item 4).
5. Install gooseneck safety rail (Figure 2, Item 3) into gooseneck support weldment (Figure 2, Item 12) and install bolt
(Figure 2, Item 14) and self-locking nut (Figure 2, Item 2).
Figure 2. Installation of Safety Rail.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0088-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0089
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GRAB HANDLE
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Gooseneck lowered as required so that grab handle can
be reached (WP 0007)
Materials/Parts
Locknut (2)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the grab handle.
REMOVAL
1. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 4), washers (Figure 1, Item 3), and grab handle (Figure 1, Item 2) from gooseneck
Figure 1. Grab Handle Removal.

END OF TASK
0089-1
0089 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install grab handle (Figure 2, Item 2) onto gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 1) with two washers (Figure 2, Item 3) and new locknuts
(Figure 2, Item 4).
Figure 2. Grab Handle Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0089-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0090
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PLATFORM STEPS AND SERVICE COVERS
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Equipment Conditions
Materials/Parts ISO container lock mounts removed from platform
Cotter Pin (24) (WP 0026)
Lockwasher (32) Curb guides removed from platform (WP 0015)
D-Ring (1)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the platform steps and service covers.
0090-1
0090 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Loosen capscrew (Figure 1, Item 3) and slide retainer (Figure 1, Item 4) inboard. Lift up and remove four service covers
(Figure 1, Item 1), four service covers (Figure 1, Item 2), or two service covers (Figure 1, Item 5) from platform (Figure 1,
Item 6). Repeat this step as necessary for each service cover to be removed.
Figure 1. Service Cover Removal.
0090-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0090
2. Loosen capscrew (Figure 2, Item 3) and slide retainer (Figure 2, Item 4) inboard. Remove capscrew (Figure 2, Item 5),
lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 6), and washer (Figure 2, Item 7) from service cover (Figure 2, Item 2 or Item 8). Lift up and
remove service cover (Figure 2, Item 2) or service cover (Figure 2, Item 8) from platform (Figure 2, Item 1). Repeat this
step as necessary for each service cover to be removed.
0090-3
0090 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Remove eight capscrews (Figure 3, Item 2), lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 3), and washers (Figure 3, Item 4) from platform
step section (Figure 3, Item 5). Remove platform step section from platform weldment (Figure 3, Item 1). Discard
lockwashers.
4. Remove screw (Figure 3, Item 8). Lift and twist D-ring (Figure 3, Item 7) to remove from platform weldment (Figure 3,
Item 6). Repeat this step as required for each D-ring to be removed.
Figure 3. Platform Step Section Removal.
0090-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0090
5. Remove cotter pin (Figure 4, Item 6), capscrew (Figure 4, Item 1), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 2), washer (Figure 4, Item 3),
and retainer (Figure 4, Item 5) from service cover (Figure 4, Item 4). Discard lockwasher and cotter pin. Repeat this step
as necessary for each service cover being disassembled.

6. Install retainer (Figure 5, Item 5) to service cover (Figure 5, Item 4) and secure with washer (Figure 5, Item 3) and
lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 2), and loosely install capscrew (Figure 5, Item 1). Align and install cotter pin (Figure 5, Item 6)
into capscrew. Repeat this step for each service cover that was disassembled.

END OF TASK
0090-5
0090 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install D-ring (Figure 6, Item 7) in position on platform weldment (Figure 6, Item 6) and secure with screw (Figure 6,
Item 8). Repeat this step for each D-ring to be installed.
2. Install platform step section (Figure 6, Item 5) in position on platform weldment (Figure 6, Item 1). Secure step section in
place by installing eight washers (Figure 6, Item 4), lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 3), and capscrews (Figure 6, Item 2).
Figure 6. Platform Step Section Installation.
0090-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0090
3. To install service cover (Figure 7, Item 2 or Item 8), position specific cover in appropriate platform opening and slide each
retainer (Figure 7, Item 4) aft and outboard until latch secures under edge of platform (Figure 7, Item 1) weldment. Tighten
each capscrew (Figure 7, Item 3). Install capscrew (Figure 7, Item 5), lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 6), and washer (Figure 7,
Item 7) to secure cover in place. Repeat this procedure for each access cover installed.
Figure 7. Service Cover Installation.
0090-7
0090 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. To install service cover (Figure 8, Item 1, Item 2, or Item 5), position specific cover in appropriate platform opening and
slide two retainers (Figure 8, Item 4) outboard until latch secures under edge of platform (Figure 8, Item 6) weldment.
Tighten each capscrew (Figure 8, Item 3) to secure cover in place. Repeat this procedure for each access cover installed.
Figure 8. Service Cover Installation.

END OF TASK
Install curb guides (WP 0015).
Install ISO container locks (WP 0026).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0090-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LOADING RAMPS
INITIAL SETUP:
Chain Assembly, 5/16 in. LK, 11 ft L (WP 0168, Item 8) QuickLink (as required)
Personnel Required
3
Crocus Cloth (WP 0170, Item 6) Platform at road height (WP 0008)
Wood Block, 2 in. x 4 in. (1) (WP 0007)
Locknut (4) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Cotter Pin (2) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Crowbar and isolation valve handle extension removed
(WP 0002)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, installation, and adjustment of the loading ramps.
0091-1
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• DO NOT stand behind the ramps or in the path the ramps can travel when being lowered and raised.
• When ramps are lowered and near horizontal position, the springs are fully compressed and under extreme
pressure. DO NOT attempt to adjust or remove spring mechanism unless ramps are in the raised (stow) position.
NOTE
The procedures for removal/installation of either the curbside or streetside ramps are
identical. This procedure represents the curbside ramp. To remove only the ramp spring
and associated components, perform steps 1 thru 8.
1. Open snap (Figure 1, Item 5) and load binder (Figure 1, Item 6) of chain assembly (Figure 1, Item 4). Remove chain
hook (Figure 1, Item 3) from hole (Figure 1, Item 2) in platform (Figure 1, Item 1). Attach chain hook (Figure 1, Item 3)
in hole on ramp lift lever (Figure 1, Item 7).
Figure 1. Loading Ramp Removal.
NOTE
Ramp is lowered to horizontal position to permit removal of the capscrew installed through
the top end of the spring guide rod.
0091-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
2. Lower ramp (Figure 2, Item 1) to horizontal position (WP 0009).

3. Remove locknut (Figure 2, Item 4), capscrew (Figure 2, Item 2), and washer (Figure 2, Item 3) from upper end of spring
guide rod (Figure 2, Item 5). Discard locknut.

4. Return ramp (Figure 3, Item 3) to raised (stow) position (WP 0009). Reconnect chain assembly (Figure 3, Item 4) to hole
(Figure 3, Item 2) in platform (Figure 3, Item 1).
0091-3
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Remove cotter pin (Figure 4, Item 6) and shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 5) from lower end of spring guide rod (Figure 4,
Item 4) and ramp lift lever (Figure 4, Item 7). Discard cotter pin.
6. Use two people to remove spring guide rod assembly (Figure 4, Item 3) from ramp (Figure 4, Item 1) by lifting forked end
of guide rod (Figure 4, Item 4) off of ramp lift lever (Figure 4, Item 7) and lowering spring guide rod assembly until top of
guide rod is free of weldment bracket (Figure 4, Item 2).

7. Remove spring guide rod (Figure 5, Item 4) from helical compression spring (Figure 5, Item 1).
8. Remove nut (Figure 5, Item 5), capscrew (Figure 5, Item 3), and adjustment fitting (Figure 5, Item 2) from spring guide rod
(Figure 5, Item 4).
0091-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
9. Remove two capscrews (Figure 6, Item 6), lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 7), and plate (Figure 6, Item 5) from platform
lug weldment (Figure 6, Item 4). Discard lockwashers.
10. Install lifting chain (Figure 6, Item 2) through opening at top of ramp weldment (Figure 6, Item 3) and attach lifting chain
to a suitable overhead lifting device (Figure 6, Item 1).
11. Operate lifting device (Figure 6, Item 1) to take up slack in lifting chain (Figure 6, Item 2).
0091-5
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. Open snap (Figure 7, Item 12) and load binder (Figure 7, Item 8) of chain assembly (Figure 7, Item 9) and remove chain hook
(Figure 7, Item 7) from hole (Figure 7, Item 6) in platform (Figure 7, Item 5). Open QuickLink (Figure 7, Item 10) and remove
chain assembly from attachment lug (Figure 7, Item 11) on side of ramp (Figure 7, Item 3). Lay chain assembly on platform.
13. Operate lifting device (Figure 7, Item 1) to take weight of ramp (Figure 7, Item 3) off of ramp pivot shaft (Figure 7, Item 4).
Keep tension on lifting chain (Figure 7, Item 2).
0091-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
14. Use sledge hammer and short length of 2 in. x 4 in. lumber to drive ramp pivot shaft (Figure 8, Item 4) from inboard side of
ramp (Figure 8, Item 3) out of platform weldment (Figure 8, Item 5).
WARNING
The ramp pivot shaft weighs in excess of 140 lb (63.5 kg). Use two people when removing pivot
shaft from platform weldment or injury to personnel may result.
15. Use one person to drive out pivot shaft (Figure 8, Item 4) and one person to support ramp lever (Figure 8, Item 7).
Continue to drive out ramp pivot shaft in outboard direction until ramp lever and ramp lug weldments (Figure 8,
Item 6) are free of pivot shaft.
16. Use two people to remove ramp pivot shaft (Figure 8, Item 4) from remaining platform outboard lug weldment (Figure 8,
Item 5).
17. Operate lifting device (Figure 8, Item 1) to lower ramp (Figure 8, Item 3) onto platform (Figure 8, Item 8) or suitable pallet.
Remove lifting device and lifting chain (Figure 8, Item 2) from ramp.

END OF TASK
0091-7
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
WARNING
Cleaning compound solvent is used to clean parts and is potentially dangerous to

personnel. Extinguish all smoking materials and do not allow sparks or open flame
near the work area. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area.
nicks, burrs, or corrosion from polished surfaces using crocus cloth. Replace defective parts as required.
2. Inspect machined surfaces on ramp pivot pin (Figure 9, Item 3), inside diameter of lift lever (Figure 9, Item 5), and
shouldered pin (Figure 9, Item 4) for surface deterioration, burrs, scratches, or gouges that could interfere with mounting or
mating components and cause rough, sticking, or irregular operation.
3. Inspect spring (Figure 9, Item 1) and guide rod (Figure 9, Item 2) for corrosion, evidence of warping, cracks, excessive dents,
gouges, or wear. Check for loose, missing, or damaged attaching hardware. Replace defective components as required.
Figure 9. Loading Ramp Repair.
0091-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
NOTE
If the snap must be replaced and is attached to the load binder handle with a welded link, the
welded link must be cut off and replaced with a QuickLink.
4. Inspect chain assembly (Figure 10, Item 3) for proper operation of load binder (Figure 10, Item 2), three QuickLinks
(Figure 10, Item 4, Item 5, and Item 7), snap (Figure 10, Item 6), and chain hook (Figure 10, Item 1). Replace QuickLinks,
snap, and chain assembly if any components are defective.
Figure 10. Loading Ramp Repair.

END OF TASK
0091-9
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install lifting chain (Figure 11, Item 2) through opening at top of ramp weldment (Figure 11, Item 3) and attach lifting chain
to a suitable overhead lifting device (Figure 11, Item 1).
2. Use one person to operate lifting device (Figure 11, Item 1) and a second person to steady and guide ramp weldment
(Figure 11, Item 3); then raise and position ramp at rear of semitrailer with ramp pivot shaft lug weldments (Figure 11,
Item 7) aligned with platform lug weldment (Figure 11, Item 6).
WARNING
The ramp pivot shaft weighs in excess of 140 lb (63.5 kg). Use two people when installing shaft.
NOTE
Prior to installing ramp pivot shaft, be sure keyed end of shaft is pointed toward outboard side of platform.
3. Use two people to place leading edge of ramp pivot shaft (Figure 11, Item 4) through opening on outboard platform lug
weldment (Figure 11, Item 6). Then start to enter opening on outboard ramp lug weldment (Figure 11, Item 7).
4. Position ramp lift lever (Figure 11, Item 8) between ramp lug weldments (Figure 11, Item 7) and align with pivot shaft
(Figure 11, Item 4). Check alignment of pivot shaft, lift lever, and outboard lug weldments (Figure 11, Item 6) on ramp
(Figure 11, Item 3) and platform (Figure 11, Item 9). If necessary, operate overhead lifting device (Figure 11, Item 1) as
required to obtain proper alignment.
5. With all components aligned, use sledge hammer to continue driving pivot shaft (Figure 11, Item 4) inboard through lift
lever (Figure 11, Item 8), through inboard ramp lug weldment (Figure 11, Item 7), and through inboard platform lug
weldment (Figure 11, Item 6) until key slot (Figure 11, Item 5) in end of pivot shaft is properly positioned. If necessary,
using a pipe wrench, turn pivot shaft so that key slot is properly aligned.
0091-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
Figure 11. Loading Ramp Installation.
0091-11
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Install key plate (Figure 12, Item 6) into key slot (Figure 12, Item 5) of pivot shaft (Figure 12, Item 4) and secure with two
lockwashers (Figure 12, Item 8) and capscrews (Figure 12, Item 7).
7. Install QuickLink (Figure 12, Item 13) of chain assembly (Figure 12, Item 12) to inboard side of ramp (Figure 12, Item 3).
Move lifting device (Figure 12, Item 1) as required until ramp is in the forward stowed position. Insert chain hook
(Figure 12, Item 11) in hole (Figure 12, Item 10) on platform (Figure 12, Item 9).
8. Remove overhead lifting device (Figure 12, Item 1) and lifting chain (Figure 12, Item 2) from ramp (Figure 12, Item 3).

9. Slide adjustment fitting (Figure 13, Item 2) onto spring guide rod (Figure 13, Item 4), but do not install capscrew (Figure 13,
Item 3) and nut (Figure 13, Item 5) at this time.
10. Slide helical spring (Figure 13, Item 1) onto spring guide rod (Figure 13, Item 4).
0091-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
11. Use two people to lift and position spring and guide rod assembly (Figure 14, Item 4) onto ramp (Figure 14, Item 1) with
upper end of guide rod (Figure 14, Item 2) inserted through bracket weldment (Figure 14, Item 3) and lower end of guide
rod (Figure 14, Item 5) on ramp lever (Figure 14, Item 8).
WARNING
12. Apply grease to shouldered pin (Figure 14, Item 6) and install pin through guide rod (Figure 14, Item 5) and ramp lever
(Figure 14, Item 8). Secure with cotter pin (Figure 14, Item 7).
0091-13
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Ramp is lowered toward horizontal position to permit installation of the capscrew and washer
installed on top end of the spring guide rod.
13. Unhook chain assembly (Figure 15, Item 2) from platform (Figure 15, Item 1) and reconnect hook (Figure 15, Item 3) to
hole in ramp lift lever (Figure 15, Item 14). Ensure spring guide rod (Figure 15, Item 11) is aligned in ramp weldment
bracket (Figure 15, Item 12) and lower ramp (Figure 15, Item 4) until spring (Figure 15, Item 13) supports weight of
ramp (Figure 15, Item 4).
14. Install washer (Figure 15, Item 9) over end of guide rod (Figure 15, Item 11) protruding through top of ramp weldment
bracket (Figure 15, Item 12). Install capscrew (Figure 15, Item 8) through hole in guide rod and secure capscrew with
locknut (Figure 15, Item 10).
15. Return ramp (Figure 15, Item 4) to raised (stow) position (WP 0009). If chain (Figure 15, Item 5) sags with load binder
(Figure 15, Item 7) closed, open load binder, remove QuickLink (Figure 15, Item 6), and shorten chain until there is no sag.
0091-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
16. Use two people to slide adjustment fitting (Figure 16, Item 9) and spring (Figure 16, Item 6) upward on guide rod
(Figure 16, Item 5) until top of spring is positioned even with bottom of tube guide (Figure 16, Item 4) located on
underside of weldment bracket (Figure 16, Item 3).
WARNING
Ramps with almost full width traction bars are heavy. If ramp spring is not adjusted
properly, they will fall to the ground quickly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
Vertical pattern of seven holes through lower end of guide rod are staggered and spaced 0.5 in. (1.27 cm) apart.
17. If seven traction bars (Figure 16, Item 1) on ramp are just slightly longer than width of gap between two tubes (Figure 16,
Item 11 and Item 2), align holes in adjustment fitting (Figure 16, Item 9) with hole in spring guide rod (Figure 16, Item 5),
which places top of spring (Figure 16, Item 6) within 0.75 in. (1.9 cm) of underside of weldment bracket (Figure 16, Item 3)
without touching. If seven traction bars on ramp reach almost full width of ramps, compress spring and align holes on
adjustment fitting with fourth of seven holes in rod. Install capscrew (Figure 16, Item 7) and locknut (Figure 16, Item 8).
18. Lubricate pivot shaft (Figure 16, Item 10) and spring rod (Figure 16, Item 5) (WP 0163).
19. Check spring (Figure 16, Item 6) adjustment.
Figure 16. Loading Ramp Spring Installation.

END OF TASK
0091-15
0091 TM 9-2330-381-13
ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjust rear of platform to 36 in. (91.4 cm) high (WP 0008).
2. Operate spring (Figure 17, Item 3) assisted ramps (Figure 17, Item 1) (WP 0009) and check for proper tension of spring
(Figure 17, Item 3) adjustment as follows:
a. When lowering ramps (Figure 17, Item 1), the ramp ends, upon first contact with the ground, should remain on the
ground or rise not more than 6 in. (15 cm) from bottom of ramp to ground. If ramp ends rise higher, spring tension
(Figure 17, Item 3) may be too great. To reduce spring tension, proceed to step 3 below.
b. When lowering ramps (Figure 17, Item 1), the ramp ends, without downward push from operator, should not forcefully
strike the ground and remain there. Raising of ramp should not require extreme effort by one operator. If above
conditions are observed, ramp springs (Figure 17, Item 3) do not have sufficient tension. Refer to step 4 to increase
spring tension.
c. If ramp (Figure 17, Item 1) meets requirements of steps 2a and 2b, ramps are properly adjusted.
3. Reduce spring (Figure 17, Item 3) tension as follows:
a. Raise ramps (Figure 17, Item 1) and attach chain assemblies (Figure 17, Item 7) to platform (WP 0009).
b. One person must hold spring (Figure 17, Item 3) in place while second person removes locknut (Figure 17, Item 5)
and capscrew (Figure 17, Item 4) from adjustment fitting (Figure 17, Item 6).
c. Lower adjustment fitting (Figure 17, Item 6) on spring guide rod (Figure 17, Item 2) and align with next available hole in
rod. Insert capscrew (Figure 17, Item 4) and secure with locknut (Figure 17, Item 5).
d. Operate ramps (Figure 17, Item 1) and check for proper tension on spring (Figure 17, Item 3). Repeat steps 3a and 3b
as required.
4. Increase spring tension as follows:
a. Raise ramps and attach chain assemblies (Figure 17, Item 7) to platform (WP 0009).
b. One person must hold spring (Figure 17, Item 3) in place while second person removes locknut (Figure 17, Item 5)
and capscrew (Figure 17, Item 4) from adjustment fitting (Figure 17, Item 6).
c. Slide spring (Figure 17, Item 3) and adjustment fitting (Figure 17, Item 6) upward on spring guide rod (Figure 17,
Item 2) and align adjustment fitting with next available hole in rod. Install capscrew (Figure 17, Item 4) and secure
capscrew with locknut (Figure 17, Item 5).
d. Operate ramps (Figure 17, Item 1) and check for proper tension on spring (Figure 17, Item 3). Repeat steps 4a and 4b
as required.
0091-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0091
Figure 17. Loading Ramp Adjustment.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0091-17/18 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0092
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) FRAME
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) removed (WP 0128)
APU hydraulic lines and fittings removed (WP 0117)
Materials/Parts
Hydraulic tank assembly removed (WP 0126)
Locknuts (2)
Locknuts (2)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) frame.
0092-1
0092 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• When on top of the gooseneck and removing or installing guardrails, always hold onto
semitrailer with one hand or injury to personnel may result.
tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip
over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
1. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 6), two retaining plates (Figure 1, Item 13), and sections of two block clamps (Figure 1,
Item 12) from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 5), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 2), and four washers (Figure 1, Item 3) from APU frame
(Figure 1, Item 1) and weldment brackets (Figure 1, Item 4) on streetside of gooseneck; curbside not shown.
3. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 7), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 11), washers (Figure 1, Item 10), and lower portion
of resilient mount (Figure 1, Item 8) from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 1) and weldment brackets (Figure 1, Item 9) on
curbside of gooseneck; streetside not shown.
Figure 1. APU Frame Removal.
0092-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0092
4. Unhook davit cable (Figure 2, Item 5) and hook (Figure 2, Item 4) from davit base (Figure 2, Item 8) on gooseneck
(Figure 2, Item 1).
5. Unfasten linch pin (Figure 2, Item 9) and remove hitch pin (Figure 2, Item 10) from davit base (Figure 2, Item 8). Swing
davit arm (Figure 2, Item 7) toward streetside of gooseneck and continue turning until davit winch cable (Figure 2, Item 5)
and hook (Figure 2, Item 4) is above APU frame (Figure 2, Item 2).
6. Operate davit winch (Figure 2, Item 6) to lower davit winch cable (Figure 2, Item 5) and hook (Figure 2, Item 4) to APU
frame (Figure 2, Item 2).
7. Attach davit winch cable (Figure 2, Item 5) and hook (Figure 2, Item 4) to hole (Figure 2, Item 3) at center of APU frame
(Figure 2, Item 2).
8. Operate davit winch (Figure 2, Item 6) and raise APU frame (Figure 2, Item 2) approximately 6 in. (15 cm) and remove
upper resilient mount (Figure 2, Item 12) and sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 11) from curbside of APU frame (Figure 2,
Item 2); streetside not shown.
0092-3
0092 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
The gooseneck steering hydraulic hoses must be removed from the U-shaped bracket on the APU frame and then
repositioned under the APU frame. The APU frame will need to be lifted slightly so that hoses can be moved.
9. Carefully remove hydraulic hoses (Figure 3, Item 10), one at a time, from U-shaped bracket (Figure 3, Item 9) and
reposition under APU frame (Figure 3, Item 3).
10. Use one person to steady and guide APU frame (Figure 3, Item 3) and a second person to operate davit winch (Figure 3,
Item 7) on davit arm (Figure 3, Item 8); then raise APU frame until it can clear gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 1) step support
weldments (Figure 3, Item 2).
11. Carefully swing davit arm (Figure 3, Item 8) until APU frame (Figure 3, Item 3) is suspended over curbside of gooseneck
(Figure 3, Item 1).
12. With one person stationed on the ground near gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 1), second person must operate davit winch
(Figure 3, Item 7) on davit arm (Figure 3, Item 8) to lower APU frame (Figure 3, Item 3) to ground.
13. Remove hook (Figure 3, Item 5) and davit winch cable (Figure 3, Item 6) from hole (Figure 3, Item 4) in the APU frame
(Figure 3, Item 3).

END OF TASK
0092-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0092
INSTALLATION
1. Place APU frame (Figure 4, Item 3) on ground near curbside of gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 1).
2. Attach davit winch cable (Figure 4, Item 6) and hook (Figure 4, Item 5) to hole (Figure 4, Item 4) to center of APU frame
(Figure 4, Item 3).
3. Use one person on the ground to steady and guide APU frame (Figure 4, Item 3) and a second person to operate davit
winch (Figure 4, Item 7) on davit arm (Figure 4, Item 8) to raise APU frame up above gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 1) step
support weldments mounting brackets (Figure 4, Item 2).
4. With two people on gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 1), one person must steady and guide APU frame (Figure 4, Item 3) while
second person swings davit arm (Figure 4, Item 8) with APU frame toward rear of gooseneck until frame is positioned
approximately above step support weldment mounting brackets (Figure 4, Item 2) in gooseneck.
5. Operate davit winch (Figure 4, Item 7) on davit arm (Figure 4, Item 8) and lower APU frame (Figure 4, Item 3) to
approximately 6 in. (15 cm) above gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 1) step support weldment mounting brackets (Figure 4, Item 2).
NOTE
The gooseneck steering hydraulic hoses must be repositioned under forward end of APU frame
and placed in the U-shaped bracket on top of aft end of APU frame. The APU frame may need
to be tilted slightly to permit repositioning of the hoses.
6. Carefully move hydraulic hoses (Figure 4, Item 10), one at a time, from beneath aft end of APU frame (Figure 4, Item 3) and
place each hose in U-shaped retaining bracket (Figure 4, Item 9) on top of APU frame.
Figure 4. APU Frame Installation.
0092-5
0092 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. From underside of gooseneck (Figure 5, Item 1), position two upper portions of resilient mounts (Figure 5, Item 13) on
streetside mounting brackets, not shown, on gooseneck.
8. One person must operate davit winch (Figure 5, Item 3) on davit arm (Figure 5, Item 4) to lower APU frame (Figure 5,
Item 2) while second person steadies and guides APU frame into position on resilient mounts (Figure 5, Item 13) and
curbside mounting brackets (Figure 5, Item 11).
9. Install two capscrews (Figure 5, Item 15) and washers (Figure 5, Item 14) through top of APU frame (Figure 5, Item 2),
upper resilient mount (Figure 5, Item 13).
10. From underside of gooseneck (Figure 5, Item 1), install two sleeve bushings (Figure 5, Item 12) and lower resilient mounts
(Figure 5, Item 10) on sleeve bushings protruding through mounting brackets (Figure 5, Item 11). Install locknuts (Figure 5,
Item 9) on capscrews (Figure 5, Item 15), but do not tighten.
11. Install two capscrews (Figure 5, Item 5), four washers (Figure 5, Item 6), and two locknuts (Figure 5, Item 8) securing APU
frame (Figure 5, Item 2) to weldment brackets (Figure 5, Item 7) on curbside of gooseneck (Figure 5, item 1); streetside
not shown. Tighten locknuts (Figure 5, Item 9) onto capscrews (Figure 5, Item 15).
0092-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0092
12. Remove davit winch cable (Figure 6, Item 4) and hook (Figure 6, Item 3) from hole (Figure 6, Item 2) in APU frame (Figure 6,
Item 1). Retract winch cable, and swing davit arm (Figure 6, Item 6) back to stow position. Install hitch pin (Figure 6, Item 9)
in davit base (Figure 6, Item 7) and secure with linch pin (Figure 6, Item 8). Attach davit winch cable and hook to davit base.
13. Position hydraulic hoses (Figure 6, Item 10) under forward end of APU frame (Figure 6, Item 1) near block clamp (Figure 6,
Item 13) mounting position. Install two block clamps and retainer plates (Figure 6, Item 12) onto hydraulic hoses and
secure to APU frame (Figure 6, Item 1) with two bolts (Figure 6, Item 11).

END OF TASK
Start and run APU (WP 0005) and check that resilient mounts are properly seated.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0092-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0093
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PIVOT PIN
INITIAL SETUP:
2
Materials/Parts
Crocus Cloth (WP 0170, Item 6) Equipment Conditions
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) (WP 0007)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, inspection, and installation of the pivot pin assembly.
0093-1
0093 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
A second person must be used to hold the locknut on curbside of gooseneck while removing the
streetside locknut, cover, and pulley to prevent the threaded rod from turning in the pivot pin assembly.
1. Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 5), cover (Figure 1, Item 4), and pulley (Figure 1, Item 2) from pivot pin assembly (Figure 1,
Item 1). Discard locknut.
2. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 1, Item 3) from pulley (Figure 1, Item 2).
Figure 1. Pivot Pin Removal.

END OF TASK
0093-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0093
REPAIR
WARNING
Cleaning compound solvent is used to clean parts and is potentially dangerous to personnel.
Extinguish all smoking materials and do not allow sparks or open flame near the work
area. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this
1. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent and wire brush as necessary.
2. Inspect pulley (Figure 2 item 2) for corrosion, evidence of cracks, excessive dents, gouges, warping, and peeling of painted
surfaces. Remove any nicks, burrs, or corrosion from inner diameter of pulley (Figure 2 item 2) with crocus cloth. Check
for loose, missing, or damaged attaching hardware. Replace defective or missing components as required.
3. Inspect machined surface of pivot pin assembly (Figure 2 item 1) for surface deterioration, burrs, scratches, or gouges that
could interfere with mating inner diameter of pulley (Figure 2 item 2) and cause sticking or irregular operation. If pivot pin
assembly (Figure 2 item 1) has any of the above issues, notify field maintenance.
Figure 2. Pivot Pin Inspection.

END OF TASK
0093-3
0093 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 3) into pulley (Figure 3, Item 2) and apply grease to inner diameter of pulley.
2. Apply grease to surface of pivot pin assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) and install pulley (Figure 3, Item 2) on shaft.
3. Install cover (Figure 3, Item 4) and locknut (Figure 3, Item 5) on pivot pin assembly (Figure 3, Item 1).
4. Wipe off excess grease with rag.
Figure 3. Pivot Pin Installation.
END OF TASK
Lubricate pivot pin grooved pulley (WP 0163).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0093-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0094
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SPARE WHEEL CARRIER
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Washer (8) (and as required)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Brush Scrub (WP 0170, Item 3)
Detergent, General Purpose (WP 0170, Item 11) Equipment Conditions
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Spare tires removed (WP 0077)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Steering hydraulic cylinders removed (WP 0086)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, inspection, and installation of the spare wheel carrier.
0094-1
0094 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• When on top of gooseneck, always hold the guard rail with one hand to avoid falling and causing
injury to personnel.
• On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to the top of the gooseneck directly in front of spare tires.
Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip over it.
1. Remove four cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 5), slotted nuts (Figure 1, Item 4), eight washers (Figure 1, Item 3), and four
capscrews (Figure 1, Item 1) from spare wheel carrier (Figure 1, Item 2). Discard cotter pins.
Figure 1. Spare Wheel Carrier Removal.
0094-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0094
2. Unhook davit winch cable (Figure 2, Item 6) from stow point on davit base (Figure 2, Item 11).
3. Release linch pin (Figure 2, Item 4) and remove hitch pin (Figure 2, Item 5) from pulley clamp (Figure 2, Item 3). Reposition
pulley clamp on davit arm (Figure 2, Item 2) near davit winch (Figure 2, Item 1). Insert hitch pin and secure with linch pin.
4. Release linch pin (Figure 2, Item 12) and remove hitch pin (Figure 2, Item 13) at davit base (Figure 2, Item 11). Swing davit
arm (Figure 2, Item 2) and winch (Figure 2, Item 1) streetside over spare wheel carrier (Figure 2, Item 9).
5. Attach winch cable (Figure 2, Item 6) to spare wheel carrier (Figure 2, Item 9) by wrapping winch cable under wheel
supports (Figure 2, Item 8) and attaching hook (Figure 2, Item 7) over winch cable to form a loop.
6. Operate davit winch (Figure 2, Item 1) to lift spare wheel carrier (Figure 2, Item 9) out of gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 10).
Swing davit arm (Figure 2, Item 2) and spare wheel carrier out over curbside of gooseneck. Operate davit winch to lower
spare wheel carrier to ground. Once on ground, remove winch cable (Figure 2, Item 6) from spare wheel carrier.
Figure 2. Spare Wheel Carrier Removal.
0094-3
0094 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Extinguish all smoking materials and do not allow sparks or open flame near the work area.
Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area.
7. Clean spare wheel carrier (Figure 3, Item 2) using general purpose detergent and scrub brush. Use cleaning solvent, wire
brush, and crocus cloth for degreasing and removal of corrosion.
8. Inspect spare wheel carrier (Figure 3, Item 2) and carrier mounts on gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 1) for broken welds, warped
or bent metal, and defective studs. Inspect for defective or missing mounting hardware. Replace parts as required.
Figure 3. Cleaning and Inspection of Spare Wheel Carrier.

END OF TASK
0094-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0094
INSTALLATION
1. Attach winch cable (Figure 4, Item 3) to spare wheel carrier (Figure 4, Item 6) by wrapping winch cable under wheel
supports (Figure 4, Item 5) and attaching hook (Figure 4, Item 4) over winch cable to form loop.
2. Operate davit winch (Figure 4, Item 1) to lift spare wheel carrier (Figure 4, Item 6) to clear gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 10).
3. Swing davit arm (Figure 4, Item 2) and winch cable (Figure 4, Item 3) with spare wheel carrier (Figure 4, Item 6) into
position on gooseneck (Figure 4, Item 10).
4. Install four bolts (Figure 4, Item 11), eight new washers (Figure 4, Item 7), and four slotted nuts (Figure 4, Item 8). Torque
slotted nuts to 420 lb-ft (570 Nm), and then tighten slotted nuts further to align cotter pin hole with next available
slot in slotted nut. If necessary, install additional washers under slotted nuts to properly align slotted nuts and cotter
pin holes for full engagement of new cotter pins (Figure 4, Item 9) when slotted nuts are properly torqued. Install four
cotter pins to secure nuts.
Figure 4. Spare Wheel Carrier Installation.
0094-5
0094 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Remove winch cable (Figure 5, Item 6) and hook (Figure 5, Item 7) from spare wheel carrier (Figure 5, Item 8).
6. Return pulley clamp (Figure 5, Item 3) back to stow position at end of davit arm (Figure 5, Item 2). Install hitch pin
(Figure 5, Item 5) and secure with linch pin (Figure 5, Item 4).
7. Return davit arm (Figure 5, Item 2) to stow position. Install hitch pin (Figure 5, Item 11) through davit base (Figure 5,
Item 9) and secure with linch pin (Figure 5, Item 10).
8. Attach winch cable (Figure 5, Item 6) and hook (Figure 5, Item 7) on davit base (Figure 5, Item 9) and take up slack
in cable with davit winch (Figure 5, Item 1).
Figure 5. Spare Wheel Carrier Installation.

END OF TASK
Install steering hydraulic cylinders (WP 0086).
Install spare tires (WP 0077).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0094-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0095
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FRONT SUPPORT LEGS
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Crocus Cloth (WP 0170, Item 6)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Platform adjusted to 51 in. (130 cm) height (WP 0008)
Cotter Pin (1) If semitrailer is uncoupled, couple or support gooseneck
Cotter Pin (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the repair and assembly of the front support legs.
0095-1
0095 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
NOTE
• Use the following procedure for either curbside or streetside front support legs. Repeat this procedure as
required to complete the necessary repairs.
• When removing latch pin out of support tube, it may be necessary to rotate handcrank slightly in either direction to
relieve pressure so that pin may be extracted.
1. Unfasten linch pin (Figure 1, Item 8), rotate latch pin (Figure 1, Item 3), and pull latch pin out of support tube (Figure 1,
Item 2).
2. If required, remove nut (Figure 1, Item 7), washer (Figure 1, Item 6), and handle (Figure 1, Item 5) from pin (Figure 1, Item 4).
3. Turn handcrank (Figure 1, Item 1) counterclockwise and lower the inner tube assembly (Figure 1, Item 9) until it comes all
the way out of support tube (Figure 1, Item 2).
Figure 1. Front Support Leg Removal.
0095-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0095
WARNING
The inner tube assembly and foot weldment are heavy. Use an assistant to support and
move the assembly or injury to personnel may result.
4. Use two personnel to move inner tube assembly (Figure 2, Item 4) away from platform far enough to permit removal of
anchor (Figure 2, Item 8) and strap (Figure 2, Item 9) from top of inner tube assembly. Remove anchor and strap by rotating
anchor slightly until it can be extracted through rectangular opening (Figure 2, Item 1) at top of inner tube.
5. Use two personnel to lay inner tube assembly (Figure 2, Item 4) on a suitable work bench with foot weldment (Figure 2,
Item 5) hanging over end or side of bench.
6. Remove cotter pin (Figure 2, Item 6) from nut (Figure 2, Item 7) on bottom side of foot weldment (Figure 2, Item 5).
7. Use extensions, 1 1/8 in. socket, and socket wrench and insert extensions with socket through top (Figure 2, Item 1) of
inner tube assembly (Figure 2, Item 4) and seat socket on head of bolt (Figure 2, Item 2).
8. One person must use socket wrench attached to extension and socket to hold bolt (Figure 2, Item 2) while second
person, using a 1 1/8 in. impact socket and socket wrench, must remove slotted nut (Figure 2, Item 7) and foot weldment
(Figure 2, Item 5) from inner tube assembly (Figure 2, Item 4).
9. Remove loose bolt (Figure 2, Item 2) and shim (Figure 2, Item 3) from inner tube assembly (Figure 2, Item 4).
Figure 2. Front Support Leg Removal.
0095-3
0095 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
The cover assembly containing the drum winch is unevenly balanced. Use one person to support cover
assembly while second person removes attaching hardware or injury to personnel may result.
10. Remove four screws (Figure 3, Item 8), lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 7), and cover assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) containing
winch drum (Figure 3, Item 21) from inner tube assembly (Figure 3, Item 12). Discard lockwashers.
11. Remove cotter pin (Figure 3, Item 3), pin (Figure 3, Item 6), washer (Figure 3, Item 4), and roller (Figure 3, Item 5) from
cover assembly (Figure 3, Item 1). Discard cotter pin.
12. Remove two locknuts (Figure 3, Item 15), washers (Figure 3, Item 16), and carriage bolts (Figure 3, Item 2) from cover
assembly (Figure 3, Item 1). Remove locknut (Figure 3, Item 13), washer (Figure 3, Item 14), capscrew (Figure 3, Item 19),
and winch drum (Figure 3, Item 21) from cover assembly. Discard locknuts.
13. Remove cotter pin (Figure 3, Item 17), washer (Figure 3, Item 18), and pin (Figure 3, Item 20) from winch drum assembly
(Figure 3, Item 21). Discard cotter pin.
14. Pull strap (Figure 3, Item 9) from winch drum (Figure 3, Item 21). If strap or anchor (Figure 3, Item 10) requires replacement,
remove screw (Figure 3, Item 11) that secures strap to anchor.
Figure 3. Front Support Leg Disassembly.
0095-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0095
WARNING
Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning
15. Clean inner tube (Figure 4, Item 3), foot weldment (Figure 4, Item 5), screw (Figure 4, Item 6), and cover assembly
(Figure 4, Item 1). Use cleaning solvent, wire brush, and crocus cloth for degreasing and removal of corrosion.
16. Clean all parts removed from cover assembly (Figure 4, Item 1) in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent and
wire brush as necessary. Remove corrosion using wire brush and crocus cloth.
17. Check winch drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 10) as follows:
a. Visually check that ratchet mechanism spring is not deformed or broken.
b. Check that ratchet mechanism lever is not worn, bent, or broken. Ensure ratchet mechanism locks into gear (Figure 4,
Item 2) when winch drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 10) is not turning. Ensure excess paint and other foreign materials
have been cleaned from ratchet gear.
c. Check that winch drum assembly (Figure 4, Item 10) rotates without binding or slipping when handcrank (Figure 4,
Item 9) is turned. Replace winch drum assembly if improper operation is observed or any parts are defective.
18. Check lifting strap (Figure 4, Item 8) for evidence of wear, fraying, cuts, separation, and other forms of deterioration.
Replace strap or anchor (Figure 4, Item 7) if defective.
19. Check inner tube assembly (Figure 4, Item 3) as follows:
a. Check tube (Figure 4, Item 3) weldment for cracks, broken welds, or warping. Inspect ball joint (Figure 4, Item 4)
surface at bottom of tube for gouges or burrs that could restrict movement of foot weldment (Figure 4, Item 5).
b. Inspect foot weldment (Figure 4, Item 5) for cracks, broken welds, gouges, and burrs.
20. Inspect upper support (Figure 4, Item 14) weldment for cracks, broken welds, or warping. Inspect latch pin (Figure 4,
Item 11), linch pin (Figure 4, Item 13), and split ring (Figure 4, Item 12). Replace any defective parts.
Figure 4. Front Support Legs Cleaning and Inspection.

END OF TASK
0095-5
0095 TM 9-2330-381-13
ASSEMBLY
1. If anchor (Figure 5, Item 10) was removed from strap (Figure 5, Item 9), install anchor into open end of strap and secure
with screw (Figure 5, Item 11). Install strap on winch drum assembly (Figure 5, Item 21) and insert pin (Figure 5, Item 20)
through side of winch drum assembly and loop on end of strap. Secure pin with washer (Figure 5, Item 18) and cotter pin
2. Install winch drum (Figure 5, Item 21) on cover assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) and secure with capscrew (Figure 5, Item 19),
washer (Figure 5, Item 14), locknut (Figure 5, Item 13), two carriage bolts (Figure 5, Item 2), washers (Figure 5, Item 16),
3. Pass strap (Figure 5, Item 9) over roller (Figure 5, Item 5) and install roller with pin (Figure 5, Item 6), washer (Figure 5,
Item 4), and cotter pin (Figure 5, Item 3) on cover assembly (Figure 5, Item 1).
WARNING
The cover assembly containing the winch drum is unevenly balanced. Use one person to support cover
assembly while second person installs attaching hardware or injury to personnel may result.
4. Install cover assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) onto support tube (Figure 5, Item 12), passing foot end of strap (Figure 5, Item 9)
with anchor (Figure 5, Item 10) down through support tube. One person must support cover assembly and second person
must install four capscrews (Figure 5, Item 8) and lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 7) to secure cover assembly.
Figure 5. Front Support Legs Assembly.
0095-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0095
5. Assemble shim (Figure 6, Item 3) on bolt (Figure 6, Item 2) with convex side of shim downward and, working through
stow hole (Figure 6, Item 5) located near bottom of inner tube (Figure 6, Item 4), insert threaded end of bolt through hole
at bottom of inner tube ball joint (Figure 6, Item 6).
6. Use extensions, 1 1/8 in. socket, and socket wrench and insert extensions with socket through top (Figure 6, Item 1) of
inner tube assembly (Figure 6, Item 4) and seat socket on head of bolt (Figure 6, Item 2).
7. One person must use socket wrench, extensions, and socket to hold bolt (Figure 6, Item 2), and second person must position
foot weldment (Figure 6, Item 7) on ball joint of inner tube (Figure 6, Item 6) so that threaded end of bolt protrudes through
mating surface of foot weldment. Second person, using a 1 1/8 in. impact socket and socket wrench, must install slotted
nut (Figure 6, Item 9) and cotter pin (Figure 6, Item 8).
0095-7
0095 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
The inner tube and foot weldment are heavy. Use two people to support and move the
assembly or injury to personnel may result.
8. Place inner tube assembly (Figure 7, Item 6) under support tube (Figure 7, Item 2). Insert anchor (Figure 7, Item 4) and strap
(Figure 7, Item 3) through slot (Figure 7, Item 5) in inner tube assembly. Raise inner tube assembly and align with support
tube. Turn handcrank (Figure 7, Item 1) clockwise to raise inner tube assembly.
9. If required, assemble handle (Figure 7, Item 10), washer (Figure 7, Item 11), and nut (Figure 7, Item 7) to latch pin
(Figure 7, Item 9).
10. When holes are aligned, install latch pin (Figure 7, Item 9) and turn to lock in place. Install linch pin (Figure 7, Item 8)
to secure latch pin.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0095-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0096
FIELD MAINTENANCE
REAR SUPPORT LEGS
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Packing (1)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) QuickLink (1)
Brush Scrub (WP 0170, Item 3) 2
Detergent, General Purpose (WP 0170, Item 11) Equipment Conditions
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Platform lowered to lowest position (WP 0008)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) running (WP 0005)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Rear support legs retracted (WP 0012)
Packing (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the disassembly, repair, and assembly of the rear support legs.
0096-1
0096 TM 9-2330-381-13
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either streetside or curbside rear support leg. Repeat this
1. Pull out latch handle (Figure 1, Item 12) and pull latch (Figure 1, Item 11) out of loop on cover (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 13) and cover (Figure 1, Item 1). Remove setscrew (Figure 1, Item 2) from cover.
3. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 10), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 9), washers (Figure 1, Item 8), and latch (Figure 1, Item 7)
from support leg weldment (Figure 1, Item 3).
4. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 1, Item 6), washer (Figure 1, Item 5), and packing (Figure 1, Item 4) from support leg
weldment (Figure 1, Item 3). Discard packing.
Figure 1. Rear Support Leg Removal.
WARNING
The retractable inner support leg is heavy. Keep feet and hands from under the support leg
foot when raising, lowering, or operating the support leg. Use two personnel when supporting
or lifting the leg or injury to personnel may result.
NOTE
Place a hydraulic floor jack under the inner support leg foot to prevent dropping of inner
support leg to the ground when actuating nut is removed.
5. Place a hydraulic floor jack under foot of inner support leg (Figure 2, Item 13) and raise jack to within approximately
2 in. (3.1 cm) from bottom of foot (Figure 2, Item 12).
0096-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0096
6. One person must hold inner support leg (Figure 2, Item 13) and second person must remove socket head screw (Figure 2,
Item 2), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 3), and actuating nut (Figure 2, Item 4) from inner support leg screw shaft (Figure 2,
Item 8). If socket head screw is sheared or otherwise damaged and cannot be removed from nut and shaft, proceed as
follows:
a. Use cold chisel (Figure 2, Item 9) and 3 lb hammer to split nut (Figure 2, Item 4) at setscrew screw hole (Figure 2,
Item 10).
b. When nut (Figure 2, Item 4) has been split through, leave chisel (Figure 2, Item 9) in split and use a second chisel to
spread nut until screw shaft (Figure 2, Item 8) of inner support leg (Figure 2, Item 13) drops from nut.
7. Remove actuating nut (Figure 2, Item 4), washer (Figure 2, Item 5), and packing (Figure 2, Item 6) from inner support leg
(Figure 2, Item 13). Discard packing.
8. Raise platform to highest position (WP 0008).
9. One person must hold and steady inner support leg (Figure 2, Item 13) and second person must lower front of platform
opposite affected rear support leg until inner support leg is clear of upper support leg weldment (Figure 2, Item 7). Two
personnel must move inner support leg away from platform (Figure 2, Item 11).
11. Remove sleeve bearing (Figure 2, Item 14) and washer (Figure 2, Item 1) from inner support leg (Figure 2, Item 13)
screw shaft (Figure 2, Item 8).
Figure 2. Rear Support Leg Removal.

END OF TASK
0096-3
0096 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
WARNING
1. Clean inner support leg weldment (Figure 3, Item 1) and upper support weldment (Figure 3, Item 2) using general purpose
detergent and scrub brush. Use cleaning solvent, wire brush, and crocus cloth for degreasing and removal of corrosion.
2. Inspect inner support leg (Figure 3, Item 1) for cracks, broken welds, warping, peeling of paint, and corrosion.
3. Inspect upper support weldment (Figure 3, Item 2) for cracks, broken welds, or warping. Replace any defective parts.
Figure 3. Rear Support Leg Inspection.
0096-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0096
4. Repair of rear support leg is limited to replacement of defective cover (Figure 4, Item 2), latch (Figure 4, Item 6), and
lubrication fitting (Figure 4, Item 5).
5. Additional repair, required only if actuating nut (Figure 4, Item 4) is destroyed during disassembly, consists of restoration
of threaded top end of screw shaft (Figure 4, Item 1) prior to installation of a new nut and socket head screw (Figure 4,
Item 3). To repair screw shaft, proceed as follows:
a. Use a 1.0 to 14 UNF thread-cutting die to restore threads to screw shaft (Figure 4, Item 1) damaged during removal of
actuating nut (Figure 4, Item 4). Clean off metal particles with wire brush and wiping rag.
b. Install a new nut (Figure 4, Item 4) on threaded end of screw shaft (Figure 4, Item 1) and thread on nut until top of nut
is flush with top of shaft and setscrew slot in nut is aligned with setscrew slot in shaft.
c. Use a 0.3215 to 18 thread-cutting tap to restore threads in shaft slot that were damaged during removal of nut (Figure 4,
Item 4) and setscrew. Remove nut and clean off metal particles with wire brush and wiping rag.
d. Proceed to step 1 of assembly.
Figure 4. Rear Support Leg Repair.

END OF TASK
0096-5
0096 TM 9-2330-381-13
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply generous amount of grease to inside top of inner support leg (Figure 5, Item 22). Use hammer and drift to install
sleeve bearing (Figure 5, Item 24) and washer (Figure 5, Item 1).
3. With platform raised to highest position (WP 0008) and front of platform opposite affected rear support leg lowered, two
personnel must raise inner support leg (Figure 5, Item 22) into upper support weldment (Figure 5, Item 10).
4. Lower platform to lowest position (WP 0008).
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force when installing socket head screw. Socket head screw may
break, requiring replacement of actuating nut.
6. Install new packing (Figure 5, Item 9), washer (Figure 5, Item 8), and actuating nut (Figure 5, Item 7) to threaded shaft
(Figure 5, Item 23). Torque nut to 40 to 50 lb-ft (55 to 68 Nm) with setscrew slot in nut aligned with slot in threaded shaft.
Install lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 6) and socket head screw (Figure 5, Item 5) to threaded shaft.
7. Install new packing (Figure 5, Item 11), washer (Figure 5, Item 12), and lubrication fitting (Figure 5, Item 13) in upper
support leg weldment (Figure 5, Item 10).
8. Position latch (Figure 5, Item 14) on studs (Figure 5, Item 20) of upper support weldment (Figure 5, Item 10) and secure with
two washers (Figure 5, Item 15), lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 16), and nuts (Figure 5, Item 17).
9. Install setscrew (Figure 5, Item 4) in cover (Figure 5, Item 2) and install cover with two capscrews (Figure 5, Item 21).
Adjust setscrew so that cover cannot be opened past 90 degrees vertically. Check that cover, when released at full open
vertical position, returns to closed position.
10. Retract inner support leg (WP 0012). Position adjusting nut (Figure 5, Item 4) so that socket head screw (Figure 5, Item 5)
is outboard, and then pull latch (Figure 5, Item 18) through loop (Figure 5, Item 3) on cover (Figure 5, Item 2) and latch
handle (Figure 5, Item 19) to secure cover.
0096-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0096
Figure 5. Rear Support Leg Assembly.

END OF TASK
Lubricate lubrication fitting and actuating nut (WP 0163).
Operate rear support leg and check for proper operation (WP 0012).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0096-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0097
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SPLASH GUARDS
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Bogies isolated at all four corners (WP 0004)
Materials/Parts
Lockwasher (12)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the splash guards.
REMOVAL
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either curbside or streetside splash guards. Repeat this
1. Remove six nuts (Figure 1, Item 5), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4), screws (Figure 1, Item 3), and curbside splash guard
(Figure 1, Item 1) with mending plate (Figure 1, Item 2) and weldment brackets (Figure 1, Item 6) from platform (Figure 1,
Item 7). Discard lockwashers.
Figure 1. Splash Guard Removal.

END OF TASK
0097-1
0097 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Align mending plate (Figure 2, Item 2) and curbside splash guard (Figure 2, Item 1) with weldment brackets (Figure 2,
Item 6) on platform (Figure 2, Item 7) and secure with six screws (Figure 2, Item 3), new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 4),
and nuts (Figure 2, Item 5).
Figure 2. Splash Guard Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0097-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0098
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CONTROL MODULE FRAME
INITIAL SETUP:
Lockwasher (6) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Lockwasher (3) Bogies isolated at all four corners (WP 0004)
Locknut (2) Parking brakes applied and semitrailer wheels chocked
Locknut (2) (WP 0013)
Locknut Gooseneck isolation valve handle removed (WP 0115)
Screw, Self-Locking (2)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the control module frame.
0098-1
0098 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Remove cotter pin (Figure 1, Item 11) from hasp (Figure 1, Item 13). Rotate hasp and lower door panel (Figure 1,
Item 15). Remove cotter pin from door panel.
2. Remove two self-locking screws (Figure 1, Item 10) and door panel (Figure 1, Item 15) from lower panel (Figure 1,
Item 9). Discard self-locking screws.
3. Use two people to remove six bolts (Figure 1, Item 8), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 7), and lower panel (Figure 1, Item 9)
from hydraulic control module frame (Figure 1, Item 6). Move lower panel out from under semitrailer. Discard lockwashers.
4. Remove three screws (Figure 1, Item 5), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4), and rear panel (Figure 1, Item 3) from hydraulic
control module frame (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard lockwashers.
5. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 14), screws (Figure 1, Item 2), and angle bracket (Figure 1, Item 1) from hydraulic
control module frame (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard locknuts.
6. Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 19) from hasp (Figure 1, Item 13). Remove hasp locking mechanism (Figure 1, Item 18),
spring tension washer (Figure 1, Item 17), and flat washer (Figure 1, Item 16) from hasp. Discard locknut.
7. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 20), screws (Figure 1, Item 12), and hasp (Figure 1, Item 13) from door panel
Figure 1. Control Module Frame Removal.

END OF TASK
0098-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0098
INSTALLATION
1. Install hasp (Figure 2, Item 13) onto door panel (Figure 2, Item 15) and secure with two screws (Figure 2, Item 12) and
2. Install flat washers (Figure 2, Item 16), spring tension washer (Figure 2, Item 17), and hasp locking mechanism (Figure 2,
Item 18) onto hasp (Figure 2, Item 13) on door panel (Figure 2, Item 15). Secure in place by installing new locknut
3. Install two screws (Figure 2, Item 2) through top of hydraulic control module frame (Figure 2, Item 6). Install angle bracket
(Figure 2, Item 1) onto two screws (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure with two new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 14).
4. Align and install rear panel (Figure 2, Item 3) onto hydraulic control module frame (Figure 2, Item 6) and secure with three
new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 4) and screws (Figure 2, Item 5).
5. Use two people to align and install lower panel (Figure 2, Item 9) onto hydraulic control module frame (Figure 2, Item 6)
and secure with six new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 7) and bolts (Figure 2, Item 8).
6. Align and install door panel (Figure 2, Item 15) with lower panel (Figure 2, Item 9) and secure with two new self-locking
7. Install cotter pin (Figure 2, Item 11) onto door panel (Figure 2, Item 15). Close door panel and rotate hasp (Figure 2,
Item 13) to secure in place. Install cotter pin onto hasp.
Figure 2. Control Module Frame Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0098-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0099
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DEFLECTORS
INITIAL SETUP:
Locknut (8) Tractor/semitrailer uncoupled (WP 0013)
Lockwasher (8)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the deflectors.
0099-1
0099 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either curbside or streetside deflectors. Repeat this
1. Tag and disconnect electrical leads from clearance lights (WP 0050) on deflector (Figure 1, Item 3) and access cover
(Figure 1, Item 9).
2. Remove four capscrews (Figure 1, Item 7) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6) that secure access cover (Figure 1, Item 9)
to deflector (Figure 1, Item 3). Discard lockwashers.
3. Separate access cover (Figure 1, Item 9) from deflector (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove clearance lights from access cover
and deflector (WP 0050).
4. Remove cable clamps (connector clips on semitrailer with LED lights) and W2 wiring harness leads and remove grommets
(WP 0055 and WP 0060) from deflector (Figure 1, Item 3).
5. Remove reflectors (Figure 1, Item 8) from access cover (Figure 1, Item 9) and deflector (Figure 1, Item 3) (WP 0105).
6. Remove four locknuts (Figure 1, Item 1), washers (Figure 1, Item 5), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 4), and deflector (Figure 1,
Item 3) from platform weldment brackets (Figure 1, Item 2). Discard locknuts.
Figure 1. Deflector Removal.

END OF TASK
0099-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0099
INSTALLATION
1. Install reflectors (Figure 2, Item 8) on access cover (Figure 2, Item 9) and deflector (Figure 2, Item 3) (WP 0105).
2. Install wiring harness grommets, W2 wiring harness leads, and harness clamps (connector clips on semitrailer with LED
lights) (WP 0055 and WP 0060).
3. Install clearance lights (WP 0050).
4. Position deflector (Figure 2, Item 3) on platform weldment brackets (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure with four capscrews
(Figure 2, Item 4), washers (Figure 2, Item 5), and new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 1).
5. Position access cover (Figure 2, Item 9) on deflector (Figure 2, Item 3) and install four new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 6)
and capscrews (Figure 2, Item 7).
6. Reconnect electrical leads to clearance lights (WP 0050) mounted on access cover (Figure 2, Item 9) and deflector
(Figure 2, Item 3).
Figure 2. Deflector Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0099-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0100
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FRONT CLEARANCE LIGHT BRACKET (SOME SEMITRAILERS)
INITIAL SETUP:

Locknut (4) Tractor/semitrailer uncoupled (WP 0013)
Lockwasher (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the front clearance light bracket.
REMOVAL
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either curbside or streetside front clearance light brackets (some
semitrailers). Repeat this procedure as required to complete the necessary repairs.
1. Remove clearance/blackout lights (WP 0017) from bracket (Figure 1, Item 8).
2. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 3), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 4), cable clamp (Figure 1, Item 5), screw (Figure 1, Item 7), and
wiring harness (Figure 1, Item 6) from bracket (Figure 1, Item 8). Discard lockwasher.
3. Remove four locknuts (Figure 1, Item 2), capscrews (Figure 1, Item 10), washers (Figure 1, Item 9), and bracket (Figure 1,
Item 8) from platform weldment brackets (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard locknuts.
4. Remove reflector (WP 0105) from bracket (Figure 1, Item 8).
Figure 1. Front Clearance Light Bracket (Some Semitrailers) Removal.
END OF TASK
0100-1
0100 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install reflector (WP 0105) to bracket (Figure 2, Item 8).
2. Position bracket (Figure 2, Item 8) to platform weldment brackets (Figure 2, Item 1) and align bolt holes. Secure with four
capscrews (Figure 2, Item 10), washers (Figure 2, Item 9), and new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 2).
3. Install wiring harness (Figure 2, Item 6), screw (Figure 2, Item 7), cable clamp (Figure 2, Item 5), new lockwasher (Figure 2,
Item 4), and nut (Figure 2, Item 3) to bracket (Figure 2, Item 8).
4. Install clearance/blackout lights (WP 0017) to bracket (Figure 2, Item 8).
Figure 2. Front Clearance Light Bracket (Some Semitrailers) Installation.

END OF TASK
Reconnect intervehicular electrical cable and check clearance/blackout lights for proper operation (WP 0017).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0100-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0101
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STOWAGE COMPARTMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 28)
Materials/Parts Basic Issue Items (BII) removed from stowage box and
Lockwasher (4) inventoried (WP 0169)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the stowage compartment.
0101-1
0101 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Loosen four nuts (Figure 1, Item 5) and screws (Figure 1, Item 2) securing platform stowage compartment (Figure 1,
Item 4) to platform (Figure 1, Item 1).
2. Position hydraulic floor jack (Figure 1, Item 3) under stowage compartment (Figure 1, Item 4) and raise jack until jack
makes firm contact with bottom of stowage compartment.
3. Remove four nuts (Figure 1, Item 5), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6), and screws (Figure 1, Item 2) securing stowage
compartment to platform (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwashers.
4. Use two people to steady stowage compartment (Figure 1, Item 4) on pedestal of hydraulic floor jack (Figure 1, Item 3),
lower jack as necessary, and pull jack with stowage compartment from under platform (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Stowage Compartment Removal.

END OF TASK
0101-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0101
REPAIR
1. Remove self-locking nut (Figure 2, Item 1), lock tab (Figure 2, Item 2), spring washer (Figure 2, Item 3), flat washer
(Figure 2, Item 4), handle (Figure 2, Item 7), and retainer washer (Figure 2, Item 6) from door of stowage compartment
(Figure 2, Item 5). Discard self-locking nut.
2. Discard nut supplied with replacement handle assembly. Install retainer washer (Figure 2, Item 6) onto handle (Figure 2,
Item 7). Install handle into door of stowage compartment (Figure 2, Item 5) and secure flat washer (Figure 2, Item 4), spring
washer (Figure 2, Item 3), lock tab (Figure 2, Item 2), and self-locking nut (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Stowage Compartment Repair.

END OF TASK
0101-3
0101 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use two people to place stowage compartment (Figure 3, Item 4) on pedestal of hydraulic floor jack (Figure 3, Item 3)
and position under platform (Figure 3, Item 1). Raise stowage compartment with jack and position until compartment
mounting holes are aligned with mounting holes in platform.
2. Install four screws (Figure 3, Item 2), lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 6), and nuts (Figure 3, Item 5) to secure stowage
compartment (Figure 3, Item 4) to platform (Figure 3, Item 1). Lower floor jack (Figure 3, Item 3) and remove from
under platform.
Figure 3. Stowage Compartment Installation.

END OF TASK
Install Basic Issue Items (BII) (WP 0169).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0101-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0102
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DAVIT ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 28)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 1
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, item 31) Gooseneck supported, if uncoupled (WP 0007)
Lockwasher (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the davit assembly.
0102-1
0102 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• When on top of the gooseneck and removing or installing davit assembly, always hold onto guardrails with one
hand to avoid falling or injury to personnel may result.
tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip
over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
1. Unhook davit cable hook (Figure 1, Item 3) from stow position on davit base (Figure 1, Item 7) and operate davit winch
(Figure 1, Item 4) to raise hook up to clamp pulley (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Remove linch pin (Figure 1, Item 6) and pull hitch pin (Figure 1, Item 5) from davit base (Figure 1, Item 7) and davit
3. Lift davit assembly (Figure 1, Item 1) out of davit base (Figure 1, Item 7) from gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 8).
Figure 1. Davit Assembly Removal.

END OF TASK
0102-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0102
REPAIR
1. Remove two nuts (Figure 2, Item 14), bolts (Figure 2, Item 11), and clamp (Figure 2, Item 13) from cable (Figure 2,
Item 10). Separate clamp and remove hook (Figure 2, Item 12).
2. Remove linch pin (Figure 2, Item 5) from hitch pin (Figure 2, Item 6) and remove hitch pin from pulley clamp (Figure 2,
Item 4) and davit assembly (Figure 2, Item 1).
3. Remove pulley clamp (Figure 2, Item 4) from end of davit assembly (Figure 2, Item 1).
4. Remove nut (Figure 2, Item 2), lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 3), bolt (Figure 2, Item 7), washer (Figure 2, Item 8), and pulley
(Figure 2, Item 9) from pulley clamp (Figure 2, Item 4). Discard lockwasher.
5. Remove three screws (Figure 2, Item 19), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 18), washers (Figure 2, Item 17), and winch assembly
(Figure 2, Item 21) from davit assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard lockwashers.
6. Remove nut (Figure 2, Item 15), bolt (Figure 2, Item 20), cable clamp (Figure 2, Item 16), and cable (Figure 2, Item 10) from
drum of winch assembly (Figure 2, Item 21).
Figure 2. Davit Assembly Repair.
0102-3
0102 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
7. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent and wire brush as necessary. Remove corrosion
using wire brush and crocus cloth.
8. Inspect davit assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) and davit base (Figure 3, Item 11) for corrosion, broken welds, cracks, evidence of
warping, excessive dents, and peeling of painted surfaces. Repair or replace defective davit assembly.
9. Check winch assembly (Figure 3, Item 15) as follows:
a. Visually check that ratchet mechanism spring, not shown, is not deformed or broken.
b. Check that ratchet mechanism lever is not worn, bent, or broken. Ensure ratchet mechanism locks when winch
drum (Figure 3, Item 14) is not being turned. Ensure excess paint and other foreign materials have been cleaned
from ratchet gear (Figure 3, Item 13) and spring. Check that winch drum rotates without binding or slipping when
handcrank (Figure 3, Item 12) is turned. Replace winch assembly (Figure 3, Item 15) if improper operation is
observed or any parts are defective.
c. Check pulley clamp (Figure 3, Item 2) and ensure pulley (Figure 3, Item 7) rotates freely.
d. Check winch cable (Figure 3, Item 6) for evidence of wear, fraying, separation, and other forms of deterioration.
Replace cable or anchor if defective.
10. Check hitch pin assemblies (Figure 3, Item 5 and Item 8). Ensure linch pins (Figure 3, Item 3 and Item 10) are attached by
lanyards (Figure 3, Item 4 and Item 9) and can be locked to secure hitch pins.
0102-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0102
11. Pass end of cable (Figure 4, Item 10) through front of winch assembly (Figure 4, Item 24) over ratchet gearshaft (Figure 4,
Item 20) and around winch drum (Figure 4, Item 23). Stick end of cable through hole (Figure 4, Item 22) on side of
winch drum and secure cable to side of drum with cable clamp (Figure 4, Item 16), screw (Figure 4, Item 21), and nut
12. Position winch assembly (Figure 4, Item 24) on davit assembly (Figure 4, Item 1) bracket weldment (Figure 4, Item 25) and
install three washers (Figure 4, Item 17), lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 18), and screws (Figure 4, Item 19).
13. Pass other end of winch cable (Figure 4, Item 10) over pulley (Figure 4, Item 9) and position pulley in pulley clamp (Figure 4,
Item 4). Install bolt (Figure 4, Item 7) with washer (Figure 4, Item 8), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 3), and nut (Figure 4, Item 2)
on pulley clamp.
14. Install pulley clamp (Figure 4, Item 4) on end of davit assembly (Figure 4, Item 1) and insert hitch pin (Figure 4, Item 6)
through pulley clamp and davit assembly. Secure hitch pin with linch pin (Figure 4, Item 5).
15. Install hook (Figure 4, Item 12) in clamp (Figure 4, Item 13) and insert end of cable (Figure 4, Item 10) in clamp. Install
two bolts (Figure 4, Item 11) and nuts (Figure 4, Item 14) onto clamp.
16. Operate davit winch (Figure 4, Item 24) to raise hook (Figure 4, Item 12) up to pulley clamp (Figure 4, Item 4).

END OF TASK
0102-5
0102 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install davit assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) into davit base (Figure 5, Item 7) on gooseneck (Figure 5, Item 8).
2. Install hitch pin (Figure 5, Item 5) through davit base (Figure 5, Item 7) and davit assembly (Figure 5, Item 1). Secure with
linch pin (Figure 5, Item 6).
3. Operate winch assembly (Figure 5, Item 4) to lower hook (Figure 5, Item 3) from pulley clamp (Figure 5, Item 2). Attach
hook to stow position on davit base (Figure 5, Item 7).
Figure 5. Davit Assembly Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0102-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0103
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SNATCH BLOCK
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Cotter Pin (1)
Standard Army Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 28) Lockwasher (1)
Cotter Pin (1)
Materials/Parts
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) Personnel Required
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the snatch block.
0103-1
0103 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Snatch block weighs in excess of 150 lb (68 kg). Always use two personnel when
lifting snatch block or injury to personnel may result.
1. Unscrew clamp handle (Figure 1, Item 1) to unstow snatch block (Figure 1, Item 8) from platform (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Remove hitch pin (Figure 1, Item 3), nut (Figure 1, Item 4), bolt (Figure 1, Item 6), snatch block (Figure 1, Item 8), and
swivel and link assembly (Figure 1, Item 7) from platform (Figure 1, Item 2) weldment mounting block (Figure 1, Item 5).
3. Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 9) and U-bolt (Figure 1, Item 11) from platform (Figure 1, Item 2).
4. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 10) from U-bolt (Figure 1, Item 11) and remove U-bolt from eyebolt (Figure 1, Item 12).
NOTE
The threads on the end of the eyebolt have been deformed during installation to prevent clamp handle
from unscrewing from eyebolt unless excessive torque is applied.
5. Unscrew clamp handle (Figure 1, Item 1) from eyebolt (Figure 1, Item 12). Apply torque as required to unscrew handle of
end threads, which were deformed to retain clamp handle.
6. Remove lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 14) and clamp tab (Figure 1, Item 13) from eyebolt (Figure 1, Item 12).
Figure 1. Snatch Block Removal.

END OF TASK
0103-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0103
REPAIR
1. Remove linch pin (Figure 2, Item 2) from keeper pin assembly (Figure 2, Item 4) and pull keeper pin from upper block side
(Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Unfasten quick-disconnect links (Figure 2, Item 7) and remove keeper pin assembly (Figure 2, Item 4).
3. Remove cotter pin (Figure 2, Item 6) and extract headed pin (Figure 2, Item 5) from lower block side (Figure 2, Item 8).
4. Remove swivel and eye assembly (Figure 2, Item 3) from lower block side (Figure 2, Item 8).
Figure 2. Snatch Block Repair.
0103-3
0103 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Secure lower block side (Figure 3, Item 9) in a machinist's vise with vise jaw caps.
6. Use hammer to rotate upper block side (Figure 3, Item 3) counterclockwise to loosen and remove captive nut (Figure 3,
Item 2) and upper block side from pulley pin (Figure 3, Item 7).
7. Remove thrust washer (Figure 3, Item 4) and pulley (Figure 3, Item 5).
8. Rotate lower block side (Figure 3, Item 9) and secure pulley pin (Figure 3, Item 7) in vise.
9. Use hammer to rotate lower block side (Figure 3, Item 9) counterclockwise to loosen and remove capture nut (Figure 3,
Item 10).
10. Remove capture nut (Figure 3, Item 10), lower block side (Figure 3, Item 9), and thrust washer (Figure 3, Item 8) from
pulley pin (Figure 3, Item 7).
11. Remove pulley pin (Figure 3, Item 7) from vise and remove lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 1) from hole (Figure 3,
Item 6) in end of pulley pin.
0103-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0103
WARNING
13. Inspect upper and lower block sides (Figure 4, Item 1 and Item 5), swivel and link assembly (Figure 4, Item 2), and mounting
bracket weldment (Figure 4, Item 3) on platform for cracks, broken welds, or warping. Inspect keeper pin assembly
(Figure 4, Item 9) and quick-disconnect links (Figure 4, Item 8). Replace any defective parts.
14. Inspect snatch block stow clamp assembly (Figure 4, Item 4), handle, and attaching parts. Replace any missing or
defective parts.
15. Inspect snatch block pulley (Figure 4, Item 6) for any evidence of cracks or excessive wear. Check sleeve bushing (Figure 4,
Item 7) installed in hub of pulley. If bushing shows signs of wear or other forms of deterioration. Replace defective parts.
0103-5
0103 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Install grease fitting (Figure 5, Item 1) into hole (Figure 5, Item 6) in top of pulley pin (Figure 5, Item 7).
17. Place pulley pin (Figure 5, Item 7), orientated with lubrication fitting (Figure 5, Item 1) down, into a machinist's vise
with vise jaw caps.
18. Install thrust washer (Figure 5, Item 8) and lower block side (Figure 5, Item 9). Install capture nut (Figure 5, Item 10) and
rotate lower block side clockwise until captive nut and lower block side are tight.
19. Remove lower block side (Figure 5, Item 9) and pulley pin (Figure 5, Item 7) from vise and secure lower block side in vise
with pulley pin orientated upward. Install pulley (Figure 5, Item 5) and thrust washer (Figure 5, Item 4).
20. Place upper block side (Figure 5, Item 3) onto pulley pin (Figure 5, Item 7) and install capture nut (Figure 5, Item 2). Rotate
upper block side clockwise to tighten capture nut on pulley pin. Ensure pulley (Figure 5, Item 5) rotates freely on pulley pin.
0103-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0103
21. Position swivel eye assembly (Figure 6, Item 3) and install headed pin (Figure 6, Item 5) and cotter pin (Figure 6, Item 6)
to lower block side (Figure 6, Item 8). Install keeper pin (Figure 6, Item 4) and secure with linch pin (Figure 6, Item 2).
Attach quick-disconnect links (Figure 6, Item 7) to upper block side (Figure 6, Item 1). Secure keeper pin in place by
installing two quick-disconnect links and lynch pin with chain to keeper pin.

END OF TASK
0103-7
0103 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install clamp tab (Figure 7, Item 13), lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 14), and clamp handle (Figure 7, Item 1) onto eyebolt
(Figure 7, Item 12). Use hammer to peen over the end threads of eyebolt to prevent handle from spinning off eyebolt
when loosening clamp tab.
2. Pass one end of U-bolt (Figure 7, Item 11) through eye of eyebolt (Figure 7, Item 12). Install two nuts (Figure 7, Item 10)
onto U-bolt.
3. Pass U-bolt (Figure 7, Item 11) through mounting holes in platform (Figure 7, Item 2) and secure in place by installing two
WARNING
Snatch block weighs in excess of 150 lb (68 kg). Always use two personnel when lifting
snatch block or injury to personnel may result.
4. Position snatch block (Figure 7, Item 8) on platform (Figure 7, Item 2) and install bolt (Figure 7, Item 6) through mounting
bracket weldment (Figure 7, Item 5) and eye of swivel and link assembly (Figure 7, Item 7). Install nut (Figure 7, Item 4)
and hitch pin (Figure 7, Item 3) into link assembly and bracket weldment.
5. Restow snatch block (Figure 7, Item 8) on platform (Figure 7, Item 2) and align clamp tab (Figure 7, Item 13) over snatch
block. Secure by tightening clamp handle (Figure 7, Item 1).
Figure 7. Snatch Block Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0103-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0104
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CABLE GUIDE
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 28) Personnel Required
2
Materials/Parts
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position (WP 0007)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Platform lowered to lowest position (WP 0008)
Lockwasher (8)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the cable guide.
0104-1
0104 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• When on top of gooseneck and removing or installing cable guides, always hold onto the guardrail
with one hand to avoid falling or injury to personnel may result.
tires. Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on the gooseneck or trip over it.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment.
NOTE
Use the following procedure for either streetside or curbside cable guides. Repeat this
1. Remove two lubrication fittings (Figure 1, Item 4 and Item 8) from roller shaft (Figure 1, Item 9).
2. Remove one lubrication fitting (Figure 1, Item 4) from top of each roller shaft (Figure 1, Item 13 and Item 14).
3. Remove capscrew (Figure 1, Item 10) and locknut (Figure 1, Item 11) securing roller shaft (Figure 1, Item 9) to gooseneck
weldment bracket (Figure 1, Item 12). Discard locknut.
WARNING
The roller assemblies are heavy. Use extreme caution when handling roller assemblies or injury
0104-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0104
4. Remove roller shaft (Figure 1, Item 9) from roller assembly (Figure 1, Item 7) through bracket (Figure 1, Item 12).
5. Remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and plate clamp (Figure 1, Item 3). Remove roller
assembly (Figure 1, Item 15) from roller shaft (Figure 1, Item 14). Discard lockwashers.
6. Remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 2), and plate clamp (Figure 1, Item 5). Remove roller
assembly (Figure 1, Item 6) from roller shaft (Figure 1, Item 13). Discard lockwashers.
Figure 1. Cable Guide Removal.

END OF TASK
0104-3
0104 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Remove two bearings (Figure 2, Item 1) from roller assembly (Figure 2, Item 4).
2. Remove two bearings (Figure 2, Item 1) from each roller assembly (Figure 2, Item 2 and Item 3).
Figure 2. Bearing Removal.
WARNING
may result in injury to personnel
0104-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0104
4. Inspect rollers and roller shafts for surface deterioration, scratches, scoring, pitting, burrs, or gouging that could interfere
with mounting or mating components or bearings.
5. Inspect bracket weldments for broken welds, cracks, evidence of warping, and peeling of paint.
6. Check sleeve bearings for surface defects, indications that bearing may be rotating about shaft, evidence of overheating,
and signs of improper lubrication.
7. Check condition of plate clamps and all attaching hardware. Replace any defective or missing components and hardware.
8. Lubricate six bearings (Figure 3, Item 1) with grease before assembly.
NOTE
When bearing is seated correctly, approximately 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) of bearing will be exposed
from end of roller assembly.
9. Install two bearings (Figure 3, Item 1) in each roller assembly (Figure 3, Item 2 and Item 3).
10. Install two bearings (Figure 3, Item 1) in roller assembly (Figure 3, Item 4).
Figure 3. Bearing Installation.

END OF TASK
0104-5
0104 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
The roller assemblies are heavy. Use extreme caution when handling roller
assemblies or injury to personnel may result.
1. Install roller assembly (Figure 4, Item 15) onto roller shaft (Figure 4, Item 14) and install clamp plate (Figure 4, Item 3),
two lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 2), and capscrews (Figure 4, Item 1) onto roller shaft.
2. Install roller assembly (Figure 4, Item 6) onto roller shaft (Figure 4, Item 13) and install clamp plate (Figure 4, Item 5),
two lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 2), and capscrews (Figure 4, Item 1) onto roller shaft.
3. Position roller assembly (Figure 4, Item 7) in gooseneck weldment bracket (Figure 4, Item 12) and install roller shaft
(Figure 4, Item 9). Secure roller shaft to gooseneck weldment bracket with capscrew (Figure 4, Item 10) and locknut
4. Install grease fittings (Figure 4, Item 4 and Item 8) on all three roller shafts (Figure 4, Item 9, Item 13, and Item 14).
Figure 4. Cable Guide Installation.
END OF TASK
Lubricate cable guides (WP 0163).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0104-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0105
FIELD MAINTENANCE
REFLECTORS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts
Locknut (16)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the reflectors.
REMOVAL
1. To remove any one of four amber reflectors (Figure 1, Item 1), remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 5), screws (Figure 1,
Item 4), and reflector from platform weldment (Figure 1, Item 7). Discard locknuts.
2. To remove either of two red reflectors (Figure 1, Item 2) located at rear of platform on streetside or curbside deflectors
(Figure 1, Item 3), remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 5), screws (Figure 1, Item 4), and reflector from deflector. Discard
locknuts.
3. To remove either curbside or streetside rear red reflectors (Figure 1, Item 2), remove access cover (Figure 1, Item 6) from
deflector (Figure 1, Item 3) (WP 0099). Remove two locknuts (Figure 1, Item 5), screws (Figure 1, Item 4), and reflectors
from access cover. Discard locknuts.
Figure 1. Reflector Removal.

END OF TASK
0105-1
0105 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. To install any one of four amber reflectors (Figure 2, Item 1), position reflector in appropriate location on platform
weldment (Figure 2, Item 7), align mounting holes, and secure reflector with two screws (Figure 2, Item 4) and new
2. To install either of two red reflectors (Figure 2, Item 2) located at rear of platform on streetside or curbside deflectors
(Figure 2, Item 3), position reflector on deflector, align mounting holes, and secure reflector with two screws (Figure 2,
3. To install either curbside or streetside rear red reflector assemblies (Figure 2, Item 2), position reflector on access cover
(Figure 2, Item 6), align mounting holes, and secure with two screws (Figure 2, Item 4) and new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 5).
Assemble access cover to deflector (Figure 2, Item 3) (WP 0099).
Figure 2. Reflector Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0105-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DATA PLATES, DECALS, AND STENCILS
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 28) Locknut (10)
Locknut (4)
Materials/Parts
Washer (1)
Alcohol, Technical (WP 0170, Item 1)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Personnel Required
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) 1
Tape, Double-Sided (WP 0170, Item 34)
Rivet (4) Equipment Conditions
Rivet (4) Tractor/semitrailer uncoupled (WP 0013)
Rivet (4) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Rivet (5) (WP 0007)
Rivet (2) Platform adjusted to 43 in. height (109 cm) (WP 0008)
Locknut (2)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the data plates, decals, and stencils for the
HET semitrailer.
0106-1
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
• Compressed air used for cleaning/drying may create airborne particles that may injure the eyes.
Always wear eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa).
• Drilling operations are hazardous to the eyes, always wear eye protection when drilling.
1. To remove decal (Figure 1, Item 2), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out four rivets (Figure 1, Item 1) and remove decal.
2. To remove decal (Figure 1, Item 4), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out four rivets (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove decal.
3. To remove decal (Figure 1, Item 5), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out four rivets (Figure 1, Item 6). Remove four washers
(Figure 1, Item 7) and decal.
4. To remove decal (Figure 1, Item 10), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out four rivets (Figure 1, Item 8). Remove four washers
(Figure 1, Item 9) and decal.
5. To remove identification marker (Figure 1, Item 13), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out four rivets (Figure 1, Item 11).
Remove four washers (Figure 1, Item 12) and marker.
0106-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
Figure 1. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils Removal.
0106-3
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. To remove identification plate (Figure 2, Item 2), use 3/16 in. drill and drill out two rivets (Figure 2, Item 1) and
remove plate.
7. To remove identification plate (Figure 2, Item 3), remove two locknuts (Figure 2, Item 4) and remove plate. Discard
locknuts.
8. To remove decal (Figure 2, Item 5), remove four locknuts (Figure 2, Item 6) and remove decal. Discard locknuts.
9. To remove identification plate (Figure 2, Item 7), remove four locknuts (Figure 2, Item 8) and remove plate. Discard
locknuts.
0106-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
10. To remove any of five identification markers (Figure 3, Item 4), remove two locknuts (Figure 3, Item 5) and remove
marker. Discard locknuts.
11. To remove decal (Figure 3, Item 1 or Item 3), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out four rivets (Figure 3, Item 2) and remove decal.
0106-5
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. To remove identification plate (Figure 4, Item 1), remove four locknuts (Figure 4, Item 2) and remove plate. Discard
locknuts.
0106-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
13. Decal (Figure 5, Item 1 or Item 2) is removed during disassembly of APU control box (WP 0137).
14. To remove decal (Figure 5, Item 4), use 5/32 in. drill and drill out two rivets (Figure 5, Item 3) and remove decal.
0106-7
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
15. Use scraper to carefully scrape decals and stencils as required. Decals (Figure 6, Item 1 and Item 2) are installed with
double-sided tape. Ensure that tape residue is removed completely.
0106-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
0106-9
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
0106-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
16. Clean surfaces with alcohol to remove glue and residue.
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
Always wear eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa).
17. Use dry cleaning solvent to clean corrosion from all surfaces on which stencil, decal, or data plate will be installed.
18. Touch up all bare surfaces with primer paint.
END OF TASK
0106-11
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use stencil set and paint to apply or touch up stencils as necessary.
2. Install decals to trailer as required.
Figure 9. Data Plates, Decals, and Stencils Installation.
0106-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
0106-13
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Install decals (Figure 11, Item 1 and Item 2) using double-sided tape.
4. Clean data plate with alcohol and apply black paint to areas on data plate to be stenciled. Use stencil set to apply markings
as required to data plate.
0106-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
5. To install decal (Figure 12, Item 1 or Item 2), refer toWP 0137.
6. To install decal (Figure 12, Item 4), position in APU control box cover and, using hand riveter, secure with two rivets
0106-15
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
7. To install identification plate (Figure 13, Item 1), position plate on used weld studs and secure with four locknuts (Figure
0106-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
8. To install decal (Figure 14, Item 1 or Item 3), position decal on ramp and, using hand riveter, secure with four rivets
9. To install any of five identification markers (Figure 14, Item 4), position marker on weld studs and secure with two
0106-17
0106 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. To install identification plate (Figure 15, Item 7), position plate on weld studs and secure with four locknuts (Figure
15, Item 8).
11. To install decal (Figure 15, Item 5), position decal on weld studs and secure with four locknuts (Figure 15, Item 6).
12. To install identification plate (Figure 15, Item 3), position plate on weld studs and secure with two locknuts (Figure 15,
Item 4).
13. To install identification plate (Figure 15, Item 2), position plate on gooseneck and, using hand riveter, secure with two
rivets (Figure 15, Item 1).
0106-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0106
14. To install identification marker (Figure 16, Item 13), position marker on inside of hydraulic control module access cover
and, using hand riveter, secure with four washers (Figure 16, Item 12) and four rivets (Figure 16, Item 11).
15. To install decal (Figure 16, Item 10), position decal on inside of hydraulic control module access cover and, using hand
riveter, secure with four washers (Figure 16, Item 9) and four rivets (Figure 16, Item 8).
16. To install decal (Figure 16, Item 4), position decal inside hydraulic control module and, using hand riveter, secure with
four rivets (Figure 16, Item 3).
17. To install decal (Figure 16, Item 5), position decal on inside of hydraulic control module and, using hand riveter, secure
with four washers (Figure 16, Item 7) and rivets (Figure 16, Item 6).
18. To install decal (Figure 16, Item 2), position decal inside hydraulic control module and, using hand riveter, secure with
four rivets (Figure 16, Item 1).

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0106-19/20 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0107
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC PUMP
INITIAL SETUP:
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Gooseneck supported at 64 in. (162.6 cm) height, if
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) uncoupled (WP 0007)
Preformed Packing (2) Battery negative (black) terminal disconnected from
Lockwasher (2) battery (WP 0053)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the hydraulic pump.
0107-1
0107 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time for system to cool before
performing maintenance or injury to personnel may result.
• Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly or injury to personnel may result.
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Avoid prolonged exposure to skin and wear
long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face shield. If hydraulic fluid gets into the eyes, flush them
immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on skin, wash thoroughly
with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking.
1. Close hydraulic tank oil valve (WP 0004).
CAUTION
• All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent dirt, moisture,
• Both hydraulic lines must be capped immediately and secured at tank fluid level height or
higher to prevent hydraulic fluid from siphoning from system.
2. Use drain pan and a 1 1/4 in. combination wrench to tag and disconnect two hydraulic lines (Figure 1, Item 1) from hydraulic
pump (Figure 1, Item 2). Install caps/plugs into hydraulic lines.
3. Use rope or tiewraps to secure ends of both hydraulic lines (Figure 1, Item 1) at pump (Figure 1, Item 2) height or higher.
4. Remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 5), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 6), and hydraulic pump (Figure 1, Item 2) from
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (Figure 1, Item 7). Discard lockwashers.
5. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 1, Item 3) from pump (Figure 1, Item 2).
6. Remove preformed packings (Figure 1, Item 4) from two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 1, Item 3). Install caps/plugs
into openings and discard two preformed packings.
7. Inspect hydraulic pump for cracked housing, bent rotor shaft, broken or marred spline on rotor shaft, or seal leaks in area
of rotor shaft. Replace hydraulic pump if any defects are found.
0107-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0107
Figure 1. Hydraulic Pump Removal.

END OF TASK
0107-3
0107 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate two new preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 4) with petroleum jelly. Remove caps/plugs installed and install two
new preformed packings onto two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 3).
2. Remove caps/plugs on two hydraulic hoses and install two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 3) and two
hydraulic lines (Figure 2, Item 1) to hydraulic pump (Figure 2, Item 2).
3. Align and install hydraulic pump (Figure 2, Item 2) onto APU (Figure 2, Item 7).
4. Secure hydraulic pump (Figure 2, Item 2) to APU (Figure 2, Item 7) with two lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 6) and capscrews
(Figure 2, Item 5)
5. Open hydraulic tank oil valve (WP 0004).
Figure 2. Hydraulic Pump Installation.

END OF TASK
Reconnect battery negative (black) cable to battery (WP 0053).
Perform hydraulic system check/fill (WP 0039).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0107-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0108
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FOUR-WAY DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE BANK
INITIAL SETUP:
Handle, Ext, SPNSN ISOL Valve (WP 0168, Item 1) Lockwasher (6)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Valve Section Repair Kit (6)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Suspension isolation valves at four corners of platform
Lockwasher (3) closed, handles facing outward (WP 0004)
Preformed Packing (10) Hydraulic tank drained below system return line (WP 0040)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the four-way directional control
valve bank.
0108-1
0108 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance.
NOTE
When performing maintenance on hydraulic tubes and fittings, it is important to tag both ends of a tube
or hose and tag all associated fittings with item numbers shown on the illustration. This method of
tagging will ease installation.
0108-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0108
1. Ensure hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 2) door panel (Figure 1, Item 6) is lowered (WP 0004).
Item 5) from hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 2). Carefully remove lower panel, with door panel (Figure 1,
Item 6) attached, out from under semitrailer and place on platform (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard six lockwashers.
Figure 1. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Removal.
0108-3
0108 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Position drain pan under hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 3). Tag and disconnect four hydraulic tubes (Figure 2,
Item 21, Item 28, Item 27, and Item 29) from straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) on four-way directional
control valve (Figure 2, Item 26) and suspension manifold (Figure 2, Item 25). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
4. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 17 and Item 12) from straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 2, Item 2)
on four-way directional control valve (Figure 2, Item 26) and from steering manifold (Figure 2, Item 22). Install
caps/plugs into tube openings.
5. Tag and disconnect four hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 18, Item 19, Item 20, and Item 30) from four straight pipe-to-tube
adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) on four-way directional control valve (Figure 2, Item 26) and suspension manifold (Figure 2,
Item 25). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
6. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 2, Item 16) from tube tee (Figure 2, Item 14) and from hydraulic filter (Figure 2,
Item 5). Use two wrenches to tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 2, Item 15) from tube tee on four-way directional
control valve (Figure 2, Item 26) and from pressure gauge (Figure 2, Item 4). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
7. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 11 and Item 8) from tube-to-boss tee (Figure 2, Item 7) on four-way
directional control valve (Figure 2, Item 26) and from steering manifold (Figure 2, Item 22). Install caps/plugs into
tube openings.
8. Use one person to support four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 2, Item 26); use second person to remove three
capscrews (Figure 2, Item 23), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 24), and four-way directional control valve bank from
hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 3). Discard lockwashers.
9. Use two people to move four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 2, Item 26) out from under hydraulic control
module (Figure 2, Item 3) and set on top of platform.
10. Remove ten straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) and preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 1) from four-way
directional control valve bank (Figure 2, Item 26). Discard preformed packings. Install caps/plugs onto fittings and
into valve bank openings.
11. Remove tube tee (Figure 2, Item 12), pipe adapter (Figure 2, Item 13), and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 6) from
four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 2, Item 26). Discard preformed packing. Install caps/plugs onto fitting and
into valve bank opening.
12. Use 1 1/4 in. wrench to remove tube coupling nut (Figure 2, Item 10), tube reducer (Figure 2, Item 9), tube-to-boss tee
(Figure 2, Item 15), and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 6) from four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 2,
Item 26). Discard preformed packing. Install caps/plugs onto fittings and into valve bank openings.
13. Remove all five valve handles from four-way directional control valve bank (WP 0112).
0108-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0108
Figure 2. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Removal.
END OF TASK
0108-5
0108 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
CAUTION
A clean area must be maintained during disassembly of the four-way directional control valve
bank or contaminates may enter one of the valve sections and cause premature failure of the
valve bank or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
The stud assembly has a nut and lockwasher on each end. Use a tool at each end to hold one nut and
loosen the other nut during removal of stud assembly.
1. Remove three nuts (Figure 3, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 2), and stud assemblies (Figure 3, Item 3) from valve
bank (Figure 3, Item 4). Discard all lockwashers from stud assemblies.
Figure 3. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Removal/Repair.
0108-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0108
2. Use suitable prying device to carefully pry valve inlet (Figure 4, Item 1) from linear directional control valve (Figure 4,
Item 4). Remove preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 2, Item 3, Item 15, and Item 16) from valve inlet. Discard
preformed packings.
3. Use suitable prying device to carefully pry linear directional control valve (Figure 4, Item 4) from linear directional control
valve (Figure 4, Item 8). Remove preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 6, Item 7, Item 13, and Item 14) and shim (Figure 4,
Item 5) from between linear directional control valves. Discard preformed packings and shim.
4. Repeat step 3 for disassembly/removal of all preformed packings/shims between linear directional control valves (Figure
4, Item 8, Item 9, Item 10, and Item 11) and valve outlet (Figure 4, Item 12). Remove and discard all preformed
packings and shims.
0108-7
0108 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Cleaning compound solvent is used to clean parts and is potentially dangerous to personnel. Extinguish all
smoking materials and do not allow sparks or open flame near the work area. Use skin and eye protection
and work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
5. Clean all tubes, fittings, attaching hardware, linear directional control valves, valve inlet, and valve outlet sections in
degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent.
6. Inspect linear directional control valves, valve inlet, and valve outlet for pitting, cracks, and wear. If defective, replace
valve sections as required.
WARNING
Compressed air used for cleaning/drying may create airborne particles that may injure the eyes. Always
wear eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa). Failure to follow this warning may result
7. Inspect all valve ports and openings for foreign objects, dirt, and clogged passageways. Use compressed air to clear
clogged passageways.
8. Inspect all hydraulic tubes removed for kinks, pin hole leaks, pitted and split flares, and clogged passageways. Use
compressed air to clear clogged passageways. Replace any defective tubes.
9. Pour clean hydraulic fluid onto linear directional control valves (Figure 5, Item 4, Item 8, Item 9, Item 10, and Item 11),
valve inlet (Figure 5, Item 1), and valve outlet (Figure 5, Item 12) to flush out contaminants.
10. Replace all parts found defective and replace all preformed packings (Figure 5, Item 2, Item 3, Item 6, Item 7, Item 13,
Item 14, Item 15, and Item 16) and shims (Figure 5, Item 5) using respective repair kits.
11. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packings (Figure 5, Item 2, Item 3, Item 15, and Item 16). Install new preformed
packings onto valve inlet (Figure 5, Item 1).
CAUTION
One person must be used to hold the assembled pieces together during the entire assembly process until the
stud assembly can be installed, or misalignment or damage to new preformed packings may result.
12. Assemble valve inlet (Figure 5, Item 1) to linear directional control valve (Figure 5, Item 4). Once valve inlet and control
valve are assembled, use one person to hold pieces together.
13. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packings (Figure 5, Item 6, Item 7, Item 13, and Item 14) and shim (Figure 5,
Item 5). Install new preformed packings and shim onto linear directional control valve (Figure 5, Item 4).
14. Assemble linear directional control valve (Figure 5, Item 4) to linear directional control valve (Figure 5, Item 8). Once
linear directional control valve and linear directional control valve are assembled, use one person to hold all pieces together.
15. Repeat steps 13 and 14 as required to place all preformed packings (Figure 5, Item 6, Item 7, Item 13, and Item 14) and
shim (Figure 5, Item 5) between linear directional control valves (Figure 5, Item 9, Item 10, and Item 11) and valve
outlet (Figure 5, Item 12).
0108-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0108

16. Align and install three stud assemblies (Figure 6, Item 3) through four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 6,
Item 4) and secure with three nuts (Figure 6, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 2). Use torque wrench to torque
three nuts to 19 to 21 lb-ft (25.8 to 28.4 Nm).
END OF TASK
0108-9
0108 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Align and install all five valve handles to bank valve (WP 0112).
2. Apply petroleum jelly to preformed packing (Figure 7, Item 6). Remove caps/plugs installed and install preformed
packing), tube-to-boss (Figure 7, Item 15), tube reducer (Figure 7, Item 9), and tube coupling nut (Figure 7, Item 10) onto
four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26).
3. Apply petroleum jelly to preformed packing (Figure 7, Item 6). Remove caps/plugs installed and install preformed
packing, pipe adapter (Figure 7, Item 13), and tube tee (Figure 7, Item 12) onto four-way directional control valve
bank (Figure 7, Item 26).
4. Apply petroleum jelly to ten preformed packings (Figure 7, Item 1). Remove caps/plugs installed and install ten preformed
packings and straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 7, Item 2) onto four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7,
Item 26).
5. Use one person to align and support four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26) with hydraulic control
module frame (Figure 7, Item 3).
6. Use one person to hold the four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26) in place; use second person to
install three capscrews (Figure 7, Item 23) and lockwashers (Figure 7, Item 24).
7. Remove caps/plugs installed in tubes (Figure 7, Item 11 and Item 8). Install two hydraulic tubes onto tube-to-boss tee
(Figure 7, Item 7) on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26) and steering manifold (Figure 7, Item 22).
8. Remove caps/plugs installed in tubes (Figure 7, Item 15 and Item 16). Use two wrenches to install hydraulic tube onto tube
tee (Figure 7, Item 14) on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26) and pressure gauge (Figure 7, Item 4).
Install hydraulic tube onto tube tee on four-way directional control valve bank and hydraulic filter (Figure 7, Item 5).
9. Remove caps/plugs installed in tubes (Figure 7, Item 30, Item 20, Item 19, and Item 18). Install four hydraulic tubes
onto straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 7, Item 2) on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26)
and suspension manifold (Figure 7, Item 25).
10. Remove caps/plugs installed in tubes (Figure 7, Item 12 and Item 17). Install two hydraulic tubes onto two straight
pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 7, Item 2) on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26) and steering
manifold (Figure 7, Item 22).
11. Remove caps/plugs installed in tubes (Figure 7, Item 29, Item 27, Item 28, and Item 21). Install four hydraulic tubes
onto straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 7, Item 2) on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 7, Item 26)
and suspension manifold (Figure 7, Item 25).
0108-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0108
Figure 7. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Installation.
0108-11
0108 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. Use two people to align and install lower panel (Figure 8, Item 5), with door panel (Figure 8, Item 6) attached, onto
hydraulic control module (Figure 8, Item 2). Secure lower panel in place by installing six lockwashers (Figure 8, Item 3)
and capscrews (Figure 8, Item 4) and attach onto underside of semitrailer and platform (Figure 8, Item 1).
Figure 8. Four-Way Directional Control Valve Bank Installation.
END OF TASK
Perform hydraulic system check/fill and refill hydraulic tank (WP 0039).
Operate all hydraulic controls on four-way directional control valve bank through several cycles and check for proper
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0108-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0109
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEERING CONTROL MANIFOLD
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Check Valve Repair Kit (8)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Check Valve Repair Kit (4)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Preformed Packing (4) Hydraulic tank drained below system return line (WP 0040)
Preformed Packing (13) Bottom cover of hydraulic control module removed and
Check Valve Repair Kit (4) jumper wires to pressure switches removed (WP 0057)
Check Valve Repair Kit (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the steering control manifold.
0109-1
0109 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance or injury to personnel may result.
thoroughly prior to eating or smoking. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
NOTE
When performing maintenance on hydraulic tubes and ttings, it is important to tag both ends of a tube
or hose and tag all associated ttings with item numbers shown on the illustration. This method of
tagging will ease installation.
1. Use drain pan for drainage. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 21 and Item 20) from two
tube-to-boss tees (Figure 1, Item 19) on steering manifold (Figure 1, Item 26) on hydraulic control module (Figure 1,
2. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 15 and Item 17) from two tube tees (Figure 1, Item 12) on steering
manifold (Figure 1, Item 26). Install caps/plugs into openings.
3. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 1, Item 4) from straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 3) on steering
control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26) and four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 1, Item 1). Install caps/plugs
into openings.
4. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 11 and Item 14) from tube tees (Figure 1, Item 12) on steering
control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26) and four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 1, Item 1). Install caps/plugs
into openings.
5. Use one person to support steering control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26); use second person to remove four capscrews
(Figure 1, Item 24), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 25), and steering control manifold from hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 1, Item 5). Set steering control manifold onto platform. Discard lockwashers.
6. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 7 and Item 9) from two tube tees (Figure 1, Item 19), tube-to-boss
elbow (Figure 1, Item 6), and tube elbow (Figure 1, Item 8) on steering control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26). Install
7. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 10 and Item 13) from two tube tees (Figure 1, Item 12) and straight
pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 1, Item 3) on steering control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26). Install caps/plugs into openings.
8. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 18 and Item 16) from two tube tees (Figure 1, Item 12) and straight
pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 1, Item 3) on steering control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26). Install caps/plugs into openings.
9. Tag and disconnect four pressure switches (Figure 1, Item 22) and preformed packings (Figure 1, Item 23) from steering
control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26). Discard preformed packings. Install caps/plugs into openings.
10. Unscrew and remove four tube tees (Figure 1, Item 12) and tube elbow (Figure 1, Item 8) from five straight pipe-to-tube
adapters (Figure 1, Item 3). Install caps/plugs onto fittings.
11. Unscrew and remove two tube-to-boss tees (Figure 1, Item 19) and preformed packings (Figure 1, Item 2) from steering
control manifold (Figure 1, Item 26). Discard preformed packings and install caps/plugs onto tube-to-boss tees.
0109-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0109
12. Tag and disconnect ten straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 1, Item 3) and remove ten preformed packings (Figure 1,
Item 2). Tag and remove tube-to-boss elbow (Figure 1, Item 6) and preformed packing. Discard preformed packings and
install caps/plugs into openings and onto fittings.
Figure 1. Steering Control Manifold Removal.

END OF TASK
0109-3
0109 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
CAUTION
A clean area must be maintained during disassembly of the steering control manifold or
contaminates may enter one of the cartridges and cause premature failure of the manifold.
1. Remove four CXDA XAN check valves (Figure 2, Item 7), as required, from steering control manifold (Figure 2, Item 2).
Install caps/plugs into all openings.
2. Disassemble CXDA XAN check valves (Figure 2, Item 7) as follows:
a. Remove backup ring (Figure 2, Item 4), preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 3), backup ring (Figure 2, Item 5), and
preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 6) from CXDA XAN check valve (Figure 2, Item 7). Discard preformed packings
and backup rings.
b. Repeat step 2a as required for disassembly of remaining CXDA XAN check valves (Figure 2, Item 7).
3. Remove RPEC LCN safety relief valve (Figure 2, Item 12) from steering control manifold (Figure 2, Item 2). Install
4. Disassemble RPEC LCN safety relief valve (Figure 2, Item 12) by removing preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 8), backup
ring (Figure 2, Item 9), backup ring (Figure 2, Item 10), and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 11) from RPEC LCN
safety relief valve. Discard preformed packings and backup rings.
5. Remove eight check valves (Figure 2, Item 13), as required, from steering control manifold (Figure 2, Item 2). Install
6. Disassemble check valve (Figure 2, Item 13) as follows:
a. Remove backup ring (Figure 2, Item 17), preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 16), backup ring (Figure 2, Item 15),
and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 14) from check valve (Figure 2, Item 13). Discard preformed packings
and backup rings.
b. Repeat step 6a, as required, for disassembly of remaining check valves (Figure 2, Item 13).
7. Remove four CKCB XCN check valves (Figure 2, Item 1), as required, from steering control manifold (Figure 2, Item 2).
8. Disassemble CKCB XCN check valve (Figure 2, Item 1) as follows:
a. Remove preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 18), backup rings (Figure 2, Item 19 and Item 20), two preformed packings
(Figure 2, Item 21), and backup ring (Figure 2, Item 22) from CKCB XCN check valve (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard
preformed packings and backup rings.
b. Repeat step 8a, as required, for disassembly of remaining CKCB XCN check valves (Figure 2, Item 1).
WARNING
smoking materials and do not allow sparks or open flame near the work area. Use skin and eye protection
and work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
9. Clean all tubes, fittings, attaching hardware, steering control manifold, safety relief valve, and all check valves in degreaser
tank with cleaning compound solvent.
0109-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0109
10. Inspect safety relief valve and all check valves for pitting, cracks, and wear. If defective, replace parts as required.
WARNING
Compressed air used for cleaning/drying may create airborne particles that may injure the eyes. Always wear
eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa) or injury to personnel may result.
11. Inspect all ports and openings in steering control manifold, safety relief valve, and all check valves for foreign objects, dirt,
and clogged passageways. Use compressed air to clear clogged passageways.
13. Pour clean hydraulic fluid into steering control manifold, safety relieve valve, and all check valves to flush out
contaminants.
14. Replace all parts found defective and replace all preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 3, Item 6, Item 8, Item 11, Item 14,
Item 16, Item 18, and Item 21) and backup rings (Figure 2, Item 4, Item 9, Item 10, Item 15, Item 17, Item 19, Item
20, and Item 22) using respective repair kits.
Figure 2. Steering Control Manifold Repair.
0109-5
0109 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
As the safety relief valve and check valves are assembled, the arrangement of preformed packings and
backup rings is extremely important. If the preformed packing and backup rings are improperly installed,
internal leakage or premature equipment failure may result. Use the illustration shown in Figure 3 for
proper arrangement of parts.
15. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 21 and Item 18) and new backup rings (Figure 3,
16. Install new backup ring (Figure 3, Item 22), two preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 21), backup rings (Figure 3, Item 20
and Item 19), and preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 18) onto CKCB XCN check valve (Figure 3, Item 1).
17. Repeat steps 15 and 16, as required, for all CKCB XCN check valves (Figure 3, Item 1) disassembled.
18. Remove caps/plugs installed into steering control manifold (Figure 3, Item 2) and install four CKCB XCN check valves
(Figure 3, Item 1), as required, into steering control manifold.
19. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 14 and Figure 3, Item 16) and new backup rings
20. Install new preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 14), backup ring (Figure 3, Item 15), preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 16),
and backup ring (Figure 3, Item 17) onto check valve (Figure 3, Item 13).
21. Repeat steps 19 and 20, as required, for all check valves (Figure 3, Item 13) disassembled.
22. Remove caps/plugs installed into steering control manifold (Figure 3, Item 2) and install eight check valves (Figure 3,
Item 13), as required, into steering control manifold.
Item 10 and Item 9).
24. Install preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 11), backup ring (Figure 3, Item 10), backup ring (Figure 3, Item 9), and
preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 8) onto RPEC LCN safety relief valve (Figure 3, Item 12).
25. Remove caps/plugs installed into steering control manifold (Figure 3, Item 2) and install RPEC LCN safety relief valve
(Figure 3, Item 12) into steering control manifold.
26. Apply petroleum jelly to preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 6 and Item 4) and backup rings (Figure 3, Item 5 and Item 3).
27. Install preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 6), backup ring (Figure 3, Item 5), preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 4), and
backup ring (Figure 3, Item 3) onto CXDA XAN check valve (Figure 3, Item 7).
0109-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0109
28. Repeat steps 26 and 27, as required, for all CXDA XAN check valves (Figure 3, Item 7) disassembled.
29. Remove caps/plugs installed into steering control manifold (Figure 3, Item 2) and install four CXDA XAN check valves
(Figure 3, Item 7), as required, into steering control manifold.
Figure 3. Steering Control Manifold Repair.

END OF TASK
0109-7
0109 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Apply petroleum jelly to thirteen new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 2) and four new preformed packings (Figure 4,
Item 23).
2. Remove caps/plugs installed into fitting ports on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) and on tube-to-boss elbow
(Figure 4, Item 6). Install new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 2) onto tube-to-boss elbow. Install tube-to-boss elbow
into steering control manifold.
3. Remove caps/plugs installed into fitting ports on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) and onto straight
pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 3). Install ten new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 2) onto straight pipe-to-tube
adapters. Install ten straight pipe-to-tube adapters into place on steering control manifold.
4. Remove caps/plugs installed into fitting ports on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) and on tube-to-boss tees
(Figure 4, Item 19). Install two new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 2) onto tube-to-boss tees. Install two tube-to-boss
tees into steering control manifold.
5. Remove caps/plugs installed onto four tube tees (Figure 4, Item 12) and tube elbow (Figure 4, Item 8). Install four tube tees
and tube elbow onto five straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 3) on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26).
6. Remove caps/plugs installed into fitting ports on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) and four pressure switches
(Figure 4, Item 22). Install four new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 23) onto four pressure switches and install four
pressure switches into steering control manifold.
7. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 16 and Item 18). Install two hydraulic tubes between
two tube tees (Figure 4, Item 12) and straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 3).
8. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 10 and Item 13). Install two hydraulic tubes between
two tube tees (Figure 4, Item 12) and straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 3).
9. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 7 and Item 9). Install two hydraulic tubes between two
tube tees (Figure 4, Item 19) and tube elbow (Figure 4, Item 8) and tube-to-boss elbow (Figure 4, Item 6).
10. Use one person to align and support steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) with hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 4, Item 5).
11. With first person holding steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) in place, use second person to install three
capscrews (Figure 4, Item 24) and lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 25).
12. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 11 and Item 14). Install two hydraulic tubes onto
two tube tees (Figure 4, Item 12) on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) and four-way directional control valve
bank (Figure 4, Item 1).
13. Remove caps/plugs installed in hydraulic tube (Figure 4, Item 4). Install hydraulic tube onto straight pipe-to-tube
adapter (Figure 4, Item 3) on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26) and four-way directional control valve bank
(Figure 4, Item 1).
14. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 15 and Item 17). Connect two hydraulic tubes onto
two tube tees (Figure 4, Item 12) on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26).
15. Remove caps/plugs installed on two hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 20 and Item 21). Connect two hydraulic tubes onto
two tube-to-boss tees (Figure 4, Item 19) on steering control manifold (Figure 4, Item 26).
0109-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0109
Figure 4. Steering Control Manifold Installation.

END OF TASK
0109-9
0109 TM 9-2330-381-13
Manually adjust steering (WP 0007) and check for proper operation.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0109-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0110
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SUSPENSION CONTROL MANIFOLD
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Cartridge Repair Kit (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Cartridge Repair Kit (4)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Preformed Packing (20) Hydraulic tank drained below system return line
Cartridge Repair Kit (5) (WP 0040)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the suspension control manifold.
0110-1
0110 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking.)DLOXUHWRIROORZWKLVZDUQLQJ
PD\UHVXOWLQLQMXU\WRSHUVRQQHO
NOTE
When performing maintenance on hydraulic tubes and fittings, it is important to tag both
ends of a tube or hose and tag all associated fittings with item numbers shown on the
illustration. This method of tagging will ease installation.
0110-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0110
Figure 1. Suspension Control Manifold Removal.
0110-3
0110 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Remove clamp block and handle of suspension shutoff valve from hydraulic control module (WP 0115).
4. Use drain pan for drainage. Tag and disconnect four hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 19, Item 18, Item 17, and Item 16)
from four straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) on suspension control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26) and
four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 2, Item 27). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
5. Tag and disconnect five hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 20, Item 21, Item 22, Item 24, and Item 25) from five straight
pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) on suspension control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26) and suspension shutoff valve
(Figure 2, Item 23). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
6. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 2, Item 1) from straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 2, Item 2) on suspension
control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26) and bulkhead fitting at back of control module frame (Figure 2, Item 12). Install
caps/plugs into tube.
7. Tag and disconnect four hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 15, Item 14, Item 10, and Item 8) from four straight pipe-to-tube
adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) on suspension control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26) and four-way directional control valve bank
(Figure 2, Item 27). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
8. Use two wrenches to tag and disconnect three hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 7, Item 9, and Item 11) from three straight
pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) on suspension control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26) and fittings on three pressure
gauges (Figure 2, Item 13). Install caps/plugs into tubes and onto gauge fittings.
9. Use one person to support suspension control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26); use second person to remove three capscrews
(Figure 2, Item 4), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 5), and suspension control manifold from hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 2, Item 12). Set suspension control manifold on platform. Discard lockwashers.
10. Remove three tube fitting plugs (Figure 2, Item 6) and three preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 3). Discard preformed
packings and install caps/plugs into openings.
11. Remove seventeen straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2) and preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 3) from
suspension control manifold (Figure 2, Item 26). Discard preformed packings and install caps/plugs into manifold
openings and onto fittings.
0110-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0110
Figure 2. Suspension Control Manifold Removal.

END OF TASK
0110-5
0110 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
CAUTION
A clean area must be maintained during disassembly of the suspension control manifold or
contaminates may enter one of the cartridges and cause premature failure of the manifold.
1. Remove five CBCG LCN cartridge valves (Figure 3, Item 1) from suspension control manifold (Figure 3, Item 14).
2. Disassemble CBCG LCN cartridge valve (Figure 3, Item 1) as follows:
a. Remove preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 15), backup rings (Figure 3, Item 16 and Item 17), preformed packings
(Figure 3, Item 18 and Item 19), and backup ring (Figure 3, Item 20). Discard preformed packings and backup rings.
b. Repeat step 2a as required for disassembly of remaining CBCG LCN cartridge valves (Figure 3, Item 1).
3. Remove CBCA LAN cartridge valve (Figure 3, Item 2) from suspension control manifold (Figure 3, Item 14). Install
caps/plugs into all openings.
4. Disassemble CBCA LAN cartridge valve (Figure 3, Item 2) by removing preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 8), backup
rings (Figure 3, Item 7 and Item 6), preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 5 and Item 4), and backup ring (Figure 3, Item 3).
Discard preformed packings and backup rings.
5. Remove four FCCB XAN flow regulating valves (Figure 3, Item 9) from suspension control manifold (Figure 3, Item 14).
6. Disassemble FCCB XAN flow regulating valves (Figure 3, Item 9) as follows:
a. Remove preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 13), backup rings (Figure 3, Item 12 and Item 11), and preformed packing
(Figure 3, Item 10). Discard preformed packings and backup rings.
b. Repeat step 6a as required for disassembly of remaining FCCB XAN flow regulating valves (Figure 3, Item 9).
WARNING
7. Clean all tubes, fittings, attaching hardware, suspension control manifold and cartridge, and flow regulating valves in
degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent.
8. Inspect cartridge and flow regulating valves for pitting, cracks, and wear. If defective, replace parts as required.
0110-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0110
WARNING
wear eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa) or injury to personnel may result.
9. Inspect all ports and openings in suspension control manifold and cartridge and flow regulating valves for foreign objects,
dirt, and clogged passageways. Use compressed air to clear clogged passageways.
11. Pour clean hydraulic fluid into suspension control manifold and cartridge and flow regulating valves to flush out
contaminants.
12. Replace all parts found defective and replace all preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 4, Item 5, Item 8, Item 10, Item
13, Item 15, Item 18, and Item 19) and backup rings (Figure 3, Item 3, Item 6, Item 7, Item 11, Item 12, Item 16, Item
17, and Item 20) using respective repair kits.
Figure 3. Suspension Control Manifold Repair.
0110-7
0110 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
As the flow regulating and cartridge valves are assembled, the arrangement of preformed
packings and backup rings is extremely important. If the preformed packing and backup
rings are improperly installed, internal leakage or premature equipment failure may result.
Use the illustration shown in Figure 4 for proper arrangement of parts.
Item 12 and Item 11).
14. Remove caps/plugs and install new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 10), new backup rings (Figure 4, Item 12 and
Item 11), and new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 13) onto FCCB XAN flow regulating valve (Figure 4, Item 9).
Repeat this step as required for all FCCB XAN flow regulating valves.
15. Remove caps/plugs and align and install four FCCB XAN flow regulating valves (Figure 4, Item 9) into suspension
manifold (Figure 4, Item 14).
16. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 8, Item 5, and Item 4) and new backup rings (Figure 4,
17. Install new backup ring (Figure 4, Item 3), new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 4 and Item 5), new backup rings
(Figure 4, Item 6 and Item 7), and new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 8) onto CBCA LAN cartridge valve
(Figure 4, Item 2).
18. Remove caps/plugs and align and install CBCA LAN cartridge valve (Figure 4, Item 2) into suspension manifold
19. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 15, Item 18, and Item 19) and new backup rings
(Figure 4, Item 16, Item 17, and Item 20).
20. Install new backup ring (Figure 4, Item 20), new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 19 and Item 18), new backup rings
(Figure 4, Item 17 and Item 16), and new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 15) onto CBCG LCN cartridge valve
(Figure 4, Item 1). Repeat this step as required for all CBCG LCN cartridge valves.
0110-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0110
21. Remove caps/plugs and align and install five CBCG LCN cartridge valves (Figure 4, Item 1) into suspension manifold
Figure 4. Suspension Control Manifold Repair.

END OF TASK
0110-9
0110 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Apply petroleum jelly to twenty new preformed packings (Figure 5, Item 3). Install seventeen new preformed packings
onto seventeen straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 2). Install three preformed packings onto three tube fitting
plugs (Figure 5, Item 6).
2. Remove caps/plugs installed and install three tube fitting plugs (Figure 5, Item 6) into suspension control manifold
3. Remove caps/plugs installed and install seventeen straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 2) into suspension
control manifold (Figure 5, Item 26).
4. Use one person to align and support suspension control manifold (Figure 5, Item 26) with hydraulic control module
frame (Figure 5, Item 12).
5. With first person holding suspension control manifold (Figure 5, Item 26), use a second person to install three capscrews
(Figure 5, Item 4) and lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 5).
6. Remove caps/plugs installed into three hydraulic tubes (Figure 5, Item 11, Item 9, and Item 7). Use two wrenches to install
three hydraulic tubes, between three straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 2), on suspension control manifold
(Figure 5, Item 26) and fittings on three pressure gauges (Figure 5, Item 13).
7. Remove caps/plugs installed into four hydraulic tubes (Figure 5, Item 8, Item 10, Item 14, and Item 15). Install four
hydraulic tubes, between four straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 2), on suspension control manifold (Figure 5,
Item 26) and fittings on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 5, Item 27).
8. Remove caps/plugs installed into hydraulic tube (Figure 5, Item 1). Install hydraulic tube between straight pipe-to-tube
adapter (Figure 5, Item 2) on suspension control manifold (Figure 5, Item 26) and bulkhead fitting on back of hydraulic
control module frame (Figure 5, Item 12).
9. Remove caps/plugs installed into five hydraulic tubes (Figure 5, Item 25, Item 24, Item 22, Item 21, and Item 20). Install
four hydraulic tubes between five straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 2) on suspension control manifold
(Figure 5, Item 26) and fittings on suspension shutoff valve (Figure 5, Item 23).
10. Remove caps/plugs installed into four hydraulic tubes (Figure 5, Item 16, Item 17, Item 18, and Item 19). Install four
hydraulic tubes between four straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 5, Item 2) on suspension control manifold (Figure 5,
Item 26) and fittings on four-way directional control valve bank (Figure 5, Item 27).
11. Align and install handle of suspension shutoff valve and clamp block back into place on hydraulic control module
(WP 0115).
0110-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0110
Figure 5. Suspension Control Manifold Installation.
0110-11
0110 TM 9-2330-381-13
and capscrews (Figure 6, Item 3) onto underside of semitrailer and platform (Figure 6, Item 1).
Figure 6. Suspension Control Manifold Installation.

END OF TASK
Adjust platform height through several cycles and check for proper operation (WP 0008).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0110-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0111
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LINE FRACTURE VALVE
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Gooseneck and suspension shutoff valve handles pulled
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) out to ADJUST position (WP 0004)
Hydraulic hoses and fittings removed from line fracture
Materials/Parts
valve (WP 0121)
If repairing a suspension cylinder line fracture valve,
proceed as follows: Gooseneck and suspension shutoff
Lockwasher (4)
valve handles pulled out to ADJUST position (WP 0004)
Suspension cylinder disconnected from upper suspension
Equipment Conditions arm (WP 0066)
If repairing a gooseneck cylinder line fracture valve, Suspension hoses unscrewed and removed from line
proceed as follows: Tractor and semitrailer coupled to fracture valve (WP 0066)
support gooseneck (WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the line fracture valve.
0111-1
0111 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Wear long sleeves and gloves or goggles. If hydraulic fluid
gets into the eyes, flush them immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on
skin, thoroughly wash with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking. Failure to
1. Remove four capscrews (Figure 1, Item 5), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4), washers (Figure 1, Item 3), line fracture valve
(Figure 1, Item 2), and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 1) from cylinder (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard lockwashers and
preformed packing. Install plug into back of line fracture valve.
Figure 1. Line Fracture Valve Removal.

END OF TASK
0111-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0111
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate new preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 1) with petroleum jelly.
2. Remove plug and install new preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 1) onto back of line fracture valve (Figure 2, Item 2).
3. Align line fracture valve (Figure 2, Item 2) with cylinder (Figure 2, Item 6) and secure with four capscrews (Figure 2,
Item 5), new lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 4), and washers (Figure 2, Item 3).
Figure 2. Line Fracture Valve Installation.

END OF TASK
If a repair was made to gooseneck cylinder line fracture valve, reconnect hydraulic hoses/fittings to cylinders (WP 0121).
Uncouple tractor from semitrailer (WP 0066). Operate gooseneck (WP 0007) and check for proper operation.
If a repair was made to a suspension cylinder line fracture valve, install suspension cylinder and hydraulic hoses onto upper
suspension arm (WP 0066). Adjust platform height (WP 0008). Check for proper operation.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0111-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0112
FIELD MAINTENANCE
VALVE HANDLES
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Front access panel on hydraulic control module lowered
(WP 0004)
Materials/Parts
Cotter Pin (6) (Configuration A only)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the valve handles.
0112-1
0112 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
There are two configurations of valve handles on the semitrailers, configuration A and configuration
B. These handles are not interchangeable between configurations.
Configuration A
1. Remove link key (Figure 1, Item 1), link plate (Figure 1, Item 2), and link (Figure 1, Item 4) from valve body (Figure 1,
Item 3) and valve handle (Figure 1, Item 7).
2. Remove cotter pin (Figure 1, Item 6), shouldered pin (Figure 1, Item 5), and valve handle (Figure 1, Item 7) from valve
body (Figure 1, Item 3). Discard cotter pin.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 as required for each valve handle (Figure 1, Item 7) to be removed.
4. Inspect valve handles (Figure 1, Item 7) for cracks, wear, and corrosion. If corroded, clean as required. If defective,
replace as required.
Figure 1. Configuration A Valve Handle Removal.
0112-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0112
Configuration B
1. Push back on ears of clip (Figure 2, Item 2) and unsnap from clevis (Figure 2, Item 4).
2. Remove clip (Figure 2, Item 2), pin (Figure 2, Item 3), and handles (Figure 2, Item 5) from valve (Figure 2, Item 1).
3. Inspect valve handles (Figure 2, Item 5) for cracks, wear, and corrosion. If corroded, clean as required. If defective,
Figure 2. Configuration B Valve Handle Removal.

END OF TASK
0112-3
0112 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
Configuration A
NOTE
There are two configurations of valve handles on the semitrailers, configuration A and configuration
B. These handles are not interchangeable between configurations.
1. Align valve handle (Figure 3, Item 7) with valve body (Figure 3, Item 3) and secure with shouldered pin (Figure 3, Item 5)
and cotter pin (Figure 3, Item 6).
2. Install link (Figure 3, Item 4) to valve body (Figure 3, Item 3) and valve handle (Figure 3, Item 7). Secure link in place by
installing link plate (Figure 3, Item 2) and link key (Figure 3, Item 1).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 as required for each valve handle (Figure 3, Item 7) to be installed.
Figure 3. Configuration A Valve Handle Installation.
0112-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0112
Configuration B
1. Install handle (Figure 4, Item 5) to valve (Figure 4, Item 1) and insert pin (Figure 4, Item 3) into side of clevis (Figure 4,
Item 4) with head of pin in recess in clevis.
2. Insert pin (Figure 4, Item 3), and then clip (Figure 4, Item 2) into clevis (Figure 4, Item 4) and rotate clip until ears on
pin snap in place on clevis and capture pin.
Figure 4. Configuration B Valve Handle Installation.

END OF TASK
Operate valve handles and check for proper operation (WP 0004).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0112-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0113
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SUSPENSION ISOLATION VALVE ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Suspension isolation valve assembly removed (WP 0124)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the suspension isolation valve.
REMOVAL
1. Separate two suspension isolation ball valves (Figure 1, Item 1) and remove valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Inspect two suspension isolation ball valves (Figure 1, Item 1) and valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2) for cracks, wear, and
corrosion. Replace defective parts as required.
Figure 1. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Removal.

END OF TASK
0113-1
0113 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
The ball valves must be arranged so that both ball valves operate in the same
direction or damage to equipment may result.
1. Place two suspension isolation ball valves (Figure 2, Item 1) so that valve stems face each other. Ensure both valves
are closed. Close one of the suspension isolation ball valves, if necessary, so that both valves are the same and will operate
in the same direction by valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Align valve handle (Figure 1, Item 2) so that valve handle is parallel between two suspension isolation ball valves
(Figure 1, Item 1) and push two suspension isolation ball valves into valve handle.
Figure 2. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Installation.

END OF TASK
Ensure suspension isolation valve assembly is installed and hydraulic lines and fittings are reconnected to valve assembly
(WP 0124).
Operate suspension isolation valve handle and check for proper operation (WP 0004).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0113-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0114
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SUSPENSION SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Handle, Ext, SPNSN ISOL Valve (WP 0168, Preformed Packing (10)
Item 1) Lockwasher (5)
2
Materials/Parts
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Equipment Conditions
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 17) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) All suspension isolation valves closed (WP 0004)
Solvent, Cleaning Compound (WP 0170, Item 31) Hydraulic tank drained (WP 0040)
Lockwasher (6)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the suspension shutoff valve assembly.
0114-1
0114 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time for system
to cool before performing maintenance.
Figure 1. Suspension Shutoff Valve Assembly Removal.
0114-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0114
3. Place drain pan under hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 1). Tag and disconnect five hydraulic tubes (Figure 2,
Item 14, Item 5, Item 6, Item 7, and Item 8) from five straight tube-to-boss adapters (Figure 2, Item 13) attached to five
ball valves (Figure 2, Item 12) on suspension shutoff valve (Figure 2, Item 9) and from fittings on suspension control
manifold (Figure 2, Item 11). Install caps/plugs into tube openings.
4. Remove five jam nuts (Figure 2, Item 15), locknuts (Figure 2, Item 16), and bolts (Figure 2, Item 17) from valve handle
weldment (Figure 2, Item 4) and rod ends (Figure 2, Item 10). Discard locknuts.
5. Remove two bolts (Figure 2, Item 3) and clamp sections (Figure 2, Item 2) from valve handle weldment (Figure 2,
Item 4) and hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 1).
0114-3
0114 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Tag and disconnect five hydraulic tubes (Figure 3, Item 16) from five tube reducers (Figure 3, Item 14) on back side of
hydraulic control module (Figure 3, Item 2) between module frame and platform mainbeam (Figure 3, Item 1). Install
caps/plugs into tube openings.
CAUTION
The orientation of ball valves on the suspension shutoff valve assembly is important. Each ball valve
must be installed back in the proper place and direction, or damage to equipment may result.
7. Remove five tube coupling nuts (Figure 3, Item 15) and tube reducers (Figure 3, Item 14) from straight pipe-to-tube
adapters (Figure 3, Item 17). Remove five fitting nuts (Figure 3, Item 13) from straight pipe-to-tube adapters. Document
position and flow direction of each ball valve (Figure 3, Item 6) and remove five ball valves with attached parts.
8. Remove capscrew (Figure 3, Item 3), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 4), washer (Figure 3, Item 5), and actuating lever (Figure
3, Item 11) from ball valve (Figure 3, Item 6). Repeat this step for the four remaining actuating levers. Discard lockwashers.
9. Remove five straight tube-to-boss reducers (Figure 3, Item 8), five straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 3, Item 17), and
ten preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 7) from five ball valves (Figure 3, Item 6). Install caps/plugs into openings
and discard preformed packings.
10. Remove five locknuts (Figure 3, Item 9) and capscrews (Figure 3, Item 12) from actuating levers (Figure 3, Item 11) and
rod ends (Figure 3, Item 10). Discard locknuts.
WARNING
smoking materials and do not allow sparks or open flame near the work area. Use skin and eye protection and
work in a well-ventilated area. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death to personnel.
11. Clean all tubes, fittings, attaching hardware, and pieces of suspension shutoff valve in degreaser tank with cleaning
compound solvent.
12. Inspect each ball valve for pitting, cracks, and wear. If defective, replace parts as required.
0114-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0114
WARNING
Compressed air used for cleaning/drying may create airborne particles that may injure the
eyes. Always wear eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa). Failure to
13. Inspect all ports and openings in each ball valve for foreign objects, dirt, and clogged passageways. Use compressed
air to clear clogged passageways.
15. Pour clean hydraulic fluid into each ball valve to flush out contaminants.

END OF TASK
0114-5
0114 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Align five rod ends (Figure 4, Item 10) with five actuating levers (Figure 4, Item 11). Install five capscrews (Figure 4,
Item 12) through actuating levers and rod ends and secure with five locknuts (Figure 4, Item 9).
2. Lubricate ten preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 7) with petroleum jelly. Install five new preformed packings onto five
straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 17). Install five new preformed packings onto five straight tube-to-boss
reducers (Figure 4, Item 8).
3. Remove caps/plugs installed and install five straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 17) and five straight tube-to-boss
reducers (Figure 4, Item 8) onto five ball valves (Figure 4, Item 6).
CAUTION
The ball valves must be arranged so that all ball valves operate in the same direction or
damage to equipment or premature system failure may result.
4. Check that ball valves (Figure 4, Item 6) are preset with each ball open and arranged so that all valves will close when
operated in the same direction.
CAUTION
The actuating levers must be arranged so that all ball valves operate in the same direction, or
5. Check position of ball in ball valve (Figure 4, Item 6) and install actuating lever (Figure 4, Item 11) onto valve stem on
ball valve. Secure each actuating lever in place by installing washer (Figure 4, Item 5), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 4),
and capscrew (Figure 4, Item 3).
6. Align and install five fitting nuts (Figure 4, Item 13), tube reducers (Figure 4, Item 14), and tube coupling nuts (Figure 4,
Item 15) onto straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 4, Item 17).
7. Remove caps/plugs installed on five hydraulic tubes (Figure 4, Item 16). Connect five hydraulic tubes onto tube reducers
(Figure 4, Item 14) on backside of hydraulic control module (Figure 4, Item 2) between module frame and platform
mainbeam (Figure 4, Item 1).
0114-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0114
Figure 4. Suspension Shutoff Valve Assembly Installation.
0114-7
0114 TM 9-2330-381-13
8. Install five bolts (Figure 5, Item 17) into valve handle weldment (Figure 5, Item 4) and secure in place by installing
locknuts (Figure 5, Item 16). Thread five jam nuts (Figure 5, Item 15) onto bolts up to and against locknuts.
9. Align clamp sections (Figure 5, Item 2) and valve handle weldment (Figure 5, Item 4) with hydraulic control module
(Figure 5, Item 1) and secure in place with two bolts (Figure 5, Item 3).
10. Remove caps/plugs installed on five hydraulic tubes (Figure 5, Item 8, Item 7, Item 6, Item 5, and Item 14). Connect five
hydraulic tubes to five straight tube-to-boss adapters (Figure 5, Item 13) and five ball valves (Figure 5, Item 12) on
suspension shutoff valve (Figure 5, Item 9) and fittings on suspension control manifold (Figure 5, Item 11).
11. Tighten five jam nuts (Figure 5, Item 15) against rod ends (Figure 5, Item 10).
0114-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0114
and capscrews (Figure 6, Item 3) on underside of semitrailer platform (Figure 6, Item 1).

END OF TASK
Operate suspension shutoff valve and check for binding (WP 0004).
Adjust platform height and check for proper operation (WP 0008).
Couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013) and perform highway driving (WP 0014). Check that suspension operates properly.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0114-9/10 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0115
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK ISOLATION VALVE ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Hydraulic tank drained (WP 0040)
Materials/Parts
Except for bulkhead fittings holding each ball valve onto
platform, remove all remaining hydraulic lines, fittings,
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 17)
and clamps from gooseneck isolation valve assembly as
required (WP 0124)
Gooseneck isolation valve handle in RUN position
Cotter Pin (5)
(WP 0004)
Self-Locking Bolt (4)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the gooseneck isolation valve assembly.
REMOVAL
1. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) and clamp (Figure 1, Item 2) from manual control lever (Figure 1, Item 3).
Figure 1. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Removal.
0115-1
0115 TM 9-2330-381-13
2. Remove cotter pin (Figure 2, Item 2), straight shouldered pin (Figure 2, Item 3), and manual control rod (Figure 2,
Item 1) from platform (Figure 2, Item 4). Discard cotter pin.
3. Remove two cotter pins (Figure 2, Item 6), straight shouldered pin (Figure 2, Item 5), and rigid connecting link assembly
(Figure 2, Item 7) from platform (Figure 2, Item 4). Discard cotter pins.
4. Remove two cotter pins (Figure 2, Item 8), straight shouldered pin (Figure 2, Item 9), and steering tie rod assembly
(Figure 2, Item 10) from platform (Figure 2, Item 4). Discard cotter pins.

5. Remove two self-locking bolts (Figure 3, Item 12), washers (Figure 3, Item 13), clamp bridge (Figure 3, Item 14), and
manual control lever (Figure 3, Item 1) from two ball valves (Figure 3, Item 2). Discard self-locking bolts.
6. Remove capscrew (Figure 3, Item 10), washer (Figure 3, Item 9), and setscrew (Figure 3, Item 11) from manual control
7. Use suitable prying device to pry up and remove manual control lever (Figure 3, Item 8) from ball valve (Figure 3, Item 15).
8. Remove two self-locking bolts (Figure 3, Item 7), washers (Figure 3, Item 6), clamp bridge (Figure 3, Item 5), and manual
control lever (Figure 3, Item 4) from two ball valves (Figure 3, Item 3). Discard self-locking bolts.
0115-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0115

9. Remove five bulkhead fittings (Figure 4, Item 2) and preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 3) from five ball valves (Figure 4,
Item 5, Item 1, and Item 4). Discard preformed packings.

END OF TASK
0115-3
0115 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Count and document number of turns required to remove rod end clevis (Figure 5, Item 1). Loosen jam nut (Figure 5,
Item 2) and unscrew and remove rod end clevis from steering tie rod (Figure 5, Item 3).
Figure 5. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Repair.
WARNING
5. Clean all parts removed in degreaser tank with cleaning compound solvent.
6. Inspect all manual control levers, steering tie rod assembly, rigid connecting link assembly, and all associated parts for
cracks, wear, bent levers, and cracked or broken rod end clevis. If any parts are found defective, replace as required.
0115-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0115
WARNING
7. Inspect openings in ball valves for foreign objects, dirt, and clogged passageways. Use compressed air to clear clogged
passageways.
9. Pour clean hydraulic fluid into ball valves to flush out contaminants.
10. Install jam nut (Figure 6, Item 7) onto steering tie rod (Figure 6, Item 8) and thread jam nut all the way onto steering tie rod.
11. Align and install rod end clevis (Figure 6, Item 6) onto steering tie rod (Figure 6, Item 8) to same number of threads
documented during removal. Tighten jam nut (Figure 6, Item 7) against rod end clevis to secure in place.
16. Install jam nut (Figure 6, Item 2) onto steering tie rod (Figure 6, Item 3) and thread jam nut all the way onto steering rod.
disconnected during removal. Tighten jam nut (Figure 6, Item 2) against rod end clevis to secure in place.
Figure 6. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Repair.

END OF TASK
0115-5
0115 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Lubricate five new preformed packings (Figure 7, Item 3) with petroleum jelly. Install five new preformed packings onto
five bulkhead fittings (Figure 7, Item 2).
NOTE
Be sure to check the direction in which the ball valve is to be placed on the platform to ensure
the bulkhead will be installed on the proper side of the ball valve.
2. Install five bulkhead fittings (Figure 7, Item 2), preformed packing side first, into five ball valves (Figure 7, Item 4,
Item 1, and Item 5).
Figure 7. Gooseneck Isolation Valve Assembly Installation.
CAUTION
The ball valves must be arranged so that all ball valves operate in the same direction or
3. Check that all five ball valves (Figure 8, Item 4, Item 18, and Item 5) are set with each ball in open position.
4. Align and install five ball valves (Figure 8, Item 5, Item 18, and Item 4) onto platform weldment (Figure 8, Item 3),
passing five bulkhead fittings to platform mounting plates (Figure 8, Item 6). Hand-tighten jam nut on each of five
bulkhead fittings (Figure 8, Item 2) so that ball valves can move slightly.
5. Align manual control lever (Figure 8, Item 7) and clamp bridge (Figure 8, Item 8) between two ball valves (Figure 8,
Item 5) and secure in place by installing two washers (Figure 8, Item 9) and self-locking bolts (Figure 8, Item 10).
NOTE
Check position of each ball valve by looking through one of the ports on the valve as the valves are operated.
6. Operate manual control lever (Figure 8, Item 7) and check that ball in each ball valve (Figure 8, Item 5) is moving
the same amount and in the same direction.
a. If each ball in ball valves (Figure 8, Item 5) works properly, tighten down nut on each bulkhead fitting (Figure 8,
Item 2) for both ball valves.
b. If each ball in ball valves does not work properly, refer to repair steps and remove valve. Then align and install
ball valves (Figure 8, Item 5) until valves work properly.
0115-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0115
7. Install manual control lever (Figure 8, Item 11) onto ball valve (Figure 8, Item 18). Secure manual control lever in place by
installing setscrew (Figure 8, Item 14), washer (Figure 8, Item 12), and capscrew (Figure 8, Item 13).
NOTE
Check position of ball valve by looking through one of the ports on the valve as the valve is operated.
8. Operate manual control lever (Figure 8, Item 11) and check that ball in ball valve (Figure 8, Item 18) is moving in
proper direction.
a. If ball in ball valve (Figure 8, Item 18) works properly, tighten down nut on bulkhead fitting (Figure 8, Item 2) for
ball valves.
b. If each ball in ball valves does not work properly, refer to repair steps and remove valve. Then, align and install
ball valves (Figure 8, Item 18) until valves work properly.
9. Align manual control lever (Figure 8, Item 1) and clamp bridge (Figure 8, Item 17) between two ball valves (Figure 8,
Item 4) and secure in place by installing two washers (Figure 8, Item 16) and self-locking bolts (Figure 8, Item 15).
NOTE
Check position of each ball valve by looking through one of the ports on the valve as the valves are operated.
10. Operate manual control lever (Figure 8, Item 1) and check that ball in each ball valve (Figure 8, Item 4) is moving
the same amount and in the same direction.
a. If each ball in ball valves (Figure 8, Item 4) works properly, tighten down nut on each bulkhead fitting (Figure 8,
Item 2) for both ball valves (Figure 8, Item 16).
b. If each ball in ball valves (Figure 8, Item 4) does not work properly, refer to repair steps and remove valve.
Then, align and install ball valves until valves work properly.
0115-7
0115 TM 9-2330-381-13
11. Align and install steering tie rod assembly (Figure 9, Item 21) between manual control lever (Figure 9, Item 15) and
manual control lever (Figure 9, Item 22). Secure in place by installing two straight shouldered pins (Figure 9, Item 18)
and cotter pins (Figure 9, Item 17).
12. Operate steering tie rod assembly (Figure 9, Item 21) and check for operation and binding.
a. Check that each of manual control levers (Figure 9, Item 22 and Item 15) moves ball in each ball valve (Figure 9,
Item 14 and Item 16) from full open to full close positions.
b. If adjustment is required, loosen jam nut (Figure 9, Item 19) on each end of steering tie rod assembly (Figure 9, Item 21)
and rotate steering tie rod (Figure 9, Item 20) either clockwise to shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen, as necessary.
c. If adjustment was made, tighten jam nut (Figure 9, Item 19) on both ends of steering tie rod assembly (Figure 9,
Item 21). Repeat step 12 and check for full range of operation and/or binding.
d. If no adjustments were made, proceed to step 13.
13. Align and install rigid connecting link assembly (Figure 9, Item 9) between manual control lever (Figure 9, Item 5) and
manual control lever (Figure 9, Item 22). Secure in place by installing two straight shouldered pins (Figure 9, Item 7 and
Item 12) and cotter pins (Figure 9, Item 8 and Item 13).
14. Operate rigid connecting link assembly (Figure 9, Item 9) and check for full range of operation and binding.
a. Check that each of manual control levers (Figure 9, Item 5 and Item 22) moves ball in each ball valve (Figure 9,
Item 6) from full open to full close positions.
b. If adjustment is required, loosen jam nut (Figure 9, Item 10) on each end of rigid connecting link assembly (Figure 9,
Item 9) and rotate steering tie rod (Figure 9, Item 11) either clockwise to shorten or counterclockwise to lengthen,
as necessary.
c. If adjustment was made, tighten jam nut (Figure 9, Item 10) on both ends of steering tie rod assembly (Figure 9,
Item 9). Repeat step 14 and check for full range of operation and/or binding.
d. If no adjustments were made, proceed to step 15.
15. Pass manual control lever (Figure 9, Item 1) through hydraulic control module (Figure 9, Item 4) and secure manual
control lever to manual control lever (Figure 9, Item 22) using straight shouldered pin (Figure 9, Item 3) and cotter pin
(Figure 9, Item 2).
0115-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0115
0115-9
0115 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Align clamp (Figure 10, Item 2) over manual control lever (Figure 10, Item 3) and secure by installing two bolts
17. Operate manual control lever (Figure 10, Item 3) and check for full range of operation and binding. If any binding occurs
or full range of operation is not accomplished, repeat steps 12 and 14 as required.

END OF TASK
Ensure hydraulic lines, fittings, and clamps are reconnected to gooseneck isolation valve assembly as required (WP 0124).
Refill hydraulic tank (WP 0039).
Operate gooseneck isolation valve and check for binding (WP 0004).
Perform gooseneck adjustments and check for proper operation (WP 0007).
Couple tractor/semitrailer (WP 0013) and perform highway driving. Check that suspension cylinders and gooseneck
cylinders operate properly.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0115-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0116
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK HYDRAULICS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Platform step removed (WP 0090)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Gooseneck lowered to lowest position if uncoupled
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) (WP 0007)
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Hydraulic tank drained (WP 0040)
GENERAL
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the gooseneck hydraulic system.
0116-1
0116 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking. Failure to follow this warning
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent
dirt, moisture, or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system or damage to equipment
may result.
NOTE
This procedure is for removal/installation of all gooseneck hydraulic components. Perform this procedure,
or any portion of this procedure, as required, to complete necessary repairs. Use hydraulic schematic rear
foldout Figure FO-3 as a general guide for hose routing.
1. Place a drain pan under gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) and tag and remove two hoses (Figure 1, Item 2) and hose (Figure 1,
Item 3). Allow fluid to drain; then install caps/plugs into all openings.
2. Tag and disconnect two hoses (Figure 1, Item 4) and two hoses (Figure 1, Item 5). Allow fluid to drain into drain pan; then
install caps/plugs into all openings.
3. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 7) and block clamps (Figure 1, Item 6).
4. Remove two hoses (Figure 1, Item 4) and two hoses (Figure 1, Item 5).
5. Place drain pan under gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) near steering cylinder (Figure 1, Item 11). Remove two elbows
(Figure 1, Item 8), preformed packings (Figure 1, Item 9), and pipe plugs (Figure 1, Item 10) from steering cylinder. Repeat
this step for other steering cylinder. Install caps/plugs into all openings. Discard preformed packings.
0116-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0116
Figure 1. Gooseneck Hydraulics Removal.
0116-3
0116 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
• Compressed air used for cleaning/drying may create airborne particles that may injure the eyes. Always wear
6. Clean inside of hoses with compressed air. Clean outside of hoses with wiping rags. Clean all other components with
dry cleaning solvent.
7. Inspect hoses for kinks, splits, deterioration, chafing, cuts, and loose fittings. If hose is defective, replace hose.
8. Inspect other components for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, and pitting. If parts are defective, replace as required.
END OF TASK
0116-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0116
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
• Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threaded hydraulic fittings, using only enough compound
to coat the threads. Do not allow compound to enter a component/fitting or the compound may restrict
fluid passages and damage to equipment or premature equipment failure may result.
• Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the tightened
fittings positioned as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings do not interfere
with one another or damage to equipment may result.
1. Remove caps/plugs, apply pipe sealant to male threads of two pipe plugs (Figure 2, Item 10), and install plugs into
each gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 1) steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 11).
2. Remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to two preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 9) and pipe sealant to male threads
of two elbows (Figure 2, Item 8) and install preformed packings and elbows into each gooseneck steering cylinder
3. Remove caps/plugs and install two hoses (Figure 2, Item 5), two hoses (Figure 2, Item 4), hose (Figure 2, Item 3),
and two hoses (Figure 2, Item 2) into gooseneck steering cylinder (Figure 2, Item 11).
4. Install two block clamps (Figure 2, Item 6) and bolts (Figure 2, Item 7) on gooseneck.
Figure 2. Gooseneck Hydraulics Removal.

END OF TASK
0116-5
0116 TM 9-2330-381-13
Perform hydraulic system bleeding as required (WP 0041).
Install platform step (WP 0090).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0116-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0117
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) HYDRAULICS
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Preformed Packing (1)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 1
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Equipment Conditions
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Hydraulic tank drained (WP 0040)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) Gooseneck steps removed from over top of battery and
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0087)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) hydraulics
system.
0117-1
0117 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance.
CAUTION
moisture, or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system or damage to equipment may
result.
NOTE
This procedure is for removal/installation of all APU hydraulics components. Perform this procedure, or
any portion of this procedure, as required to complete necessary repairs. Use hydraulic schematic rear
foldout Figure FO-3 as a general guide for hose routing.
1. Place drain pan under gooseneck and tag and disconnect three hydraulic hoses (Figure 1, Item 16, Item 15, and Item 13)
from two tube nipples (Figure 1, Item 11 and Item 18) and tube nipple (Figure 1, Item 19) on APU frame (Figure 1,
Item 17). Install caps/plugs into hose openings.
2. Tag and remove two hydraulic hoses (Figure 1, Item 10) from two tube nipples (Figure 1, Item 11 and Item 18) and
straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 21) and tube elbow (Figure 1, Item 9) on hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 23).
Install caps/plugs into hose openings.
3. Tag and disconnect hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 1) from tube nipple (Figure 1, Item 19) and straight pipe-to-tube adapter
(Figure 1, Item 2) on streetside of hydraulic pump (Figure 1, Item 4) on APU (Figure 1, Item 20). Install caps/plugs
into hose openings.
4. Remove two fitting nuts (Figure 1, Item 12), two tube nipples (Figure 1, Item 11 and Item 18), fitting nut (Figure 1,
Item 14), and tube nipple (Figure 1, Item 19) from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 17). Install caps/plugs onto fittings.
5. Remove straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 2) and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 3) from streetside of
hydraulic pump (Figure 1, Item 4). Install caps/plugs into openings and discard preformed packing.
6. Tag and disconnect hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 1) from straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 6) on curbside of
hydraulic pump (Figure 1, Item 4) and tube elbow (Figure 1, Item 9). Install caps/plugs into hose.
7. Remove straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 6) and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 5) from curbside of
hydraulic pump (Figure 1, Item 4). Discard preformed packing and install caps/plugs into openings.
8. Remove straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 21) and tube elbow (Figure 1, Item 9) from tube tee (Figure 1,
Item 22) from hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 23). Install caps/plugs into openings.
9. If necessary, refer to WP 0123 and loosen or remove hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 7) and remove tube elbow (Figure 1,
Item 9) and ball valve (Figure 1, Item 8) from hydraulic tank. Install caps/plugs into openings.
0117-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0117
Figure 1. APU Hydraulics Removal.
0117-3
0117 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa).
10. Clean inside of hoses (Figure 2, Item 1) with compressed air. Clean outside of hoses with wiping rags.
11. Check and clean threads of pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2), ball valve (Figure 2, Item 5), tube elbow (Figure 2,
Item 6), tube nipples (Figure 2, Item 7), fitting nuts (Figure 2, Item 8), and tube tee (Figure 2, Item 11) with dry cleaning
solvent.
12. Inspect hoses (Figure 2, Item 1) for kinks, splits, deterioration, chafing, cuts, and loose fittings. If hose is found defective,
replace hose.
13. Inspect pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 2), ball valve (Figure 2, Item 5), tube elbow (Figure 2, Item 6), tube nipples
(Figure 2, Item 7), fitting nuts (Figure 2, Item 8), tube tee (Figure 2, Item 11) and APU frame (Figure 2, Item 8) for nicks,
burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, and pitting. If parts are defective, replace as required.
14. Inspect hydraulic tank (Figure 2 Item 4) and APU (Figure 2, Item 10) for signs of corrosion and loose fittings or
connections. If parts are defective, replace as required.
15. Inspect hydraulic pump (Figure 2, Item 3) body and seal area for nicks, burrs, stripped threads, pitting, and corrosion.
If defective, replace as required.
0117-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0117
Figure 2. Cleaning.
END OF TASK
0117-5
0117 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
• Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threaded hydraulic fittings, using only enough compound to coat
the threads. Do not allow compound to enter a component/fitting or the compound may restrict fluid passages
and damage to equipment or premature equipment failure may result.
• Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the tightened fittings
positioned as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings do not interfere with one another or damage to
1. Remove caps/plugs installed and apply pipe sealant to male threads of fittings. Install ball valve (Figure 3, Item 8) and tube
elbow (Figure 3, Item 9) onto hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 7). If necessary, reinstall hydraulic tank (WP 0123).
2. Remove caps/plugs and apply pipe sealant to male pipe threads of tube tee (Figure 3, Item 22). Install tube tee onto
hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 23). Install tube elbow (Figure 3, Item 9) and straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3,
Item 21) onto tube tee.
3. Lubricate preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 5 and Item 3) with petroleum jelly. Install preformed packing (Figure 3,
Item 5) onto straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 6). Install preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 3) onto straight
pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 2).
4. Remove caps/plugs and install straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 6) into curbside of hydraulic pump (Figure 3,
Item 4).
5. Remove caps/plugs and install straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 2) into streetside of hydraulic pump (Figure 3,
Item 4).
6. Remove caps/plugs and install hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 1) between tube elbow (Figure 3, Item 9) and straight
pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 6).
7. Remove caps/plugs and install tube nipple (Figure 3, Item 19) onto APU frame (Figure 3, Item 17) and secure with
fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 14).
8. Remove caps/plugs and install two tube nipples (Figure 3, Item 11 and Item 18) onto APU frame (Figure 3, Item 17) and
secure with two fitting nuts (Figure 3, Item 12).
9. Remove caps/plugs and install hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 1) on straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 2) on
streetside of hydraulic pump (Figure 3, Item 4) and tube nipple (Figure 3, Item 19) on APU (Figure 3, Item 20).
10. Remove caps/plugs and install two hydraulic hoses (Figure 3, Item 10) from tube tee (Figure 3, Item 22) and straight
pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 21) on hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 23) to two tube nipples (Figure 3, Item 11 and
Item 18) on APU frame (Figure 3, Item 17).
11. Remove caps/plugs and install three hydraulic hoses (Figure 3, Item 16, Item 15, and Item 13) onto two tube nipples
(Figure 3, Item 11 and Item 18) and tube nipple (Figure 3, Item 19).
0117-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0117
Figure 3. APU Hydraulics Installation.
END OF TASK

END OF WORK PACKAGE
0117-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0118
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEP HYDRAULICS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Hydraulic tank drained (WP 0040)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Platform step removed (WP 0090)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides instructions for the removal and installation of the step hydraulics.
0118-1
0118 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
maintenance.
CAUTION
result.
NOTE
This procedure is for removal/installation of step hydraulic components. Perform this procedure, or any
portion of this procedure, as required, to complete necessary repairs. Use hydraulic schematic rear foldout
Figure FO-3 as a general guide for hose routing.
1. Use drain pan placed under gooseneck steps for drainage. Tag and disconnect seven hoses (Figure 1, Item 11) from
fittings on step weldment (Figure 1, Item 20). Install caps/plugs into hoses disconnected.
2. Tag and remove two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 18) from elbow fittings (Figure 1, Item 19) and tee fittings (Figure 1,
Item 17). Remove two fitting nuts (Figure 1, Item 13) and elbow fittings (Figure 1, Item 19) from step weldment (Figure 1,
3. Tag and remove two hydraulic tubes (Figure 1, Item 15) from elbow fittings (Figure 1, Item 14) and tee fittings (Figure 1,
Item 16). Remove two fitting nuts (Figure 1, Item 12) and elbow fittings (Figure 1, Item 14) from step weldment (Figure 1,
4. Tag and remove hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 1) from tube nipple (Figure 1, Item 2) and reducer adapter (Figure 1,
Item 21) on hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 22). Remove fitting nut (Figure 1, Item 26) and tube nipple
(Figure 1, Item 2) from step weldment (Figure 1, Item 20). Install caps/plugs into openings.
5. Tag and remove hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 4) from elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 3) and bulkhead fitting (Figure 1,
Item 23) on gooseneck isolation valve (Figure 1, Item 24). Remove fitting nut (Figure 1, Item 25) and elbow fitting
(Figure 1, Item 3) from step weldment (Figure 1, Item 20). Install caps/plugs into openings.
6. Tag and remove hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 6) from elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 5) on step weldment (Figure 1,
Item 20) and elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 8) on hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 22). Remove fitting nut (Figure 1,
Item 10) and elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 5) from step weldment (Figure 1, Item 20). Install caps/plugs into openings.
7. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 1, Item 9) from elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 8). Install caps/plugs into tube.
Remove fitting nut (Figure 1, Item 7) and elbow fitting (Figure 1, Item 8) from hydraulic control module (Figure 1,
0118-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0118
Figure 1. Step Hydraulics Removal.
0118-3
0118 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa).
8. Clean inside of hoses (Figure 2, Item 1) and hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 5) with compressed air. Clean outside
of hoses with wiping rags.
9. Check and clean threads of tube nipples (Figure 2, Item 2), elbow fittings (Figure 2, Item 3), nuts (Figure 2, Item 4),
tee fittings (Figure 2, Item 6), reducer adapter (Figure 2, Item 8), bulkhead fitting (Figure 2, Item 10), and gooseneck
ISO valve (Figure 2, Item 11) with dry cleaning solvent.
10. Inspect hoses (Figure 2, Item 1) and hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 5) for kinks, splits, deterioration, chafing, cuts, and
loose fittings. If hose is defective, replace hose.
11. Inspect tube nipples (Figure 2, Item 2), elbow fittings (Figure 2, Item 3), nuts (Figure 2, Item 4), tee fittings (Figure 2,
Item 6), reducer adapter (Figure 2, Item 8), bulkhead fitting (Figure 2, Item 10), and gooseneck ISO valve (Figure 2,
Item 11) for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, broken castings, and pitting. Replace defective parts as required.
12. Inspect step weldment (Figure 2, Item 7) and hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 9) for signs of corrosion, cracks,
stripped threads, or any other signs of damage. If parts are defective, replace as required.
0118-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0118
Figure 2. Cleaning.
END OF TASK
0118-5
0118 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the tightened
fittings positioned as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings do not interfere with one
another or damage to equipment may result.
1. Remove caps/plugs and install elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 8) onto hydraulic control module (Figure 3, Item 22) and
secure with fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 7).
2. Remove caps/plugs and install elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 5) onto step weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and secure with
fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 10).
3. Remove caps/plugs and connect hydraulic tube (Figure 3, Item 9) to elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 8). Remove caps/plugs
and install hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 6) between elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 5) and elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 8).
4. Remove caps/plugs and install elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 3) onto step weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and secure in place
with fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 25).
5. Remove caps/plugs and install hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 4) between elbow fitting (Figure 3, Item 3) on step weldment
(Figure 3, Item 20) and bulkhead fitting (Figure 3, Item 23) on gooseneck isolation valve (Figure 3, Item 24).
6. Remove caps/plugs and install tube nipple (Figure 3, Item 2) onto step weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and secure in place
with fitting nut (Figure 3, Item 26).
7. Remove caps/plugs and install hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 1) between tube nipple (Figure 3, Item 2) on step weldment
(Figure 3, Item 20) and reducer adapter (Figure 3, Item 21) on hydraulic control module (Figure 3, Item 22).
8. Remove caps/plugs and install two tube elbows (Figure 3, Item 14) onto step weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and secure in
place with fitting nuts (Figure 3, Item 12).
9. Remove caps/plugs and install two hydraulic tubes (Figure 3, Item 15) between tube elbows (Figure 3, Item 14) on step
weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and tee fittings (Figure 3, Item 16).
10. Remove caps/plugs and install two tube elbows (Figure 3, Item 19) onto step weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and secure in
place with fitting nuts (Figure 3, Item 13).
11. Remove caps/plugs and install two hydraulic tubes (Figure 3, Item 18) between tube elbows (Figure 3, Item 19) on step
weldment (Figure 3, Item 20) and tee fittings (Figure 3, Item 17).
12. Remove caps/plugs and install seven hydraulic hoses (Figure 3, Item 11) onto fittings on step weldment (Figure 3, Item 20).
0118-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0118
Figure 3. Step Hydraulics Installation.
END OF TASK
0118-7
0118 TM 9-2330-381-13
FOLLOW-ON MAINTENANCE .

END OF WORK PACKAGE
0118-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0119
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE GAUGES
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Suspension isolation valve handle placed in ADJUST
position (WP 0004)
Materials/Parts
Gooseneck isolation valve handle placed in ADJUST
position (WP 0004)
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22)
Suspension isolation valves isolated at four corner bogies
(WP 0004)
All pressure gauges reading 0 psi (0 kPa) (WP 0004)
Tape, Teflon (WP 0170, Item 37)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the hydraulic pressure gauges.
0119-1
0119 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
performing maintenance.
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening
Item 5) from hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 2). Carefully remove lower panel, with door panel (Figure 1,
Figure 1. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Removed.
0119-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0119
3. Use drain pan placed under platform for drainage, and tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 2, Item 6) from straight
pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 2, Item 3) on pressure gauge (Figure 2, Item 2).
4. Remove three self-locking nuts (Figure 2, Item 5), screws (Figure 2, Item 4), and pressure gauge (Figure 2, Item 2).
Remove straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 2, Item 3) from pressure gauge. Discard self-locking nuts. Install
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to remove three remaining pressure gauges (Figure 2, Item 2) from hydraulic control module
(Figure 2, Item 1), as required.
Figure 2. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Removal.
0119-3
0119 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
6. Clean pressure gauges with wiping rags. Clean all other components with dry cleaning solvent.
7. Inspect pressure gauges for cracked or broken glass, bent needles, stripped threads, or evidence of leakage. Replace
any defective gauges.
END OF TASK
0119-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0119
INSTALLATION
1. Prepare threads of pressure gauge (Figure 3, Item 2) in accordance with step a or step b:
a. Apply pipe sealant to threads, except for last two threads at open end.
b. Apply two turns of Teflon tape to threads, leaving last two threads at open end uncovered.
2. Install straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 3) onto pressure gauge (Figure 3, Item 2). Align and install pressure
gauge and secure with three screws (Figure 3, Item 4) and self-locking nuts (Figure 3, Item 5).
3. Remove caps/plugs and connect hydraulic tube (Figure 3, Item 6) onto straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 3, Item 3) on
pressure gauge (Figure 3, Item 2).
4. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 to install and connect all pressure gauges (Figure 3, Item 2) removed from hydraulic control
module (Figure 3, Item 1), as required.
Figure 3. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Installation.
0119-5
0119 TM 9-2330-381-13
and capscrews (Figure 4, Item 3) on underside of semitrailer platform (Figure 4, Item 1).
Figure 4. Hydraulic Pressure Gauges Installation.

END OF TASK
Operate suspension and check pressure gauge reading for proper operation (WP 0004).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0119-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0120
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC FILTER
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Preformed Packing (1)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Filter Element (1)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) 2
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 17)
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Equipment Conditions
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Hydraulic oil valve at reservoir closed (handle upright)
Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23) (WP 0004)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) One suspension valve (hydraulic control console) secured
in full up position (WP 0004)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the element change, removal, and installation of the hydraulic filter.
0120-1
0120 TM 9-2330-381-13
ELEMENT CHANGE
WARNING
maintenance.
CAUTION
result.
2. Use two personnel to remove six capscrews (Figure 1, Item 4), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 3), and lower panel (Figure 1,
3. Use drain pan placed under hydraulic control module (Figure 1, Item 2) for drainage and 1 1/4 in. wrench to unscrew and
remove filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 7) from filter block (Figure 1, Item 10).
4. Remove filter element (Figure 1, Item 8) and preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 9). Discard filter element and preformed
packing. Pour fluid inside of filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 7) into drain pan.
5. Install new filter element (Figure 1, Item 8) into filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 7). Apply a thin coat of petroleum
jelly onto preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 9). Install preformed packing onto filter block (Figure 1, Item 10).
6. Install filter element housing (Figure 1, Item 7), with filter element (Figure 1, Item 8) and preformed packing (Figure 1,
Item 9) attached, to filter block (Figure 1, Item 10). Use 1 1/4 in. wrench to tighten filter element housing onto filter block.
0120-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0120
7. Use two personnel to align and install lower panel (Figure 1, Item 5), with door panel (Figure 1, Item 6) attached, onto
and capscrews (Figure 1, Item 4) on underside of semitrailer platform (Figure 1, Item 1). Close door panel.
Figure 1. Hydraulic Filter Element Change.

END OF TASK
0120-3
0120 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
NOTE
Perform steps 1 and 2 of element change in this work package.
1. Use drain pan placed under hydraulic control module for drainage. Tag and disconnect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 2,
Item 6) from straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 5) on hydraulic filter (Figure 2, Item 11).
2. Remove two bolts (Figure 2, Item 2), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 3), and hydraulic filter (Figure 2, Item 11) from
hydraulic control module (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard lockwashers.
3. Remove two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 2, Item 5) and two preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 4) from
hydraulic filter (Figure 2, Item 11). Install caps/plugs into all openings. Discard preformed packings.
4. If hydraulic filter (Figure 2, Item 11) needs to be disassembled, proceed as follows:
a. Use drain pan placed under hydraulic control module for drainage and 1 1/4 in. wrench to unscrew and remove filter
element housing (Figure 2, Item 10) from filter block (Figure 2, Item 7).
b. Remove filter element (Figure 2, Item 9) and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 8). Discard filter element and
preformed packing.
c. Pour fluid inside of filter element housing (Figure 2, Item 10) into drain pan.
Figure 2. Hydraulic Filter Removal.
0120-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0120
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
5. Clean filter housing with wiping rags. Clean all other components with dry cleaning solvent.
6. Inspect filter assembly for cracked or broken sight gauge, stripped threads, deformed preformed packing grooves, nicks,
cracks, dents, or evidence of leakage. Replace defective components as required.
END OF TASK
0120-5
0120 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. If hydraulic filter was not disassembled during removal, proceed to step 2. If filter was disassembled during removal,
proceed as follows:
a. Install new filter element (Figure 3, Item 9) into filter element housing (Figure 3, Item 10). Apply a thin coat of
petroleum jelly onto new preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 8). Install new preformed packing onto filter block
(Figure 3, Item 7).
b. Install filter element housing (Figure 3, Item 10), with filter element (Figure 3, Item 9) and new preformed packing
(Figure 3, Item 8) attached, to filter block (Figure 3, Item 7).
c. Use 1 1/4 in. wrench to tighten filter element housing (Figure 3, Item 10) onto filter block (Figure 3, Item 7).
2. Remove caps/plugs and apply petroleum jelly to two new preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 4). Install new preformed
packings onto two straight pipe-to-tube adapters (Figure 3, Item 5).
3. Install filter assembly (Figure 3, Item 11) onto hydraulic control module (Figure 3, Item 1) and secure with two
lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 3) and bolts (Figure 3, Item 2).
CAUTION
Apply pipe sealant compound to all male threads of hydraulic pipe threads, using only enough compound to
coat the threads. Do not allow compound to enter a component/fitting or the compound may restrict fluid
4. Remove caps/plugs and apply pipe sealant to male pipe threads of two straight adapters (Figure 3, Item 5).
5. Remove caps/plugs from two hydraulic tubes (Figure 3, Item 6) and reconnect two tubes to two straight pipe-to-tube
adapters (Figure 3, Item 5).
Figure 3. Hydraulic Filter Installation.
0120-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0120
6. Use two personnel to align and install lower panel (Figure 4, Item 5), with door panel (Figure 4, Item 6) attached, onto
and capscrews (Figure 4, Item 3) on underside of semitrailer platform (Figure 4, Item 1). Close door panel.
Figure 4. Hydraulic Filter Installation.

END OF TASK

Open hydraulic oil valve at reservoir (WP 0004).
Release suspension valve (hydraulic control console) to center position (WP 0004).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0120-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0121
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK CYLINDER HYDRAULICS
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Suspension shutoff valve pulled out to ADJUST position
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) (WP 0004)
Gooseneck isolation valve pulled out to ADJUST position
Materials/Parts
(WP 0004)
Gooseneck lowered to lowest position (WP 0007 )
Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (W P 0008)
Suspension isolation valves at four corners of platform
closed (WP 0004)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the gooseneck cylinder hydraulics system.
0121-1
0121 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Avoid prolonged exposure to skin and wear long
sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face shield. If hydraulic fluid gets into the eyes, flush them immediately
with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets on skin, wash thoroughly with soap and
water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking or injury to personnel may result.
CAUTION
NOTE
This procedure is for removal/installation of all gooseneck cylinder hydraulic components. Perform
this procedure, or any portion of this procedure, as required to complete necessary repairs. Use
the hydraulic schematic rear foldout Figure, Item FO-3 as a guide for hose routing.
1. On streetside of semitrailer (Figure 1, Item 1), remove screw (Figure 1, Item 4) and two block clamp halves (Figure 1,
Item 5).
2. Tag and remove two hoses (Figure 1, Item 3) and hose (Figure 1, Item 2). Install caps/plugs into all openings.
3. Remove two straight adapters (Figure 1, Item 6), preformed packings (Figure 1, Item 7), elbow (Figure 1, Item 8), and
preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 9). Install caps/plugs into all openings. Discard preformed packings.
0121-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0121
Figure 1. Streetside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Removal.

4. On curbside of semitrailer (Figure 2, Item 1), remove screw (Figure 2, Item 9) and two block clamp halves (Figure 2,
Item 8).
5. Tag and remove two hoses (Figure 2, Item 2) and hose (Figure 2, Item 3). Install caps/plugs into all openings.
6. Remove two straight adapters (Figure 2, Item 7), preformed packings (Figure 2, Item 6), elbow (Figure 2, Item 5), and
preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 4). Install caps/plugs into all openings. Discard preformed packings.
Figure 2. Curbside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Removal.
0121-3
0121 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
9. Inspect other components for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, and pitting. If parts are defective, replace as required.
END OF TASK
0121-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0121
INSTALLATION
1. Remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 4) and two new preformed
packings (Figure 3, Item 6).
2. On curbside of semitrailer (Figure 3, Item 1), install new preformed packing (Figure 3, Item 4), elbow (Figure 3, Item 5),
two new preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 6), and two straight adapters (Figure 3, Item 7).
3. Remove caps/plugs and install hose (Figure 3, Item 3) and two hoses (Figure 3, Item 2).
4. Install two clamp block halves (Figure 3, Item 8) and secure with screw (Figure 3, Item 9).
Figure 3. Curbside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Installation.
0121-5
0121 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. Remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 9) and two new preformed
packings (Figure 4, Item 7).
6. On streetside of semitrailer (Figure 4, Item 1), install new preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 9), elbow (Figure 4, Item 8),
two new preformed packings (Figure 4, Item 7), and two straight adapters (Figure 4, Item 6).
7. Remove caps/plugs and install hose (Figure 4, Item 2) and two hoses (Figure 4, Item 3).
8. Install two clamp block halves (Figure 4, Item 5) and secure with screw (Figure 4, Item 4).
Figure 4. Streetside Gooseneck Cylinder Hydraulics Installation.

END OF TASK
Check/fill hydraulic tank (WP 0039).
Perform hydraulic system bleeding (WP 0041).
Operate gooseneck to check for proper operation (WP 0007).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0121-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK CYLINDER
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Bolt, 4 in. (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Screw, Self-Locking (1)
Lifting Strap (WP 0168, Item 25) Bolt, Lubrication, Self-Locking (1)
3
Materials/Parts
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Lockwasher (1) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Lockwasher (1) If removing curbside gooseneck cylinder, Auxiliary Power
V-Ring Seal (1) Unit (APU) control box removed (WP 0140)
Bolt, 2 in. (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the gooseneck cylinder.
0122-1
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Gooseneck cylinder weighs in excess of 400 lb (182 kg). Ensure cylinder and gooseneck are adequately
supported during removal or serious injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result.
performing maintenance or serious injury to personnel may result.
with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking. Failure to follow this warning
2. Pull out handle of suspension shutoff valve to ADJUST position (WP 0004). Be sure handle of gooseneck isolation valve
is in ADJUST position (WP 0007).
0122-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
NOTE
When gooseneck is lowered onto gooseneck support, both gooseneck cylinders should be almost completely
extended to accommodate removal of the upper cylinder pin mounting hardware.
3. Lower gooseneck (Figure 1, Item 1) onto gooseneck support (Figure 1, Item 2) approximately 37 in. (94 cm) (WP 0007).
Shut down APU (WP 0005).
Figure 1. Lowering Gooseneck onto Supports.
0122-3
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Lifting strap must be placed around gooseneck cylinder in noose to prevent injury to personnel.
NOTE
The following steps allow for the removal of one gooseneck cylinder. Repeat steps as
required to remove the other gooseneck cylinder.
4. Attach lifting strap (Figure 2, Item 4) to gooseneck cylinder (Figure 2, Item 5). Wrap lifting strap around gooseneck
cylinder and through loop in strap to form slip-hook (noose).
5. Position suitable lifting device (Figure 2, Item 2) directly over top of gooseneck cylinder (Figure 2, Item 5). Lower hook
(Figure 2, Item 3) of lifting device and attach end of lifting strap (Figure 2, Item 4) to lifting device.
CAUTION
DO NOT apply too much force when taking up slack or excess pressure will be applied on upper
cylinder pin and removal may be complicated. Damage to equipment may result.
6. Take up slack in lifting strap (Figure 2, Item 4). Slant lifting strap toward centerline of gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 1).
7. Place drain pan (Figure 2, Item 9) under front edge of platform (Figure 2, Item 6) near cylinder hydraulic lines (Figure 2,
Item 10) and valve connection points beneath platform.
WARNING
Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly or injury to personnel may result.
0122-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
CAUTION
NOTE
Remove small hex fitting from large hex fitting.
8. Remove screw (Figure 2, Item 8) and block clamp (Figure 2, Item 7). Tag and slowly disconnect three hydraulic lines
(Figure 2, Item 10) from three hydraulic valves under platform. Install protective caps/plugs into valves only.
NOTE
Ensure ends of hydraulic lines are secured to drain pan and are pointing directly into the drain
pan to prevent hydraulic fluid from spraying as the gooseneck cylinder is compressed. To prevent
siphoning, do not allow ends of hoses to enter hydraulic fluid.
9. Place ends of hydraulic lines (Figure 2, Item 10) into drain pan (Figure 2, Item 9). Secure lines to drain pan using duct tape
to prevent hydraulic lines from pulling out under pressure as gooseneck cylinder (Figure 2, Item 5) is compressed.
Figure 2. Gooseneck Cylinder Removal.
0122-5
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. Remove screw (Figure 3, Item 1) and lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 2) if present. Remove bolt (Figure 3, Item 9), lockwasher
(Figure 3, Item 10), and washer (Figure 3, Item 11). Discard screw and lockwashers.
CAUTION
Bolt must be fully engaged (bottomed out) in pin prior to striking with hammer or
11. Install 2 in. (5.1 cm) hardened bolt into hole in upper bushing (Figure 3, Item 3). Strike bolt with hammer. When bolt no
longer can be struck, remove bolt and install 4 in. (10.2 cm) hardened bolt. Drive out upper cylinder pin (Figure 3,
Item 7). Remove and discard V-ring seal (Figure 3, Item 6).
12. Drive upper bushing (Figure 3, Item 3) out of gooseneck cylinder (Figure 3, Item 12) and gooseneck (Figure 3, Item 5).
Remove V-ring seal (Figure 3, Item 4) from upper bushing. Discard V-ring seal.
13. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 8) from upper cylinder pin (Figure 3, Item 7).

14. Use crowbar to pry downward on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 4, Item 16) while lowering lifting device (Figure 4,
Item 2) and allow gooseneck cylinder to start to compress. Ensure fluid from hydraulic lines (Figure 4, Item 10) is
draining into drain pan (Figure 4, Item 9).
15. Continue to lower lifting device (Figure 4, Item 2) and pry downward on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 4, Item 16) until
upper bearing casting (Figure 4, Item 17) on gooseneck cylinder is lower than cylinder mount (Figure 4, Item 18) on
gooseneck lug (Figure 4, Item 1).
16. Ensure gooseneck cylinder (Figure 4, Item 16) is secured by keeping tension on lifting device (Figure 4, Item 2).
17. Disconnect three hydraulic lines (Figure 4, Item 10) from gooseneck cylinder (Figure 4, Item 16). Install caps/plugs
into lines and gooseneck cylinder.
0122-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
18. Remove screw (Figure 4, Item 3), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 4), and washer (Figure 4, Item 5) from lower cylinder pin
(Figure 4, Item 6). Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 4, Item 13), bolt (Figure 4, Item 14), and lockwashers (Figure 4,
Item 15) if present. Discard bolt and lockwashers.
CAUTION
Bolt must be fully engaged (bottomed out) in pin prior to striking with hammer
or damage to equipment will result.
19. Install a 2 in. (5.1 cm) hardened bolt into hole in lower bushing (Figure 4, Item 12). Strike bolt with hammer. When bolt
can no longer be struck, remove bolt and install a 4 in. (10.2 cm) hardened bolt. Drive out lower cylinder pin (Figure 4,
Item 6). Remove and discard V-ring seal (Figure 4, Item 7).
WARNING
All personnel in area of gooseneck cylinder must stand clear of cylinder and lifting device while
lifting device is repositioned or injury to personnel may result.
20. Drive lower bushing (Figure 4, Item 12) out of gooseneck cylinder (Figure 4, Item 16) and platform lug weldment (Figure
4, Item 8). Remove V-ring seal (Figure 4, Item 11) from lower bushing. Discard V-ring seal.
0122-7
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
Top of gooseneck cylinder may start to move outward, away from platform, as lifting device is
repositioned/centered over transmission jack. Lifting device operator must pay out slack to lifting strap as
the lifting device is moved to prevent excess strain on lifting straps or damage to equipment may result.
21. While maintaining tension on lifting strap (Figure 5, Item 3), reposition lifting device (Figure 5, Item 1) over top of
transmission jack (Figure 5, Item 5) near platform lug weldment (Figure 5, Item 2).
22. Lower lifting device (Figure 5, Item 1) until gooseneck cylinder (Figure 5, Item 4) is supported on transmission jack
(Figure 5, Item 5).
23. Secure gooseneck cylinder (Figure 5, Item 4) to transmission jack (Figure 5, Item 5).
24. Loosen and remove lifting strap (Figure 5, Item 3) from hook (Figure 5, Item 6) of lifting device (Figure 5, Item 1). Leave
lifting strap on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 5, Item 4).

END OF TASK
0122-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
INSTALLATION
WARNING
Lifting strap must be placed around gooseneck cylinder in noose to prevent injury to personnel.
1. If not already installed, wrap lifting strap (Figure 6, Item 3) around gooseneck cylinder (Figure 6, Item 4) through loop to
form slip-hook (noose). If necessary, secure gooseneck cylinder onto transmission jack (Figure 6, Item 5).
2. Maneuver transmission jack (Figure 6, Item 5) near platform lug weldment (Figure 6, Item 2).
3. Raise gooseneck cylinder (Figure 6, Item 4) into position, attach lifting device (Figure 6, Item 1) and hook (Figure 6,
Item 6) to lifting straps (Figure 6, Item 3), and then push transmission jack (Figure 6, Item 5) out of the way.
Figure 6. Gooseneck Cylinder Installation.
0122-9
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. Raise lifting device (Figure 7, Item 2) and install gooseneck cylinder (Figure 7, Item 13) into lug weldment (Figure 7,
Item 8) of gooseneck (Figure 7, Item 1). Ensure cylinder bearings are approximately straight and ready for lower cylinder
pin (Figure 7, Item 6) installation.
WARNING
5. Apply grease to lower cylinder pin (Figure 7, Item 6) and lower bushing (Figure 7, Item 10). Install V-ring seal (Figure 7,
Item 7) onto lower cylinder pin and V-ring seal (Figure 7, Item 9) onto lower bushing.
6. Hand-install lower cylinder pin (Figure 7, Item 6) through platform lug weldment (Figure 7, Item 8) until pin is partially
started into lower bearing (Figure 7, Item 10) on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 7, Item 13).
CAUTION
When driving lower cylinder pin through cylinder and platform lug weldment, use caution so that the pin is
driven in straight or cylinder bearing may turn the pin and cause damage to lower cylinder pin or V-ring seal.
7. Tap lower cylinder pin (Figure 7, Item 6) with hammer or heavy object until pin is through platform lug weldment (Figure
7, Item 8) and lower bearing (Figure 7, Item 10) on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 7, Item 13).
0122-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
8. Align hole in end of lower cylinder pin (Figure 7, Item 6) with hole in platform lug weldment (Figure 7, Item 8) and secure
lower cylinder pin with washer (Figure 7, Item 5), lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 4), and bolt (Figure 7, Item 3).
9. Install lower bushing (Figure 7, Item 10) onto lower cylinder pin (Figure 7, Item 6) and secure with self-locking lube-bolt
(Figure 7, Item 12). Use torque wrench to torque self-locking lube-bolt to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136 to 149 Nm). Install
lubrication fitting (Figure 7, Item 11) into self-locking lube-bolt.
0122-11
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
One person must be positioned on the platform with a crowbar to prevent the gooseneck cylinder from
making contact with platform step pneumatic or hydraulic lines, or damage to equipment may result.
10. Position a person on the platform (Figure 8, Item 7) with crowbar to be used to prevent gooseneck cylinder (Figure
8, Item 16) from hitting platform step hydraulic or pneumatic lines located near bottom of gooseneck and platform
(Figure 8, Item 7).
11. Use lifting device (Figure 8, Item 6) to raise gooseneck cylinder (Figure 8, Item 16) into gooseneck lug (Figure 8, Item 4).
12. Use crowbar and lifting device (Figure 8, Item 6) to align upper bearing (Figure 8, Item 13) of gooseneck cylinder
(Figure 8, Item 16) between gooseneck lugs (Figure 8, Item 4).
13. Maintain tension on lifting strap (Figure 8, Item 5) with lifting device (Figure 8, Item 6).
14. Apply grease to upper cylinder pin (Figure 8, Item 9) and upper bushing (Figure 8, Item 2). Install a V-ring seal (Figure 8,
Item 8) onto upper cylinder pin and V-ring seal (Figure 8, Item 3) onto upper bushing.
15. Hand-install upper cylinder pin (Figure 8, Item 9) through gooseneck mounting lug (Figure 8, Item 4) until pin is partially
started into bearing casting (Figure 8, Item 18) on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 8, Item 16).
CAUTION
When driving upper cylinder pin through cylinder and mounting lug on gooseneck, use
caution so that the pin is driven in straight or cylinder bearing may turn the pin and
cause damage to upper cylinder pin or V-ring seal.
16. Drive upper cylinder pin (Figure 8, Item 9) through gooseneck mounting lug (Figure 8, Item 4) and upper bearing casting
(Figure 8, Item 18) on gooseneck cylinder (Figure 8, Item 16).
0122-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0122
17. Align hole in end of upper cylinder pin (Figure 8, Item 9) with gooseneck mounting lug (Figure 8, Item 4) and secure
upper cylinder pin with washer (Figure 8, Item 13), lockwasher (Figure 8, Item 12), and bolt (Figure 8, Item 11). Use
torque wrench to torque bolt to 325 to 375 lb-ft (441 to 509 Nm).
18. Install upper bushing (Figure 8, Item 2) onto upper cylinder pin (Figure 8, Item 9) and secure with self-locking screw
(Figure 8, Item 1). Use torque wrench to torque screw to 100 to 110 lb-ft (136 to 149 Nm).
19. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 8, Item 10) into upper cylinder pin (Figure 8, Item 9).
20. Lower lifting device (Figure 8, Item 6) and remove lifting strap (Figure 8, Item 5).
21. Unwrap lifting strap (Figure 8, Item 5) from gooseneck cylinder (Figure 8, Item 16).
22. Remove caps/plugs and install three hydraulic lines (Figure 8, Item 17) onto gooseneck cylinder (Figure 8, Item 16) and
three hydraulic valves under platform. Install block clamp (Figure 8, Item 15) and screw (Figure 8, Item 14).
0122-13
0122 TM 9-2330-381-13
23. Refill hydraulic reservoir (WP 0039).

25. Operate gooseneck valve handle (WP 0004) and operate gooseneck (WP 0007) to remove air bubbles from hydraulic lines.
26. Remove gooseneck support (Figure 9, Item 2) from under gooseneck (Figure 9, Item 1).

END OF TASK
Refer to WP 0041 and bleed gooseneck hydraulics.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0122-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0123
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC TANK FILTER
INITIAL SETUP:
Personnel Required
Tools and Special Tools 1
Materials/Parts Hydraulic tank assembly disassembled (WP 0126)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the hydraulic tank filter.
0123-1
0123 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
gloves, and goggles or face shield. If hydraulic fluid gets in the eyes, flush them immediately with water and
maintenance.
CAUTION
1. Use an automotive adjustable wrench to unscrew and remove hydraulic tank filter (Figure 1, Item 1) from fitting (Figure 1,
Item 2) inside of hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 3).
Figure 1. Hydraulic Tank Filter Removal.

END OF TASK
0123-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0123
REPAIR
WARNING
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141° to 198°F (61° to 92°C) and for Type lll it is
200° to 241°F (93° to 116°C).
equipment.
1. Clean hydraulic filter with dry cleaning solvent and dry with compressed air.
2. Inspect hydraulic filter for holes, corrosion, clogging, or evidence of collapse. Replace filter if required.
END OF TASK
0123-3
0123 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use an automotive adjustable wrench to thread hydraulic filter (Figure 2, Item 1) onto fitting (Figure 2, Item 2) inside
hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 3).
Figure 2. Hydraulic Tank Filter Installation.

END OF TASK
Assemble hydraulic tank assembly (WP 0126).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0123-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PLATFORM SUSPENSION HYDRAULICS
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Self-Locking Nut (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Self-Locking Nut (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28)
Materials/Parts Gooseneck lowered to lowest position, if uncoupled
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Front support legs lowered supporting platform (WP 0011)
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Rear support legs lowered supporting platform (WP 0012)
Rag, Wiping, Cotton, and Cotton Synthetic (WP 0170, Item 23) Platform lowered onto support legs to relieve all pressure
Solvent, Dry Cleaningt (WP 0170, Item 32) on suspension gauges (WP 0008)
Strap, Tiedown, Electrical (WP 0170, Item 33) Gooseneck isolation and suspension isolation SHUTOFF
Preformed Packing (20) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) valves pulled out to ADJUST position (WP 0004)
Preformed Packing (7) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the platform suspension hydraulics.
0124-1
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time to cool before performing maintenance.
• Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly.
CAUTION
to prevent dirt, moisture, or foreign material from entering the hydraulic system,
NOTE
This procedure is for removal/installation of all platform suspension hydraulics components.
Perform this procedure, or any portion of this procedure, as required to complete the necessary
repair. Use the hydraulic schematic shown in Figure 1 as a guide for hose routing.
1. At 16 places (Figure 1, Item A), eight curbside and eight streetside, remove screw (Figure 2, Item 2) and block clamp
(Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 1. Hydraulic Hose Routing.
0124-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
REMOVAL - Cont.
Figure 2. Block Clamp A Removal.
2. At ten places (Figure 1, Item B), streetside, remove screw (Figure 3, Item 1) and block clamp (Figure 3, Item 2).
Figure 3. Block Clamp B Removal.
0124-3
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
REMOVAL - Cont.
3. Remove from bogies Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 5 (Figure 4, Item 2), screw (Figure 4, Item 4) and block clamp (Figure 4, Item 3).
4. Remove tiedown straps as required. Remove two self-locking nuts (Figure 4, Item 8), washers (Figure 4, Item 9), screws
(Figure 4, Item 11), and clamps (Figure 4, Item 10). Discard tiedown straps and self-locking nuts.
5. Remove two hose shields (WP 0066).
6. Tag and remove two hoses (Figure 4, Item 6) and preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 5). Remove loom (Figure 4, Item 7)
from two hoses (Figure 4, Item 6). Install caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
7. At curbside and streetside bogie No. 4 (Figure 4, Item 1), remove nut (Figure 4, Item 14), screw (Figure 4, Item 12), and
block clamp (Figure 4, Item 13).
8. Remove tiedown straps as required. Remove two self-locking nuts (Figure 4, Item 8), washers (Figure 4, Item 9), screws
(Figure 4, Item 11), and clamps (Figure 4, Item 10). Discard tiedown straps and self-locking nuts.
9. Remove two hose shields (WP 0066).
10. Tag and remove two hoses (Figure 4, Item 6) and preformed packing (Figure 4, Item 5). Remove loom (Figure 4, Item 7)
from two hoses. Install caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
Figure 4. Bogies Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 Removal.
0124-4
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL - Cont.
11. At curbside No. 1 bogie, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 5, Item 1 and Item 3) and tube tees (Figure 5, Item 2). Install
caps/plugs in all openings.
Figure 5. Curbside No. 1 Bogie Removal.

12. At curbside No. 2 bogie, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 6, Item 1 and Item 4), tubes (Figure 6, Item 3), and tube tees (Figure 6,
Item 2). Install caps/plugs in all openings.

13. At curbside No. 3 bogie, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 7, Item 1 and Item 4), tubes (Figure 7, Item 3), and elbows (Figure 7,
0124-5
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
REMOVAL - Cont.
14. At curbside No. 4 bogie, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 8, Item 1 and Item 4), tubes (Figure 8, Item 2), and elbows (Figure 8,

15. At curbside No. 5 bogie, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 9, Item 1 and Item 2). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
0124-6
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL - Cont.
16. At streetside bogies Nos. 1 and 2, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 10, Item 3 and Item 4), tubes (Figure 10, Item 2), and
tube tees (Figure 10, Item 1). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
17. At streetside bogie No. 3, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 10, Item 6 and Item 7) and elbows (Figure 10, Item 5). Install
caps/plugs in all openings.
18. At streetside bogie No. 4, tag and remove three tubes (Figure 10, Item 14, Item 15, and Item 17), elbow (Figure 10, Item 16),
tube (Figure 10, Item 12), coupling nut (Figure 10, Item 13), reducer (Figure 10, Item 11), and tee (Figure 10, Item 10).
Install caps/plugs in all openings.
19. At streetside bogie No. 5, tag and remove two tubes (Figure 10, Item 8 and Item 9). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
Figure 10. Streetside Bogies 1 thru 5 Removal.
0124-7
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
REMOVAL - Cont.
20. Just aft of each bogie, curbside and streetside, remove two straight adapters (Figure 11, Item 9) and preformed packing
(Figure 11, Item 8) from suspension isolation valve assembly (Figure 11, Item 7). Remove two nuts (Figure 11, Item 2),
nipples (Figure 11, Item 5), preformed packing (Figure 11, Item 6), and suspension isolation valve assembly (Figure 11,
Item 7). Remove three self-locking nuts (Figure 11, Item 3), washers (Figure 11, Item 4), and T-bracket (Figure 11,
Item 1). Install caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing and self-locking nuts.
Figure 11. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Removal.
0124-8
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL - Cont.
21. At curbside front, remove four screws (Figure 12, Item 27) and two block clamps (Figure 12, Item 26).
22. Tag and remove three tubes (Figure 12, Item 1, Item 17, and Item 18), coupling nut (Figure 12, Item 16), reducer
(Figure 12, Item 15), and tee (Figure 12, Item 14). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
23. Remove reducer (Figure 12, Item 10), tube nipple (Figure 12, Item 11), nut (Figure 12, Item 12), and preformed packing
(Figure 12, Item 13). Install caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
24. Tag and remove tube (Figure 12, Item 2), coupling nut (Figure 12, Item 22), reducer (Figure 12, Item 23), reducer
(Figure 12, Item 8), tee (Figure 12, Item 7), nut (Figure 12, Item 25), preformed packing (Figure 12, Item 24), and tube
nipple (Figure 12, Item 19). Install caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
25. Remove nut (Figure 12, Item 9), tube nipple (Figure 12, Item 20), and preformed packing (Figure 12, Item 21). Install
caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
26. Tag and remove tube (Figure 12, Item 3), coupling nut (Figure 12, Item 4), reducer (Figure 12, Item 5), and tee
(Figure 12, Item 6). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
Figure 12. Curbside Tubing Removal.
0124-9
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
REMOVAL - Cont.
27. At streetside front, remove four screws (Figure 13, Item 21) and two block clamps (Figure13, Item 20).
28. Tag and remove four tubes (Figure 13, Item 4, Item 3, Item 6, and Item 1).
29. Remove tube nipple (Figure13, Item 5), coupling nut (Figure 13, Item 7), reducer (Figure 13, Item 8), tee (Figure 13,
Item 24), and preformed packing (Figure 13, Item 23).
30. Remove reducer (Figure 13, Item11), nut (Figure 13, Item 10), tube nipple (Figure 13, Item 9), and preformed packing
(Figure 13, Item 22). Install caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
31. Tag and remove tube (Figure 13, Item 2).
32. Remove coupling nut (Figure 13, Item 17), reducer (Figure 13, Item 16), reducer (Figure 13, Item 15), tee (Figure 13,
Item 14), and preformed packing (Figure 13, Item 13).
33. Remove nut (Figure 13, Item 19), tube nipple (Figure 13, Item 18), and preformed packing (Figure 13, Item 12). Install
caps/plugs in all openings. Discard preformed packing.
Figure 13. Streetside Front Tubing Removal.
0124-10
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL - Cont.
34. At curbside, remove screw (Figure 14, Item 6) and block clamp (Figure 14, Item 7). Tag and remove two tubes (Figure 14,
Item 8 and Item 9) and tube tees (Figure 14, Item 1). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
35. Tag and remove two tubes (Figure 14, Item 3 and Item 4), tube tees (Figure 14, Item 2), and adapters (Figure 14, Item 5).
Install caps/plugs in all openings.
Figure 14. Curbside Tubing Removal.
0124-11
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
REMOVAL - Cont.
36. Tag and remove tube (Figure 15, Item 2), tube nipple (Figure 15, Item 3), tube (Figure 15, Item 4), reducer (Figure 15,
Item 5), and tube (Figure 15, Item 1). Install caps/plugs in all openings.
Figure 15. Curbside/Streetside Tubing Removal.

END OF TASK
0124-12
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
WARNING
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141° to 198°F (61° to 92°C) and for Type lll it is 200°
to 241°F (93° to 116°C).
equipment.
• Compressed air used for cleaning/drying may create airborne particles that may injure unprotected eyes. Always
3. Inspect tubes for kinks, deterioration, chafing, gouges, and loose fittings. If tube is damaged, replace tube.
4. Inspect other components for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, broken castings, and pitting. If parts are defective,
END OF TASK
0124-13
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
• Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threads of hydraulic fitting, using only enough compound to coat
the threads. DO NOT allow the compound to enter a component/fitting or the compound may restrict fluid
• Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the tightened fitting positioned
as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings DO NOT interfere with one another, or damage to
1. At curbside, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to male threads. Install tube (Figure 16, Item 1), reducer (Figure 16,
Item 5), tube (Figure 16, Item 4), tube nipple (Figure 16, Item 3), and tube (Figure 16, Item 2).
Figure 16. Curbside Tubing Installation.
0124-14
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION - Cont.
2. Remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to male threads. Install two adapters (Figure 17, Item 5), tube tees (Figure 17,
Item 2), and tubes (Figure 17, Item 4 and Item 3).
3. Remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to male threads. Install two tube tees (Figure 17, Item 1) and tubes (Figure17, Item 9
and Item 8). Install block clamp (Figure 17, Item 7) and screw (Figure 17, Item 6).
Figure 17. Tubing Installation.
0124-15
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
4. At streetside front, remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to two preformed packings (Figure 18, Item 12 and
Item 13). Apply pipe sealant to all male threads.
5. Install preformed packing (Figure 18, Item 12), tube nipple (Figure 18, Item 18), and nut (Figure 18, Item 19).
6. Install preformed packing (Figure 18, Item 13), tee (Figure 18, Item 14), reducer (Figure 18, Item 15), reducer (Figure 18,
Item 16), coupling nut (Figure 18, Item 17), and tube (Figure 18, Item 2).
7. Remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to two preformed packings (Figure 18, Item 22, and Item 23). Apply pipe
sealant to all male threads. Install preformed packing (Figure 18 item 22), tube nipple (Figure 18 item 9), nut (Figure 18,
Item 10), and reducer (Figure 18, Item 11).
8. Install preformed packing (Figure 18, Item 23), tee (Figure 18, Item 24), reducer (Figure 18 Item 8), coupling nut
(Figure 18, Item 7), tube (Figure 18, Item 6), and tube nipple (Figure 18, Item 5). Install four tubes (Figure 18, Item 1,
9. Install two block clamps (Figure 18, Item 20) and secure with four screws (Figure 18, Item 21).
Figure 18. Streetside Tubing Installation.
0124-16
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. At curbside front, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install tee (Figure 19, Item 6), reducer
(Figure 19, Item 5), coupling nut (Figure 19, Item 4), and tube (Figure 19, Item 3).
11. Remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to preformed packing (Figure 19, Item 21). Apply pipe sealant to all male
threads. Install preformed packing (Figure 19, Item 21), tube nipple (Figure 19, Item 20), and nut (Figure 19, Item 9).
threads. Install tube nipple (Figure 19, Item 19), preformed packing (Figure 19, Item 24), nut (Figure 19, Item 25), tee
(Figure 19, Item 7), reducer (Figure 19, Item 8), reducer (Figure 19, Item 23), coupling nut (Figure 19, Item 22), and
tube (Figure 19, Item 2).
threads. Install preformed packing (Figure 19, Item 13), nut (Figure 19, Item 12), tube nipple (Figure 19, Item 11), and
reducer (Figure 19, Item 10).
14. Remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install tee (Figure 19, Item 14), reducer (Figure 19, Item 15),
coupling nut (Figure 19, Item 16), and three tubes (Figure 19, Item 1, Item 17, and Item 18).
15. Install two block clamps (Figure 19, Item 26) and secure with four screws (Figure 19, Item 27).
Figure 19. Curbside Tubing Installation.
0124-17
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
16. Remove caps/plugs. Apply petroleum jelly to two preformed packings (Figure 20, Item 6) and two preformed packings
(Figure 20, Item 8). Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Just aft of each bogie, curbside and streetside, install T-bracket
(Figure 20, Item 1) and secure with three washers (Figure 20, Item 4) and self-locking nuts (Figure 20, Item 3). Install
suspension isolation valve assembly (Figure 20, Item 7), two preformed packings (Figure 20, Item 6), nipples (Figure 20,
Item 5), and nuts (Figure 20, Item 2). Install two preformed packings (Figure 20, Item 8) and straight adapters
Figure 20. Suspension Isolation Valve Assembly Installation.

17. At streetside bogie No. 5, remove caps/plugs. Install two tubes (Figure 21, Item 8 and Item 9).
18. At streetside bogie No. 4, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install tee (Figure 21, Item 10),
reducer (Figure 21, Item 11), coupling nut (Figure 21, Item 13), tube (Figure 21, Item 12), elbow (Figure 21, Item 16), and
three tubes (Figure 21, Item 14, Item 15, and Item 17).
19. At streetside bogie No. 3, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install two elbows (Figure 21,
Item 5) and tubes (Figure 21, Item 6 and Item 7).
20. At streetside bogies No. 1 and 2, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install two tube tees
(Figure 21, Item 1), tubes (Figure 21, Item 2), and tubes (Figure 2, Item 3 and Item 4).
0124-18
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 21. Streetside Bogies 1 thru 5 Installation.

21. At curbside No. 5 bogie, remove caps/plugs. Install two tubes (Figure 22, Item 2 and Item 1).
Figure 22. Curbside No. 5 Bogie Installation.
0124-19
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
22. At curbside No. 4 bogie, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install two elbows (Figure 23, Item 3),
tubes (Figure 23, Item 2), and tubes (Figure 23, Item 4 and Item 1).

23. At curbside No. 3 bogie, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install two elbows (Figure 24, Item 2),
tubes (Figure 24, Item 3), and tubes (Figure 24, Item 4 and Item 1).

24. At curbside No. 2 bogie, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install two tube tees (Figure 25, Item
2), tubes (Figure 25, Item 3), and tubes (Figure 25, Item 4 and Item 1).
0124-20
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
25. At curbside No. 1 bogie, remove caps/plugs. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install two tube tees (Figure 26,
Item 2) and tubes (Figure 26, Item 3 and Item 1).
0124-21
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
26. Remove caps/plugs from bogie No. 4 (Figure 27, Item 1). Apply petroleum jelly to two preformed packings
(Figure 27, Item 5). Slide loom (Figure 27, Item 7) onto two hoses (Figure 27, Item 6). Install two preformed packings
(Figure 27, Item 5) and hoses (Figure 27, Item 6).
27. Install two hose shields (WP 0066).
28. Install two clamps (Figure 27, Item 10) and secure with two screws (Figure 27, Item 11), washers (Figure 27, Item 9), and
self-locking nuts (Figure 27, Item 8). Install tiedown straps as required.
29. Install block clamp (Figure 27, Item 13) and secure with screw (Figure 27, Item 12) and nut (Figure 27, Item 14).
30. Remove caps/plugs from bogies Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 5 (Figure 27, Item 2) curbside and streetside. Apply petroleum jelly to
two preformed packings (Figure 27, Item 5). Slide loom (Figure 27, Item 7) onto two hoses (Figure 27 Item 6). Install two
preformed packings (Figure 27, Item 5) and hoses (Figure 27, Item 6).
31. Install two hose shields (WP 0066).
32. Install two clamps (Figure 27, Item 10) and secure with two screws (Figure 27, Item 11), washers (Figure 27, Item 9), and
self-locking nuts (Figure 27, Item 8). Install tiedown straps as required.
33. Install block clamp (Figure 27, Item 3) and secure with screw (Figure 27, Item 4).
Figure 27. Bogies Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 Installation.
0124-22
0124 TM 9-2330-381-13
34. At ten places streetside (Figure 28, Item B), install block clamp (Figure 29, Item 2) and secure with screw (Figure 29, Item 1).
Figure 29. Block Clamp B.
0124-23
TM 9-2330-381-13 0124
35. At 16 places (Figure 30, Item A), eight curbside and eight streetside, install block clamp (Figure 31, Item 1) and secure with
screw (Figure 31, Item 2).
Figure 31. Block Clamp A.

END OF TASK
Adjust platform and check for proper operation (WP 0008).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0124-24
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
FIELD MAINTENANCE
PLATFORM STEERING HYDRAULICS
INITIAL SETUP:
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform,
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) operating front support legs (WP 0011), operating rear
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) support legs (WP 0012)
Rag Wiping, Cotton, and Cotton Synthetic (WP 0170, Item 23) Steering system hydraulic bled to relieve pressure
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) (WP 0041)
Preformed Packing (4) (TM9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the platform steering hydraulics.
0125-1
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time to cool before performing maintenance,
or injury to personnel may result.
0125-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
CAUTION
NOTE
This procedure is for removal/installation of all platform steering hydraulics components. Perform
this procedure, or any portion of this procedure, as required to complete the necessary repair.
Use the hydraulic schematic (Figure 1) as a guide for hose routing.
1. At 16 places (Figure 1, Item 1), eight curbside and eight streetside, remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 3), block clamp
(Figure 1, Item 2), two screws (Figure 1, Item 5), and block clamp (Figure 1, Item 4).
Figure 1. Platform Steering Hydraulics.
0125-3
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
2. At streetside front (Figure 2, Item 1), remove three screws (Figure 2, Item 2), block clamps (Figure 2, Item 3), and
clamp (Figure 2, Item 4).
0125-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
3. At curbside rear and streetside rear (Figure 3, Item 1), tag and remove hose (Figure 3, Item 3), boss coupling (Figure
3, Item 2), hose (Figure 3, Item 5), tube nipple (Figure 3, Item 4), two tube elbows (Figure 3, Item 6), two preformed
packings (Figure 3, Item 7), and pipe plug (Figure 3, Item 8). Install caps/plugs in all openings (Figure 3, Item 9).
Discard preformed packings.
0125-5
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. At curbside and streetside (Figure 4, Item 1), tag and remove tube (Figure 4, Item 6), boss coupling (Figure 4, Item 7),
tube (Figure 4, Item 8), tube (Figure 4, Item 5), tube nipple (Figure 4, Item 4), and tube (Figure 4, Item 3). Install
caps/plugs in all openings (Figure 4, Item 2).
0125-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
5. At curbside front (Figure 5, Item 1), tag and remove tube (Figure 5, Item 2), coupling nut (Figure 5, Item 10), reducer
(Figure 5, Item 9), and tube tee (Figure 5, Item 8). Remove tube (Figure 5, Item 3), coupling nut (Figure 5, Item 5), reducer
(Figure 5, Item 6), and tube tee (Figure 5, Item 7). Install caps/plugs in all openings (Figure 5, Item 4).
0125-7
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. At streetside front (Figure 6, Item 1), tag and remove tube (Figure 6, Item 3), tube elbow (Figure 6, Item 12), reducer
(Figure 6, Item 11), and tube tee (Figure 6, Item 10). Remove tube (Figure 6, Item 4), tube nipple (Figure 6, Item 5), tube
(Figure 6, Item 6), coupling nut (Figure 6, Item 7), reducer (Figure 6, Item 8), and tube tee (Figure 6, Item 9). Install
caps/plugs in all openings (Figure 6, Item 2).
END OF TASK
0125-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
REPAIR
WARNING
SOLVENT CLEANING COMPOUND (DRY

CLEANING SOLVENT)
• The flashpoint for Type II solvent cleaning compound is 141° to 198°F (61° to 92°C) and for Type III it is
200° to 241°F (93° to 116°C).
equipment.
• Compressed air used for cleaning/drying can create airborne particles that may injure the eyes. Always wear
3. Inspect tubes for kinks, deterioration, chafing, gouges, and loose fittings. If tube is damaged, replace tube.
4. Inspect other components for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, broken castings, and pitting. If parts are defective,
END OF TASK
0125-9
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
• Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threads of hydraulic fitting, using only enough compound
to coat the threads. DO NOT allow the compound to enter a component/fitting or the compound may
restrict fluid passages and damage to equipment or equipment failure may result.
• Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the tightened fitting
positioned as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings DO NOT interfere with one another,
1. At streetside front (Figure 7, Item 1), remove caps/plugs from openings (Figure 7, Item 2). Apply pipe sealant to all male
threads. Install tube tee (Figure 7, Item 9), reducer (Figure 7, Item 8), coupling nut (Figure 7, Item 7), tube (Figure 7, Item
6), tube nipple (Figure 7, Item 5), and tube (Figure 7, Item 4). Install tube tee (Figure 7, Item 10), reducer (Figure 7, Item
11), tube elbow (Figure 7, Item 12), and tube (Figure 7, Item 3).
0125-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
2. At curbside front (Figure 8, Item 1), remove caps/plugs from openings (Figure 8, Item 4). Apply pipe sealant to all
male threads. Install tube tee (Figure 8, Item 7), reducer (Figure 8, Item 6), coupling nut (Figure 8, Item 5), and tube
(Figure 8, Item 3). Install tube tee (Figure 8, Item 8), reducer (Figure 8, Item 9), coupling nut (Figure 8, Item 10),
and tube (Figure 8, Item 2).
0125-11
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. At curbside and streetside (Figure 9, Item 1), remove caps/plugs from opening (Figure 9, Item 2). Apply pipe sealant to all
male threads. Install tube (Figure 9, Item 6), tube nipple (Figure 9, Item 7), tube (Figure 9, Item 8), tube (Figure 9, Item 5),
boss coupling (Figure 9, Item 4), and tube (Figure 9, Item 3).
0125-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
4. At curbside and streetside rear (Figure 10, Item 1), remove caps/plugs from opening (Figure 10, Item 9). Apply petroleum
jelly to preformed packing (Figure 10, Item 7). Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Install pipe plug (Figure 10, Item 8),
two preformed packings (Figure 10, Item 7), tube elbows (Figure 10, Item 6), tube nipple (Figure 10, Item 4), hose (Figure
10, Item 5), boss coupling (Figure 10, Item 2), and hose (Figure 10, Item 3).
0125-13
0125 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. At streetside front (Figure 11, Item 1), install clamp (Figure 11, Item 4) and block clamp (Figure 11, Item 3) and secure
with screw (Figure 11, Item 2). Install two block clamps (Figure 11, Item 3) and secure with screws (Figure 11, Item 2).
0125-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0125
6. At 16 places (Figure 11, Item 1), eight curbside and eight streetside, install block clamp (Figure 11, Item 4) and secure with
two screws (Figure 11, Item 5). Install block clamp (Figure 11, Item 2) and secure with two screws (Figure 11, Item 3).

END OF TASK
Check/fill hydraulic tank as required (WP 0039).
Perform steering cylinder bleeding as required (WP 0041).
Operate steering system and check for proper operation (WP 0010).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0125-15/16 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0126
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Gasket (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Petroleum Jelly (WP 0170, Item 21) Gooseneck steps removed (WP 0087)
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Battery removed (WP 0053)
Rag, Wiping, Cotton, and Cotton Synthetic (WP 0170, Item 23) Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) hydraulic line removed from
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) hydraulic tank (WP 0117)
Lockwasher (8) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Preformed Packing (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the hydraulic tank assembly.
0126-1
0126 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time to cool before performing maintenance
CAUTION
0126-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0126
1. From underside of hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 5), remove four nuts (Figure 1, Item 9), eight lockwashers (Figure 1,
Item 4), four nuts (Figure 1, Item 3), two clamp bolt assemblies (Figure 1, Item 1), and two clamp bolt (protective
molding) assemblies (Figure 1, Item 2) from mounting holes (Figure 1, Item 10) on APU frame (Figure 1, Item 7).
2. Slant hydraulic tank (Figure 1, Item 5) forward and remove hydraulic tank from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 7).
3. Remove two retaining (protective molding) straps (Figure 1, Item 6). If necessary, remove six moldings (Figure 1,
Item 8) from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 7).
Figure 1. Hydraulic Tank Assembly.

END OF TASK
0126-3
0126 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Remove filler cap (Figure 2, Item 1), six screws (Figure 2, Item 2), filler neck (Figure 2, Item 3), gasket (Figure 2, Item 4),
and filter (Figure 2, Item 5) from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 17). Cover opening (Figure 2, Item 19) with a wiping
rag. Discard gasket if removed.
2. Remove six nuts (Figure 2, Item 6), washers (Figure 2, Item 7), access cover (Figure 2, Item 8), and gasket (Figure 2, Item
9) from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 17). Cover opening (Figure 2, Item 18) with a wiping rag. Discard gasket.
3. Remove two nuts (Figure 2, Item 10), sight indicator (Figure 2, Item 12), and two preformed packings (Figure 2, Item
11). Remove pipe plug (Figure 2, Item 16) from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 17). Install caps/plugs in opening (Figure
2, Item 15). Discard preformed packings.
4. Remove pipe plug (Figure 2, Item 14) from hydraulic tank (Figure 2, Item 17). Install cap/plug in tank opening (Figure 2,
Item 13). Unscrew and remove hydraulic tank filter (WP 0123).
0126-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0126
WARNING
• The flashpoint for Type II solvent cleaning compound is 141° to 198°F (61° to 92°C) and for Type III it is
200° to 241°F (93° to 116°C).
equipment.
5. Clean hydraulic tank and all other components with dry cleaning solvent, wiping rags, and compressed air.
6. Inspect all components for nicks, burrs, corrosion, stripped threads, broken castings, and pitting. Clean all polished
surfaces using crocus cloth. If parts are defective, replace as required.
7. Inspect magnetic pipe plug for metal particles, which may indicate impending failure in hydraulic system.
END OF TASK
0126-5
0126 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threads of hydraulic fitting, using only enough
compound to coat the threads. DO NOT allow the compound to enter a component/fitting or the
compound may restrict fluid passages and damage to equipment or equipment failure may result.
Note positioning/orientation of fittings on the illustrations. It is important to have the
tightened fitting positioned as shown so that hoses are not too short and fittings DO NOT
interfere with one another, or damage to equipment may result.
1. If removed, apply pipe sealant to threads of pipe plug (Figure 3, Item 14). Remove cap/plug installed in tank opening
(Figure 3, Item 13) in bottom of hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 17) and install pipe plug (Figure 3, Item 14). If removed,
install hydraulic tank filter (WP 0123).
2. Apply pipe sealant to all threads of pipe plug (Figure 3, Item 16). Remove caps/plugs from cover opening (Figure 3, Item
15) on hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 17) and install pipe plug (Figure 3, Item 16).
3. Lubricate two new preformed packings (Figure 3, Item 11) with petroleum jelly. Remove caps/plugs and install two new
preformed packings and sight indicator (Figure 3, Item 12) onto hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 17) and secure with two
4. Remove wiping rag from cover opening (Figure 3, Item 19) and install new gasket (Figure 3, Item 9) and access cover
(Figure 3, Item 8) onto the cover opening (Figure 3, Item 18) on hydraulic tank (Figure 3, Item 17). Secure with six
washers (Figure 3, Item 7) and nuts (Figure 3, Item 6).
5. If removed, install filter (Figure 3, Item 5), new gasket (Figure 3, Item 4), and filler neck (Figure 3, Item 3) onto access
cover (Figure 3, Item 8) and secure with six screws (Figure 3, Item 2). Install filler cap (Figure 3, Item 1).
0126-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0126
0126-7
0126 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Install six moldings (Figure 4, Item 8) and two retaining (protective molding) straps (Figure 4, Item 6) onto APU frame
(Figure 4, Item 7).
7. Install hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 5), slant bottom of tank rearward, and set in place on APU frame (Figure 4, Item 7).
8. Install four nuts (Figure 4, Item 3) onto two clamp bolt assemblies (Figure 4, Item 1). By hand, thread four nuts upward
onto clamp bolt assemblies.
9. Install two clamp bolt (protective molding) assemblies (Figure 4, Item 2) in position on hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 5).
Install two clamp bolt assemblies (Figure 4, Item 1) over clamp bolt (protective molding) assemblies (Figure 4, Item 2) and
use one person to hold in place over mounting holes (Figure 4, Item 10) on APU frame (Figure 4, Item 7).
10. Install four new lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 4) onto two clamp bolt assemblies (Figure 4, Item 1). Lower two clamp bolt
assemblies through mounting holes (Figure 4, Item 10) down onto APU frame (Figure 4, Item 7).
11. Secure hydraulic tank (Figure 4, Item 5) in place with four new lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 4) and four nuts (Figure 4,
Item 9). Tighten four nuts (Figure 4, Item 9) on two clamp bolt assemblies (Figure 4, Item 1) and tighten four nuts (Figure
4, Item 3) on two clamp bolt assemblies (Figure 4, Item 1) down firmly against APU frame (Figure 4, Item 7).

END OF TASK
0126-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0126
Reconnect APU hydraulics to hydraulic tank (WP 0117).
Install gooseneck steps removed (WP 0087).
Check/fill hydraulic tank as required (WP 0039).
Install battery (WP 0053).
Perform hydraulic system bleeding (WP 0041).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0126-9/10 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0127
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK CYLINDER AIR RESERVOIR
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Lockwasher (4) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
1
Materials/Parts
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 17) Gooseneck coupled to tractor or supported by gooseneck
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) stand (Tractor/Semitrailer Coupling and Uncoupling
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) [WP 0013])
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the gooseneck cylinder air reservoir.
0127-1
0127 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Hydraulic fluid may be hot if system has been in operation. Allow time to cool before performing maintenance,
CAUTION
NOTE
Place drain pan under reservoir to catch fluid.
0127-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0127
1. Tag and disconnect hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 1) from straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 3) on reservoir
(Figure 1, Item 2). Allow fluid to drain from reservoir into drain pan. Install caps/plugs in hose opening.
2. Remove breather valve (Figure 1, Item 8) and check valve (Figure 1, Item 7) from reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2). Allow
all fluid in reservoir to drain into drain pan. Install caps/plugs into openings.
3. Remove safety relief valve (Figure 1, Item 9) and straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 3) from reservoir (Figure 1,
4. While supporting reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2), remove four nuts (Figure 1, Item 6), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 5), and
reservoir from platform (Figure 1, Item 4). Discard lockwashers.
Figure 1. Gooseneck Cylinder Air Reservoir Removal.

5. Strain drained hydraulic fluid and check for evidence of metal or gasket particles, which may indicate impending failure
of streetside gooseneck cylinder.
END OF TASK
0127-3
0127 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
WARNING
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141° to 198°F (61° to 92°C) and for Type lll it is
200° to 241°F (93° to 116°C).
equipment.
• Compressed air used for cleaning/drying can create airborne particles that may injure the eyes. Always wear
1. Inspect interior of tank for mold, mildew, or fungus. Clean interior of tank thoroughly with dry cleaning solvent to ensure
all mold, mildew, and fungus have been removed. Clean all parts removed with dry cleaning solvent.
2. Inspect all components for nicks, burrs, dents, corrosion, stripped threads, broken castings, and pitting. If parts are
defective, replace as required.
END OF TASK
0127-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0127
INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Apply pipe sealant compound to all male pipe threads of hydraulic fitting, using
only enough compound to coat the threads. DO NOT allow the compound to enter
a component/fitting, or the compound may restrict or block fluid passages and
damage to equipment or equipment failure may result.
1. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Remove caps/plugs and install check valve (Figure 1, Item 7), breather (Figure 1,
Item 8), and safety relief valve (Figure 1, Item 9) to air reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Pour approximately 1/2 cup (0.2 l) hydraulic fluid into reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2) and roll reservoir around so that interior
of reservoir is coated with hydraulic fluid.
3. Apply pipe sealant to all male threads. Remove caps/plugs and install straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item
3) to reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2).
4. Install reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2) onto platform (Figure 1, Item 4) and secure with four new lockwashers (Figure 1,
5. Remove caps/plugs and install hydraulic hose (Figure 1, Item 1) onto straight pipe-to-tube adapter (Figure 1, Item 3) to
reservoir (Figure 1, Item 2).
Figure 2. Gooseneck Cylinder Air Reservoir Installation.

END OF TASK
0127-5
0127 TM 9-2330-381-13
Adjust gooseneck and check for leakage at reservoir (WP 0007).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0127-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0128
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU)
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Throttle cable disconnected from speed control lever
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) (Mechanical Throttle Control [WP 0139])
APU wiring harness uncoupled (APU Wiring Harness
Materials/Parts [WP 0064])
Lockwasher (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Battery cables disconnected from battery and removed
Locknut (4) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) from APU (Battery Installation [WP 0053])
Personnel Required Handrails removed (Gooseneck Guardrails [WP 0088])
2 Top and rear hinged steps removed (Gooseneck Steps
[WP 0087])
Equipment Conditions Gooseneck coupled (Tractor/Semitrailer Coupling and
Bolts (2) and hydraulic pump (with hoses attached) Uncoupling [WP 0013]) or supported at 64 in. (162.6 cm)
removed from APU (Hydraulic Pump [WP 0107]) height
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package provides information for the removal and installation of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU).
0128-1
0128 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) must be cool before removal. Failure to follow this
warning may result in personnel being burned and injury.
1. Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 6) and bolt (Figure 1, Item 3) from APU fuel tank bracket (Figure 1, Item 4) and APU
frame (Figure 1, Item 5). Discard locknut.
2. Attach davit hook (Figure 1, Item 1) to lifting eye (Figure 1, Item 2) on APU (Figure 1, Item 9).
3. Remove four bolts (Figure 1, Item 7) and locknuts (Figure 1, Item 8) from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 5). Discard locknuts.
CAUTION
When removing/installing the APU, use extreme caution to prevent the APU from contacting
the hydraulic tank, or damage to equipment may result.
4. Use two personnel to lift APU (Figure 1, Item 9) from APU frame (Figure 1, Item 5) and lower APU to ground. If necessary,
remove davit hook (Figure 1, Item 1) from lifting eye (Figure 1, Item 2) on APU.
0128-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0128
Figure 1. APU.
END OF TASK
0128-3
0128 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. If removed, attach davit hook (Figure 2, Item 1) to lifting eye (Figure 2, Item 2) on APU (Figure 2, Item 9).
CAUTION
When removing/installing APU, use extreme caution to prevent the APU from contacting
the hydraulic tank, or damage to equipment may result.
2. Use two personnel to raise APU (Figure 2, Item 9) (above gooseneck) and lower in position on APU frame (Figure 2, Item 5).
Secure APU with four bolts (Figure 2, Item 7) and new locknuts (Figure 2, Item 8).
3. Remove davit hook (Figure 2, Item 1) from lifting eye (Figure 2, Item 2) on APU (Figure 2, Item 9).
4. Align fuel tank bracket (Figure 2, Item 4) with APU frame (Figure 2, Item 5) and secure in place by installing bolt
(Figure 2, Item 3) and new locknut (Figure 2, Item 6).
Figure 2. APU.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0128-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0129
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GLOW PLUG
INITIAL SETUP:
Step assembly raised (WP 0035)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the glow plug.
REMOVAL
1. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 5) and washer (Figure 1, Item 4). Disconnect wiring harness (Figure 1, Item 3) from glow plug
(Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Remove glow plug (Figure 1, Item 2) from cylinder head (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Glow Plug Removal.

END OF TASK
0129-1
0129 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install glow plug (Figure 2, Item 2) in cylinder head (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Connect wiring harness (Figure 2, Item 3) to glow plug (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure with washer (Figure 2, Item 4)
and nut (Figure 2, Item 5).
Figure 2. Glow Plug Installation.

END OF TASK
Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) and check glow plug for operation (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0129-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0130
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DRAIN COCK
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Radiator drained (WP 0142)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the drain cock.
REMOVAL
1. Remove drain cock (Figure 1, Item 2) from cylinder head (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Drain Cock.

END OF TASK
0130-1
0130 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install drain cock (Figure 1, Item 2) into cylinder head (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 2. Drain Cock.
END OF TASK
Fill radiator with coolant (WP 0142).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0130-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0131
FIELD MAINTENANCE
COVER TRANSMISSION
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Preformed Packing (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Self-Locking Nut (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 1
Oil, Lubricating SAE 10W-30 (WP 0170, Item 20)
Gasket (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Equipment Conditions
Gasket (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Engine oil drained (WP 0132)
Lockwasher (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the cover transmission.
0131-1
0131 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Remove sleeve nut (Figure 1, Item 14), washer (Figure 1, Item 13), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 12) from cover transmission
(Figure 1, Item 18). Discard gasket.
2. Remove cover transmission (Figure 1, Item 18) and gasket (Figure 1, Item 19) from cylinder head (Figure 1, Item 1).
Discard gasket.
3. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 15), decompression hole cover (Figure 1, Item 16), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 17) from
cover transmission (Figure 1, Item 18). Discard gasket.
4. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 3), retaining plate (Figure 1, Item 2), and straight shaft (Figure 1, Item 8) from cover
transmission (Figure 1, Item 18).
5. Disassemble nut (Figure 1, Item 6), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 7), manual control lever (Figure 1, Item 5), spring
(Figure 1, Item 4), self-locking nut (Figure 1, Item 10), setscrew (Figure 1, Item 9), and preformed packing (Figure 1,
Item 11) from straight shaft (Figure 1, Item 8). Discard lockwasher, self-locking nut, and preformed packing.
Figure 1. Cover Transmission.

END OF TASK
0131-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0131
INSTALLATION
1. Assemble new preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 11), setscrew (Figure 2, Item 9), new self-locking nut (Figure 2,
Item 10), spring (Figure 2, Item 4), manual control lever (Figure 2, Item 5), new lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 7), and nut
(Figure 2, Item 6) to straight shaft (Figure 2, Item 8).
2. Install straight shaft (Figure 2, Item 8), retaining plate (Figure 2, Item 2), and bolt (Figure 2, Item 3) on cover transmission
3. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 19) and cover transmission (Figure 2, Item 18) on cylinder head (Figure 2, Item 1).
4. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 12), washer (Figure 2, Item 13), and sleeve nut (Figure 2, Item 14) on cover transmission
(Figure 2, Item 18). Torque sleeve nut (Figure 2, Item 14) to 86 to 96 lb-in (9.8 to 10.8 Nm).
5. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 17), decompression hole cover (Figure 2, Item 16), and two bolts (Figure 2, Item 15)
on cover transmission (Figure 2, Item 18).
Figure 2. Cover Transmission.

END OF TASK
Fill crankcase with engine oil (WP 0132).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0131-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0132
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OIL FILTER AND DIPSTICK
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools O
Personnel Required
General Mechanic's Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) 1
Materials/Parts
Oil, Lubricating SAE 10W-30 (WP 0170, Item 20)
Preformed Packing (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the oil filter and dipstick.
REMOVAL
1. Remove oil filter (Figure 1, Item 5) from engine cover (Figure 1, Item 6) and drain engine oil in drain pan. Slide
preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 4) off of oil filter. Discard preformed packing.
2. Remove oil dipstick (Figure 1, Item 3) and oil filler plug (Figure 1, Item 1) from engine cover (Figure 1, Item 6).
Remove preformed packing (Figure 1, Item 2) from oil filler plug. Discard preformed packing.
3. Clean oil filter with clean oil.
Figure 1. Oil Filter and Dipstick.

END OF TASK
0132-1
0132 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install new preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 2) on oil filler plug (Figure 2, Item 1). Install oil filler plug and oil dipstick
(Figure 2, Item 3) on crankcase engine cover (Figure 2, Item 6).
2. Slide new preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 4) onto oil filter (Figure 2, Item 5) and install oil filter.
3. Fill engine with engine oil (approximately 1.37 qt [1.3 1]).
Figure 2. Oil Filter and Dipstick.

END OF TASK
Start Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) and check oil pressure indicators (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0132-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0133
FIELD MAINTENANCE
OIL SENDING UNIT
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) Equipment Conditions
Materials/Parts Auxilary Power Unit (APU) wiring harness disconnected
Gasket (TM 9-2330-381-24P) (WP 0064)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the oil sending unit.
REMOVAL
1. Remove oil pressure transducer (Figure 1, Item 1), electrical connector retainer (Figure 1, Item 2), and gasket (Figure 1,
Item 3) from crankcase (Figure 1, Item 4). Discard gasket.
Figure 1. Oil Sending Unit.

END OF TASK
0133-1
0133 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 3) and electrical connector retainer (Figure 2, Item 2) in crankcase (Figure 2, Item 4).
Torque electrical connector retainer to 129 to 174 lb-in (14.6 to 19.7 Nm).
2. Install oil pressure transducer (Figure 2, Item 1) onto electrical connector retainer (Figure 2, Item 2). Torque oil pressure
transducer to 60 to 86 lb-in (6.7 to 9.8 Nm).
Figure 2. Oil Sending Unit.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0133-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0134
FIELD MAINTENANCE
NOZZLE HOLDER ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) 1C
Materials/Parts Fuel tank drained (WP 0136)
Seal (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Gasket (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the nozzle holder assembly.
0134-1
0134 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid explosion and injury
to personnel, extinguish all smoking materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flame near the fuel tank or the
fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area. Clean up any fuel that is spilled during
fuel line tank removal. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury to personnel.
CAUTION
All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to
prevent dirt, moisture, or other foreign material from entering the fuel system. Failure
to follow this warning may result in damage to equipment.
1. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 3), straighten hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 1), and remove hose (Figure 1, Item 2)
from fuel injector holder (Figure 1, Item 9). Drain excess fuel from hose in drain pan and cap/plug hose.
2. Remove screw (Figure 1, Item 5), two nuts (Figure 1, Item 4), and metallic tube (Figure 1, Item 6) from the fuel injector
holder (Figure 1, Item 9). Drain excess fuel from tube in drain pan and cap/plug tube.
3. On engine model EB300-D, remove fuel injector holder (Figure 1, Item 9) and gasket (Figure 1, Item 10) from fuel
injector (Figure 1, Item 11). Discard gasket.
4. On engine model EB300-E, remove nut (Figure 1, Item 12), nozzle holder (Figure 1, Item 13), fuel injector holder
(Figure 1, Item 14), gasket (Figure 1, Item 15), and seal (Figure 1, Item 16) from fuel injector (Figure 1, Item 11). Discard seal.
5. Remove screw (Figure 1, Item 7) and loop clamp (Figure 1, Item 8) from metallic tube (Figure 1, Item 6).
0134-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0134
Figure 1. Nozzle Holder Assembly.

END OF TASK
0134-3
0134 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install loop clamp (Figure 2, Item 8) and screw (Figure 2, Item 7) to metallic tube (Figure 2, Item 6).
2. On engine model EB300-E, install new seal (Figure 2, Item 16), new gasket (Figure 2, Item 15), fuel injector holder (Figure 2,
Item 14), nozzle holder (Figure 2, Item 13), and nut (Figure 2, Item 12) to fuel injector (Figure 2, Item 11). Tighten nut.
3. On engine model EB300-D, install gasket (Figure 2, Item 10) and fuel injector holder (Figure 2, Item 9) to fuel injector
(Figure 2, Item 11). Tighten fuel injector holder (Figure 2, Item 9).
4. Remove and stow caps/plugs. Install metallic tube (Figure 2, Item 6), tighten two nuts (Figure 2, Item 4), and install screw
(Figure 2, Item 5) to fuel injector (Figure 2, Item 11).
5. Remove and stow caps/plugs. Install hose (Figure 2, Item 2) to fuel injector holder (Figure 2, Item 9) on the EB300-D, or
to nozzle holder (Figure 2, Item 13) on the EB300-E. Secure with two hose clamps (Figure 2, Item 3).
6. Secure hose (Figure 2, Item 2) with hose clamp (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Nozzle Holder Assembly.

END OF TASK
Fill fuel tank with diesel fuel (WP 0136).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0134-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0135
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Gasket (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Equipment Conditions
Materials/Parts
Rag, Wiping, Cotton, and Cotton Synthetic (WP 0170, Item 23)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the air cleaner assembly.
0135-1
0135 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
If Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical (NBC) exposure is suspected, all air filter media should be
handled by personnel wearing protective equipment. Consult your unit NBC Officer or NBC
Noncommissioned Officer (NCO) for appropriate handling or disposal instructions.
1. Loosen bolt (Figure 1, Item 15) and remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 14) and bracket (Figure 1, Item 13) from flange (Figure
1, Item 16).
2. Remove wingnut (Figure 1, Item 1), grommet (Figure 1, Item 2), cap assembly (Figure 1, Item 3), air filter element
(Figure 1, Item 4), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 5) from body (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard gasket.
3. Loosen and slide compression fitting (Figure 1, Item 12) up hose (Figure 1, Item 11) and disconnect hose from flow
valve (Figure 1, Item 10).
4. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 8), bolt (Figure 1, Item 9), flange (Figure 1, Item 16), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 17)
from air input manifold (Figure 1, Item 18). Discard gasket.
5. Loosen setting bolt (Figure 1, Item 7) and remove body (Figure 1, Item 6) from flange (Figure 1, Item 16).
6. Remove flow valve (Figure 1, Item 10) from flange (Figure 1, Item 16).
Figure 1. Air Cleaner Assembly.

0135-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0135
WARNING
To avoid eye or skin injury, DO NOT clean with compressed air in excess of 30 psi
(207 kPa). Wear goggles or face shield.
7. Clean filter element with low-pressure compressed air from inside toward outside. Wipe out body with wiping rag.
END OF TASK
0135-3
0135 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install flow valve (Figure 2, Item 10) to flange (Figure 2, Item 16).
2. Install body (Figure 2, Item 6) to flange (Figure 2, Item 16) and tighten setting bolt (Figure 2, Item 7).
3. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 17) and flange (Figure 2, Item 16) to air input manifold (Figure 2, Item 18) and secure
with bolt (Figure 2, Item 9) and two bolts (Figure 2, Item 8). Torque bolts to 2.2 to 3.6 lb-ft (2.9 to 4.9 Nm).
4. Connect hose (Figure 2, Item 11) to flow valve (Figure 2, Item 10), slide compression fitting (Figure 2, Item 12) up to flow
valve, and tighten compression fitting.
5. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 5), air filter element (Figure 2, Item 4), cap assembly (Figure 2, Item 3), and grommet
(Figure 2, Item 2) to body (Figure 2, Item 6). Secure with wingnut (Figure 2, Item 1).
6. Secure bracket (Figure 2, Item 13) to flange (Figure 2, Item 16) with bolt (Figure 2, Item 14). Tighten bolt (Figure
2, Item 15).
Figure 2. Air Cleaner Assembly.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0135-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0136
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Personnel
L Required
Materials/Parts Step assembly raised (WP 0005)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Reference
Fuel, Oil Diesel (WP 0170, Item 13, Item 14, Item 15) WP 0136
Lockwasher (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the fuel tank assembly.
0136-1
0136 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid injury to
personnel and explosion, extinguish all smoking materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flame near the
fuel tank or the fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area.
• Clean up any fuel that is spilled during fuel line removal or injury to personnel may result.
CAUTION
to prevent dirt, moisture, or other foreign material from entering the fuel system
NOTE
Fuel tank capacity is 1.3 gal. (4.8 l).
1. Remove filler cap (Figure 1, Item 2). Loosen hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 5) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 4)
from fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 6). Drain fuel in drain pan. Remove hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 5) and cap/plug hose
(Figure 1, Item 4).
2. Loosen hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 13) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 11). Remove hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 13)
and cap/plug hose (Figure 1, Item 11).
3. Loosen hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 8) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 9). Remove hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 8) and
cap/plug hose (Figure 1, Item 9).
4. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 10) and disconnect two hoses (Figure 1, Item 7) from fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1).
Remove two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 10) and cap/plug hoses (Figure 1, Item 7).
5. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 3), bolt (Figure 1, Item 15), and lifting eye (Figure 1, Item 14). Remove fuel tank
(Figure 1, Item 1) and spacer (Figure 1, Item 12).
0136-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0136
Figure 1. Fuel Tank Removal.

END OF TASK
0136-3
0136 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Remove shield (Figure 2, Item 2) from filler cap (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Loosen hose clamp (Figure 2, Item 7) and remove hose (Figure 2, Item 6). Remove hose clamp (Figure 2, Item 7) and
3. Remove strainer element (Figure 2, Item 3) from fuel tank (Figure 2, Item 13).
4. Loosen two spring clips (Figure 2, Item 4). Remove sight tubing (Figure 2, Item 5) and install caps/plugs. Remove
two spring clips (Figure 2, Item 4).
5. Remove two bolts (Figure 2, Item 12), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 11), retaining strap (Figure 2, Item 9), and mounting
bracket (Figure 2, Item 10).
6. Clean strainer element (Figure 2, Item 3) with clean diesel fuel from the outside toward the inside.
7. Attach mounting bracket (Figure 2, Item 10) and retaining strap (Figure 2, Item 9) to APU (Figure 2, Item 8) with two
8. Remove caps/plugs. Install two spring clips (Figure 2, Item 4) on sight tubing (Figure 2, Item 5). Install sight tubing
(Figure 2, Item 5) and tighten two spring clips (Figure 2, Item 4).
9. Install strainer element (Figure 2, Item 3) in fuel tank (Figure 2, Item 13).
10. Remove caps/plugs. Install hose clamp (Figure 2, Item 7) onto hose (Figure 2, Item 6) and install hose onto fuel tank
(Figure 2, Item 13). Tighten hose clamp (Figure 2, Item 7) at fuel tank (Figure 2, Item 13).
11. Install shield (Figure 2, Item 2) onto filler cap (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Fuel Tank Repair.
0136-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0136
INSTALLATION
1. Install spacer (Figure 3, Item 12), fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 1), lifting eye (Figure 3, Item 14), bolt (Figure 3, Item 15),
and two bolts (Figure 3, Item 3).
2. Remove caps/plugs. Install two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 10) onto two hoses (Figure 3, Item 7) and connect two hoses
to fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 1). Tighten two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 10).
3. Remove cap/plug. Install hose clamp (Figure 3, Item 8) onto hose (Figure 3, Item 9) and connect hose (Figure 3, Item
9). Tighten hose clamp (Figure 3, Item 8).
4. Remove cap/plug. Install hose clamp (Figure 3, Item 13) onto hose (Figure 3, Item 11) and connect hose (Figure 3, Item
11). Tighten hose clamp (Figure 3, Item 13).
5. Remove cap/plug. Install hose clamp (Figure 3, Item 5) onto hose (Figure 3, Item 4) and connect hose (Figure 3, Item 4) to
fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 6). Tighten hose clamp (Figure 3, Item 5).
6. Fill fuel tank with diesel fuel (WP 0136).
7. Install filler cap (Figure 3, Item 2).
Figure 3. Fuel Tank Installation.
END OF TASK
Operate Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0136-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0137
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Preformed Packing (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
1
Materials/Parts
Fuel, Oil Diesel (WP 0170, Item 13, Item 14, Item 15) Fuel tank drained (WP 0136)
Filter Element (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the fuel filter assembly.
0137-1
0137 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid injury to personnel
and explosion, extinguish all smoking materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flame near the fuel tank or
the fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
1. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 11) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 12) from injection pump fitting (Figure 1,
Item 13) and fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 10). Collect excess fuel in hose (Figure 1, Item 12) in drain pan. Remove two hose
clamps (Figure 1, Item 11) and cap/plug hose (Figure 1, Item 12).
2. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 6) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 7) from fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 2), fitting
(Figure 1, Item 5), and fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 10). Collect excess fuel in hose (Figure 1, Item 7) in drain pan. Remove
two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 6) and cap/plug hose (Figure 1, Item 7).
3. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 3) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 4) from fuel tank fitting (Figure 1, Item 1)
and fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 10). Collect excess fuel in hose (Figure 1, Item 4) in drain pan. Remove two hose clamps
(Figure 1, Item 3) and cap/plug hose (Figure 1, Item 4).
4. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 8) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 14) from fuel tank fitting (Figure 1, Item
15) and fuel filter (Figure 1, Item 10). Collect excess fuel in hose (Figure 1, Item 14) in drain pan. Remove two hose
clamps (Figure 1, Item 8) and cap/plug hose (Figure 1, Item 14).
5. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 9) and fuel filter assembly (Figure 1, Item 10).
0137-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0137
Figure 1. Fuel Filter Removal.

END OF TASK
0137-3
0137 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
1. Unscrew retaining ring (Figure 2, Item 6) and remove filter body (Figure 2, Item 1) and filter element (Figure 2, Item
5). Discard filter element.
2. Drain fuel from filter body (Figure 2, Item 1) in drain pan.
3. Remove preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 3) and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 4) from filter cup (Figure 2, Item
2). Discard preformed packing.
4. Install preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 4) and preformed packing (Figure 2, Item 3) onto filter cup (Figure 2, Item 2).
5. Install filter element (Figure 2, Item 5) in filter body (Figure 2, Item 1).
6. Install filter body (Figure 2, Item 1) onto filter cup (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure by screwing on retaining ring (Figure 2,
Item 6).
Figure 2. Fuel Filter Repair.

END OF TASK
0137-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0137
INSTALLATION
1. Install fuel filter assembly (Figure 3, Item 10) on APU and secure with bolt (Figure 3, Item 9).
2. Remove caps/plugs, install two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 8) onto hose (Figure 3, Item 14), and connect hose (Figure 3,
Item 14) to fuel tank (Figure 3, Item 2), fitting (Figure 3, Item 15), and fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 10). Tighten two hose
clamps (Figure 3, Item 8).
Item 4) to fuel tank fitting (Figure 3, Item 1) and fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 10). Tighten two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 3).
Item 7) to fuel tank fitting (Figure 3, Item 5) and fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 10). Tighten two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 6).
5. Remove caps/plugs, install two hose clamps (Figure 3, Item 11) onto hose (Figure 3, Item 12), and connect hose (Figure
3, Item 12) to injection pump (Figure 3, Item 13) and fuel filter (Figure 3, Item 10). Tighten two hose clamps (Figure
3, Item 11).
Figure 3. Fuel Filter Installation.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0137-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0138
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ENGINE PRIMING SYSTEM
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Fuel tank drained (WP 0136)
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Throttle cable removed (WP 0139)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the engine priming system.
0138-1
0138 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid injury to personnel
and explosion, extinguish all smoking materials and DO NOT allow sparks or open flame near the fuel tank or
the fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a well-ventilated area.
CAUTION
1. Loosen two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 2) and remove hose (Figure 1, Item 3) from fuel tank (Figure 1, Item 1) and
starting aid (Figure 1, Item 6). Collect excess fuel in hose in drain pan. Remove two hose clamps (Figure 1, Item 2) and
2. Loosen and slide two coupling nuts (Figure 1, Item 10) up hose (Figure 1, Item 8) and remove hose with coupling nuts.
Collect excess fuel in hose (Figure 1, Item 8) in drain pan. Remove flow valve (Figure 1, Item 9) and cap/plug hose
(Figure 1, Item 8).
3. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 7) and starting aid (Figure 1, Item 6) from bracket (Figure 1, Item 5).
4. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 4) and bracket (Figure 1, Item 5) from engine.
0138-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0138
Figure 1. Engine Priming System Removal.

END OF TASK
0138-3
0138 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install bracket (Figure 2, Item 5) and two bolts (Figure 2, Item 4) on engine.
2. Install starting aid (Figure 2, Item 6) on bracket (Figure 2, Item 5) with two bolts (Figure 2, Item 7).
3. Install flow valve (Figure 2, Item 9).
4. Remove caps/plugs from hose (Figure 2, Item 8). Position two coupling nuts (Figure 2, Item 10) on hose (Figure 2,
Item 8) and install hose onto flow valve (Figure 2, Item 9) and starting aid (Figure 2, Item 6). Tighten two coupling
5. Remove caps/plugs from hose (Figure 2, Item 3). Install two hose clamps (Figure 2, Item 2) onto hose (Figure 2,
Item 3) and install hose onto fuel tank (Figure 2, Item 1) and starting aid (Figure 2, Item 6). Secure hose (Figure 2,
Item 3) with two hose clamps (Figure 2, Item 2).
Figure 2. Engine Priming System Installation.

END OF TASK
0138-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0138
Install throttle cable (WP 0139).

END OF WORK PACKAGE
0138-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0139
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MECHANICAL THROTTLE CONTROL
INITIAL SETUP:
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the mechanical throttle control.
REMOVAL
1. Remove spring (Figure 1, Item 6) from control lever (Figure 1, Item 8).
2. Loosen bolt (Figure 1, Item 7) and disconnect throttle cable (Figure 1, Item 1) from control lever (Figure 1, Item 8).
3. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 5) and washer (Figure 1, Item 4) from throttle cable (Figure 1, Item 1).
4. Pull throttle cable (Figure 1, Item 1) from bracket (Figure 1, Item 9). Remove washer (Figure 1, Item 3) and nut (Figure 1,
Item 2) from throttle cable (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. Mechanical Throttle Control Removal.

END OF TASK
0139-1
0139 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install nut (Figure 2, Item 2) and washer (Figure 2, Item 3) on throttle cable (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Push throttle cable (Figure 2, Item 1) through bracket (Figure 2, Item 9) and install washer (Figure 2, Item 4) and nut
(Figure 2, Item 5) on throttle cable.
3. Insert throttle cable (Figure 2, Item 1) in control lever (Figure 2, Item 8) and tighten bolt (Figure 2, Item 7).
4. Install spring (Figure 2, Item 6) on control lever.
Figure 2. Mechanical Throttle Control Installation.

END OF TASK
Lower step assembly (APU Startup and Shutdown) (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0139-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0140
FIELD MAINTENANCE
APU CONTROL BOX
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) Rubber Seal (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Locknut (3) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) 1
Lockwasher (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Lockwasher (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Equipment Conditions
Lockwasher (4) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Step assembly raised (WP 0005)
Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the Auxiliary Power Unit (APU).
REMOVAL
1. Loosen bolt (Figure 1, Item 3) and disconnect throttle cable (Figure 1, Item 5) from speed control lever (Figure 1, Item 4).
Loosen throttle cable adjustment nut (Figure 1, Item 6).
2. Tag and disconnect APU cable assembly (Figure 1, Item 2) from APU wiring harness (Figure 1, Item 1).
Figure 1. APU Control Box.
0140-1
0140 TM 9-2330-381-13
R
3. Remove three locknuts (Figure 2, Item 4), clamp (Figure 2, Item 3), and APU cable assembly (Figure 2, Item 2) from
gooseneck assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard locknuts.
4. Remove locknut (Figure 2, Item 10), clamp (Figure 2, Item 11), and throttle cable (Figure 2, Item 9) from gooseneck
assembly (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard locknut.
5. Remove two capscrews (Figure 2, Item 8), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 7), washers (Figure 2, Item 6), and control box
(Figure 2, Item 5) from gooseneck assembly. Discard lockwashers.

END OF TASK
0140-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0140
REPAIR
1. Lift clamp assembly (Figure 3, Item 2), open cover (Figure 3, Item 1), and remove two nuts (Figure 3, Item 18), lockwashers
(Figure 3, Item 17), screws (Figure 3, Item 15), and cover from housing (Figure 3, Item 16). Discard
lockwashers.
2. Remove four thread-cutting screws (Figure 3, Item 4) and lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 3) and plate (Figure 3, Item 9)
from housing (Figure 3, Item 16). Discard lockwashers.
3. Remove push-pull throttle control assembly (Figure 3, Item 6) as follows:
a. Loosen nut (Figure 3, Item 13) on push-pull control assembly (Figure 3, Item 6) sufficiently to separate and disconnect
control assembly at ball (Figure 3, Item 7) and swivel (Figure 3, Item 12).
b. Remove nut (Figure 3, Item 11) and housing lock (Figure 3, Item 10). Pull front portion of push-pull control assembly
(Figure 3, Item 6) from plate (Figure 3, Item 9). Retain lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 8) and nut (Figure 3, Item 5) on
control assembly (Figure 3, Item 6).
c. Push back portion of control assembly (Figure 3, Item 6) and throttle cable (Figure 3, Item 14) out through opening in
rear of housing (Figure 3, Item 16).
0140-3
0140 TM 9-2330-381-13
4. Tag and disconnect APU cable assembly (Figure 4, Item 11) from rectifier (Figure 4, Item 1) and regulator (Figure 4, Item 8).
5. Remove indicator light(s) (Figure 4, Item 6) and glow plug indicator (Figure 4, Item 7), if applicable (WP 0052).
6. Tag and disconnect APU cable assembly (Figure 4, Item 11) from rotary switch (Figure 4, Item 5).
7. Remove two screws (Figure 4, Item 15) and clamp half (Figure 4, Item 14). Unscrew and remove jam nut (Figure 4, Item 12)
and bulkhead cable clamp (Figure 4, Item 13).
8. Remove two nuts (Figure 4, Item 10), lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 9), washers (Figure 4, Item 3), screws (Figure 4, Item 4),
and regulator (Figure 4, Item 8) from housing (Figure 4, Item 19). Discard lockwashers.
9. Remove nut (Figure 4, Item 16), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 17), washer (Figure 4, Item 18), screw (Figure 4, Item 2), and
rectifier (Figure 1, Item 1). Discard lockwasher.
0140-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0140
NOTE
Two-position connectors on rectifier and APU cable assembly must be a perfect match if replaced.
1
10. Replace two-position connectors as required (WP 0064).
11. Remove control box jumper wires and timer harness (APU Control Box Jumper Wires and Timer Harness [WP 0056]).
12. If applicable, remove nut (Figure 5, Item 4), lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 3), washer (Figure 5, Item 2), screw
(Figure 5, Item 12), and glow plug timer (Figure 5, Item 1) from housing (Figure 5, Item 13).
13. Remove setscrew (Figure 5, Item 10), knob (Figure 5, Item 9), rubber seal (Figure 5, Item 8), washer (Figure 5, Item 7), nut
(Figure 5, Item 6), and rotary switch (Figure 5, Item 5) from plate (Figure 5, Item 11). Discard rubber seal.
0140-5
0140 TM 9-2330-381-13
14. Install rotary switch (Figure 6, Item 5) onto plate (Figure 6, Item 11) and secure with nut (Figure 6, Item 6).
15. Install rubber washer (Figure 6, Item 7), seal (Figure 6, Item 8), knob (Figure 6, Item 9), and setscrew (Figure 6, Item 10).
16. Install rectifier (Figure 6, Item 1) with screw (Figure 6, Item 2), washer (Figure 6, Item 22), lockwasher (Figure 6, Item 21),
and nut (Figure 6, Item 20) onto housing (Figure 6, Item 23).
17. Install regulator (Figure 6, Item 12) with two screws (Figure 6, Item 4), washers (Figure 6, Item 3), lockwashers (Figure 6,
Item 13), and nuts (Figure 6, Item 14) onto housing (Figure 6, Item 23).
18. Install bulkhead cable clamp (Figure 6, Item 17), with APU cable assembly (Figure 6, Item 15) attached, onto housing
(Figure 6, Item 23) and secure with jam nut (Figure 6, Item 16). Install clamp half (Figure 6, Item 18) and two screws
(Figure 6, Item 19) onto cable clamp.
19. Connect APU cable assembly (Figure 6, Item 15) to rotary switch (Figure 6, Item 5).
20. Connect APU cable assembly (Figure 6, Item 15) to rectifier (Figure 6, Item 1) and regulator (Figure 6, Item 12).
0140-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0140
21. Install indicator light(s) (Figure 7, Item 8) and glow plug indicator (Figure 7, Item 20), if applicable (WP 0064).
22. If applicable, install glow plug timer (Figure 7, Item 2) and secure using screw (Figure 7, Item 24), washer (Figure 7, Item 3),
lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 4), and nut (Figure 7, Item 5).
23. Install control box jumper wires and timer harness (WP 0056).
24. Install push-pull throttle control assembly (Figure 7, Item 11) as follows:
a. Unscrew knurled nut (Figure 7, Item 9) on control assembly (Figure 7, Item 11) until threaded end of control assembly
is accessible.
b. Insert control assembly (Figure 7, Item 11) through locknut (Figure 7, Item 13) and through mounting hole on panel
(Figure 7, Item 14) and adjust nut (Figure 7, Item 10) until distance between edge of nut and end of control assembly
shaft measures between 0.31 to 0.38 in. (7.8 to 9.5 mm).
c. Install housing lock (Figure 7, Item 15) and nut (Figure 7, Item 16) from rear of panel (Figure 7, Item 14) to secure
front portion of control assembly (Figure 7, Item 11). Secure in place with jam nut (Figure 7, Item 13).
d. Screw knurled nut (Figure 7, Item 9) back onto control assembly (Figure 7, Item 11).
e. Pass back portion of control assembly (Figure 7, Item 11) with throttle cable (Figure 7, Item 19) through housing
(Figure 7, Item 25) and connect to front portion of control assembly at ball (Figure 7, Item 12) and swivel (Figure 7,
Item 17). Secure connection by tightening nut (Figure 7, Item 18) on control assembly.
25. Install panel (Figure 7, Item 14) onto housing (Figure 7, Item 25) and secure with four lockwashers (Figure 7, Item 6) and
four thread-cutting screws (Figure 7, Item 7).
26. Install cover (Figure 7, Item 23) onto housing (Figure 7, Item 25) and secure with two screws (Figure 7, Item 27), lockwashers
(Figure 7, Item 21), and nuts (Figure 7, Item 22). Lift clamp assembly (Figure 7, Item 1) and close cover (Figure 7, Item 23).

END OF TASK
0140-7
0140 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install control box (Figure 8, Item 5) onto gooseneck assembly (Figure 8, Item 1) and secure with two washers (Figure 8,
Item 6), lockwashers (Figure 8, Item 7), and capscrews (Figure 8, Item 8).
2. Install throttle cable (Figure 8, Item 9) onto gooseneck assembly (Figure 8, Item 1) and secure with two clamps (Figure 8,
Item 11) and locknuts (Figure 8, Item 10).
3. Install APU cable assembly (Figure 8, Item 2) onto gooseneck assembly (Figure 8, Item 1) and secure with three clamps
(Figure 8, Item 3) and locknuts (Figure 8, Item 4).
0140-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0140
4. Connect APU cable assembly (Figure 9, Item 2) to APU wiring harness (Figure 9, Item 1).
5. Connect throttle cable (Figure 9, Item 5) to speed control lever (Figure 9, Item 4). Adjust throttle cable adjustment nut
(Figure 9, Item 6) and tighten bolt (Figure 9, Item 3).

END OF TASK
Start and run APU (WP 0005).
Lower step assembly (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0140-9/10 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0141
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ENGINE EXHAUST
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Gasket (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
1
Materials/Parts
Locknut (3) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Step assembly raised (WP 0005)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the engine exhaust.
0141-1
0141 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Ensure APU is cool and exhaust pipe is cool to the touch. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Remove cap (Figure 1, Item 2) from exhaust pipe (Figure 1, Item 12).
2. Remove screw (Figure 1, Item 6) and lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 5) from bracket (Figure 1, Item 4). Discard lockwasher.
3. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 14), U-bolt (Figure 1, Item 1), clamp (Figure 1, Item 3), and bracket (Figure 1, Item 4)
from exhaust pipe (Figure 1, Item 12).
4. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 10), U-bolt (Figure 1, Item 13), clamp (Figure 1, Item 11), and exhaust pipe (Figure
1, Item 12) from muffler (Figure 1, Item 15).
5. Remove three locknuts (Figure 1, Item 9), muffler (Figure 1, Item 15), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 7). Discard locknuts
and gasket.
6. If necessary, remove three studs (Figure 1, Item 8) from muffler.
0141-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0141
Figure 1. Engine Exhaust.

END OF TASK
0141-3
0141 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. If removed, install three studs (Figure 2, Item 8) on muffler (Figure 2, Item 15).
2. Install muffler (Figure 2, Item 15) and three locknuts (Figure 2, Item 9). Torque locknuts (Figure 2, Item 9) to 17. 4 to
20.3 lb-ft (23.5 to 27.5 Nm).
3. Install exhaust pipe (Figure 2, Item 12), clamp (Figure 2, Item 11), U-bolt (Figure 2, Item 13), and two nuts (Figure
2, Item 10) on muffler (Figure 2, Item 15).
4. Install clamp (Figure 2, Item 3), U-bolt (Figure 2, Item 1), bracket (Figure 2, Item 4), and two nuts (Figure 2, Item 14) on
exhaust pipe (Figure 2, Item 12).
5. Install gasket (Figure 2, Item 7) on muffler, steel side toward muffler (Figure 2, Item 15).
6. Install lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 5) and screw (Figure 2, Item 6) on bracket (Figure 2, Item 4).
7. Install cap (Figure 2, Item 2) on exhaust pipe (Figure 2, Item 12).
Figure 2. Engine Exhaust.

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

0141-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0142
FIELD MAINTENANCE
RADIATOR
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Gasket (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Lockwasher (4) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 1
Antifreeze (WP 0170, Item 2)
Sealant (WP 0170, Item 24) Equipment Conditions
Sealing Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) Fan vanaxial removed (WP 0144)
Gasket (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the radiator.
0142-1
0142 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Ethylene glycol is toxic to skin, eyes, and respiratory tract. Avoid skin and eye contact. Good general ventilation
is normally adequate.
• When hot, radiator temperature may exceed 210°F (100°C) and maintain pressure up to 16 psi (108 kPa). DO
NOT open radiator while hot or injury to personnel may result.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in severe injury or death to personnel.
1. Place drain pan under radiator (Figure 1, Item 1) and drain radiator by removing radiator cap (Figure 1, Item 7) and
opening drain cock (Figure 1, Item 8) on cylinder head (Figure 1, Item 9).
2. Loosen two captive thumbscrews (Figure 1, Item 6) and remove shroud (Figure 1, Item 5) from radiator (Figure 1, Item 1).
3. Remove three nuts (Figure 1, Item 3), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 4), and retaining strap (Figure 1, Item 2) from three
studs (Figure 1, Item 10). Discard lockwashers.
4. Remove four bolts (Figure 1, Item 18), radiator (Figure 1, Item 1), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 17). Discard gasket.
5. Remove four bolts (Figure 1, Item 14), eight bolts (Figure 1, Item 16), washers (Figure 1, Item 15), radiator base plate
(Figure 1, Item 13), and gasket (Figure 1, Item 12) from crankcase (Figure 1, Item 11). Discard gasket.
6. If necessary, remove three studs (Figure 1, Item 10) from radiator base plate (Figure 1, Item 13).
Figure 1. Radiator.
END OF TASK
0142-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0142
REPAIR
WARNING
To avoid eye or skin injury, DO NOT clean with compressed air in excess of
30 psi (207 kPa). Wear goggles or face shield.
1. Straighten radiator fins (Figure 2, Item 2) and clean radiator fins with compressed air.
2. If radiator (Figure 2, Item 1) is corroded, flush cooling system with hot water.
Figure 2. Radiator.
END OF TASK
0142-3
0142 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Apply thread locking compound to three studs (Figure 3, Item 10) and install three studs in radiator base plate (Figure
3, Item 13).
2. Apply sealant to both surfaces of gasket (Figure 3, Item 12). Install gasket and radiator base plate (Figure 3, Item 13),
with six washers (Figure 3, Item 15), bolts (Figure 3, Item 16), and four bolts (Figure 3, Item 14) on crankcase (Figure
3, Item 11).
3. Apply sealant to both surfaces of gasket (Figure 3, Item 17) and install gasket, radiator (Figure 3, Item 1), retaining strap
(Figure 3, Item 2), and four bolts (Figure 3, Item 18).
4. Install retaining strap (Figure 3, Item 2), three lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 4), and three nuts (Figure 3, Item 3) onto three
studs (Figure 3, Item 10).
5. Install shroud (Figure 3, Item 5) and tighten two captive thumbscrews (Figure 3, Item 6).
6. Close drain cock (Figure 3, Item 8) on cylinder head (Figure 3, Item 9) and replace radiator cap (Figure 3, Item 7).
Figure 3. Radiator.
0142-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0142
I
7. Remove radiator cap (Figure 4, Item 2).
8. Fill radiator (Figure 4, Item 1) with 1.3 quarts (1.2 l) of 70/30 mixture (70 percent antifreeze and 30 percent water).
9. Install radiator cap (Figure 4, Item 2).
Figure 4. Radiator.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0142-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0143
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FAN BELT
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Starter removed (WP 0146)
APU wiring disconnected from fan vanaxial (WP 0064)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the fan belt.
REMOVAL
1. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) and fan cover (Figure 1, Item 2) from fan vanaxle (Figure 1, Item 3).
CAUTION
Use caution when removing fan belt so as not to lose or catch belt lock pins in the fO\wheel or fO\wheel
housing or damage to equipment and unnecessary work may result.
2. With aid of assistant and manual handcrank, slowly turn motor (Figure 1, Item 4) over while carefully prying belt
(Figure 1, Item 5) off of fan pulley (Figure 1, Item 6) with screwdriver.
3. Turn two locking tabs (Figure 1, Item 7) 90 degrees so that tabs are parallel with belt (Figure 1, Item 5).
Pry top layer of belt (Figure 1, Item 8) off of one locking tab (Figure 1, Item 7). Pry remaining belt
layer off of two locking tabs.
4. Remove belt (Figure 1, Item 5).
Figure 1. Fan Belt.
END OF TASK
0143-1
0143 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. If belt has excessive play from previous inspections, readjust belt.
NOTE
Recommended belt length is 43 links. The inside of WKHbelt points to the direction of travel of the belt.
2. Turn one tab and pry one link off of belt if necessary.
3. Turn any number of locking tabs needed to remove same number of line. Reassemble belt and check tension of belt after
installation.
CAUTION
Ensure inner belt lineLV facing counterclockwise during installation or belt will be improperly installed,
causing excess belt slippage.
4. Slide belt (Figure 2, Item 5) around flywheel pulley (Figure 2, Item 6), attach belt links (Figure 2, Item 8) to locking tabs
(Figure 2, Item 7) and turn both locking tabs 90 degrees to secure belt.
5. Use handcrank to slowly turn motor (Figure 2, Item 4) over and carefully pull belt (Figure 2, Item 5) over fan pulley.
6. Install fan cover (Figure 2, Item 2) on fan vanaxle (Figure 2, Item 3) and secure with two bolts (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Fan Belt.
END OF TASK
0143-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0143
Check electrical connections (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0143-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0144
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FAN VANAXIAL
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) removed (WP 0128)
Starter removed (WP 0146)
Materials/Parts
APU wiring harness disconnected from fan vanaxial
Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
(WP 0064)
Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Hydraulic tank removed (WP 0126)
Personnel Required Fan belt removed (WP 0143)
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the fan vanaxial.
REMOVAL
1. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) and retaining strap (Figure 1, Item 7) from fan vanaxial (Figure 1, Item 5).
2. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 10) and lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 9) to disconnect bracket (Figure 1, Item 8) from fan
vanaxial (Figure 1, Item 5). Discard lockwasher.
3. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 2), lifting eye (Figure 1, Item 3), and spacer (Figure 1, Item 4) from fan vanaxial.
4. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 6) and fan vanaxial (Figure 1, Item 5).
Figure 1. Fan Vanaxial.

END OF TASK
0144-1
0144 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install fan vanaxial (Figure 2, Item 5) and two bolts (Figure 2, Item 6).
2. Install spacer (Figure 2, Item 4), lifting eye (Figure 2, Item 3), and bolt (Figure 2, Item 2) on fan vanaxial (Figure 2, Item 5).
3. Connect bracket (Figure 2, Item 8) to fan vanaxial (Figure 2, Item 5) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 9) and
bolt (Figure 2, Item 10).
4. Install retaining strap (Figure 2, Item 7) and two bolts (Figure 2, Item 1) on fan vanaxial.
Figure 2. Fan Vanaxial.

END OF TASK
Check electrical connections (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0144-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP START SYSTEM
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Locknut (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) Locknut (4) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Materials/Parts
Rag, Wiping (WP0170, Item 23) Personnel Required
Grommet (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) 2
Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Parked on level ground, gooseneck supported, if uncoupled,
Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) and wheels chocked (WP 0013)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, installation, and preoperational check of the
Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) jump start system.
0145-1
0145 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
• Disconnect the power source before performing any corrective maintenance actions. DO NOT wear watches
and jewelry while working on battery or other electrical components. Always DISCONNECT negative (-) cable
FIRST and RECONNECT the negative (-) cable LAST.
• Ensure polarity, red (+) and black (-), is not reversed.
CAUTION
Some semitrailers have solar battery charger leads connected to negative and
positive battery terminals. Ensure that these leads are not damaged when
disconnecting the terminals from the battery.
1. Tag and disconnect negative (-) cable (Figure 1, Item 7) from negative (-) post (Figure 1, Item 8) on battery
(Figure 1, Item 6).
2. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 1) from terminal (Figure 1, Item 4) on positive (+) post (Figure 1, Item 5) on battery
(Figure 1, Item 6). Tag and remove positive (+) cables (Figure 1, Item 2 and Item 3) from terminal.
NOTE
If a fault is limited to the APU, jump start system’s electrical box. The existing cable that connects the
battery and APU starter can be left installed so that the semitrailer is still mission ready.
3. If necessary, reconnect positive (+) cable (Figure 1, Item 3) (which connects battery to APU starter) onto terminal
(Figure 1, Item 4) on positive (+) post (Figure 1, Item 5) of battery (Figure 1, Item 6) and secure with nut (Figure 1, Item 1).
4. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 10). Tag and remove cable (Figure 1, Item 11) from streetside of APU hydraulic pump
(Figure 1, Item 9). Reinstall and tighten bolt.
5. If semitrailer is needed for a mission, connect negative (-) cable (Figure 1, Item 7) to negative (-) post (Figure 1, Item 8)
on battery (Figure 1, Item 6). If not needed for a mission, proceed to step 6.
0145-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145
Figure 1. APU Jump Start System.
0145-3
0145 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Remove two locknuts (Figure 2, Item 4) and four cable clamps (Figure 2, Item 2) from cables (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 3).
Discard locknuts.
7. Remove four locknuts (Figure 2, Item 7), bolts (Figure 2, Item 5), and electrical box (Figure 2, Item 6) from
gooseneck (Figure 2, Item 8). Discard locknuts.
8. With aid of an assistant, loosen straps (Figure 2, Item 10) and remove bag (Figure 2, Item 11) from crossbar
(Figure 2, Item 9). Ensure jump start cables (Figure 2, Item 12) remain coiled in bag for ease of transport.
0145-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145
9. Remove cover (Figure 3, Item 10) from electrical box (Figure 3, Item 5).
10. Remove nut (Figure 3, Item 8), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 7), washer (Figure 3, Item 11), screw (Figure 3, Item 12), and
two cable clamps (Figure 3, Item 13) from cables (Figure 3, Item 4 and Item 9). Discard lockwasher.
11. Remove nut (Figure 3, Item 1) and lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 2) from bolt (Figure 3, Item 6). Tag and remove cables
(Figure 3, Item 4 and Item 3). Remove bolt. Discard lockwasher.
0145-5
0145 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. Remove nut (Figure 4, Item 8) and lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 7) from stud number four (Figure 4, Item 6) of solenoid
(Figure 4, Item 11). Tag and remove cable (Figure 4, Item 9) and jumper (Figure 4, Item 10). Retain lockwasher. Remove
and discard grommet (Figure 4, Item 13).
13. Remove nut (Figure 4, Item 2), lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 3), and capscrew (Figure 4, Item 4) from cable (Figure 4, Item 1)
and electrical box (Figure 4, Item 5). Tag and remove cable and grommet (Figure 4, Item 12). Discard lockwasher and
grommet.
END OF TASK
0145-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145
REPAIR
1. Inspect cables for corrosion, frayed or broken wires, and defective terminal lugs and battery clamps. If corroded, clean as
required by wiping with a wiping rag. If loose, remove and replace terminal lugs as required using electrical repair kit. If
defect exists, use electrical repair kit and replace defective terminal lug, battery clamp, and/or wiring harness.
2. Inspect protective covering for damage and for missing or unreadable wire markers. If defect exists, replace markers
as required.
3. Inspect jumper wires for frayed or broken wires and loose terminal lugs. If defect exists, replace defective terminal lugs
using electrical repair kit or replace entire jumper wire assembly.
END OF TASK
0145-7
0145 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Insert cable (Figure 5, Item 1) and grommet (Figure 5, Item 12) in electrical box (Figure 5, Item 5).
2. Attach cable (Figure 5, Item 1) with capscrew (Figure 5, Item 4), lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 3), and nut (Figure 5, Item 2).
3. Insert grommet (Figure 5, Item 13) and cable (Figure 5, Item 9) in electrical box (Figure 5, Item 5).
4. Reconnect jumper (Figure 5, Item 10) and cable (Figure 5, Item 9) to stud number four (Figure 5, Item 6) of solenoid
(Figure 5, Item 11) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 5, Item 7) and nut (Figure 5, Item 8).
0145-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145
5. Reconnect bolt (Figure 6, Item 6) and insert bolt through side of electrical box (Figure 6, Item 5).
6. Attach two cables (Figure 6, Item 4 and Item 3) to bolt (Figure 6, Item 6) and secure with lockwasher (Figure 6, Item 2)
and nut (Figure 6, Item 1).
7. Install two cable clamps (Figure 6, Item 13) to cables (Figure 6, Item 9 and Item 4) and secure with screw (Figure 6, Item 12),
washer (Figure 6, Item 11), lockwasher (Figure 6, Item 7), and nut (Figure 6, Item 8).
8. Install cover (Figure 6, Item 10) to electrical box (Figure 6, Item 5).
0145-9
0145 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Disconnect the power source before performing any corrective maintenance actions. DO NOT wear watches
and jewelry while working on battery or other electrical components. Always DISCONNECT negative (-) cable
FIRST and RECONNECT the negative (-) cable LAST.
• Ensure polarity, red (+) and black (-), is not reversed.
CAUTION
Some semitrailers have solar battery charger leads connected to negative and positive battery terminals.
Ensure that these leads are not damaged when disconnecting the terminals from the battery.
9. If necessary, tag and disconnect negative (-) cable (Figure 7, Item 7) from negative (-) post (Figure 7, Item 8) on battery
(Figure 7, Item 6).
10. Use two people to secure bag (Figure 7, Item 22) to crossbar (Figure 7, Item 20) with straps (Figure 7, Item 21). Ensure
bag opening (Figure 7, Item 23) is facing toward front of gooseneck (Figure 7, Item 19).
11. Align and install electrical box (Figure 7, Item 18) to underside of gooseneck step (Figure 7, Item 16) and secure with four
bolts (Figure 7, Item 15) and locknuts (Figure 7, Item 17).
12. Secure cables (Figure 7, Item 2 and Item 11) to inner gooseneck wall (Figure 7, Item 10) with four cable clamps (Figure 7,
Item 9) and two locknuts (Figure 7, Item 12).
13. Remove bolt (Figure 7, Item 14) from streetside of APU hydraulic pump (Figure 7, Item 13). Install cable (Figure 7, Item 11)
with bolt to streetside of APU hydraulic pump.
CAUTION
DO NOT exceed torque when installing nut. Threaded post on terminal is soft material
and threads will strip easily, causing damage to equipment.
14. Remove nut (Figure 7, Item 1) from terminal (Figure 7, Item 4) on positive (+) post (Figure 7, Item 5) of battery
(Figure 7, Item 6).
15. Leave existing cable (Figure 7, Item 3) on terminal (Figure 7, Item 4).
16. Install positive (+) cable (Figure 7, Item 2) on terminal (Figure 7, Item 4) and secure with nut (Figure 7, Item 1). Torque
nut to 10 to 12 lb-ft (13.5 to 16.3 Nm).
17. Reconnect negative (-) cable (Figure 7, Item 7) to negative (-) post (Figure 7, Item 8) of battery (Figure 7, Item 6).
0145-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145
0145-11
0145 TM 9-2330-381-13
PREOPERATIONAL CHECK
NOTE
The following is a preoperational check of the APU jump start system.
1. If tractor (Figure 8, Item 16) is coupled to trailer (Figure 8, Item 6), start tractor engine and open APU battery
(Figure 8, Item 1) box.
2. If tractor (Figure 8, Item 16) is not coupled to tractor trailer (Figure 8, Item 6), drive tractor to a point near gooseneck
(Figure 8, Item 15) where tractor batteries (Figure 8, Item 14) can be easily reached. Keep tractor engine running and
open battery (Figure 8, Item 1) box.
CAUTION
Some semitrailers have solar battery charger leads connected to negative and positive
battery terminals. Ensure these leads are not damaged when disconnecting terminals from
battery posts or damage to equipment may result.
3. Disconnect negative (-) cable (Figure 8, Item 3) from negative (-) post (Figure 8, Item 2) of battery (Figure 8, Item 1).
4. Loosen drawstring (Figure 8, Item 10) of cable storage bag (Figure 8, Item 9) and pull out jumper cables (Figure 8, Item
7 and Item 8). Negative (-) cable (Figure 8, Item 7) is approximately 9 ft (2.75 m) in length and has a black clamp on end.
Positive (+) cable (Figure 8, Item 8) is approximately 28 ft (8.5 m) in length and has a red clamp on end.
5. Connect positive (+) cable (Figure 8, Item 8) to 12 VDC terminal (Figure 8, Item 13) on parallel side of tractor’s
series/parallel battery installation to jump start APU.
6. Connect negative (-) cable (Figure 8, Item 7) to tractor frame (Figure 8, Item 11) and ensure a good connection.
7. Press switch (Figure 8, Item 5) on electrical box (Figure 8, Item 4) and listen for the following:
a. If system is installed correctly, an audible click will be heard as solenoid engages when switch (Figure 8, Item 5) is
pushed on electrical box (Figure 8, Item 4).
b. If system is installed incorrectly or jumper cables (Figure 8, Item 7 and Item 8) receive improper voltage, solenoid
will not engage and APU starter will not function.
8. Disconnect negative (black) clamp (-) on cable (Figure 8, Item 7) from tractor frame (Figure 8, Item 11) and positive
(red) clamp (+) on cable (Figure 8, Item 8) from positive (+) terminal (Figure 8, Item 12) of tractor battery (Figure 8,
Item 14) and restore in stowage bag (Figure 8, Item 9).
9. Reconnect negative (-) cable (Figure 8, Item 3) to negative (-) post (Figure 8, Item 2) of APU battery (Figure 8, Item 1).
0145-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0145

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0145-13/14 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0146
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STARTER
INITIAL SETUP:
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) Battery cables disconnected at battery (WP 0053)
Lockwasher (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the starter.
REMOVAL
1. If applicable, remove tiedown strap (Figure 1, Item 8) and pull terminal cover (Figure 1, Item 7) back. Remove nut (Figure
1, Item 6) and lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 5) and disconnect battery cable (Figure 1, Item 4) and starter (hot) wire (Figure
1, Item 3) from solenoid (Figure 1, Item 2). Discard lockwasher.
2. Disconnect starter wire (Figure 1, Item 9) from solenoid (Figure 1, Item 2).
3. Remove two bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) and remove starter assembly (Figure 1, Item 10).
Figure 1. Starter.
END OF TASK
0146-1
0146 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install starter assembly (Figure 2, Item 10) and secure with two bolts (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Reconnect starter wire (Figure 2, Item 9) to solenoid (Figure 2, Item 2).
CAUTION
DO NOT exceed torque when installing nut. Threaded post on terminal is soft material, and
threads will strip easily causing damage to equipment.
3. Connect starter (hot) wire (Figure 2, Item 3) and battery cable (Figure 2, Item 4) to solenoid (Figure 2, Item 2).
4. Install lockwasher (Figure 2, Item 5) and nut (Figure 2, Item 6). Torque nut to 6 to 8 lb-ft (8.2 to 10.9 Nm).
5. Push terminal cover (Figure 2, Item 7) over nut (Figure 2, Item 6) and secure with tiedown strap (Figure 2, Item 8).
Figure 2. Starter.
END OF TASK
Start and run Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) (WP 0005).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0146-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0147
FIELD MAINTENANCE
WELDING/NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
INITIAL SETUP:
References
TM 9-237
MIL-STD-410
MIL-I-6870
MIL-STD-6866
WELDING
WARNING
Welding and brazing operations produce heat, toxic fumes, radiation, metal slag, and carbon
particles. Welding and brazing goggles with properly tinted lenses are required. Also, gloves,
apron, and welding boots are required or injury to personnel may result. Failure to follow this
warning may result in severe injury or death to personnel.
1. Welding and brazing processes may be used to repair cracks in steel parts such as brackets, panels, and light framework;
however, the time required, the difficulty of working with the metal, and the chance of embrittlement and subsequent
failure make such repairs of questionable value. Hence, welding and brazing should only be attempted when replacement
parts are not available. Since the semitrailer is designed to carry greatly concentrated loads, most of the structure requires
specialized welding procedures. Any personnel performing repair welding on the semitrailer must be properly trained and
certified to conduct all phases of the welding procedure. After any welding, an inspection must be conducted.
0147-1
0147 TM 9-2330-381-13
NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING
WARNING
Fluorescent penetrant may cause injury to personnel. Avoid skin contact. In case
of skin contact, wash with warm water and soap. Failure to follow this warning may result
in severe injury or death to personnel.
1. Fluorescent penetrant inspection. A fluorescent penetrant inspection must be performed on metallic components that
have been welded. After fluorescent penetrant has been applied and a pattern has developed, any evidence of cracks is
cause for rejection. This inspection should be performed on parts as prescribed in MIL-I-6870 by operators and inspectors
certified in accordance with MIL-STD-410, with equipment according to MIL-STD-6866.
2. Magnetic particle inspection. This inspection should be performed on steel parts when possible. Steel parts that have
been reworked or reground and parts containing areas of fatigue should be tested. Shear sections and reground contact
surfaces must show no defects. Any evidence of cracks is cause for rejection. Since some stainless steel cannot be
magnetized, do not perform this test on such components. This inspection must be performed as specified in MIL-I-6870
and MIL-STD-6866 by qualified operators and inspected by qualified inspectors. On completion of inspection, pass parts
through a demagnetizing field. Wash parts and allow to air dry. Parts must be rejected if there are indications of nonmetallic
foreign solids longer than 1 in. (2.54 cm). Parts shall also be rejected if the following patterns appear:
a. Bursts - scattered, short, sharp lines caused by high temperatures. Such discontinuities usually are internal and are
seldom detected by magnetic particle inspection until surface is cut to expose burst area.
b. Flakes - separate, short, wavy lines, usually in the same general direction, caused by improper cooling. Flakes are
usually internal and are seldom detected by magnetic particle inspection until surface has been cut to expose the
flake area.
c. Grinding cracks - fine, sharp lines, tightly packed. In some surfaces, cracks may be shallow and hard to see. Grinding
cracks are usually caused by a glazed wheel, resulting in overheating. These cracks are similar to heat-treat and
hardening cracks. Grinding cracks may also be caused by too little coolant, too much feed, or too much speed.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0147-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0148
FIELD MAINTENANCE
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM BEARING
INITIAL SETUP:
Bearing Seating Tool (WP 0164, Figure F-4) Grease (WP 0170, Item 16)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Rag, Wiping (WP 0170, Item 23)
Fire Extinguisher (WP 0168, Item 15) Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32)
Welder Helmet (WP 0168, Item 16) Bearing Cone (Upper Suspension Arm)
Apron, Leather (WP 0168, Item 17) Wood Block, 4-in. x 4-in. x 12 in. lg
Lifting Strap (WP 0168, Item 25) Personnel Required
Truck, Wrecker (WP 0168, Item 26) 2
Materials/Parts Suspension assembly removed (WP 0065)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, repair, and installation of the upper suspension arm bearing.
REMOVAL
CAUTION
The upper suspension bearing cone will be destroyed during removal. Pay close attention
to the following steps or serious damage to platform spindle may result.
1. Remove upper suspension bearing cone (Figure 1, Item 1) from platform spindle (Figure 1, Item 2) as follows:
a. Using a hammer and cold chisel, break bearing cage (Figure 1, Item 3) at two points (Figure 1, Item 5).
b. Once bearing cage (Figure 1, Item 3) is broken, remove all bearing rollers (Figure 1, Item 4).
c. Clean all grease from spindle (Figure 1, Item 2) and surrounding area with wiping rag.
Figure 1. Upper Suspension Arm Bearing Removal.
0148-1
0148 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• While using the oxygen/acetylene gas welding/cutting unit, wear properly tinted goggles and protective gloves.
• Once the inner bearing cone of upper suspension bearing is heated, it will expand and fall off of platform
spindle. Position both personnel so that heated cone does not come in contact with personnel.
• The ground under the platform spindle must be free of flammable material prior to heating the upper bearing
cone. Place burn cloth on the ground beneath the platform spindle.
CAUTION
Use two personnel to heat the upper suspension bearing’s inner bearing cone by applying heat
to the middle of the inner bearing cone around the entire cone. DO NOT allow torch to heat
platform spindle or serious damage to equipment may result.
2. Using an oxygen/acetylene unit, pass a torch between two personnel and evenly heat entire inner bearing cone (Figure 2,
Item 1) at middle of cone (Figure 2, Item 3). When inner bearing cone (Figure 2, Item 1) is uniformly heated, it will
expand and drop off of platform spindle (Figure 2, Item 2).
WARNING
DO NOT pick up the inner bearing cone while hot. Failure to follow this warning may result
in severe injury or death to personnel.
a. Allow inner bearing cone (Figure 2, Item 1) to cool and discard all parts of upper suspension bearing.
0148-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0148

END OF TASK
REPAIR
1. Hand-pack new upper suspension bearing cone with grease.
END OF TASK
0148-3
0148 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Position new upper suspension bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 3) onto platform spindle (Figure 3, Item 2). Tap lightly
into place with a hammer.
CAUTION
Position bearing seating tool carefully on floor jack and ensure tool is as vertical
as possible or damage to spindle may result.
2. Position bearing seating tool (Figure 3, Item 4), with tabs up, under upper suspension bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 3).
Position hydraulic floor jack (Figure 3, Item 5) under bearing seating tool, and raise floor jack until tool is flush against
bearing.
CAUTION
During this entire task, continually check that the top of the bearing seating tool remains parallel to the
platform. The bearing must be installed as level to the platform as possible or damage to equipment may result.
3. With bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 3) level, and centered at bottom of spindle (Figure 3, Item 2), slowly raise floor
jack (Figure 3, Item 5) to push bearing onto spindle.
4. If platform starts to rise from movement of floor jack (Figure 3, Item 5) before bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 3) is properly
seated on spindle (Figure 3, Item 2), proceed as follows:
a. Place a block of wood (Figure 3, Item 1) on top of platform, centered over top of spindle (Figure 3, Item 2).
b. Using a 10-pound sledge hammer, one person must proceed to strike wood block (Figure 3, Item 1) as second person
raises floor jack (Figure 3, Item 5). Repeat as necessary until bearing cone (Figure 3, Item 3) is properly seated on
spindle (Figure 3, Item 2).
c. Lower floor jack (Figure 3, Item 5) and remove bearing seating tool (Figure 3, Item 4).
0148-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0148

END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0148-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0149
FIELD MAINTENANCE
DRUM TURNING
INITIAL SETUP:
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) Hub and drum disassembled and separated (WP 0075)
Personnel Required
1
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for drum turning repair.
REPAIR
1. Inspect machined surface texture of drum for grooves, cuts, scoring, surface cracks, and out-of-roundness (Figure 1).
Figure 1. Drum Turning Inspection.
0149-1
0149 TM 9-2330-381-13
2. Use brake drum gauge to measure inner diameter of drum (Figure 2). If inside diameter of drum is greater than 12.375 in.
(31.433 cm), replace drum. If inside diameter is less than 12.375 in. (31.433 cm) and any defects are found, drum
must be turned (machined).
3. Install drum on brake drum lathe and turn drum as required until smooth finish can be obtained. If after a series of
attempts a smooth finish cannot be obtained, discard drum.
4. If smooth finish is obtained, remeasure inside diameter. If inside diameter exceeds 12.375 in. (31.433 cm), discard
drum and replace.
5. If smooth finish is obtained and maximum inside diameter is less than 12.375 in. (31.433 cm), the drum has been
repaired.
Figure 2. Drum Turning Dimension.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0149-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
FIELD MAINTENANCE
AXLE ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Cotter Pin (3) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Hone, Cylinder 2 in. to 7 in. Port (WP 0168, Item 9) Self-Locking Nut (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Bolt (4) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Kit, Axle Rem/Instl (WP 0168, Item 20) Trunnion Cap (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Ram, Hyd, 50 Ton Portable (WP 0168, Item 24)
2
Materials/Parts
Hexagon Stock, 1/2 in. (WP 0164, Fig. F-22) Equipment Conditions
Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Semitrailer parked on level ground, coupled to tractor, or
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) if not coupled, wheels chocked
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Platform set at road height (WP 0008)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Support legs set at 41 in. (104 cm) (WP 0011 and
4 in. x 4 in. Wood Blocks (5) WP 0012)
Mounting Plate (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the axle assembly.
0150-1
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
The axle weighs approximately 850 lb (386 kg) with tires and wheels installed. Extreme caution
must be used during removal and installation of the axle. Failure to follow this warning may
NOTE
• Removing/installing axles should normally be done with wheels and tires installed for ease of handling. If axle is
being removed to perform other maintenance tasks on the axle, it will be necessary to remove wheels and tires after
the axle assembly has been separated from the bogie.
• If axle is being removed to perform ultra bushing maintenance task, it will be necessary to replace trunnion cap.
1. Release semitrailer parking brakes by pushing in brake release valve (WP 0004).
2. Cage brakes at affected bogie (WP 0023).
4. Lower platform until resting on front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012).
5. Close suspension isolation valve for affected bogie with handle facing outward from center of semitrailer (WP 0004).
6. Raise platform to approximately 45 in. (114.3 cm) (WP 0008) until lower suspension arm spindle on affected bogie
appears to be level. Install semitrailer wheel chocks.
7. Place pieces of 4 in. x 4 in. (10.16 cm x 10.16 cm) wood under each support leg. Lower platform (WP 0008) support
legs so that legs are sitting on wood blocks.
8. Apply parking brakes by pulling out brake release valve (WP 0004). Shut down APU (WP 0005).
9. Remove upper and lower brake dust shields from affected bogie (WP 0068).
10. Disconnect connecting link from affected bogie (WP 0082).
11. Rotate affected bogie (Figure 1, Item 1) inboard as far as practical, ensuring that suspension hydraulic and pneumatic
hoses are not under any tension.
Figure 1. Bogie Wheels.
0150-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
12. Remove three cotter pins (Figure 2, Item 2), four washers (Figure 2, Item 3), three pins (Figure 2, Item 4), and crossbar
(Figure 2, Item 6) with two clevises (Figure 2, Item 5) from two slack adjusters (Figure 2, Item 1) and brake chamber
clevis (Figure 2, Item 7). Discard cotter pins.
Figure 2. Brake Chamber.
0150-3
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
or foreign material from entering the pneumatic system or damage to equipment may result.
13. Tag and disconnect two air lines (Figure 3, Item 2) from service/parking brake chamber (Figure 3, Item 1). Install
caps/plugs onto fittings and hoses.
14. Remove nut (Figure 3, Item 3), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 4), and loop clamp (Figure 3, Item 5) from axle. Move two
air brake lines (Figure 3, Item 2) inward toward center of semitrailer platform, away from axle.
15. Straighten corners of two mounting plates (Figure 3, Item 10) that lock four bolts (Figure 3, Item 11). Remove four
bolts, two mounting plates, and trunnion cap (Figure 3, Item 9) from spindle (Figure 3, Item 6). Discard bolts and
mounting plates. Discard cap if defective.
WARNING
Personnel used to remove/maneuver axle or parking brake chamber must not, at any time, use the caging
bolt as a holding/lifting device. The caging bolt is held in place by pressure from a spring in the brake
chamber. If caging bolt becomes unseated inside brake chamber, serious injury may result. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury to personnel.
16. Use 15/16 in. deep-well socket to remove two self-locking nuts (Figure 3, Item 7), two washers (Figure 3, Item 8), and
brake chamber (Figure 3, Item 1) from axle. Discard self-locking nuts.
0150-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
Figure 3. Brake Chamber Removed.
0150-5
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
The extender must be aligned so that mounting bolt holes in the extender line up with upper left and lower right
holes in the spindle. This alignment ensures that the hydraulic ram will be properly mounted.
17. Align extender (Figure 4, Item 7) with upper left and lower right holes on spindle (Figure 4, Item 12). Use one person to
hold extender in place and have second person insert 2 5/8 in. long capscrew (Figure 4, Item 6) into extender approximately
over bolt hole in spindle.
18. Use 1/2 in. hex stock to pass hex stock (Figure 4, Item 11) through opening in hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) end of
extender (Figure 4, Item 7). Insert hex stock into capscrew (Figure 4, Item 6) and install and tighten first capscrew into
upper left mounting hole on spindle. Remove hex stock (Figure 4, Item 11) from extender.
19. Insert another capscrew (Figure 4, Item 6) into opening in side of extender (Figure 4, Item 7) approximately over
lower right bolt hole on extender.
20. Pass hex stock (Figure 4, Item 11) through lower right hole in extender (Figure 4, Item 7) and install and tighten second
capscrew (Figure 4, Item 6). Remove hex stock.
21. Prepare hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) as follows:
a. Assemble hydraulic hose (Figure 4, Item 5) to hydraulic pump (Figure 4, Item 4).
b. Fill hydraulic pump (Figure 4, Item 4) with hydraulic fluid, as required, in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications.
c. Connect hydraulic hose (Figure 4, Item 5) to hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8).
d. Place hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) on the ground with ram extender (Figure 4, Item 7) facing up.
e. Hold hydraulic pump (Figure 4, Item 4) as high as possible without kinking hydraulic hose (Figure 4, Item 5) or
lifting hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) off the ground.
f. Operate hydraulic pump (Figure 4, Item 4) until hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) is fully extended with approximately
3 in. (7.6 cm) of hydraulic ram piston showing.
g. Open relief valve on hydraulic pump (Figure 4, Item 4) to allow hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) to retract. Close
relief valve on hydraulic pump.
22. Use two people to align hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 8) with hose connection on hydraulic ram pointing upward to
extender (Figure 4, Item 7). Secure hydraulic ram to extender by installing two 3 in. long capscrews (Figure 4, Item 9)
and lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 10).
23. Set hydraulic pump (Figure 4, Item 4) on platform over affected bogie to keep hydraulic hose (Figure 4, Item 5) and
hydraulic pump out of the way.
24. Install one wingnut (Figure 4, Item 1) onto threaded rod (Figure 4, Item 14) so that approximately three threads of
threaded rod are showing. Repeat this step for other threaded rod.
25. Install two threaded rods (Figure 4, Item 14) into tie bar (Figure 4, Item 13) as shown on illustration. Once both
threaded rods are in place, secure by installing two wingnuts (Figure 4, Item 1) flush against tie bar. These assembled
parts create the lower tie bar.
26. Place two side plates (Figure 4, Item 3) flat on the ground. Push first side plate, T-end first, under axle. Once under axle,
rotate side plate vertically next to left-hand brake drum. Push second side plate under axle and rotate vertically next
to right-hand brake drum.
27. Use one person to lift both side plates (Figure 4 , Item 3), and have second person align and install lower tie bar (Figure 4,
Item 13) into place between both side plates.
28. While still holding both side plates (Figure 4, Item 3) upward, align and install upper tie bar (Figure 4, Item 2) over two
threaded rods (Figure 4, Item 14) and into slots in both side plates.
29. Secure upper tie bar (Figure 4, Item 2) in place by installing two wingnuts (Figure 4, Item 1) onto threaded rods
0150-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
Figure 4. Upper Tie Bar.
0150-7
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
30. Install detent pin (Figure 5, Item 8) into adjustment rod (Figure 5, Item 7). Thread adjustment rod, pin end of rod on
same side as slotted end of thrust bar (Figure 5, Item 6), so that approximately 12 in. (30 cm) (Figure 5, Item 5) of
adjustment rod sticks out of flat side of thrust bar.
31. Install hex nut (Figure 5, Item 13) onto adjustment rod (Figure 5, Item 7). Loosely tighten hex nut against flat side
of thrust bar (Figure 5, Item 6).
32. Install hex nut end of adjustment rod (Figure 5, Item 7) into hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 3). Push adjustment rod all the
way into hydraulic ram.
33. Use two people to lift upward on both side plates (Figure 5, Item 4) so that square cutout is approximately aligned with
thrust bar (Figure 5, Item 6). Then, maneuver side plates, as required, so that thrust bar mounts into both side plates.
Ensure groove in thrust bar is properly seated in each square cutout in both side plates.
34. While holding side plates (Figure 5, Item 4) parallel to hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 3) and extender (Figure 5, Item 2),
tighten hex nut (Figure 5, Item 13) against hydraulic ram until snug.
35. Position one person under platform in front of affected bogie. Place a 4 in. x 4 in. (10.16 cm x 10.16 cm) block of wood
(Figure 5, Item 10) on the ground directly under suspension cylinder on affected bogie. Place chisel end of crowbar
(Figure 5, Item 11) under lower tie bar (Figure 5, Item 9) and rest crowbar on block of wood.
CAUTION
The upper and lower tie bars must be manually centered over ultra bushing using a crowbar, or a
misalignment may occur and damage to equipment may result.
36. Use one person to pull down on crowbar (Figure 5, Item 11) and align both upper and lower tie bars (Figure 5, Item 9
and Item 12) over ultra bushing/spindle. While holding up both tie bars with crowbar, hand-tighten hex nut (Figure 5,
Item 13) firmly against hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 3) as snug as possible.
NOTE
If ultra bushing separates/tears in half during removal, continue procedure. Ultra bushing inner race may be
removed after axle removal is completed.
37. Operate hydraulic pump (Figure 5, Item 1) until axle moves the full 3 in. (7.6 cm) stroke of hydraulic ram (Figure 5,
Item 3).
38. Relieve pressure in hydraulic pump (Figure 5, Item 1) and screw threaded rod (Figure 5, Item 7) through thrust bar
(Figure 5, Item 6) until hex nut (Figure 5, Item 13) is firm against hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 3). Lift tie bars (Figure 5,
Item 9 and Item 12) and hand-tighten hex nut to maintain alignment.
39. Again operate hydraulic pump (Figure 5, Item 1) until axle moves the full 3 in. stroke of hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 3).
NOTE
Use one person to continue to jam the hex nut against the hydraulic ram as the ram cylinders compress. This will
keep the axle puller tight against the axle to prevent having to align the upper and lower tie bars.
40. Use one person to continue to thread hex nut (Figure 5, Item 13) against hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 3), and have
second person slowly relieve pressure in hydraulic pump (Figure 5, Item 1) until hydraulic ram is completely retracted.
41. Remove wood block (Figure 5, Item 10) and crowbar (Figure 5, Item 11) from under affected bogie. Position hydraulic floor
jack beneath lower suspension arm to maintain height of spindle parallel to the ground when axle is pulled clear of spindle.
0150-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
Figure 5. Hydraulic Pump and Hydraulic Ram.
0150-9
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Once ultra bushing is clear of spindle, side plates may separate from thrust bar, allowing either side plates
or thrust bar to fall to ground. Keep hands and feet clear of area. Failure to follow this warning may
NOTE
This operation takes slightly less than three ram strokes. Stroke of hydraulic ram is 3 in. (7.62 cm) and length of
ultra bushing is 8 in. (20.32 cm).
42. Repeat steps 37 thru 40 until ultra bushing is clear of spindle (Figure 6, Item 3) and axle is completely on extender
(Figure 6, Item 15). Relieve pressure on hydraulic pump until hydraulic ram (Figure 6, Item 6) is fully retracted.
43. Use two people to spread ends of two side plates (Figure 6, Item 14) and to unseat and remove thrust bar (Figure 6, Item 9).
Unscrew and remove hex nut (Figure 6, Item 11) and adjustment rod (Figure 6, Item 10) from thrust bar. Remove detent
pin (Figure 6, Item 8) from adjustment rod.
44. Roll axle away from work area.
45. Use two people and hex stock (Figure 6, Item 4) to remove two capscrews (Figure 6, Item 7), lockwashers (Figure 6,
Item 16), and hydraulic ram (Figure 6, Item 6) from extender (Figure 6, Item 15).
46. Use hex stock (Figure 6, Item 4) to remove two capscrews (Figure 6, Item 5) and extender (Figure 6, Item 15) from
spindle (Figure 6, Item 3). Remove extender from within axle.
47. Use two people to remove two wingnuts (Figure 6, Item 1), upper tie bar (Figure 6, Item 2), lower tie bar (Figure 6,
Item 12), and two side plates (Figure 6, Item 14) from axle. Remove four wingnuts and two threaded rods (Figure 6,
Item 13) from lower tie bar.
0150-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
Figure 6. Hydraulic Pump and Hydraulic Ram Removed.
0150-11
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
48. If, during removal procedure, the ultra bushing tore/separated and inner race (Figure 7, Item 5) remained on spindle
(Figure 7, Item 8), proceed as follows:
a. On inner race (Figure 7, Item 5) clean two grooves that are closest to suspension cylinder.
b. Install two side bars (Figure 7, Item 3) on two side plates (Figure 7, Item 6) using three bolts (Figure 7, Item 4)
and nuts (Figure 7, Item 2) on each one.
c. Reinstall axle puller parts with upper and lower tie bars (Figure 7, Item 1 and Item 7) inverted, flipped over 180
degrees, engaging two cleaned grooves. Repeat steps 17 thru 47, as required, to remove inner race (Figure 7, Item 5)
from spindle (Figure 7, Item 8).
Figure 7. Axle.
0150-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
49. Inspect axle and parking/service brake chamber bracket for broken welds, broken casting, bends, or excessive corrosion.
Clean corrosion with dry cleaning solvent and rags. Replace defective parts, as required.
50. Inspect lower suspension arm spindle, spindle cap, and ultra bushing bore for nicks, burrs, scratches, scoring, and
corrosion. Clean with dry cleaning solvent and rags. If defects are found, use a fine grade of crocus cloth to polish spindle.
51. Check ultra bushing bore for grooves, scratches, corrosion, cracks, or unusual wear. Hone bushing, if necessary, to
restore interior finish.
END OF TASK
0150-13
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. If not already done, install all wheels and tires on axle assembly (WP 0081, WP 0080, WP 0079, and WP 0078).
2. Install trunnion fitting (Figure 8, Item 2) onto spindle (Figure 8, Item 1) using two socket head bolts (Figure 8, Item 3).
3. Check that spindle (Figure 8, Item 1) is parallel to the ground. Make any required adjustments to hydraulic floor jack.
If ultra bushing is new, remove anticorrosion material from inner bore. Apply grease to entire surface of ultra bushing
inner bore and lower suspension arm spindle.
4. Use two people to roll axle assembly in place over spindle (Figure 8, Item 1).
5. Align spindle (Figure 8, Item 1) with ultra bushing (Figure 8, Item 10) until end of spindle starts into end of ultra bushing.
6. Screw adjustment rod (Figure 8, Item 4) onto trunnion fitting (Figure 8, Item 2) until it bottoms out against spindle
(Figure 8, Item 1).
7. Assemble spacer (Figure 8, Item 9) onto base of hydraulic ram (Figure 8, Item 8) using two lockwashers (Figure 8,
8. Install spacer (Figure 8, Item 9), hydraulic ram (Figure 8, Item 8), and hex nut (Figure 8, Item 5) onto adjustment rod
(Figure 8, Item 4). Hand-tighten hex nut to remove slack.
CAUTION
Be sure ultra bushing and spindle are properly aligned or damage to equipment may result.
9. Operate hydraulic hand pump until hydraulic ram (Figure 8, Item 8) extends to its full travel of 3 in. (7.62 cm).
10. Release pressure on hydraulic hand pump and allow hydraulic ram (Figure 8, Item 8) to relax to retracted position.
Hand-tighten hex nut (Figure 8, Item 5) to remove slack.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 until ultra bushing (Figure 8, Item 10) is fully onto spindle.
0150-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
Figure 8. Bushing, Spindle, and Press.
0150-15
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. Release pressure on hydraulic hand pump and allow hydraulic ram (Figure 9, Item 3) to relax to retracted position.
Remove hex nut (Figure 9, Item 4) and hydraulic ram from adjustment rod (Figure 9, Item 1).
13. Remove two capscrews (Figure 9, Item 5), lockwashers (Figure 9, Item 6), and spacer (Figure 9, Item 2) from hydraulic
ram (Figure 9, Item 3).
14. Remove adjustment rod (Figure 9, Item 1), two capscrews (Figure 9, Item 7), and trunnion fitting (Figure 9, Item 8)
from spindle (Figure 9, Item 9).
Figure 9. Trunnion and Press.
0150-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
WARNING
Person supporting parking/service brake chamber on axle must not at any time use caging bolt as a holding
device. The caging bolt is held in place by pressure from spring in brake chamber. If caging bolt becomes
unseated inside brake chamber, serious injury may result. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury to personnel.
15. Install brake chamber (Figure 10, Item 1). Secure brake chamber using a 15/16 in. deep-well socket, two washers
(Figure 10, Item 8), and two nuts (Figure 10, Item 7).
NOTE
Bend ends of mounting plates up slightly before installation. Otherwise, they will be very difficult to bend.
16. Install trunnion cap (Figure 10, Item 9) and two mounting plates (Figure 10, Item 10) on spindle (Figure 10, Item 6). Secure
with four bolts (Figure 10, Item 11). Use a torque wrench to torque bolts to 240 lb-ft (325 Nm) and bend one corner
of each end of mounting plate up against flats of bolt heads.
17. Reposition two air brake lines (Figure 10, Item 2) and secure to axle with loop clamp (Figure 10, Item 5), lockwasher
(Figure 10, Item 4), and nut (Figure 10, Item 3).
18. Remove caps/plugs and connect two air lines (Figure 10, Item 2) to brake chamber (Figure 10, Item 1).
Figure 10. Brake Chamber Removed.
0150-17
0150 TM 9-2330-381-13
19. Install crossbar (Figure 11, Item 6) with two clevises (Figure 11, Item 5) to two slack adjusters (Figure 11, Item 1) and
brake chamber clevis (Figure 11, Item 7) with three pins (Figure 11, Item 4), four washers (Figure 11, Item 3), and three
cotter pins (Figure 11, Item 2).
20. Install upper and lower brake dust shields (WP 0068).
Figure 11. Brake Chamber Installed.
0150-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0150
21. Rotate bogie (Figure 12, Item 1) into normal position. Connect connecting link to bogie (WP 0076).
22. Open suspension isolation valve with handle facing toward front of semitrailer (WP 0004) and start APU (WP 0005).
23. Couple semitrailer to tractor and charge semitrailer air brake system (WP 0013). Release parking brakes by pushing in
brake release valve (WP 0004), and then apply parking brakes by pulling out brake release valve. Uncage brakes and
restow caging bolt (WP 0023).
24. Adjust platform to road height (WP 0008).
25. Stow front and rear support legs (WP 0011 and WP 0012) back on semitrailer.
Figure 12. Bogie Wheels.
END OF TASK
Adjust brakes as required (WP 0037).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0150-19/20 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ULTRA BUSHING
INITIAL SETUP:
Kit, Ultra Bushing Rem/Instl (WP 0168, Item 19) Personnel Required
Ram, Hyd, 50 Ton Portable (WP 0168, Item 24) 2
Ram, Hyd, 30 Ton Portable (WP 0168, Item 27) Equipment Conditions
Standard Army Tool Set (WP 0168, Item 28) Axle removed from semitrailer (WP 0150)
Materials/Parts Wheels removed from axle (WP 0078, WP 0079,
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) WP 0080, and WP 0081)
Grease, Automotive and Artillery (WP 0170, Item 16)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, inspection, and installation of the ultra bushing.
0151-1
0151 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Do not hold caging bolt or injury to personnel may result.
CAUTION
Do not allow caging bolt to rest or fall to the ground or damage to equipment may result.
1. Position axle with end of brake chamber on pieces of wood so that ultra bushing is as parallel to the ground as possible
and caging bolt does not rest on the ground.
2. Chock axle front and back using pieces of wood.
NOTE
The pin on the brake chamber clevis is shorter than the other two pins.
3. Remove three cotter pins (Figure 1, Item 4), six washers (Figure 1, Item 2), two pins (Figure 1, Item 1), pin
(Figure 1, Item 5), and crossbar (Figure 1, Item 3) from two slack adjusters (Figure 1, Item 8) and brake chamber clevis
(Figure 1, Item 6). Discard cotter pins.
4. Cage brakes (WP 0023) to move brake chamber clevis (Figure 1, Item 6) out of the way.
CAUTION
Do not allow jam nut to move or brakes will be out of adjustment and damage to equipment may result.
5. While holding jam nut (Figure 1, Item 7) in place, remove brake chamber clevis (Figure 1, Item 6).
0151-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
Figure 1. Brake Chamber Pin.
0151-3
0151 TM 9-2330-381-13
6. Fit puller (Figure 2, Item 1) into place over end of ultra bushing housing (Figure 2, Item 2) on same side as brake
chamber. Insert shaft (Figure 2, Item 5), short threaded end first, through ultra bushing housing and
ultra bushing (Figure 2, Item 3) from side opposite brake chamber, and thread into puller.
7. Tighten puller (Figure 2, Item 1) onto shaft (Figure 2, Item 5) until puller bottoms out. At least one full
thread should be showing.
8. Fit canister (Figure 2, Item 4) over shaft (Figure 2, Item 5) onto ultra bushing housing (Figure 2, Item 2) on side
opposite brake chamber.
NOTE
The 50-ton hydraulic ram must be used to remove the ultra bushing because additional pressure is required
to break the ultra bushing free.
9. Install 50-ton hydraulic ram (Figure 2, Item 6) and adjuster (Figure 2, Item 7) onto shaft (Figure 2, Item 5). Ensure
puller (Figure 2, Item 1) is seated squarely in bore of ultra bushing (Figure 2, Item 3) and canister (Figure 2, Item 4) is
seated squarely on ultra bushing housing (Figure 2, Item 2). Hand-tighten adjuster snugly against the hydraulic ram.
Figure 2. Puller.
0151-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Wear long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face shield. If
10. Connect hydraulic power source (Figure 3, Item 1) to hydraulic ram (Figure 3, Item 3) and apply pressure until
hydraulic ram extends full stroke. Recheck all tools for proper seating and alignment.
11. Relieve hydraulic pressure and let return springs retract ram. Tighten adjuster (Figure 3, Item 2) against hydraulic ram
(Figure 3, Item 3) and apply hydraulic pressure.
Figure 3. Ram Installed.
0151-5
0151 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Combined weight of canister, shaft, puller, ultra bushing, and hydraulic ram requires two persons. Canister
may fall off of axle after third ram stroke. DO NOT allow end of shaft to scratch interior bore of ultra bushing
housing. Be prepared and use two persons or injury to personnel and damage to equipment may result.
12. Repeat step 11 as necessary (approximately three times) until ultra bushing (Figure 4, Item 2) is completely clear of
housing (Figure 4, Item 1) and is in side canister (Figure 4, Item 3).
13. Use two persons to firmly hold canister (Figure 4, Item 3) and tap lightly to loosen canister from housing (Figure 4, Item 1).
Carefully lower canister to the ground.
WARNING
Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly and use caution when disconnecting
power source from hydraulic ram or injury to personnel may result. Failure to follow this warning may
14. Disconnect hydraulic power source (Figure 4, Item 4) from hydraulic ram (Figure 4, Item 5).
Figure 4. Ultra Bushing Removed.
0151-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
15. Remove adjuster (Figure 5, Item 6), hydraulic ram (Figure 5, Item 4), and canister (Figure 5, Item 3) from shaft
(Figure 5, Item 5). Remove puller (Figure 5, Item 1) from shaft. Remove ultra bushing (Figure 5, Item 2)
from canister.
Figure 5. Ultra Bushing and Hydraulic Tool.
END OF TASK
INSPECTION
1. Check axle bore and ultra bushing exterior and interior for grooves, scratches, corrosion, cracks, or unusual wear.
2. If necessary, use a fine grade of crocus cloth to polish and restore surface finish.
3. Replace ultra bushing as necessary.
END OF TASK
0151-7
0151 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Apply grease to inside of housing (Figure 6, Item 3) and outside of ultra bushing (Figure 6, Item 2).
NOTE
Grooved side of backing plate ts over ultra bushing housing; hydraulic ram will snug up to smooth side.
2. Position backing plate (Figure 6, Item 4) onto brake chamber end of ultra bushing housing (Figure 6, Item 3).
3. Insert short threaded end of shaft (Figure 6, Item 5) through backing plate (Figure 6, Item 4) and ultra bushing housing
(Figure 6, Item 3) on brake chamber side of axle.
4. Position ultra bushing (Figure 6, Item 2) and puller (Figure 6, Item 1) on ultra bushing housing (Figure 6, Item 3)
opposite brake chamber, and thread puller on short threaded end of shaft (Figure 6, Item 5) until it bottoms out.
At least one thread should be showing.
CAUTION
• Use only the 30-ton hydraulic ram for installing the ultra bushing. The 50-ton ram is too large and may
damage the brake chamber and mounting bracket.
• The 30-ton hydraulic ram must be turned parallel to the ground or the hydraulic ram will damage the
brake chamber bracket.
5. Install 30-ton hydraulic ram (Figure 6, Item 6) and adjuster (Figure 6, Item 7) onto long threaded end of shaft
(Figure 6, Item 5).
Figure 6. Ultra Bushing/Press Installation.
0151-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
CAUTION
Be sure ultra bushing and hydraulic ram are squarely aligned with housing to avoid damage to equipment.
6. Tighten adjuster (Figure 7, Item 4) until entire assembly is snug. Be sure ultra bushing (Figure 7, Item 1) and hydraulic
ram (Figure 7, Item 3) are squarely aligned with ultra bushing housing (Figure 7, Item 2).
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid may be absorbed through the skin. Wear long sleeves, gloves, and goggles or face shield. If
7. Connect hydraulic power source (Figure 7, Item 5) to hydraulic ram (Figure 7, Item 3).
WARNING
Adjuster will be very close to brake chamber bracket. Keep fingers clear of adjuster and brake chamber
bracket. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
8. Gradually apply hydraulic pressure to hydraulic ram (Figure 7, Item 3) until ultra bushing (Figure 7, Item 1) just starts
into housing (Figure 7 , Item 2). Stop ram and recheck fixture alignment and interference between hydraulic ram and
brake chamber bracket. If not aligned properly, release hydraulic pressure and adjust fixtures. Apply pressure until
hydraulic ram has extended full stroke.
Figure 7. Ultra Bushing/Press Installation.
0151-9
0151 TM 9-2330-381-13
9. Relieve pressure and allow return springs to retract ram (Figure 8, Item 2). Tighten adjuster (Figure 8, Item 3) until snug.
Reapply pressure until ram extends full stroke. Repeat as required (approximately three times) until ram bottoms
out and ultra bushing is centered in ultra bushing housing (Figure 8, Item 1).
WARNING
Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly and use caution when disconnecting
power source from hydraulic ram. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
10. Disconnect hydraulic power source (Figure 8, Item 4) from hydraulic ram (Figure 8, Item 2).
Figure 8. Ultra Bushing/Press.
0151-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
CAUTION
Do not allow shaft to scratch inside bore of ultra bushing or premature failure or damage to equipment
may result.
11. Remove puller (Figure 9, Item 1) and adjuster (Figure 9, Item 6) from shaft (Figure 9, Item 4). Remove hydraulic
ram (Figure 9, Item 5), backing plate (Figure 9, Item 3), and shaft from ultra bushing housing (Figure 9, Item 2).
Figure 9. Ultra Bushing Installation, Tool and Housing.
0151-11
0151 TM 9-2330-381-13
12. While holding jam nut (Figure 10, Item 7), install and tighten brake chamber clevis (Figure 10, Item 6).
NOTE
The brake chamber clevis pin is shorter than the other two pins.
13. Install crossbar (Figure 10, Item 3) on two slack adjusters (Figure 10, Item 8) and brake chamber clevis
(Figure 10, Item 6) and secure with pin (Figure 10, Item 5), two pins (Figure 10, Item 1), six washers (Figure 10, Item 2),
and three cotter pins (Figure 10, Item 4).
14. Uncage brakes (WP 0023).
Figure 10. Brake Chamber Bracket.
END OF TASK
Install axle (WP 0150).
Install wheels (WP 0078, WP 0079, WP 0080, WP 0081).
Adjust brakes (WP 0068).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0151-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0152
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM CYLINDER PIN
INITIAL SETUP:
Kit, Lower Suspension Arm Cylinder Pin Removal Platform adjusted to 50 in. (127 cm) height (WP 0008)
(WP 0168, Item 21) All suspension isolation valves closed (WP 0004)
Ram, Hydraulic, 50 Ton Portable (WP 0168, Item 24) All four wheels removed from affected bogie (WP 0081,
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) WP 0080, WP 0079, and WP 0078)
Personnel Required
2
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal of the lower suspension cylinder pin.
REMOVAL
NOTE
The following procedure is to be performed by depot support maintenance if the lower suspension arm cylinder
pin cannot be removed by unit maintenance.
At this point, the affected bogie should be turned outboard, a hydraulic jack should be supporting the bogie, and
2 in. to 3 in. (50.8 mm to 76.2 mm) of suspension cylinder shaft should be exposed.
1. Install two nuts (Figure 1, Item 1) on spreader (Figure 1, Item 2) and install spreader in lower suspension arm
(Figure 1, Item 16). Tighten two nuts fingertight.
2. Install ram (Figure 1, Item 9) on plate (Figure 1, Item 18) and secure with two lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 8) and screws
(Figure 1, Item 7).
3. Install spacer (Figure 1, Item 17) on plate (Figure 1, Item 18) and secure with two screws (Figure 1, Item 19).
4. Install two nuts (Figure 1, Item 3) just inside of holes on each of two upper rods (Figure 1, Item 20), and then slide
both rods through plate (Figure 1, Item 18).
5. Place plate (Figure 1, Item 18) and two upper rods (Figure 1, Item 20) over lower suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 16).
WARNING
The cylinder pin removal kit, when assembled, weighs in excess of 80 lb (36.3kg). Use two persons to lift
the assembled kit or injury to personnel may result.
6. Use two persons to raise ram (Figure 1, Item 9) into position with moving part of ram toward grease fitting hole in lower
suspension arm cylinder pin (Figure 1, Item 15). Slide upper holes in plate (Figure 1, Item 10) over two upper rods
(FIgure 1, Item 20) and secure with nut (Figure 1, Item 11) on each rod.
7. Install two nuts (Figure 1, Item 3) just inside of holes on each of two lower rods (Figure 1, Item 20), and then slide both
rods through plate (Figure 1, Item 18) and plate (Figure 1, Item 10). Install two nuts (Figure 1, Item 11).
0152-1
0152 TM 9-2330-381-13
8. Position adjustment rod (Figure 1, Item 12) so that extended tip will seat into grease fitting cavity in lower suspension arm
cylinder pin (Figure 1, Item 15) and slide adjustment rod through ram (Figure 1, Item 9). Install two nuts (Figure 1, Item 13)
and push adjustment rod into grease fitting cavity. Install nut (Figure 1, Item 6) and tighten against ram (Figure 1, Item 9).
9. Tighten four nuts (Figure 1, Item 11) evenly.
10. Using a 15/16 in. wrench, tighten nuts (Figure 1, Item 13) against each other just inside pin hole in adjustment rod
11. Connect hose (Figure 1, Item 5) and hand pump (Figure 1, Item 4) to ram (Figure 1, Item 9). Operate hand pump and
apply slight pressure to adjustment rod (Figure 1, Item 12). Check alignment of all parts to ensure lower suspension arm
cylinder pin (Figure 1, Item 15) is in center of hole in plate (Figure 1, Item 18).
WARNING
When the ram is under pressure, keep personnel away from hole in plate. Cylinder pin could come out
suddenly and injury to personnel may result.
12. Operate hand pump (Figure 1, Item 4). When ram (Figure, 1 Item 9) extends full length, release pressure. As operator
bleeds off hydraulic pressure on hand pump, hand-tighten nut (Figure 1, Item 6) against ram and use pin
(Figure 1, Item 14) to turn adjustment rod (Figure 1, Item 12), keeping rod snug in grease fitting cavity. Tighten
nut against ram.
13. If ram is unable to start cylinder pin (Figure 1, Item 15) moving, remove pin (Figure 1, Item 14) and position two nuts
(Figure 1, Item 13) flush with end of adjustment rod (Figure 1, Item 12) and lock (jam) together. Strike end of adjustment
rod with a 10-lb sledge hammer until pin begins moving.
14. Operate hand pump (Figure 1, Item 4) through two full extensions of ram (Figure 1, Item 9) until cylinder pin
(Figure 1, Item 15) is removed.
15. Disconnect hand pump (Figure 1, Item 4) and hose (Figure 1, Item 5).
16. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 6) from adjustment rod (Figure 1, Item 12), remove pin (Figure 1, Item 14), and then
remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 13).
17. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 11) from each lower rod (Figure 1, Item 20) and remove both lower rods. Remove two nuts
(Figure 1, Item 3) from each lower rod.
18. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 11) from each upper rod (Figure 1, Item 20). Use two persons to hold ram (Figure 1, Item 9),
and slide ram off of two upper rods. Remove two nuts (Figure 1, Item 3) from each upper rod.
19. Remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 7), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 8), and ram (Figure 1, Item 9) from
20. Remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 19) and spacer (Figure 1, Item 17) from plate (Figure 1, Item 18).
21. Remove spreader (Figure 1, Item 2) and two nuts (Figure 1, Item 1) from lower suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 16).
0152-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0152
Figure 1. Suspension Arm and 50 Ton Press.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0152-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0153
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Wood Block (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
Chain or Strap 2
Materials/Parts References
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) WP 0066
Pipe Sealant (WP 0170, Item 22) Equipment Conditions
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Axle removed (WP 0150)
Locknut (TM 9-2330-381-24P) If axle remains installed, wheels removed (WP 0081,
Plain Seal (2) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) WP 0080, WP 0079, and WP 0078)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal, disassembly, inspection, assembly, and installation of the lower
suspension arm.
0153-1
0153 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Ensure hydraulic floor jack is properly supporting lower suspension arm during removal or injury
to personnel may result. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Place wood block under lower suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 3) and secure wood block and lower suspension arm
to hydraulic floor jack with chain or strap.
2. Check position of hydraulic floor jack and make adjustments as necessary.
3. Remove suspension cylinder lower cylinder mounting pin from lower suspension arm (WP 0066).
4. Remove locknut (Figure 1, Item 4), hex head screw (Figure 1, Item 7), and two access covers (Figure 1, Item 5) from upper
and lower suspension arms (Figure 1, Item 1 and Item 3). Discard locknut.
5. Use tape measure to measure from ground to top of spindle (Figure 1, Item 2). Record measurement.
NOTE
With suspension in its normally installed position, the smaller end of the shouldered shaft points toward curbside.
Thus, on curbside suspensions, the smaller end will be outboard, and on streetside suspensions, the smaller end will
be inboard.
6. Use hammer and drift to drive shouldered shaft (Figure 1, Item 6) from lower suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 3).
7. Use two people to separate lower suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 3) from upper suspension arm (Figure 1, Item 1) by
pulling hydraulic floor jack, with lower suspension arm attached, away from upper suspension arm.
0153-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0153
Figure 1. Lower Suspension Arm Bushing.
END OF TASK
0153-3
0153 TM 9-2330-381-13
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove two plain seals (Figure 2, Item 3) from lower suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1). Discard plain seals.
2. Use hammer and brass drift to drive two sleeve bearings (Figure 2, Item 2) from lower suspension arm
(Figure 2, Item 1).
3. Remove two grease fittings (Figure 2, Item 4) from lower suspension arm (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Sleeve and Bearings.
END OF TASK
0153-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0153
INSPECTION
WARNING
to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
equipment.
1. Inspect lower suspension arm casting and attaching hardware for cracks, gouges, bends, and corrosion. Clean with
dry cleaning solvent. Replace any parts found defective.
2. Remove nicks and polish scored spindle surface with crocus cloth. If casting has defects, replace casting.
END OF TASK
0153-5
0153 TM 9-2330-381-13
ASSEMBLY
1. Apply pipe sealant to threads of two grease fittings (Figure 3, Item 4) and then install fittings in lower suspension arm
(Figure 3, Item 1). When fittings are tight, nipples must point upward.
2. Apply grease to two sleeve bearings (Figure 3, Item 2) and bore of lower suspension arm (Figure 3, Item 1).
3. Use soft-faced hammer to install two sleeve bearings (Figure 3, Item 2) into lower suspension arm (Figure 3,
Item 1).
4. Install two plain seals (Figure 3, Item 3) to lower suspension arm (Figure 3, Item 1).
END OF TASK
0153-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0153
INSTALLATION
1. Use two people to maneuver hydraulic floor jack supporting lower suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 3) and align lower
suspension arm with upper suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 1).
2. Apply grease to inside bore of assembly joint for both upper and lower suspension arms (Figure 4, Item 1 and Item 3) and
to exterior of shouldered shaft (Figure 4, Item 6).
3. Insert smaller end of shouldered shaft (Figure 4, Item 6), through larger bore in upper suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 1)
and into bore in lower suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 3) until shaft movement is stopped by lip at bearing oil seal.
4. Use a 0.015-in. blade, on 20-blade feeler gauge set, inserted in smaller bore of upper suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 1)
to carefully adjust position of lip of bearing oil seal up onto small end of shouldered shaft (Figure 4, Item 6).
5. Use soft-faced hammer to drive shouldered shaft (Figure 4, Item 6) into upper and lower suspension arms (Figure 4,
Item 1 and Item 3).
6. Install two access covers (Figure 4, Item 5), hex head screw (Figure 4, Item 7), and locknut (Figure 4, Item 4) to upper
and lower suspension arms (Figure 4, Item 1 and Item 3).
NOTE
Cylinder may have to be compressed using hydraulic floor jack to allow pin installation.
7. Align and install suspension cylinder lower cylinder mounting pin to lower suspension arm (Figure 4, Item 3) (WP 0066).
8. Remove chain or strap and wood block. Leave hydraulic floor jack in place.
9. Use hydraulic floor jack to adjust height of spindle (Figure 4, Item 2) to measurement previously recorded.
END OF TASK
0153-7
0153 TM 9-2330-381-13
Perform required lubrication to suspension assembly (WP 0163).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0153-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0154
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CONNECTING LINK SLEEVE BEARINGS
INITIAL SETUP:
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Personnel Required
Standard Army Tool Set (SATS) (WP 0168, Item 28) 1
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Connecting link removed (WP 0082)
Sealing Compound, Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for disassembly and assembly of the connecting sleeve bearings.
DISASSEMBLY
1. On steering connecting link, use an arbor press to press two sleeve bearings (Figure 1, Item 4) from connecting link
rod ends (Figure 1, Item 5).
2. On non-steering connecting link, remove two setscrews (Figure 1, Item 3) and use an arbor press to press two plain
bearings (Figure 1, Item 1) from connecting rod ends (Figure 1, Item 2).
Figure 1. Connecting Link Sleeve Bearings Disassembly.
END OF TASK
0154-1
0154 TM 9-2330-381-13
ASSEMBLY
1. On non-steering connecting rods, apply grease to two plain bearings (Figure 2, Item 1) and use an arbor press
to install bearings in connecting link rod ends (Figure 2, Item 2).
2. Apply thread locking compound to two setscrews (Figure 2, Item 3) and install setscrews into connecting link rod ends.
NOTE
The sleeve bearings are not symmetrical. One side has more urethane material protruding from the steel sleeve.
Ensure that the side with more material is pointed down when installed.
3. On steering connecting rods, use an arbor press to install two sleeve bearings (Figure 2, Item 4) into connection link
rod ends (Figure 2, Item 5).
Figure 2. Connecting Link Sleeve Bearings Assembly.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0154-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0155
FIELD MAINTENANCE
STEERING CONSOLE AND SLIDE SHAFT ASSEMBLY
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Ring Spacer (2)
Mandrel, Suspension (WP 0168, Item 5) Recessed Spacer (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Lockwasher (8)
Lifting Strap (WP 0168, Item 25) Lockwasher (8)
Personnel Required
Materials/Parts 2
Sealing Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) Both gooseneck steering cylinders removed (WP 0086)
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) Solar battery charger removed (some semitrailers)
Strap, Tiedown (as required) (WP 0170, Item 33) (WP 0054)
Lockwasher (1)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the steering console and slide shaft assembly.
0155-1
0155 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
The steering column housing is heavy and must be supported the entire time work is performed. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
1. Use davit (Figure 1, Item 4) and two lifting straps (Figure 1, Item 5) to wrap two lifting straps through inside eyes
of steering column housing (Figure 1, Item 7). Attach one end of each lifting strap to hook on davit and take up
slack in straps.
2. Remove eight capscrews (Figure 1, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 18) from gooseneck. Discard lockwashers.
3 Use crowbar and two people to pry up and remove mending plate (Figure 1, Item 17) from top of gooseneck and remove
lubrication fitting (Figure 1, Item 3) from mending plate.
NOTE
If sleeve bearing is to be removed, the sleeve bushing must be replaced.
4. If necessary, use a hammer and brass drift to remove sleeve bushing (Figure 1, Item 16) from mending plate (Figure 1,
Item 17). If removed, discard sleeve bearing.
5. If damaged, drive three spring pins (Figure 1, Item 2) from gooseneck.
6. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 15), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 14), and rod end connector (Figure 1, Item 13) from straight
shouldered pin (Figure 1, Item 19). Discard lockwasher.
7. Remove lubrication fitting (Figure 1, Item 20) from straight shouldered pin (Figure 1, Item 19).
NOTE
Pins must be pulled upward through steering gear arm opening.
8. Grip top of straight shouldered pin (Figure 1, Item 19) and, while twisting pin side to side, pull up and remove straight
shouldered pin from steering gear arm (Figure 1, Item 12).
NOTE
The two ring spacers may fall to the ground while slide shaft assembly is being removed.
9. Rotate steering column housing (Figure 1, Item 7) so that slide shaft assembly (Figure 1, Item 6) clears steering gear
arm (Figure 1, Item 12). Pick up or remove two ring spacers (Figure 1, Item 11) from slide shaft assembly. Discard
two ring spacers.
10. Push steering gear arm (Figure 1, Item 12) as far as possible toward curbside of gooseneck.
11. Secure slide shaft assembly (Figure 1, Item 6) to steering column housing (Figure 1, Item 7) using electrical tiedown straps.
12. Rotate steering column housing (Figure 1, Item 7) toward streetside of gooseneck and, using two people, davit
(Figure 1, Item 4), and crowbar, pry up and hoist steering column housing up and out of gooseneck.
13. Use two people and davit (Figure 1, Item 4), to maneuver and lower steering column housing (Figure 1, Item 7) to the
ground. Remove two straps (Figure 1, Item 5) from hook on davit.
14. Remove recessed spacer (Figure 1, Item 8) and lubrication fitting (Figure 1, Item 10) from gooseneck. Discard recessed
spacer.
15. Remove electrical tiedown straps from slide shaft assembly (Figure 1, Item 6) and steering column housing (Figure 1,
Item 7). Use two people to pull slide shaft assembly completely out of steering column housing.
0155-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0155
NOTE
If sleeve bearing is removed, the sleeve bearing must be replaced.
16. If necessary, remove sleeve bearing (Figure 1, Item 9) from gooseneck. If removed, discard sleeve bearing.
Figure 1. Gooseneck.
0155-3
0155 TM 9-2330-381-13
17. Remove eight capscrews (Figure 2, Item 12 and Item 6), lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 11 and Item 7), and two access covers
(Figure 2, Item 10 and Item 5) from steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 3). Discard lockwashers.
18. Drive two sleeve bearings (Figure 2, Item 9 and Item 4) from steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 3).
Remove two lubrication fittings (Figure 2, Item 8) from steering column housing.
19. Remove setscrew (Figure 2, Item 13) and, using an arbor press, press bearing (Figure 2, Item 1) from slide shaft assembly
(Figure 2, Item 2).
20. Inspect steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 3) and related parts for corrosion, nicked surfaces, scored bearing
surfaces, and any breaks in casting.
WARNING

• SROYHQWFOHDQLQJFRPSRXQG0,/35)7\SHOODQG7\SHOOOPD\EHLUULWDWLQJWRWKHH\HVDQGVNLQ8VH
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141° to 198°F (61° to 92°C) and for Type lll it is 200°
to 241°F (93° to 116°C).
equipment.
21. Clean all components with dry cleaning solvent and rags.
22. Clean corrosion with crocus cloth.
23. Apply grease to exterior and interior of bearing (Figure 2, Item 1) and, using an arbor press, press bearing into slide
shaft assembly (Figure 2, Item 2).
24. Apply thread locking compound to threads of setscrew (Figure 2, Item 13) and install setscrew into slide shaft assembly
(Figure 2, Item 2) to secure bearing (Figure 2, Item 1).
25. Install two lubrication fittings (Figure 2, Item 8) onto steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 3).
26. Apply grease to inner bore of steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 3) and interior and exterior of two sleeve bushings
(Figure 2, Item 9 and Item 4). Install two sleeve bushings into steering column housing.
0155-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0155
27. Install two access covers (Figure 2, Item 10 and Item 5) onto steering column housing (Figure 2, Item 3) and secure
with eight capscrews (Figure 2, Item 12 and Item 6) and lockwashers (Figure 2, Item 11 and Item 7).
28. Apply grease to slide shaft assembly (Figure 2, Item 2) and install slide shaft assembly into steering column housing
(Figure 2, Item 3).
Figure 2. Steering Column Housing.
END OF TASK
0155-5
0155 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Apply grease to exterior of sleeve bushing (Figure 3, Item 7) and, using a soft-faced hammer, drive sleeve bushing into
gooseneck.
NOTE
A large amount of grease applied to recessed spacer helps to hold the spacer in place during installation of steering
column housing.
2. Liberally apply grease to recessed spacer (Figure 3, Item 6) and place recessed spacer over sleeve bushing (Figure 3,
Item 7).
3. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 3, Item 8) into gooseneck.
4. Align and install suspension mandrel (Figure 3, Item 2) into bearing of slide shaft assembly (Figure 3, Item 1).
CAUTION
Both ring spacers must be completely compressed and must uniformly cover/expand over bearing of
slide shaft assembly prior to tightening suspension mandrel or not enough clearance will be available for
installation and damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
Each ring spacer is actually made of two pieces that if not handled carefully can be separated.
5. Align two ring spacers (Figure 3, Item 9) over each end of suspension mandrel (Figure 3, Item 2). Compress each ring
spacer flush onto bearing of slide shaft assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) and tighten adjusting bolt in suspension mandrel to
secure both ring spacers in place.
6. Use two people, lifting straps (Figure 3, Item 4), and davit (Figure 3, Item 3) to raise steering column housing (Figure 3,
Item 5) up above gooseneck. Then, rotate davit and lower steering column housing back down into place in gooseneck.
7. Position slide shaft assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) to a height even with slide shaft assembly mounting point on steering gear
CAUTION
When installing slide shaft assembly to steering gear arm, ensure ring spacers do not work loose or become
misaligned. If spacers are misaligned or work loose, stop the installation and remove slide shaft assembly or
damage to the spacers may result. It may take a few attempts to accomplish proper spacer installation. Ensure
head of the suspension mandrel adjusting bolt, in center of the mandrel, faces upward during installation or
you will be unable to loosen the bolt and/or remove the mandrel once slide shaft assembly is in place.
8. Use two people to carefully maneuver bearing end of slide shaft assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) into steering arm gear
(Figure 3, Item 10) ensuring head of adjusting bolt inside suspension mandrel (Figure 3, Item 2) is facing upward. Check
condition of both ring spacers (Figure 3, Item 9) during entire installation.
NOTE
During installation of bearing end of slide shaft assembly, one person can observe the position of the cylinder by
looking through the hole at the top of steering gear arm.
9. Once slide shaft assembly (Figure 3, Item 1) is in place, loosen and remove adjusting bolt from suspension mandrel
(Figure 3, Item 2).
0155-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0155
Figure 3. Suspension Mandrel.
0155-7
0155 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. With davit (Figure 4, Item 1) supporting steering column housing (Figure 4, Item 8), align and install special bolt (Figure 4,
Item 11) into suspension mandrel (Figure 4, Item 10). Start to tighten special bolt into mandrel.
11. Once threads of special bolt (Figure 4, Item 11) start to engage into suspension mandrel (Figure 4, Item 10), pull upon
special bolt and remove both special bolt and suspension mandrel from steering gear arm (Figure 4, Item 9).
12. Remove special bolt (Figure 4, Item 11) from suspension mandrel (Figure 4, Item 10) and reinstall original bolt back
into mandrel.
13. Apply grease to straight shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 6), and position pin so that hole for rod end connector (Figure 4,
Item 4) is in alignment.
14. Align and install rod end connector (Figure 4, Item 4) into straight shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 6) and, using a
soft-faced hammer, drive straight shouldered pin through top of steering gear arm (Figure 4, Item 9) and into slide
shaft assembly (Figure 4, Item 7).
15. Secure rod end connector (Figure 4, Item 4) with screw (Figure 4, Item 2) and lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 3).
16. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 4, Item 5) into straight shouldered pin (Figure 4, Item 6).
Figure 4. Lifting Straps.

0155-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0155
17. Remove two lifting straps (Figure 5, Item 6) and davit (Figure 5, Item 5) from steering column housing (Figure 5,
Item 7). Restow davit.
18. Install three spring pins (Figure 5, Item 3) to gooseneck.
19. Apply grease to exterior of sleeve bushing (Figure 5, Item 8) and, using a soft-faced hammer, drive sleeve bushing
into mending plate.
20. Install lubrication fitting (Figure 5, Item 4) into mending plate.
21. Align mending plate (Figure 5, Item 9) over steering column housing (Figure 5, Item 7) and three spring pins (Figure 5,
Item 3). Use two people to lower mending plate onto three spring pins and steering column housing.
22. Secure mending plate (Figure 5, Item 9) to gooseneck by installing eight lockwashers (Figure 5, Item 1) and capscrews
(Figure 5, Item 2).
Figure 5. Lifting Straps and Davit.
END OF TASK
Install steering (master) cylinders (WP 0086).
Install solar panel (some semitrailers) (WP 0054).
Manually steer semitrailer and check for proper operation (WP 0010).
END OF WORK PACKAGE

0155-9/10 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0156
FIELD MAINTENANCE
KINGPIN AND STEERING ARM
INITIAL SETUP:
Lockwasher (1)
Wrench, Spanner (WP 0168, Item 4) Lockwasher (1)
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Suspension Spacer
Lifting Strap (4) (WP 0168, Item 25)
Davit (WP 0168, Item 29) 2
Crocus Cloth (WP 0170, Item 6) Steering console and slide shaft assembly removed
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, repair or replacement, and installation of the king pin
and steering arm.
0156-1
0156 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
The kingpin and steering arm are heavy and must be supported the entire time work is performed or injury
WARNING
• On some semitrailers, a solar battery charger is mounted on the top of the gooseneck directly in front of the
spare tires. Persons working on top of the gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on it or trip over it.
• When on top of the gooseneck, always hold the handrail with one hand to avoid falling or injury to personnel
may result.
1. Using davit (Figure 1, Item 2) and lifting strap (Figure 1, Item 3), wrap lifting strap around steering gear arm
(Figure 1, Item 14). Attach lifting strap to hook from davit.
WARNING
Exercise caution during removal of the kingpin. Support the kingpin from the bottom side of the gooseneck
during removal or the kingpin may fall and injure personnel. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injury or death to personel.
2. Remove protective cap (Figure 1, Item 1) from kingpin nut (Figure 1, Item 17).
3. Use a 1-in. drive ratchet, extension, and 3-in. socket to remove kingpin nut (Figure 1, Item 17), lockwasher
(Figure 1, Item 16), and flat washer (Figure 1, Item 15) from gooseneck. Drive kingpin (Figure 1, Item 12)
from gooseneck. Discard lockwasher.
4. Remove capscrew (Figure 1, Item 10) and machine key (Figure 1, Item 11) from kingpin (Figure 1, Item 12).
5. If installed, remove two capscrews (Figure 1, Item 8) and lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 7) from steering gear arm
(Figure 1, Item 14). Discard lockwashers.
6. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 4), lockwasher (Figure 1, Item 5), and capscrew (Figure 1, Item 9) from steering gear
arm (Figure 1, Item 14). Discard lockwasher.
7. Slide steering wedge (Figure 1, Item 6) off of steering gear arm (Figure 1, Item 14).
8. Use two people and davit (Figure 1, Item 2) to remove steering gear arm (Figure 1, Item 14) from gooseneck.
Raise steering gear arm up and out of gooseneck. Lower steering gear arm to the ground for further disassembly.
9. Remove two suspension spacers (Figure 1, Item 13) from gooseneck after steering gear arm (Figure 1, Item 14) is
out and away from gooseneck. Discard two suspension spacers.
0156-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0156
Figure 1. Kingpin and Steering Arm Removal.
END OF TASK
0156-3
0156 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
1. Remove lifting strap (Figure 2, Item 2) from hook on davit (Figure 2, Item 1).
2. Use hammer and brass drift to drive sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 4) out of steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6).
3. Drive two sleeve bearings (Figure 2, Item 3) out of steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6).
4. Inspect steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6), kingpin, and related parts for corrosion, nicked surfaces, scored bearing
surfaces, and any breaks in casting. If corroded, clean with crocus cloth (WP 0170, Item 6). If parts are found defective,
replace as necessary.
5. Install two lubrication fittings (Figure 2, Item 5) into steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6).
6. Apply grease to both interior and exterior of two sleeve bearings (Figure 2, Item 3) and sleeve bushing
(Figure 2, Item 4).
7. Drive two sleeve bearings (Figure 2, Item 3) into steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6).
NOTE
The slot cut out in the sleeve bushing must be placed so that it faces aft when installed into the steering gear arm.
The position of the sleeve bushing slot provides alignment for the kingpin.
8. Align slot in sleeve bushing (Figure 2, Item 4) so that it is positioned aft in steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6). Drive
sleeve bushing, slot end first with slot facing aft, into steering arm gear.
9. Wrap lifting strap (Figure 2, Item 2) around steering gear arm (Figure 2, Item 6) and attach each end of lifting strap to
hook on davit (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Kingpin and Steering Arm Repair.
END OF TASK
0156-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0156
INSTALLATION
NOTE
Applying a large amount of grease to suspension spacer holds the spacer in place during installation
of steering gear arm.
1. Liberally apply grease onto two suspension spacers (Figure 3, Item 13 and Item 15). Install suspension spacer
(Figure 3, Item 13) onto bottom of steering gear arm (Figure 3, Item 14).
NOTE
When installing steering gear arm into gooseneck, ensure the bottom suspension spacer stays in place on
steering gear arm.
2. Use two people and davit (Figure 3, Item 2) to align and install steering gear arm (Figure 3, Item 14) into gooseneck.
Check that first suspension spacer (Figure 3, Item 13) on bottom of steering gear arm is properly positioned on arm and
aligned with hole in bottom of gooseneck for kingpin (Figure 3, Item 12).
3. Align and tap second suspension spacer (Figure 3, Item 15) into place on top of steering gear arm (Figure 3, Item 14).
Continue to tap suspension spacer (Figure 3, Item 15) until spacer is aligned with hole in top of gooseneck for kingpin
4. Align and install steering wedge (Figure 3, Item 6) on steering gear arm (Figure 3, Item 14). Push steering wedge
forward against steering gear arm.
5. Install capscrew (Figure 3, Item 9), nut (Figure 3, Item 4), and lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 5) into steering gear arm
(Figure 3, Item 14). Push steering wedge (Figure 3, Item 6) forward against steering gear arm. Tighten nut.
6. Install two lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 7) and capscrews (Figure 3, Item 8).
7. Install capscrew (Figure 3, Item 10) and machine key (Figure 3, Item 11) into kingpin (Figure 3, Item 12).
8. Apply grease to bearing surface of kingpin (Figure 3, Item 12).
9. Use two people to align capscrew (Figure 3, Item 10) with slot of sleeve bushing inside steering gear arm (Figure 3,
Item 14). Install kingpin (Figure 3, Item 12) into gooseneck through steering gear arm (Figure 3, Item 14).
NOTE
The top of the kingpin threaded portion will be below the top of the nut when tightened. Distance from the
top of the nut to the top of the kingpin must not exceed 0.200 in. (0.50.8 mm) (approximately 2-1/3 threads)
when properly installed and torqued.
10. While one person holds kingpin (Figure 3, Item 12) from bottom and second person is positioned on top of gooseneck,
install flat washer (Figure 3, Item 16), lockwasher (Figure 3, Item 17), and kingpin nut (Figure 3, Item 18). Use a torque
wrench, extension, adapter, and 3-in socket to torque kingpin nut to 420 to 460 lb-ft (520 to 624 Nm).
11. Install protective cap (Figure 3, Item 1) on kingpin nut (Figure 3, Item 18).
12. Remove lifting strap (Figure 3, Item 3) from steering gear arm (Figure 3, Item 14) and hook on davit (Figure 3, Item 2).
0156-5
0156 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 3. Kingpin and Steering Arm Installation.
END OF TASK
Install steering console and slide shaft assembly (WP 0155).

Manually steer semitrailer and check for proper operation (WP 0010).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0156-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
FIELD MAINTENANCE
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE FRAME
INITIAL SETUP:
Chain Assembly (WP 0168, Item 8) Cotter Pin (1)
Truck, Wrecker M984 (WP 0168, Item 26) Personnel Required

Cap and Plug Set (WP 0170, Item 4) Front and rear support legs lowered supporting platform
Solvent, Dry Cleaning (WP 0170, Item 32) (WP 0011 and WP 0012)
Lockwasher (6) Gooseneck supported (WP 0007)
Lockwasher (3) Hydraulic tank drained (WP 0040)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal and installation of the hydraulic control module frame.
0157-1
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
hydraulic fluid gets in eyes, flush eyes immediately with water and seek medical attention. If hydraulic fluid gets
on skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water. Wash hands thoroughly prior to eating or smoking.
• Residual pressure may remain in hydraulic lines. Open fittings slowly.
• The hydraulic control module, with all components installed, weighs in excess of 300 lb (136 kg). Extreme
caution must be used during removal and installation of control module.
• The control module must be supported with a hydraulic transmission jack during removal and installation
procedure.
1. Use two people to remove six capscrews (Figure 1, Item 12), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 13), and bottom cover assembly
(Figure 1, Item 11) from hydraulic control module frame (Figure 1, Item 10). Discard lockwashers.
2. Pull gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 1, Item 4) outward to ADJUST position. Remove cotter pin (Figure 1,
Item 6) and shouldered pin (Figure 1, Item 5) from gooseneck isolation valve handle. Discard cotter pin.
3. Remove two screws (Figure 1, Item 1), spacer (Figure 1, Item 2), block clamp (Figure 1, Item 3), and gooseneck isolation
valve handle (Figure 1, Item 4) from hydraulic control module frame (Figure 1, Item 10).
4. Remove three screws (Figure 1, Item 9), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 8), and rear cover (Figure 1, Item 7) from hydraulic
control module frame (Figure 1, Item 10). Discard lockwashers.
5. Place drain pan (Figure 1, Item 14) under hydraulic control module frame (Figure 1, Item 10).
0157-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
Figure 1. Hydraulic Control Module Cover Removal.
0157-3
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
CAUTION
• Metallic tubes must have both ends loosened before the tube can be moved. Failure to follow this caution may
result in damage to equipment.
• All fittings and openings must be capped or plugged immediately after opening to prevent dirt, moisture, or
foreign material from entering the hydraulic system. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to
equipment.
6. Tag and remove two hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 18 and Item 19) from tube tees (Figure 2, Item 1 and Item 17) on
steering control manifold (Figure 2, Item 2). Install caps/plugs into tube and fitting openings.
7. Remove capscrew (Figure 2, Item 16) and both sections of block clamp (Figure 2, Item 15) from two hydraulic tubes
(Figure 2, Item 5 and Item 6). Remove capscrew (Figure 1, Item 7), retainer (Figure 2, Item 8), both sections of block
clamp (Figure 2, Item 9), stacking bolt (Figure 2, Item 10), retainer (Figure 2, Item 11), and both sections of block clamp
(Figure 2, Item 12) from two hydraulic tubes.
8. On streetside of platform, between platform storage compartment and mainbeam, tag and disconnect two hydraulic
tubes (Figure 2, Item 5 and Item 6) from swivel tube elbow (Figure 2, Item 14) and tube tee (Figure 2, Item 13). Tag
and disconnect two hydraulic tubes from two tube tees (Figure 2, Item 3) on steering control manifold (Figure 2, Item 2).
Install caps/plugs into tube and fitting openings.
NOTE
To lower the hydraulic control module frame, move the two hydraulic tubes out of the way of the hydraulic control
module frame. There is little clearance to remove tubes from platform with the platform storage compartment
installed.
9. Carefully move two hydraulic tubes (Figure 2, Item 5 and Item 6) out of the way of hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 2, Item 4). Tubes should be moved inward toward mainbeam.
0157-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
Figure 2. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Tube Removal.
0157-5
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
10. Remove capscrew (Figure 3, Item 5) and both sections of block clamp (Figure 3, Item 6) from opening in platform
mainbeam.
11. Tag and disconnect five hydraulic tubes (Figure 3, Item 4) from bulkhead fittings (Figure 3, Item 1). Loosen other end
of each tube so that tubes may be moved slightly and caps/plugs can be installed. Carefully move lines and install
12. Tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 3, Item 14) and hydraulic hose (Figure 3, Item 13) from bulkhead fittings
(Figure 3, Item 1). Loosen other end of each tube so that tubes and hose can be moved slightly and caps/plugs installed.
Carefully move lines and install caps/plugs into openings.
13. Use 1 1/4 in. combination wrench to tag and disconnect hydraulic tube (Figure 3, Item 2) from tube elbow (Figure 3,
Item 3). Install caps/plugs into openings. Move drain pan out from under platform.
14. Tag and disconnect electrical connector (Figure 3, Item 7) from electrical lead (Figure 3, Item 8).
15. Use two people to install bottom cover assembly (Figure 3, Item 11) onto hydraulic control module frame (Figure 3,
Item 12). Secure cover in place by installing six capscrews (Figure 3, Item 10) and lockwashers (Figure 3, Item 9). Close
and secure hinged cover of bottom cover assembly.
0157-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
Figure 3. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Electrical Disconnect.
0157-7
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
NOTE
Center of gravity for hydraulic control module frame is approximately the center of the assembly (both side to
side and front to back).
16. Position hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 4, Item 8) centered under hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6).
Operate hydraulic transmission jack until jack makes firm contact with bottom cover assembly (Figure 4, Item 7).
17. Remove three screws (Figure 4, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 2) from hydraulic control module frame (Figure
4, Item 6). Discard lockwashers.
CAUTION
When lowering transmission jack, ensure hydraulic lines do not catch on hydraulic control module. Failure
to follow this caution may result in damage to equipment.
18. Lower hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 4, Item 8) until hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) is clear of
semitrailer platform.
19. Use two people to carefully pull hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 4, Item 8) and hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 4, Item 6) out from under and clear of platform.
20. Position overhead lifting device (Figure 4, Item 4) over hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6). Install 24 in.
hooked chain (Figure 4, Item 3) on hydraulic control module frame side with only one mounting hole. Secure chain in
place by installing capscrew (Figure 4, Item 1) and lockwasher (Figure 4, Item 2).
21. Install 62 in. hooked chain (Figure 4, Item 5) on hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) side with two mounting
holes. Secure chain in place by installing two capscrews (Figure 4, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 2)
22. Connect hook on chain (Figure 4, Item 3) to center of chain (Figure 4, Item 5). Attach overhead lifting device (Figure 4,
Item 4) to both chains. Take up slack in lifting device.
23. Lift hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) off of hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 4, Item 8). Move
hydraulic transmission jack clear of hydraulic control module frame. If necessary, use overhead lifting device (Figure 4,
Item 4) to transport hydraulic control module frame to clear area (or shop bench) for further maintenance.
24. Lower lifting device (Figure 4, Item 4) and place hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) firmly on ground or
work bench area. Lower lifting device and unhook hook end of chain (Figure 4, Item 3) from chain (Figure 4, Item 5).
Allow chain to hang and take up slack in lifting device.
CAUTION
Ensure that there is enough room for the hydraulic control module frame to be rolled. Failure to follow this
caution may result in damage to the equipment.
25. Clear work area to ensure that hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) has enough space to be rolled over.
26. Operate lifting device (Figure 4, Item 4) and start to lift side of hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6).
Continue to operate lifting device until frame has rolled over onto its side.
27. Continue to reposition lifting device (Figure 4, Item 4) and roll hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) until
frame has rolled off its side and onto its top. Ensure that hydraulic control module frame is resting firmly on flat surface.
28. Remove three capscrews (Figure 4, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 4, Item 2), and remove 24 in. chain (Figure 4, Item 3) and
62 in. chain (Figure 4, Item 5) from hydraulic control module frame (Figure 4, Item 6) and lifting device (Figure 4, Item 4).
0157-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
Figure 4. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Removal.
0157-9
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
29. Lower door on bottom cover assembly (Figure 5, Item 1) and remove six capscrews (Figure 5, Item 4) and lockwashers
(Figure 5, Item 3). Use two people to remove bottom cover assembly from hydraulic control module frame (Figure 5,
Item 2).
Figure 5. Bottom Cover Assembly Removal.
0157-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
30. Disassemble hydraulic control module frame by removing the following:

a. Hydraulic control module jumper wires (WP 0057)
b. Steering pressure indicator light (WP 0051)
c. Four-way directional control manifold (WP 0108)
d. Suspension control manifold (WP 0110)
e. Suspension shutoff valve (WP 0114)
f. Steering control manifold (WP 0109)
g. Hydraulic pressure gauges (WP 0119)
h. Hydraulic filter (WP 0120)
i. Data plates (WP 0106)
31. Assemble hydraulic control module frame by installing the following:
a. Data plates (WP 0106)
b. Hydraulic filter (WP 0120)
c. Hydraulic pressure gauges (WP 0119)
d. Steering control manifold (WP 0109)
e. Suspension shutoff valve (WP 0114)
f. Suspension control manifold (WP 0110)
g. Four-way directional control manifold (WP 0108)
h. Steering pressure indicator light (WP 0051)
i. Hydraulic control module jumper wires (WP 0057)
END OF TASK
0157-11
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Use two people to install bottom cover assembly (Figure 6, Item 1) onto hydraulic control module frame (Figure 6, Item 2).
Secure cover in place by installing six lockwashers (Figure 6, Item 3) and capscrews (Figure 6, Item 4).
Figure 6. Bottom Cover Assembly.

2. Position overhead lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) over hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6). Install
24 in. hooked chain (Figure 7, Item 3) onto hydraulic control module frame side with only one mounting hole. Secure
chain in place by installing capscrew (Figure 7, Item 1) and lockwasher (Figure 7, Item 2).
3. Install 62 in. hooked chain (Figure 7, Item 5) onto hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6) side with two
mounting holes. Secure chain in place by installing two capscrews (Figure 7, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 7, Item 2).
4. Connect lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) to chain (Figure 7, Item 5) on hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6)
and lifting device. Take up slack in chain.
5. Operate lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) and start to pick up one side of hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6).
Continue to operate lifting device until hydraulic control module frame has rolled over onto its side.
6. Continue to reposition lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) and roll hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6) until
hydraulic control module frame has rolled off its side and onto bottom cover assembly (Figure 7, Item 7).
7. Ensure hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6) is sitting firmly on bottom cover assembly (Figure 7, Item 7).
Lower lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) and unhook lifting device from chain (Figure 7, Item 5).
8. Connect hook on chain (Figure 7, Item 3) to center of chain (Figure 7, Item 5). Attach overhead lifting device (Figure 7,
Item 4) to both chains. Take up slack in lifting device.
9. Raise lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) and, if necessary, transport hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6) near
front curbside of platform for installation.
0157-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
10. Place hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 7, Item 8) near curbside of platform for hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 7, Item 6) to be lowered onto. Center lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) over hydraulic transmission jack and lower
hydraulic control module frame onto hydraulic transmission jack.
11. Ensure hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6) is sitting firmly on hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 7,
Item 8). Lower lifting device (Figure 7, Item 4) and disconnect lifting device from two chains (Figure 7, Item 3 and
Item 5). Move lifting device clear of platform and hydraulic control module frame.
12. Remove three capscrews (Figure 7, Item 1), lockwashers (Figure 7, Item 2), and chains (Figure 7, Item 3 and Item 5) from
hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7, Item 6). Set chains on top of platform.
13. Use two people to move hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 7, Item 8) and hydraulic control module frame (Figure 7,
Item 6) into position under platform. Operate hydraulic transmission jack and raise hydraulic control module frame into
alignment with mounting brackets.
14. Install three capscrews (Figure 7, Item 1) and lockwashers (Figure 7, Item 2) to secure hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 7, Item 6) in place.
15. Lower hydraulic transmission jack (Figure 7, Item 8) and move hydraulic transmission jack clear of work area.
Figure 7. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Installation.
0157-13
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
16. Use two people to remove six capscrews (Figure 8, Item 7), lockwashers (Figure 8, Item 6), and bottom cover assembly
(Figure 8, Item 8) from hydraulic control module frame (Figure 8, Item 5).
17. Remove caps/plugs installed and use 1 1/4 in. combination wrench to connect hydraulic tube (Figure 8, Item 2) to tube
elbow (Figure 8, Item 3).
18. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect hydraulic tube (Figure 8, Item 10) and hydraulic hose (Figure 8, Item 9) to two
bulkhead fittings (Figure 8, Item 1).
19. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect five hydraulic tubes (Figure 8, Item 4) to bulkhead fittings (Figure 8, Item 1).
Figure 8. Hydraulic Control Module Frame Electrical Installation.

20. Remove caps/plugs installed. Use two people to position two hydraulic tubes (Figure 9, Item 13 and Item 15) over swivel
tube elbow (Figure 9, Item 16) and tube tee (Figure 9, Item 14) located on streetside of platform. Hold tubes over fittings.
21. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 9, Item 13 and Item 15) to two tube tees (Figure 9,
Item 3) on steering manifold (Figure 9, Item 4). Hand-tighten both ends of tubes onto fittings.
22. Insert both sections of block clamp (Figure 9, Item 12), retainer (Figure 9, Item 11), stacking bolt (Figure 9, Item 10),
both sections of block clamp (Figure 9, Item 9), retainer (Figure 9, Item 8), and capscrew (Figure 9, Item 7) onto two
hydraulic tubes (Figure 9, Item 13 and Item 15).
23. Install both sections of block clamp (Figure 9, Item 6) and secure in place with capscrew (Figure 9, Item 5).
0157-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
24. Insert sections of block clamp (Figure 9, Item 17) onto two hydraulic tubes (Figure 9, Item 13 and Item 15). Temporarily
hold block clamp in place by loosely installing capscrew (Figure 9, Item 18). Tighten both ends of two hydraulic tubes.
Tighten capscrews to secure block clamps in place.
25. Remove caps/plugs installed and connect two hydraulic tubes (Figure 9, Item 20 and Item 21) between two tube tees
(Figure 9, Item 1) on steering manifold (Figure 9, Item 2) and tube tees (Figure 9, Item 19).
Figure 9. Hydraulic Tube Installation.
0157-15
0157 TM 9-2330-381-13
26. Reconnect electrical connector (Figure 10, Item 1) to electrical lead (Figure 10, Item 2).
Figure 10. Electrical Connector and Lead Installation.

27. Install rear cover (Figure 11, Item 7) onto hydraulic control module frame (Figure 11, Item 10) and secure with three
screws (Figure 11, Item 9) and lockwashers (Figure 11, Item 8).
28. Install gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 11, Item 4) through rear cover (Figure 11, Item 7) and install shouldered
29. Align gooseneck isolation valve handle (Figure 11, Item 4) with clamp mount on hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 11, Item 10) and secure in place by installing block clamp (Figure 11, Item 3), spacer (Figure 11, Item 2), and
two screws (Figure 11, Item 1).
30. Use two people to install bottom cover assembly (Figure 11, Item 11) into place on hydraulic control module frame
(Figure 11, Item 10) and secure with six capscrews (Figure 11, Item 12) and lockwashers (Figure 11, Item 13). Remove oil
drain pan (Figure 11, Item 14) and discard fluids according to regulations.
0157-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0157
Figure 11. Hydraulic Control Module Cover Installation.
END OF TASK
Open hydraulic tank shutoff valve (WP 0004).

Check and fill hydraulic tank as required (WP 0039).
Operate hydraulic controls and check for leaks.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0157-17/18 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0158
FIELD MAINTENANCE
SNATCH BLOCK SHEAVE BUSHING
INITIAL SETUP:
Arbor Press 1
Grease (WP 0170, Item 16) Snatch block disassembled (WP 0103)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for removal, lubrication, and installation of the snatch block sheave bushing.
1. Use arbor press to press bushing (Figure 1, Item 1) from sheave (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Lubricate outside of bushing with grease.
3. Use arbor press to press bushing (Figure 1, Item 1) into sheave (Figure 1, Item 2) until bushing seats flush with both
sides of sheave.
Figure 1. Snatch Block.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0158-1/2 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
FIELD MAINTENANCE
GOOSENECK PIVOT PIN
INITIAL SETUP:
Chain Assy 5/16 in. LK, 46 in. L (4) (WP 0168, Item 7) *RRVHQHFN K\GUDXOLF F\OLQGHU UHPRYHG :3
Hone, Cylinder 2 in. to 7in. Portable (WP 0168, Item 9) *RRVHQHFN K\GUDXOLF OLQHV GLVFRQQHFWHG IURP VXSSRUW
*HQHUDO 0HFKDQLF'V Tool Kit :3 ,WHP VWHS :3
Lifting Strap (WP 0168, Item 25) *RRVHQHFN SQHXPDWLF OLQHV GLVFRQQHFWHG IURP VXSSRUW
Truck,Wrecker M984 (WP 0168, Item 26) VWHS :3
6WDQGDUG $UP\ 7RRO 6HW 6$76 :3 ,WHP : KDUQHVV GLVFRQQHFWHG IURP SODWIRUP MXQFWLRQ ER[HV
LQ FP &ROG 5ROOHG 6WHHO 5RG LQ FP :3
0LQLPXP /HQJWK *XDUGUDLOV UHPRYHG :3
'DYLW DVVHPEO\ UHPRYHG :3
Materials/Parts
6SDUH WLUHV UHPRYHG LI QHFHVVDU\ :3
*UHDVH, Automotive and Artillery :3 ,WHm 6)
6WHHULQJ ZHGJH FHQWHUHG :3
7DSH, Insulation, Electrical, 0.75-in. wide (:3 ,WHP
6RODU SDQHO UHPRYHG VRPH VHPLWUDLOHUV :3
/RFNQXW 70 3
0RXQW 70 3
6SDFHU 70 3
6SDFHU 70 3
Personnel Required

0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Gooseneck weighs in excess of 6,200 lb (2815 kg). Be sure gooseneck is adequately supported during removal
For lifting purposes, the overhead lifting point for the gooseneck is approximately centered above both
gooseneck fairleads. Ensure lifting device is approximately centered, side to side, over the fairleads or injury
to personnel and damage to equipment may result.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in severe injury or death to personel.
CAUTION
Equipment used to support the front of the gooseneck during gooseneck cylinder removal
must remain in place during this entire procedure to help support the gooseneck or damage
to equipment may result.
(QVXUH H[LVWLQJ JRRVHQHFN VXSSRUW LV IirPO\ VXSSRUWLQJ JRRVHQHFN SULRU WR FRQQHFWLQJ FKDLQV IRU SLYRW SLQ UHPRYDO
WARNING
On some semitrailers a solar battery charger is mounted to top of gooseneck directly in front of spare tires.
Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on or trip over it. Injury
to personnel or damage to equipment may result.
Failure to follow this warning may result in severe injury or death to personnel.
CAUTION
An overhead lifting device, four chains, and two clevises will be used to support/transport gooseneck to
work area after pivot pin has been removed. Protect gooseneck bracket holes by applying tape to clevises
or clevises will damage bracket holes.
8VLQJ VXLWDEOH OLIWLQJ GHYLFH IRXU FKDLQV )LJXUH ,WHP WZR FOHYLVHV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG WDSH VXSSRUW JRRVHQHFN
)LJXUH ,WHP E\ DWWDFKLQJ RQH FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG WDSHG FOHYLV )LJXUH ,WHP WKURXJK HDFK JRRVHQHFN
F\OLQGHU PRXQWLQJ EUDFNHW DQG WZR FKDLQV WKURXJK NLQJSLQ ER[ ZHOGPHQW DGMDFHQW WR VWHHULQJ ZHGJH 7DNH XS VODFN LQ
FKDLQV
0159-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
)LJXUH *RRVHQHFN3LYRW 3LQ
0159-3
0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
5HPRYHIRXUVFUHZV)LJXUH,WHPWZRDFFHVVFRYHUV)LJXUH,WHPWZRPRXQWV)LJXUH,WHPDQGWZR

NH\V )LJXUH ,WHP 'LVFDUG PRXQWV
5HPRYHWZRORFNQXWV)LJXUH,WHPDQG,WHPWZRFRYHUV)LJXUH,WHPDQG,WHPDQGVSDFHU
)LJXUH,WHP 'LVFDUG ORFNQXWV DQG VSDFHU
5HPRYHSXOOH\)LJXUH,WHPDQGWKUHDGHGURG)LJXUH,WHPIURPJRRVHQHFN)LJXUH,WHP
CAUTION
Use caution not to apply too much tension on lifting chains. Allow only enough tension to support gooseneck
or lifting chains will pull against gooseneck pivot pin and complicate removal or damage to equipment
may result.

AGMXVW OLIWLQJ GHYLFH DQG FKDLQV XQWLO JRRVHQHFN LV OHYHO VLGH WR VLGH
0159-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
0159-5
0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
(\eSrotectioQDQGIDFHVKLHOGVPXVWEHZRUQZKHQXVLQJVWHHOURGWRSUHYHQWPHWDOVKDYLQJVRUFKLSVRIPHWDO
hitting personnel or injury to personnel may result.
There should be no slack in chains during removal of gooseneck pivot pins or injury to personnel may result.
During pivot pin removal, the weight of the gooseneck will be shifted from side to side when each half of the
pivot pin is removed. Extra care must be taken to ensure that gooseneck is properly balanced during this
procedure or injury to personnel and damage to equipment may result.
Steel rod is heavy. Two or more persons must be used to handle, support, and drive steel rod or injury
Pivot pins can be slick and hard to handle. Care must be exercised when handling or injury to personnel
may result.
DO NOT use sledge hammer while another person is holding steel rod or injury to personnel may result.
Use safety chain to keep pivot pins from coming out of gooseneck unexpectedly or injury to personnel may result.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in severe injury or death to personel.
AW VWUHHWVLGH RI JRRVHQHFN DVVHPEOH ZDVKHU )LJXUH ,WHP RQ VFUHZ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG LQVHUW WKURXJK
LQ. FP OHQJWK RI FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP ,QVWDOO VFUHZ )LJXUH ,WHP LQWR WKUHDGHG KROH LQ VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW
SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP +RRN IUHH HQG RI FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP WR JRRVHQHFN )LJXUH ,WHP
8 )URP FXUEVLGH RI JRRVHQHFN XVe D LQ. FP FROGUROOHG VWHHO URXQG VWRFN LQ. FP ORQJ to GULYH
RXW VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP XQWLO VDIHW\ FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP LV WDXW 5HPRYH FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP
DQG FDUHIXOO\ UHPRYH VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG WKUHH VSDFHUV )LJXUH ,WHP ,WHP DQG ,WHP
'LVFDUG VSDFHUV
9 $W FXUEVLGH RI JRRVHQHFN DVVHPEOH ZDVKHU )LJXUH ,WHP RQ VFUHZ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG LQVHUW WKURXJK
LQ. FP OHQJWK RI FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP ,QVWDOO VFUHZ )LJXUH ,WHP LQWR WKUHDGHG KROH LQ FXUEVLGH SLYRW
SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP +RRN IUHH HQG RI FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP WR JRRVHQHFN )LJXUH ,WHP
0 )URP VWUHHWVLGH RI JRRVHQHFN XVe D LQ. FP FROGUROOHG VWHHO URXQG VWRFN LQ. FP ORQJ to GULYH RXW
FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP XQWLO VDIHW\ FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP LV WDXW 5HPRYH FKDLQ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG
FDUHIXOO\ UHPRYH FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP 'LVFDUG VSDFHU
1 6HSDUDWH JRRVHQHFN IURP SODWIRUP DQG PRYH JRRVHQHFN WR ZRUN DUHD
0159-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
END OF TASK
0159-7
0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
REPAIR
&OHDQ SLYRW SLQV DQG SODWIRUP ZHOGPHQW SLYRW SLQ ERUH ZLWK UDJV
&KHFN SODWIRUP ZHOGPHQW SLYRW SLQ ERUH IRU SLWV VFRULQJ XQHYHQ ZHDU DQG H[FHVV FRUURVLRQ
,QVSHFW SLYRW SLQ EHDULQJV LQ JRRVHQHFN IRU FRUURVLRQ XQHYHQ ZHDU DQG VFRULQJ
CAUTION
DRQRWDOORZKRQHWRFXWWKHEHDULQJFDYLW\VXUIDFHVRUFDYLW\PD\EHFRPHWRRODUJHDQGUHVXOWLQSUHPDWXUH
pivot pin failure.
&OHDQ SLYRW SLQ ERUH XVLQJ D GULOO PRWRU F\OLQGHU KRQH DQG FXWWLQJ RLO +RQH SLYRW SLQ FDYLW\ WR SROLVK LQVLGH VXUIDFHV RQO\
,I EHDULQJV DUH VFRUHG RU VOLJKWO\ FRUURGHG FOHDQ LQVLGH EHDULQJ VXUIDFHV XVLQJ D SRZHU GULOO DQG F\OLQGHU KRQH +RQH
EHDULQJ FDYLW\ WR SROLVK LQVLGH VXUIDFHV RQO\ ,I EHDULQJV DUH XQHYHQO\ ZRUQ SLWWHG RU GHIHFWLYH UHSODFH EHDULQJV DV IROORZV
D 8Ve D KDPPHU DQG EUDVV GULIW to GULYH ROG EHDULQJV )LJXUH ,WHP RXW RI EHDULQJ FDYLW\ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG
JRRVHQHFN )LJXUH ,WHP
0159-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
E 8Ve D GULOO PRWRU DQG F\OLQGHU KRQH to KRQH EHDULQJ FDYLW\ LQ JRRVHQHFN +RQH JRRVHQHFN EHDULQJ FDYLW\ WR SROLVK
LQVLGH VXUIDFH RQO\
F $OLJQ QHZ EHDULQJV ZLWK ERUH LQ JRRVHQHFN 8Ve ROG EHDULQJ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG KDPPHU to GULYH QHZ EHDULQJV
)LJXUH ,WHP LQWR JRRVHQHFN )LJXUH ,WHP E\ KDPPHULQJ DJDLQVW ROG EHDULQJ
)LJXUH *RRVHQHFN3LYRW 3LQ.
END OF TASK
0159-9
0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
WARNING
Gooseneck weighs in excess of 6,200 lb (2815 kg). Be sure gooseneck is adequately supported during removal
DO NOT allow personnel under gooseneck until one pivot pin has engaged platform or injury to personnel
may result.
Failure to follow this warning may result in severe injury or death to personnel.
8VLQJ VXLWDEOH OLIWLQJ GHYLFH ZLWK FKDLQV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG FOHYLVHV )LJXUH ,WHP VWLOO DWWDFKHG to FDUHIXOO\
SRVLWLRQ JRRVHQHFN )LJXUH ,WHP RYHU SODWIRUP DQG DOLJQ KROHV LQ JRRVHQHFN WR KROHV LQ SODWIRUP
0159-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
$SSO\ JUHDVH WR LQQHU VXUIDFHV RI EHDULQJ )LJXUH ,WHP H[WHULRU RI FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG LQQHU
VXUIDFHV RI SLYRW SLQ PRXQW LQ SODWIRUP
CAUTION
Hammer against a piece of wood when driving in pivot pin or damage to equipment may result.
NOTE
:KLOH GULYLQJ HLWKHU SLYRW SLQ LQWR SODWIRUP REVHUYH SLYRW SLQ WKURXJK NH\ VORWV LQ SODWIRUP ,I SLYRW SLQ NH\ZD\
GRHV QRW DOLJQ ZLWK NH\ VORWV LQ SODWIRUP RU JHWV URWDWHG GXULQJ LQVWDOODWLRQ WKH SLYRW SLQ PXVW EH UHPRYHG
UHDOLJQHG DQG UHLQVWDOOHG

(QVXUH NH\ZD\ LQ FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP LV DOLJQHG ZLWK NH\ VORWV LQ SODWIRUP 8Ve D VOHGJH KDPPHU DQG
SLHFH RI ZRRG to GULYH FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP WR LQERDUG HGJH RI EHDULQJ )LJXUH ,WHP RQ JRRVHQHFN
)LJXUH ,WHP
NOTE
*UHDVH ZLOO KHOS WR KROG VSDFHU LQ SODFH GXULQJ LQVWDOODWLRQ

$SSO\ JUHDVH OLEHUDOO\ WR VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP DQG LQVWDOO EHWZHHQ LQERDUG HGJH RI FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP
DQG SODWIRUP (QVXUH VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP LV DOLJQHG WR DOORZ FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP WR EH GULYHQ
WKURXJK VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP LQWR SODWIRUP. CRQWLQXH GULYLQJ FXUEVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP LQWR SODWIRUP
0159-11
0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
$SSO\ JUHDVH WR LQQHU VXUIDFHV RI EHDULQJ )LJXUH ,WHP LQ JRRVHQHFN )LJXUH ,WHP H[WHULRU RI VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW
SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP DQG LQQHU VXUIDFHV RI SLYRW SLQ PRXQW LQ SODWIRUP
NOTE
6SDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP LV WKLFNHU WKDQ VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP 6SDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP JRHV RQ SLYRW SLQ
)LJXUH ,WHP IirVW

,QVWDOO VSDFHUV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG ,WHP RQWR VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP (QVXUH NH\ZD\ LQ VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW
SLQ LV DOLJQHG ZLWK NH\ VORWV LQ SODWIRUP 8Ve D VOHGJH KDPPHU DQG SLHFH RI ZRRG to GULYH VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ WR LQERDUG
HGJH RI EHDULQJ )LJXUH ,WHP
NOTE
*UHDVH ZLOO KHOS WR KROG VSDFHU LQ SODFH GXULQJ LQVWDOODWLRQ

$SSO\ JUHDVH OLEHUDOO\ WR VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP DQG LQVWDOO EHWZHHQ LQERDUG HGJH RI VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ )LJXUH ,WHP
DQG SODWIRUP (QVXUH VSDFHU LV DOLJQHG WR DOORZ VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ WR EH GULYHQ WKURXJK VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP
LQWR SODWIRUP. CRQWLQXH GULYLQJ VWUHHWVLGH SLYRW SLQ LQWR SODWIRUP
0159-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0159
,QVWDOO WZR NH\V )LJXUH ,WHP PRXQWV )LJXUH ,WHP DFFHVV FRYHUV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG IRXU VFUHZV
)LJXUH ,WHP into platform
,QVWDOO SXOOH\ )LJXUH ,WHP RQWR SLYRW SLQ
,QVWDOO WKUHDGHG URG )LJXUH ,WHP into pivots and platform ,QVWDOO FRYHU )LJXUH ,WHP VSDFHU )LJXUH ,WHP
DQG FRYHU )LJXUH ,WHP RQ WKUHDGHG URG )LJXUH ,WHP
1 6HFXUH FRYHUV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG ,WHP LQ SODFH ZLWK WZR VHOIORFNLQJ QXWV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG ,WHP 7RUTXH
QXWV )LJXUH ,WHP DQG ,WHP WR OEIW 1P
END OF TASK
0159-13
0159 TM 9-2330-381-13
/XEULFDWH SLYRW SLQ:3

,QVWDOO VRODU SDQHO VRPH VHPLWUDLOHUV WP 0054
6WDUW $38 DQG FKHFN RSHUDWLRQ RI JRRVHQHFNSLYRW SLQ LQVWDOODWLRQ WP 0007
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0159-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0160
FIELD MAINTENANCE
FLYWHEEL
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) removed (WP 0128)
Sealing Compound Thread Locking (WP 0170, Item 25) Starter removed (WP 0146)
Key Washer (1) (TM 9-2330-381-24P) Hydraulic pump removed (WP 0107)
Lockwasher (3) (TM 9-2330-381-24P)
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the flywheel.
0160-1
0160 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
1. Remove six bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) and flywheel housing (Figure 1, Item 2).
2. Using a block of wood to prevent flywheel from turning, remove three bolts (Figure 1, Item 3), three fender washers
(Figure 1, Item 4), and shaft coupling (Figure 1, Item 5).
3. Straighten tab on key washer (Figure 1, Item 7), and using a block of wood to keep the flywheel from turning, remove
nut (Figure 1, Item 6) and key washer. Discard key washer.
4. Follow the procedure below to pull flywheel from crankshaft:
a. Install nut (Figure 1, Item 6) onto crankshaft (Figure 1, Item 12) so that nut is flush with end of
crankshaft.
b. Remove three fender washers (Figure 1, Item 4) from pump side of pump adapter (Figure 1, Item 5). Install three
fender washers over guide bushings on flywheel side of pump adapter.
NOTE
Three of the four long bolts used to secure the flywheel housing to the engine block are required for the next step.
c. Using three long bolts, insert bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) through fender washers (Figure 1, Item 4) from flywheel side of
pump adapter (Figure 1, Item 5).
d. Align pump adapter (Figure 1, Item 5) with end of crankshaft (Figure 1, Item 12). Align and tighten three bolts (Figure
1, Item 1) into flywheel (Figure 1, Item 8), keeping pump adapter even with face of flywheel.
e. Using alternating tightening sequence, start to tighten all three bolts (Figure 1, Item 1).
f. Continue to tighten all three bolts (Figure 1, Item 1) until flywheel (Figure 1, Item 8) becomes unseated. If all three
bolts become extremely tight, use a hammer to strike inside cupped area of pump adapter (Figure 1, Item 5) to help
unseat flywheel.
g. Once flywheel (Figure 1, Item 8) is unseated, remove three bolts (Figure 1, Item 1), fender washers (Figure 1, Item
4), and pump adapter (Figure 1, Item 5) from flywheel.
h. Remove nut (Figure 1, Item 6) from crankshaft (Figure 1, Item 12). Start to pull flywheel (Figure 1, Item 8) off of
crankshaft. Remove V-belt (Figure 1, Item 10) from pulley (Figure 1, Item 11) on flywheel and remove flywheel
and key (Figure 1, Item 9) from crankshaft.
i. Install three fender washers (Figure 1, Item 4) over guide bushings on pump side of pump adapter (Figure 1, Item 5).
5. Remove three bolts (Figure 1, Item 13), lockwashers (Figure 1, Item 14), pulley (Figure 1, Item 11), and belt (Figure 1,
Item 10). Discard lockwashers.
0160-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0160
Figure 1. Flywheel Removal.
END OF TASK
0160-3
0160 TM 9-2330-381-13
INSTALLATION
1. Install pulley (Figure 2, Item 11) and flywheel (Figure 2, Item 8) on crankshaft (Figure 2, Item 12) and secure with three
2. Install key (Figure 2, Item 9), flywheel (Figure 2, Item 8), and key washer (Figure 2, Item 7) on crankshaft (Figure 2,
Item 12). Install belt (Figure 2, Item 10) over pulley (Figure 2, Item 11).
3. Apply thread locking compound to threads of nut (Figure 2, Item 6) and install.
4. Using a block of wood to prevent flywheel (Figure 2, Item 8) from turning and a torque wrench, torque nut (Figure 2,
Item 6) to 101 to 116 lb-ft (137 to 157 Nm). Bend key washer (Figure 2, Item 7) to meet one face of nut (Figure 2, Item 6).
5. Install shaft coupling (Figure 2, Item 5) and secure with three fender washers (Figure 1, Item 4) and three bolts (Figure 2,
Item 3).
6. Install flywheel housing (Figure 2, Item 2) and secure with six bolts (Figure 2, Item 1).
Figure 2. Flywheel Installation.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE

0160-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0161
FIELD MAINTENANCE
INJECTION PUMP
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Shim
General Mechanic’s Tool Kit (WP 0168, Item 11) Shim(s)
Crank, Hand APU (WP 0168, Item 18)
2
Materials/Parts
Oil, Lubricating (WP 0170, Item 20) Fuel tank drained (WP 0136).
Gasket Auxiliary Power Unit (APU) removed (WP 0128).
Gasket Air cleaner assembly removed (WP 0135).
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for the removal and installation of the injection pump.
0161-1
0161 TM 9-2330-381-13
REMOVAL
WARNING
Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid
injury to personnel and explosion, extinguish all smoking materials and do not allow sparks or
open flame near the fuel tank or the fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a
well-ventilated area. Clean up fuel that spilled during fuel line removal. Failure to follow this
CAUTION
moisture, or other foreign material from entering the fuel system or damage to equipment may
result.
1. Remove hose clamp (Figure 1, Item 2) and disconnect hose (Figure 1, Item 3). Cap/plug hose.
2. Remove bolt (Figure 1, Item 1), gasket (Figure 1, Item 13), adapter bushing (Figure 1, Item 12), and gasket (Figure 1,
Item 11) from injection pump (Figure 1, Item 7). Discard gaskets.
3. Unscrew nut (Figure 1, Item 10) and disconnect metallic tube (Figure 1, Item 9) from injection pump (Figure 1, Item 7)
and nozzle (Figure 1, Item 4). Cap/plug metallic tube.
4. Remove three bolts (Figure 1, Item 8), injection pump (Figure 1, Item 7), shim (Figure 1, Item 5), and shims (Figure 1,
Item 6). Count and discard shims (Figure 1, Item 6). Discard shim (Figure 1, Item 5).
Figure 1. Injection Pump Removal.
END OF TASK
0161-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0161
INSTALLATION
WARNING
Diesel fuel is combustible and is an irritant to the eyes, skin, and respiratory system. To avoid
injury to personnel and explosion, extinguish all smoking materials and do not allow sparks or
open flame near the fuel tank or the fuel system. Use skin and eye protection and work in a
well-ventilated area. Clean up fuel that spilled during fuel line removal. Failure to follow this
1. Apply a thin coat of oil to both sides of new shims (Figure 2, Item 7).
2. Adjust cam lobe to lowest portion.
3. Install same quantity of new shims (Figure 2, Item 8) as removed and install new shim (Figure 2, Item 7).
4. Align fuel control rod and slot on speed control lever (Figure 2, Item 5) and install injection pump (Figure 2, Item 6) and
three bolts (Figure 2, Item 9). Use torque wrench to torque bolts to 87 to 99 in.-lb (9.9 to 11.2 Nm).
5. Remove cap/plug and connect metallic tube (Figure 2, Item 10) to injection pump (Figure 2, Item 6) and nozzle (Figure 2,
Item 4) and tighten nut (Figure 2, Item 11).
6. Install new gasket (Figure 2, Item 12), adapter bushing (Figure 2, Item 13), new gasket (Figure 2, Item 14), and bolt
(Figure 2, Item 1) on injection pump (Figure 2, Item 6). Use torque wrench to torque bolt to 18 to 21 lb-ft (25 to 29 Nm).
7. Remove cap/plug and connect hose (Figure 2, Item 3) to injection pump (Figure 2, Item 6) and secure with hose clamp
(Figure 2, Item 2).
Figure 2. Injection Pump Installation.

END OF TASK
0161-3
0161 TM 9-2330-381-13
Install APU (WP 0128).
Install air cleaner assembly (WP 0135).
Fill fuel tank with fuel (WP 0163).
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0161-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0162
FIELD MAINTENANCE
CARGO TIEDOWN RING REPLACEMENT
INITIAL SETUP:
Tools and Special Tools Materials/Parts-Cont.
Welder Helmet (WP 0168, Item 16) Epoxy Primer Coating Kit (WP 0170, Item 12)
Apron, Leather (WP 0168, Item 17) Welding Gas Mix: 75% Argon, 25% CO2
Angle Hand Grinder Welding Wire, ER80SD2, 0.035-in. Dia.
Wire Brush Welding Rod, E8018-B2l, 1/8-in. Dia.
Primary Welding Machine MIG (GMAW): 18V-20V, D-Ring, 1
130A-150A and/or 18V-21V, 140A-160A D-Ring Retainer, 1
Alternate Stick Welding Machine (SMAW): 21V-25V,
110A-130A Personnel Required
Welding Rod Oven, 80°F to 125°F 1
Materials/Parts References
Cleaner, Surface (WP 0170, Item 5) ASW D1.1
Crocus Cloth, Abrasive (WP 0170, Item 6) MIL-STD-1595
Coating Compound, Metal Pretreatment (WP 0170, Item 7) TB 43-0242
Coating, Polyurethane (WP 0170, Item 8 or Item 9) MIL-STD-1261
GENERAL INFORMATION
This work package contains instructions for field replacement of broken cargo tiedown rings for M1000 semitrailers.
This procedure is to be performed by certified welding personnel only per ASW D1.1, alternate MIL-STD-1595.
0162-1
0162 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
Always use appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE). Failure to follow this warning may
NOTE
The preferred method for removing paint is to use a wire brush. Chemical removal is an acceptable
alternative based on facility regulations.
1. Remove paint from D-ring pocket 2 in. (5.08 cm) (Figure 1) diametrically from affected weld area using wire brush.
Figure 1. D-Ring Pocket.
0162-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0162
2. Remove broken D-ring and D-ring retainer by grinding. Remove carbon deposits and grind or sand base metal to smooth
flush surface (Figure 2). Weld or repair any gouges.
Figure 2. D-Ring Retainer and D-Ring Area to Be Smooth for Welding.
NOTE
Preheat temperature is 70°F (21°C) minimum. Inter-pass temperature is 300°F (149°C) maximum.
3. Locate D-ring (Figure 3, Item 2) and retainer (Figure 3, Item 1) and weld (Figure 3, Item 3) in place using following
settings:
a. Primary short arc welder settings (GMAW):
(1) Welding wire type:
(a) ER80SD2, 0.035-in. diameter
(b) 18V-21V, 130A-160A, 1 pass
(c) Gas mix: 75% Argon, 25% CO2
(d) Positions: flat/horizontal/vertical/overhead
b. Alternate stick welder settings (SMAW):
(1) Welding rod type:
(a) E8018-B2L, 1/8-in. diameter
(b) 21V-25V, 110A-130A, 1 pass
(c) Positions: horizontal/vertical
Figure 3. Welding D-Ring and D-Ring Retainer.

END OF TASK
0162-3
0162 TM 9-2330-381-13
CLEANING
WARNING
Check facility regulations for paint removal processes. Always use appropriate personal
protective equipment (PPE). Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to
personnel.
1. Prior to painting, visually inspect welds per (MIL-STD-1261) to ensure that there are no cracks.
2. Clean area thoroughly, removing all weld slag and spatter.
3. Feather edges of paint using clean wiping rag.
NOTE
Acetate-based products or enamel reducers are preferable. Check local regulations.
4. Hand-wipe area using solvent and clean wiping rag.

5. Touch up paint per TB 43-0242.
WARNING
Cleaning compound may cause skin rash and may give off harmful vapors. To avoid injury to
personnel,use in well ventilated area. Wash immediately with soap and water if compound
contacts skin or clothes. Failure to follow this warning may result in injury or death to personnel.
6. Use brush or sponge and pretreat area using coating compound or surface cleaner. Apply thin coat (no puddles). Allow
30 minutes drying time.
7. Use a brush or spray application and prime area using epoxy primer. Desired dry film thickness is 0.039 to 0.059 in.
(1 to 1..5 mm). Allow 2 to 4 hours drying time.
8. Use brush or spray application and topcoat using polyurethane coating. Specify color by pattern:
a. Black, color chip no. 37030
b. Brown, color chip no. 30051
c. Green, color chip no. 34094
9. Desired dry film thickness is 0.070 to 0.126 in. (1.8 to 3.2 mm). Allow 3 to 4 hours drying time.
END OF TASK
0162-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0162
DISPOSITION OF PARTS
Locally dispose of all removed parts.
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
Visually inspect for cracks and quality of welds.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0162-5/6 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
FIELD MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS AND CHARTS
INITIAL SETUP:
Materials/Parts TB 43-0211
Grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) (WP 0004)
Hydraulic Fluid (WP 0170, Item 13) (WP 0011)
Solid Film lubricant (WP 0170, Item 14) (WP 0012)
Wiping Rags (WP 0170, Item 19) (WP 0151)
Dry Cleaning Solvent (WP 0170, Item 26) (WP 0170)
References
DA PAM 738-750
GENERAL INFORMATION
This chapter includes a lubrication chart and instructions to be followed by the operator/crew personnel. Troubleshooting
procedures and those maintenance tasks that can be performed by the operator/crew are also included.
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Lubrication instructions are mandatory. The field maintenance officer can authorize the operator to assist in certain
maintenance functions. If a lubrication fitting will not accept grease, check fitting to ensure it is properly tightened.
Tighten fitting if loose. If fitting still will not accept grease, notify the supervisor.
2. Service intervals are based on normal operation.
a. Lubricate more often during constant use.
b. Lubricate less often during inactive periods.
c. Lubricate twice as often in extreme dust and sand conditions.
3. Lubricate after high-pressure washing, fording, or steam cleaning.
4. Clean grease fitting before lubricating.
5. Lubricate both sides of equipment.
6. DO NOT over lubricate.
7. Wipe off excess lubricant.
8. Maintain a record of all lubrication tasks performed.
9. Report any problems noted during lubrication.
10. Refer to DA PAM 738-750 for maintenance forms and procedures to record and report any findings.
LUBRICATION CHART
The lubrication chart provides instructions for lubrication procedures, use of proper materials for lubricating, and
recommended time between lubrication. Intervals are based on normal operation (ON-condition or hard time). Change the
hard time interval if you are operating the equipment under adverse operating conditions including longer-than-usual
operating hours. The hard time interval may be extended during periods of low activity. If extended, adequate preservation
precautions must be taken. Location of fittings and other points to be serviced are included.
0163-1
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
WARNING
• Solvent cleaning compound MIL-PRF-680 Type ll and Type lll may be irritating to the eyes and
skin. Use protective gloves and goggles. Use in well-ventilated areas. Use respirator as needed.
Accidental ingestion may cause irritation of digestive tract and respiratory tract, may cause lung
and central nervous system damage, and may be fatal if swallowed. Inhalation of high/massive
concentrations may cause coma or may be fatal. First aid for ingestion: do not induce vomiting.
Seek immediate medical attention. First aid for skin contact: remove contaminated clothing.
Wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. First
aid for eye contact: flush with water for 15 minutes or until irritation subsides. If symptoms
persist, seek medical attention. First aid for inhalation: move to fresh air. If not breathing,
provide artificial respiration. If symptoms persist, seek medical attention. Keep away from
open flames and other sources of ignition.
• The flashpoint for Type ll solvent cleaning compound is 141 to 198°F (61 to 92°C) and for Type
lll it is 200 to 241°F (93 to 116°C).
• Improper cleaning methods and use of unauthorized cleaning solvents may injure personnel and
damage equipment.
• Cloths or rags saturated with solvent cleaning compound must be disposed of in accordance
with authorized facilities’ procedures.
• Eye shields must be worn when cleaning with a wire brush. Flying rust and metal particles
may cause injury.
Always wear eye protection. Pressure must not exceed 30 psi (207 kPa) or injury to personnel
may result.
WARNING
• Before performing lubrication procedures (WP 0140) on semitrailer, raise platform to highest
position, lower front (WP 0011) and rear support legs (WP 0012), and close all isolation valves
(WP 0004).
• On some semitrailers, a solar battery charger is mounted to top of gooseneck directly in front
of spare tires. Persons working on top of gooseneck must take EXTREME care not to step on
the gooseneck or trip over it. Failure to follow this warning may result in Injury to personnel
or damage to equipment.
0163-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
CAUTION
• When adding fluid to hydraulic tank, use ONLY hydraulic oil, MIL-H-46170, Type I (WP 0170, Item
13). Using any other fluid may cause damage to APU.
• When refueling APU, add the diesel fuel in the fuel tank, NOT the hydraulic tank. Failure to follow
this caution may result in damage to the auxiliary power unit (APU).
NOTE
• Clean fittings before lubricating. Clean parts with dry cleaning solvent (WP 0170, Item 26). Dry fittings
before lubricating.
• The lowest level of maintenance authorized to lubricate a point is indicated by one of the following
symbols as appropriate: Operator/Crew (C) and Field Maintenance (F).
• Where "Daily" services are specified, daily shall be interpreted to mean only on days when equipment is
operated.
0163-3
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
Figure 1. Lubricant - Interval No. 1.
0163-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
Table 1. Lubricant Chart No. 1.

EXPECTED TEMPERATURES
LUBRICANTS RECOMMEND KEY CAPACITY ABOVE + 40°F TO 0°F TO INTERVALS
+32°F - 10°F -50°F
OIL, APU Crankcase Oil D - Daily
ENGINE Level (Remove dipstick S - Semi-
OE C
APU and check level; if low 1.37 qt. annually
(MIL-L- SAE 30 SAE 20 10W-30
CRANK- add OE as required) (1.3 L)
2104B)
CASE APU Oil Drain/Filter (See
F
step 1 below)
HY- Hydraulic Tank Fill D - Daily
DRAULIC (Check level - must A - Annually
HO OIL, fill to FULL mark with C
(MIL-H- PETRO- gooseneck at normal 16.5 gal
ALL TEMPERATURES
46170, LEUM height) (62.5 L)
Type I) BASED Hydraulic Tank Filter
Hydraulic (See step 2 below) F
Tank
TURBINE APU Fuel Tank Fill and ALL TEMPERATURES D - Daily
JP-8 FUEL Sight Level (Check S - Semi-
C
(MIL- Fuel Tank level - should fill sight 1.27 gal annually
DTL- Indicator) (4.8 L)
83133) APU Fuel Filter (See
F
step 3 below)
SL SILICONE APU Throttle Cable (See ALL TEMPERATURES S - Semi-
(NSN LUBRIC- step 4 below) annually
6850- ANT APU F As req.
01-139- Throttle
4040) Control
APU CRANKCASE
1. Change oil and clean filter semiannually. Replace filter if damaged. Remove drain plug and oil filter elements. Clean filter
using cleaning solvent (WP 0170, Item 26). Lube filter and new gasket with oil (OE), and install gasket with drain plug.
Remove oil filter cap and add 1.37 qt (1.3 l) of oil (OE). Check oil level on dipstick.
0163-5
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
HYDRAULIC TANK
2a. M1000 Semitrailer is controlled in Army Oil Analysis Program (AOAP) for hydraulic oil sampling. Active Army units,
Reserve units, and National Guard activities will send an oil sample to AOAP laboratory for analysis every 365 days
(annually). An AOAP laboratory may change this interval for sampling, as well as draining and ref lling hydraulic oil.
Refer to TB 43-0211 for additional AOAP information.
2b. To gain access to hydraulic oil, place gooseneck in normal operating position (either coupled or level). Locate pipe plug on
front of hydraulic tank and visually check sight gauge on rear of tank to confirm that oil level is below pipe plug. If it
appears that oil level is too high in tank to remove plug without spilling hydraulic oil, lower level of oil in tank by raising
platform approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm). This will cause hydraulic oil to move out of tank and into system lowering level
of oil in tank. Remove pipe plug located on front of hydraulic tank and insert sampling tube to pull oil sample. When
reinstalling pipe plug, apply pipe sealant (WP 0170, Item 18) to all threads of plug.
2c. If AOAP laboratory support is not available, drain and refill hydraulic tank and clean filter annually. Replace filter if
damaged. To drain oil, close oil tank valve and remove drain plug from hydraulic tank. Check (magnetic) drain plug
for metal particles and if particles are found, wipe clean with clean rag. Remove tank inlet, attaching hardware, gasket,
and hydraulic tank fiter. Clean filter using cleaning solvent (WP 0170, Item 26). Lube filter and new gasket with clean
oil (HO). Install filter, gasket, tank inlet, and attaching hardware. Refill using hydraulic fluid (HO) as required and
open oil tank valve.
FUEL FILTER
3. Remove and replace fuel filter semiannually. To remove, turn fuel petcock to closed position. Unscrew fuel filter housing
ring and remove glass bowl and fuel filter. To replace filter, put filter on filter block, fill glass bowl half with diesel fuel
(DF) as required, and install on filter block. Secure glass bowl to block by installing filter housing ring. Turn fuel
petcock to open position to vent.
THROTTLE CABLE
4. Clean throttle cable and re-lubricate semiannually. Remove wire end from APU manual control and clean any dirt or oil
buildup from cable using rags. Spray end of cable and into cable housing with silicone lubricant and direct spray into
cable housing and allow fluid to run down into housing. Operate throttle control several times to ensure cable operates
freely. Reconnect wire end of throttle control back to APU manual control.
0163-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
Figure 2. Lubrication - Interval No. 2.
0163-7
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
EXPECTED
LUBRICANTS
TEMPERATURES
GREASE, +40°F 0°F to
GAA
AUTO- ABOVE to -10° -50°F
(MIL-G- RECOMMEMDED KEY Capacity Intervals
MOTIVE AND +32°F F
10924)
ARTILLERY
GAA ALL TEMPERATURES D - Daily
Kingpin and Kingpin and Pickup Plate
(MIL-G- C As req
Pickup Plate (See Step 5 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Slider Arm Slider Arm Pivot Pin (See
(MIL-G- F As req Monthly
Pivot Pin Step 6 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Cylinder Cylinder Bearing - 2 placed
Bearing each side (See step 6 below)
10924)
GAA
Step Assembly
(MIL-G- As req
Hinge
10924)
GAA Cable Guide Rollers - 4 ALL TEMPERATURES Q -
Cable Guide
(MIL-G- places each side (See step 8 F As req Quarterly
Roller
10924) below)
GAA M -
Pivot Pin Pivot Pin Sheave (see step 6
(MIL-G- C As req Monthly
Sheave below)
10924)
GAA M -
Gooseneck Gooseneck Pivot Pin - 2
Pivot Pin places (See step 6 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Kingpin Kingpin Bushing - 2 places
Bushing (See step 6 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Slider Arm Slider Arm Bushing - 2 places
Bushing (See step 6 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Steering Plate - 2 places (See
(MIL-G- Steering Plate F As req Monthly
step 6 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Davit Cup and Davit Mounting Cup and
Winch Winch (See step 7 below)
10924)
GAA M -
Cylinder Cylinder Bearing - 2 places
Bearing each side (See step 6 below)
10924)
0163-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
KINGPIN AND PICKUP PLATE

5. Daily, before coupling semitrailer, check for grease on kingpin and pickup plate. Scrape off any existing grease that
may have built up. Clean surfaces using rags. Hand-apply generous portions of grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to
contact surfaces as required.
GOOSENECK GREASE FITTINGS AND PIVOT PIN SHEAVE

6. Lubricate gooseneck grease fittings and pivot pin sheave fitting monthly. Clean surrounding areas and all fittings. DO
NOT OVERFILL. Add grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to fittings as required. Wipe off excess grease with rag.
DAVIT MOUNTING CUP, WINCH, AND STEP HINGE

7. Lubricate davit mounting cup, winch, and step hinges monthly. Scrape off any existing grease that may have built up.
Clean surfaces using rags. Hand-apply generous portions of grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to the davit, mounting cup,
winch gears, and step hinges. Wipe off excess grease with rag.
CABLE GUIDES
8. Lubricate cable guide grease fittings quarterly. Clean surrounding areas and all fittings. DO NOT OVERFILL. Add grease
(GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to fittings as required. Wipe off excess grease with rag.
0163-9
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
EXPECTED
TEMPERATURES
CA- +40°F 0°F to INTER-
ABOVE
LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED KEY PAC- to -10°F -50°F VALS
+32° F
ITY
GREASE, M - Monthly
GAA (MIL-G- AUTO-
10924) MOTIVE ALL TEMPERATURES
ARTILLERY
Snatch Block Snatch Block (See step 9 below) F As req M - Monthly
Cylinder
(See Table Chart #2) As req
Bearing
SFL M - Monthly
SOLID FILM
SW26723 Spring Guide Rod - each side
LUBRICANT
(MIL-L-23398) (See step 10 below) (Spring F As req
Spring Guide ALL TEMPERATURES
(NSN 9150- assisted ramps)
Rod
01-260-2534
Ramp Pivot Pin - each side (See M - Monthly
Ramp Pivot
step 11 below) (Spring assisted F As req
Pin
ramps)
SNATCH BLOCK
9. Lubricate snatch block monthly. Scrape off any existing grease and dirt that may have built up. Clean surfaces using
rags. Clean surrounding areas and fittings. DO NOT OVERFILL. Lubricate sheave pin at grease fitting on bottom side
of snatch block. Hand-apply generous portions of grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to all moving parts on the snatch
block and contact areas. Wipe off excess grease with rag.
SPRING GUIDE ROD

10. Lubricate ramp spring guide rods monthly. If necessary, remove guide rod and spring assembly from ramp to scrape off
any existing grease and dirt that has built up. Clean surfaces using rags. Spray generous portions of solid film lubricant
(SFL) (WP 0170, Item 14) on spring rod and rod contact surfaces. Wipe off excess lubricant with rag.
RAMP PIVOT PIN

11. Lubricate ramp pivot pins monthly. Scrape off any existing grease and dirt that may have built up and clean surfaces and
surrounding areas using rags. Spray generous portions of solid film lubricant (SFL) (WP 0170, Item 14) to ramp pivot
pin surfaces. Wipe off excess lubricant with rag.
0163-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
0163-11
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
EXPECTED TEMPER-
ATURES
RECOM- ABOVE +40°F 0°F to
LUBRICANTS CAPACITY INTERVALS
MENDED KEY +32°F to -10°F -50°F
GREASE,
AUTO-
GAA
MOTIVE
(MIL-G-10924)
AND AR-
TILLERY
Storage Storage S - Semi-
GAA Com- Compartment annually
F As req
(MIL-G-10924) partment Hinge (See
Hinge step 12 below)
Fixed
GAA Steering ALL TEMPERATURES
As req
(MIL-G-10924) Arm Rod
End
Wheel Bearing A - Annually
GAA Wheel
(See Item As req
(MIL-G-10924) Bearing
Detail A)
Cylinder M - Monthly
Bearing - 2
GAA Cylinder
places each F As req
(MIL-G-10924) Bearing
side (See step
13)
Rear Rear Support M - Monthly
GAA
Support Leg (See Item As req
(MIL-G-10924)
Leg Detail B
Suspension M - Monthly
Suspen-
GAA Assembly (24)
sion As- F As req
(MIL-G-10924) (See Item
sembly
Detail C)
Longitudinal M - Monthly
Strut Rod End
ALL TEMPERATURES
- 7 places each
Longitudi-
GAA side (Long
nal Strut F As req
(MIL-G-10924) bearing pins
Rod End
have fittings in
each end) (See
step 13 below)
Steering Plate M - Monthly
GAA Steering
- 4 places (See F As req
(MIL-G-10924) Plate
step 13 below)
Steering Steering Plate
GAA
Plate Bearing (See F As req
(MIL-G-10924)
Bearing Item Detail D)
HY- A - Annually
DRAULIC
OIL, PE-
HO TRO- Hydraulic Filter
F As req
(MIL-H-46170) LEUM (See step 14)
BASED
Hydraulic
Filter
0163-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
STORAGE COMPARTMENT HINGE

12. Lubricate storage compartment hinge semiannually. Scrape off any existing grease that may have built up. Clean
surfaces using rags. Hand-apply generous portions of grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to storage compartment hinge
surface area. Wipe off excess grease with rag.
PLATFORM GREASE FITTINGS

13. Lubricate platform grease fittings monthly. Clean surrounding areas and all fittings. Add grease (GAA) (WP 0170,
Item 12) to fittings as required. Wipe off excess grease with rag. DO NOT OVERFILL.
HYDRAULIC FILTER
14. Remove and replace hydraulic filter annually. To drain, close ball valve at hydraulic tank. Unscrew and remove filter
housing, gasket, and filter. Clean filter housing using clean fluid (HO). To fill, replace filter and gasket to filter block.
Thread filter housing to filter block.
0163-13
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
EXPECTED TEMPER-
ATURES
ABOVE +40°F 0°F to INTERVALS
LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED KEY CAPACITY
+32°F to -10°F -50°F
GREASE,
GAA (MIL- AUTO-MO-
G-10924) TIVE AR-
ALL TEMPERATURES
TILLERY
GAA (MIL- Inner Wheel Inner Wheel Bearing (See A - Annually
F As req
G-10924) Bearing step 15)
GAA (MIL- Outer wheel Outer Wheel Bearing A - Annually
F As req
G-10924) Bearing (See step 15)
GAA (MIL- Actuator Actuator Nut (See step M - Monthly
F As req
G-10924) Nut 16)
ALL TEMPERATURES
Rear M - Monthly
GAA (MIL- Support Rear Support Leg
F As req
G-10924) Leg Actuator (See step 16)
Actuator
INNER AND OUTER WHEEL BEARINGS

15. Remove, clean, and hand or pressure-pack inner and outer wheel bearings annually. Clean any existing grease from
bearings and hub and drum assembly. Clean surfaces using rags. Hand-pack or pressure-pack inner and outer wheel
bearings with grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12). Wipe off excess grease with rag.
ACTUATOR NUT AND REAR SUPPORT LEG ACTUATOR

16. Lubricate actuator nut and rear support leg actuator monthly. Clean surrounding areas and all fittings. Add grease to
fittings as required. Wipe off excess grease with rag. DO NOT OVERFILL.
0163-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
0163-15
0163 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 7. Lubrication Chart No. 6.
EXPECTED
TEMPERATURES
+40°F 0°F to
CAPAC- ABOVE
LUBRICANTS RECOMMENDED KEY to -10° -50°F INTERVALS
ITY +32°F
F
GREASE,
GAA AUTO-
(MIL-G- MOTIVE
10924) AND AR-
TILLERY
GAA Upper Upper Suspension M - Monthly
(MIL-G- Suspension Bearings (See step 17) F As req
10924) Bearing (See Item Detail E)
GAA Upper M - Monthly
Upper Cylinder Bearing
(MIL-G- Cylinder F As req
(See note 17) ALL TEMPERATURES
10924) Bearing
NOTE
Actuate Brakes prior to
lubricating this point.
GAA M - Monthly
S-Cam S-Cam Retainer (See step
(MIL-G- F As req
Retainer 17)
10924)
GAA M - Monthly
Suspension Suspension Pivot Pin (See
(MIL-G- F As req
Pivot Pin step 17)
10924)
GAA Lower M - Monthly
Lower Cylinder Bearing
(MIL-G- Cylinder F As req
(See step 17)
10924) Bearing
GAA M - Monthly
S-Cam S-Cam Bushing - 2 places
(MIL-G- F As req
Bushing (See step 17)
10924)
GAA M - Monthly
Slack Slack Adjuster - 2 places
(MIL-G- F As req
Adjuster (41) (See step 17)
10924)
Upper Y - 5 Years
GAA ALL TEMPERATURES
Steering Upper Steering Plate
(MIL-G- F As req
Plate Bearing (See step 18)
10924)
Bearing
Lower Y - 5 Years
GAA
Steering Lower Steering Plate
(MIL-G- F As req
Plate Bearing (See step 18)
10924)
Bearing
GAA Lower Y - 5 Years
Lower Suspension Bearing
(MIL-G- Suspension F As req
(See step 19)
10924) Bearing
0163-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0163
WARNING
Excess grease must be wiped clean when lubricating S-Cam bushings. Failure to do so may
cause brake malfunctions and injury to personnel.
UPPER SUSPENSION BEARINGS AND UPPER AND LOWER CYLINDER BEARINGS, S-CAM RETAINER,
S-CAM BUSHING, SLACK ADJUSTER, AND SUSPENSION PIVOT PINS
17. Lubricate upper suspension bearings and upper and lower cylinder bearings, S-Cam retainers, S-Cam bushings (plug
nearest axle on each brake dust shield must be removed to access S-Cam bushing fitting), slack adjuster, and suspension
pivot pins monthly. Clean surrounding areas and all fittings. Apply grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12) to upper
suspension assembly and upper and lower cylinder bearings, brake, camshafts, and suspension pivot pin fittings as required.
Wipe off excess grease with rag. DO NOT OVERFILL. The suspension pivot pin has two fittings which service the same
piece. If fully serviced through one fitting, the other fitting will appear to not take grease. Deck must be in lowest
position to lubricate brake camshaft and S-Cam retainer.
UPPER AND LOWER STEERING PLATE BEARINGS

18. Remove, clean, and hand-pack or pressure-pack upper and lower steering plate bearings every 5 years. Clean any existing
grease from bearings and steering plates. Hand-pack or pressure-pack bearings with grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12).
Wipe off excess grease with rag.
LOWER SUSPENSION BEARING

19. Every 5 years remove, clean, and hand-pack or pressure-ppack lower suspension bearing. Clean any existing grease from
bearing and upper suspension arm. Hand-pack or pressure-pack bearings with grease (GAA) (WP 0170, Item 12).
Wipe off excess grease with rag.
END OF TASK
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0163-17/18 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIELD MAINTENANCE
ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS
INTRODUCTION
Scope
This work package includes complete instructions for making items authorized to be manufactured or fabricated at the
field level of maintenance.
How to Use the Index of Manufactured Items

A part number index in alphanumeric order is provided for cross-referencing the part number of the item to be
manufactured to the information that covers fabrication criteria.
Explanation of the Illustrations of Manufactured Items

All instructions needed by maintenance personnel to manufacture the item are included on the illustrations. (When
applicable, a reference to the associated parts information TM or parts information work package shall be entered
here). All bulk materials needed for manufacture of an item are listed by part number or specification number in a
tabular list on the illustration.
DRAWING/
PART NO. NOMENCLATURE FIGURE NO.
- Base Plate F-1

- Base Tube F-2
SW34329 Battery Terminal Cover F-3
T4249 Bearing Seating Tool F-4
SW34348-3 Bushing Puller F-5
SW32540 Crowbar F-6
SW32910 Double Loop Clamp F-7
SW34434 Flushing Hose Kit F-8
SW34353-2 Fuel Gauge Tube F-9
- Gooseneck Support Stand F-10
- Gusset F-11
- Gusset F-12
- Handle F-13
SW34435 Hydraulic Control Module Removal/Installation F-14
Chain Set
SW34436 Removal Tool (Suspension Cylinder Pin) F-15
- Retainer Pin F-16
- Support Tube F-17
SW34348-7 Threaded Rod F-18
SW34348 Urethane Bushing Removal/Installation Tool F-19
SW34348-5 Washer F-20
- Wire Assembly F-21
- Hexagon Stock, 1/2 in. F-22
0164-1
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-1. BASE PLATE
NOTE
1. All Dimensions Are in Inches.

2. Dimensions Without Tolerances Are Not Considered Critical.
3. Remove All Burrs and Sharp Edges.
4. Fabricate From: Steel Plate, C-1045 (0.250) in. Thick.
BULK MATERIAL
Steel Plate (0.250) in. thick, 30X30 C-10450164164
164-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-2. BASE TUBE
NOTE
1. All Dimensions Are in Inches Except as Noted.

4. Fabricate From: Steel Tube, Square Astm-A513, 6 in. X 6 in. X 3/8 in. (0.375) Wall.
BULK MATERIAL
Steel Tube 6 in. X 6 in. X 3/8 in. (0.375) Square ASTM-A513
0164-3
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-3. BATTERY TERMINAL COVER (SW34329)
NOTE
1. Alter Cover as Shown.

2. Make From: Waytek Part Number 23513 Battery Cable Boot (Color: Red) (Cage 58961)
NSN (Gf -Tbs).
SW34329 Battery Terminal Cover
BULK MATERIAL
Waytek, Battery Cable Boot (Red) - NSN (GFI-TBS) 23513 58961
0164-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-4. BEARING SEATING TOOL (T4249)
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: Tube Steel, Round ASTM-A513 5-3/4 (5.750) in. DIA. X 1/4 (0.250) in Wall.
Tab NSN: Steel, Plate, C1045 1/4 (0.250) in. Thick.
5. All Machined Surfaces Should Have a Minimum of 0.125 Finish.
6. Make All Welds Per AWS-1.1.
T4249 Bearing Seating Tool
BULK MATERIAL
Tube Steel, Round 5 3/4 (5.750) in ASTM-A513
0164-5
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-5. BUSHING PULLER (SW34348-3)
NOTE

4. All Machined Surfaces Should Have a Minimum of 125 Finish.
5. Fabricate From: Steel Bar ASTM A 108, DIA 2.875 NSN (GFI-TBS).
SW34348-3 Bushing Puller
BULK MATERIAL
Steel Bar, DIA 2.875 in. NSN (GFI-TBS) ASTM A108
0164-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-6 CROWBAR (SW32540)
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: NSN 5120-00-224-1390.
5. Scribe the Entire Circumference at Three Locations Shown (1), Using Pneumatic Grinder
With a 1/8 in. (0.318 cm) Cutting Wheel. These Marks Are Used for Measuring Various
Platform Heights During Normal Operations.
SW32540 Crowbar
BULK MATERIAL
NSN 5120-00-224-1390
Cutting Wheel 1/8 in. (0.318 cm)
0164-7
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-7. DOUBLE LOOP CLAMP (SW32910)
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: Clamp, Double Loop, MS21334-32.
SW32910 Double Loop Clamp
BULK MATERIAL
Clamp, Double Loop MS21334-32
0164-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-8. FLUSHING HOSE KIT (SW34434)
BULK MATERIAL
Union Adapter (Figure F-8, Item 1) 10-12-070101 (2 ea)
Tube-to-Hose Adapter (Figure F-8, Item 2)10-10-250143, NSN 4730-01-357-8705 (2 ea)
Hose (Figure F-8, Item 3) FC510-10, NSN 4720-01-359-1012 (51 in.)
Tube Elbow-to-Hose (Figure F-8, Item 4) 10-10-251443, NSN 4730-01-332-8486 (2 ea)
Union Tee (Figure F-8, Item 5) 10-10-070401, NSN 4730-00-784-2633 (1 ea)
Reducer Adapter (Figure F-8, Item 6) 10-6-(TBS) NSN 4730-00-999-9830 (1 ea)
Fitting Nut (Figure F-8, Item 7)10-(TBS) NSN 4730-00-976-0981 (1 ea)
Tube-to-Hose Adapter (Figure F-8, Item 8) 6-6-250143, NSN (TBS) (1 ea)
Hose (Figure F-8, Item 9) FC510-6, NSN 4720-01-369-4890 (75 ft)
Filter (Figure F-8, Item 10) FK-010-HG-B, NSN (TBS) (6)
0164-9
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-9. FUEL GAUGE TUBE (SW34353-2)
NOTE

3. Fabricate From: Thermoplastic, Translucent Yellow (CAGE 1 DSO7) AAG00012.
SW34353-2 Fuel Gauge Tube
BULK MATERIAL
Thermoplastic, Translucent Yellow AAG00012 1 DS07 (3.25 in.)
0164-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-10. GOOSENECK SUPPORT STAND
NOTE
4. Make All Welds Per AWS-1.1.
5. Obtain All Parts and Assemble as Shown.
BULK MATERIAL
Gusset, Figure F-11 (0.125 in.) (Figure F-10, Item 1) C-1045 (3)
Gusset, Figure F-12 (0 .125 in.) ( F igure F-1 0, Item 2 )C-1045 (1)
Handle, Figure F-13 (Figure F-10, Item 3) NSN 9510-00-061-6607 (2)
Safety Pin (Figure F-10, Item 4) NSN 5315-00-421-4921 (2)
Retainer Pin, Figure F-16 (Figure F-10, Item 5) NSN 9510-00-061-6607 (1)
Base Plate, Figure F-1 (0.125 in.) (Figure F-10, Item 6) C-1045 (1)
Base Tube, Figure F-2 (6 in. X 6 in. X 3/8 in. (0 .375) (Figure F-10, Item 7) Square ASTM-A513 (1)
Support Tube, Figure F-17 (5 in. X 5 in. x 3/8 (0.375) in. (Figure F-10, Item 8) Square, ASTM-A513 (1)
0164-11
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-11. GUSSET
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: Steel Plate, C-1045, 1/4 (0.250) in. Thick.
BULK MATERIAL
Steel Plate, 1/4 (0.250) in. C-1045 (1)
0164-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-12. GUSSET
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: Steel Plate, C-1045, 1/4 (0.250) in. Thick. Drill Thru Ø Diameter 1.562.
BULK MATERIAL
Steel Plate, 1/4 (0.250) in. C-1045 (1)
0164-13
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-13. HANDLE
NOTE

BULK MATERIAL
NSN 9510-00-061-6607 (4 in.)
0164-14
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-14. HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION CHAIN SET (SW34435)
NOTE

3. Cut Chain (1) into Two Pieces as Illustrated (2).
4. Discard Excess Chain.
SW34435 Hydraulic Control Module Removal/Installation Chain Set
BULK MATERIAL
Chain 4010-01-361-7267 (132 in.)
0164-15
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-15. REMOVAL TOOL (SUSPENSION CYLINDER PIN) (SW34436)
NOTE

SW34436 Removal Tool (Suspension Cylinder Pin)
BULK MATERIAL
Figure F-15, Item 1 2 in. as Rolled NSN 5910-00-229-4835
0164-16
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-16 RETAINER PIN
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: NSN 9510-00-061-6607. Drill through 0.140 Ø Drill Bit 2 places.
BULK MATERIAL
NSN 9510-00-061-6607 (8 in.)
0164-17
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-17. SUPPORT TUBE
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: Steel Tube, Square, ASTM-A513, 5 in. X 5 in. X 3/8 (0.375) in. Wall.
BULK MATERIAL
Steel Tube, Square 5 in. X 5 in. X 3/8 (0.375) in. ASTM-A513 (36.75 in.)
0164-18
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-18. THREAD ROD (SW34348-7)
NOTE

SW34348-7 Thread Rod
BULK MATERIAL
0.75-16 UNF 2 (Figure F-18, Item 1) NSN 5306-00-286-9258 (9 in.)
0164-19
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-19. URETHANE BUSHING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION TOOL (SW34348)
NOTE
1. Obtain All Parts and Assemble as Illustrated.
SW34348 Urethane Bushing Removal/Installation Tool
BULK MATERIAL
Thread Rod (Figure F-19, Item 1) SW34348-7 (1)
Nut Plain (Figure F-19, Item 2) MS51968-23 (2)
Washer (Figure F-19, Item 3) MS27183-23 (2)
Washer (Figure F-19, Item 4) SW34348-5 (1)
Bushing (Figure F-19, Item 5) NSN 3120-01-334-4770 (1)
Bushing Puller ( Figure F-19, Item 6) SW34348-3 (1)
0164-20
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-20. WASHER (SW34348-5)
NOTE

SW34348-5 Washer
BULK MATERIAL
NSN 9510-00-229-4840 (4 in.)
0164-21
0164 TM 9-2330-381-13
FIGURE F-21. WIRE ASSEMBLIES
BULK MATERIAL
R1-2 — Open End Soldered M16878/2BLE94
R2-2 — M25036–154 M16878/2BLE91
R3-2 — Open End Soldered M16878/2BLE95
TB2-A6 — MS25036-112 M16878/2BLE90
TB2-A10 — MS25036-112 M16878/2BLE91
Diode – 42643-2 R-59083
Start Switch GL — MS25036-112 R-60934
Oil PR Send Unit – 324225 R-59138
Current Limiter – 324225 R-59083
0164-22
TM 9-2330-381-13 0164
FIGURE F-22. HEXAGON STOCK, 1/2 IN.
NOTE

4. Fabricate From: 9510-00-204-1035 Or 9510-00-294-9665.
BULK MATERIAL
1/2 in. Hex Bar Stock NSN 9510-00-204-1035 or 9510-00-294-9665 (24 in.)
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0164-23/24 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0165
FIELD MAINTENANCE
TORQUE LIMITS
SCOPE
This work package provides general torque limits for the screws, hoses, and ttings used on the semitrailer. Special torque
limits are listed in the maintenance procedures for applicable components. The general torque limits given in this work
package shall be used when speci c torque limits are not indicated in the maintenance procedure. These general torque limits
cannot be applied to screws that retain rubber components. The rubber components will be damaged before the torque limit is
reached. If a special torque limit is not given in the maintenance instructions, tighten the screw or nut until it touches the
metal bracket, and then tighten it one more turn.
TORQUE TABLES
HOW TO USE THE TORQUE TABLE
Screws and Nuts

1. Measure the diameter of the screw you are installing.
Figure 1. Measuring Screw Diameter and Length.

2. Count the number of threads per inch or use a pitch grade (Figure 1).
3. Under the heading size, look down the left-hand column until you nd the diameter of the screw you are installing.
(There will usually be two lines beginning with the same size for SAE, Metric is one).
4. In the second column for SAE under SIZE in Table 2 below, nd the number of threads per inch that matches the number
of threads you counted in Step 2. (This step is not required for Metric screws/bolts).
NOTE
Manufacturers mark may vary. Standard are all SAE Grade 5 (3-Line). Metric screws are of three grades
8.8, 10.9, and 12.9. Grades and manufactures marks appear on the top of the screw head.
0165-1
0165 TM 9-2330-381-13
5. To find the grade screw you are installing, match the markings on the head to the correct picture of Capscrew Head
Markings in (Figure 2, and Figure 3) before each torque table.
DRY TORQUE LIMITS FOR METRIC FASTENERS
Figure 2. Dry Torque Limits For Metric Fasteners.
Table 1. Dry Torque Limits For Metric Fasteners.

METRIC GRADE METRIC GRADE METRIC GRADE
SIZE
8.8 10.9 12.9
DIA. DIA
LB-FT NM LB-FT NM LB-FT NM
IN. MM
0.157 4 2 3 3 4 4 5
0.197 5 4 5 6 8 7 9
0.237 6 7 9 10 14 11 15
0.315 8 18 24 25 34 29 39
0.394 10 32 43 47 64 58 79
0.473 12 58 79 83 113 100 136
0.630 16 144 195 196 266 235 319
0.709 18 190 258 269 365 323 438
0.788 20 260 353 366 496 440 597
0.867 22 368 499 520 705 678 919
0.946 24 470 637 664 900 794 1077
1.064 27 707 959 996 1351 1235 1675
1.182 30 967 1311 1357 1840 1630 2210
DRY TORQUE LIMITS FOR SAE FASTENERS
Figure 3. Dry Torque Limits For SAE Fasteners.
0165-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0165
Table 2. Dry Torque Limits For SAE Fasteners.

SAE GRADE SAE GRADE SAE GRADE SAE GRADE
SIZE
NO. 2 NO. 5 NO. 6 OR 7 NO. 8
DIA. THREAD DIA
LB-FT NM LB-FT NM LB-FT NM LB-FT NM
IN. PER INCH MM
1/4 20 6.35 5 7 8 11 10 14 12 16
1/4 28 6.35 6 9 10 14 12 16 14 19
5/16 18 7.94 11 15 17 23 21 28 25 34
5/16 24 7.94 12 16 19 26 24 33 25 34
3/8 16 9.53 20 27 30 41 40 54 45 61
3/8 24 9.53 23 31 35 47 45 61 50 68
7/16 14 11.11 30 41 50 68 60 81 70 95
7/16 20 35 47 55 75 70 95 90 108
1/2 13 12.70 50 68 75 102 95 129 110 149
1/2 20 55 75 90 122 100 135 120 163
9/16 12 14.29 65 85 110 149 135 182 150 203
9/16 18 75 102 120 163 150 203 170 231
5/8 11 15.88 90 122 150 203 190 258 220 298
5/8 18 100 136 180 244 210 285 240 325
3/4 10 19.05 160 217 260 353 240 434 380 515
3/4 16 180 244 300 407 360 488 420 597
7/8 9 22.23 140 190 400 542 520 705 600 814
7/8 14 155 210 440 597 580 786 660 895
1 8 25.40 220 298 580 786 800 1085 900 1220
1 12 240 325 640 868 860 1166 1000 1350
1 - 1/8 7 25.58 300 407 800 1085 1120 1519 1280 1736
1 - 1/8 12 340 461 880 1193 1260 1709 1440 1953
1 - 1/4 7 31.75 420 570 1120 1519 1580 2142 1820 2468
1 - 1/4 12 460 624 1240 1681 1760 2387 2000 2712
1 - 3/8 6 34.93 560 759 1460 1980 2080 2820 2380 3227
1 - 3/8 12 640 868 1680 2278 2360 3227 2720 3688
1 - 1/2 6 38.10 740 1003 1940 2631 2780 3770 3160 4285
1 - 1/2 12 840 1139 2200 2983 3100 4204 3560 4827
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0165-3/4 blank
CHAPTER 6
SUPPORTING INFORMATION
FOR

TM 9-2330-381-13 0166
FIELD MAINTENANCE
REFERENCES
Scope
This work package lists forms, field manuals, technical manuals, and other publications that are referenced in this manual
and that apply to the operation and maintenance of the M1000 semitrailer.
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS
DA PAM 25-30 Consolidated Index of Army Publications and Blank Forms
DA PAM 710-2-1 Unit Supply - Manual Procedures (Unit Supply UPDATE)
DA PAM 738-750 The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS)
FORMS
DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms
DA Form 2028-2 Recommended Changes to Equipment Technical Publications
DA Form 2401 Organizational Control Record for Equipment
DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet
DA Form 2407 Maintenance Request
DD Form 314 Preventive Maintenance Schedule and Record
SF 369 Product Quality Deficiency Report (NSN 7540-00-105-0078)
DD Form 6 Packaging Improvement Report
FIELD MANUALS
FM 3-3 NBC Contamination Avoidance
FM 3-4 NBC Protection
FM 3-5 NBC Decontamination
FM 20-3 Camouflage
FM 9-207 Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather
(0° Deg to Minus 65° Deg F)
FM 21-11 First Aid for Soldiers
FM 21-305 Manual for the Wheeled Vehicle Driver
FM 31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual
FM 31-71 Northern Operations
FM 55-30 Army Motor Transport Units and Operations
FM 90-3 Desert Operations (How to Fight)
FM 90-6 Mountain Operations (How to Fight)
TECHNICAL BULLETINS
TB 9-2300-247-40 Tactical Wheeled Vehicles: Repair of Frames
TB 43-0001-39 Series Equipment Improvement Report and Maintenance Digest (US Army
Tank-Automotive Command) Tank-Automotive Equipment
TB 43-0142 Safety Inspection and Testing of Lifting Devices
TB 43-0209 Color, Marking, and Camou age Painting of Military Vehicles, Construction
Equipment, and Materials Handling Equipment
TB 43-0211 Army Oil Analysis Program
TB 43-0239 Maintenance in the Desert
TB 43-0242 CARC Spot Painting
TB ORD 1032 Description, Use, Bonding Techniques, and Properties of Adhesives
TECHNICAL MANUALS
TM 9-214 Inspection, Care, and Maintenance of Antifriction Bearings
TM 9-237 Operator’s Manual for Welding Theory and Application
TM 9-247 Materials Used for Cleaning, Preserving, Abrading, and Cementing
Ordnance Materiel and Related Materiels, Including Chemicals
0166-1
0166 TM 9-2330-381-13
TM 9-2330-381-24P Organizational, Direct Support, and General Support Repair Parts and
Special Tools List for Semitrailer, Heavy Equipment, 70 Ton, M1000
TM 9-2320-360-10 Operator’s Manual for Truck, Tractor, M1070, 8 X 8, Heavy Equipment
Transporter (HET)
TM 9-2320-270-10 Operator’s Manual for Truck, Tractor, Commercial Heavy Equipment
Transporter (C-HET), 85,000 GVWR, 8 X 6, M911
TM 9-2610-200-14 Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance
Manual for Care, Maintenance, Repair, and Inspection of Pneumatic Tires
and Inner Tubes
TM 9-4910-743-14&P Operator, Organizational, Direct Support and General Support
Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts List for Balancer, Vehicle
Wheel, Model M-76
TM 9-6140-200-14 Operator’s, Unit, Direct Support, and General Support Maintenance
Manual for Lead-Acid Storage Batteries
TM 43-0139 Painting Instructions for Army Materiel
TM 750-244-6 Procedures for Destruction of Tank-Automotive Equipment to Prevent
Enemy Use
SPECIFICATION AND STANDARDS
Fed Spec P-D-680 Dry Cleaning Solvent
TT-M-261 Methyl Ethyl Ketone
MIL-I-6866 Inspection, Liquid Penetrant Methods
MIL-I-6868 Inspection Process, Magnetic Particles
MIL-STD-1472 Human Engineering Design Criteria for Military Systems, Equipment, and
Facilities
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
CTA 8-100 Army Medical Department Expendable/Durable Items
CTA 50-970 Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V, Repair Parts, and
Heraldic Items)
CTA 50 909 Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0166-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0167
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) INTRODUCTION
THE ARMY MAINTENANCE SYSTEM (MAC)

This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the two maintenance
levels under the Two-Level Maintenance System concept.
The Maintenance Allocation Chart (MAC) (immediately following the introduction) designates overall authority and
responsibility for the performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component. The application of the
maintenance functions to the end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and capabilities of the designated
maintenance levels, which are shown on the MAC in column (4) as:
• Field – includes two subcolumns, Crew (C) and Maintainer (F).
• Sustainment – includes two subcolumns, Below Depot (H) and Depot (D).
The maintenance to be performed at field and sustainment levels is described as follows:
1. Crew maintenance. The responsibility of a using organization to perform maintenance on its assigned equipment.
It normally consists of inspecting, servicing, lubricating, adjusting, and replacing parts, minor assemblies, and
subassemblies. The replace function for this level of maintenance is indicated by the letter "C" in the third position of
the Source, Maintenance, and Recoverability (SMR) code. A "C" appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code
indicates complete repair is possible at the crew maintenance level.
2. Maintainer maintenance. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, subassembly, plug-in unit,
or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace function for this level of maintenance is
indicated by the letter "F" appearing in the third position of the SMR code. An "F" appearing in the fourth position
of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the field maintenance level. Items are returned to the user
after maintenance is performed at this level.
3. Below depot sustainment. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, subassembly, plug-in
unit, or other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace function for this level of maintenance is
indicated by the letter "H" appearing in the third position of the SMR code. An "H" appearing in the fourth position
of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the below depot sustainment maintenance level. Items are
returned to the supply system after maintenance is performed at this level.
4. Depot sustainment. Maintenance accomplished on a component, accessory, assembly, subassembly, plug-in unit, or
other portion either on the system or after it is removed. The replace function for this level of maintenance is indicated
by the letter "D" or "K" appearing in the third position of the SMR code. Depot sustainment maintenance can be
performed by either depot personnel or contractor personnel. A "D" or "K" appearing in the fourth position of the
SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the depot sustainment maintenance level. Items are returned to the
supply system after maintenance is performed at this level.
The tools and test equipment requirements table (immediately following the MAC) lists the tools and test equipment (both
special tools and common tool sets) required for each maintenance function as referenced from the MAC.
The remarks table (immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements) contains supplemental instructions and
explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function.
MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows:
1. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical, mechanical, and/or electrical
characteristics with established standards through examination (e.g., by sight, sound, or feel). This includes scheduled
inspection and gauging and the evaluation of cannon tubes.
2. Test. To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical, pneumatic, hydraulic, or electrical characteristics of an
item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a scheduled basis, i.e., load testing of lift devices
and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses.
0167-1
0167 TM 9-2330-381-13
3. Service. Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition, e.g., to clean (includes
decontaminate, when required), to preserve, to drain, to paint, or to replenish fuel, lubricants, chemical fluids, or gases.
This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms. The following are examples of service functions:
a. Unpack. To remove an item from packing box for service or when required for the performance of maintenance
operations.
b. Repack. To return an item to packing box after service and other maintenance operations.
c. Clean. To rid the item of contamination.
d. Touch up. To spot paint scratched or blistered surfaces.
e. Mark. To restore obliterated identification.
4. Adjust. To maintain or regulate, within prescribed limits, by bringing an item into proper position, or by setting
the operating characteristics to specified parameters.
5. Align. To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.
6. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test, measuring, and
diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement. This function consists of comparisons of two instruments,
one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy, to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of
the instrument being compared.
7. Remove/Install. To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions.
Install may be the act of emplacing, seating, or fixing into position a spare, repair part, or module (component or
assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of equipment or a system.
8. Paint (ammunition only). To prepare and spray color coats of paint so that the ammunition can be identified and
protected. The color indicating primary use is applied, preferably, to the entire exterior surface as the background color
of the item. Other markings are to be repainted as original so as to retain proper ammunition identification.
9. Replace. To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place. "Replace" is authorized by
the MAC, and the assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position of the SMR code.
10. Repair. The application of maintenance services, including fault location/troubleshooting, removal/installation,
disassembly/assembly procedures, and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by
correcting specific damage, fault, malfunction, or failure in a part, subassembly, module (component or assembly),
end item, or system.
NOTE
The following definitions are applicable to the "repair" maintenance function:
• Services. Inspect, test, service, adjust, align, calibrate, and/or replace.
• Fault location/troubleshooting. The process of investigating and detecting the cause of equipment malfunctioning;
the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test (UUT).
• Disassembly/assembly. The step-by-step breakdown (taking apart) of a spare/functional group-coded item to the
level of its least component, which is assigned an SMR code for the level of maintenance under consideration
(i.e., identified as maintenance significant).
• Actions. Welding, grinding, riveting, straightening, facing, machining, and/or resurfacing.
11. Overhaul. That maintenance effort (service/action) prescribed to restore an item to a completely serviceable/operational
condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications. Overhaul is normally the highest
degree of maintenance performed by the Army. Overhaul does not normally return an item to a like-new condition.
12. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like-new
condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards. Rebuild is the highest degree of material maintenance
applied to Army equipment. The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements (e.g.,
hours/miles) considered in classifying Army equipment/components.
0167-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0167
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE MAC.

1. Column (1) Group Number. Column (1) lists Functional Group Code (FGC) numbers, the purpose of which is
to identify maintenance-significant components, assemblies, subassemblies, and modules with the Next Higher
Assembly (NHA).
2. Column (2) Component/Assembly. Column (2) contains the item names of components, assemblies, subassemblies,
and modules for which maintenance is authorized.
3. Column (3) Maintenance Function. Column (3) lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column (2).
(For a detailed explanation of these functions, refer to “Maintenance Functions” outlined above.)
4. Column (4) Maintenance Level. Column (4) specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform each function
listed in column (3), by indicating the work time required (expressed as man-hours in whole hours or decimals) in the
appropriate subcolumn. This work time figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance function
at the indicated level of maintenance. If the number or complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function
varies at different maintenance levels, appropriate work time figures are to be shown for each level. The work time
figure represents the average time required to restore an item (assembly, subassembly, component, module, end item,
or system) to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation time
(including any necessary disassembly/assembly time), troubleshooting/fault location time, and quality assurance time
in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the
MAC. The symbol designations for the various maintenance levels are as follows:
Field:
C Crew maintenance
F Maintainer maintenance
Sustainment:
L Specialized Repair Activity (SRA)
H Below depot maintenance
D Depot maintenance
NOTE
The “L” maintenance level is not included in column (4) of the MAC. Functions to this level of maintenance are
identified by work time figure in the “H” column of column (4), and an associated reference code is used in the
Remarks column (6). This code is keyed to the remarks, and the SRA complete repair application is explained there.
5. Column (5) Tools and Equipment Reference Code. Column (5) specifies, by code, those common tool sets (not
individual tools), common Test, Measurement, and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE), and special tools, special TMDE,
and special support equipment required to perform the designated function. Codes are keyed to the entries in the
tools and test equipment table.
6. Column (6) Remarks Code. When applicable, this column contains a letter code, in alphabetical order, that is keyed to
the remarks table entries.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1. Column (1) Tool or Test Equipment Reference code. The tool or test equipment reference code correlates with a code
used in column (5) of the MAC.
2. Column (2) Maintenance Level. The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test equipment.
3. Column (3) Nomenclature. Name or identification of the tool or test equipment.
4. Column (4) National Stock Number (NSN). The NSN of the tool or test equipment.
5. Column (5) Tool Number. The manufacturer’s part number.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN REMARKS
1. Column (1) Remarks Code. The code recorded in column (6) of the MAC.
0167-3
0167 TM 9-2330-381-13
2. Column (2) Remarks. This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being performed as
indicated in the MAC.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0167-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
FIELD MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
Table 1. MAC for Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
TOOLS AND
MAIN- BELOW EQUIPMENT
GROUP MAINTENANCE CREW TAINER DEPOT DEPOT REFERENCE REMARKS
NUMBER COMPONENT/ASSEMBLY FUNCTION C F H D CODE CODE
00 PMCS
0000 Preoperative PMCS INSPECT 0.5
Inspection
0000 During Operation INSPECT 0.5
PMCS Inspection
0000 Post Operative INSPECT 0.5
PMCS Inspection
0000 Weekly PMCS Inspection INSPECT 0.5
0000 Quarterly PMCS Inspection INSPECT 1.0
0000 Semi-Annual INSPECT
PMCS Inspection
0000 Annual PMCS Inspection INSPECT 8.3
0001 APU Crankcase, Oil SERVICE 0.1 5 C
Level, Daily
0001 APU Oil Drain/Filter, SERVICE 0.6 5,24 C, D
Semi-Annual
0002 Hydraulic, Tank Fill, Daily SERVICE 0.1 5,23 C, D
0002 Hydraulic, Tank SERVICE 0.4 5,23 C, D
Filter, Annual
0003 Fuel Filter, Semi-Annual REPLACE 0.6 5,24 C, D
0004 APU Throttle Cable, SERVICE 0.6 5 C, D
Semi-Annual
0005 Kingpin and Pickup Plate SERVICE 0.1 5 C, D
0006 Gooseneck Grease SERVICE 0.2 5 C, D
Fittings and Pivot
Sheave, Monthly
0007 Davit Mounting Cup, Winch, SERVICE 0.2 5 C, D
and Step Hinge, Monthly
0008 Cable Guide, Quarterly SERVICE 0.1 5 C, D
0009 Snatch Block, Monthly SERVICE 0.3 5 C, D
0010 Spring Guide Rod, Monthly SERVICE 0.3 5,23 C, D
0011 Ramp Pivot Pin, Monthly SERVICE 0.4 5,24 C, D
0012 Stowage Compartment SERVICE 0.4 5,24 C, D
Hinge, Semi-Annual
0013 Platform Grease Fitting SERVICE 0.3 5 C, D
0014 Hydraulic Filter, Annual SERVICE 0.5 5,24 C, D
0015 Inner and Outer SERVICE 10.0 5 C, D
Wheel Bearings, Annual
0016 Actuator Nut and SERVICE 0.1 5 C, D
Rear Support Leg,
Actuator, Monthly
0017 Upper Suspension SERVICE 0.9 5,24 C, D
Bearing and Upper
and Lower Cylinder
Bearing, S-Cam Retainer,
S-Cam Bushing,
Slack Adjuster and
Suspension Pivot Pins
0018 Upper/Lower Steering Plate SERVICE 130. 5 C, D
Bearing, Five Year
0019 Lower Suspension SERVICE 50 5 C, D
Bearing, Five Year
0168-1
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
FIELD MAINTENANCE
Table 1. MAC for Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer. - Cont.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
TOOLS AND
06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
0608 Gooseneck Component REPLACE 0.4 5, 24 C
Assembly
REPAIR 0.6 5, 24 C
0608 Junction Boxes REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
0609 Composite Marker Light REPLACE 0.2 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.2 5, 24 C
0609 Vehicular Bar Lamp REPLACE 0.2 16 C
0609 Stop Light-Tail Light REPLACE 0.2 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.2 5, 24 C
0609 Clearance Lights/Blackout REPLACE 0.2 24
REPAIR 0.2 24
0609 Indicator Lights REPLACE 0.2 5, 24 C
0612 Battery Installation SERVICE 0.2 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.2 5, 24 C
0612 Solar Battery Charger REPLACE 0.5 24
0613 Wiring Harness Clamp and REPLACE 1.0 24
Grommet Installation
0613 Jumper Wires REPAIR 1.0 5, 24 C
0613 Wiring Harness W1 REPLACE 1.4 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.5 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.2 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
0613 APU Wiring Harness REPLACE 1.5 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
11 REAR AXLE
1100 Axle Suspension SERVICE 2.0 1,5,16,22,23,24 C
Installation
1100 Connecting Link Ridged REPLACE 4.0 1,5,12,16,22,24 C
1100 Axle Assembly REPLACE 3.0 3,5,15,24,26 C
1100 Ultra Bushing SERVICE 0.4 4,5,18,24,26 C
REPLACE 4.0 4,5,18,24,26 C
1100 Lower Suspension Arm SERVICE 2.0 5,10,24 C
REPLACE 1.2 5,10,24 C
REPAIR 1.4 3,5,17,26 C
1100 Upper Suspension Arm REPLACE 3.0 1,5,22,24 C
REPAIR 3.8 5,7,22,24 C
12 BRAKES
1202 Service Brake Installation ADJUST 0.5 24 C
REPLACE 1.4 5, 24 C
1202 S-Cam REPLACE 1.0 5, 24 C
1202 S-Cam Retainer REPLACE 1.5 5, 24 C
1206 Slack Adjuster INSPECT 0.1 5, 24 C
1208 Gooseneck Pneumatic REPLACE 0.9 24
Installation REPAIR 1.5
0168-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
FIELD MAINTENANCE

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
TOOLS AND
1208 Platform Pneumatic REPLACE 7.0 5, 24 C
Installation REPAIR 2.5 5, 24 C
1208 Gooseneck Cylinder REPLACE 7.0 5, 24 C
Air Reservoir
1208 Drain Valve REPLACE 7.0 5, 24 C
1208 Air Pressure Relay Valve REPLACE 0.9 5, 24 C
1208 Check Valve REPLACE 0.9 5, 24 C
13 WHEELS AND TRACKS
1311 Wheel Assembly REPLACE 1.0 5 B, C
REPAIR 1.7 5, 6 C
1311 Hub and Drum SERVICE 1.0 5, 24 C
REPLACE 2.0 5, 24 C
REPAIR 2.0 5, 24 C
1311 Drum Turning REPAIR 0.5 5 C
1311 Spare Wheel Assembly SERVICE 0.1 5, 6, 24 B, C
REPLACE 0.5 6, 24 C
1313 Tire Assembly REPLACE 1.0 5, 24 C
REPAIR 1.7 5, 24 C
14 STEERING
1401 Platform Steering ALIGN 2.0 5, 24 C
Installation
1401 Connecting Link Ridged REPLACE 0.7 5, 24 C
Sleeve Bearing REPAIR 2.0 5, 24 C
1401 Longitudinal Strut REPLACE 0.7 5, 24 C
REPAIR 1.5 5, 24 C
1401 Platform Steering Cylinder INSPECT 0.1 5, 24 C
Installation SERVICE 1.2 5, 24 C
ADJUST 0.5 5, 24 C
ALIGN 0.5 5, 24 C
REPLACE 2.0 5, 24 C
1401 Steering Plate SERVICE 0.6 5, 24 C
REPLACE 3.0 5,6,10,22,24 C
REPAIR 1.5 5,6,10,22,24 C
1405 Gooseneck Steering SERVICE 1.2
Cylinder Installation REPLACE 2.0 6, 10, 14, 24 C
1405 Steering Console and REPLACE 1.5 5, 24 C
Slide Shaft Assembly REPAIR 1.7 5,7,10,13,24 C
1405 Kingpin and Steering Arm SERVICE 0.1 2, 22, 24 C
REPLACE 1.5 9, 11, 23, 24 C
REPAIR 1.7 1, 5, 24 C
1412 Steering Cylinder Assembly REPAIR 1.0 3, 5, 24 C
15 FRAME, TOWING
ATTACHMENTS
AND DRAWBARS
1501 Semitrailer Assembly SERVICE 0.8 5 C
SERVICE 1.3 5 C
1501 Loading Ramp Installations SERVICE 0.5 5, 10, 22, 24 C
ADJUST 0.5 5, 10, 22, 24 C
REPLACE 1.5 5, 10, 22, 24 C
REPAIR 1.5 5, 10, 22, 24 C
1501 APU Frame REPLACE 2.0 24 C
0168-3
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
FIELD MAINTENANCE

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
TOOLS AND
1501 Hydraulic Control REPLACE 3.0 5, 10, 22, 24 A, C
Module Frame
1501 Gooseneck Steps REPLACE 0.6 24
1501 Gooseneck Guardrails REPLACE 0.3 24
1501 Grab Handles REPLACE 0.3 24
1501 Platform Steps and REPLACE 0.6 24
Service Covers
1503 Gooseneck Pivot SERVICE 0.1 5 C
SERVICE 0.3 5 C
1503 Gooseneck REPLACE 2.0 5,7,11,20,21 C
Hydraulic Cylinder, 24,25
Attaching Hardware
1503 Pivot Pin Gooseneck REPLACE 2.0 3,5,10,19,22,24 C
REPAIR 0.5 3,5,10,19,22,24 C
1507 Front Support Legs REPAIR 2.5 5, 24 C
1507 Pivot Pin Sheave Gooseneck REPLACE 2.0 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.5 5, 24 C
1507 Spare Wheel Carrier REPLACE 0.9 5, 24 C
1507 Rear Support Legs REPAIR 2.0 5, 24 C
18 BODY, CAB, HOOD,
AND HULL
1801 Splash Guards REPLACE 0.3 24
1801 Control Module REPLACE 0.5 24
Frame Covers
1801 Front Clearance
Light Bracket (Some Trailers) REPLACE 0.5 24
1802 Deflectors REPLACE 0.5 24
1808 Stowage Compartment REPLACE 1.0 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
20 HOIST, WINCH, CAPSTAN,
WINDLASS, POWER
CONTROL UNIT, AND
POWER TAKE OFF
2001 Davit Assembly SERVICE 0.1 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.1 5, 24 C
REPAIR 1.0 5, 24 C
2007 Snatch Block Assembly SERVICE 0.1 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.2 5, 24 C
REPAIR 1.7 5 C
2007 Cable Guide Assembly REPLACE 0.3 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.5 5, 24 C
22 BODY, CHASSIS, AND HULL
ACCESSORY ITEMS
2202 Reflectors REPLACE 0.1 24 C
2210 Data Plates and Stencils REPLACE 4.0 5, 24 C
24 HYDRAULIC LIFT
COMPONENTS
2401 Hydraulic Pump REPLACE 0.3 5 C
2402 4-Way Directional REPLACE 0.4 5, 23, 24 C
Control Valve Bank REPAIR 1.5 5, 23, 24 C
2402 Steering Control REPLACE 0.8 5, 24 C
Manifold REPAIR 1.2 5, 24 C
0168-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
FIELD MAINTENANCE

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
TOOLS AND
2402 Suspension Control REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
Manifold REPAIR 1.0 5, 24 C
2402 Line Fracture Valve REPLACE 0.5 24
2403 Valve Handles REPLACE 0.3 24
2403 Suspension Isolation REPLACE 0.6 24
Valve Assembly
2403 Suspension Shutoff REPLACE 1.5 5, 24 C
Valve Assembly
2403 Gooseneck Isolation REPLACE 1.5 5, 24 C
Valve Assembly REPAIR 1.0 5, 24 C
2406 Gooseneck Hydraulics SERVICE 0.3 5, 24 C
REPLACE 1.5 5, 24 C
2406 APU Hydraulics SERVICE 0.6 5, 24 C
REPLACE 1.0 5, 24 C
2406 Step Hydraulics REPLACE 0.4 5, 24 C
2406 Hydraulic Filter REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
2406 Hydraulic Pressure Gauges REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
Hydraulics
2406 Hydraulic Tank Filter SERVICE 0.5 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
2406 Platform Suspension SERVICE 3.0 5, 24 C
Hydraulics REPLACE 4.0 5, 24 C
2406 Platform Steering Hydraulics SERVICE 1.0 5, 24
REPLACE 4.0 5, 24
2407 Suspension REPLACE 2.5 5,13,16,23,24 C
Hydraulic Cylinder REPAIR 2.0 3,5,6,14,24 C
2407 Gooseneck REPLACE 2.0 1,5,23,24 C
Hydraulic Cylinder REPAIR 2.0 3, 5, 24 C
2408 Hydraulic Tank Assembly REPLACE 1.0 5, 8 C
REPAIR 0.5 5, 8 C
Air Reservoir
29 AUXILIARY GENERATOR
AND ENGINE CONTROL
2901 APU Engine SERVICE 0.5 24
REPLACE 1.0 24
2911 Engine Block and REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
Cylinder Head
2911 Glow Plug REPLACE 0.1 24
2911 Drain Cock REPLACE 0.2 24
2913 Flywheel REPLACE 2.0 5, 24 C
2915 Transmission Cover REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
2916 Oil Filter and Dipstick Switch REPLACE 0.2 5, 24 C
2916 Oil Pressure Switch REPLACE 0.3 5, 24 C
2922 Nozzle Holder Assembly REPLACE 0.4 5, 24 C
2932 Injection Pump ADJUST 0.3 2, 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.5 2, 5, 24 C
2933 Air Cleaner Assembly SERVICE 0.2 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.4 5, 24 C
0168-5
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
FIELD MAINTENANCE

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
MAINTENANCE LEVEL
FIELD SUSTAINMENT
TOOLS AND
2935 Fuel Tank Assembly SERVICE 0.1 5, 24 C
SERVICE 0.1 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
2937 Fuel Filter Assembly REPLACE 0.3 5, 24 C
REPAIR 0.3 5, 24 C
2938 Engine Priming System REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
2939 Mechanical Throttle REPLACE 0.2 24
Control
2939 APU Control Box REPLACE 0.5 24
2941 Engine Exhaust REPLACE 0.4 5, 24 C
2951 Engine Radiator SERVICE 0.2 5, 24 C
REPLACE 0.5 5, 24 C
2955 Fan Belt REPLACE 0.6 24
2955 Fan Vane Axial REPLACE 0.4 24
2963 Starter REPLACE 0.3 24
2963 Jump Start System REPLACE 1.2 5, 24 C
3100 On-Vehicle Equipment REPLACE 0.1 3
Table 2. Tools And Test Equipment Requirements For Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer.
TOOLS OR TEST MAINTENANCE NATIONAL STOCK

EQUIPMENT LEVEL NOMENCLATURE NUMBER TOOL NUMBER
1 F Handle, Ext, SPNSN ISOL Valve 5340-01-386-2114 -
2 F Shop Equip, Gen Purpose Repair 4940-00-287-4894 -
3 F Socket, Suspension Brg Nut 5120-01-358-3054 -
4 F Wrench, Spanner 5120-01-358-3085 -
5 F Mandrel, Suspension 2530-01-355-3091 -
6 F Suspension Stop Ring Tool 5120-01-358-3120 -
7 F Chain Assy, 5/16" LK, 46 in L 4010-01-386-1008 SW34206
8 F Chain Assy, 5/16" LK, 11 FT L 4010-01-361-7267 -
9 F Hone, Cylinder 2" - 7" Port 5130-00-991-0699 -
10 F Tool Kit, Field Maint, Basic 4910-00-754-0705 -
11 F Tool Kit, General Mechanics 5180-00-177-7033 -
12 F Tool Kit, Com #1 4910-00-754-0654 -
13 F Tool Kit, Com #2 4910-00-754-0650 -
14 F ArcWelder 3431-01-032-6289 -
15 F Fire Extinguisher 4210-00-202-7856 -
16 F Welder Helmet 4240-00-540-0623 -
17 F Apron, Leather 9415-00-234-9254 -
18 F Crank, Hand APU 5340-01-321-0542 -
19 F Kit, Ultra Bushing Rem/Instl 2530-01-381-9847 -
20 F Kit, Axle Rem/Instl 2530-01-381-9902 SW33968
21 F Kit, SPNSN Cyl Removal 5120-01-383-6487 -
22 F Spanner, Adjustable Hook 5120-00-277-9076 -
23 F Spanner, Face Pin 5120-00-264-3777 -
24 F Ram, Hyd, 50 Ton Portable 4320-00-810-6776 4122
25 F Lifting Strap --- EE2801
26 F Truck,Wrecker M984 2320--01-097-0248 -
27 F Ram, Hyd, 30 Ton Portable 4320--00-542-3189 -
28 F Standard Army Tool Set --- -
29 F Davit 2950--01-326-5324 SW28806
30 F Chain Assy, 1/2 11L 4010--01-371-5572 -
31 F Metallic Tube, 36”L 4710--01-360-4273 SW26621
0168-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0168
Table 3. Section IV, Remarks for Heavy Equipment Transporter (HET) Semitrailer.
REMARK CODE REMARKS

A TOOL MUST BE MANUFACTURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH WP 0145 PRIOR TO STARTING.
B AIRBORNE AND GAUGE ARE AVAILABLE IN THE M1070 TRACTOR WP 0150.
USE SATS IF AVAILABLE OR USE COM TOOL KIT NUM 1 (NSN 4910-00-754-00654, PN W32593)
C AND/OR COM TOOL KIT NUM 2 (NSN 4910-00-754-00650, PN W32730).
D REFER TO LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS (WP 0163).
0168-7/8 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
COMPONENTS OF END ITEM (COEI) AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS (BII) LISTS
INTRODUCTION
Scope
This work package lists COEI and BII for the Heavy Equipment Trailer (HET) to help you inventory items for safe and
ef cient operation of the equipment.
GENERAL
The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists:
Components of End Item (COEI). This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition
replacements. These items are part of the HET. As part of the end item, these items must be with the end item
issued or transferred between property accounts. Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for
transportation or shipment only when necessary. Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items.
Basic Issue Items (BII). These essential items are required to place the HET in operation, operate it, and to do
emergency repairs. Although shipped separately packaged, BII must be with the HET during operation and when it is
transferred between property accounts. Listing these items is your authority to request/requisition them for
replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE/MTOE. Illustrations are furnished to help you find
and identify the items.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS
Column (1) - Item No. This column indicates the item number.
Column (2) - National Stock Number and Illustration. Indicates the national stock number assigned to the end item and
will be used for requisitioning purposes and contains an illustration of the Item.
Column (3) Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). Identi es the federal item name (in all capital letters) followed by a
minimum description when needed. The last line below the description is the Contractor and Government Entity Code
(CAGEC) (in parentheses) followed by the part number.
Column (4) Usable On Code. When applicable, gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different
models of equipment. Usable on code is not used for the M1000 semitrailer.
Column (5) U/l (Unit of Issue). Indicates how the item is issued for the NSN in column 2. Indicates the measure used
in performing the actual operational/maintenance function. This measure is expressed by a two-character
alphabetical abbreviation (e.g., ea, in, pr).
Column (6) Qty Rqd. Indicates the quantity required. Indicates the quantity of the item authorized to be used with/on
the equipment.
0169-1
0169 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 1. BII Item List.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Item No. National Stock Number (NSN) Description, Part Usable Qty
and Illustration Number/(CAGEC) On Code U/I Rqr
1 NSN 3990-01-440-5975 Binder, Load 1/2-in. LK, (payload HET EA 4
tiedown), 61208 SW33304
(0V272)
2 NSN 4010-01-361-8378 Chain Assembly, 1/2-in. LK, FT L HET EA 2

(Payload Tiedown), 1900-03410
SW33303-1 (ONXJ2)
3 NSN 4010-01-371-5772 Chain Assembly, 1/2-in. LK, 11 FL HET EA 2

(Payload Tiedown), 1900-03430
SW33303-2 (ONXJ2)
4 HET EA
1. NSN 4010-01-385-5974 1. Chain Assembly, 1/2-in. LK,
2
2. NSN 3990-00-401-1503 19 FT L (Payload Tiedown),
3. NSN * 1900-03450 SW33303-3
4. NSN * (ONXJ2)
4
2. Binder, Load, 3/4-in. LK,
(Payload Tiedown), 4178A
(84081)
4
3. Chain Assembly, 3/4-in. LK,
11 FT L (Payload Tiedown),
SW31952-1
2
4. Chain Assembly, 3/4-in. LK,
11 FT L (Payload Tiedown),
SW31952-2
0169-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
Table 1. BII Item List. – Continued.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
5 NSN 5120-00-144-5207 Adapter, Socket Wrench, 1/2-in. HET EA 1
DR to 3/4-in. DR, B107.10M
(80204)
6 NSN 4710-01-360-4273 Tube, Metallic, 36-in. L,SW26621 HET EA 1

(98255)
7 NSN 5120-00-293-0665 Bar, Wrecking, 30-in. L55-130 HET EA 1

(57068)
8 NSN 3990-01-360-9669 Binder, Load, 5/16-in. LK (Chock HET EA 2

EA 2 Tiedown), 01201, (OV272)
0169-3
0169 TM 9-2330-381-13
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
9 NSN 4010-01-361-7267 Chain Assembly, 5/16-in. LK, 11 ft HET EA 4
L (Chock Tiedown), SW30512-2
(98255)
10 NSN 4010-01-386-1008 Chain Assembly, Tire Changing, HET EA 1

EA 1 5/16-in. LK, 46-in. L
SW34206 (98255)
11 NSN 4010-01-361-8379 Chain Assembly, Axle Isolation, HET EA 1

Transporting, SW34205 (98255)
0169-4
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
12 NSN 5120-00-227-8079 Extension, 3/4-in. DR,8-in.L, L122 HET EA 1
(C7127)
13 NSN 5120-00-293-0887 Hammer, Hand, 12 lb, FAC HET EA 1

1038 (34871)
14 NSN 5120-00-104-1736 Handle, Socket Wrench, 1/2-in. DR, HET EA 1

SN4A (55719)
15 NSN 5120-00-249-1076 Handle, Socket Wrench, 3/4-in. DR, HET EA 1

1940708 (80064)
0169-5
0169 TM 9-2330-381-13
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
16 NSN 4020-00-477-3734 Rope, Fibrous 1/2-in., 75 ft L, HET EA 1
CPR102915 (19207)
17 NSN 5120-00-222-8852 Screwdriver, Flat Tip, 225498 HET EA 1

(77948)
18 NSN 4030-00-533-3900 Shackle (Payload Tiedown), HET EA 4

8387707-1 or M655 (19207) or
(90202)
19 NSN 4030-00-169-9297 Shackle, Towing, M666A HET EA 4

(90202)
0169-6
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
20 NSN 5120-00-189-7932 Socket; Socket Wrench 9/16-in., HET EA 1
1/2-in. DR, 11677025-1 (19207)
21 NSN 5120-00-239-0021 Socket; Socket Wrench 1-1/8-in., HET EA 1

3/4-in. DR, 1818 (60043)
22 NSN 5120-00-199-7765 Socket; Socket Wrench 1-5/8-in. HET EA 1

3/4-in. DR, 5552 (93389)
23 NSN 5120-00-199-7769 Socket; Socket Wrench 1-7/8-in. HET EA 1

3/4-in. DR, 050442 (65814)
24 NSN 5130-01-389-8450 Socket, 1-1/2-in. HEX x 13/16-in. HET EA 1

Square EA 1 Nut, 3/4-in. DR,
BWD 482 SW31873 (55719)
0169-7
0169 TM 9-2330-381-13
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
25 NSN 5120-00-449-8083 Wrench, Open End, Adjustable, HET EA 1
10-in., 5385A14 (15073)
26 NSN 5120-01-300-1363 Wrench, Combination, HET EA 1

15-Degree Offset, 13/16-in.
GOEX26 (55719)
27 NSN 2540-01-324-9404 Chock, Wheel-Track (Located HET EA 4

Streetside/Curbside of
Gooseneck) SW34369 (98255)
0169-8
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
28 NSN 2540-00-490-0769 Block, Chock (Curb-guide) HET EA 12
(Secured in Center Recess of
Platform), CPR101269 (19207)
29 HET EA
1. NSN 5340-01-332-7379 1. Angle Bracket (Curb-guide
2
2. NSN 5305-00-990-8382 Retainer), SW30912 (98255)
2. Screw, Cap, HEX
3
HD, (Bracket Mounting),
B1821BH100C275N (80204)
30 HET EA
1. NSN 5305-00-990-8382 1. Screw, Cap, HEX
3
HD ( Bracket Mounting),
2. NSN 5340-01-385-9887 B1821BH100C275N (80204)
1
2. Bracket, Angle (Curb-guide
Retainer), SW30912-1 (98255)
0169-9
0169 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 1 BII Item List – Continued
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
31 HET EA
1. NSN 5340-01-440-2222 1. Bracket, Locking, Curb
2
2. NSN 5340-01-472-5712 (Secured in Center Recess of
3. NSN 5340-01-440-2221 Platform), SW34446-2 (98255)
4. NSN 5305-00-990-8382 2. Bracket, Locking, Street
2
Platform), SW34446-3 (98255)
3. Bracket, Locking, Center
4
Platform), SW34446-1 (98255)
4. Screw, Cap, HEX
HD (Bracket Mounting),
8
B1821BH100C275N (80204)
32 HET EA
1. NSN 2540-01-324-9403 1. Chock, Wheel-Track
4
2. NSN 5340-01-346-8064 (Payload) (Stowed on Front
3. NSN 5310-01-448-1089 Corners of Platform) SW34394,
4. NSN 5310-00-080-6004 (98255)
5. NSN 5305-00-543-2419 2. Plate, Mounting (Chock
4
Mounting), SW30241, (98255)
3. Nut, Clip-on, C30664-3816-
3B (72800)
16
4. Washer, Flat (Chock
Mounting), MS27183-14
(96906)
10
5. Screw, Cap, HEX HD (Chock
Mounting), B1821BH038C113N
(80204)
10
0169-10
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
33 NSN 5120-00-224-1390 Crowbar, 60-in. L (Stowed on HET EA 1
Rear Platform under Ramps),
9150189, Alter per WP 0145
(18876)
34 NSN 5340-01-386-2114 Handle, Extension, Suspension HET EA 1

Isol Valve (Stowed on Rear
of Platform under Ramps),
SW32948 (98255)
35 NSN 5315-01-301-3888 Pin, Straight, Headed (Crowbar HET EA 1

Stowage), 13228E2053 (97403)
0169-11
0169 TM 9-2330-381-13 0151
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
36 NSN 5365-01-154-8557 Ring, Retaining (Crowbar HET EA 1
Stowage), 29-10 (96652)
37 NSN 6220-01-442-2652 Light Assembly, Strobe, 12V, HET EA 1

200SGT (82485)
0169-12
TM 9-2330-381-13 0169
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
38 NSN 2590-01-107-9696 Kit, Warning Light, 12296622 HET EA 1
(19207)
1. Washer, Lock (2), P/N

MS35338-48
2. Pipe, P/N 12296639-1 (saw
2 1/2 in. off one end)
3. Clamp, P/N 12296644
4. Bolt (3), P/N 12296638
5. Pole Mount Bracket, P/N
12296643
6. Bolt (2), P/N MS90726-115
7. L-Bracket, P/N 12296641
8. Bolt (2), P/N MS90726-38
9. Plate, Triangle, P/N
12296642
10. Cable Assembly, ground,
P/N 12296578-1
11. Lead (2), P/N 8762797
12. Adapter (2), P/N MS27147-1
13. Cable Assembly, P/N
12296577
Remaining parts in kit are not

used.
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0169-13/14 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13 0170
FIELD MAINTENANCE
EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
SCOPE
This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the Heavy Equipment
Transporter (HET) semitrailer. This list is for information only; it does not provide authority to requisition the listed items.
These items are authorized to you by CTA 50-970, Expendable/Durable Items (Except Medical, Class V Repair Parts, and
Heraldic Items), CTA 50-909, Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment, or CTA 8-100, Army Medical Department
Expendable/Durable Items.
EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS
Column (1) - Item No. This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative instructions to
identify the Item (e.g., Use brake fluid [WP 0098, Item 5]).
Column (2) - Level. This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed Item:
C = Crew
F = Maintainer, AMC, or ASB
H = Below Depot or TASMG
D = Depot
Column (3) - National Stock Number (NSN). This is the NSN assigned to the Item. Use the NSN to requisition the item.
Column (4) - Item Name, Description, Part Number/(CAGEC). This column provides the other information you need to
identify the Item. The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code
(CAGEC) (in parentheses).
Column (5) - U/I. Unit of Issue (U/I) code. Shows the physical measurement or count of an Item, such as gallon, dozen,
gross, etc.
0170-1
0170 TM 9-2330-381-13
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List.

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ITEM LEVEL NATIONAL ITEM NAME, DESCRIPTION, CAGEC, U/I
NUMBER STOCK AND PART NUMBER
NUMBER
1 F 6810-00-286-5435 Alcohol Technical, gl
(81348) TT-I-735 GRADE A
2 F 6850-00-181-7933 Antifreeze Glycol, Inhibited gl
(81349) MIL-A-46153
3 F 7920-00-061-0037 Brush Scrub ea
(80244) A-A-2074
4 F 5340-00-450-5718 Cap and Plug Set kt
(19207) 10935405
5 F 2940-01-415-5891 Cleaner, Surface qt
(02731) TT-C-490
6 F 5350-00-221-0872 Crocus Cloth, Abrasive pg
(80204) ANSI B74.18
7 F 8030-00-165-8577 Coating Compound, Metal Pretreatment gl
(81349) DOD-P-15328
8 F 8010-01-055-2319 Coating, Polyurethane kt
(81349) MIL-C-46168
9 F 8010-01-229-7540 Coating, Polyurethane qt
(81349) MIL-C-53039
10 F 8030-00-221-1835 Corrosion Preventive Compound, Cold Application gl
(81349) MIL-C-83933
11 F 7930-00-249-8036 Detergent, General Purpose bx
(81348) P-D-220
12 F 8010-00-264-8866 Epoxy Primer Coating Kit kt
(81349) MIL-P-53030
13 C 9140-00-286-5283 Fuel, Oil Diesel, DFA, Arctic Grade gl
(81348) VV-F-800, GRADED FAAR
14 C 9140-00-286-5286 Fuel, Oil Diesel, DF1, Winter Grade gl
(81346) VV-F-800, ASTMD975
15 C 9140-00-286-5294 Fuel, Oil Diesel, DF2, Regular Grade gl
(81346) VV-F-800, ASTMD975
16 C 9150-00-190-0905 Grease Automotive and Artillery cn
(81349) M-10924–A
17 F 9150-00-111-6254 Hydraulic Fluid Rust Inhibited Fire Resistant Synthetic, Hydrocarbon gl
Base
(81349) MIL-H-46170
0170-2
TM 9-2330-381-13 0170
Table 1. Expendable and Durable Items List.- Continued.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

ITEM LEVEL NATIONAL ITEM NAME, DESCRIPTION, CAGEC, U/I
NUMBER STOCK AND PART NUMBER
NUMBER
18 F 9150-01-954-7422 Lubricant Solid Film, Air Cured, Corrosion Inhibiting, Type II cn
(81349) MIL-L-23398
19 F 2640-00-256-5526 Lubricant Tire and Rim, Quart Can qt
(96980) AA17
20 C 9150-00-186-6699 Oil, Lubricating SAE 10W-30 qt
(81349) MIL-L-46152
21 F 9150-00-250-0926 Petroleum Jelly lb
(82146) 14P1
22 F 5330-01-188-0919 Pipe Sealant tu
(61078) LH050
23 C 7920-00-205-3571 Rag Wiping, Cotton, and Cotton Synthetic bx
(81348) DDD-R-0030, Grade B
24 F 8040-00-833-9563 Sealant Adhesive, Silicone RTV, Type l tu
(81349) MIL-A-46106
25 F 8030-00-148-9833 Sealing Compound Thread Locking, Type II, Grade N qt
(05972) 27121
26 F 5970-01-142-2282 Sleeving, Electrical Insulation, Shrinkable in
(81343) M23053/4-303-0
(81343) M23053/5-104-0
(81343) M23053/5-105-0
29 F 6810-00-264-6618 Sodium Bicarbonate, Technical (Baking Soda) lb
(58536) AA374-2
30 F 3439-01-153-2077 Solder Tin-Lead Alloy, Type R, SN60 lb
(81346) QQ-S-571
31 F 6850-00-209-7947 Solvent, Cleaning Compound dr
(81348) O-C-1889
32 F 6850-01-474-2320 Solvent, Dry Cleaning 5 gl
(58536) AA59603-3F
33 F 5975-00-903-2284 Strap, Tiedown, Electrical bg
(96906) MS3367-4-0
34 F 7510-01-308-0549 Tape, Double-Sided rl
(52152) 4930
35 F 5970-00-644-2636 Tape, Insulation, Electrical, Pressure Sensitive Adhesive, 0.75-in. rl
wide, Black
(81348) HH-I-595-B-66-0
36 F 7510-00-266-6709 Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Adhesive, Masking, Type l rl
(76381) 232 1-1/2 in.
37 F 3610-01-085-2357 Tape, Teflon, 0.250-in. wide rl
(83616)
38 F 6810-00-297-9540 Water, Battery gl
(81348) O-B-41
39 F 6680-00-853-2714 Housing Assembly, Welding cn
(89305) 463635
END OF WORK PACKAGE
0170-3/4 blank
TM 9-2330-381-13
INDEX
Subject WP Sequence No.–Page No.
A
AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0072–1
AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0135–1
APU CONTROL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0140–1
APU CONTROL BOX JUMPER WIRES AND TIMER HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0056–1
APU WIRING HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0064–1
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0128–1
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0092–1
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0117–1
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP START SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0145–1
AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0029–1
AXLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0150–1
B
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0169–1
BATTERY INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0053–1
BRAKE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0033–1
C
CABLE GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0104–1
CARGO TIEDOWN RING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0162–1
CLEARANCE LIGHT/BLACKOUT LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0050–1
COMPOSITE MARKER LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0047–1
CONNECTING LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0082–1
CONNECTING LINK SLEEVE BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0154–1
CONTROL MODULE FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0098–1
COVER TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0131–1
D
DATA PLATES, DECALS, AND STENCILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0106–1
DAVIT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0102–1
DEFLECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0099–1
DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . WP 0004–1
DRAIN COCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0130–1
DRUM TURNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0149–1
E
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0031–1
ENGINE EXHAUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0141–1
ENGINE PRIMING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0138–1
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0002–1
EXPENDABLE/DURABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0170–1
F
FAN BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0143–1
FAN VANAXIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0144–1
FLYWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0160–1
FOUR-WAY DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0108–1
FRONT CLEARANCE LIGHT BRACKET (SOME SEMITRAILERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0100–1
FRONT SUPPORT LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0095–1
Index-1
TM 9-2330-381-13
INDEX - CONTINUED
FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0137–1

FUEL TANK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0136–1
G
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0001–1
GLOW PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0129–1
GOOSENECK COMPONENT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0045–1
GOOSENECK CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0122–1
GOOSENECK CYLINDER AIR RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0127–1
GOOSENECK CYLINDER HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0121–1
GOOSENECK GUARDRAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0088–1
GOOSENECK HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0116–1
GOOSENECK ISOLATION VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0115–1
GOOSENECK PIVOT PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0159–1
GOOSENECK PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0073–1
GOOSENECK STEERING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0086–1
GOOSENECK STEPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0087–1
GRAB HANDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0089–1
H
HUB AND DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0075–1
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0157–1
HYDRAULIC CONTROL MODULE JUMPER WIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0057–1
HYDRAULIC FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0120–1
HYDRAULIC FILTER ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0043–1
HYDRAULIC FILTER PRESSURE GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0119–1
HYDRAULIC PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0107–1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0041–1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CHECK AND FLUID FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0039–1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FLUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0042–1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0030–1
HYDRAULIC TANK ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0126–1
HYDRAULIC TANK DRAINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0040–1
HYDRAULIC TANK FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0123–1
I
ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0164–1
INDICATOR LIGHTS - OIL PRESSURE AND GLOW PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0052–1
INJECTION PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0161–1
INNER/INNER WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0081–1
INNER/OUTER WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0080–1
J
JUNCTION BOXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0046–1
JUNCTION BOX JUMPER WIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0058–1
K
KINGPIN AND STEERING ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0156–1
L
LINE FRACTURE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0111–1
LOADING RAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0091–1
Index-2
TM 9-2330-381-13
INDEX - CONTINUED
LONGITUDINAL STRUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0083–1

LOWER SUSPENSION ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0153–1
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM CYLINDER PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0152–1
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0163–1
M
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0168–1
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART (MAC) INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0167–1
MECHANICAL THROTTLE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0139–1
N
NOZZLE HOLDER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0134–1
O
OIL FILTER AND DIPSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0132–1
OIL SENDING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0133–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - ARCTIC WEATHER AUXILIARY POWER UNIT
(APU) JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0021–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) JUMP START WP 0020–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - BRAKE CAGING/UNCAGING . . . . . . . . WP 0023–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - DISABLED LOADING RAMP RECOVERY . . WP 0027–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - FORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0019–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - ISO CONTAINER LOCK BRACKETS . . . . . WP 0026–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATION ON GRADES . . . . . . . . . WP 0022–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATION WITH DISABLED BOGIE . . . . WP 0024–1
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS - PARKING LOADED SEMITRAILER . . . . . WP 0025–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ADJUSTING GOOSENECK . . . . . . . . . . WP 0007–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - ADJUSTING PLATFORM HEIGHT . . . . . . . WP 0008–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) COLD
WEATHER STARTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0006–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - AUXILIARY POWER UNIT (APU) STARTUP
AND SHUTDOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0005–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DUAL WINCH LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0017–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - DUAL WINCH UNLOADING . . . . . . . . . . WP 0018–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - HIGHWAY DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0014–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - LOADING ABLE PAYLOADS . . . . . . . . . . WP 0015–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING FRONT SUPPORT LEGS . . . . . WP 0011–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING LOADING RAMPS . . . . . . . . WP 0009–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING MANUAL STEERING . . . . . . . WP 0010–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - OPERATING REAR SUPPORT LEGS . . . . . . WP 0012–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - TRACTOR/SEMITRAILER COUPLING AND
UNCOUPLING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0013–1
OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS - UNLOADING ABLE PAYLOADS . . . . . . . . WP 0016–1
OUTER/INNER WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0079–1
OUTER/OUTER WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0078–1
P
PIVOT PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0093–1
PLATFORM PNEUMATIC INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0074–1
PLATFORM STEERING ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0038–1
PLATFORM STEERING CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0084–1
PLATFORM STEERING HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0125–1
PLATFORM STEPS AND SERVICE COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0090–1
Index-3
TM 9-2330-381-13
INDEX - CONTINUED
PLATFORM SUSPENSION HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0124–1

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0035–1
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS) INTRODUCTION . . . . . WP 0034–1
R
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0142–1
RADIATOR FLUID FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0044–1
REAR SUPPORT LEGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0096–1
REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0166–1
REFLECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0105–1
S
S-CAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0069–1
S-CAM RETAINER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0070–1
SERVICE BRAKE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0037–1
SERVICE BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0068–1
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0036–1
SLACK ADJUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0071–1
SNATCH BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0103–1
SNATCH BLOCK SHEAVE BUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0158–1
SOLAR BATTERY CHARGER INSTALLATION (SOME SEMITRAILERS) . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0054–1
SPARE TIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0077–1
SPARE WHEEL CARRIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0094–1
SPLASH GUARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0097–1
STARTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0146–1
STEERING CONSOLE AND SLIDE SHAFT ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0155–1
STEERING CONTROL MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0109–1
STEERING PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0085–1
STEERING PRESSURE INDICATOR LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0051–1
STEP HYDRAULICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0118–1
STOPLIGHT/TAILLIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0049–1
STOWAGE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0101–1
SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY/BOGIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0065–1
SUSPENSION CONTROL MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0110–1
SUSPENSION CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0066–1
SUSPENSION ISOLATION VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0113–1
SUSPENSION SHUTOFF VALVE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0114–1
T
THEORY OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0003–1
TIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0076–1
TORQUE LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0165–1
TROUBLE SHOOTING INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0028–1
U
ULTRA BUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0151–1
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0067–1
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0148–1
V
VALVE HANDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0112–1
VEHICULAR BAR LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0048–1
Index-4
TM 9-2330-381-13
W
W1 HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0059–1
W2 HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0060–1
W3 HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0061–1
W4 HARNESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0062–1
W5 HARNESS (SOME SEMITRAILERS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0063–1
WELDING/NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0147–1
WHEELS, TIRES, AND HUBS TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0032–1
WIRING HARNESS CLAMP AND GROMMET INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WP 0055–1
Index-5/6 blank
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS Use Part II (reverse) for Repair Parts and DATE
AND BLANK FORMS Special Tool Lists (RPSTL) and Supply
Date you filled out
Catalogs/Supply Manuals (SC/SM).
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4. this form.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS Your mailing address
1 Rock Island Arsenal, Rock Island, IL 61299-7630
PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER DATE Title
Heavy Equipment Transporter
TM 9-2330-381-13 30 Oct 09 (HET) Semitrailer
ITEM PAGE PARA- LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
NO. NO. GRAPH NO. * NO. NO. (Provide exact wording of recommended changes, if possible).
0004-1 Callouts on art are numbered incorrectly

Callouts 3, 4, and 5 should be 6, 7, and 8
*Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.

TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION Signature
Your Signature
Your Name
DA FORM 2028, FEB 74 REPLACES DA FORM 2028, 1 DEC 68, WHICH WILL BE USED. USAPPC V3.00
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE
U. S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command Your address Date you filled out this
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS form
PART II – REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS AND SUPPLY CATALOGS/SUPPLY MANUALS
TITLE Heavy Equipment Transporter
PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE
TOTAL NO.
PAGE COLM LINE NATIONAL STOCK REFERENCE FIGURE ITEM OF MAJOR
NO. NO. NO. NUMBER NO. NO. NO. ITEMS RECOMMENDED ACTION
SUPPORTED
SAMPLE
PART III – REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations, or suggestions for improvement of publications and blank
forms. Additional blank sheets may be used if more space is needed.)
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS EXTENSION SIGNATURE
Your Name Your Signature

USAPPC V3.00
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form)(Include ZIP Code)
U.S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
ATTN: AMSTA-LCL-MPP/TECH PUBS
PART I – ALL PUBLICATIONS (EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM) AND BLANK FORMS
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE Heavy Equipment Transporter
TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS SIGNATURE

EXTENSION
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE
U. S. Army TACOM Life Cycle Management Command
PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE Heavy Equipment Transporter
TOTAL NO.
SUPPORTED
USAPPC V3.00
For use of this form, see AR 25-30; the proponent agency is ODISC4.
TO: (Forward to proponent of publication or form) (Include ZIP Code) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)
PUBLICATION/FORM NUMBER DATE TITLE Heavy Equipment Transporter


TYPED NAME, GRADE OR TITLE TELEPHONE EXCHANGE/AUTOVON, PLUS SIGNATURE
EXTENSION
FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code) DATE
TO: (Forward direct to addressee listed in publication)
PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE Heavy Equipment Transporter
TOTAL NO.
SUPPORTED
USAPPC V3.00
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
GEORGE W. CASEY, JR.

General, United States Army
Official: Chief of Staff
JOYCE E. MORROW
Administrative Assistant to the
Secretary of the Army
0913406
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number (IDN) 390990, requirements for
TM 9-2330-381-13.
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-1. Semitrailer Electrical Schematic.

FP-1/(FP-2 blank)
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-2. Semitrailer
Electrical Schematic (LED).
FP-3/(FP-4 blank)
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-3. Semitrailer Pneumatic

Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2).
FP-5/(FP-6 blank)
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-4. Semitrailer Pneumatic

FP-7/(FP-8 blank)
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-5. Semitrailer Hydraulic

FP-9/(FP-10 blank)
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-6. Semitrailer Hydraulic

FP-11/(FP-12 blank)
TM 9-2330-381-13
FO-7. APU Electrical Schematic.

FP-13/(FP-14 blank)
1
PIN: 085502-000

TM 9-2330-381-13

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-2330-381-13

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-2330-381-13

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 9-2330-381-13

OPERATOR AND FIELD MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SEMITRAILER, TRANSPORTER, HEAVY EQUIPMENT

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A – Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

EXPLANATION OF SAFETY WARNING ICONS

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

GENERAL SAFETY WARNINGS DESCRIPTION

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

Exercise extreme caution during any operation on a slope. Failure to follow

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

A spotter is required for disabled payload loading/unloading operations. The winch

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

Whenever possible, load/unload the semitrailer on level ground. In adverse conditions,

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

Before performing lubrication procedures on the semitrailer, raise platform to highest

Drain air system prior to disconnecting pneumatic lines to prevent inadvertent

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

EXPLANATION OF HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ICONS

POISON – Skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or is a danger

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

SOLVENT CLEANING COMPOUND (DRY CLEANING SOLVENT)

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

WARNING SUMMARY - CONTINUED

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES/WORK PACKAGES

Date of issue for original manual is:

Page/ WP Change Page/WP Change

Front Cover .............................................................................0 Blank .......................................................................................0

WP0062 (4 pgs) .....................................................................0 WP0121 (6 pgs) .....................................................................0

HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

SEMITRAILER, TRANSPORTER, HEAVY EQUIPMENT

REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS

DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A - Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

CHAPTER 1. GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION

CHAPTER 2. OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS

DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

CHAPTER 4. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES (PMCS)

CHAPTER 5. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

CHAPTER 6. SUPPORTING INFORMATION

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

GENERAL INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF

SEMITRAILER, TRANSPORTER, HEAVY EQUIPMENT 70 TON, M1000

MAINTENANCE FORMS, RECORDS, AND REPORTS

REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS (EIR)

CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL (CPC)

DESTRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT ENEMY USE

PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT

PREPARATION FOR STORAGE OR SHIPMENT - CONT.